Pasi OF CONTENTS OF VOL, XVII.

Organization and Original Charter

Amended Charter

_ Constitution and By-Laws

List of Members .

Harper, Roland M. , A Phytogeographical Sketch of

the Altamaha Grit Region of the Coastal Plain of Georgia,

Osburn, Raymond C. The Origin of Vertebrate

Limbs

Gregory, William K. The Orders of Teleostomous

Fishes

Kemp, J. F., and Ross, J. G. A Peridotite Dike in

the Coal Measures of Southwestern Pennsylvania .

Ogilvie, I. H. A Contribution to the Geology of

Southern Maine :

Bumpus, HermonC. Record of Meetings, 1905

Special ee tO Bare Aaticle No. 1:

Corrections to Part I, Article No. 1.

Special Index to Part II, Article No. 3.

General Index to Volume

PAGE

I-v

v-Vill

Vili-xVl1

X1X-XXXV1

1-414

415-436

437-508

509-518

519-562

563-658

659-679

680

681-683

685-697

[Annats N. Y. Acap. Scr., Vou. XVII. Paczs i-XXXvi.]

THE ORGANIZATION OF THE NEW YORK ACADEMY

OF SCIENCES.

THE ORIGINAL CHARTER.

AN ACT TO INCORPORATE THE

LYCEUM OF NATURAL HISTORY IN THE CITY OF

NEW YORK.

Passed April 20, 1818.

WHEREAS, The members of the Lyceum of Natural History

have petitioned for an act of incorporation, and the Legislature,

impressed with the importance of the study of Natural History,

as connected with the wants, the comforts, and the happiness of

mankind, and conceiving it their duty to encourage all laudable

attempts to promote the progress of science in this State—there-

fore,

1. Be it enacted by the People of the State of New York repre-

sented in Senate and Assembly, That Samuel L. Mitchill, Casper

W. Eddy, Frederick C. Schaeffer, Nathaniel .Paulding, William

Cooper, Benjamin P. Kissam, John Torrey, William Cumber-

land, D’Jurco V. Knevels, James Clements, and James Pierce,

and such other persons as now are, and may from time to time

become members, shall be, and hereby are constituted a body ~

corporate and politic, by the name of Lyczum or NATURAL

HisTorRY IN THE City or New York, and that by that name

they shall have perpetual succession, and shall be persons

capable of suing and being sued, pleading and being impleaded,

answering and being answered unto, defending and being de-

fended, in all courts and places whatsoever; and may have a

common seal, with power to alter the same from time to time;

and shall be capable of purchasing, taking, holding, and enjoy-

ing to them and their successors, any real estate in fee simple

i NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

or_otherwise, and any goods, chattels, and personal estate, and

of selling, leasing, or otherwise disposing of said real or personal

estate, or any part thereof, at their will and pleasure: Provided

always, that the clear annual value or income of such real or

personal estate shall not exceed the sum of five thousand dol-

lars: Provided, however, that the funds of the said Corporation

shall be used and appropriated to the promotion of the objects

stated in the preamble to this act, and those only. —

2. And be it further enacted, That the said Society shall from

time to time, forever hereafter, have power to make, constitute,

ordain, and establish such by-laws and regulations as they shall

judge proper, for the election of their officers; for prescribing

their respective functions, and the mode of discharging the same;

for the admission of new members; for the government of the

officers and members thereof; for collecting annual contribu-

tions from the members towards the funds thereof; for regulat-

ing the times and places of meeting of the said Society; for

suspending or expelling such members as shall neglect or refuse

to comply with the by-laws or regulations, and for the manag-

ing or directing the affairs and concerns of the said Society:

Provided such by-laws and regulations be not repugnant to the

Constitution and laws of this State or of the United States.

3. And be tt further enacted, That the officers of the said So-

ciety shall consist of a President and two Vice-Presidents, a

Corresponding Secretary, a Recording Secretary, a Treasurer,

and five Curators, and such other officers as the Society may

judge necessary; who shall be annually chosen, and who shall

continue in office for one year, or until others be elected in their

stead; that if the annual election shall not be held at any of

the days for that purpose appointed, it shall be lawful to make

such election at any other day; and that five members of the

said Society, assembling at the place and time designated for

that purpose by any by-law or regulation of the Society, shall

constitute a legal meeting thereof.

4. And be it further enacted, That Samuel L. Mitchill shall

be the President; Casper W. Eddy the First Vice-President;

Frederick C. Schaeffer the Second Vice-President; Nathaniel

Paulding, Corresponding Secretary; William Cooper. Record-

CONSTITUTION AND BY-LAWS : iii

ing Secretary; Benjamin P. Kissam, Treasurer, and John

Torrey, William Cumberland, D’Jurco V. Knevels, James

Clements, and James Pierce, Curators; severally to be the first

officers of the said Corporation, who shall hold their respective

offices until the twenty-third day of February next, and until

others shall be chosen in their places.

5. And be it further enacted, That the present Constitution of

the said Association shall, after passing of this Act, continue to

be the Constitution thereof; and that no alteration shall be

made therein, unless by a vote to that effect of three-fourths of

the resident members, and upon the request in writing of one-

third of such resident members, and submitted at least one

month before any vote shall be taken thereupon.

State of New York, Secretary’s Office.

I ceRTIFY the preceding to be a true copy of an original Act

of the Legislature of this State, on file in this Office.

ARCH’D CAMPBELL,

Dep. Sec’y.

ALBANY, April 29, 1818.

ORDER OF COURT.

ORDER OF THE SUPREME COURT OF THE STATE OF NEW YORK

TO CHANGE THE NAME OF

ib yYCEUM OF NATURAL HISTORY IN THE, CITY

OF NEW YORK

“£O

THE NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES.

WHEREAS, in pursuance of the vote and proceedings of this

Corporation to change the corporate name thereof from ‘The |

_ Lyceum of Natural History in the City of New York” to “The

New York Academy of Sciences,’’ which vote and proceedings

appear of record, an application has been made in behalf of said

iv NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

Corporation to the Supreme Court of the State of New York to

legalize and authorize such change, according to the statute in

such case provided, by Chittenden & Hubbard, acting as the

attorneys of the Corporation, and the said Supreme Court, on

the 5th day of January, 1876, made the following order upon

such application in the premises, viz:

At a special term of the Supreme

Court of the State of New

York, held at the Chambers

thereof, in the County Court

House, in the City of New

York, the 5th day of January,

1876:

Present—Hon. Geo. C. Barrett, Justice.

In the matter of the applica-

tion of the Lyceum of Nat-

ural History in the City of

New York to authorize it to

assume the corporate name

of the New York Academy

of Sciences.

On reading and filing the petition of the Lyceum of Natural

History in the City of New York, duly verified by John S. New-

berry, the President and chief officer of said Corporation to

authorize it to assume the corporate name of The New York

Academy of Sciences, duly setting forth the grounds of said

application, and on reading and filing the affidavit of Geo. W.

Quackenbush, showing that notice of such application had been

duly published for six weeks in the State paper, to wit, The Al-

bany Evening Journal, and the affidavit of David S. Owen, show-

‘ing that notice of such application had also been duly published

in the proper newspaper of the County of New York, in which

county said Corporation had its business office, to wit, in The

Daily Register, by which it appears to my satisfaction that such

notice has been so published, and on reading and filing the

affidavits of Robert H. Browne and J. S. Newberry, thereunto

annexed, by which it appears to my satisfaction that the appli-

cation is made in pursuance of a resolution of the managers of

CONSTITUTION AND BY-LAWS : Vv

said Corporation to that end named, and there appearing to me

to be no reasonable objection to said Corporation so changing

its name as prayed in said petition: Now on motion of Gros-

venor S. Hubbard, of Counsel for Petitioner, it is

Ordered, That the Lyceum of Natural History in the City of

‘New York be and is hereby authorized to assume the corporate

name of The New York Academy of Sciences.

Indorsed: Filed January 5, 1876,

A copy.

Wm. Watsu, Clerk.

Resolution of THE AcADEMY, accepting the order of the Court,

passed February 21, 1876.

And whereas, The order hath been published as therein re-

quired, and all the proceedings necessary to carry out the same

have been had, Therefore:

Resolved, That the foregoing order be and the same is hereby

accepted and adopted by this Corporation, and that in con-

formity therewith the corporate name thereof, from and after the

adoption of the vote and resolution hereinabove referred to, be

and the same is hereby declared to be

THE NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES.

THE AMENDED CHARTER.

MARCH 19, 1902.

CHAPTER 181 OF THE LAWS OF 1902.

An Act to amend chapter one hundred and ninety-seven of

the laws of eighteen hundred and eighteen, entitled “An act to

incorporate the Lyceum of Natural History in the City of New

York,’ a Corporation now known as The New York Academy

of Sciences and to extend the powers of said Corporation.

(Became a law March 19, 1902, with the approval of the

Governor. Passed, three-fifths being present.) .

The People of the State of New York, represented in Senate

and -Assembly, do enact as follows:

vi NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

Section I. The Corporation incorporated by chapter one

hundred and ninety-seven of the laws of eighteen hundred and

eighteen, entitled ‘‘An act to incorporate the Lyceum of Natural

History in the City of New York,’ and formerly known by that

name, but now known as The New York Academy of Sciences

through change of name pursuant to order made by the supreme

court at the city and county of New York, on January fifth,

eighteen hundred and seventy-six, is hereby authorized and

empowered to raise money for, and to erect and maintain, a

building in the city of New York for its use, and in which also

at its option other scientific societies may be admitted and

have their headquarters upon such terms as said Corporation

may make with them, portions of which building may be also

rented out by said Corporation for any lawful uses for the pur-

pose of obtaining income for the maintenance of such building

and for the promotion of the objects_of the Corporation; to

establish, own, equip, and administer a public library, and a

museum having especial reference to scientific subjects; to pub-

lish communications, transactions, scientific works, and peri-

odicals; to give scientific instruction by lectures or otherwise;

to encourage the advancement of scientific research and dis-

covery, by gifts of money, prizes, or other assistance thereto.

The building, or rooms, of said Corporation in the city of New

York used exclusively for library or scientific purposes shall be

subject to the provisions and be entitled to the benefits of sub-

division seven of section four of chapter nine hundred and eight

of the laws of eighteen hundred and ninety-six, as amended.

Section II. The said Corporation shall from time to time

forever hereafter have power to make, constitute, ordain, and

establish such by-laws and regulations as it shall judge proper

for the election of its officers; for prescribing their respective

functions, and the mode of discharging the same; for the ad-

mission of new members; for the government of officers and

members thereof; for collecting dues and contributions towards

thé funds thereof; for regulating the times and places of meet-

ing of said Corporation; for suspending or expelling such mem-

bers as shall neglect or refuse to comply with the by-laws or

regulations, and for managing or directing the affairs or con-

CONSTITUTION AND BY-LAWS Dad

cerns of the said Corporation: and may from time to time alter

or modify its constitution, by-laws, rules, and regulations.

SecTION III. The officers of the said Corporation shall con-

sist of a president and two or more vice-presidents, a correspond-

ing secretary, a recording secretary, a treasurer, and such other

officers as the Corporation may judge necessary; who shall be

chosen in the manner and for the terms prescribed by the con-

stitution of the said Corporation.

Section IV. The present constitution of the said Corpora-

tion shall, after the passage of this act, continue to be the con-

. stitution thereof until amended as herein provided. Such con-

stitution as may be adopted by a vote of not less than three-

quarters of such resident members and fellows of the said New

. York Academy of Sciences as shall be present at a meeting

thereof, called by the Recording Secretary for that purpose,

within forty days after the passage of this act, by written notice

duly mailed, postage prepaid, and addressed to each fellow and

resident member at least ten days before such meeting, at his

last known place of residence, with street and number when

known, which meeting shall be held within three months after

the passage of this act, shall be thereafter the constitution of

the said New York Academy of Sciences, subject to alteration

or amendment in the manner provided by such constitution.

SECTION V. The said Corporation shall have power to con-

solidate, to unite, to co-operate, or to ally itself with any other

society or association in the city of New York organized for the

promotion of the knowledge or the study of any science, or of

research therein, and for this purpose to receive, hold, and ad-

minister real and personal property for the uses of such con-

solidation, union, co-operation, or alliance subject to such terms

and regulations as may be agreed upon with such associations

or societies. _ |

SECTION VI. This act shall take effect immediately.

STATE OF NEw YorK,

OFFICE OF THE SECRETARY OF STATE.

I have compared the preceding with the original law on file

in this office, and do hereby certify that the same is a correct

Vili NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

transcript therefrom, and the whole of said original law.

Given under my hand and the seal of office of the Secretary of

State, at the city of Albany, this eighth day of April, in the year

one thousand nine hundred and two..

Joun T. McDonouves,

Secretary of State.

CONSTITUTION.

ADOPTED, APRIL 24, 1902, AND AMENDED AT SUBSEQUENT TIMES.

ArTICLE I. The name of this Corporation shall be The New

York Academy of Sciences. Its objects shall be the advance-

ment and diffusion of scientific knowledge, and the center of

its activities shall be in the City of New York.

Article II. The Academy shall consist of five classes of

members, namely: Active Members, Fellows, Associate Mem-

bers, Corresponding Members, and Honorary Members. Active

Members shall be the members of the Corporation who live in or —

near the City of New York, or who, having removed to a distance,

desire to retain their connection with the Academy. Fellows

shall be chosen from the Active Members in virtue of their

scientific attainments. Corresponding and Honorary Members

shall be chosen from among the men of science of the world

who have attained distinction as investigators. The number of

Corresponding Members shall not exceed two hundred, and the

number of Honorary Members shall not exceed fifty.

ArticLte III. None but Fellows and Active Members who

have paid their dues up to and including the last fiscal year

shall be entitled to vote or to hold office in the Academy.

ArticLteE IV. The officers of the Academy shall be a Presi-

dent, as many Vice-Presidents as there are sections of the -

Academy, a Corresponding Secretary, a Recording Secretary,

a Treasurer, a Librarian, an Editor, six elected Councilors, and

one additional Councilor from each allied society or association.

The annual election shall be held on the third Monday in De-

cember, the officers then chosen to take office at the first meeting

in January following. |

CONSTITUTION AND BY-LAWS 1X

There shall also be elected at the same time a Finance Com-

mittee of three.

ArTICcLE V. The officers named in Article IV shall consti-

tute a Council, which shall be the executivie body of the Academy

‘with general control over its affairs, including the power to

fill ad interim any vacancies that may occur in the offices. Past

Presidents of the Academy shall be ex-officio members of the

Council. |

ARTICLE VI. Societies organized for the study of any branch

of science may become allied with the New York Academy of

Sciences by consent of the Council. Members of allied societies

may become Active Members of the Academy by paying the

Academy’s annual fee, but as members of an allied society they

shall be Associate Members with the rights and privileges of other

Associate Members, except the receipt of its publications. Each

_ allied society shall have the right to delegate one of its members,

who is also an Active Member of the Academy, to the Council of

the Academy, and such delegate shall have all the rights and

‘privileges of other Councilors. |

ArticLtE VII. The President and Vice-Presidents shall not

be eligible to more than one re-election until three years after

retiring from office; the Secretaries and Treasurer shall be eligi-

ble to re-election without limitation. The President, Vice-pres-

idents, and Secretaries shall be Fellows. The terms of office of

elected. Councilors shall be three years, and these officers shall be

so grouped that two, at least one of whom shall be a Fellow, shall

be elected and two retired each year. Councilors shall not be

eligible to re-election until after the expiration of one year.

_ ArticLte VIII. The election of officers shall be by ballot,

and the candidates having the greatest number of votes shall

be declared duly elected.

ArticLte IX. Ten members, the majority of whom shall be

Fellows, shall form a quorum at any meeting of the Academy

at which business is transacted.

ARTICLE X. The Academy shall establish by-laws, and may

amend them from time to time as therein provided.

ARTICLE XJ. This constitution may be amended by a vote of

not less than three-fourths of the fellows and three-fourths of

xX NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

the active members present and voting at a regular business

meeting of the Academy, provided that such amendment shall

be publicly submitted in writing at the preceding business

meeting, and provided also that the Recording Secretary shall

send a notice of the proposed amendment at least ten days be-

fore the meeting, at which a vote shall be taken, to each Fellow

and Active Member entitled to vote.

BY-LAWS.

As ADOPTED, OCTOBER 6, 1902, AND AMENDED AT SUBSEQUENT

TIMES.

CHAPTER I.

OFFICERS.

1. President. It shall be the duty of the President to pre-

side at the business and special meetings of the Academy; he

shall exercise the customary duties of a presiding officer.

2. Vice-Presidents. In the absence of the President, the

senior Vice-President, in order of Fellowship, shall act as the

presiding officer. ;

3. Corresponding Secretary. The Corresponding Secretary

shall keep a corrected list of the Honorary and Corresponding

Members, their titles and addresses, and shall conduct all corre-

spondence with them. He shall make a report at the Annual

Meeting.

4. Recording Secretary. The Recording Secretary shall

keep the minutes of the Academy proceedings; he shall have

charge of all documents belonging to the Academy, and of its

corporate seal, which he shall affix and attest as directed by the

Council; he shall keep a corrected list of the Active Members

and Fellows, and shall send them announcements of the meet-

ings of the Academy; he shall notify all Members and Fellows

of their election, and committees of their appointment; he

shall give notice to the Treasurer and to the Council of matters

requiring their action, and shall bring before the Academy

business presented by the Council. He shall make a report at

the Annual Meeting.

CONSTITUTION AND BY-LAWS eae

5. ILreasurer. The Treasurer shall have charge, under the

direction of the Council, of all moneys belonging to the Academy,

and of their investment. He shall receive all fees, dues, and

contributions to the Academy, and any income that may accrue

from property or investment; he shall report to the Council

at its last meeting before the Annual Meeting the names of

members in arrears; he shall keep the property of the Academy

insured, and shall pay all debts against the Academy the dis-

charge of which shall be ordered by the Council. He shall

report to the Council from time to time the state of the finances,

and at the Annual Meeting shall report to the Academy the

receipts and expenditures for the entire year.

6. Librarian. The Librarian shall have charge of the library,

under the general direction of the Library Committee of the

Council, and shall conduct all correspondence respecting ex-

changes of the Academy. He shall make a report on the con-

dition of the library at the Annual Meeting.

7. Editor. The Editor shall have charge of the publications

of the Academy, under the general direction of the Publication

Committee of the Council. He shall make a report on the con-

dition of the publications at the Annual Meeting.

CHAPTER II.

COUNGIE:

1. Meetings. The Council shall meet once a month, or at

the call of the President. It shall have general charge of the

affairs of the Academy. ‘

2. Quorum. Five members of the Council shall constitute a

quorum.

3. Officers. The President, Vice-Presidents, and Recording

Secretary of the Academy shall hold the same offices in the

Council.

4. Committees. The Standing Committees of the Council

shall be: (1) an Executive Committee consisting of the President,

Treasurer, and Recording Secretary; (2) a Committee on Pub-

lications; (3) a Committee on the Library, and such other

committees as from time to time shall be authorized by the

Xil NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

Council. The action of these committees shall be subject to

revision by the Council.

CHsrrer Ti

FINANCE COMMITTEE.

The Finance Committee of the Academy shall audit the

Annual Report of the Treasurer, and shall report on financial

questions whenever called upon to do so by the Council.

CHapTerR IV.

EOLA ONS:

1. Active Members. (a) Active Members shall be nominated

in. writing to the Council by at least two Active Members or

Fellows. If approved by the Council, they may be elected at

the succeeding business meeting.

(b) Any Active Member who, having removed to a distance

from the city of New York, shall nevertheless express a desire

to retain his connection with the Academy, may be placed by

vote of the Council on a list of Non-resident Members. Such

members shall relinquish the full privileges and obligations of

Active Members. (Vide Chapters V and X.)

2. Associate Members. Workers in science may be elected

to Associate Membership for a period of two years in the manner

prescribed for Active Members. They shall not have the power

to vote and shall not be eligible to election as Fellows, but

may receive the publications. At any time subsequent to their

election they may assume the full privileges of Active Members

by paying the dues of such Members.

3. Fellows, Corresponding Members, and Honorary Members.

Nominations for Fellows, Corresponding Members, and Honor-

ary Members may be made in writing either to the Recording

Secretary or to the Council at its meeting prior to the Annual

Meeting. If approved by the Council, the nominees shall then

be balloted for at the Annual Meeting.

4. Officers. Nominations for Officers, with the exception of

Vice-Presidents, may be sent in writing to the Recording Sec-

\ SN

CONSTITUTION AND BY-LAWS Xiil

retary, with the name of the proposer, at any time not less

than thirty days before the Annual Meeting. Each section

of the Academy shall nominate a candidate for Vice-Presi-

dent, who, on election, shall be Chairman of the section; the

names of such nominees shall be sent to the Recording. Secretary

properly certified by the sectional secretaries, not less than

thirty days before the Annual Meeting. The Council shall

then prepare a list which shall be the regular ticket. This list

shall be mailed to each Active Member and Fellow at least one

week before the Annual Meeting. But any Active Member or

Fellow entitled to vote shall be entitled to prepare and vote an-

other ticket.

CHAPTER JV.

DCS:

1. Dues. The annual dues of Active Members and Fellows

shall be $10, payable in advance at the time of the Annual

Meeting; but new members elected after May 1 shall pay $5 .

for the remainder of the fiscal year.

The annual dues of elected Associate Members shall be $3,

payable in advance at the time of the Annual Meeting.

Non-resident Members shall be exempt from dues, so long

as they shall relinquish the privileges of Active Membership.

(Vide Chapter X.)

2. Members in Arrears. If any Active Member or Fellow

whose dues remain unpaid for more than one year, shall neg-

lect or refuse to pay the same within three months after notifi-

cation by the Treasurer, his name may be erased from the rolls

by vote of the Council. Upon payment of his arrears. how-

ever, such persott may be restored to Active Membership or

Fellowship by vote of the Cuoncil.

3. Renewal of Membership. Any Active Member or Fellow

who shall resign because of removal to a distance from the City

of New York, or any Non-resident Member, may be restored by

vote of the Council to Active Membership or Fellowship at any

time upon application.

XiV NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

CHAPTER VI.

PATRONS, DONORS, AND LIFE MEMBERS.

1. Patrons. Any person contributing at one time $1000 to

the general funds of the Academy shall be a Patron, and, on

election by the Council, shall enjoy all the privileges of Active

Members.

2. Donors. Any person contributing $50 or more an-

nually ‘to the general funds of the Academy shall be termed a

Donor and on election by the Council shall enjoy all the priyv-

ileges of Active Membership.

3. Life Members. Any Active Member or Fellow contribut-

ing at one time $100 to the general funds of the Academy shall

be a Life Member, and shall thereafter be exempt from annual

dues.

CHaPrTer VII.

SEGIMONS:

1. Sections. Sections devoted to special branches of Science

_may be established or discontinued by the Academy on the

recommendation of the Council. The present sections of the

Academy are the Section of Astronomy, Physics, and Chemistry,

the Section of Biology, the Section of Geology and Mineralogy

and the Section of Anthropology and Psychology.

2. Organization. Each section of the Academy shall have a

Chairman and a Secretary, who shall have charge of the meet-

ings of their Section. The regular election of these officers —

shall take place at the October or November meeting of the

section, the officers then chosen to take office at the first:meet-

ing in January following. ee

3. Affiliation. Members of scientific societies affiliated with

the Academy, and members of the Scientific Alliance, or men

of science introduced by members of the Academy. may attend

the meetings and present papers under the general regulations

of the Academy.

oS 5 a.

CONSTITUTION AND BY-LAWS XV

CuHaptTer VIII. |

MEETINGS.

1. Business Meetings. Business meetings of the Academy

shall be held on the first Monday of each month from October

to May inclusive.

2. Sectional Meetings. Sectional meetings shall be held on |

Monday evenings from October to May inclusive, and at such

other times as the Council may determine. The sectional

meeting shall follow the business meeting when both occur on

the same evening.

3. Annual Meeting. The Annual Meeting shall be held on

the third Monday in December.

4.. Special Meetings. A special meeting may be called by

the Council, provided one week’s notice be sent to each Active

Member and Fellow, stating the object of such meeting.

CHAPTER IX.

ORDER OF BUSINESS.

1. Business Meetings. The following shall be the order of

procedure at business meetings:

1. Minutes of the previous business meeting.

2. Report of the Council.

3. Reports of Committees.

4. Elections.

5. Other business.

2. Sectional Meetings. The following shall be the order of

procedure at sectional meetings:

1. Minutes of the preceding meeting of the section.

2. Presentation and discussion of papers.

3- Other scientific business.

3. Annual Meetings. The following shall be the order of

procedure at Annual Meetings:

1. Annual reports of the Corresponding Secretary, Record-

ing Secretary, Treasurer, Librarian, and Editor.

2. Election of Honorary Members, Corresponding Mem-

bers, and Fellows.

Xvi NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

3. Election of officers for the ensuing year.

4. Annual address of the retiring President.

CHAPTER X.

PUBL CAGIONS:

1. Publications. The established publications of the Acad-

emy shall be the Annals and the Memoirs. They shall be

issued by the Editor under the supervision of the Committee on

Publications.

2. Distribution. One copy of all publications shall be sent

to each Patron, Life Member, Active Member, and Fellow, pro-

vided, that upon enquiry by the Editor such Members or Fel-

lows shall signify their desire to receive them.

3. Publication Fund. Contributions may be received for the

publication fund, and the income thereof shall be applied toward

defraying the expenses of the scientific publications of the

Academy.

_CHAPTER XI.

GENERAL PROVISIONS.

1. Debts. No debts shall be incurred on behalf of the Acad-

emy unless authorized by the Council.

2. Bills. All bills submitted to the Council must be certi-

fied as to correctness by the officers incurring them.

3. Investments. All the permanent funds of the Academy

shall be invested in United States or in New York State securi-

ties or in first mortgages on real estate, provided they shall not

“exceed sixty-five per cent. of the value of the property, or in

first mortgage bonds of Corporations which have paid dividends

continuously on their common stock for a period not less than

five years. All income from patron’s fees, life membership fees,

and donor’s fees shall be added to the permanent fund.

4. . Expulsion, etc. Any Member or Fellow may be censured,

suspended, or expelled, for violation of the Constitution or By-

Laws, or for any offence deemed sufficient, by a vote of three-

fourths of the Members and three-fourths of the Fellows present

CONSTITUTION AND BY-LAWS Xvil

at any business meeting, provided such action shall have been

recommended by the Council at a previous business meeting,

and also, that one month’s notice of such recommendation

and of the offence charged shall have been given the Member

accused.

5. Changes in By-Laws. No alteration shall be made in

these By-Laws unless it shall haye been submitted publicly in

writing at a business meeting, shall have been entered on the

Minutes with the names of the Members or Fellows proposing

it, and shall be adopted by two-thirds of the Members and

Fellows present and voting at a subsequent business meeting.

MEMBERSHIP OF THE

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES.

1906,

PATRONS.

Britton, N. L., N. Y. Botanical Garden.

Brown, Appison, 45 West 89th Street.

Casey, Mazor Tuomas L., U. S. A., Washington, D. C.

CuaPin, Cuester W., 34 West 57th Street.

Fievp, C. pre Pryster, 21 East 26th Street.

GovuLp, Epwin, Dobbs Ferry, N. Y.

GouLp, Grorcr J., 195 Broadway.

Goutp, Miss HELEN M., Irvington, N. Y.

Herrman, Mrs. Estuer, 59 West 56th Street.

JuLien, Auexis A., Columbia University.

Levison, W. Gooxp, 1435 Pacific Street, Brooklyn.

Mean, Watter H., 67 Wall Street.

Senrr, Cuarxtes H., 300 Madison Avenue.

Sitoan, Samvuet, 26 Exchange Place.

HONORARY MEMBERS.

1887. Acassiz, AtExanpER. Director of the University

Museum, Cambridge, Mass.

1898. Auwers, ArtHur. Astronomer and Secretary of

the Royal Prussian Academy of Sciences, Berlin,

Germany.

' 1889. Barrois, Cuaries, Ph.D. Professor of Geology

in the University, Rue Pascal 41, Lille, France.

1901. Boys, CHartes Vernon, A.R.S.M., F.R.S., 66

Victoria Street S.W., London, England.

1904. Brocerr, W. C. Director of the Mineralogical In-

stitute, Christiania, Norway.

1898. Brooxs, Witit1am K. Henry Walters Professor of

Zodlogy, Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, Md. ©

1887. Dauumncer, Rev. Wituiam Henry, D.D., D.Sc.,

D.C.L., LL.D., F.R.S., Lee, London, S.E., England.

XIX

xX NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

1899. Darwin, Sir Gerorcke Howarp, M.A., K.C.B.,

F.R.S., Professor of Astronomy and Fellow of Trinity

College, Cambridge, England.

1876. Dawxtys, W. Boyp. Professor of Geology and

Paleontology, — Victoria ee Manchester,

England.

1904. Der VRIES, Huco, PhDs. S¢. Ds LLD., Professor of

Botany in the University ae Amsterdam, Amsterdam,

Netherlands.

1902. Dewar, Sir James, M.A., LL.D., F.R.S.E., Jack-

sonian Professor of Experimental Philosophy in the

University of Cambridge and Fullerean Professor of

Chemistry in the Royal Institute of London, 1 Scroope

Terrace, Cambridge, England.

1901. Fiscurer, Emit. Professor of Chemistry, Hessische-

strasse 2, Berlin, Germany.

1876. GetxKiz, Str Arcuispatp, F.R.S., Former Director

General of Geological Survey of Great Britain and Ire-

land, Secretary of the Royal Society, 3 Sloane Court,

London §.W., England.

1901. Gertxrme, James, LL.D., D.C.L., F.R.S., F.R.S.E.,

Murchison Professor of Geology and Mineralogy in

the University of Edinburgh, Edinburgh, Scotland.

1889. Grisss, Woxucott, M.D., LL.D., Professor Emeritus

of the Application of Science to the Useful Arts, Har-

vard University. Address, Newport, R. I.

1898. Guit1t, Davin, K.C.B., LL.D., F.R.S. His Majesty’s

Astronomer, Royal Observatory, Cape of Good Hope,

Africa.

1889. GoopaLe, Georce Lincoitn, M.D., LL.D. Profes-

sor of Natural History, Harvard Univerns Camb-

ridge, Mass.

1894. Harcren,: Kenst, M.D., Ph.D. Sc.D2 .EEay:

Professor of Zodlogy and Director of the Zodlogical In-

stitute in the University of Jena, Jena, Germany.

1889. Hart, Asaru. Professor of Mathematics, U. S.

Navy, (retired), Norfolk, Conn.

1899. Hann, Jutius, Ph.D. Professor of Cosmical Phy-

sics in the University of Vienna, Vienna, Austria.

1898. Hitt, Grorce W., LL.D. West Nyack, N. Y.

HONORARY MEMBERS XX1

1896. Husrecut, Amprosius, A. W. Professor of Zodl-

ogy and Comparative Anatomy in the University of

Utrecht, Utrecht, Netherlands.

1901. James, Witiiam, M.D., LL.D. Professor of Phil-

osophy in Harvard University, Cambridge, Mass.

1876. Ketvix, The Right Hon. Lord, D.C.L., F.R.S.,

O.M., G.C.V.O. ‘President of the Royal Society of

Edinburgh. 15 Eaton Place, London, England.

1896. Kuer, Ferm, Ph.D. Professor of Mathematics in

the University of Gottingen, Gottingen, Germany.

1898. Lanxester, E. Ray, LL.D., F.R.S. Director of

| the British Museum of Natural History, Cromwell

Road, S.W., London, England.

1880. Lockyrr, Sir Norman, K.C.B., LL.D., F.R.S.

Director of the Solar Physics Observatory, South Kens-

ington, England.

1900. Lerypic, Franz. Professor in the School of Medi-

cme, Bonn, Germany (retired), Rothenburg, Tauber,

Germany.

1898. Nansen, Frivtrzor, M.D. Professor of Zodlogy in

the Royal Fredericks University, Christiania, Norway:

1891. Newcoms, Simon. Professor of Mathematics {re-

tired), U. S. N., 1620 P Street, Washington, D. C.

1898. Prencx, Atsprecut, Ph.D. Director, Institut fiir

Meereskunde, Georgenstrasse 34-36, Berlin N.W. 7,

Germany.

1898. Prerrer, Wittiam. Professor of Botany in the

University of Leipzig, Leipzig, Germany.

1900. Pickrrinc, Epwarp Cuaries, LL.D. Paine Pro-

fessor of Practical Astonomony and Director of the Ob-

servatory, Harvard University, Cambridge, Mass.

1900. Porncart, Jutes Henri, F.R.S. Professor of

Celestial Mechanics, Faculty of Science, Paris, France.

1901. Ramsay, Wim, K.C.B., Ph.D., D.Sc., F.R.S.

Professor of Chemistry, University College, London,

England.

1899. Rayiricn, Lorp, O.M., LL.D., F.R.S. Terling

Place, Witham, Essex, England.

1898 Revuscu, Hans H., Ph.D. Director of the Norweg-

ian Geological Survey, Christiania, Norway.

XXil NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

1887. Roscozr, Str Henry Enrietp, D.C.L., LL.D.,

F. R. S. 10 Bramham Gardens, London S. W., England.

1887. Rosrnsuscu, Kart Henry Frrprnanp. Professor

of Mineralogy and Geology, University of Heidelberg,

Heidelberg, Germany.

1904. Sronsy, G. Jounstone, M.A., D.Sc. 30 Ledbury

Road, Notting Hill, London W., England.

1896. THomson, JosrpH Joun, Sc.D., LUL.D., F-.R.S.

Professor of Experimental Physics, Cavendish Labora-

tory, Cambridge University, Cambridge, Englanii.

1900. Tytor, Epwarp Burnett, LL.D., D.C.L., F.R.S.

Professor of Anthropology, University of Oxford,

Balliol College, Oxford, England.

1904. Von pen STEINEN, Karu. Professor of Ethnology,

University of Berlin, Director of the Royal Ethno-

graphic Museum, Steglitz-Berlin, Germany.

1876. Von Lane, Vixtor. Professor of Physics in the

University of Vienna, General Secretary of the Imperial

Academy of Sciences, Vienna, Austria.

1904. Wuownot, Wittiam, Ph.D., M.D., Leipzig, Germany.

1878. Younc, Cuarites Aveustus, LL.D. Professor

Emeritus of Astronomy in Princeton University, Prince-

ton, N. J.

1904. ZirKet, Ferprnanp. Professor of Mineralogy and

Geognosy in the University of Leipzig, Leipzig,

Germany.

CORRESPONDING MEMBERS

1883. AxssotTt,.CHartES Conrad, M.D. ‘Trenton, N. J.

1898. Apams, Franx D. Professor of Geology in McGill

University, Montreal, Canada.

1891. AcurtEra, Jost G. Director of the Geological In-

stitute of Mexico, 5a del Ciprés 2728, Mexico, D. F.,

Mex.

1890. AxexanperR, Wituiam DeWitt. Ass’t in U.S.C. &

G. S., Honolulu, Hawaii.

1899. Awnprews, C. W., D.Sc. Ass’t in the Department

of Geology, British Museum of Natural History, Crom-

well Road, London 8.W., England. ;

1876. AppLteton, Joun Howarp, M.A., D.Sc. Professor

of Chemistry, Brown University, 209 Angell Street,

Providence, R. I.

CORRESPONDING MEMBERS XX111

(1899. Baxser, J. G, F.R.S., F.L.S., M.R.LA. Retired

Keeper of the Herbariums and the Library, Royal Bo-

tanic Gardens, 3 Cumberland Road, Kew, England.

1898. Bazrour, Isaac Bactey. Professor of Botany in

the University of Edinburgh, King’s Botanist in Scot-

land, Regius Keeper of the Royal Botanic Garden,

Edinburgh, Scotland.

1878. Bett, ALExanpER Grauam. 1331 Connecticut

Ave., Washington, D. C.

1867. Berruoup, Enwarp L., M.A., C.E., Golden, Jef-

ferson County, Col.

1897. Botton, Hersert, F.Z.S., F.R.S.E. Curator and

Secretary, Bristol Museum, Bristol, England.

1899. Bouxuencer, G.A., F.R.S. Ass’t in Teele Brit-

ish Museum of Natural History, London, England.

1874. Branveczex, T. §., San Diego, Calif.

1884. Branner, Joun C., Ph.D., LL.D. Professor of

Geology and Vice-President of Leland Standford Jr.

University, Stanford Uinversity, Calif.

1894. Brauner, Bonustay, Ph.D., D.Sc. Professor of

Chemistry, Bohemian University, Prague, Bohemia.

1874. Brewster, Witiiam, A.M. 145 Brattle Street,

Cambridge, Mass. .

1876. Brusu, Grorce Jarvis. Professor Emeritus of

Mineralogy in Yale University, New Haven, Conn.

1876. CaLDWELL, Grorce CHapman. Professor Emeritus

of Chemistry in Cornell University, Ithaca, N. Y.

1898. CHameBerimn, T.C. Head of Department of Geol-

ogy in the University of Chicago, Chicago, Ill.

1876. CHanpLER, W. H. Professor of Chemistry, Li-

brarian of Lehigh University, South Bethlehem, Pa.

1876. Crarxr, Franz WiccieswortH, Chief Chemist U.

S. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C.

aSol. ‘Crurrc, Li. Professor at the Gymnasium, Ekaterin-

burg, Russia.

1877. Comstock, THEODORE B., Se.D. Los Angeles, Cal.

1868. Cooxr, M. C., M.A. Rocnee Keeper of Crypto-

gamic akbar Royal Botanical Garden, Kew, 53

Castle Road, Kentish Town, London, N. W., England.

- 1876. Cornwatzt, H. B. Professor of Applied Chemistry

and Mineralogy, Princeton University, Princeton, N. J.

XXIV NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

1880. Cory, CHartes B. Curator of Natural History, -

Field Museum, Chicago, Ill. 160 Boylston Street,

Boston, Mass.

1877. Crawrorp, JosepH, Ph.G., 2824 Frankford Ave.,

Philadelphia, Pa.

1866. Crepner, Hermann, Ph.D. Professor of Geology

and Paleontology in the University of Leipzig; Direc-

tor of the Geological Survey and of Seismological Ser-

vice of the Kingdom of Saxony, Leipzig, Germany.

1895. CusHine, Henry P. Professor of Geology im

Western Reserve University, Cleveland, O.

1879. Datz, T. Nezson. Geologist of the U. S. Geo-

logical Survey, Pittsfield, Mass. |

1870. Dati, Wittiam Heatey, M.A., Se.D. Curator,

Division of Mollusks in the U. 8S. Nat. Museum, Paleon-

tologist to the U. 8. Geological Survey, Smithsonian

Institution, Washington, D. C.

1885. Dana, Epwarp Sanispury, Ph.D. Professor of

Physics in Yale University, 24 Hillhouse Avenue, New

Haven, Conn.

1898. Davis, Wirtimam M. Sturgis-Hooper Professor of

Geology, Harvard University, Cambridge, Mass.

1894. Deranr, Ruruven. President of the Illinois Au-

dubon Society, 504 No. State Street, Chicago, Ill.

1899. Deprret, Cuartes. Professor of Geology and Phy- —

sical Geography in the University of Lyons, Lyons,

France.

1890. Derrsy, Orvintz A., F.G.S. Rio Branco, San

Paulo, Brazil.

1899. Dotto, Lovis, Ph.D. Conservateur au Musée Royal

‘d’Histoire Naturelle, Professor at the University,

Brussels, Belgium.

1876. Exuiorr, Henry W. 17 Grace Avenue, Lakewood,

Cuyahoga County, O.

1880. Exuiortr, Joun B. Professor of Theoretical and

Practical Medicine in ‘Tulane University, New

Orleans, La.

1869. EncetHarnpt, Francis E., Ph.D. Chemist to Syra-

cuse Health Bureau, Suan ese: INS

1879. Farrcurtp, Herman LeRoy, B. S. Professor of

Geology, University of Rochester, Rochester, N. Y.

CORRESPONDING MEMBERS KXV

1879. Firrica, Frieprich Brrnuarp, Ph.D. Professor

of Chemistry in the University of Marburg, Marburg,

Germany.

1885. Furtcuer, Lazarus, M.A., F.R.S. Keeper of Min-

erals in the British Museum, London, England.

1899. Fraas, Eperuarp, Ph.D. Trustee of Kgl. Natura-

len-Kabinet, Stuttgart, Germany.

1879. Frirzcartner, Retnuotp, Ph.D. Teguicigalpa,

Honduras.

1870. Gitpert, G. K. Geologist to the U. S. Geological

Survey, Washington, D. C.

1858. Gitt, THroporE Nicuoras, M.D., Ph.D., LL.D.

Professor of Zodlogy m George Washington Uni-

versity, Washington, D. C.

1876. Gitman, Daniet C., LL.D. President Emeritus

of Johns Hopkins University and lately President of

the Carnegie Institution. Baltimore, Md.

1865. Goxrssmann, Cuarues A., Ph.,D., LL.D. Professor

of Chemistry in the Massachusetts Agricultural Col-

lege, Amherst, Mass.

1888. Goocu, Franx Austin. Professor of Chemistry in

Yale University, New Haven, Conn.

1868. GreEEentEaF, C. R. Colonel U. S. A. (retired), San

' Francisco, Cal.

1883. Grecorio, Mareuis “Antonio pz, Sc.D. Editor of

the Annals of Geology and Paleontology, Palermo,

Sicily. :

1877. von Grotru, Paut Hernricu. Professor of Min-

eralogy in the Royal Bayr, Ludwig-Maximilians Uni-

versity, Munich, Germany.

' 1869. Guppy, R. J. L. Port of Spain, Trinidad, B. W. I.

1898. Hatz, Grorce E., Sc.D., LL.D. Director of the

Solar Observatory of the Carnegie Institution of

Washington, Mt. Wilson, Cal. :

1882. von Hesse-Wartece, Baron Ernest. Villa Trib-

schen, Lucerne, Switzerland.

1867. Hrrcucock, C.H., LL.D. Professor of Geology in

Dartmouth College, Hanover, N. H.

1900. Hotmes, .Wittiam Henry. Chief, Bureau of-

. American Ethnology, Washington, D. C.

XXV1 NEW .YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

1890. Hosxorp, H. D., C. et M.E., F.G.S., F.RIG:S:

Buenos Ayres, Argentine Republic.

1896. Ipprnes, J. P. Professor of Petrology in the Uni-

versity of Chicago, Chicago, Ill.

1875. -Ines, Matvern W. Dubuque, Ia.

1899. Jarxezt, Ortro, Ph.D. Professor of Geclogy and

Paleontology at the University of Berlin and in K6ni-

glicher Museum fiir Naturkunde, Invalidenstrasse 43,

Berlin, Germany.

1876. Jonnson, Samuet W., M.A. Professor Emeritus

of Agricultural Chemistry in Yale University, 54

Trumbull Street, New Haven, Conn.

1876. Jorpan, Davin Srarr, Ph.D., LL.D. President of

Leland Stanford Jr. University, Stanford University,

Cal.

1876. Kornic, Grorcr A., Ph.D. Professor of Chemistry

in the Michigan College of Mines, Houghton, Mich.

1899. KonitrauscH, Frrepricu, Ph.D. Formerly Presi-

dent of the Physikalise Technische Reischantalt, Mar-

burg (Hessen), Germany.

1888. Kuxi, Baron R. Privy Counsellor, Tokyo, Japan.

1890. Lacroix, Aurrep. Professor of Mineralogy in the

Museum of Natural History of Paris, Rue Buffon 61,

Paris, France.

1876. Laneiry, Jonn W., Ph.D. Professor of Electro-

Metallurgy in the Case School of Applied Science,

. Cleveland, O.

1900. Laprarent, ALBERT DE. Professor of Mineralogy,

Geology and Physical Geography, Bole Libre des

Hautes Etudes, Paris, France. -

1876. Lartmors, S. A. Professor?of Chemistry in Uni-

versity of Rochester, Rochester, N. Y.

1890. , Laussepat, Coz. Aimse. Honorary Director of the

National Conservatory of Arts and Sciences, Avenue

St. Martin 292, Paris, France.

1894. Lispry, Witimm. Professor of Physical Geogra-

phy, Princeton University, Princeton, N. J.

1899. lLiversipcze, Arcuipautp, M.A., LL.D., F.R.S.

Professor of Chemistry, University of Sydney, Sydney,

New South Wales.

CORRESPONDING MEMBERS XXVIii

1876. Mactosxirz, Grorce. Professor of Biology in

Princeton University, Princeton, N. J.

1876. Manitet, Jonn Witiimasm, M.D., Ph.D., LL.D.,

F.R.S. Professor of Chemistry in the University of

Virginia, Charlottesville, Va.

1891. Mann, CuHarites Rizore. Assistant Professor of

Physics, University of Chicago, Chicago, Ill.

1867. Matruew, Grorce F., Sec.D., LL.D., F.R.S.C.

St. John, N.B., Canada.

1874. Maynarp, Cuartes Jonnson. West Newton, Mass.

1874. Mezap, Turopore Lueverr, C.E. Oviedo, Fla.

1888. Mezex, Seto EK. Field Museum, Chicago, Il.

1892. Menopizapat-TamporreL, J. DE. Palma 13, Mexico.

1874. Merriam, Cuinton Hart, M.D. Chief of U. S.

Biological Survey, Washington, D. C.

1898. Merriman, Mansrietp, Ph.D. Professor of Civil

Engineering, Lehigh University, South Bethlehem, Pa.

1890. Meyer, A.B., M.D. Director of the Royal Zodlogi-

cal, Anthropological and Ethnographical Museum,

Dresden, Germany.

1900. Mirsuxuri, Kaxicu1, Ph.D. Professor of Zodlogy,

Imperial University of Tokyo.

1878. Minot, CHarites Sepewicr, §.B., §.D., LL.D.,

D.Se. Professor of Histology and Human Embryology

in.the Harvard Medical School, Boston, Mass.

1876. Mrixrer, Witiiam Gitsert. Professor of Chemis-

try in Yale University, New Haven, Conn.

“1890. Moxupenxe, Ricuarp, E. M., Ph.D. Watchung,

N. J.

1895. Morean, C. Lioyp, LL.D., F.R.S. Principal and

Professor of Psychology, University College, Bristol,

England. q

1864. Morsz, Epwarp §., A.M., Ph.D. Director of the

Peabody Museum, Sian Mass.

1898. Murray, Grorce R.M., M.C._ British IVanseui,

London, England.

—— Netto, Eucen. Professor of Mathematics, Hessische-

Ludwigs University, Giessen, Germany.

1866. Newton, Aurrep, M.A., F.R.S. Professor of

Zoélogy and Comparative Anatomy in the University of

Cambridge, Magdelene College, Cambridge, England.

xeVill NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

1897. Nicuoxas, Francis C., Ph.D.. 3 Broad St.

1882. Nicuott, Henry Atrrep Atrorp, C.M.G., M.D.;

C.M., M.R.C.S. Kingsland House, Dominica, Br. West

Indies.

1881. Nites, Witr1mm H. Professor of Geology in

Wellesley College and Professor Emeritus of Geology

and Geography in Massachusetts Institute of Technol-

ogy, Boston, Mass.

1880. Nozan, Epwarp J., M.D. Recording Secretary

and Librarian of Academy of Natural Sciences of Phila-

delphia, Logan ‘Square, Philadelphia, Pa.

1879. Oper, Freperick A. Fairmount Avenue, Hacken-

sack, N. J. )

1876. Orpway, JoHn M. 38125 Chestnut Street, New

Orleans, La.

1898. OstwaLp, WitHELM. Professor of Physical Chemis-

try, University of Leipzig, Linnestrasse 2/3, Leipzig, |

Germany.

1900. Parker, Grorce Howarp, S.D. Aqeaeeer Profes-

sor of Zodlogy m Harvard University, Cn

Mass.

1876. Prcxuam, STEPHEN F., M.A. 280 Broadway, New

York City.

1888. Post, Rev. Grorce E., M.A., M.D., LL,D. Pro- —

fessor of Surgery in the Syrian Protestant College,

Beirtit, Syria.

1894. Pouttron, Epwarp Baenatt, Dee M.A., LL.D.

Professor of Zodlogy, Oxford University, Fellow of

Jesus College, Oxford, England.

1876. Prescott, Atzert B. Professor of Organic Chem-

istry and Director of the Chemical Laboratory in the

University of Michigan, Ann Arbor, Mich.

1877. Primer, Freprricx, Ph.D. Professor of Natural

History in Girard College, Philadelphia, Pa.

1868. Pumpretty, RapHart. Newport, R. I.

1876. Ranpatt, Burton A. Formerly Clinical Professor

of Ear Diseases, University of Pennsylvania, Philadel-

phia, Pa.

1888. Reavz, T. Metzuarp, F.G.S. Park Corner, Blun-

dellsands, Liverpool, England.

CORRESPONDING MEMBERS XX1X

1876. Remsen, Ira, M.D., Ph.D., LL.D. President

‘ Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, Maryland.

1874. Ripeway, Rozserr. Curator of Division of Birds of

the U. S. National Museum, Smithsonian Institution,

Washington, D. C.

1886. Ross, Wititmm L., Ph.D., LL.D. Professor of

Physics and Electrical Engineering, Rensselaer Poly-

technic Institute, Troy, N. Y.

1876. Saprier, Samurent P., Ph.D., LL.D. Professor of

Chemistry, Philadelphia College of Pharmacy, Philadel-

: phia, Pa.

1899. Scuuosser, D. Max, Alte Akademie, Munich,

Germany.

1867. Scuwerrzer, Pavut, Ph.D., LL.D. Professor of

Agricultural Chemistry and Chemist to the Experiment

Station of the University of Missouri, Columbia, Mo.

1898. Scott, W. B. Professor of Geology in Princeton

University, Princeton, N. J.

1876. ScuppEer, Samurt H. Cambridge, Mass.

1894. Srpewicx, W. T. Professor of Biology in the Massa-

chusetts Institute of Technology and Curator of the

’ Lowell Institute, Boston, Mass.

1876. SHrRwoop, Anprew, Montavilla, Portland, Oregon.

1883. Smirn, J. Warp, 144 Monmouth St., Newark, N. J.

1895. SmytTu, Cuartes H., Jr. Professor of Geology in

Princeton University, Princeton, N. J.

1890. Spencer, Rev. J. Se_pen, Tarrytown, N. Y.

1896. STEARNS, Rosgert, E.C., Ph.D. Associate in Zodl-

ogy in the U. S. National Meucean Washington, D.C.

1025 East 18th Street, Los Angeles, Cal.

1890. Srevens, Wattrer LeConte. Professor of phivsics,

Washington and Lee University, Lexington, Va.

1876. Storer, Francis H. Professor of Agricultural

Chemistry in Bussey Institute, Harvard University,

Cambridge, Mass.

1885. Tacorr, Razau Sir Sourtnpro Mouun. Calcutta,

India.

1893. Tuomson, J. P., LL.D. Hon. Secretary and

Treasurer Royal Geographical Society of Australasia,

Brisbane, Queensland, Australia.

xox NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES’

1899. Traauvatrr, R. H. Keeper of Natural History De-

partment of Royal Scottish Museum, Edinburgh,

Scotland.

1877. 'Trowsripcr, Joun. Rumford Professor of the

Application of Science to Useful Arts i Harvard Uni-

versity, Cambridge, Mass.

1876. Turrzie, D. K. U.S. Mint, Philadelphia, Pa.

1871. Van Heurcrx, Henri, M.D. Professor of Botany

and Director of Botanical Gardens, Rue de la Sante 8,

Antwerp, Belgium.

1900. Van Hise, CHarztes Ricuarp, Ph.D., LL.D. Presi- - .

dent of the University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wis.

1867. VeErritt, Appison Emory. Professor of Zodlogy

in Yale University, New Haven, Conn.

1890. Vocprs, AntHony Wayne. Brig. General U. S.

A. (Retired), 2425 First Street, San Diego, Calif.

1898. Watucott, Cuarzes Dooxittie. Secretary of the

Smithsonian Institution, Washington, D. C. -

1876. Watupo, Leonarp. 49 Wall Street, New York.

1876. Warrince, CuHartes B., Ph.D., 288 Mill Street,

Poughkeepsie, N. Y.

1900. Wartast, SHo, Ph.D. Professor of Zodlogy, Im-

perial University of Tokyo.

1897. Wetter, Stuart, Ph.D. Assistant Professor of

Paleontologic Geology, University of Chicago, Chicago,

Til.

1874. Wuirs, I. C., A.M., Ph.D. State Geologist, Mor-

gantown. W. Va.

1898. Wuirman, C. O. Head Professor of Zodlogy in

the University and Director of the Marine Biological

Laboratory at Woods Holl, Mass.

1898. Witiams, Henry Suarer. Professor of Geology

and Director of the Museum in Cornell University,

Ithaca, N. Y.

1898. WrycHet, N. H., M.A., Formerly State Geologist,

113 State Street, Minneapolis, Minn.

1866. Woop, Horatio C., A.M., M.D., LL.D. Professor

of Materia Medica and Therapeutics, University of

Pennsylvania, Philadelpiha, Pa.

ACTIVE MEMBERS XXX1

1899. Woopwarp, A. Smiru, LL.D., F.R.S. Keeper of

Geology in the British Museum of Natural History,

London, England.

1869. Woopwarp, Henry, LL.D., F.R.S. Late Keeper

of Geology in British Museum, 129 Beaufort Street,

Chelsea, London S. W., England.

1876. Wricut, ArtHuR WituaMms. Professor of Experi-

mental Physics in Yale Univeristy, 73 York Square,

New Haven, Conn.

1876. Yarror, Harry Creecy, M.D. Professor of Der-

matology in George Washington University, Washing-

ton, D. C.

ACTIVE MEMBERS

1906

Fellowship is indicated by an asterisk (*) before the name. Life

Membership is shown by heavy-faced type.

in capitals.

* ABBE, CLEVELAND, Ph.D.

Adams, Edward D.

Apuer, I., M.D.

ALEXANDER, Cuas. B.

*ALuEN, J. A., Ph.D.

ALLEN, JAMES LANE

*Ariis, Enwarp PHELPs, JR.

*AMEND, BERNARD G.

Awnperson, A. A.

Anperson, A. J. C.

Anthony, R. A.

Antuony, Wm. A.,

ARCHER-SHEE, Mrs. M.

AREND, Francis J.

Armstrong, S. T., M.D.

* ARNOLD, E. 8S. F., M.D.

Astor, JOHN JACOB

AVERY, SAMUEL P., JR.

Bailey, James M.

Banes, Francis 5S.

Barnes, Miss Cora F.

Barron, Georce D.

* BASKERVILLE, Pror. C. M.

Bavueu, Miss M. L.

Baxter, M., Jr.

Beat, WitiiaM R.

Bran, Henry WiLLarp

Brarp, Danien C.

*Beck, Fanning C. T.

BreckHARD, Martin

*BrEBE, C. WILLIAM

Brers, M. H.

Berry, Kpwarp W.

*BickmoreE, A. §., Ph.D.

Bien, JuLius

*BiceLow, Pror. M. A.

Billings, Elizabeth.

Biniines, FREDERICK

Birpsaut, Mrs. W. R.

BisHop, H. R.

*BuAKE, J. A., M.D..

*Bliss, Prof. Charles B.

Boas, Emin

*Boas, Pror. Franz

Borttrcrer, Henry W.

Boyp, JAMES

The names of Patrons are

5-0-9

*BristoL, Pror. C. L.

Bristox, Jno. I. D.

*BRITTON, PROF. N. L.

*BROWN, HON. ADDISON

Brown, Epwin H.

*BROWNELL, Siuas B.

*Bumpus, Pror. H. C.

*Burr, Wituiam H.

Busu, WENDELL T.

*Byrnes, Miss Estuer F.

*CaLkins, Pror. Gary N.

CaMPBELL, Witiiam, Ph.D.

CasrE, CHartwes L.

*CASEY, COL. T. L.

*CaswELL, Joun H.

*CaTTELL, Pror. J. McK.

CHAMBERLAIN, Rev. L. T.

CHAMPOLLION, ANDREW

*CHANDLER, Pror. C. F.

CHAPIN, CHESTER W.

*CHAPMAN, Frank M.

*CuEEsMAN, TI. M., M.D.

CiarkKson, BANYER

Cuine, Miss May

Conn, J. M.

* COLLINGWOOD, FRANCIS

Cotiins, Anna E.

Collord, George W.

Conpit, Witii1am L.

Constant, S. Victor

Cornine, C. R.

Cowes, Davin S.

*Cox, Cuaruzs F.

*CrRAMPTON, Pror. Henry E.

Crane, Zenas

CRAWFORD, JOSEPH

Cuiein, Guy W.

*CuNNINGHAM, R. H., M.D. .:

*DaveNnpPort, Pror. C. B.

Davies, J. CLARENCE

Davies, WitLiam G.

Davis, CHartes H.

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

*Day, Witiiam S.

*Dran, Pror. BasHFORD

De Copper, E. J.

De Forest, Ropert W.

Delafield, Maturin L., Jr.

DELANO, WARREN, JR.

Dez Mituav, Louis J.

DemoreEst, Wituiam C.

De Puy, Henry F.

DEVEREUX, WALTER B.

Devor, FrepEerick W.

DeWitt, Witiiam G.

Dickerson, Epwarp N.

Dimock, Georce E.

Drx, Rev. Morean, 8.T.D.

Dopcr, Rev. D. Stuart,

D.D.

*Dopvce, Pror. Ricuarp E.

Donerty, Henry L.

Donatp, James M.

*Doremus, Pror. Cuas. A.

Douglas, James

Dovewass, ALFRED

Draper, Mrs. M. A. P.

Drummonp, Isaac W., M.D.

*Dupiey, P. H., Ph.D.

*Dunuam, E. K., M.D.

Dunscombe, George E.

Dv Pont, H. A.

DURAND, JOHN S.

- *DutcHer, WILLIAM

Dwicut, J., Jr., M.D.

Dwicut, Rev. M. E.

EIcKEMEYER, CARL

Elliott, Prof. A. H.

EMANUEL, JoHN H., JR.

Emmet, C. TEMPLE

Eno, Witiiam PHELPS

Escopar, Francisco

Evans, SamuEt M., M.D.

*EYERMAN, JOHN

FatrcHILD, CHARLEs 5.

ACTIVE MEMBERS

Farco, JAMEs C.

Farmer, ALEXANDER S.

*FaRRAND, Pror. LivINGsToN

Frereuson, Mrs. FarQquHar

Frrecuson, H. B., M.D.

FIELD, C. DEPEYSTER

Frevo, Wini1am B. Oscoop

*FINLEY, JOHN H.

*FisHperc, Maurice, M.D.

*FLEXNER, Simon, M.D.

Forp, James B.

Forster, WILLIAM

‘Foxwortnuy, Dr. F. W.

Frissetu, A. S.

GapE, Wituiuam F.

GALLATIN, FREDERICK

*Gies, Pror. WILLIAM J.

Gorpon, CLARENCE E.

GOULD, EDWIN

GOULD, GEORGE J.

GOULD, MISS HELEN M.

*GRaBAvU, Pror. A. W.

GratacaPp, Louis P.

Greerr, Ernest F.

*Grecory, W. K.

GUGGENHEIM, W.

Hammonp, James B.

Harriman, EK. H.

Haver, Louis, M.D.

Havemeyer, Wim F.

Heinze, Artuur P.

Heuer, Max =

*Herinc, Pror. D. W.

HERRMAN, MRS.

ESTHER

*Herrer, C. A., M.D.

Hess, SELMAR .

Hewitt, Epwarp R.

Hit, Roserr T.

Hincuman, Mrs. C. S.

Hirscu, Cuartzes S.

*Hircucocr, Miss F. R. M.

HopEnpyL, ANTON G.

Hor, Rosert

Horrman, Mrs. E. A.

*Hotuick, Artuur,- Ph.D.

Hotst, L. J. R.

Holt, Henry

Hopkins. George B.

Hoppin, W. W.

*Hornapay, Witiiam T.

*Hovey, E. O., Ph.D.

*Howr, Pror. Henry M.

*Howeg, M. A., Ph.D.

Hubbard, Thomas H.

Huspparp, Water C.

Hucues, CHARLES E.

Huusuizer, J. E.

Hunt, Joserpu H., M.D.

Hunter, Georce W.

Huntington, Archer M.

Hurwset, T. D.

Huyter, Joun S.

Hyde, B. Talbot B

Hype, E. Francis

Hyde, Frederic E., M.D.

Hyper, Henry St. J.

Iles, George

*Irvine, Pror. Joun D.

Irvine, WALTER

*Jaconi, Apram, M.D.

*Jacosy, Pror. Haroup

James, D. Wiis

James, F. Witton

Jarvie, James N.

Jesup, Morris K.

Jonxzs, A. Lrroy

Jonrs, Dwicut A.

*JULIEN A. A., Ph.D.

Kaun, O. H.

Kewuicott, Wittiam E.

*Kemp, Prof. James F.

KENNEDY, J. S.

Keppler, Rudolph

Kessler, George A.

XXX11

XXX1V

Krar, A. JULIEN

Kwapp, Herman, M.D.

*Kunz, G. F., M.A., Ph.D.

*Lamb, Osborn R.

LaMBERT, ADRIAN S.

Lanepon, Woopsury G.

LANGELOTH, J.

*LancMANN, Gustav, M.D.

LAWRENCE, A. E.

LAWRENCE, JOHN B.

Lawton, James M.

Lxao, F. Garcia P., M.D.

*Lepoux, A. R., Ph.D.

*Ler, Pror. FrepeErick 5.

Lerrerts, MarsHatt C.

*LEVISON, W. G.

Levy, EMANUEL

LIcHTENSTEIN, Pau

-LMINVILEE, Hi, Re, Ph.D.

Loeb, James

aiioen. Pror. Morris, Ph.D.

LounsBerry, R. P.

Low, Hon. Seth, LL.D.

*Lucas, Frep. A.

*Luauer, Pror. Lea Mcl.

*Lusk, Pror. GraHAM

LutTTcGen, WALTHER

McCook, Col. J. J.

McDonatp, Joun E.

McKim, Rev. Hasietrr

McMillin, Emerson

*MacDoveat.y, Pror. R.

Mack, Jacos W.

Macer, Rozerrt F.

Mann, W. D.

Marsie, Manton

Marcou, JouHn B.

Maruine, ALFRED

Marshall, Louis

Marston, E. S.

Martin, Bradley

*Martin, Pror. D. 8.

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

*Martin, TI. C.

*Matthew, W. D., Ph.D.

Maxwe tu, Francis T.

MEAD, WALTER H.

Metics, Tirus B.

*Mettzer, 8S. J., M.D.

*Merrituy, F. J. He PhD.

Mertz, Herman A.

*Mryrer, Apour, M.D.

Mituer, Georce N., M.D.

*Miner, Roy Wace

MircHetrt, Arruur M.

MircHeti, Kpwarp

MitcHeELL, Joon Murray

Morewoop, Grorce B.

Morean, J. PIERPONT

*Morcan, Tuos. H.

Morris, Lewis R.

Mortimer, W. G.,

Myers, Josep G.

Nunn, R. J.

Oaxes, Francis J.

O’Brien, J. M.

Oxsric, ADOLPH

OxreTTINGER, P. J., M.D.

*QOgilvie, Miss Ida H., Ph.D.

Olcott, E. E.

Oxucott, Mrs. E. E.

*Osborn, Prof. Henry F.

Osporn, WiLuiAm C.

Owen, Miss Juliette A.

Ow ENS, W. W.

Paine, "A. G., JR.

Painter, H. McM. .» M.D.

PARKER, PROF. weleee

ParsELt, Henry V. A.

Parsons, Mrs. Epwin

*Parsons, JOHN E.

Patton, John

*PELLEW, Pror. C. E.

PENNINGTON, WILLIAM

Perkins, William H.

M.D.

ACTIVE MEMBERS

PEerry, CHARLES J.

*PrTerRson, F., M.D.

*PETRUNKEWITSCH, A.

Prerticrew, Davin L.

PPwISTER, J. C.

Puiprs, HENRY

PHoENrIx, Luoyp

PickHaRDT, Car

Pierce, Henry Cray

*PINCHOT, GIFFORD

*Prrkin, Lucius, Ph.D.

Poccrensure, H. F.

*Poor, Pror. CuHarues L.

Poor, Henry W.

Porter, Eucene H.

Post, ABRAM 5.

aiost, ©. A.

*Post, Grorce B.

“Prince, Pror. J. D.

Proctrrer, WILLIAM

Proctor, Grorce H.

*PRuDDEN, Pror. T. M.,M.D.

*Purin, Pror. M. I.

Pyne, M. Taylor

QuacKENBOs, Pror. J. D.

QuINTARD, Epwarp

Rertyty, F. James

Ricuarpson, Freperick A.

*RicketTts, Pror. P. pr P.

RieEDERER, Lupwice

RIkER, SAMUEL

Ritey, R. Hupson

Rozz, Hon. J. Hamppen

Rogert, SAMUEL

Roserts, C. H.

Ropcers, JAMES H.

Rocers, AtLEN Morrinu

ocrrs, EH. L.

Rocers, H. H.

Rowland, Thomas Fitch

*Russy, Pror. H. H.

Schermerhorn, F. A.

XXXV

Schott, Charles M., Jr.

SEABURY, GEORGE J.

SENFF, CHARLES H.

SHEPARD, C. SIDNEY

*SHERWOOD, Grorce H.

SHILAND, ANDREW, JR.

SHuLTz, CHARLEs S.

*SickuLes, Ivin, M.D.

Sirpere, W. H. J.

SLOAN, SAMUEL

SmitH, Exiiotr C.

SmMitH, Ernest EK., M.D.

SmirH, Pror. Joun B.

SmiruH, W. WHEELER

SNOOK, SAMUEL B.

*Srarr, Pror. M. ALLEN

Stetson, F. L.

*SrEvENS, Greorce T., M.D.

*Stevenson, Prof. John J.

STOKES, JAMES

Stone, Mason A.

*STRATFORD, Pror. WILLIAM

Straus, Isipor

*STronc, Pror. Cuas. A.

*STUYVESANT, RUTHERFORD

Taceart, Rus

*Tatlock John, Jr.

Terry, James,

THompson, Lewis 8S.

*'THOMPSON, Pror. W. G.

Tuomrson, WALTER

*"THORNDIKE, Pror. E. L.

THORNE, SAMUEL

AILORRENG as (Cs.n hel):

*Towerr, R. W., Ph.D.

*TOWNSEND, CHarLes H.

Tows, C. D.

*TRoTTER, ALFRED W.

*TRowBripcE, Pror. C. C.

TuckERMAN, ALFRED, Ph.D.

*UnpERWwoopD, Pror. L. M.

Van BEUREN, Frep. T.

‘XXXVI

Van Brunt, JEREMIAH R.

_ Van Slyck George W.

Van Wyck, Robert A.

Von Narprorr, E. R.’

VoratKa, Epwarp J.

VREDENBURGH, Wm. H.

WaInwricutT, J. W., M.D.

*WALLER, Pror. ELwyn

WALLIN, Ivan E.

Warsure, F. N.

Warsoure, Paut M.,

Warp, ARTEMAS

Warp, JoHN GILBERT

*WasHineton, H. S., Ph.D.

WatTersury, J. I. ~

Weir, John

Westover, M. F.

*WHEELER, Pror. W. M.

Wuitr, Horace

Waite, Leonarp D.

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

*WHITFIELD, Pron. eee

Wickes, WILLIAM

Wicecrn, F. H., M.D.

Wiuuums, R. H.

Wits, Cuarues T.

*Witson, Pror. E. B.

Witson, Henry R.

Witson, J. H.

*WissLER, Cuark, Ph.D. ©

Wotrr, A. R.

Woop, Mrs. Crntuia A.

Woop, Wim H. S.

*WoopsBripceE, Pror. F. J. ¥

*WooDHULL, Pror. JoHN F.

*Woopwarp, Pror. R. S.

*WoopwortH, Pror. R. S.

Yparra, A. M. F., M.D.

YouncLove, Joun, M.D.

ZABRISKIE, GEORGE

ASSOCIATE MEMBERS

Berxey, Pror. C. P.

Brown, T. C.

GorpDoNn, CLARENCE

Dusuin, L. J.

Harper, Rotanp M., Ph.D.

Hunter, Grorce W.

James, F. WILTON

Jones, A. L.

Kewuicott, W. E.

Monrtacug, W. P.

Nortuup, Dwicut

Ossurn, R. C.

PEDERSEN, F. M.

Reap, ba

SHELDON, W. H.

STEVENSON, A. E.

Van SicLen, MattHew

NON-RESIDENT MEMBERS

Bucuner, Epwarp F.

Burnett, Dove ass

Davis, Wititiam H.

~Enewisu, Grorce L.

Finuay, Pror. G. I.

FRANKLAND, FREDERICK W.

Horrmay, S. V.

Kennpic, Amos B.

*Lutoyp, Pror. F. E.

*Mayer, Dr. A. G.

*Pratr, Dr. J. H.

*Ries, Pror. H.

Reuter, L. H.

*SumMNeER, Dr. F. B.

*van Incen, Pror. G.

NEW YORK —

CADEMY OF SCIENCES |

| . Editor: i

CHARLES LANE POOR

Rie ‘New York bh

Published by the Academy

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES _

OFFICERS, 1906 one

President—N. L. Britton, N. Y. Botanical Garden.

Recording Secretary—W. M. WHEELER, American Museum.

Corresponding Secretary—RicHARD E. Dopce, Teachers College.

Treasurer —EMERSON MCMILLIN, 40 Wall St. !

Librarian—Rawtpu W. Tower, American Museum.

Editor —CHARLES LANE Poor, 4 East 48th Street.

SECTION OF BIOLOGY

Chairman—H. E. Crampton, Barnard College.

Secretary—M. A. BIGELOw, Teachers College.

SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY

Chairman—EDMUND Otis Hovey, American Museum.

Secretary—A. W. Grazav, Columbia University.

SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS, AND CHEMISTRY

Chairman—C, C. TROWBRIDGE, Columbia University.

Secretary—MILTON FRANKLIN, 112 West 47th Street.

SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY

Chairman—RosERT MacDovuca tt, School of Pedagogy, New York ‘

University. K

Secretary—R. S. Woopwortu, Columbia University.

SESSION OF 1906

The Academy will meet on Monday evenings at 8.15 o'clock, —

from October to May, in the American Museum of Natural —

History, 77th Street and Central Park, West. 4

‘ Acad. Sci., Vol. XVII, Part I, September, 1906.

+r hye

ARS ie iweem

ANNALS N. Y. ACAD.°SCI., VOL. XVII. FRONTISPIECE.

BQO

GEOLOGICAL

MA P

GEORGIA

WITH SPECIAL REFERENCE

TO THE

COASTAL PLAIN

SCALE OF MILES

iJ 80 7

—

Nee re ie

S roe NL NS

=S BY, Ty HY

LS Ea U/ Sa

Se aes nea SBS)

== 4) fee ims SEN

ais

ME!

‘o Mo!

t/Vernep

Vi a

‘i ty

Dias,

VW,

L/ /p

A AL

\ Ks

~ a eat de,

AY ee

LPR Ze

EEE

SIS .

Map showing geographical relations of the Altamaha Grit region to other parts of Georgia. The fall-line sand-hills, southern lime-sink region

and littoral region are not labeled here for lack of space, but they can be readily located by the descriptions given herein. ‘The area labeled

Miocene is probably of later age, as indicated in the text. The railroads and county boundaries are shown as they were at the beginning of 1905.

[ANNALS N. Y. AcaD. Sct., Vol. XVII, Part 1, pp. I-415.

September, 1906. ]

A PHYTOGEOGRAPHICAL SKETCH OF THE ALTAMAHA

GRIT REGION OF THE COASTAL PLAIN OF

GEORGIA.

Rotanp M. HARPER.

CONTENTS.

Ka ROGHROTAOIML, S bic BRS cecaceore rope enone ncaa Ree a cece es es annie eer yen ent 5

JPUNIEAE Te

Temperate Eastern North America and some of the systems which

iewemoccmmusedaransuilbdividinos ate jer es a aus scien ei 7

Geological divisions

1. Metamorphic (Piedmont region and Blue Ridge)............ 9

2. Paleozoic (Appalachian Valley, Cumberland Plateau, etc.)... 10

PEC ONS TAU PLAIN (Cretaceous and Tertiary) oo .c 08. os ens ite)

Pe uioccoprcalblorida (Ouaternany in... 542s aes. cess ose TT

Smt Most AS GS CAO sty a ech chs tract f a wire aad BTeslelie het Nc ally rey eek ae wa bees 12

The coastal plain of Georgia and its subdivisions................ 13

zr. JPalleliom@ Getic tel antl lke aera cates ener anes eee rallye Aer ems NN ena I4

B, CHEBACSO WISE Sard, Sika ae GiOne See Ce ER ica ee Se a A 4

S, LELO VBS AAUE 5 SCENARIO ir

Fem overm Ol OCSME Se 5.4 ure ie Wepethe cies Ae San cLe Aa atenices 16

Sem MN Miat MNO OCMC Ear tay aeeisie atet net tg ushal vtillet o. cot aadeyieses e.eb-syenat Sle tess, doeatls 17

PRP AID NITIACEN Ak CIS Sy cycte osiicrege: ei-cth ede om eoh as Se, cua tained sw Osha wae oom Si Id

PEN OEEIMOSt OlSOCeMe Helis ls cose es iaiere heed Coe tense od elena 19

SES OU Mera WeImMe-Simks TESTOM 5 04) opr) | 2 Als A epevsicis ole Ge eaters 19

g. Flat pine-barrens..... fag oat, SUNDA OE CRP TIN, Ana te BSCR 19

MME TE ORT OT Oiera sreVemanene so nas aici ct nud ausce cians aetees ac cicte a wralmeeier ge 20

The Altamaha Grit region in detail

Location and boundariess.......:....... SYNC RO oeeiel ome ach ehoge s 20

~ EM SbOmy Ot) SeOloSicalexplOratiOMs -ssct. si. sphessd cies o.0 c siscn wh 21

eee ideyari comorbid em gs camel n ites ccjcie Sere vicars wie ole clare wees 22

ae IRON UN LT LILG Sly ctat Pew var-t ciatiaym fic eeere s/h Giese sie Sie e' o's (fave esl aele 22

Benen ACCS Oily en teenies) <dst asians ciciers Ke) wate) fie ls, sua is o eretateyl 22

Tertiary, Lafayette, Columbia

HARPER

Topography and drainage..............2 0... =e 2 soee

Ridges, ponds, branches, swamps, sand-hills, hammocks...... 23-26

Rate Of 6TOSION icc. eee eee ee wee oe © oe 27

Classification of streams according to origin.....- 2.55 eee 27

CUMAGC Lo es whet ove ie lee ee hae elite 28-30

Average temperature and total rainfall...................... 29

Vegetation.

General: considerations . ... 2. 2. 04..... 00)... 0 ee 30

Causes of local diversity -...5:....%8...%. same Ae ait

Environment, history, and adaptations

Classification according to habitat ......... 2. S00 33

Analogies between habitat-groups and taxonomic groups.... 33

Methodsof treatment. 2.220. 605 sad. So eee 34

The habitat-groups in detail.

t. Rock OUterOpS.... ones nwe. oes en er 4I

2. Dy pine=barrems ; . 1.0.05 5624 2 cts: oe le 44

3. Intermediate pine-barrens.............. . oe geen 50

4. Moist pine-barrens »... 2... ce. es 6 54

iG. Branch=SwAM ps oo. 00s die cet: ciel sender 62

6. Creek-swamps.. 2.014600. La de 66

7. Swamps of rivers of the second class... ..7 7 = gaeeeeeee 69

8. Muddy: river-swamps....2.....04..2.: 1a eee 71

Remarks on the eight preceding groups........ Pome, te 74

9. Cyptess ponds... 2.260. ose. vee ee > 75

to, Shallower pine-barren ponds....:...5. |... 79

ti.’ Deeper ponds along the escarpment... .: 23seeeeeeeee 81

po. Sand-bills. i... eee eae we sleek ae 82

13: Intermediate sand-hills........2......./: ope 89

ra. Sand-hill bogs. wh... ke woe alle wee go

r5. Non-alluvial'swamps os...0.....0....5% 2.) Gee 93

16.) Sand-hill ponds... 0... eek ale as ee 95

T7eeSand-hammocks)...i 0.7.0) -).0. 005) ere 97

OPP LA TMM OCKG myer Wetlnsea joonsee wine alo heen aes 2. 3a Ee 98

TQ. (River=bIUMHS cle es eee etn. 102

Statistical summary of the foregoing habitat-groups.......... 106

Relation of the typical habitat-groups to each other .......... 108

Exceptional and little-known habitats....................0-- IIo

Weeds h.issac oi iis Nasal dite taal des Saute a tieie 6 a ee II4

Eftects of civilization 2.6 62 bles. bikie eee oc ee ee ee II7

Cultivation, lumbering, turpentining, grazing, fire, destruction

and modification of fauna, artesian wells, muddy streams.

Remarkable stability of thelflora ss... 25.2 0.1). see 119

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 3

ParRT II.

PAGE

History of botanical exploration of the region................. I2I-125

Taxonomic classification of the flora.

MOSS R Oh GENE ALIMEIM Gly aie, Taieyc aieh cele aie eis bod was Acai d's oes Gealn 8h 126-132

PO ULCEOURS IC CIOS eee ataie abr cle siete Wl wails gies ote Sig’areiain/ele abe 6 133-322

|S SUBITIRA BROT MARES Sr ces es VR caer nee an sa Pr 133-308

ARGOS OSTA ek SE ac Sic Sina RR a 133-304

ID HGOEN NEC VO sTIS C3 cee is case ne ted eRe ee calor ear cP n 133-253

Gamo petaler sapien ack-ne ooh aie ice are ne bovocono seus Ee gG=Ues

Beveicc tat @ EICNUMINN LECe wan, gee te nape mh Ran ele Ne a the anes 188-253

Momtocotylecdomsr seis aetceisiater shoteuc eae en oeeal cane once ets 253-304

REUEINO STC EES Us cyte sro weh a sisee erin eoalb genial wierd «Geet at clic al! acy’e. i.e 304-308

EMoRI GOP NViLOS an te hop eee see crete aera aie snaain a aiecech tl sah oe de ee 3208-312

IB SILI EAS a Gen sree tnt hs iar ic een eA, See ae Se 313-320

WETOSGI 5 5 eG A, Te Ba or ec eure eae er paral a eae te ace Sa 313-318

IHIGIOBABIGZO 2 Bl eMe OECD I ICE eRe eee 312-320

“Ted Sy OU GRASSI So oe ASA NEL ete ee car ee ae 320-322

Penh tava Ol: $Me yCAbALO SUE a einycie 2h cave ce xi] aieepe cue seles sare speimcare eis 323-343

Total number of families, genera, and species............. 323-324

Largest families and genera, and their relations to the 19

Heap OMe Meal OTA cw aetrayay heres ees «cis ta yapcuals sins ore tedns US auecerand shales 324-328

Commonest species

“TSRSSSy SAVE UIT FL OVENT| 6 ISIN tN Udo ne RNA cee cee 327-329

Notable absentees.

(CHS RBVS ITE), ret Bi aclicn siete Ae lhe Solan eg aeceme a ei ea ae Sa 320-330

SHOISGUGS SSS croc ee etek Onc u ONE et Sere ean a SRSA EE Nn A re ra 330-331

Wlassiicatiom: Iby SthUctlnes seb. ey. cies operas cise ec elec 331-334

NOES CRUE CCS ed ca meek ease epee Sot arate lela eda lame Ah. ihc oi Mate’ ait Bo

MM MIMERCES eco cuetowape iene vcore bckaratistn tas tetas at Seay Shasta eudee © 331-332

PROS Ole SERCO: cleric ates esas cheer sacar Se dees ahadicn Neset bin aceue one agp 6 332

‘SURE OS oa Baas Gator cea ERAN SE a ig Ne Pa eA a 332-333

Vines

WWIGECIGIRNE SS Sis lot US ae ete CON Ren reat ae Ba Ina Sa 333

HERG TO ACC OES mea date cay eheen eat ed ve coc’ olicite Sieie. ve ah acehies th aloe aplanoae te 38334

ES PHPMNLEES aC PANASILCS rar crc cvaiel aie Seating acecs isis rave qieiersea yes ole 334

Flowering, dissemination, etc., of four largest families

(Composite, Leguminosze, Cyperacez, Graminez) ....... 334-330

Geographical affinities of the flora ............. Matai aks 336-338

Bibliographic history of genera and species................ 338-342

| ELIS ESIOIIS SS, PEER ces Rela eA PE RARE Neer eA Pr en RC oe 342-343

Bibliography

1. Works pertaining to the Altamaha Grit region........... 343-348

MO DIAC CVOLKSKCONSUILCU?. chacn ce cisils cle esses sy-\caes creases 348-357

ILLUSTRATIONS.

Map showing geographical relations of the Altamaha Grit region

to other parts of Genrgia........ 2.2... = cele a senna zeae

TEXT FIGURES.

t. Map of an imaginary typical portion of the Altamaha

PAGE

Grit region, showing relations of twelve of the -

principal habitats... 222s k seks

2-16. Phznological diagrams for the several habitats........

17. Diagram showing relations of the typical habitat groups

to each other and to other parts of the country....

18-21. Phenological diagrams for the four largest families. ...

22. Diagram illustrating bibliographic history of genera of

vascular plants and species of woody plants........

23. Diagram illustrating bibliographic history of 700 species

GE vascular plantsi... 2.0 oe Att islam ce 3

HAL#-TONE PLATES.

43-105

10g

335

309)

341

INTRODUCTION.

In studying the phytogeography of any region the work can

usually be divided into three stages. The first is to determine

by observation the geographical distribution and habitat re-

lations of each species, and to distinguish and classify the

habitats and their corresponding vegetation. The second is to

correlate these observations with measured environmental

factors, historical development, and the properties of the plants

themselves; or in other words, to ascertain why each plant grows

where it does. The third, which is essentially the converse of the

second, is to interpret the geological history and geographical

phenomena of the region by means of existing vegetation, just

as geologists have done by studying the inorganic crust of the

earth.

The historical development of phytogeography has proceeded

approximately in the order just named. The study of habitats

has been traced back to the time of Linneus, and that of geo-

graphical distribution still farther; but even yet in most parts

of the world no systematic classification of habitats has been

attempted. The foundations of the study of environmental

factors were laid by Humboldt a century ago, and at the present

time great activity is being manifested in this direction and in

the study of historical problems and the adaptations of plants to

environment, but much has yet to be learned. Inthe use of plants

to unlock the secrets of geology and geography, which may per-

haps be justly regarded as the ultimate object of phytogeography,

only the merest beginning has been made, though some good

work along this line was done as far back as the middle of the

nineteenth century by Gray, Hilgard, and others.

6 HARPER

In the present work, which is a study of the vegetation of a

small and in many respects homogeneous portion of temperate

Eastern North America, the first stage of investigation above

defined has been worked out as completely as time and other

limitations would allow. In the second and third stages not so

much has been done, but some of the more obvious correlations

between different sets of phenomena are pointed out, which is

always a step in the direction of explaining their causes.

The region is first located with reference to other parts of the

world, and its distinguishing characteristics described. The

vegetation is then classified, first according to habitat, then

taxonomically as in ordinary systematic works, and to some

extent according to structure. For each habitat group the

environmental factors are indicated as accurately as possible

without quantitative measurements, and some attention is paid

to development and adaptations, as well as can be done without

resort to experimental methods. In the taxonomic classification

the local and general geographical distribution and habitat re-

lations of each species are discussed as fully as space and existing

knowledge will permit; and throughout the work the geograph-

ical significance of the facts observed is kept constantly in mind.

The characteristics of the habitats, and the ranges and other

attributes of the plants, are summarized at the proper places,

by means of diagrams and tables wherever possible, to facilitate

comparison. In certain parts of the work some observations

are recorded which may seem to have little or no significance

at present but will in all probability be explained by future re-

searches, either in this or in other regions.

TEMPERATE EASTERN NORTH AMERICA AND SOME OF

THE SYSTEMS WHICH HAVE BEEN USED IN

SUBDIVIDING IT.

In discussing the distribution of the plants mentioned in this

sketch it will rarely be necessary to go beyond the limits of tem-

perate Eastern North America, a region which may be regarded

as one of the primary phytogeographic provinces of the earth,

since its florais mostly endemic. Out of some 6000 known species

of vascular plants indigenous to this part of the continent,

probably all but a few hundred are confined to it, being hemmed

in on all sides by barriers of various kinds: the arctic climate on

the north, the tropical climate on the south, the ocean on the

east and partly on the south, and the arid region on the west.

For subdividing the flora of temperate Eastern North Amer-

ica on geographical lines several different methods have been

employed. Among them are those based on political boundaries,

parallels of latitude, altitude, temperature, drainage basins, and

geological formations. The first two are probably the most

common, but have little natural significance and are used mainly

for convenience. Altitude and temperature vary gradually

from place to place, so that the boundaries of zones based

on these factors are purely arbitrary, except in a few special

cases such as the seashore and the frost line. Drainage basins

have little to recommend them, from a phytogeographical

standpoint, except definiteness of boundaries; but the areas of

different geological formations—in temperate Eastern North

America but not necessarily in all other parts of the world — seem

to answer the purpose best of all, as will be shown below.

The intimate relations between vegetation on the one hand,

and soil and topography (which are obviously correlated with

geology) on the other, are evident to every observer of geographi-

cal phenomena. Certain types of soil and topography are often

fairly constant throughout considerable areas, and usually ter-

minate more or less abruptly at their edges, so a classification

8 HARPER

of vegetation based on these factors is in many respects ideal.

While the same or similar types of soil and topography sometimes

occur in connection with different geological formations, yet in

that case they are often separated by such distances or barriers —

that plants cannot readily migrate from one formation to the

other, and the floras associated with them are then perceptibly

different.

In Georgia, and especially in the coastal plain, where most of

the writer’s field work has been carried on, similar types of

topography and vegetation seem almost invariably to indicate

similar geological conditions; and for an area of that size and

character a phytogeographical classification based on geology

seems to be the only logical one. This may not be equally true

everywhere else, but the same principles have been recognized

by Hollick on Staten Island and elsewhere in that neigh-

borhood, Gattinger in Tennessee, Smith in Alabama and Florida,

and Hilgard in Mississippi, and given prominence in their writings.

Several other botanists and geologists have noted the intimate

relations between botany and geology in a superficial way, but

there have been comparatively few attempts in this country

as yet to generalize observations of this kind or to explain them.

1The following easily overlooked references to this subject, most of

them written before. ‘‘ecology’’ became popular, and not exhaustive

enough to be mentioned in the bibliography at the end of this paper,

may be of interest:

Porcher, F.P. Resources of the Southern Fields and Forests. xi. 1869.

Flagg, Wilson. Woodsand Byways of New England, pp. 4, 5, 31, 32. 1872.

Hollick, Arthur. Relations between geological formations and the

distribution of plants [on Staten Island, N.Y.]. Bull. Torrey Club 7: 14.

15. Feb., 1880.

Britton. N. L. On the existence of a peculiar flora on the Kittatinny

Mountains of northern New Jersey. Bull. Torrey Club 11: 126-128.

1884.

Beton: N. L. Note on the flora of the Kittatinny Mountains. Bull.

Torrey Club, 142 187-189. 1887.

Raymond, R. W. Indicative plants. Trans. Am. Inst. Mining Engineers,

15:644-660. 7. 1-3. 1887. Abstractin Bull. Torrey Club 14: 127. 1887.

Evans, H. A. The relation of the flora to the geological formations

in Lincoln County, Kentucky. Bot. Gaz. 14: 310-314. 1880.

Coville, F. V. The effect of soil on the distribution of plants. Rep.

Geol. Surv. Ark., 1888+: 246-247. 1891

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 9

Most of the papers hitherto published on the subject deal only

with the more immediate and obvious effects of geology on

vegetation, acting mainly through the physical and! chemical

composition of the soil. The more remote and subtle—but no

less important—effects of topography and geological history

have not attracted so much attention, but it is one of the pur-

poses of this thesis to discuss some of them for the region under

consideration.

GEOLOGICAL DIvISsONS.

As the geological divisions of Eastern North America are not

often mentioned in botanical literature, a brief outline of them

may be of interest. In the order of age, they are as follows:

1. The Metamorphic region, with two subdivisions, the Pied-

mont and the Blue Ridge. The former extends nearly in a

straight line from Pennsylvania to eastern central Alabama, in

a belt averaging about 100 miles in width. Its underlying rocks

are mostly granite and gneiss and its soil a deep red clay. It

contains little if any limestone. That portion of the Piedmont

region included in Georgia is known as Middle Georgia.? It is

everywhere hilly, but scarcely mountainous, though a few

Dall, W. H. (Geology of Florida). Bull. 84, U.S. Geol. Surv. 95

(near top), 1892.

Small, J. K. Studies in the Botany of the Southeastern United States—

I. Bull. Torrey Club, 21:15, 1894. (One reference only.)

Maxon, W.R. On the occurrence of the Hart’s Tongue in America.

Fernwort Papers 30-46. 1900.

Mohr, C. The spontaneous flora of Alabama inits relation to agricult-

ure. Contr. U. S. Nat. Herb. 6: 821-824. 1901.

Macbride, T. H. The Alamogordo Desert Science II. 21: go-97.

Jan. 20, 1905.

1For recent maps showing some of these divisions see one by W. M.

Davis in Mill’s International Geography, p. 7109, fig. 353, 1900; also

fig. 191 in Dodge’s Advanced Geography, 1905.

* For some notes on the flora of a typical portion of Middle Georgia

see Bull. Torrey Club 27: 320-341. 1900. The plants of the corre-

sponding portion of Alabama have been enumerated by Prof. Earle in

Bull. 119, Ala. Agric. Exp. Sta, 1902. The physiography and geology

of Middle Georgia are discussed by T. L. Watson in Bull. Geol. Surv.

Ga. 9A: 60-65 1902.

10 HARPER

isolated peaks (called ‘‘monadnocks”’ by physiographers), of

which Stone Mountain! is a magnificent example, stand out

conspicuously above the rest of the country. The Blue Ridge,

extending in its typical development from Pennsylvania to

Georgia, borders the Piedmont region on the northwest and

includes the highest mountains of Eastern North America. The

rocks of this region are chiefly quartzite, sandstone, and marble,

and their elevation above the more obdurate granite is explained

by the great Appalachian uplift which took place at the end of

the Paleozoic period.?

The whole Metamorphic region has doubtless been covered

with vegetation since Paleozoic or early Cretaceous times, which

cannot be said of any other part of Eastern North America.

There are many evidences, other than geological, of the great

antiquity of this flora, the beginning of which doubtless ante-

dates the appearance of all species of plants now living.

2. The Paleozoic region. This is bounded on the southeast

by the Blue Ridge. On the north, just beyond the Ohio River,

it is overlaid by glacial drift, and on the west it passes beneath

the coastal plain. Three divisions of it are distinguished, though

not very sharply defined. The Appalachian Valley region is

a rather narrow belt extending from Pennsylvania to Central

Alabama, and characterized by long narrow parallel ridges with

broad level valleys between them. Northwest of that is the

Cumberland plateau, with broad table-lands and narrow valleys,

and still farther northwest this flattens out into the ‘“‘barrens”’

and prairies of Kentucky and adjoining states. The Palezo-

zoic rocks are mostly limestone, sandstone and shale, and the

vegetation covering them probably dates from Cretaceous or.

Tertiary times.

3. The Coastal Plain. This is defined as that part of the

North American continent underlaid by Cretaceous and Tertiary

rocks and adjacent to the Atlantic and Gulf coasts.3 It prob-

-1See Bull. Torrey Club 28: 454, pl. 29, 7. I. got.

2 For a recent ecological study of the flora of a typical portion of the

Blue Ridge see Harshberger, Bot. Gaz. 36: 241-258, 368-383. 1903.

>The formations of the same age in the Great Plains region and west

of there have nothing to do with the coastal plain.

THE ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 11

ably has no counterpart in any other part of the world. In its

typical development it extends from about the mouth of the

Hudson River uninterruptedly to the Rio Grande, and up the

Mississippi valley to southern Illinois. Most of Long Island,

Cape Cod, and the southern islands of New England also belong

to the coastal plain, strictly speaking, but as these extreme

northeastern portions are mostly covered with glacial drift, and

otherwise anomalous, they are not usually treated with the rest.

Just what becomes of the coastal plain at its other end, in Mexico,

is not definitely known, but it probably does not extend very far

into that country. The boundary between the coastal plain

and the Piedmont region which adjoins it all along the Atlantic

slope is very distinct and unmistakable, as has already been

pointed out,' and is known as the fall-line.

Practically the whole of the coastal plain is or has been covered

with a superficial formation known as the Lafayette, believed to

be of Pliocene age, and much of that is in turn overlaid with a

Pleistocene formation, the Columbia. The importance of these

two formations from a phytogeographical standpoint has been

quite generally overlooked. They not only constitute the

present soils of the coastal plain, making it difficult to trace the

older formations beneath except by their topography, but they

also show that the present flora of that region must be of very

recent origin, differing greatly in this respect from that of the

older regions just mentioned.

4. Subtropical Florida. The southern extremity of Florida,

including the Everglades and a good deal of contiguous territory,

is sometimes regarded as an extension of the coastal plain and

sometimes as a distinct province. It is believed to be of

Pleistocene age, and is certainly not covered by the superficial

formations above mentioned. This alone would be enough to

make its soil and flora very different from that of the genuine

coastal plain, but it happens also that this is the only part of

the Eastern United States free from frost, so it is an open

- question whether the peculiar flora of this region (said to

resemble that of the neighboring Antilles as much as it does

1 Bull. Torrey Club 31: 10. 1904; Rhodora 4: 69. 1905.

12 HARPER

that of the rest of the continent) is due more to soil or to

climate.

5. The glaciated region. The greater part of temperate Eastern

North America north of latitude 40° is covered with many feet of

glacial drift, obliterating most of the pre-existing geological and

topographic features. This is believed to be approximately con-

temporaneous with or even subsequent to the Columbia form-

ation of the coastal plain. The flora of the glaciated region

has several features in common with that of the coastal plain,

as the writer has recently pointed out,! and this is doubtless

due largely to the similarity in age. The older formations are

exposed at many points in the glaciated region, however, and

this gives a greater diversity to the flora than it would other-

wise have.

(A few comparatively small areas of Triassic rocks, located

chiefly in New Jersey and North Carolina, have not been men-

tioned above because they are too limited in extent to have

any peculiar flora of their own. They are usually classed with

the Piedmont region, which they immediately adjoin.) |

Sufficient data are not yet available for estimating with any

degree of accuracy the number of indigenous species of plants

in the several natural divisions above outlined, and the pro-

portion of species endemic to each. In order to do this the

known ranges of all the species would have to be worked out in

terms of physiographic divisions, instead of political divisions

as has been customary hitherto, and that would require years

of study. It is perhaps safe to assume, however, that in the

coastal plain, between (but not including) the glaciated portion

in the northeast, the subtropical portion in the southeast, and

the arid portion in the southwest, there are in the neighborhood

of 3000 native species of flowering plants. The number of

endemic species assigned to a given region depends largely on

the interpretation of specific limits, but the coastal plain pro-

bably contains a larger endemic element than any one other

division, and perhaps as many endemics as all the rest of

temperate Eastern North America combined.

1 Rhodora 7: 69-80. April, 1905.

i ¢

THE ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 13

The conclusion is almost irresistible that nearly all these

endemic forms (whether species or groups of higher or lower

rank) in the coastal plain must be of very recent origin. For

they could not have existed in their present habitats in Pleisto-

cene times, when the coastal plain was nearly all submerged,

and if at that time they grew farther inland they have left no

trace of the fact. The considerable number of species which

are not quite confined to the coastal plain but grow also at

a few isolated localities in adjoining regions are perhaps of

equally recent origin, though the evidence is not so conclusive

in such cases.

THe COASTAL PLAIN OF GEORGIA IN PARTICULAR.

There is no more typical portion of the whole coastal plain

than the 35,000 square miles of it included in Georgia, where

it constitutes the southern three-fifths of the state. This area

(popularly known as South Georgia) is about equally divided

between the Atlantic and Gulf slopes. It is equally distant

from Long Island and southern New England, where the coastal

plain formations are mostly buried beneath the glacial drift,

and southern Texas, where the aridity of the climate causes an

equally profound modification of the coastal-plain flora.! The

fact that it is also midway between the highest mountains of

Eastern North America, which have presumably been continu-

ously covered with vegetation since before the coastal plain

existed, and subtropical Florida, where most of our representa-

tives of tropical species and genera probably first entered this

country, has doubtless had a marked influence on the present

composition of the vegetation of south Georgia.

Almost all divisions of the coastal plain strata are represented

in Georgia, and each is usually recognizable by its characteristic

topography and flora. In general the oldest strata come to the

surface (disregarding for the present the overlying Lafayette and

Columbia formations) farthest inland and at the highest altitude.

The strata are believed to have an average seaward slope of 30 or

40 feet to the mile, and their outcropping areas form elongated

1 See Bray, U. S. Bureau of Foresiry, Bull. 47: 15, 29. 1904

14 HARPER

belts approximately parallel to the coast, as indicated on the map

(See frontispiece).

South Georgia contains the following well-marked natural

subdivisions.

1. Fall-line sand-hills. Extending with some interruptions

along the fall-line, not only in Georgia! but in the Carolinas? and

apparently also in Alabama,’ is a rather narrow belt of sand-

hills, standing higher than the rest of the coastal plain on one

side and the Piedmont region on the other. (Between the Flint

and Chattahoochee rivers the summits of the fall-line sand-hills

are nearly if not quite 700 feet above sea-level, being probably

the highest part of the coastal plain in the Eastern United States.)

The soil of the sand-hills is nearly pure sand, apparently of the

Columbia formation (though a much greater age is assigned to it

by some geologists). The maximum depth of the sand is unknown,

but there is no reason to suppose that it constitutes the whole

of the hills from top to bottom. The topography of the sand-

hill belt was probably carved out during the Tertiary period,

and then during the Pleistocene submergence covered with the

mantle of sand which effectually protects the underlying clay or

rocks from erosion. It is not yet known why sand-hills of this

type are confined to the vicinity of the fall-line, or what relation

they béar to the Cretaceous and Eocene rocks. Their flora is very

similar to that of the river and creek sand-hills which will be dis-

cussed in some of the succeeding pages.

2. Cretaceous. The Cretaceous is not very well represented

in Georgia, comprising only about 2% of the area of the coastal

plain. It is extensive enough to give character to the topog-

raphy only west of the Flint River. East of there it is found

outcropping in some ravines near the fall-line, but cannot very

well be shown on a map.

The Cretaceous rocks in Georgia are mostly argillaceous,

with some traces of calcium carbonate, and have usually a

characteristic gray color. (The Selma Chalk or Rotten Lime-

1 Bull. Torrey Club 31: 10-12. 1904.

2 orreya 3: 120.) 1903.

3 Smith, Geol. of the Coastal Plain of Ala. 349. 1894; Mohr, Plant

Lije"of "Ala. 96-97. Igot.

j P }

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 15

stone, which is said to besuch a notable feature of the Creta-

ceous region of Alabama, forming the ‘‘ black prairies”’ there,!

is not known in Georgia.) The topography suggests that of the

Appalachian Valley on a reduced scale, the valleys being broader

than the ridges, showing that the region has been exposed to

erosion a relatively long time.? The soils of this region are mostly

derived from the Lafayette and Columbia formations, the former

being often (perhaps usually) not more than ten feet in thick-

ness, and the latter on top of it still less, or wanting.

3. Eocene. The Eocene region is quite extensive in Georgia,

reaching entirely across the state and covering about 18% of the

coastal plain. Geologists recognize several subdivisions, Mid-

wayan, Chickasawan or Sabine, Claibornian, etc., but these do

not differ much from each other in surface features except that

the Sabine is usually more level than the rest, and contains a few

shallow ponds.

The Eocene rocks in Georgia were probably mostly limestone

when first formed, but now those that crop out (except on river

bluffs) are usually almost completely silicified, and their hardness

gives rise to the most rugged topography in South Georgia.

There are many places in the Eocene region where the topog-

raphy and flora are strikingly similar to those of the Piedmont

region a hundred miles farther north. Probably 99% of the

Eocene strata are covered by the red loam of the Lafayette for-

mation, often of considerable thickness. The Columbia is not so

extensive here as in the Cretaceous region, probably because it

has long ago been washed off the steep hillsides, or because the

Eocene region stands higher and was not all submerged in the

Columbia epoch. }

- In both the Cretaceous and Eocene regions of Georgia broad-

leaved forests predominate, and their aspect is quite like that of

the Middle Georgia forests, but they are readily distinguished

by the constant presence of a few species confined to the coastal

plain, such as Pinus glabra, Dendropogon usneoides, Uvularia

Floridana, Smilax pumila, Myrica cerifera, Quercus laurifolia,

1 See Mohr, Contr. U. S. Nat. Herb. 6: 97-105. got.

2 For some notes on its flora see Bull. Torrey Club 30: 286-287. 1903.

16 HARPER

Magnolia grandiflora, and Sebastiana ligustrina.| And in almost ~

any river-swamp in the Eocene region we can find Taxodimm

distichum, Sabal glabra, Planera aquatica, and Brunnichia cirrhosa,

whose ranges (in Georgia at least) terminate abruptly at the fall-

line. Furthermore, on almost every square mile of South Georgia

are sandy bogs containing still other species which rarely or never

cross the fall-line.

4. Lower Oligocene. Next to the Eocene region, and appar-

ently without any sharp demarcation between them, is the area

of the Lower Oligocene formations (Jacksonian, Vicksburgian,

etc.). Including the Jacksonian (which by many geologists is

placed in the Eocene, but from a phytogeographical standpoint

seems more closely allied with the Vicksburgian), this division

covers about 19% of the area of South Georgia.

The Lower Oligocene rocks are partly soft limestone and partly

siliceous. In that part known as the lime-sink region (which

is mostly near the Flint River), caves, subterranean streams,

large ponds and smaller basin-like depressions are common.

Surface streams are rare; one can often travel miles without seeing

running water. The topography is comparatively level, with

rarely anything thatcan be called ahill. Practically the whole ~

region, except on steep banks of streams, is covered with the

Lafayette and Columbia formations, but the influence of the

limestone beneath is sometimes noticeable in the vegetation.

In this region the pine-barrens (7. e., the forests in which Pinus

palustris is more abundant than all other arborescent species

combined, and the trees do not grow thickly enough to sensibly

diminish the quantity of light which reaches the ground) begin,

and from there to the coast they cover about nine-tenths of the

country. The pine-barrens do not begin suddenly, however.

At their inland limit the pines are mixed with a considerable

quantity of oaks, mostly of two species with broad leaves rusty

beneath (Q. Marylandica and Q. digitata). Toward the coast

the quantity of oaks becomes less, and the two species just men-

tioned are gradually replaced by others with narrower or paler

or more glossy leaves (Q. brevifolia, Q. Margaretta, Q. Catesbet).

See also Bull. Torrey Club 31: 15-16. 1904; 32: 453. 1905.

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 17/

The term “‘pine-barrens’’ is not the most appropriate im-

aginable, and I am not sure that it isever used in conversation

by the present inhabitants of South Georgia, who usually say

“piney woods” instead. But the term was undoubtedly used in

South Carolina and elsewhere a century or more ago, as is shown

by the writings of Catesby, Drayton, Elliott, F. A. Michaux,

and others, and it is so common in botanical literature that I

have retained itin this work. The name was doubtless given

by the early settlers through a misapprehension (owing to the

sparsity of trees), as was the case in the “barrens”’ of Kentucky,

about which Prof. Shaler says:: “It is an interesting his-

torical fact that the first settlers of the country deemed the

untimbered limestone lands of western Kentucky infertile,

and therefore gave to them the name of ‘barrens.’ They

were led to the conclusion that these lands were sterile by the

fact that in their previous experience the only untimbered

lands with which they had come in contact were unsuited to

agriculture.”’

5. Chattahoochee. Lying just above the Vicksburgian

Oligocene in the geological column, and apparently separated

from it by a slight unconformity,? is the Chattahoochee for-

mation, the oldest member of the Upper Oligocene series. Its

area in Georgia is too small to be shown on the map, but it

crops out at the base of the Altamaha Grit (the next division)

at several points in Decatur County (particularly near the

corner of the state,? in a gorge near Faceville,t and at the

Lime Sink or Forest Falls*), also at the ‘‘Rock House” (a

phenomenon similar to Forest Falls on a smaller scale) about

two miles east of Wenona in Dooly County, at. Upper Seven

‘Ann. Rep. U. S. Geol. Surv. 121: 325. 18091.

*See Pumpelly, Am. Jour. Sct. III. 46: 445-447. Dec., 1893; Foerste,

Am. Jour. Sci. III. 48: 41-54. July, 1894; Vaughan, Science II. 12:

873-875. Dec. 7, 1900.

® Bull. Torrey Club 32: 149, 150. 1905.

4 Foerste, Am. Jour. Sct, III. 48: 51-54. 1894; McCallie, Bull. Geol.

Surv. Ga. 5: 51. 18096.

5 Bull. Torrey Club 30: 289-290. 1903. See also the papers by

Foerste and McCallie just cited.

‘aa

—_

18 HARPER

Bluffs on the Ocmulgee River (near the mouth of House Creek !)

in Wilcox County, and probable at corresponding points on the

Oconee and Ogeechee rivers. The Chattahoochee formation

seems to be rich in plant-food, and wherever it crops out there

is a fine growth of angiospermous trees, about which more will

be said later.

6. Altamaha Grit. The formation with which this sketch

is chiefly concerned lies just above the Chattahoochee at several

places, and for this reason has been considered next to it in age

by some geologists. (It is not known to contain any recog-

nizable fossils, and its age therefore cannot be determined in

the usual way.) But on the other hand nothing older than

Lafayette has ever been seen above the Grit, and 1t seems more

reasonable to regard the latter as among the more recent for-

mations of the coastal plain, probably as Pliocene. There is

every reason to believe that the Altamaha Grit is the equiv-

alent of the Grand Gulf formation of the states farther west,2

whose age has been equally in doubt,? but as the actual con--

tinuity of these two formations has not yet been traced it

seems best to retain the appropriate and distinctive name Alta-

hama Grit for the present, until it is proved to be a synonym

of the earlier (and somewhat misleading) designation, Grand

Gulf.

The region in which the unmistakable exposures and char-

acteristic topography of the Altamaha Grit occur corresponds

approximately with the middle third of the coastal plain of

Georgia. Its inland edge is marked nearly all the way across

the state by an escarpment which is one of the notable features

of the pine-barren region. In Decatur County the Grit stands

200 feet or so above the soft rocks of the lime-sink region, but

east of the Ocmulgee River, where the Lower Oligocene rocks

are harder (the lime-sink phase seems to be wanting there),

the escarpment is not so conspicuous.

1 Dall & Harris, Bull. U. S Geol. Surv. 84: 81. 1802.

2 See Bull. Torrey Club 32: 144, 145. 1905.

3 For references to a discussion of this matter see Bull. Torrey Club 32:

106 (footnote). 1905. :

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 19

The topography and flora of this region will be discussed in

detail farther on.

7. Uppermost Oligocene. Just south of the Altamaha Grit

country in Decatur and Thomas Counties, and perhaps also in

Brooks and Lowndes, are strata belonging to the Alum Bluff

group,! which is probably the uppermost member of the Oligocene

series in Georgia. It passes southward into Florida, where it

is said to be conformably overlaid by Miocene strata toward the

Gulf. Its eastern and western limits are not known. The rock

of this region is an impure limestone, and the topography is

quite rugged, compared with the rest of the coastal plain. In

Decatur County (I have not studied it much elsewhere), the

soil is almost entirely red loam, presumably Lafayette, and

broad-leaved forests (in which Magnolia grandzflora is usually

conspicuous) predominate, Pinus palustris being correspondingly

scarce. The whole aspect of the country strongly suggests the

Eocene region a hundred miles farther north.?

8. Southern Lime-sink region. In the southern part of

Lowndes County (and probably also in Brooks and Echols and

adjacent Florida) is a lime-sink region having much the same

character as the Lower Oligocene lime-sink region already men-

tioned, and containing some of the largest ponds in the state.

Geologically this region seems to have Lower Oligocene lime-

stone strata near enough to the surface to exert a decided influence

on the topography, but overlaid by a thin layer of Altamaha

Grit, and doubtless also by Lafayette and Columbia in most

places.

g. Flat pine-barrens. Towards the coast the Altamaha Grit

region passes gradually into a country so nearly level that there

is little distinction between wet and dry pine-barrens, swamps,

ponds, and streams (except the rivers). This region includes

Okefinokee Swamp, and stretches coastward about to tide-water.

It also extends westward at least to Lowndes County, and north-

eastward and southward beyond the borders of the state. It

1 According to Vaughan, Bull. U. S. Geol. Surv. 213: 392. 1903.

2 For a few additional notes on the Uppermost Oligocene region see

Bull. Torrey Club, 30: 289-335. 1903.

3 See Bull. Torrey Club 31: 14, 15, 7. 3. 1904.

20 HARPER

comprises about 22% of the area of South Georgia, and

its average altitude is about 100 feet above sea-level. The

Altamaha Grit or some phase of it probably underlies all the

flat pine-barrens, but as it is everywhere covered to such a

depth with Lafayette and Columbia that no rock outcrops are

known, and the topography is appreciably different, it seems

best to keep the flat country apart from the typical Altamaha

Grit region for the purposes of the present discussion.

Pinus palustris is the prevailing tree in this as in other pine-

barren regions, and the whole flora is a good deal like that of

the Altamaha Grit region, but probably not so rich, on account

of the less diversified topography.

10. Littoral Region. Lastly there is the maritime or littoral

region, including the islands and marshes along the coast and

part of the mainland of the six maritime counties. Little is

known of its geology except that the surface is all of the Columbia

formation (mostly sand but sometimes clay), or recent alluvium

along the rivers, while the Lafayette is either absent or buried

out of reach by younger formations.

Pine-barrens are not typical of this region. Sand-dunes, salt

and brackish marshes, and dense forests of live-oaks and other

angiospermous evergreens are more common. Sabal Palmetto

is a characteristic tree. The phytogeographical features do

not differ conspicuously from those described by Kearney on.

the coast of North Carolina, Cokerin South Carolina, Mohr in

Alabama, and Lloyd and Tracy in Mississippi and Louisiana.

THE ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION IN DETAIL.

LOCATION AND BOUNDARIES.

Up to 25 years ago the particular region under consideration

seems to have been entirely unknown to science. In 1881 Dr.

E. W. Hilgard‘ published a geological map of a part of the coastal

plain of the southeastern states, showing among other things

a few thousand square miles of “‘ Miocene(?) sandstone”’ in south-

eastern Georgia, corresponding for the most part with what we

now know asthe Altamaha Grit region. There is no reference to

this area in the accompanying text, but it was probably in-

serted on the authority of Dr. R. H. Loughridge, who was about

that time making a geological and agricultural survey of Georgia

for the U.S. Census office. In Dr. Loughridge’s report, published

in 1884 in the 6th volume of the final reports of the Tenth Cen-

sus, the area of this “‘sandstone’’ was mapped in more detail,

and some outcrops of it were described. Its geological posi-

tion was also recognized.

The name Altamaha Grit was given to the formation by Dr.

W. H. Dall? in 1892, after it had been studied along the Ocmulgee

and Altamaha rivers by Mr. Frank Burns, of the U. S. Geo-

logical Survey. Butits boundaries were very imperfectly known,

mostly on account of the great scarcity of outcrops, until inves-

tigated from a phytogeographical standpoint by the writer in the

summer of 1903% and spring of 1904. And in the latter

year Mr. S. W. McCallie of the Geological Survey of Georgia

also became interested in it, and discovered some additional out-

erops of the characteristic rock, particularly in Johnson

County.

Our present knowledge of the areal distribution of this and

other geological formations of the coastal plain of Georgia (omit-

ting subdivisions of the Cretaceous and Eocene) is shown on the

Met OUT. SGl. Wily 22) pl. © 3.

2 Bull. U. S. Geol. Surv. 84: 81.

3See Bull. Torrey Club 32: 141-147. 1905.

22 HARPER

accompanying map (frontispiece). The Altamaha Grit covers

about 11,000 square miles, including parts of twenty counties,

midway between the fall-line and the coast. Its inland edge is

quite sharply defined, always by a change in topography and a

less conspicuous but unmistakable change in flora, and in many

places by a bold escarpment besides. Its southern boundary in

Decatur and Thomas Counties is pretty well marked by the

change from open pine-barrens to the broad-leaved forests of the

Uppermost Oligocene region, but toward the southeast it is

impossible in the light of present knowledge to say just where

the Altamaha Grit terminates or disappears and the flat country

begins. This uncertainty makes little difference for the pur-

poses of this work, however, for very few species reach their

inland limits in the debatable territory.

Geodetically the Altamaha Grit region (if confined to Georgia),

is included between 30° 45’ and 32° 50’ north latitude and 81° 25’

and 84° 50’ west longitude. In altitude above sea-level it ranges

from about 4oo feet where the escarpment intersects the

Atlantic and Gulf divide to 50 or 75 feet on the southeast, and

there are consequently no alpine or maritime elements inits

flora.

GEOLOGY AND SOILS.

The Altamaha Grit is probably of Pliocene age, as stated

above. Outcrops of the characteristic rock are comparatively

rare, constituting probably not more than one hundredth of

one per cent of the entire area, but they have been

seen or heard of by the writer in nearly every county in the

region.

The outcrops occur either on hillsides in the open pine-barrens,

in beds of streams, or on river-banks. The hillside outcrops

show usually a fine-grained conglomerate consisting of small

quartz pebbles and grains of sand cemented together with argil-

laceous material. Chemically it must be composed of silica and

alumina, with some iron oxide, but very little if any calcium

carbonate. A fresh surface of the Grit (at least the upland phase

of it) is yellowish with coarse red mottlings, but it all weathers to a

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 23

dull reddish brown, almost exactly the color of pine bark (a very

appropriate resemblance, one might say).! The rock is not very

hard, and can easily be broken up with suitable tools. It finds

some use locally for curbing and foundations.

Where it is exposed on river-banks (near Mount Vernon and

Lumber City for instance) it has quite a different appearance

from the hillside outcrops, being apparently softer and more

homogeneous, with a greenish tinge. But many other coastal

plain rocks show an equal diversity between their river-bank

and upland outcrops.

When thoroughly decomposed by atmospheric agencies the

Grit can often hardly be distinguished from the Lafayette loam,

and in railroad cuts and other artificial excavations which ex-

pose the indurated Grit it issometimes impossible to say whether

there is any Lafayette above it or not.

The Lafayette probably covers more than 99% of the Altamaha

Grit region, but its presence cannot easily be proved, for the

reason just stated, and also because neither it nor the Grit is

fossiliferous. Little if anything is known as to its maximum

thickness in this region. In composition it is a loam, containing

probably as much sand as clay. Farther inland it is often

brick-red, but in the Altamaha Grit region, and in pine-barrens

generally, its color is considerably lighter and might be de-

scribed as terra-cotta.

The Columbia formation is nearly everywhere present, varying

in thickness from 25 feet or more in the sand-hills to nothing on

rock outcrops and on some of the ridges. It consists of nearly

pure sand, probably containing very little plant-food. Where

not mixed with humus it is white or very pale buff.

The distinction between the Lafayette and Columbia formations

is very familiar to the natives, who know that if they want clay

for any purpose they can get it anywhere by digging through a

few inches or feet of sand.

Unlike the older parts of the coastal plain, the Altamaha Grit

region contains almost no traces of limestone, judging from the

nature of the vegetation.

See also Bull. Torrey Club, 32: 144. 1905.

24 HARPER

TOPOGRAPHY AND DRAINAGE.

The topography of the region under consideration is typically

“rolling,’’ and quite pleasing to the eye, in comparison with the

flatness which characterizes most pine-barren regions. But

there are no jagged outlines, or even steep-sided gullies or ravines

as in the older parts of the coastal plain. The ridges rarely

culminate in peaks, and the valleys rarely if ever terminate in

ponds or depressions. A straight line drawn across the country

in any direction (of which the railroads furnish numerous ex-

cellent examples), would cross on an average two or three valleys

to the mile, each perhaps 20 or 39 feet lower than the intervening ‘

ridges. In some places the country is quite flat for several

square miles, as may be seen around Collins in Tattnall County,

also in the eastern edge of Irwin County near the sources of the

Satilla River, and more commonly toward the coastward edge of

our territory. Such flat areas seem to be always plateaus, and

never valleys, showing that the topography is comparatively

young, as we should expect.

Ponds are pretty well distributed over the whole region, es-

pecially in the flat spots, but they are entirely wanting over

hundreds of square miles, particularly in the northernmost

counties. As has been noted elsewhere, none of the ordinary

ponds are deep enough to retain water throughout the year,

and strictly aquatic plants are therefore absent from them.

The cause of these numerous ponds is not definitely known.

The presence of similar depressions in other parts of the coastal

plain is often directly traceable to underlying limestone, but the

Altamaha Grit region is singularly free from anything of this kind.

There are in the region a very few examples (I have seen one near

Douglas and heard of another near Statesboro) of “bottomless”

ponds, or “‘lime-sinks’’ as the natives call them, but they have

little in common with the genuine lime-sinks near the Flint River.

At the one near Douglas there is nothing in the color of the water

or in the nature of the vegetation around its edges to indicate the

presence of any calcium carbonate.

In the typical rolling country every little valley contains a

1 Bull. Torrey Club 32: 146. 1905.

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 25

small and often intermittent branch,! bordered by more or less

swamp.? In some cases the very head of a branch is not surround-

ed by swamp, but is occupied by moisture-loving herbs. Sucha

place is known as a “‘dreen.’’3 The branches of course unite

into larger streams (creeks and rivers) at longer intervals.

A most striking feature of the Altamaha Grit region, and in

Georgia mostly confined to it, is the sand-hills, which border the

swamps of nearly all the creeks and rivers. With few exceptions

(such as Rocky Creek in Tattnall County, House Creek in Wilcox,

and the Ochlocknee River in Thomas), the sand-hills are all on

the left (northeast) sides of the streams to which they belong.

The sand-hills consist merely of homogeneous deposits of

Columbia sand, sometimes at least 25 feet deep and over a mile

wide, bordering the streams. The fact that they are called hills

1The term “branch,” as used universally throughout Georgia and

doubtless in adjacent states, and to some extent as far north as Maryland

and Indiana, is synonymous with ‘‘brook” in New England and vicinity.’

“Branch’’ in this sense is rarely seen in print, and might be considered

by some as a mere provincialism, but the only reason ‘“‘brook’’ has the

preference is that it happens to be used in the thickly settled parts of the

English -speaking world, where more literature to the square mile has been

produced than anywhere else. Abbot in his Georgia Insects (p. 25),

published in London in 1797, mentions “‘rivulets, or branches, as they are

called in America,’’ and in F. A. Michaux’s North American Sylva, pub-

lished early in the 19th century, there are frequent references to branch.

swamps. (See for instance under Gordonia Lasianthus in the third volume

of the original French edition, where he speaks of ‘“‘les Branchs swamps,

marais longs et étroits, qui traversent dans toutes sortes de directions les

Pinieres, Pines barrens.’’)

2 The word “‘swamp’”’ is rather loosely defined in the dictionaries. But

throughout south Georgia it almost invariably means a wet place full of

trees. For the treeless wet places, sometimes called swamps in the North,we

already have such words as ‘‘marsh,”’ ‘‘bog,’’ and ‘‘meadow,”’ so there is

no good reason why the definition of ‘‘swamp”’ should not be restricted

as here indicated. It should be borne in mind that swamps are much

more abundant in the coastal plain than in any other part of the United

States, so the natives of that part of the country are in a much better

position to know exactly what a swamp is than are those who live else-

where.

3 A word of local application, doubtless a corruption of ‘‘drain,’’ but

not exactly synonymous with it..

26 HARPER

does not indicate that they are higher than the country on both

sides, but merely that they have a decided slope on one side

(toward the stream). They are most delightful places to explore,

being free or nearly free from mud, dust, briers, snakes, mosqui-

toes and other discomforts, and on them the botanist continually

encounters pleasant surprises in the way of rare plants. Their

continuity lengthwise of the stream is interrupted by occasional

tributary streams, but otherwise one may walk for miles on them

almost without any trouble.

The origin of these fluvial sand-hills, and the reasons why

they are so largely confined to the Altamaha Grit region and to

one side of the streams, are as little known as the analogous

problems in connection with the fall-line sand-hills. It happens

that most of them lie off the main highways of travel, and con-

sequently have been little studied by other persons than the

writer. One may travel by the usual routes from Macon to

Savannah, Brunswick, Valdosta, or Thomasville, right across the

Altamaha Grit region, without seeing a sand-hill. On the two

most direct routes from Savannah to Jacksonville, sand-hills are

seen only at the Altamaha River, and going from Savannah to

Waycross and Bainbridge, a distance of 237 miles, the only

sand-hills crossed are those of the Altamaha and Satilla rivers.

But from the newer railroads of South Georgia (four or five

hundred miles of which have been built since 1900), sand-hills

are visible at many points.

There seem to be very few unmistakable allusions to stream

sand-hills in literature dealing with other states, so but little

idea can be had of their total geographical distribution. The only

“sand-hills’? mentioned as such in Dr. Mohr’s Plant Life of

Alabama (p. 195) cannot be definitely correlated with those

under discussion here, but in Dr. Smith’s Report on the Geology

of the Coastal Plain of Alabama (pp. 56, 57, 84, etc.,) there are

brief descriptions of such features, located in parts of the state

which Dr. Mohr probably never explored. There are a few meager

evidences of the same sort of thing in South Carolina. Elliott,!

1Bot. S. C. &@ Ga., 2: 676. 1824. See also Curt. Bot. Mag, 54: pl.

2758. 1827.

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA PAT

for instance, thus describes a station for Ceratiola ericoides:

“Near Murphy’s Bridge on the Edisto it covers a space of three

of four hundred yards in width, and two or three miles long,

which appears to have been a sand-bank formed by some of the

ancient freshets of that river, and on which only lichens, and a

few stunted oaks (Q. Catesbez and nigra) are found intermingled

with it.”

At the base of most sand-hills in our territory is a densely

wooded area knownasa‘“‘hammock.’’! A hammock can scarcely

be classed as a topographic feature, however, since it is character-

ized by its vegetation rather than by topography. The vegeta-

tion of hammocks, and of the peculiar intermediate forms known

as sand-hammocks, will be discussed at the proper place.

Although the topography in the Altamaha Grit country, as

in most other parts of the world, has doubtless been determined

almost entirely by erosion, yet thereis almost no trace of any

erosion going on there at the present time. There are several

reasons for this. Before the Columbia period there must have

been times when the Lafayette loam which then formed the sur-

face was being worn down quite rapidly in places, giving the

topography approximately the form it has to-day. But now

the porous Columbia sand allows rain-water to sink into the

ground almost immediately without disturbing the surface,

while at the same time the impervious Lafayette just beneath

protects the underlying rocks from decay. Furthermore, the

smaller streams are usually so filled with trees, shrubs, and the

humus derived from them that they cannot deepen their chan -

nels appreciably. Thus we have a topography of unusual

stability. The impotence of erosive forces is shown by the

appearance of the streams. The branches, creeks, and rivers

rising in this region (andin other parts of the coastal plain cov-

ered with the Columbia sands) are rarely or nevermuddy. The

only sediment they carry ordinarily is finely divided vegetable

matter, which gives the water a blackish appearance, just as in

the rivers of the glaciated region where analogous soil conditions

‘Fora discussion of the orthography, definition, and geographical dis-

tribution of this word see Sczence II. 22: 400-402. Sept. 29, 1905.

28 HARPER

prevail.! Some of the rivers traversing the Altamaha Grit,

such as the Ohoopee and Canoochee, are bordered in places

by sand banks evidently of recent alluvial origin, but these

do not necessarily indicate that there is much erosion going

on at present.

The streams of the Altamaha Grit region may be divided into

three classes according to origin, as follows:

1. The rivers which rise north of the fall-line, among the red

hills of Middle Georgia, and are consequently always more or less

muddy. To this class belong the Ogeechee (which originates

such a short distance above the fall-line that it approaches the

next class) and the Oconee and Ocmulgee, which unite near the

center of the region to form the Altamaha. The Ogeechee is not

navigable, but the others are.

2. The rivers and creeks which rise in the Eocene and Lower

Oligocene regions of the coastal plain, and are sometimes, but not

usually, muddy. To this class belong only the Ohoopee and

Little Ocmulgee rivers and some of their tributaries, all finally

flowing into the Altamaha. That this class is not more numerous

is due to the fact that the Altamaha Grit escarpment is usually so

high that not many streams have cut through it, and some of

those which do are turned aside until they find a convenient gap.

(Note the course of the Ogeechee and Flint rivers in the Lower

Oligocene region for instance.)

3. The rivers, creeks, and branches which originate within the

Altamaha Grit region, and are rarely if ever muddy. To this

class belong the Canoochee, Satilla, Allapaha, Withlacoochee,

Little and Ochlocknee rivers, nearly all the creeks, and the

innumerable branches.

The significance of this classification of streams will be brought

out in discussing the vegetation of the swamps ofeach. Different

streams differ also in the depths to which they have eroded their

channels. The Oconee and Ocmulgee rivers have everywhere

cut through the Lafayette and Columbia formations and deep

1 Many persons who have traveled through several degrees of latitude

in the Eastern United States hold the erroneous belief that all southern

rivers are muddy. But those of Southeast Georgia are just like those of

New England, as far as the color of the water is concerned

a ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 29

into the underlying rocks. The Ogeechee in the first class, the

rivers in the second class, and some of the rivers and creeks in

the third class, seem to have cut through the Lafayette in most

places, but perhaps not throughout their length, while the

branches and smaller creeks flow over beds of Columbia sand.

CLIMATE,

The following statistics of temperature and rainfall have been

compiled by taking the averages of the figures given in the most

recent U. S. Weather Bureau reports for fifteen stations in South

Georgia in and near the Altamaha Grit region, namely, Albany,

Allapaha, Dublin, Fitzgerald, Fleming, Harrison, Hawkinsville,

Jesup, Louisville, Millen, Poulan, Quitman, Savannah, Thomas-

ville, and Waycross.

Average mean temperature (in degrees Fahrenheit) and total

rainfall (in inches), by months.

Temperature |48.7 |49.6 |58.4 |65.4 |73.7 179.6 |82.6 | 80.7 76.1 |66.6 |56.9 |50.1

Rainfall Bee ese2 ede val gee 3.0 | 5-3 | 6.3 | OXG)) geo} 320) | 2:4) | 3.5)

The same by seasons.

Spring | Summer | Autumn Winter

Seasons Annual

[dieurela= len) (June-Aug.)) (Sept.—Nov.) (Dec.—Feb.)

Temperature 65.8 | 80.6 66.2 49.5 | 65.6

Rainfall 10.8 | 18.2 O33 II.9 anes one

The averages for the whole of South Georgia would probably

correspond very closely with these. It did not seem worth

while to give the figures separately for each station, for they do

not differ greatly from each other. The lowest average annual

temperature included in the above compilations is that of Hawk-

-insville, 63.6°, and the highest that of Thomasville, 67°. The

driest place on the list seems to be Allapaha, with an average

rainfall of 46.1 inches, and the wettest Thomasville, with 54.1.

Perhaps the most striking fact in connection with the above

30 HARPER

figures is that the summer rainfall is nearly twice as great as that

of any other season, and over one-third of the total for the year.

This seems to be generally true throughout South Georgia,! but

not in Middle Georgia and many places farther north.

Snow does not fall in the Altamaha Grit region every year,

and the insignificant amount that does fall has so little effect on

the vegetation that it may be dismissed from further consider-

ation. Statistics showing the maximum and minimum temper-

atures, dates of frost, velocity and direction of the wind, humidity,

cloudiness, etc., could have been compiled at the expense of con-

siderable time and labor, but they would be of little interest in

this connection, since the effects of these factors on the vegeta-

tion, in comparison with the mean temperature and rainfall, are

not striking.

;

VEGETATION.

GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS.

The Altamaha Grit region is typically a well wooded one. It

contains no prairies, lakes, or marshes, and the largest continuous

area in it naturally devoid of trees is probably the channel of the

Altamaha River, a few hundred feet wide. But while forested

throughout, it is typically an unshaded region, for the greater

part of the forests consist of pines, which grow far apart 3 and

give no shade worth mentioning. Consequently light-loving

herbs abound everywhere, and perhaps the most prominent

characteristic of the flora as a whole is the prevalence of adap-

tations for enduring direct sunlight. For this reason the removal

of the forest by lumbermen has little effect on the herbaceous

vegetation, a state of affairs quite different from that which ob-

tains in the thickly settled and better known parts of the country.

1See Bull. Torrey Club 27: 414. 1900. (The figures for temperature

given there, based on observations made from 1878 to 1884, seem to be

a little too high.)

2See Bull. Torrey Club 27: 321. 1900.

3In the pine-barrens the trees average from 20 to 50 feet apart, and

from any point an unobstructed view of about a quarter of a mile can

usually be had in almost any direction.

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 31

Both in dry and wet places, not only in the area under con-

sideration but in other pine-barren regions, we find plants with

well-known devices for protection against excessive transpiration,

such as reduced, coriaceous, glaucous, or vertical leaves.

From one end of the region to the other, a distance of some 240

miles, the general aspects of soil and topography remain about

the same, and we find essentially the same types of vegetation

repeated in each county. The slight differences in the composition

of the flora of similar habitats in different parts of the region are

probably due more to distance than anything else. Differences in

climate doubtless have some effect, but probably not as much as

distance. It would be hard to find an area of equal extent in the

Eastern United States with a more uniformly distributed flora.

Probably at least three-fourths of the species known from the

whole region may be found in any one ofits counties. In view of

these facts it seems safe enough to treat the whole region as a unit

in most of the discussions which follow.

Causes oF Loca. DIVERSITY.

The factors determining the composition of the vegetation of

any particular region or locality are extremely complex. The

location of each individual plant in the Altamaha Grit region

may be considered as due to the combined influence of some or all

the factors enumerated in the following synopsis (which has been

designed with special reference to the region here discussed, and

is therefore not to be regarded as of universal application).

A. Present environment.

ii, VaVeishantey

verage intensity of light (varying with the nattfre of the sur-

rounding vegetation, slope of ground, etc.).

Range of diurnal variation.

Seasonal variations (due to defoliation of deciduous trees, etc).

2. Atmospheric (climatic).

Temperature.

Average, maximum, minimum, etc.

Diurnal and seasonal variations.

Humidity.

Precipitation.

Average annual amount.

Seasonal variations.

Wind:

on HARPER

3. Terrestrial (edaphic).

Water.

Amount present in soil, or depth if covering the surface.

Average.

Seasonal variations.

Substances held in suspension or solution.

Temperature.

Movements (especially whether flowing or stationary).

Soil and subsoil.

Presence or absence of Lafayette.

Thickness of Columbia.

Alluvium, if any

Humus.

4. Organic (biotic).

Plants.

Equal (associates).

Inferior (vines, epiphytes, parasites, etc.).

Superior (furnishing nourishment, support, or shade).

Animals (man excepted).

Beneficial, by

Pollination or dissemination.

Food for carnivorous plants.

Influence on soil and humus.

Injurious or destructive.

5. Frequency of fire.

B. Past history. Changes in

1. Environment.

Climate.

Topography and soil, by

Elevation and subsidence.

Erosion and sedimentation.

Accumulation of humus.

is)

Vegetation itself, by

Evolution, mutation, hybridization, etc.

Rate of variation, and time elapsed.

Extinction.

Migration,

Agencies and routes.

Barriers.

Time and space.

C. Properties of the species.

Adaptations to environment. -

Growth and reproduction.

Dissemination.

Geographical distribution, past and present.

Some of these factors are essentially the same throughout the

region, as is assumed to be the case for instance with climate,

which has just been discussed. Those factors which vary in com-

paratively short distances give the flora whatever diversity it has.

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 33

These variable factors depend almost entirely on local conditions

of topography and soil, which are indicated for each habitat dis-

cussed below. The extent of many of the factors has never been —

ascertained, while of some others it can only be roughly indicated.

Local differences of temperature for instance have not. been

measured, but these depend mostly on the amount of shade and

therefore on the vegetation itself.

Historically the whole flora without exception is believed to

have come into the region since the Pleistocene period (which may

have been not more than ten or fifteen thousand years ago).

Many of the species have probably come into existence since

that time, as already suggested, while others which are older

have found their way in from more or less distant regions.

Little is known about the actual facts of migration in the coastal

plain, but the study of ranges throws some light on the

subject, and in the discussions which follow the probable

origin of some of the habitat- groups is suggested by this

means.

Some of the factors under the third head, such as adaptations

to environment, are briefly indicated for each habitat-group,

but it is not expedient to discuss*the properties of each species

separately where so many are enumerated and so little space can

be given toeach. This will be a fruitful field for future investi-

gation, especially since so many of these plants are of such

restricted range that they have not yet come to the notice of

morphologists. In the taxonomic list will be found references to

anatomical studies which have been made of some of the same

species elsewhere.

CLASSIFICATION ACCORDING TO HapsirTat.

_ A plant-community is generally understood as an association

of plants growing in proximity and subject to the same conditions

of soil, temperature, moisture, illumination, and other factors

- which go to make up environment. An assemblage of similar

plant-communities, not too widely separated to differ essentially

in environment, constitutes a habitat-group.

There are many analogies between habitat-groups and tax-

34 HARPER

onomic groups, such as species, though the latter are mutually

exclusive categories and the former often are not. For instance,

both are capable of being discovered, described, named, and

associated with certain type-localities. Records of both may be

preserved by descriptions, photographs, measurements, and other

means. Both have their diagnostic characters, with more or less

variation and intergradation. Both have passed through pro-

cesses of evolution, are self-perpetuating, and are liable to dis-

appear through geological or climatic changes of the works of

man. New ones may also originate, suddenly or gradually. Both

have more or less definite geographical distributions and regions

of best development. Both are capable of being subdivided,

combined, or relegated to synonymy, with the increase of our

knowledge concerning them. MHabitat-groups, like species, can

also be aggregated into larger categories, analogous to genera

and families.

In the following pages about twenty different habitat-groups

or kinds of plant-communities are described and analyzed. These

it is believed will cover something like 99% of the area under con- -

sideration. There are several other kinds of plant-communities

in the region, but they are rare and as yet imperfectly understood,

and it seems scarcely worth while to describe many of them

from single examples, without knowing their variations, any

‘more than a new species should be described from a single

‘specimen. Some of them when better known may be described

ain future editions.

The accompanying map (fig. 1) shows the actual relationships

on the ground of twelve of the principal habitat-groups in an

imaginary typical portion of the Altamaha Grit region. It is

more or less conventionalized and does not pretend to show the

relative area of each. The names used will be explained farther

on, when the groups are discussed individually. It is quite

possible to give technical names to these groups, as well as to

plants, as Dr. Clements has shown,! but in order to do this new

names would have to be coined for most of them, a task which

may well be left to future investigators.

1 See Olsson-Seffer, Bot. Gaz., 39: 187—193. March, 1905.

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 35

23.9 3.3 £ 3-3 F 3° 3 8 s HF 8

WA ets Me he Sh 8 eee tN

AG Oe eet ia 8 2 88 Fs 6 tt

ees ss

sorts 4).

Gre

Map of an imaginary typical portion of the Altamaha Grit region, showing relative

situation of twelve of the principal habitats.

R, rock outcrops: DPB, dry pine-barrens; IPB, intermediate pine-barrens; MPB,

moist pine-barrens; BS, branch-swamp; CS, creek-swamp; P, cypress pond; S, sand-

hills ; SP, sand-hill pond; SB, sand-hill bog ; H, hammock ; NAS, non- alluvial swamp.

Scale about 1 : 5000, or approximately a foot to the mile.

36 HARPER

METHOD OF TREATMENT OF HABITAT-GROUPS.

It has been customary with phytogeographers in discussing a

group of plants having the same habitat to treat the component

species all alike, arranging them in systematic sequence, or

alphabetically, or in no definite order. But this gives no ade-

quate idea of their arrangement innature. Inthetreatmenthere

adopted I have endeavored by several comparatively simple |

devices, the application of which will be self-evident after a little |

explanation, to give the reader (especially if he is acquainted

with the species mentioned) as vivid an idea as possible of the

actual appearance of each group.

First of all, the species are separated into four classes, corre-

sponding to the four principal strata of vegetation observable in

almost any forest, viz., trees, shrubs, vascular herbs, and cellular

cryptogams.! These are distinguished by their positions with

respect to the lateral margins of the page, the names of

trees being placed farthest to the left and the others suc-

cessively farther to the right. These four groups are not al-

ways sharply defined in nature, however, and some exceptions

have to be allowed for. For instance, a few species, such as

Magnolia glauca and eight or ten others, are sometimes trees and

sometimes shrubs. Again, our two palms, Sabal and Serenoa,

are neither trees, shrubs, nor herbs, but I have classed them

arbitrarily with the shrubs. And some species which have an

evergreen aérial stem and therefore do not come within the strict

definition of herbs, such as Mzutchella, Opuntia, Smilax pumila,

Dendropogon, Selaginella, and Lycopodium, are classed as herbs

on account of their size, and lack of genuine woody tissue.

Then I have distinguished evergreens by heavy type,? and

vines by italics. Annual, biennial, and perennial herbs, not

evergreens, are designated by the customary signs, placed

immediately after the names. Perennial woody fungi are

distinguished by small capitals. Parasites are placed in

1 The germ of this idea was taken from J. W. Blankinship’s paper on

the plant formations of Eastern Massachusetts, in Rhodora for May, 1903.

® In the case of a few species which are partly evergreen the generic

name is printed in ordinary and the specific in heavy type.

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 37

parentheses and epiphytes in brackets. The following table

will illustrate the system:

An evergreen tree.

A deciduous tree.

An evergreen shrub.

A deciduous shrub.

An evergreen woody vine.

A deciduous woody vine.

(An evergreen shrubby parasite.)

An evergreen herb.

[Same, epiphytic.]

A perennial herb, not evergreen %.

An annual herb ®.

A biennial herb @.

A perennial herbaceous vine %.

(A parasitic annual herbaceous vine,) ©.

A bryophyte, on the ground.

[Same, epiphytic.]

(A PERENNIAL PARASITIC FUNGUS.)

A fleshy saprophytic fungus.

This morphological classification is significant in more ways

than one. It is obvious that the relation of trees, with their

deeply penetrating roots, to the soil is different from that of herbs,

especially in the coastal plain where soil and subsoil are often

quite unlike, as was ably pointed out by Dr. Hilgard many years

ago.!| The greater size of trees as compared with other plants,

and of shrubs as compared with herbs, also subjects them to a

greater variety of conditions above ground, and by reason of

their greater age (a century or more in the case of some trees),

they are subjected to greater variations of climate. For the

Same reason the process of evolution is probably much slower

in trees than in annual species, so there may have been a time

when the herbaceous flora of the pine-barrens was quite different

from what it is now while the arborescent flora was about the

same.

It is also obvious that evergreens must stand ina different

1 Geology and Agriculture of Mississippi, pp. 202-204. 1860.

38 HARPER

relation to environment from non-evergreens, annuals from per-

ennials, epiphytes from parasites, etc. By the classification here

adopted the dominant members of any habitat-group are at once

distinguished from those which are more or less dependent, such

as vines, epiphytes, and parasites. By making evergreens con-

spicuous as I have done the difference between winter and summer

aspects of each group is shown at a glance. Some striking dif-

ferences between different hobitaleteuee are also brought out

in this way.

It is interesting to note that all epiphytes and bryophytes (in

our territory at least) are evergreen.

Second: keeping the four main classes distinct (for it would not

be practicable or fair to compare trees with shrubs, shrubs with

herbs, etc.,) the species in each class are arranged as nearly as

possible in order of abundance. In all but some of the rarest hab-

itat-groups I have placed before each name a number correspond-

ing to the number of times I have definitely noted that species

in that particular habitat. This gives approximately the rela-

tive frequence, which in most cases is very nearly the same

as the relative abundance. Some phytogeographers in recent

years have undertaken to determine relative abundance by actu-

ally counting the individual plants on small measured areas of

ground. While this method leaves nothing to be desired as far

as accuracy is concerned, it would take an incalculable amount

of time to apply it to any considerable portion of the region under

discussion, and then the final results might not differ much from

those obtained by the simple method adopted here. In the case

of a few very abundant species I have not taken the trouble to

note them in the field as often as some rarer ones, but it is easy

enough to place these in their proper places at the head of their

respective lists.

Furthermore, after each species, if it is a flowering plant, I have

indicated its normal flowering period, as far as known, by figures -

representing the months. (In the case of the vascular cryptogams

these figures are replaced by 0.) And if the flowers are ento-

mophilous the predominating color of the corolla (or other organ

which serves to attract insects), is indicated. For this purpose

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 39

the colors are somewhat generalized, purple including both the

common pink-purple of Rhexia, Sabbatia, and Gerardia, and the

_ deep purple of Vernonia and related genera. The dark purple,

such as occurs in the heads of many Composite, is kept distinct,

for that probably has a different entomological significance. In

the case of anemophilous flowers the color is replaced by a

dash. And where a color or time of flowering or other

character is not known, or not easily described, it is simply

omitted. -

If space had permitted it would have been interesting to in-

dicate for each species in these lists its total range, its mode of

dissemination, and special adaptations to environment, if known.

But these data, when known, have been borne in mind and sum-

marized for each group as far as possible, the same as if they had

been printed. It would perhaps have facilitated reference to

repeat each list in systematic sequence, so as to contrast the

relative abundance, range, and other characters of related species,

and to show at a glance the number of representatives of each

genus and family, but this would have greatly increased the size

of the work.

The names of the species are intended to be the same as in the

taxonomic list in the latter part of the work, where author-cita-

tions and other bibliographic details will be found. The phe-

- nological data are also intended to correspond throughout. How

these were obtained will be explained at the beginning of the

taxonomic list.

The treatment of each habitat-group ends with a partial sum-

mation of some of the facts brought out in the lists, together with

some of the characters above mentioned which cannot very well

be included in the lists for lack of space. The summation of the

times of flowering is accomplished graphically in each case, except

where the species are too few in number, by means of a phe-

nological diagram. It would require too much space to explain

_ here the method by which these diagrams are constructed, but

they are probably as accurate as the data on which they are

based, if not more so. For as the flowering periods are just as

likely to be overestimated as underestimated, errors of this kind

40 HARPER

tend to counterbalance each other when the statistics are

consolidated.

These phenological diagrams are somewhat of an innovation,

but their importance will probably be better realized when they

come into more general use. They will doubtless afford a valu-

able means of comparing different habitat-groups in the same

region, and similar habitat-groups in different regions. And their

application is by no means restricted to habitat-groups, but

may be extended to structural and taxonomic groups, such

as trees, shrubs, families, genera, etc.

By dividing the area of any phenological diagram by the

number of species entering into it the average duration of the

flowering period for single species is obtained. Although ex-

treme accuracy could not be expected on account of the present

incompleteness of my observations, the figures obtained in this

way for different diagrams are remarkably consistent.

Another interesting feature brought out by these diagrams,

which might have escaped attention otherwise, is that most of

them show a falling-off in the number of species in bloom about

the first of May. This is not a peculiarity of the Altamaha Grit

region, for I found the same to be true in Middle Georgia in 1896,

and I have recently ascertained that in Massachusetts Gn some

habitats at least) a similar decrease comes about a month later.

This falling-off can hardly be correlated with any climatic feature,

but it probably indicates that there is a more or less fundamental

distinction between spring and summer flowers, connected most

likely with the leafing-out of the deciduous trees.

Last but not least, each habitat-group, where practicable, is

illustrated by one or more photographs.

It should be borne in mind that Nature draws few hard and

fast lines, and the nearest we can get to her methods is only an

approximation. I may have drawn the limits of the different

habitat-groups too far apart in some cases and too closely in

others, but further study will always bring us nearer the truth.

By the frequency method above described the typical and

characteristic members of each group are placed at the head

of the list, while those whose membership is more or less

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 4]

in doubt come at the foot. Such species as have been noted

but once or twice in any particular habitat are usually

omitted pending investigation. A species which really belongs

in a certain habitat should be observed there repeatedly. Rare

plants are not without significance to the phytogeographer,

but caution should be used in attempting to draw any conclu-

sions from them.

We are now ready to consider the several habitat-groups in-

dividually and in detail. It is not possible to arrange these groups,

any more than taxonomic groups, in a space of a single dimension

(a linear sequence) and still have each immediately adjoining its

nearest relatives. A space of two dimensions would be better,

and three dimensions would probably be ideal. A diagram at

the end of the detailed discussion shows the relations of the

various groups in two dimensions, as accurately as present

knowledge will permit. :

Species which are believed not to be indigenous are carefully

excluded from the habitat lists, and brought together in a single

list at the end of the ecological treatment, under the head of

weeds.

THE HABITAT-GROUPS.

t. Rock OvutTcrops.

We may appropriately begin with the hillside outcrops of the

Altamaha Grit itself. The nature of these has already been dis-

cussed, and the accompanying illustrations (Plate I, Figs. 1-2) will

give a still clearer idea of their appearance. As already stated,

they are quite rare. Their aggregate area probably does not ex-

ceed one square mile. The rocks and their surroundings are

usually dry, except around their edges or in flat places, where

water sometimes collects for a time in wet weather. In the

absence of the surrounding pine-barren vegetation they would

look very much like some of the granite outcrops in Middle

_ Georgia, except in color.

The plants in the following list have been observed in the

counties of Tattnall, Dodge, Wilcox, and Dooly, principally the

first mentioned. Although they are arranged as nearly as pos-

sible in order of abundance, according to the system above

42 HARPER

described, the frequency numbers are omitted, for none of the

species has been noted more than four times.

Pinus palustris ames —

Liquidambar Styraciflua 3 —

Quercus geminata 4 —

Pinus Tada 3-4 —

Azalea candida 3-4

Tecoma radicans 5-10 red

; Symplocos tinctoria 3-4 cream

Gaylussacia dumosa 4 _ white

Ilex glabra 4-5 white

Gelsemium sempervirens 3 yellow

Pentstemon dissectus 2 4—5 purple

Talinum teretifolium 5-9 purple

Crotonopsis linearis © 8-I0

Sarothra gentianoides @ 6-10 yellow

Ilysanthes refracta 4-7 blue

Chondrophora virgata 9

Marshallia ramosa ; 5-6

Selaginella arenicola fo) fo)

Arenaria brevifolia@® 3

Polygala Chapmani@® 6

Danthonia sericea 5

eo)

Polypodium polypodioides fe)

Afzelia cassioides® 8-9 yellow

Manfreda Virginica 6-7 cream

Selaginella acanthonota fo) fo)

Rhynchospora cymosa 5-6 peas

Aster squarrosus 2 II

Sporobolus Floridanus 1]. 9 =

Eryngium yuccifolium 2 6-7 white

Houstonia longifolia sana purple

Diodia teres 5-10 purple

Krigia Virginica 25 yellow

Pteridium 1}. ° fo)

Cracca Virginiana VL 4-5 white and purple

Ascyrum pumilum 2 4-9 yellow

Trichostema lineare @ 8-10 blue

Allium Cuthbertii 2 5-6 white

Andropogon tener 7-9 —

Yucca filamentosa 5-6 cream

Nolina Georgiana 5

Amsonia tenuifolia 4-5 pale blue

Utricularia subulata 4-7 yellow

Senecio tomentosus 4 yellow

Rhynchospora plumosa 4-5 _

Grimmia leucophzea

Thelia asprella

Frullania Kunzei

Hedwigia albicans viridis

Scapania nemorosa

Ptychomitrium incurvum

Leucobryum glaucum

Summary. Vascular herbs are in the majority, as is the casein

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 43

most habitat-groups in temperate climates. There are two vines,

both woody. Most of the trees and shrubs are evergreen and

most of the herbs are not. The herbs are mostly perennial.

The trees all have anemophilous flowers, while nearly all the

shrubs and herbs are entomophilous. Yellow flowers are most

numerous, with white and purple next. The phenological dia-

gram shows that there are about a dozen species in bloom at

the same time late in May and early in September, but only about

half as many at the end of July. This scarcity of summer

Jan. Feb. Mar. April May June July Aug. Sept. Oct. Nov. Dec.

poot bes essess

Fie, 2.

Phzenological diagram for 40 plants growing on Altamaha Grit outcrops.

flowers is characteristic of many other exposed rocky places,!

and is due of course to the drying up of the rocks in the summer

sun. But this is not so marked in the Altamaha Grit region as

elsewhere, because there the extra rainfall in summer tends to

counteract the evaporation.

The 40 species of flowering plants represent at least 26 fam-

ilies and 38 genera, pretty well scattered through the whole range

of families. ‘But the most striking feature of the whole group is

the heterogeneity of their ranges. Two species, Marshallia

ramosa and Pentstemon dissectus, are not definitely known out-

side of the region, though they are not exclusively confined to

rock outcrops. Azalea candida I have seen only on or near out-

crops of the Grit, but it has been collected by others at two or

three stations south of our territory. The remarkably anomalous

range of Chondrophora virgata has been discussed elsewhere.?

A considerable number, including Senecio tomentosus, Ilysanthes

refracta, Crotonopsis, Manjreda, Arenaria,> Talinum, and some

of the bryophytes, are more at home on granite outcrops in

1 See Small, Bull. Torrey Club, 24: 333. 1896; Mohr. Contr. U. S. Nat.

Herb. 6:67, 68, 82. 1901; Gattinger, Fl. Tenn. (ed. 2) 22, 23. 1901.

2 Bull. Torrey Club, 32: 168. 1905.

3 See Torreya, 4: 138-141. 1904.

44 HARPER

Middle Georgia. Others are often weeds, growing in various

situations in the southeastern states. The rest are mostly

species which have strayed in from the neighboring pine-barrens,

hammocks, or sand-hills.

The origin of this rock outcrop flora, particularly the rarer

members of it, is a mystery. As rocks of this kind are so few and

far apart it is difficult to imagine how some species could have

migrated from one rock to another, a hundred miles away,

apparently without establishing themselves in intermediate

territory. There is no reason for supposing that the total area

of these rocks was ever (at least since the coastal plain received

its present plant population after the last submergence) greater

than it is now. Perhaps the rock-loving plants from farther

inland were among the first to take possession of the coastal plain

as it emerged from the sea, and have been gradually driven to a

last stand on the rocks, to which they were best adapted from

previous experience in the Piedmont region. The origin of the

three nearly endemic species first mentioned is another problem.

The Marshallia and Azalea do not differ very much from some

of their relatives, but the Pentstemon is very distinct.

Further study will doubtless tend to elucidate these problems.

In the meanwhile we will pass on to the next habitat-group,

namely,

2. Dry PINE-BARRENS.

The summits and upper slopes of all the ridges (except the

sand-hills which will be described later) are covered with dry

pine-barrens, which constitute probably at least half the area

of the whole Altamaha Grit region. This habitat-group has

suffered most from the effects of civilization, for in it are located

nearly all the dwellings, farms, and other works of man. Lumber-

ing and turpentining have already destroyed the finest pines, and

the fires which sweep over this area every winter and spring do

great damage to the young trees. But dry pine-barrens are

so abundant that suitable portions of them for study can be found

on almost any square mile, and it is easy to allow for the effects

of civilization and imagine just what the natural condition of

this group should be. (For illustrations see Plate II.)

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 45

The surface soil is usually of the Columbia sand, but never too

deep for the roots of trees to penetrate it into the Lafayette below.

The Lafayette is also so sandy on these ridges, however, that it

seems to make little difference to the vegetation whether the

Columbia is present or not. Lack of shade is a prominent char-

acteristic of this as well as several of the other habitats.

The following species are characteristic:

co Pinus palustris

3 naan

8 Quercus brevifolia 3 —

7 = Catesbei 3 =

2 ° Marylandica 3 —

I oY digitata 3-4 —

I Margaretta 3-4 —

1 Diospyros Virginiana 4-5 white

g Gaylussacia dumosa 4 white

8 Ceanothus microphyllus 4-5 white

7 Quercus pumila 3 —

7 Chrysobalanus oblongifolius 6 white

7 Asimina angustifolia 5 white

5 Myrica pumila —

4 Serenoa serrulata 6 cream

3 Rhus copallina 7-9 cream

3 Castanea alnifolia 5 white

3 Asimina speciosa 4-5 white

2 Amorpha herbacea 6 purple

2 Pieris Mariana 4-5 white

1 Rubus trivialis 3-4 white

1 Polycodium cesium 4 white

t Ilex glabra 4-5 white

1 Ceanothus Americanus 5-6 white

1 Diospyros Virginiana 4-5 white

1 Vaccinium nitidum

2 Elliottia racemosa 6-7 white

1 Crategus uniflora white

o Aristida stricta 2 9 —

13 Cracca Virginiana 2 4-5 white and purple

13 Eriogonum tomentosum 1 7-9 cream

13 Vernonia angustifolia 11 7-8 purple

12 Stillingia sylvatica 2 4-7 yellow

11 Baptisia lanceolata 2 3-4 yellow

10 Pteridium 12 fe) fo)

9 Dolicholus simplicifolius 2 4- yellow

11 Helianthus Radula 2). g-1o dark purple

HARPER

7 Aster squarrosus 2

6 Chrysopsis graminifolia 2

6 Breweria humistrata VY

6 Stylosanthes biflora 27

5 Phlox subulata

5 Houstonia rotundifolia

5 Smilax pumila

5 Psoralea canescens 2

5 Laciniaria tenuifolia 11

5 Morongia uncinata YU

4 Calophanes oblongifolia 1

4 Crotalaria Purshii 2

5 Polygala incarnata®

4 Rhynchospora Grayii 2

- 4 Solidago odora 2

4 Euphorbia corollata 2

4 Ascyrum pumilum

3 Baptisia perfoliata 2

3 Sporobolus gracilis?

3 Polygala nana @)

3 Rudbeckia hirta

3 Euphorbia gracilis 2

3 Asclepias cinerea 1

3 Pterocaulon undulatum 2

3 Scutellaria multiglandulosa VU

3 Angelica dentata 2

3 Baldwinia uniflora @)

3 Anthenantia villosa 2

3 Kneiffia linearis

3 Gerardia setacea ©

3 Hieracium sp.

3 Meibomia arenicolaY.

3 Gerardia filifolia ©

2 Verbena carnea?!

2 Galactia erecta 1

2 Aster adnatus 2

2 Psoralea Lupinellus 2

Asclepias humistrata 2

2 Eupatorium album 2

2 Gaura Michauxii

2 Berlandiera pumila 2}

2 Jatropha stimulosa 2}.

2 Asclepias tuberosa 2

2 Tragia linearifolia 1

2 Salvia lyrata 2

Tot

Dana CO “sO

(e)

CL SoS

wl |

(0)

yellow

white

yellow

white

cream

blue

purple

blue

yellow

purple

yellow

white

yellow

yellow and dark purple

dark purple

gray purple

cream

white

yellow

purple

yellow

purple

white and pink

white

blue

white

white and pink

yellow

white

orange

blue

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 47

2 Sericocarpus bifoliatus 2}

2 Aletris farinosa?

2 Buchnera elongata

2 Trilisa odoratissima 2

2 Salvia azurea 2,

2 Cyperus filiculmis 2

2 Gaillardia lanceolata @

2 Andropogon furcatus 2

2 Coreopsis lanceolata 1

2 Croton argyranthemus 2}.

2 Stenophyllus ciliatifolius@®

1 Manisuris cylindrica 1

1 Tium apilosum 1

t Psoralea gracilis 2

1 Sorghastrum secundum 1}.

1 Hieracium sp. UY

1 Lupinus villosus 2

zt Panicum angustifolium 2

1 Galactia mollis VL

1 Scleria glabra?

1 Tium intonsum 1}

1 Sabbatia paniculata

1 Polygala grandiflora 7

1 Baptisia alba

1 Eryngium synchetum 2

1 Sorghastrum nutans 12

t Phlox amoena I

t Laciniaria gram nifolia 2

1 Trichostema lineare @

1 Crotalaria rotundifolia 2

1 Fimbristylis puberula 2

1 Coreopsis delphinifolia 2}

i Helianthemum Carolinianum

1 Polygala polygama 1}.

1 Clitoria Mariana 2!

zq Ruellia humilis?

1 Cyperus ovularis 2

zt Yucca filamentosa

1 Lygodesmia aphylla

1 Rhynchospora plumosa

1 Meibomia tenuifolia

xs Eupatorium tortifolium 2

i Silphium Asteriscus angustatum

t Muhlenbergia expansa

t Petalostemon albidus2/

8-9

white

purpie

purple

blue or white

yellow and dark purple

yellow

cream

blue

yellow

purple

pale yellow

white

purple

white

purple

blue

yellow

purple

blue

cream

blue

purple

white

yellow

white

48 HARPER

1 Afzelia pectinata ® 8-9 yellow

1 Dasystoma pectinata ® 8-9 yellow

1 Chamelirium luteum 2 5 white

1 Laciniaria squarrosa 2 7 purple

t Kuhnistera pinnata 2 - 9-10 white

1 Chrosperma muscetoxicum 2 5-6 cream

1 Manfreda Virginica 6-7 cream |

1 Galium pilosum 1

t Pentstemon hirsutus 2 4-6 purple

t Onosmodium Virginianum 2 5-6 cream

1 Amsonia ciliata? 4-5 pale blue

1 Amsonia tenuifolia VL 4-5 pale blue

1 Eupatorium com positifolium 2 site) white

2 Coltricia parvula

Summary. In the dry pine-barrens herbs are in overwhelming

majority, not only in number of species but in individuals, and

nearly all of them are perennial. The’latter fact was considered

by Mr. Nash! in the case of the “high pine land” in central

peninsular Florida as a protection against destruction by fire,

but it might just as well be considered as a protection against

drought.

Evergreens are scarce, and mostly confined to shrubs. There

are only four or five vines, mostly herbaceous. As already noted,

adaptations for reducing transpiration are prevalent. The fili-

form rigid leaves of the two most abundant plants in the whole

region, long-leaf pine and wire-grass, are typical examples.”

The frequency of such specific names as angustifolia, gracilis,

gramintifolia, lanceolata, tenusfolia, and others of similar import

is not without significance in this connection.

Flowers seem to be most abundant early in June (see diagram),

and at the end of July the number of plants in bloom is scarcely

half as large. There is a second but smaller maximum early in

September, to which the Composite contribute largely. The

trees flower early here, as in most other habitats. The average

length of the flowering period for a single species is 49 days.

About 24 species in this list have anemophilous flowers, and

of those fertilized by insects about 34 are white, 11 cream, 23

1 Bull. Torrey Club 22: 143, 144. 1895.

*For references to anatomical studies of Baptisia perfoliata, Cyperus

filiculmis, and Pinus palustris see the catalogue of species.

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 49

yellow, 15 purple, and 12 blue. Most of the shrubs have white

flowers.

The manner of dissemination is not definitely known for over

half the species. Three or four (the Baptisias and Psoralea

canescens) are tumbleweeds. About 23 others, mostly Composite,

have seeds or fruits transported by the wind. Thirteen, mostly

shrubs, have fleshy fruits, adapted to be eaten by birds. Only

four or five have barbed fruits. The Cupulifere of course have

nuts which are supposed to be carried off by squirrels. In per-

Jan. Feb. Mar. April May June July Aug Sept. Oct. Nov. Dec.

{

]

{

sastsceatsoasbeos soespeses) SIO)

r-c-c-

20 f----------4---- ----7----|20

lOb----'----t a2odoceseee: eto eee 110

FIG. 3.

Phenological diagram for 131 plants of dry pine-barrens, including 24 trees and

shrubs.

haps a dozen species the seeds are scattered by elastic force,

which is either accumulated in capsules and legumes or actuated

by the wind or animals. .

_ The above list contains about 137 species belonging to 100

genera and 38 families. Only 16.4% of the angiosperms are

monocotyledons. As in dry sunny places throughout North

America, the Composite are most largely represented, with 25

species, and Leguminose next with 23; but this list contains

a larger proportion of the total Leguminosz of the region than

it does of Composite. Grasses are not as numerous as one might

expect, but one species, Aristida stricta, is probably more

50 HARPER

abundant than all other herbaceous vegetation combined. Cryp-

togams are represented only by one fern and one fungus.

The ranges of the dry pine-barren plants are quite interesting.

None of them are confined to the Altamaha Grit region, or even

to Georgia, and not more than two-thirds are confined to the

coastal plain. Most of the remaining third are found in dry

woods and fields and on southern slopes of mountains in the

upper parts of the state,! where they are subjected to very

similar conditions of soil, light, and heat. Quite a number

range still farther north, and are inclined to become weeds in the

northern states. Nearly all the dry pine-barren plants grow

also in the adjacent Lower Oligocene region of the coastal plain,

but not so many descend into the flat country toward the coast.

- Very few extend southward to the tropics, or even to sub-

tropical Florida; and none of them are native in the Old World.

The highest and driest parts of the pine-barren ridges are

often a little sandier than the rest, and contain a larger pro-

portion of oaks, and are known as ‘‘oakridges.’’ The flora of

the oak ridges, though approaching that of the sand-hills (to be

discussed below) scarcely merits separate recognition, and has

all been included in the foregoing list.

3. INTERMEDIATE PINE-BARRENS.

Descending the slope of any of the innumerable low ridges in

the Altamaha Grit country we passby imperceptible gradations

from dry pine-barrens into those which are perpetually moist.

Very few species range all the way from dry to moist pine-barrens,

however, and between these habitats there is always a transition

zone of varying width where species from both meet on common

ground. This transition zone, which may be designated as the

intermediate pine-barrens, (See Plate III, Fig. 1.) for want of a

better name,” usually contains in addition some species which are

tare or wanting in both adjacent zones, and these therefore entitle

it to be considered separately, though its boundaries are often

‘See Bull. Torrey Club 27: 327, 328. 1900; 30: 294. 1903; Torreya,

5: 56. April, 1905; also Kearney, Science, II. 12: 830-842. rg00.

2In my previous writings I have usually referred to them as rather dry

pine-barrens.

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 51

extremely vague. In the more level parts of the region the dry

pine-barrens become scarcer and the intermediate largely take

their place, and in the flat country toward the coast the former

almost disappear and the latter doubtless cover more than half

the total area.

In the Altamaha Grit region the following species can be

definitely assigned to the intermediate pine-barrens.

co Pinus palustris 3 =

“ serotina 3-4 —

I “ Elliottii 2 —

5 Kalmia hirsuta 6-9 purple

4 Serenoa serrulata 6 cream

4 Ilex glabra 4-5 white

4 Vaccinium nitidum

4 Gaylussacia frondosa 4 —

4 Gaylussacia dumosa 4 white

3 Cholisma ferruginea 5 white

3 Quercus pumila 3 —

3 Myrica pumila —

1 Hypericum opacum 7-9 yellow

1 Pieris Mariana 4-5 white

1 Asimina speciosa 4-5 white

1 Castanea alnifolia 5 white

1 Hypericum myrtifolium 6-9 yellow

1 Azalea nudiflora 3-4 pink

7 Helianthus Radula 12 g-10 ©dark purple

7 Aster squarrosus 1 uy

5 Pterocaulon undulatum 1 . 5-6 cream

5 Trilisa odoratissima 2 8-9 purple

5 Asclepias cinerea 6-7 gray-purple

2 Aristida spiciformis 1 7-9 —

4 Rhynchospora ciliaris 5-8 —

4 Sarracenia minor 2 4-5 yellow

5 Fimbristylis puberula 2 5-7

4 Syngonanthus flavidulus 2 5-9 cream

4 Rhexia Alifanus 1 6-8 purple

3 Afzelia cassioides © 8-9 yellow

3 Chondrophora nudata 2 8-9 yellow

3 Eupatorium rotundifolium 2 7-9 white

3 Eryngium synchetum 2 6-7 white

3 Lachnocaulon anceps 2 4-8 white

3 Aletris lutea 2 5 yellow

g ““ obovata 2. 5 white

HARPER

3 Baptisia lanceolata 1}

3 Thyrsanthema semiflosculare YL

3 Keellia nuda 1

3 Polygala incarnata @

3 Xyris flexuosa 2

2 Baldwinia uniflora @)

2 Sabbatia Elliottii @

2 Doellingeria reticulata 2

2 Chrysopsis graminifolia 2

2 Polygala ramosa @)

2 Linum Floridanum 21

2 Ascyrum pumilum 2

2 Crotalaria Purshii 2

2 Eupatorium verbenzfolium 2

2 Trilisa paniculata 7

2 Polygala lutea @)

2 Rhexia ciliosa

2 Lobelia Nuttallii @

2 Cracca hispidula 2

2 Ludwigia virgata

2 Cracca Virginiana 2}

2 Euphorbia eriogonoides 2

2 Muhlenbergia expansa

2 Carphephorus tomentosus 2}

2 Habenaria blephariglottis 2

2 Polygala setacea®

2 Sporobolus Curtissii 2

t Psoralea gracilis 2

2 Asclepias Michauxii 2

1 Rhynchospora Torreyana 1,

1 Polygala Harperi @)

1 Habenaria nivea 2

1 Aster adnatus 2

t Pteridium %{

t Laciniaria gracilis?

1 Rudbeckia nitida 7

1 Sophronanthe hispida 12

1 Polygala nana @)

t Salvia lyrata 2

t Rhexia filiformis 2

1 Juncus biflorus

1 Xyris brevifolia @

1 Gerardia Skinneriana@

1 Sporobolus gracilis 2

1 Campulosus aromaticus 2

wou cw

y i Pw ca

Oo a oO

BONG oe Ge

Sr ons DO

yellow

cream

white

purple

yellow

white

white and yellow

yellow

white

purple

orange

purple

blue

yellow

white and purple

white

purple

white

cream

blue

gray-purple

purple

white

le)

purple

yellow and dark purple

white

yellow

blue

white

yellow

purple

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 53

1 Sporobolus Floridanus 1 9 —

1 Pinguicula lutea 4 yellow

1 Erigeron vernus 2. 4-8 white and yellow

1 Lupinus villosus @) 4

1 Ludwigia hirtella 6-8 yellow

1 Vernonia oligophylla 1 6-7 purple

I % angustifolia Y} 7-8 purple

1 Piriqueta Caroliniana 2 6-8 yellow

1 Scleria glabra 2 —

1 Polygala Chapmani® 6-7 purple

1 Pinguicula pumila 4-5 pale blue

1 Gerardia aphylla® 9-10 purple

1 Angelica dentata 1 9-10 ~=white

1 Bartonia lanceolata 7—-LO. Cream

1 Eupatorium Mohrii 2 8-9 white

1 Podostigma pedicellata UY 7-8 yellowish

1 Eleocharis Baldwinii1! —

Summary. Perennial herbs predominate here, as in the dry

pine-barrens just mentioned. The trees (all of one genus) and

most of the shrubs, but few if any of the herbs, are evergreen.

There seem to be no vines, epiphytes, parasites, or cellular

cryptogams. Biennial herbs seem to be a little more numerous

than annual ones.!

The number of flowers increases gradually until the beginning

of September, and then falls off rapidly. The explanation of

Jan. Feb. Mar. April May June July Aug. Sept. Oct. Nov. Dec.

IO p----4-----

=--7--- - tH

Fic. 4.

Pheenological diagram for 92 plants of intermediate pine-barrens.

this is not yet apparent. Each species blooms 45 days, on the

average. About 16 species have anemophilous flowers, 18

white, 6 cream, 22 yellow, 14 purple, and 4 blue.

‘For references to anatomical studies of Ilex glabra and Muhlenbergza

expansa see the catalogue of species.

54 HARPER

The manner of dissemination is not definitely known for about

half the species. Some 25 species have wind-borne seeds or

achenes, about half as many have stiff stems which scatter the

seeds short distances by waving in the wind, and some of the

shrubs have fleshy fruits. Few if any have fruits adapted for

attaching themselves to animals.

The 98 species represent 7o genera and 33 families. The

largest family is Composite, constituting a fifth of the whole list,

but the largest genus is Polygala, with seven species. The mono-

cotyledons constitute 22.3% of the total number of angiosperms.

The ranges of these plants are more restricted than those of

dry pine-barrens. They are typical coastal plain plants, only

about 15 of them being known in other parts of the United States.

These 15 are divisible into three classes, namely, those which

belong more properly to the dry pine-barrens already discussed,

those which are widely distributed in the coastal plain and

glaciated region but rare elsewhere, and those which occur in

damp sandy places at a few isolated stations in the southern

mountains and Piedmont region. Those of the two latter classes

belong also to the next habitat group to be discussed.

Within the coastal plain many of the intermediate pine-barren

plants do not extend farther inland than the Altamaha Grit region,

but nearly all of them grow also in the flat country toward the

coast, where similar habitats predominate. Many of them extend

well down into Florida, but none reach the tropics, with the

possible exception of Pinus Elhotiu. Less than a third of the

number of species range as far north as Virginia, so as to be in-

cluded in the “Manual region.’”’

4. Morst PiNE-BARRENS.

The lower slopes of every little valley in the region under

consideration are perpetually moist. The explanation of this

is simple. The Columbia sand holds water like a sponge, and

the Lafayette clay a short distance beneath prevents it from

percolating deep into the earth. The sand being a poor con-

ductor of heat protects the water in it from evaporation, so

whatever water the soil contains is constantly trickling down

the slopes and seeping out at the lower levels.

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 55

Although the moist and dry pine-barrens have almost no

species in common, their vegetation has much the same aspect,

both being equally exposed to light and other factors which come

into play above the surface of the ground. See Plate III, Fig. 2,

and Plate IV, Fig. 1

Moist pine-barrens probably reach the height of their de-

velopment in the Altamaha Grit region, and their list of species

is a long one, constituting nearly one-fourth of the total flora

of the region.

20 Pinus Elliottii 2 —

8 Taxodium imbricarium 2-3 —

1 Pinus serotina 3-4 —

8 Ilex glabra 4-5 white

7 Hypericum fasciculatum 4-8 yellow

6 Myrica Carolinensis —

5 Azalea viscosa 6-7 white

5 Magnola glauca 4-7 white

4 Pieris nitida 3-4 white

4 Liquidambar Styraciflua 3 —

4 Cholisma sp. (888) white

3 Kalmia hirsuta 6-9 purple

3 Ascyrum stans 5-9 yellow

2 Styrax pulverulenta 4 white

2 Hypericum opacum 7-9 yellow

2 Clethra alnifolia 7-8 white

2 Aronia arbutifolia 3-4 white

2 Cliftonia monophylla 3-4 white

1 Pieris Mariana 4-5 white

1 Hypericum myrtifolium 6-9 yellow

1 Itea Virginica 4-6 white

1 Gaylussacia frondosa

1 Gaylussacia dumosa white

1 Pieris phillyreifolia 2 white

41 Sarracenia flava 2 4 yellow

27 Eriocaulon decangulare 1 6-9 white

27 Oxypolis filiformis 2 7-8 white

19 Chondrophora nudata 1 8-9 yellow

19 Drosera capillaris? 6-8 purple

37 Sarracenia minor 7 4-5 yellow

20 Eriocaulon lineare 2 4-5 white

22 Tofieldia racemosa 2 6-8 white

27 Sarracenia psittacina 4 ted

22 Syngonanthus flavidulus 1° 5-9 cream

HARPER

20 Rhexia Alifanus 2 6-8 purple

24 Baldwinia atropurpurea @) 8-10 yellow and dark purple

20 Juncus trigonocarpus 2 8-9 —

19 Chaptalia tomentosa 2-4 cream

18 Eryngium Ludovicianum 7 4-10 ~©=> blue

18 Mesadenia lanceolata virescens?! 9-10 cream

14 Marshallia graminifolia 2 7-9 pale purple

12 Fuirena squarrosa hispida 2} 6-9 =

12 Lycopodium alopecuroides fo) °

12 Trilisa paniculata 2 8-9 purple

12 Pogonia ophioglossoides 2 4-5 purple

11 Lycopodium pinnatum fo) fo)

tr Rhexia lutea 2 6-7 yellow

11 Rhynchospora Baldwinii 5-7 —

iz Campulosus aromaticus 2 5-8 =

tr Anthenantia rufa 2 8-10 —

10 Eupatorium rotundifolium 271 © 7-9 white

9g Coreopsis angustifolia 2 7-9 yellow

to Xyris Baldwiniana 1 6-9 yellow

to Rhynchospora semiplumosa 71 5-7 ao

9 Polygala ramosa @) 5-9 yellow ;

12 Burmannia capitata@ 8-10 — pale blue .

9 Scleria trichopoda 2} 7-9 —

9 Sabbatia macrophylla i] white

8 ts lanceolata 6-7 white

8 Aletris aurea 6-7 yellow |

9 Lycopodium Carolinianum fo)

9 Deellingeria reticulata 2 white

ie)

8 Lophiola aurea? 6-7

8 Sporobolus teretifolius 2 7-9 —

8 Juncus biflorus 2 5-6 —

8 Rhynchospora solitaria 5-10 —:

8 Eryngium virgatum 1 8-9 blue

8 Utricularia juncea 70 yellow

7 Rhynchospora ciliaris 27 5-8 —

7 is oligantha 5-6 =

7 Centella repanda 7-8 cream

7 Laciniaria spicata 2 8-10 purple

7 Erigeron vernus 4-8 white and yellow

7 Ludwigia hirtella 6-8 yellow

6 Mesospherum radiatum 2 6-8

7 Rhynchospora axillaris? a) —

6 Pinguicula elatior 3-5 blue

6 Lobelia glandulosa 8-10 blue Ge”

6 Leptopoda Helenium 4-5 yellow

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 57

6 Baldwinia uniflora @) 7-9 yellow

6 Sagittaria Mohrii 2 6-9 white

6 Sabbatia campanulata 6-8 purple

6 Lachnocaulon anceps 4-8 white

6 Polygala lutea @) 4-9 yellow

5 Sophronanthe pilosa 6-8 white

5 Afzelia cassioides ® 8-9 yellow

5 Rhexia ciliosa7 6-9 purple

5 Polygala cruciata@ 6-9 purple

5 Gerardia aphylla@ 9-10 = purple

5 Sisyrinchium Atlanticum 1, 4 blue

7 Drosera filiformis 1

7 Oxypolis ternata? II white

ro Anantherix connivens 1 7 cream

5 Muhlenbergia sp. (1667) 2 8-9 —

5 Mayaca Aubleti 6-9 pinkish

5 Eleocharis tuberculosa ® 4-6 aa

5 Utricularia macrorhyncha 4-9 yellow

5 Pogonia divaricata 2 5-6 purple

5 Bartonia lanceolata 7-10 ©. cream

4 Rhexia stricta 2 7-9 purple

4 Coreopsis sp. (1666) 2 9 yellow

4 Tracyanthus angustifolius 1 4-5 cream

4 Utricularia subulata 4-7 yellow

4 Carex turgescens 2 4 —

4 Paspalum Curtisianum g-I0 —

4 Limodorum tuberosum 1} 5-7 purple

4 Proserpinaca (intermediate) 21 greenish

3 Eupatorium verbenefolium 1 8-9 white

3 Rudbeckia Mohrii 2,’ 6-9 yellow and dark purple

3 Dichromena latifolia 2) 5-7 white

3 Rhynchospora gracilenta 6-7 =

3 Gerardia paupercula 9-10 purple

3 Andropogon Tracyi ? 2 9Q-10 —

3 Rhynchospora rariflora 5-6 =

3 Habenaria ciliaris 1 7-8 orange

3 Rhynchospora alba macra 1 9-10 white

3 Anchistea Virginica 2 fo) fo)

3 Helianthus angustifolius 2 9-10 = yellow

3 Manisuris rugosa 2 8-9 —

3 Xyris fimbriata 2 7-9 yellow

3 Utricularia cornuta 5-7 yellow

2 Pinguicula lutea 4 yellow

3 Fimbristylis puberula 2 5-7 a=

2 <s autumnalis ® 6-9 =

HARPER

2 Habenaria integra 1

2 Helianthus undulatus 12

2 Keellia nuda 2

2 Scleria hirtella 2}.

2 (Cuscuta indecora) ©

2 Eleocharis bicolor@

2 Rhynchospora Torreyana

2 Rudbeckia nitida 2)

2 Ludwigia linearis

2 Rhynchospora Chapmani12

2 Juncus polycephalus

2 Asclepias lanceolata 1

2 Scleria verticillata 1

1 Andropogon Mohrii

I corymbosus 2

1 Carphephorus Pseudo-Liatris1

3 Sarracenia flava minor?

2 Panicum verrucosum

2 Rhexia filiformis 1

2 Eryngium synchetum 2

2 Cyperus Haspan2

2 Osmunda cinnamomea 2].

1 Oxytria crocea 2}

1 Physostegia denticulata 2

1 Habenaria nivea 2.

1 Paspalum precox

1 Xyris platylepis 2

1 Carduus LeContei

1 Melanthium Virginicum 2

2 Rhynchospora inexpansa

2 Eleocharis melanocarpa 1

2 Limodorum graminifolium 2

t Gerardia linifolia 2

1 Fuirena breviseta 2}.

1 Gerardia purpurea

1 Lycopus pubens 1

1 Ludwigia pilosa

2 Scleria gracilis?

2 Sarracenia rubra 2

1 Pinguicula pumila

t Aletris lutea 2

1 Arundinaria tecta 2

1 Xyris neglecta

1 Panicum Combsii 2

1 Gerardia Skinneriana @

yellow and dark purple

yellow

purple

white

yellow

purple

white

yellow

white

purple

white

ted

pale blue

yellow

purple

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 59

t Cynoctonum sessilifolium 7-8 white

I Juncus scirpoides 2 —

rt Panicum melicarium 5-7 —

rt Xyris flexuosa 2 : 7-8 yellow

1 Linum Floridanum 1 6-7 yellow

t Aster eryngiifolius 1 7

1 Habenaria cristata 2 7-8 yellow

I - blephariglottis 2 8-9 white

t Lilium Catesbzi 2 8-9 ted

t Iris versicolor 2 4-5 blue

t Polygala cymosa @) 5-9 yellow

t Tridens ambiguus 6-8 —

1 Stokesia levis 2

1 Rhynchospora compressa 5 —

1 Sarracenia minor X psittacina2} —

t Keellia hyssopifolia 1

_ 1 Eryngium yuccifolium 1 6-7 white

1 Panicum hemitomon 1. 6 —

Summary. The woody plants (most of them evergreen) are

_ greatly outnumbered by the herbs, not only in species, but still

: more in individuals. The trees are all conifers. The shrubs,

_ which are most abundant on the lower slopes, and almost want-

_ ing higher up, are mostly rather small and scattered. It is in-

teresting to note that two species which become large trees in

some other parts of South Georgia, namely Liguidambar and

_ Magnolia glauca, are only shrubs in moist pine-barrens. The

Magnolia fruits abundantly when only knee-high, but I have

not yet discovered how the shrubby Liguidambar reproduces

itself.

The herbs are mostly perennials, as in the groups previously

_ discussed. Few of them are evergreen, but many have not

been studied enough in winter to determine certainly whether

they are evergreen or not. Pvzeris phillyretfolia is the only woody

vine (if it can be called a vine),! and Cuscuta indecora is the

only herbaceous vine, and at the same time the only parasite.

There seem to be no epiphytes or cellular cryptogams. Most of

~ the species have narrow leaves, or other adaptations for redu-

\ cing transpiration, just as in the dry pine-barrens.?

1 See Torreya 3: 21-22, Feb. 1903.

¢ 2For references to anatomical studies of Oxypolis filtformts, Ilex

60 HARPER

The number of species in bloom at once is greatest early in

July, and nearly as great in August and September, but con-

siderably less at other times. The average flowering period

is 49 days, just as in the dry pine-barrens. Over 50 species

have anemophilous flowers, about 35 white,! 35 yellow, 20

purple, 8 cream, 7 blue, and 4 red. Why white, yellow, and

purple flowers are so predominant here (and in other pine-

barren regions)? is a problem for the entomologist. The

Jan. Feb. Mar. April May June July Aug. Sept. Oct. Noy. Dec.

Fic. 5,

Pheenological diagram for 172 plants of moist pine-barrens, including 22 trees

and shrubs.

abundance of these flowers, and the large size of many of them,

together with the omnipresent bright yellow leaves of Sarracenta

flava, make the moist pine-barrens very beautiful in summer.

glabra, Myrica Carolinensts, and Eriocaulon decangulare, see catalogue of

species. Note the frequency in this habitat-group of such specific names

as angustifolia, filtformis, graminifolia, linearis, and nitida.

‘ One of the white-flowered species, Dichromena latifolia, belongs to a

family in which anemophily prevails (Cyperacee.) Although I have

never observed the visits of insects to this plant, there can be little doubt

that its very conspicuous snow-white bracts are for the purpose of at-—

tracting them.

2 See Bull. Torrey Club, 27: 424. 1900.

‘

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 61

The commonest method of dissemination seems to be by

smooth seeds contained in erect capsules, calyces, or honey-

comb-like receptacles opening at the top and borne on stiff erect

stems which persist through the winter. When such a stem is

bent suddenly to one side the seeds are discharged by centrifugal

force. Good examples of this (called by Dr. Clements tono-

boles!) are seen in 4o or 50 species, belonging to Baldwinia,

Gerardia, Mesospherum, Sabbatia, Ludwigia, Rhexia, Hypericum,

Linum, Sisyrinchium, Lilium, Funcus, Xyris, and doubtless

several other genera. About 25 species have wind-borne seeds

or achenes, and a few of the shrubs have fleshy fruit. Adhesive

fruits seem to be entirely wanting,? unless the achenes of the

Rhynchosporas with their barbed bristles function in this manner.

The plants of this habitat-group evidently do not depend much

on animals to carry their seeds.

The list contains 187 species in 105 genera and about 46 fam-

ilies. The largest family is Cyperacee, with 27 species. Com-

posite is a close second, with 24, and Graminez third, with 16.

Rhynchospora is the largest genus in moist pine-barrens (as well

as in the whole Altamaha Grit region), with 13 species. No other

genus has half as many. The total absence of the Euphor-

biacee and Leguminose, and of all families between Mag-

noliacee and Myricacez, is noteworthy. Over two-fifths of

the whole list (43.6% of the angiosperms) are monocotyledons.

This accords with the common belief among botanists that plants

growing in wet places are as a rule not as highly organized

as others. Although no forms of vegetation below the ferns

have been observed in these moist pine-barrens, it is altogether

probable that some species of Sphagnum could be found, and

perhaps also some of the minute parasitic fungi.

The plants of this group do not seem to be quite so restricted

in range as those in the intermediate pine-barrens. About

60 species, or nearly a third, are confined to the pine-barrens of

the southeastern states, while an equal number reach their

northern limits in the coastal plain somewhere between New

1 Bot. Surv. Neb., 7:2 47. 1904.

2 Compare this with a statement in Bull. Torrey Club, 31: 16. 1904.

62 HARPER

York and Virginia. About 20 species are confined to the coastal —

plain of the southeastern states, but not to the pine-barrens.

Half a dozen or so are not known outside of Georgia. About 25

species extend inland to sandy bogs in Middle Georgia and the

neighboring mountains, and fifteen or twenty have a wide dis-

tribution in similar habitats in the glaciated region of the north.!

Ten others grow almost anywhere in the Eastern United States.

About 15 are supposed to range southward to tropical America.

This is rather anomalous, for there can be no Lafayette and

Columbia formations in the tropics; and doubtless some of our

plants will hereafter be found to be specifically distinct from their

tropical allies.

5. BRANCH-SWAMPS.

If we start at the head of any little valley in the Altamaha Grit

region and go down-hill, we come in a very short distance, after

passing through dry, intermediate and moist pine-barrens, to a

branch-swamp occupying the trough of the valley. A branch-

swamp, like any other swamp,’ is characterized by the pre-

dominance of trees and shrubs, presenting a marked contrast

to the pine-barrens immediately adjoining. The difference in

vegetation is not to be explained by differences in the amount of

water in the soil, for branch-swamps are not much if any wetter

than the moist pine-barrens, and trees and shrubs are by

no means confined to wet places. The explanation is doubtless

to be found in the humus which the swamps contain. What

little humus is formed in the pine-barrens of course tends to

accumulate at the bottom of the valleys, and gradually prepares

the soil for the growth of broad-leaved woody plants. These

plants as they arrive naturally produce more humus, and there is

every reason to believe that the branch-swamps are tending to

increase their area in this way, independently of topographic

or climatic changes, though the process is probably so slow

that it would not be perceptible in a single life-time. The trees

and shrubs are of course accompanied by herbs which thrive in

1 See Rhodora 7: 69-80. April, 1905.

See footnote on page 21.

inate

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 63

their shade in preference to the bright sunlight of the open pine-

barrens. Here we doubtless have an example of that succession

of vegetation which has been so ably worked out by Dr. Cowles

in the vicinity of Chicago and elsewhere.

All branch-swamps are not alike; some contain a great many

more bushes than others. The densest of these swamps seem to

be where the Columbia sandis deepest, probably because where

it is thin the water runs off the adjacent slopes faster and does

not favor the accumulation of humus. Illustrations of the open

and dense types are subjoined (Plate IV, Fig. 2, and plate V).

As there are all possible gradations between open and dense

branch-swamps, they are all combined in the following list

of characteristic species.

3 Pinus Elliottii - 2 —_

11 Nyssa biflora :

2 Taxodium imbricarium 2-3 —

9 Magnolia glauca 4-7 white

7 Pinus serotina 3-4 —

5 Liriodendron Tulipifera 4 cream

5 Acer rubrum 2 red

1 Persea pubescens

1 Gordonia Lasianthus 7-9 white

11 Pinckneya pubens Oi pink

to Viburnum nudum white

7 Nyssa Ogeche 4-5

5 Clethra alnifolia 7-8 white

5 Cyrilla racemiflora 6-7 white

5 Rhus Vernix cream

4 Pieris nitida 3-4 white

3 Cliftonia monophylla 3-4 white

1 Hypericum fasciculatum 4-8 yellow

2 Aronia arbutifolia. 3-4 white

2 Ilex glabra 4-5 white

2 Viburnum nitidum 4 white

2 Leucothoé racemosa 4 white

1 Ilex myrtifolia

1 Smilax laurifolia cream

1 (Phoradendron flavescens) green

1 Alnus rugosa I-2 _—

1 Wistaria jfrutescens 4 blue

1 Rhus radicans 5 cream

4 Sabbatia foliosa 2 6-8 purple

ent Fe a ae 7 he ay ie bid FNM

HARPER

4 Lorinseria areolata 1 ° °

3 Ludwigia pilosa 2 6-9

3 Iris versicolor 2 4-5 blue

3 Macranthera fuchsioides 2 9-10 orange

2 Rhynchospora axillaris 1 c= 7 =

2 Panicum scabriusculum 6 —

2 Juncus polycephalus 4-6 —

2 Centella repanda 2 7-8 cream

2 Gratiola ramosa 6-7 cream

2 (Cuscuta compacta) 9 cream

2 Osmunda cinnamomea 2 ° fo)

2 Carex glaucescens 2 6-7 =

2 Sarracenia flava 2 4 yellow

2 Eriocaulon lineare 1 4-5 white

2 x decangulare 1 6-9 white

2 Isoetes flaccida fo) fo)

1 Cyperus Haspan 2 5-8 =

1 Anchistea Virginica 2 fe) °

t Xyris sp. (1574) 8--9 yellow

1 Mesospherum radiatum 2 6-8

1 Oxypolis rigidior 2 9-11 white

t Keellia hyssopifolia 1

1 Carex turgescens 2 4 —

1 Polygala cymosa Q) 5-9 yellow

1 Sagittaria Mohrii 2 6-9 white

1 Pluchea imbricata 2 6-9

1 Juncus Elhottii2 5-6 —

t Physostegia denticulata 2 6-7 purple

1 Gerardia linifolia 2 8-9 purple

t Rhynchospora glomerata panicu-

lata 2 6-8 —

t Panicum lucidum 6 =

1 Manisuris rugosa 2 8-9 —

1 Erigeron vernus 4-8 white and yellow

t Rudbeckia Mohri 2 6-9 yellow and dark purple

t Eupatorium perfoliatum 2 white

1 Aptos tuberosa VU dark purple

1 Coreopsis nudata 2 purple

1 Asclepias lanceolata VU red

1 Ilysanthes refracta@ or @) blue

1 Sporobolus Floridanus 1 —

1 Sarracenia minor 2 yellow

1 Proserpinaca palustris 2 greenish

it i (intermediate) 2 greenish

I a pectinata 2 greenish

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA

1 Scleria trichopoda 2 7-9 _—

1 Xyris ambigua 2 6 yellow

1 Clematis crispa 2 4-9 pale blue

1 Rhynchospora inexpansa 5-6 —

1 Oxytria crocea 5 yellow

1 Sphagnum macrophyllum

1 Pallavicinia Lyellii

1 Odontoschisma prostratum

1 Lycogala epidendrum

Summary. Trees and shrubs here form the bulk of the vegeta-

ation, the herbs, though more numerous in species, being rela-

tively scarce and inconspicuous. About half of the woody

plants are evergreen. The herbs are mostly perennial, as usual.

There are 6 vines, 3 of them woody and 3 herbaceous, and two

parasites, one a shrub and one an herb.’

Flowers seem to be most numerous in midsummer, but if trees

and shrubs alone were considered spring flowers would pre-

Jan. Feb. Mar. April May June July Aug. Sept. Oct. Nov. Dec.

IIE G

Pheenological diagram for 66 plants of branch-swamps, including 21 trees and

shrubs.

dominate. The phenological diagram is very similar to that

for moist pine-barrens, making allowance for the much smaller

mumber of species involved. The average flowering period

too, is nearly the same, 48 days. None of the herbs seem to

bloom before April.

There are about 15 anemophilous species in the list, and the

- Same number with white flowers. Other colors are less abundant,

“and there are not many conspicuous flowers in the whole lot.

Probably the most conspicuous are those of Pinckneya, which are

' For references to anatomical studies of Ilex glabra Aronia arbutifolia,

and Magnolia glauca see the catalogue.

66 HARPER

unique in that the attractive organ is an enlarged pinkish calyx-

segment, the corolla being greenish and not visible a short dis-

tance away.

The principal modes of dissemination are by wind, resilient

stems, and fleshy fruits, there being about a dozen cases of each

kind.

The 78 species of vascular plants belong to about 63 genera

and 42 families. The largest family in the list is Cyperacee,

with 7 species.

Monocotyledons here constitute not quite 30% of the an-

giosperms, a much smaller proportion than in the moist pine-

barrens, and about equalling that for the whole region. This is

perhaps as good an indication as any that the branch-swamps

are considerably nearer the mesophytic climax condition than

are the moist pine-barrens.

In general range the species of this group resemble those of the

preceding. Most of them are confined to the coastal plain.

6. CREEKS AND SMALL RIVERS.

As the branches just described flow toward the sea they of

course unite into creeks and those in turn into rivers. The

distinction between a branch and a creek is one of degree rather

than of kind, namely, a creek contains water all or nearly all

the time, while a branch frequently dries up. The plants in the

following list grow in streams of the third class described on a

preceding page, 7. e., those which originate within the Altamaha

Grit region and are rarely or never muddy. Streams of this class

do not become very large before they leave the region, not large

enough to be navigable, for instance. They do not usually have

well-defined banks, and very often the whole channel is full of

trees, as may be seen in the Allapaha and Little rivers within

a few miles of Tifton. (See Plates VI, VII, and VIII, Fig. 1.)

The water-level in these small endemic rivers varies a few feet

at different seasons, but rarely gets beyond the edge of the

swamp. The species here enumerated nearly all grow between

high and low water marks.

6 Nyssa biflora

Fe Olas 4-5

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA

4 Acer rubrum

4 Taxodium imbricarium

4 a (intermediate)

4 Magnolia glauca

3 Pinus Teda

2 “ Elliottii

2 ‘“ serotina

2 Liquidambar Styraciflua

I Quercus nigra

1 Taxodium distichum

1 Ilex opaca

3 Fraxinus Caroliniana

4 Cyrilla racemiflora

4 Cliftonia monophylla

4 Bignonia crucigera

3 Itea Virginica

3 Clethra alnifolia

2 Pieris nitida

2 Viburnum nudum

1 Hypericum fasciculatum

1 Smilax Jaurifolia

I Serenoa serrulata

o (Phoradendron fiavescens)

1 Aronia arbutifolia

1 Leucothoé axillaris

1 Leucothoé racemosa

1 Cholisma ligustrina

1 Berchemta scandens

6 Sabbatia foliosa 2).

3 Lorinseria areolata 2

3 Dulichium arundinaceum 2

2 [Dendropogon usneoides]

2 Orontium aquaticum

2 Xyris sp. (1700) YY.

2 Hymenocallis sp. 2

t Pluchea imbricata 1.

1 Pontederia cordata 2

1 Iris versicolor.

1 Ludwigia pilosa

1 Rhynchospora glomerata pani-

culata

1 Lobelia flaccidifolia

1 (Cuscuta compacta) ®

t Osmunda cinnamomea 21

1 Asclepias lanceolata 2

greenish

white

red and yellow

white

yellow

cream

white

greenish

purple

68 HARPER

1 Uniola laxa YJ 7 —

1 Habenaria cristata 2 7-8 yellow

1 Nymphea fluviatilis 7 6 yellow

1 Eriocaulon decangulare Y 6-9 white

1 Fimbrystylis autumnalis® 6-9 —

1 Rhynchospora corniculata 2 6-8 —

1 Sparganium androcladum VJ 5-6

1 Viola sp. (1675) 2 white?

2 Pallavicinia Lyellii

t [Porella pinnata]

2 [Archilejeunea clypeata]

1 [Schlotheimia Sullivantii]

1 Scapania nemorosa

1 Odontoschisma prostratum

1 Sphagnum macrophyllum

1 [Leskea denticulata]

1 [Mastigolejeunea auriculata]

1 Cephalozia Virginiana

1 Lycogala epidendrum

Summary. Many of the remarks made about the flora of

branch-swamps will apply almost as well to his group. This

contains a few more species of trees and bryophytes, and fewer

of shrubs and vascular herbs. Our commonest vascular epiphyte,

Jan. Feb. Mar.- April May June July Aug. Sept. Oct.) (Nov.s@Dee:

iG, — Fs

Phzenclogical diagram for 46 plants of creek and small river-swamps, including

26 trees and shrubs.

Dendropogon usneoides, appears for the first time in this list.!

The 54 vascular plants enumerated belong to 47 genera and

nearly as many families. The largest families are Conifere,

Ericacee, and Cyperacee. The only composite in the list is

more typical of other habitats, and the Scrophulariacee, Labiate,

1For references to anatomical studies of Leucothoé racemosa, L. axillaris,

Berchemia, Liquidambar, Itea, Magnolia glauca, Phoradendron, Dendropo-

gon, and Dulichium see the catalogue of species.

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 69

Euphorbiacee, and Leguminose are not represented at all.

_ As in the preceding list, most of the species are confined to the

coastal plain.

7. RIVERS AND CREEKS OF THE SECOND CLASS.

In the classification of streams on a preceding page those which

rise in the upper third of the coastal plain are mentioned. To

this class belong the Ohoopee (see Plate VIII, Fig. 2, and IX,

Fig. 1) and Little Ohoopee rivers, which rise in Washington

County, join with each other in Emanuel, and discharge into the

Altamaha in Tattnall, also Gum Swamp Creek, which rises in

Twiggs County, and unites with Alligator Creek to form the little

Ocmulgee River just before it discharges into the Ocmulgee near

Lumber City. These doubtless carry more calcium carbonate in

solution than those previously mentioned, because they originate

in more calcareous regions, and this is probably the principal

reason for the difference in the flora of their swamps.

The following species are characteristic.

5 Taxodium (intermediate) 2-3 —_—

’ 4 Nyssa uniflora 4

4 Pinus Tada 3-4 —

4 Planera aquatica a= —

3 Nyssa Ogeche 4-5

3 Acer rubrum 2 red

3 Fraxinus Caroliniana 3-4

2 Nyssa biflora

2 Betula nigra a —

1 Liquidambar Styraciflua — =

t Taxodium distichum Q=2 =

1 Quercus lyrata erty. —

I rn Michauxii —_— —

me | nigra 3-4 =

1 Salix nigra 4 cream

1 Gleditschia sp.

1 Pinus glabra 3 ==

1 Juniperus Virginiana 2% =

1 Magnolia grandiflora 5-6 cream

3 Viburnum obovatum 3-4 white

3 Cephalanthus occidentalis 6-9 white

3 Fraxinus Caroliniana 3-4 =

2 Cyrilla racemiflora 6-7 white

70 HARPER

a Crategus apiifolia — white

a Berchemia scandens 5 greenish

2 Wtstarta frutescens 4 blue

2 Hypericum galioides pallidum 7 yellow

1 Smilax Walteri

1 Sebastiana ligustrina 6

1 Sabal glabra 6-7 white

1 Amorpha fruticosa

1 Crategus estivalis white

1 Serenoa serrulata 6 cream

1 Trachelospermum dtfforme 6 yellow

3 Nymphea fluviatilis? 6 yellow

1 Orontium aquaticum 3 yellow

1 Carex bullata 2 4 —

Wi tolienlatae! 4 —

t Echinodorus radicans 1 white

1 Carex triceps 1} 4 —

1 Lobelia flaccidifolia 67 blue

1 Carex debilis 2 4 —

1 Mikania scandens VU 7-10 ~=white

1 Carex reniformis 2! 4 —

1 Clematis crispa dU 4-9 pale blue

1 [Brachelyma robustum]

t Fontinalis flaccida

Summary. In most particulars where this list differs from the

preceding it approaches the next, so a detailed discussion will

Jan. Feb. Mar, April May June July Aug. Sept. Oct. Nov. Dec.

GaGe

Phenological diagram for 37 plants growing in river and creek-swamps of the

second class, including 27 trees and shrubs.

not be given here. But we may note in passing, the increasing

number of trees and vines,! and the decreasing number of ever-

greens and herbs. There are no purple flowers.

It is interesting to note that the Graminee, the Ericacee, and

1For references to anatomical studies of Berchemia_ and Liquidambar

see catalogue of species.

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA (i

all plants with irregular gamopetalous corollas are absent, and

that the Cyperacez are all of the genus Carex.

Nearly all of the species in this list grow in the upper third of

the coastal plain, but not so many in the lower third. Nearly

half of them extend up the Mississippi valley to Missouri or there-

abouts, probably because of the abundance of swamps in that part

of the country, and also because the older formations of the

coastal plain are extensively developed there.

8. Muppy RIverR-SWAMpPs.

Next in order are the swamps of the rivers which rise in the

Piedmont region and are always more or less muddy, namely,

the Ogeechee, Oconee, and Ocmulgee. (See Plate IX, Fig. 2.)

The Altamaha of course belongs to this class too, but no railroad

crosses it in the territory assigned to this work, and I have not yet

had a chance to examine it there. But the flora of its swamps

down in the flat country is so similar to that along its two prin-

cipal affluents, the Oconee and Ocmulgee, that there is no reason

to believe that the unexplored portion presents any peculiarities

in this respect. The muddy rivers are usually bordered with

swamps on both sides, and it is rather the exception to finda

bluff or steep bank rising abruptly from the water’s edge to above

the limits of inundation. But the swamps along these rivers in

the Altamaha Grit region are not so extensive as in the upper

third of the coastal plain, probably because the Grit is harder

than most other coastal plain rocks and therefore stands higher

above the streams.

The following plants characterize these swamps

7 Taxodium distichum 2-3 —_

5 Liquidambar Styraciflua 3 =

4 Nyssa uniflora 4

4 Salix nigra 4 cream

4 Planera aquatica 2-3 =

3 Fraxinus Caroliniana 3-4

3 Quercus lyrata 3 --

2 Carpinus Caroliniana 3-4 =

2 Hicoria aquatica

2 Quercus Michauxii =

2 Acer rubrum 2 red

‘2 HARPER

2 Crategus viridis 3-4 white

1 Betula nigra 3 =

2 Pinus glabra ; 3 =

ri) Steeda 374 _—

t Ulmus sp. =

t Quercus alba 4 _

I ee etiellos 4 —

4 Ampelopsis arborea 6 cream

4 Sabal glabra 6-7 white

4 Adelia acuminata |

4 Ilex decidua 3 white 4

3 Sebastiana ligustrina 6 ;

3 Brunmichia cirrhosar, 8 greenish ;

2 Tecoma radicans 5-10 - ted

2 Rhus radicans 5 cream |

1 Cephalanthus occidentalis 6-9 white

2 Trachelospermum difforme 6 yellow

1 Crategus apiifolia white

1 Viburnum obovatum 3-4 white

t Amorpha fruticosa blue

t Baccharis halimifolia

1 Arundinaria sp.

3 Saururus cernuus VU 5 white

2 [Dendropogon usneoides]

2 Nymphea fluviatilis T 6 yellow

2 Baptisia leucantha 2 ; 4

2 Echinodorus radicans 1 white

1 [Polypodium polypodioides] ° °

1 Asclepias perennis 2 5-8

1 Lobelia cardinalis 2 7-9 red

t Conoclinium ccelestinum 11 7-11 blue

1 Anastrophus paspaloides 7-8 —_

t Passiflora lutea r. 6-7 cream

t Onoclea sensibilis YU fr) fe) |

t Carex bullata2 4 _

t Ludwigia glandulosa 7-8 greenish

t Lycopus rubellus 2 9 white

1 Carex glaucescens 2 . OH _—

rt Triadenum petiolatum YY 9 _

1 Carex debilis 2 4 _

t Mtkania scandens 1 7-10 white

1 Calophanes humistrata 1 6 blue Fe

1 Eupatorium serotinum 2 8-9 white ;

1 Carex reniformis 2 4 —_—

I “ intumescens 2 4 _

a a ih

- ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 73

1 Hymenocallis sp. 2 7 white

1 Ludwigia alternifolia 6-9 yellow

1 Carex triceps? 2 4 —

1 Scutellaria lateriflora 7 9 blue

1 Carex squarrosa 1} 4 —

2 [Porella pinnata]

1 [Brachelyma robustum]

Summary. This habitat-group is noteworthy for containing

seven vines and only five evergreens. This is a larger number

of the former and a smaller number of the latter than in any

previously mentioned group. The scarcity of evergreens makes

these swamps look very lifeless in winter. The number of trees

is the same as in the group immediately preceding. The heros

are mostly if not all perennials. Broad, thin leaves are the

tule here, as in most swamps, principally because of the

shade.!

_ The trees without exception flower between February and

April, and most of them are wind-pollinated. The number of

flowers of all kinds is greatest early in April, though there is a

second but smaller maximum about the summer solstice. The

average flowering period seems to be about 39 days.

Jan. Feb. Mar. April May June July Aug. Sept. Oct. Nov. Dec.

Fic. 9.

Phzenological diagram for 49 plants of muddy river-swamps, including 15 trees

and 10 shrubs.

The prevailing mode of dissemination seems to be through the

agency of the wind, about 17 species having winged or comose

seeds or fruits. Ten species have fleshy fruits. At least nine

have fruits adapted to floating on the water, and it is very likely

that the fruits of nearly all the species will float away if not taken

care of otherwise. Five species of trees have nuts or acorns.

The resilient herbaceous stems (‘‘tonoboles’’), so common in the

‘Por references to anatomical studies of Baccharis, Liquidambar, and

Dendropogon see the catalogue.

TALS HARPER

moist pine-barrens, are rare here, and adhesive fruits are alto-

gether wanting, which would seem to indicate that hairy quad-

rupeds do not frequent these swamps.

The number of species, genera, and families in this list is al-

most the same as for the creek-swamps. The largest family is

Cyperacez, with seven species, all of the genus Carex. The

Ericacee are conspicuous by their absence. Only 23.2% of the

angiosperms are monocotyledons.

Probably every species in this list grows in the upper third of

the coastal plain, and many of them extend still farther inland.

Several of them are rare—and others absent—in Florida, doubt-

less because there is only one muddy river! in that state, the

Apalachicola. It is noteworthy how many of these plants (some-

thing like half of them) extend up the Mississippi valley nearly

or quite to the extreme edge of the coastal plain in southern

Illinois. This points to an exceptional development of swamp

vegetation along and near the Mississippi River.

These species are all strictly American, and mostly Eastern

North American, probably none reaching the Pacific coast, and

less than half a dozen reaching the West Indies.

REMARKS ON THE EIGHT PRECEDING LisTs.

The eight habitat-groups thus far discussed (with the possible

exception of the rock outcrops) may be considered as forming

a linear sequence. There is an almost perfect gradation from

rocks through pine-barrens and branch-swamps to muddy river-

swamps. This is proved by the fact that as a rule any species

which occurs in more than one of these habitat-groups occurs

only in consecutive groups. The same is perhaps true to a lesser

extent of genera and families. For instance Aster squarrosus

grows on rocks and in dry and intermediate pine-barrens;

Gaylussacia dumosain dry, intermediate, and moist pine-barrens;

Erigeron vernus in intermediate and moist pine-barrens and

branch-swamps; Ludwigia pilosa in moist pine-barrens, branch-

swamps, and creek-swamps; and Acer rubrum in branch-swamps

and all three classes of river-swamps. It is unusual however to

17. e., one which originates north of the pine-barrens and carries mineral

sediment.

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 75

find any one species in more than two of these habitats, though

some genera (Pinus for instance) are represented in all of them.

This particular sequence cannot be carried farther in the same

direction, so we will now consider a series of habitats which are

not.so closely related to the preceding, namely, the ponds. These

are principally of three kinds, cypress ponds, shallower ponds,

and deeper ponds.

g. Cypress Ponps.

These ponds, (plate X, fig. 1.) characterized always by a

rather dense growth of pond-cypress, Taxodium imbricarium,

occur in most of the counties, but are rather scarce in the

northernmost ones. They are simply shallow depressions in

the otherwise nearly level pine-barrens, varying perhaps from

one to a hundred acres inextent. (What originally caused these

depressions I cannot say.) In wet weather they may contain

two or three feet of water, but they dry up frequently enough

to prevent floating aquatics like the Nymphzaceze, Potamogetons,

and some Uriricularias, from establishing themselves. The

cypress by reason of its erect branchlets and minute appressed

leaves (quite different from those of its swamp-loving congener)

gives little shade, and the cypress ponds are almost as sunny as

the adjacent pine-barrens. The bottoms of these ponds are

covered by a very thin layer of humus. The frequent desicca-

tion and sunning to which they are subjected doubtless limits

the accumulation of humus, as in the pine-barrens. The

Columbia sand seems to be always present in these ponds, as in

every other place where Taxodium twmbricarium grows.

The following are the characteristic species of cypress ponds.

15 LTaxodium imbricarium 23 —

tr Pinus Elliottii ee —

2 Nyssa biflora

1 Ilex myrtifolia

6 Ilex myrtifolia

_ 6 Hypericum myrtifolium 6-9

3 es fasciculatum 4-8 yellow

2 Pieris nitida 3-4

1 Stillingia aquatica 4-7

1 Malapoenna geniculata

t Pieris phillyreifolia 2 white

HARPER

9g Pontederia cordata 2

8 Polygala cymosa @)

7 Ludwigia pilosa 11

9 Coreopsis nudata 1

6 Rhynchospora axillaris 1}

8 Aristida palustris 2

6 Eriocaulon compressum 2

6 Sabbatia decandra

5 Scleria Baldwinii 2

5 Pluchea bifrons 2

6 Dichromena latifolia 2

4 Rudbeckia Mohri 2}

3 Lobelia Boykinii

3 Centella repanda 2

3 Saururus cernuus 2

3 Sclerolepis uniflora 7

2 Gratiola ramosa

2 Pluchea imbricata 2

2 Xyris fimbriata 2

2 Juncus polycephalus?/

2 Rhynchospora corniculata 2

2 Carex sp. 2

rt “ gilaucescens 2

t Anchistea Virginica 2

t Rhynchospora filifolia 2

I Scleria gracilis 2

1 Erigeron vernus 1

1 Panicum stenodes 2

1 Rhynchospora leptorhyncha 2

1 Xyris Smalliana 2

E ssp. (1452) Y

1 Ludwigia linifolia

t Lycopus pubens

t Rhynchospora fascicularis 2

1 Proserpinaca pectinata 2

I palustris 2

‘1 Hypericum acutifolium 12

1 Rhexia stricta?

1 Leptopoda Helenium 1

t Amsonia rigida 2

1 Eleocharis prolifera

1 Sphagnum macrophyllum

ot estate

ar Do 6 ©

(ieee liee eae elie, a

Oonuon Own OOF

“I On Stet Aum I Ww

~yj ~T

mado ©

blue

yellow

purple

white

purple

white

yellow and dark purple —

blue

cream

white

pinkish

yellow

white and yellow

yellow

white

greenish

yellow

purple

yellow

blue

Summary. Perennial herbs are here much more numerous

than woody plants, but one of the trees (the Taxodiwm) exceeds

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 77

in bulk all the rest of the vegetation combined. Fhe trees and

shrubs are mostly evergreen, but probably none of the herbs

are. There are no vines (except the unique Pvreris phillyrei-

_jolia), and no epiphytes or parasites have been noted.

Adaptations for reducing transpiration (principally taking

the form of coriaceous or reduced leaves) are just as conspicuous

here as in the pine-barrens. Coreopsis nudata, differing from all

its congeners in having terete leaves, is an excellent example.

Saururus and Pontederia, with broad thin cordate leaves, seem

rather anomalous; but the Saururus is more frequently found in

shaded places, and the Pontederia has narrower leaves in these

ponds than anywhere else. Both of these species have a wide

range, and are by no means confined to ponds.

An interesting character of the pond vegetation is that most

of the species have their stems noticeably enlarged toward the

base, more so than their congeners (if any) which grow in other

habitats. This is most conspicuous in the cypress itself, but is

pretty well exhibited by the Pius and Nyssa. Among the

herbs Ludwigia pilosa often has a spongy bark several times as

thick as the rest of the stem, and many other species have stems

which are perceptibly spongy inside toward the base.!

The number of flowers seems to be greatest in midsummer.

Jan. Feb. Mar. ‘April May June July Aug. Sept. Oct. Nov. Dec.

IMG, ©,

Phzenological diagram for 46 plants of cypress ponds.

Fourteen species have anemophilous flowers, 11 yellow, 7 white, 3

purple, and 3 blue. The purple flowers (all pink purple) are much

-larger and more conspicuous than the blue, and also a little more

abundant. The average flowering period is exceptionally long,

55 days.

* For references to morphological notes on Pluchea bifrons, Stillingia

aquatica, and Taxodium imbricarium see the catalogue of species.

78 HARPER

The modes of dissemination for these plants are not very well |

known. About half a dozen species have seeds transported —

by the wind, and two or three of the woody plants have drupes.

There are a few instances of resilient stems (‘‘ tonoboles’’), but —

these obviously would not scatter seeds from one pond to

another. Probably as many seeds are carried on the feet of |

aquatic birds as in any other way.

Taxonomically the list contains 52 species belonging to about

38 genera and 26 families. Cyperacee is the largest family, ©

as is often the case, and Composite next. There are only two —

species in the list between Euphorbiacee and Juncacee, and ©

none between Polygalacee and Saururacee. Rhynchospora

is the largest genus here, asin many other habitats. Nearly 40% —

of the angiosperms are monocotyledons.

These cypress-pond plants are quite restricted in range, doubt- —

less because similar habitats are not very widespread. About

half the species are confined to the pine-barren region, and

only about 10% extend farther inland than the fall-line. Only

about 35% range as far north as Virginia, in the coastal plain or —

otherwise. Seven species are reported from the tropics, but

perhaps not correctly in every case. All but one or two have

been reported from Florida, and they probably all grow in the

flat pine-barrens of Southeast Georgia, where cypress ponds are

common. A few are not known farther inland than the Altamaha

Grit escarpment, but the majority range nearly throughout the

pine-barrens of Georgia (as the typical species, Taxodium wu-

bricarium, does). Almost none of them are reported up the

Mississippi valley even as far as Arkansas. In this respect there

is a marked contrast with the group just preceding this. |

There is probably not a phytogeographical unit in the whole

region more stable than the cypress ponds. While the glacial

ponds in the north last only a very short time, geologically

speaking, the cypress ponds probably have not changed materially

in thousands of years, barring the works of man and possible

climatic changes. Erosion is of course out of the question, and

the quantity of humus (the principal factor which determines

the life of a glacial pond) probably does not vary much, for the

fires which get into the ponds occasionally in dry seasons doubt-

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 79

less keep the humus down, if nothing else does. The number

of species adapted to growing in such places is limited, and those

which are easily disseminated are already established nearly

everywhere. The individual cypress trees themselves show a

certain amount of stability, for their ages are often reckoned

in hundreds of years.

Io. SHALLOWER PINE-BARREN PONDS.

Toward the inland edge of the Altamaha Grit region, particu-

larly in Bulloch, Dooly, Irwin, Berrien, and Colquitt counties,

are found shallow pine-barren ponds, which while not essentially

distinct from the cypress ponds, usually contain no cypress, and

are probably empty of water half the time. The Columbia sand

seems to be thinner in these ponds than in the cypress ponds,

and is probably sometimes entirely absent. Their flora con-

sists principally of the following species.

2 Pinus Elliottii @ 2 oa

2 Nyssa biflora

t Taxodium imbricarium 2-3 —

6 Hypericum myrtifolium 6-9 yellow

2 Ilex myrtifolia

1 Cephalanthus occidentalis 6-9 white

2 Diospyros Virginiana 5 white

2 Serenoa serrulata : 6 cream

1 (Phoradendron flavescens)

1 Malapoenna geniculata

4 Gratiola ramosa 6-7

3 Dichromena latifolia 1 5-7 white

3 Rudbeckia Mohrii2l 6-9 yellow and dark purple

3 Pluchea bifrons 2 6-9

3 Aristida palustris 1 9 —

3 Scleria gracilis 2). 5-7 —

2 Ludwigia pilosa 2 6-9

2 Coreopsis nudata VL 4-6 purple

2 Isnardia palustris 2 5-9 greenish

2 Leptopoda Helenium1 4-5 yellow

2 Brewerta aquatica YU. 6-7 purple

2 Rhynchospora axillaris? 5-7 —

2 Ludwigia linifolia 7-9 yellow

2 Tridens ambiguus 12 6-9 —

2 Manisuris Chapmani2 8-9 —

2 Chondrophora nudata2 8-9 yellow

80 HARPER

1 Hypericum gymnanthum@® yellow

1 Keellia hyssopifolia 2

1 Juncus repens 6 =

1 Proserpinaca pectinataj1 5-8 greenish

1 Panicum stenodes 2 6-9 =

1 Sclerolepis uniflora 1 coy pinkish

rt Eriocaulon compressum 2 3-4 white

1 Diodia sp. (1682) 9 white

1 Sabbatia campanulata 6-8 purple

1 Eriocaulon decangulare 2 6-9 white

1 Monniera Caroliniana 2 7-8 blue

t Rhexia Alifanus 2 6-8 purple

1 Sporobolus Floridanus? 9 —_—

t Gerardia linifolia 7 8-9 purple

t Mesospherum radiatum 2 6-8

1 Fuirena breviseta 2) I= =

1 Amsonia rigida 1 5 blue

1 Eleocharis prolifera 2 —

1 Rhynchospora perplexa a

1 Carex glaucescens 2 O= 7 —

i Panicum Combsii 1 9 =

1 Eupatorium Mohrii2 9 white

t Lachnocaulon anceps 4-8 white

t Polygala ramosa @) 5-9 yellow

1 Lycopus pubens 12 g-10 white

1 Polygala Chapmani@® i purple

t Xyris sp. (1574) 2 8-9 yellow

1 Rhexia lutea 2 O=7 yellow

t Euthamia Caroliniana 1 g-10 =©yellow

1 Panicum melicarium 5-7 —

1 Tofieldia racemosa 1. 6-8 white

rt Sarracenia minor? 4-5 . yellow

1 Laciniaria spicata Uf 8—ro purple

1 Juncus biflorus 2, 5-6 —

Summary. This group does not differ greatly from the pre-

ceding. The only vine is Brewerta aquatica, a perennial herb.

The proportion of trees, shrubs, and herbs is about the same as.

in the cypress ponds.!

About the same families are represented, but the shallower

ponds contain more Composite and Graminee than the cypress.

ponds, and fewer Cyperaceee. There are no Ericaceze or Legu-

iFor references to anatomical studies of Pluchea bijrons, Juncus repens,

and Eriocaulon decangulare see the catalogue.

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 81

minose. Composite is the largest family, with Cyperacee and

Graminez a tie for second place. Cryptogams are rare or

absent, and monocotyledons constitute about 37% of the

whole list.

man. Feb. Mar. April May June July Aug. Sept. Oct. Nov. Dec.

20|--- -|-- -$ ---+ --4---4-f-r-SS---f\-4--- 20

(

FIG. II.

Phznological diagram for 52 plants of shallow pine-barren ponds.

The ranges of these species are slightly different from those of

the cypress ponds. Nearly all of them occur in the Lower Oligocene

region, but not quite so many are known in the flat pine-barren ~

country. Nearly all have also been reported from Florida, but

quite a number only from the northwestern part of that state.

Ir. PONDS ALONG THE ALTAMAHA GRIT ESCARPMENT.

Just at the inland edge of our territory, perhaps occupying

holes in the thin edge of the Altamaha Grit, are a number of small

but apparently permanent pine-barren ponds. These are too

few and scattered to contain a very rich flora. The following

species have been observed in such places in Screven, Wilcox,

and Decatur Counties.

(For explanation of asterisks see summary.)

3 Taxodium imbricarium Das, =

2 Pinus Elliottii 2 —

t Nyssa biflora

2 Hypericum fasciculatum 4-8 yellow

2 Cephalanthus occidentalis 6-9 white

1 Nyssa Ogeche 4-5 —

t Pieris nitida 3-4 white’

1 Magnolia glauca 4=7 white

*3 Myriophyllum heterophyllum 1

*2 Brasenia purpurea 1 5-6 purple

2 Pontederia cordata 2 4-8 blue

2 Iris versicolor 1! 4-5 blue

*2 Utricularia inflata 2 3=7] yellow

82 HARPER

2 Carex sp. 2 4 _

1 Eriocaulon compressum 2 3-4 white

*z Castalia odorata 2. 4-8 white

1 Xyris fimbriata 2 7-9 yellow

*r Scirpus cylindricus 2 5-6 _—

1 Anchistea Virginica 2 fe) o)

1 Gratiola ramosa O=7 —

1 Sclerolepis uniflora 2 5-7 pinkish

1 Carex alata 2 4 —

*r Eleocharis interstincta 1 5-6 —

*r Ludwigia spherocarpa 1

1 Dulichium arundinaceum 1, 7-8 =

*r Limnanthemum aquaticum 2 6-9 white

1 Carex venusta 1 4 —_

1 Sphagnum macrophyllum

Summary. There is little noteworthy about these plants ~

except their ranges. All of them except Nyssa Ogeche grow in

many places in the adjacent Lower Oligocene region, but nearly ~

a third of the species (the names of which are starred) are not

known to be native elsewhere in the Altamaha Grit region

(doubtless because they require permanent water), though some

of these grow also in artificial ponds and ditches. At least a

dozen range northward to the glaciated region, where they

usually occupy similar habitats. Five or six are reported also

from the tropics, but their identity or indigeneity there may

in some cases be questioned.

Te) .OAND-HininSs:

Most of the habitats hitherto discussed may be considered as

located on the right-hand side of some creek or river. If we cross

the stream we find quite a different series of habitats, of which

the sand-hills are the type. (Plate X, fig. 2, and Plate XI.)

Sand-hills have been described on an earlier page (21). Their

most prominent characteristic is the sparsity of vegetation, and

consequent lack of shade and humus, together with conspicu-

ous adaptations for reducing transpiration in most of the plants.?

1See Rhodora, 7: 76. April, 1905.

° For references to anatomical or morphological notes on Chrysoma

paucifiosculosa, Galium hispidulum, Asclepias humistrata, A. verticillata, —

Batodendron arboreum, Lupinus perennis, Baptisia perfoliata, Dendro- —

pogon usneoides, Cyperus retrofractus, and Pinus palustris see the cata-

logue of species.

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA CAs tOe

In these respects they resemble .deserts, but the dryness of

the sand-hills is of course-in the soil, and not in the air

as in most desert regions. The Columbia or Ozark sand of

which the sand-hills are composed is always too deep for any

roots to reach the bottom of it, and it is practically homogeneous

from top to bottom, except the very uppermost layer which

is exposed to the atmosphere and is usually whiter than the

rest. Analyses of this kind of soil in Dodge and Decatur

counties and other parts of the southeastern coastal plain by

the U. S. Bureau of Soils show usually about 10% of clay and

silt, less than 1% of organic matter, and the rest all sand. The

whiteness of the sand together with the sparsity of the vegeta-

tion makes the sand-hills conspicuous. They probably consti-

tute about 10% of the area northeast of the Altamaha River

and 5% of the remainder of the region. They have been

little damaged by civilization, except that many if not most of

the pines on them have been turpentined or removed. Fires

sweep over the sand-hills occasionally, but there is so little

grass to burn that not much damage is done, except to trees

which have been turpentined. The land is of little value

agriculturally, and has few buildings on it other than churches.

The following list of plants has been compiled from about 25

different sand-hill areas widely distributed over the region.

25 Quercus Catesbei 3 oe

14 Quercus brevifolia 3 _

11 Pinus palustris 3 =

to Quercus Margaretta 3-4 —

9 Quercus geminata 4 oa

1 Crategus Michauxii? white

1 Diospyros Virginiana 4-5 white

17 Chrysobalanus oblongifolius 6 white

14 Serenoa serrulata 6 cream

13 Polycodium cesium 4 white

7 Ceanothus microphyllus 4-5 white

4 Batodendron arboreum 5 white

4 Gaylussacia dumosa 4 white

5 Clinopodium coccineum red

6 Polygonella Croomii 9

3 Asimina angustifolia ; 5 cream

2 Cholisma ferruginea 5

HARPER

2 Asimina speciosa . 4-5

2 Rhus Toxicodendron

. 2 Bumelia reclinata

2 Chrysoma pauciflosculosa 9

1 Cratezegus uniflora

t Bumelia lanuginosa

1 Myrica pumila

1 Ceanothus Americanus 5-

1 Pieris Mariana 4-

1 Elliottia racemosa 6

24 Eriogonum tomentosum 2 7

21 Kuhnistera pinnata 2} 9-

16 Cracca Virginiana 2

17 Actinospermum angustifolium @

15 Stipulicida setacea Vf

15 Rhynchospora Grayii 2

6 Baptisia perfoliata YY

12 Psoralea Lupinellus 2

g Arenaria Caroliniana

9 Cuthbertia graminea 1)

11 Dasystoma pectinata @

9 Stillingia sylvatica 2

8 Stenophyllus cilliatifolius ®

8 Euphorbia gracilis?

8 Stylosanthes biflora 1

9g Stenophyllus Warei@

8 Aristida stricta?

8 Paronychia herniarioides@ or @)

8 Croton argyranthemus 2

8 Laciniaria tenuifohaY |

7 Dolicholus simplicifolius 2

8 Indigofera Carolainina 2,

8 Lupinus diffusus 2 4

7 Krameria secundtflora i, 67

7 Chrysopsis graminifolia 2 8-11

7 Afzelia pectinata® 9

Ma Fon mM O

So ees

| oy |

fopiees

SION DDA~Y

Sana Seach

MmM~ar @owon wo

ont

(on JS (09) at (Oy)

apie eS)

MOH Ona

6 Brewerta humistrataY. 5

6 Solidago odora 2. 9-

6 Asclepias humistrata 2 4

6 Sericocarpus bifoliatus 2 8

6 Gerardia filifolia © 9

6 Lupinus perennis 2 4

6 Opuntia vulgaris 2 5-7

5 Amsonia tenuifolia 2, 4-5

5 Dicerandra odoratissima@ = 9-10

cream

yellow

white

cream

white

cream

white

cream and purple

yellow

white

yellow

blue

white

pinkish

yellow

dark purple

yellow

greenish

purple

yellow

blue

dark purple

yellow

white

yellow

gray-purple

white

purple

blue

yellow

pale blue

white

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA

6 Tium apilosum 2

4 Polygonella gracilis@

6 Thysanella fimbriata ©

5 ocleria glabra?

5 Pteridium 2!

5 Galastia regularts 2.

4 Jatropha stimulosa 1

6 Triplasis Americana,

4 Sporobolus gracilis 2

4 Euphorbia corollata 2

4 Laciniaria elegans?

4 Chrysopsis gossypina 2

4 Psoralea canescens 2

4 Vernonia angustifolia?!

4 Berlandiera pumila1

3 Lechea tenuifolia2!

3 Siphonychia pauciflora@ or @)

3 Phlox subulata

3 Meibomia tenuifolia

2 Smilax pumila

3 Gaura Michauxii@)

3 Sorghastrum secundum 2

3 Crotalaria rotundifolia

4 Warea cuneifolia@

3 Galium hispidulum 2

3 Trichostema lineare Q)

3 Selaginella acanthonota

3 Stphonychia Americana ®

3 Salvia azurea 2

2 Cyperus retrofractus 2

2 Verbena carnea 2

2 Aristida condensata 21

2 Calophanes oblongifolia 2

2 Morongia uncinata

2 Zornia bracteata YY.

2 Eupatorium album,

2 Lespedeza hirta 2

2 Froelichia Floridana®

2 Houstonia rotundifolia

2 Clitoria Mariana2l

2 Yucca filamentosa

2 [Dendropogon usneoides]

2 Petalostemon albidus1

2 Dicerandra linearifolia@

2 Angelica dentata

{e)

see

Se Tot Tey

COU Ee On ieine ee

() © iF (e)

Toy

Ue leek

ie)

Sec em

Ne)

cone hele

©) ©)

cream

white

)

purple

white

yellow

blue

purple

yellow

white

pale blue

purple

cream

pinkish

yellow

pale blue

cream

blue

white

blue or white

pinkish

blue

purple

yellow

white

cream

white

blue

cream

white

86 HARPER

2 Baptisia lanceolata 3-4 yellow

t Asclepias verticillata 1 6-9 white

1 Tradescantia reflexa 2). 6-7 blue

1 Lespedeza repens VU. 9 purple

1 Meibomia arenicola 9-10 purple

t Anthenantia villosa 2} 8-10 —

2 Carex tenax 12 4 —

1 Ruellia humilis? 6 blue

1 Euphorbia Floridana 2 7-8

1 Sarothra gentianoides® 6-10 = yellow

t Nolina Georgiana 5

1 Cyperus Martindalei2 6-7 —

1 Asclepias tuberosa 1 5-9 orange

1 Gaillardia lanceolata@® or @ 6-9 yellow and dark purple

1 Pentstemon multiflorus 8-10 white

1 Coreopsis delphinifolia 2 6-8 yellow

t Aldenella tenuifolia® 6-8 white

1 Aristida sp. (1988) 2 9 —

1 Solidago Boottii2 9 yellow

1 Coreopsis lanceolata 2 4-6 yellow

1 Polygonella sp. (2010) @ 9 white

1 Pentstemon hirsutus 2 4-6 purple

1 Helianthus Radula 1 g-10 =©dark purple

1 Batschia Carolinensis? 5-6 orange

1,Onosmodium Virginianum 2 5-6 cream

1 Euphorbia cordifolia@’* 9 greenish

2 Astreeus hygrometricus

1 Dicranum Bonjeani

Summary. The sand-hill vegetation is more like that of the

dry pine-barrens than any other previously discussed. A little

more than half of the species in each of these habitats are com-

mon to both, but their order of abundance is very different in the

two lists, and if only the 25 most abundant species in each were

considered there would be very few in common. The proportion

of trees, shrubs, and herbs is almost identical in the two groups.

Quercus Catesbei probably exceeds in numbers all other trees

on the sand-hills combined. It would be hard to find a Georgia

sand-hill without this tree and Eriogonum tomentosum, the most

abundant herb. An interesting feature of the sand-hill flora is

the occurrence of three rare shrubs, Chrysoma, Clinopodium, and

Polygonella Croomiu, belonging to families which are mostly

herbaceous.

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA . 87

About one-eighth of the species in the above list are ever-

green, but most of the evergreens are not abundant, so the sand-

hills have quite a desolate appearance in winter. There are half

a dozen or more perennial herbaceous vines, but these usually do

not climb. Instead they trail over the bare sand, where there is

plenty of room. Perennial herbs are in the majority here as in

most of the groups already discussed, but there are more an-

nuals on the sand-hills than in any other habitat.

Almost every sand-hill plant has some evident contrivance for

reducing transpiration. Quercus Catesbet, the commonest species,

is a good example. Its leaves are coriaceous, apparently

about alike on both sides, and turned at all sorts of angles to the

horizon, so that only a few of them receive the full effect of the

sun’sraysatanyone time. Glaucous and woolly leaves are quite

common. Asclepias humuistrata (see plate XIX, fig. 1.), Baptista

perfoliata, Polygonella gracilis, Chrysopsis gossypina, Serico-

carpus bifoliatus, Chrysoma pauciflosculosa, and probably other

species, have their leaves vertical, and alike or nearly so on both

surfaces.1 In Stipulicida setacea, one of the slenderest plants

imaginable, and many other species, the same end is accomplished

by reduction of leaf-surface.?

There are few spring flowers on the sand-hills, which is. not

surprising, since it is well known that vernal-flowering plants

are usually most numerous in dense deciduous forests, where the

ground is covered with humus, and the sand-hills are just the

opposite of this. The species which bloom before April are

mostly trees. The annual plants mostly bloom between July 1st

and October 1st. The height of the flowering season for the

whole sand-hill flora seems to be in September. (See diagram.)

The average length of the flowering period is 51 days.

The proportions of the various colors of flowers are almost the

same as in dry pine-barrens. Only 20 species are anemophilous,

and of the entomophilous ones about 36 have white flowers,

12 cream-colored, 21 yellow, 9 purple, and 12 blue. Apparently

the sand-hill insects are not as fond of purple as are those which

1 See Bull. Torrey Club, 30: 336, 339- 1903.

2 The frequent occurrence in this group of such specific names as angus-

tufolia, filifolia, gracilis, lanceolata, pectinata and tenuifolia is suggestive.

88 HARPER

live on the other side of the creek, where purple flowers are much

more numerous.

As usual, the modes of dissemination are not known for more

than half the species. About 17 species have wind-borne seeds,

and 15 fleshy fruits. Some of the latter are berries which can only

Jan. Feb. Mar. Apmnl May June July Aug, Sept. Oct. Nov. Dec:

ee a eee

Phzenological diagram for 120 sand-hill plants, including 20 trees and shrubs.

be reached by birds, while others are larger fruits close to the

ground for the benefit of terrestrial animals. Nine or ten species

are “‘tonoboles”’ (see p. €1) and about the same number have

adhesive fruits. A few of the Leguminose have pods which

open suddenly with a twisting motion, and expel the seeds in

that way. One of these, Clitor1ia Mariana, has sticky seeds

which are probably adapted to adhere to any animal which may

be passing at the time they are discharged. There are at least

four tumble-weeds in the list. .

The list contains 133 species belonging to about 103 genera

and 4s families (a larger number of genera and families than

in the dry pine-barrens, but a smaller number of species). The

largest family is Leguminose, with 22 species, and the next

Composite, with 16. Euphorbiacee, Cyperacee, and Graminez

tie for third place, with seven each. The Gentianacee and

Polygalaceae are conspicuous by their absence. The largest

genera are Euphorbia and Quercus, with four species each.

Cryptogams are represented by two pteridophytes, one moss,

~t.-. —-T

;

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 89

and one fungus. Only 17.6% of the angiosperms (about the

same proportion as in dry pine-barrens) are monocotyledons,

which seems to indicate that the sand-hill flora is pretty highly

specialized.

The following families have at least two more representatives

on the sand-hills than in the dry pine-barrens: Caryophyllacee,

Illecebraceez, Polygonacee, and Commelinacese. The reverse

is true of Composite, Polygalacee, Cupulifere, and Graminee.

In range the sand-hill plants are more restricted than those

of dry pine-barrens. Those peculiar to the sand-hills are nearly all

confined to the coastal plain, and conversely, those whose ranges

cross the fall-line nearly all occur also in dry pine-barrens. Most

of the characteristic sand-hill plants do not range farther north

than North Carolina or farther west than Mississippi. (This

throws an interesting side-light on the geographical distribution

of coastal-plain sand-hills.) About two-thirds of the whole list

occur also on the fall-line sand-hills of Georgia (according to notes

from Richmond County furnished by Mr. A. Cuthbert, and my

own observations there and elsewhere along the fall-line).

A few of the species listed are not yet known outside of

Georgia, and at least one of these (Dicerandra odoratissima) 1s

perhaps really confined to the state. Only one species in the

list is known from the tropics, and that (Dendropogon usneoides)

is an epiphyte, by no means confined to sand-hills.

In descending from the summit of a sand-hill toward the creek

at its base, we may pass through either of two series of inter-

mediate habitats, bogs or hammocks. Approaching a springy

place in the sand-hills, or a branch passing through them, we

usually encounter first a slightly damp area, analogous to the

intermediate (rather dry) pine-barrens on the other side of the

creek. For want of a better designation this may be called

13. INTERMEDIATE SAND-HILLS.

_ The flora of such habitats is rather meager, and not sharply

distinguished from those on either side of it. The following

species are characteristic.

2 Pinus serotina 3-4 —

5 Kalmia hirsuta 6- urple

9 Purp

90 HARPER

3 Cholisma ferruginea ~ 5 white

2 Vaccinium nitidum |

t Ilex glabra 4-5 white

1 Myrica Carolinensis _

1 Cliftonia monophylla 3-4 white

1 Serenoa serrulata 6 cream

1 Gaylussacia frondosa Chek

t Leucothoé elongata white

-r Pieris Mariana 4-5 white

1 Hypericum myrtifolium 6-9 yellow

3 Juncus biflorus?2 5-6 _—

3 Pterocaulon undulatum 1 5-6 cream

3 Polygala lutea@ 4-9 orange

2 Lachnocaulon anceps 4-8 white

2 Trilisa odoratissima 1} 8-9 purple

2 Syngonanthus flavidulus 2). 5-9 cream

1 Lechea Torreyi2

1 Juncus scirpoides compositus 2 7 —=

1 Aristida spiciformis 2 7-9 —_

1 Xyris fimbriata2 | 7-9 yellow

r IPiwersebyei Wh fo) fo)

1 Xyris brevifolia @ 4 yellow

1 Sophronanthe hispida 12 7-9 white

1 Sabbatia Elliottii 9-10 white

t Doellingeria reticulata 2]. white and yellow

1 Xyris Elliottii 2 6-8 yellow

t Rhynchospora ciliaris. 5-8 —

t Rhexia filiformis 6-9 white

1 Polygala nana @) 4—6 yellow

1 Zygadenus glaberrimus 2 7-8 white

As the species in this list are so few, and nearly all grow also

in the intermediate pine-barrens or in some of the habitats to

be mentioned below, it is not worth while to summarize much

concerning them. It will be noticed that most of the woody

plants are evergreen.

14. SAND-HILL Boes.

The branches in the sand-hills are analogous to those in the

pine-barrens, and have a somewhat similar flora. The differences —

between the two are doubtless due mostly to the much greater

thickness of the Columbia formation on the sand+hills. In boggy

places at the heads of the sand-hill branches (plate XII, fig. 2)

are found the following species. 5

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA

6 Pinus serotina 3-4 =

4 Magnolia glauca 4-7 white

rt Persea pubescens

2 Gordonia Lasianthus 7-9 white

2 Pinus Teda 3-4 —

1 Liriodendron Tulipifera 4 cream

6 Cliftonia monophylla 7 3-4 white

4 Rhus Vernix : cream

3 Myrica Carolinensis _—

3 Pieris nitida 3-4 white

3 Clethra alnifolia 7-8 white

2 Pinckneya pubens 6-7 pink

3 Gaylussacia frondosa 4

2 Ilex glabra 4-5 white

2 Ilex coriacea 5-6 white

2 Smilax laurifolia cream

1 Viburnum nudum white

1 Aronia arbutifolia 3-4 white

rt Leucothoé axillaris 4-6 white

i Hypericum opacum 7-9 yellow

2 Osmunda cinnamomea 2. ° c

2 Lycopodium alopecuroides ° fe)

2 Pogonia ophioglossoides 1{ 4-5 purple

2 Tracyanthus angustifolius 2 4-5 cream

2 Anchistea Virginica 2 fo) °

2 Polygala lutea @ 4-9 orange

2 Sarracenia rubra 4 red

2 Utricularia subulata 4-7 yellow

t Mayaca Aubleti 6-9 pinkish

1 Habenaria blephariglottis 2 8-9 white

1 Centella repanda 2 7-8 cream

t Pteridium 7 ° °

1 Xyris fimbriata TY 7-9 yellow

1 Habenaria ciliaris 2 7-8 orange

1 Rhexia ciliosa 2 6-9 purple

1 Habenaria cristata 2 7-8 yellow

1 Juncus trigonocarpus UY 8-9 _—

2 Oceanoros leimanthoides 2, 6 white

I Xyris platylepis 2 7-8 yellow

1 Sarracenia purpurea 3-4 red

1 Carex Elliottii2L 4 —

1 Erianthus brevibarbis 2 9 —

1 Panicum verrucosum 1 9 —

1 Sarracenia flava 2 4 yellow

I ¥ minor 2. 4-5 yellow

92 HARPER

1 Zygadenus glaberrimus 2 7-8 white

1 Habenaria blephariglottis x

ciliaris 2 8 cream

1 Cyperus Haspan? 6-8

1 Marshallia graminifolia 2 7-9 pale purple

1 Mesospherum radiatum 2 6-8 ;

1 Macranthera fuchsioides 2 g-Io orange

1 Ludwigia pilosa 2. —9

1 Aptos tuberosa VY 8 dark purple

1 (Cuscuta compasta) @® 9 cream

1 Sphagnum tenerum (and doubtless other species)

1 Batrachospermum vagum keratophytum

Summary. The flora of the sand-hill bogs can best be com-

pared with that of moist pine-barrens and branch-swamps, al-

ready discussed. The woody plants are much more abundant

and conspicuous than the herbs (usually growing so densely

that these bogs are difficult to penetrate), and about two-thirds

of them are evergreen. There are three vines, one quite com-

mon, a woody evergreen, and the other two rarer, one a peren-

nial herb and the other an annual parasite. Nearly all the

herbs are perennial.!

Jan. Feb. Mar. April May June July Aug. Sept. Oct. Nov. Dec.

FIG. 13,

Pheenological diagram for 45 plants of sand-hill bogs, including 15 trees and 7

shrubs.

I know of no flowers in these bogs earlier than March or

later than October. Perhaps the flowering season is thus re-

stricted by the cold, shaded, water-soaked soil, with its covering

of peat. The height of the flowering season seems to be in

August, but there is another conspicuous maximum in April.

The average flowering period is about 43 days.

The proportions of various colors of flowers are about the same

1 For references to anatomical studies of Leucothe axillaris, Ilex

glabra, Magnolia glauca, Myrica Carolinensis, and Smilax laurifolia see the

catalogue.

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 93

as on the adjacent sand-hills. (Perhaps this indicates that they

are pollinated by the same insects.) There are 8 anemophilous

species, 13 with white flowers, 7 cream, 7 yellow, 2 purple, 2 red,

and 3 orange.

The list shows 56 species in about 47 genera and 35 families.

.35-4% of the angiosperms are monocotyledons. Orchidacez

is the largest family and Sarracenia and Habenaria the largest

genera. Grasses and sedges are scarce.

The generalized ranges of these plants do not differ much from

those in the moist pine-barrens and branch-swamps, except that

a somewhat larger proportion of them grow in similar habitats

in the glaciated region of the north. !

15. Non-ALLUVIAL ‘CREEK-SWAMBS.

Entering the swamp of a creek or small river from the sand-hill

(left) side, we usually tind that part of it above the reach of inun-

dation to be kept perpetually moist by springs issuing from the

sand-hills. Being usually densely shaded by large trees the tem-

perature of such a place is of course considerably lower than that

of the sand-hills on one side and the alluvial swamp (with its

Warmer water) onthe other. Asplendid example of such aswamp

can be seen at Gaskin’s Spring on Seventeen Mile Creek in Coffee

County. (See Plates XIII and XIV, Fig. i.) This has been visited

in February, May, July, and September, and in four different

years, and most of the following species have been oberved there.

5 Magnolia glauca 4-7 white

4 Gordonia Lasianthus 7-9 white

4 Persea pubescens

3 Pinus Teda 3-4. —

2 Cliftonia monophylla 3-4 white

t Osmanthus Americana

o Pinus serotina 3-4 —

3 Itea Virginica 4-6 white

2 Leucotnoé axillaris 4-6 white

2 Vitis rotundifolia 5 cream

— 2 Viburnum nitidum 4 white

1 Ilex coriacea 5-6 white

1 Viburnum nudum white

1 Smilax laurifolia cream

1 See Rhodora, 7: 69-80, April, 1905.

pi ee ee

94. HARPER

1 Pieris nitida~ 3-4 white

1 Alnus rugosa I—2 —_—

1 Lorinseria areolata 2 ° °

o Dulichium arundinaceum 7-8 —_

t Carex Elliottii2 4 —

3 Peltandra sagittzfolia 1 5-7 white

1 Xyris sp. (1700) 2} 8-9 yellow

1 [Epidendrum conopseum] 6-7 cream

2 Sphagnum cuspidatum

I 1 cymbifolium

1 Rhizogonium spiniforme

1 Bazzania trilobata

2 Odontoschisma prostratum

1 Thuidium sp. (1700 a)

t Pallavicinia Lyellii

2 [Plagiochila undata]

2[ «< " Ludoviciana]

2 Isopterygium micans

t Radula sp

1 Frullania Caroliniana

I as Kunzei

1 Lejeunea Americana

1 Harpalajeunea ovata

I (POLYPORUS VERSICOLOR)

I (SCHIZOPHYLLUM COMMUNE)

Summary. This group is somewhat intermediate between the

sand-hill bogs and the ordinary alluvial creek-swamps already

discussed, but differs from both, and probably from all other

habitat-groups in the region, in the larger proportion of ever- ~

greens, and of bryophytes. There is the greatest possible contrast —

between these swamps and the sand-hills near by, in almost —

every respect. Particularly is this true in winter, when nearly —

all vegetation on the sand-hills looks dead, while that in the non- —

alluvial swamps looks about the same asin summer.! There are

no species common to the two places, and not many families even. —

In these swamps all the trees and most of the shrubs are ever- _

green. The few and relatively inconspicuous herbs are all

perennial, and all either monocotyledons or cryptogams. Flowers

1 For references to anatomical studies of Leucothoé axillaris, Persea

pubescens, Ilex coriacea, Itea Virginica, Magnolia glauca, Smilax laurtfolia,

and Dulichium see the catalogue of species.

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 95

are rather scarce and inconspicuous. In May as many as half

a dozen species may be in bloom at once, but there are not

so many at other times, and apparently none after September.

White is the prevailing color. Nearly half the flowering plants

have fleshy fruits.

Of vascular plants there are only 22 species, belonging to

nearly as many families and genera. In range they are chiefly

confined to the coastal plain (but not to the pine-barren region).

Most of them do not range farther north than Virginia or farther

west than Louisiana.

16. SAND-H1LL PonpDs.

Ponds occur in the sand-hills as well as in the pine-barrens,

but much more rarely. ‘There seem to be no references to sand-

hill ponds in botanical literature, and perhaps they do not occur

outside of Georgia. They seem to be a little more common in

Coffee County than anywhere else. They are usually quite

small, and contain no water except in wet weather (Plate XIV,

Fig. 2). The following species grow in them or around their edges.

2 Pinus Elliottii 2 —

1 Nyssa biflora

2 Ilex glabra 4-5 white

2 Leucothoé elongata white

t Hypericum myrtifolium 6-9 yellow

1 Kalmia hirsuta 6-9 purple

‘rt Cliftonia monophylla 3-4 white

1 Pieris nitida 3-4 white

1 Cyrilla racemiflora —7 white

1 Hypericum fasciculatum —8 yellow

1 Serenoa serrulata 6 cream

t Persea pubescens

1 Pieris Mariana 4-5 white

1 Malapoenna geniculata

1 Benzoin melisszfolium

3 Juncus scirpoides compositus 1 7 =

3 Syngonanthus flavidulus2L 5-9 cream

2 Aristida spiciformis 7-9 —

2 Xyris Elliottii2L 6- yellow

2 Xyris fimbriata 1 7-9 yellow

2 Dulichium arundinaceum 2 7-8 —

2‘Trilisa odoratissima 1} 8-9 purple

Sige HARPER

1 Lophiola aurea 2 6-7 we

1 Panicum stenodes 6-9 a

1 Xyris neglecta 7 yellow

1 Xyris brevifolia @) 4 yellow

t Eleocharis Robbinsii 2 7-8 —

1 Rhynchospora ciliaris 2 5-8 —

1 Rhynchospora distans 2 —_

t Anchistea Virginica 2 ° fo)

t Eleocharis melanocarpa 2. 4-7

1 Xyris sp. (1452) % 7-8 yellow

1 Centella repanda 2 7-8 cream

1 Lycopodium alopecuroides ° fo)

1 Rhexia filiformis 6-9 white

1 Xyris Baldwiniana 6-9 yellow

1 Sophronanthe hispida 2 7-9 white

1 Ludwigia suffruticosa 1 7-8 cream

1 Sphagnum Fitzgeraldi immersum

I a cuspidatum angustilimbatum

I “e Garberi

I a Harperi

Summary. This flora has affinities with that of the shallow

pine-barren ponds and with that of the intermediate sand-hills

(and consequently more remotely with intermediate pine-bar-

rens), but contains a fewspecies not known elsewhere in the

region.

The woody plants are mostly evergreen, as is often the case,

and the herbs are nearly all perennial, as usual.!

Jan. Feb. Mar. April May June July Aug. Sept. Oct Now. )Dec:

FIG. 14.

Phzenological diagram for 30 plants of sand-hill ponds.

The number of flowers seems to culminate about the last of

July, with 18 species in bloom, but decreases to none in Septem-

ber. The average flowering period is nearly as long as that of

cypress ponds, namely, 53 days.

1 For references to anatomical studies of Ilex glabra and Dulichium

arundinaceum see the catalogue.

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 97

The colors of the flowers are distributed about as follows:

anemophilous, white, and yellow, 8 each; cream, 4; purple, 2.

Wind and resilient stems seem to be the principal agents for

dissemination. :

Xyridacez is the largest family in the list and Xyris therefore

the largest genus. The fact that this list contains all the Laur-

acee and Cyrillacee of the Altamaha Grit region is interesting.

This is the only habitat group in which dicotyledons are in the

minority, and 48.6% of the angiosperms are monocotyledons.

The total absence of anything between Cyrillacee and Hemo-

doracee is striking.

There is no marked peculiarity about the ranges of these

species. About half of them are confined to the pine-barren

region.

17. SAND-HAMMOCKS.

There are a few examples of sand-hills, which while having

much the same aspect as others, have quite a different vegetation,

consisting of more woody plants than herbs, and a considerable

proportion of evergreens. The reason for this difference however

is still a mystery. Such places are sometimes called -sand-

hammocks (plate XV, figs. 1 and 2), doubtless because of the

resemblance of their flora to that of the hammocks (which will

be discussed next). They must bear considerable resemblance

to the “scrub” of Florida, from all accounts. The “‘rosemary”

sand-hills of Emanuel County, which I visited in 1go1!, are a

good example of sand-hammock, and there is a similar place on

the Ohoopee River nearly opposite the mouth of Pendleton Creek

in Tattnall County. The following species have been observed

at these two places. (They are arranged in approximate order

of abundance, as usual, but the frequency numbers are omitted,

as they would be only either 1 or 2 in each case.)

Quercus Catesbe 2 —

Quercus laurifolia B —

= Magnolia grandiflora 5-6 cream

Ilex opaca 4-5 greenish

Pinus palustris 3 —

Osmanthus Americana greenish

1 See Bull. Torrey Club, 30: 285. 7. 2. 1903.

98 HARPER

Batodendron arboreum 5 white

Hamamelis Virginiana 1o-1 _—- yellow

Asimina parviflora - 3-4 dark purple

Ceratiola ericoides x

Quercus geminata 4 _—

Polygonella Croomii 9 white

Polycodium cesium 4 white

Clinopodium coccineum red

Ilex ambigua

Vitis rotundifolia 5 cream

Gelsemium sempervirens 2 yellow

Pieris nitida 3-4 white

Vaccinium sp.

Castanea pumila white

Amelanchier Canadensis white

Persea pubescens

Rhynchospora dodecandra 1 5-6

Paronychia herniarioides © 6-7 greenish

Stipulicida setacea M 4-7 white

Actinospermum angustifolium © 9 yellow

Arenaria Caroliniana 4- white

Smilax pumila 9 cream

Opuntia vulgaris 5-7 yellow

Jatropha stimulosa 4-9 white

Cuthbertia graminea 5-7 pinkish

Paronychia riparia 7-8 greenish

Cyperus echinatus 12

Aldenella tenuifolia ® 6-8

Linaria Floridana@®

white

As most of these species grow also in the regular hammocks

(see below) a detailed summary of their characteristics is hardly

necessary here. We may note in passing that about half of the

woody species are evergreen, and that there are more shrubs than

herbs. .

About one-third of these species are found also on sandy

river-banks in the Lower Oligocene region.

18. HAMMOCKS.

Hammocks have been briefly defined elsewhere (see page 26).

In the region under consideration they are always situated at the

foot of a sand-hill (plate XVI, figs. 1 and 2), and bordering the

adjacent creek or river swamp, but in many cases the hammock

is reduced to such a narrow strip as to be scarcely distinguish-

able. Ina few places the streams cut into the sand-hills, forming

bluffs without any swamp at their bases, and such bluffs usually

have a hammock vegetation.

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 99

The soil of a hammock is the same Columbia sand as on the

adjacent sand-hill, but mixed with more or less humus derived

from the more luxuriant vegetation. Whether the underlying

Lafayette is near enough to the surface in the hammocks so that

roots of trees can reach it I am unable to say, but if it is, this

would largely account for the nature of the vegetation. The

hammock soil must also contain more water than that of the

sand-hills, but it is never perceptibly moist at the surface (ex-

cept of course in rainy weather). The boundary between

sand-hills and hammocks is never very sharp, and it is altogether

probable that the hammocks are tending to encroach on the

sand-hills as the humus accumulates, just as the branch-swamps

are probably encroaching on the moist pine-barrens, as already

pointed out. Reasoning backward we may imagine a time, not

long after this region emerged from the sea for the last time,

when there were no hammocks at all. When we examine the

ranges of the plants we will find evidence in support of this

supposition.

The following species are characteristic of hammocks in the Al-

tamaha Grit region.

8 Quercus laurifolia 3 ==

9 Osmanthus Americana greenish

7 Magnolia grandiflora 5-6 cream

6 Ilex opaca 4-5 greenish

5 Cornus florida 3-4 white

5 Pinus glabra 3 —

2 Cholisma ferruginea 5 white

2 Mohrodendron dipterum white

2 Persea pubescens

2 Hicoria sp. =

2 Quercus geminata 4 =

1 Ostrya Virginiana 3-4 —

rt Pinus Teda 3-4 —

1 Prunus serotina a4 white

1 Prunus Caroliniana 3 cream

9 Batodendron arboreum 5 white

8 Hamamelis Virginiana IO-I yellow

4 Vitis rotundifolza 5 cream

4 Callicarpa Americana 6-7 purple

4 Asimina parviflora 3-4 dark purple

3 Rhus copallina 7-9 cream

3 Serenoa serrulata 6 cream

3 Gelsemium sempervirens 3 yellow

3 Sebastiana ligustrina 6 greenish

2 Parthenocissus quinquefolia 5 greenish

1 Symplocos tinctoria 3-4 cream

100 HARPER

t Bumelia lanuginosa 7 cream

1 Bignonia crucigera 3-5 red and yellow

1 Rhus Toxicodendron cream

1 Pieris nitida 3-4 white

t Clinopodium Carolinianum g-10 = pink

1 Castanea pumila 5-8 white

t Viburnum rufotomentosum 4-5 white

t Ilex vomitoria

1 Amelanchier Canadensis 3 white

t Ilex ambigua

rt Euonymus Americanus 5-6 greenish

t Polycodium cesium 4 white

6 [Dendropozon usneoides|

6 Rhynchospora dodecandra 1 5-6 —

5 Opuntia vulgaris 5-7 yellow

4 [Epidendrum conopseum] 6-7 cream

3 Smilax pumila 9 cream

3 Paronychia riparia 7-8 greenish

3 |[Polypodium polypodioides] ° fo)

2 Siphonychia pauciflora 6-9 white

3 Cyperus echinatus 2} a

2 Cyperus cylindricus 1 —

2 Erythrina herbacea 2 5 red

2 Scleria triglomerata 5-6 a

2 Dicerandra linearifolia © 9-10 white

2 Panicum Ashei 7 —

1 Indigofera Caroliniana 6-8

t Dicerandra odoratissima © 9-10 white

1 Mitchella repens 5 white

1 Galactia regularts YY. 6-7 purple

1 Clematis reticulata VU. 6-8

1 Euphorbia cordifolia @ 9 greenish

1 Galium hispidulum 7 greenish

1 Solidago Boottii 2} a) yellow

t Froelichia Flo1idana@® 1-8 white

1 Tipularia discolor 8 brown

2 Thelia asprella |

1 [Schlotheimia Sullivantii]

I (ELFVINGIA FASCIATA)

Summary. Like the adjacent non-alluvial swamps, the ham-

mocks are conspicuous for the prevalence of woody plants, and

of evergreens, and thereis not a great deal of difference between

their winter and summer aspects. The trees are nearly as

numerous as the shrubs, and there are about as many shrubs

as herbs.!. The proportion of vines and epiphytes is quite ©

large, showing that the vegetation is becoming pretty highly

specialized, in some ways at least. The herbs are mostly —

1 For references to anatomical studies of Galium hispidulum, Gelsemium

sempervirens, Symplocos tinctoria, Batodendron arboreum, Quercus lauri-

jolia, and Dendropogon usneotdes see the catalogue.

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 101

perennial, and the few annuals have evidently crept in from the

adjacent sand-hills.

Flowers are never very abundant or conspicuous in these places,

but seem to be most numerous in the latter part of March. In

this respect the hammocks are very different from the sand-hills,

and more like the non-alluvial swamps. The average flowering

_ periodis 39 days. White flowers predominate (as in the swamps

and on the sand-hills too), there being at least 15 white-flowered

species. There are 11 species with anemophilous flowers, 9 green-

ish entomophilous, 10 cream-colored, 4 yellow, and one or two

each of several other colors.

Jan, Feb. Mar. April May June July Aug. Sept. Oct. Nov. Dec.

(

v { ( I {

{

FIG, WS).

Phzenological diagram for 50 plants of hammocks, including If trees and 2t

shrubs.

Fleshy fruits are more common than any one other contriv-

ance for dissemination. In Hamamelis we have a well-known

case where the seeds are forcibly ejected from their capsules.

The ranges of the hammock plants are of considerable interest.

Out of 58 species whose ranges are pretty well known, 14, or

nearly one-fourth, grow almost anywhere in the Eastern United

States, probably in all or nearly all the geological divisions de-

scribed near the beginning of this paper. Twelve others have an

equal disregard for geological formations in the southeastern

states, but for some reason (climatic most likely) do not range

farther north than Virginia. Nineteen species (about one-third)

are confined to the coastal plain or nearly so, but not to the pine-

barrens. About 13 others are confined (in Georgia at least) to

the lower three-fourths of the coastal plain, which includes the

pine-barrens and littoral region. Only 5 of these last 13 are not

known northwest of the Altamaha Grit escarpment (and some.

of these belong more properly to other habitats than hammocks).

These figures can be presented in another way. Over 90% of the

102 HARPER

hammock flora ranges farther inland than the Altamaha Grit —

region, 78% grows in the upper fourth of the coastal plain (z.e.,in —

the Cretaceous and Eocene regions), and 45% crosses the fall-line. —

Most of the trees and shrubs are also characteristic inhabitants

of rich woods in the Eocene region. {

It is evident from these statistics that the species now inhab- —

iting the hammocks have mostly come in from other places which

are farther north and farther inland (and consequently cooler

and more elevated). The fact that they tend to flower early, as

already shown, is pretty good evidence that they range mostly

toward cooler climates. As many of them are now also perfectly

at home in places which were not submerged during the time

that the Columbia sand was being deposited, they doubtless an-

tedate that period, and are therefore older than the typical pine- —

barren species are supposed to be.

As the typical hammock plants have evidently arrived in the ~

region under consideration since the sand-hills were formed, it —

is reasonable to suppose that others are still coming in, and that —

if unmolested the hammocks a few thousand years from now

would be more extensive and have a richer flora than at present.

It is an interesting fact that most of the hammock plants which ©

have been noted in the region but once or twice are known ~

only in the uppermost counties, as may be seen by consulting

the catalogue of species. This alone would seem to indicate

that they are still on their way toward the coast.

Taxonomically the list shows 65 species belonging to about

57 genera and 42 families. No family has more than four re- —

presentatives, and no genus more thanthree. There are only 10 ©

monocotyledons, which is about 17% of the total angiospermous

flora of the hammocks.

19. RivER BLUFFS.

The muddy rivers which traverse the Altamaha Grit region

(2. e., the three largest ones, which rise in the Piedmont region)

are bordered in places by steep bluffs (plate XII, fig. 1), formed —

by erosion in much the same way as other bluffs the world over.

These bluffs are best developed at or near the inland edge of our

territory (where the Chattahoochee formation probably crops

ips

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 103

out). The plants listed below have been observed on the

Ogeechee River near Echo in Bulloch County (opposite Rocky

Ford), on the Oconee at two places near Mount Vernon, and on

the Ocmulgee at Upper Seven Bluffs in Wilcox County (see pages

17-18). A bluff on the Ocmulgee near Lumber City has about

the same flora, but is not included in this enumeration because

its geological structure is probably not exactly the same.

_ These bluffs are the only examples in the Altamaha Grit region

of the typical mesophytic forests which are so characteristic of

the older parts of the continent. Like the hammocks just dis-

cussed they are characterized by abundance of shade and humus;

and their flora may be regarded as a step farther removed from

that of the pine-barrens than the hammock flora is, as will be

seen from the following list.

5 Cercis Canadensis purple

3 Cornus florida 3-4 white

2 Magnolia grandiflora 5-6 cream

2 Ilex opaca 4-5 greenish

2 Quercus alba 4 —

2 Pinus Teda 3-4 —

2 Pinus glabra 3 =

t Morus rubra 4

1 Liquidambar Styraciflua 3

2 Pinus echinata 4 =

x Ostrya Virginiana 3-4 —

1 Quercus Michauxii —

1 Liriodendron Tulipifera 4 cream

1 Quercus minor 4 —

1 Castanea pumila 5-8 white

4 Atsculus Pavia 3-4 ted

3 Hamamelis Virginiana IO-1 yellow

3 Batodendron arboreum 5 white

3 Parthenoctssus quinquefolia 5 greenish

3 Viburnum rufotomentosum 4-5 white

2 Chionanthus Virginica 4-5 white

2 Lonicera sempervirens 4-6 ted

2 Vitis rotundifolia 5 cream

2 Aralia spinosa 8 cream

2 Rhus copallina 7-9 cream

2 Ceanothus Americanus 5-6 white

2 Asimina parviflora 3A dark purple

rt Amelanchier Canadensis 3 white

1 Euonymus Americanus 5-6 greenish

1 Vites estivalis 5 cream

1 Clinopodium Carolinianum g-1o = pink

1 Myrica cerifera 3 —

1 Callicarpa Americana 6=7 purple

1 Bignonia crucigera 3-5 red and yellow

-_ t= aie a a a Ee Se

: neh ab YO ep.

104 HARPER

1 s

t Azalea. nudiflora 3-4 pink

t Rhus aromatica 3

1 Alnus rugosa I-2 —

3 Polystichum acrostichoides fo) fe)

3 Asplenium platyneuron fo) fo)

3 Phaseolus polystachyus YU. 6 purple

2 Dioscorea villosa 4-7 cream

2 [Dendropozon usneoides|

2 Mitchella repens 5 white

2 Meibomia nudiflora 2 6-8 purple

2 Smilax pumila 9 cream.

2 Houstonia longifolia 7 5-11 purple

2 Asplenium Filix-foemina 2 fo) °

2 Spigelia Marilandica 2 5 red and yellow .

2 Zizia Bebbii 2

2 Scleria triglomerata 2 5-6 —

2 Salvia lyrata 2 45 blue

t Galium uniflorum 2 4-5 greenish

1 Pentstemon hirsutus 4-6 purple

t Sanicula Marilandica 2 5 cream

t Podophyllum peltatum 2 3-4 white

1 (Conopholis Americana) 2 3-4 brown

t Uniolia latifolia 1 —

1 Verbesina Virginica UL re) white

1 Scutellaria Mellichampii 6 blue

1 Metbomia Michaux1t 1, purple

1 Panicum barbulatum 2 6 —

1 Thalictrum macrostylum 2 6

1 Pteridium 2 fo) fo)

1 Euporbia corollata YY 4-11 white

t Melica mutica 3-4 —

1 Sanguinaria Canadensis 2}. 3 white

1 Asclepias variegata 1 5-6 white’

I Stipa avenacea 2 A=5 —

r Aristolochia Serpentaria 1

Summary. All the plants in the above list do not have

exactly the same habitat, for the amount of shade and moisture

varies on different bluffs and on different parts of the same ©

bluff; but the differences in habitat are probably not great enough

to introduce any serious error into the generalizations which

follow.

This flora is comparable only with that of the hammocks just

discussed. Just about one-third of the species on the bluffs are 4

common to the hammocks, as far as known, and future discov- —

eries probably will not change this proportion much.

Woody plants are more numerous than herbs, as in the ham-

mocks, but on the bluffs, unlike the hammocks, evergreens are -

in the minority. Vines are quite numerous, and there are a few —

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 105

epiphytes and parasites. The herbs are probably all perennial.

Broad thin leaves and other ‘“‘mesophytic’’ adaptations are of

course the rule here.!

The flowering season seems to reach its height in spring, as in

mesophytic forests nearly everywhere, and there are few flowers

on the bluffs after the middle of the year. (See diagram.) The

average flowering period is 40 days. The proportions of the

various colors of flowers are much the same as in the hammocks.

Jan. Feb. Mar. April May June July Aug. Sept. Oct. Nov. Dec.

Phzenological diagram for 60 plants of river-bluffs, including 14 trees and

22 shrubs.

There are 12 anemophilous species, 13 white-flowered, 9 cream,

7 purple, 4 greenish, 4 red (some of these with yellow limb to the

' corolla), and a few yellow, pink, blue, and brown. The four red

flowers all happen to have tubes about two inches long, and per-

haps they are all pollinated by the same insect, or by humming-

birds.

Fleshy fruits (in 22 species) greatly outnumber all other modes

of dissemination. Nine or ten species have seeds transported

by the wind, and five or six have adhesive fruits.

A systematic list would show 69 species in 61 genera and 44

families, which is very near the corresponding figures for the

hammocks. The four largest families in the list, Leguminose,

Cupulifere, Gramineze, and Polypodiacee, have four represen-

tatives each. The two largest families in the whole Altamaha

Grit region (and probably in the whole coastal plain as well),

Cyperacee and Composite, are each represented on the bluffs

by a single species. The Orchidaceze seem to be entirely absent,

which is rather surprising. The proportion of monocotyledons

'For references to anatomical studies of Lonicera, Batodendrow, Liquid-

ambar, Podophyllum, Myrica certfera, and Dendropogon see the catalogue

of species.

106 HARPER

(less than 13% of the angiosperms) is smaller than in any other

habitat-group here discussed.

A study of the ranges of these plants bates out some inter-

esting facts. Quite a number do not extend farther into the

Altamaha Grit region than its very edge, but without exception

they all range farther inland. Only six species, Scutellaria

Mellichampu, Magnolia grandiflora, Myrica cerifera, Smilax

pumila, Dendropogon usneoides, and Pinus glabra, seem to be con-

fined to the coastal plain. All the rest (over 90% of the whole

list) therefore occur above the fall-line, and most of them grow

nearly all over the Eastern United States, a large proportion

finding congenial homes in the cool shaded valleys of the Blue

Ridge.! All this goes to show that the bluff-inhabiting species

are pretty old geologically, probably as old as any now living in

this part of the world. It is easy to imagine how they have

crept down along the rivers into the coastal plain as that territory

gradually emerged from the sea the last time, after the close of

the Pleistocene period.

These river-bluffs evidently represent the extreme of mesophy-

tic conditions for the pine-barren region. It is noteworthy that —

Fagus Americana, which Dr. Cowles considers the most typical

mesophytic tree of Eastern North America, does not yet occur

on these bluffs, or anywhere else in the Altamaha Grit region,

as far as known. It does occur however nearly everywhere

farther inland, and comes to the very edge of our region in

Decatur County at Forest Falls and along the escarpment from

Faceville westward, where the Chattahoochee formation crops

out. These places, and the vicinity of the Rock House in Dooly

County, where the geological conditions are doubtless similar,

(see page 17) have about the same kind of vegetation as the ~ :

river-bluffs, with most of the same species.

STATISTICS OF THE TypicAL HapBitatT GROUPS.

In the appended table are given in condensed form some of

the numerical statistics already elaborated for the 19 typical

1Their tendency to range northward is pretty well illustrated by the

frequency of such specific names as Americana, Canadensis, Marilandica,

and Virginiana.

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 107

habitat-zroups, and scattered through the summaries. The

figures in the first column represent the percentage of the whole

area of the Altamaha Grit region supposed to be occupied by

each habitat; and those in the second the percentage of the total

native flora included in each. Columns 3 to 5 show the relative

proportions of trees, shrubs, and herbs among the species of

Per cent of || Percent of “| @

- sas op >

3} a O38 les

n a n = ¢ ae Be BS

HABITATS oe det i er) & || 8O\Ea

Slalme alo | a |iseee

Area |Flora ; ays Fa 3

t. Rock outcrops ©.0r| 6.4|| 9 |14|77 ||28) 41] 44 || 24 | 52

2. Dry pine-barrens Oman 7a) eae PaaS Oia 7 TOON 3. Onl| TOs 146

3. Intermediate pine-bar-

Tens PRO SEs) esate aS 2uliea) ie7om| O80) 22-45

4. Moist pine-barrens 14. |23:4|| 2/12 |87 || 46 | 105 | 187 || 44 | 49

5. Branch-swamps 6. |ro.3/|12 | 24 | 64 || 42! 63] 781) 30) 48

6. Creeks and small rivers| 4. 8.1|/ 24/32 ]/44 141 | 47] 54/1/35 | 44

7. Rivers of 2nd class rie BF AOua sil S4ueiSul ease, We4ae Nezt0) 1317

8. Muddy rivers 2. 8.0||290 |25 | 46 ||38| 49] 61 || 23 | 39

9g. Cypress ponds I. GoGill Bae (So Nao B77) Bro W 5s

to. Shallower ponds Got | Fol Fue lee NOG re epi ere ce

11. Escarpment ponds Ou) So. Eilan | ao yo Woy 27 | Brae

12. Sand-hills Sees E7eOllmselen se ISON inal wos isa Nr S| 5

13. Intermediate sand-hills| 0.1 | 4.0|| 3 | 34 | 63 ||21 | 28] 32 ||37

14. Sand-hill bogs OnSe | FO EE (26 G3n 22 ase |— 54: l/35 143

15. Non-alluvial swamps it. Aeron) Ate yall Loner 2On|pe22 || 32

16. Sand-hill ponds 0.02] §.3|| 5/34 |61 ||20| 30]. 38 || 49 | 53

17. Sand-hammocks OQLOR| Acai eet | AO eye NOE Sie Gy | ee

18. Hammocks in Sree an ayaa t4ee 54 | 2629/17/30

19. River-bluffs ©.3 | 8.6)|22 |32 | 46-\|44 | 61} 69 || 13 | 40

—--—'-

vascular plants. (The three cases where these figures add up

more than too are where one species occurs both as a tree and

a shrub.) Columns 6 to 8 show the number of families, genera,

and species of vascular plants. Column 9 gives the percentage

of monocotyledons among the angiosperms, and the tenth and

last column the average duration of the flowering period, in

* days.

The accuracy of the figures for each group is of course approxi-

mately proportional to the number of species included. The

figures for flowering period are omitted in three cases where the

108 HARPER

number of species was so small that the results which would

have been obtained by the usual method might have been

misleading. . a

Some of the interesting facts brought out by the above table

are as follows. Dry pine-barrens cover the greatest area and

moist pine-barrens have the richest flora. Moist pine-barrens

have the smallest proportion of trees and shrubs and consequently

the largest proportion of herbs. The swamps of rivers of the

second class have the smallest proportion of herbs and by far the

largest proportion of trees. The largest proportion of shrubs

is found in sand-hammocks, with non-alluvial swamps second.

Sand-hill ponds have the largest percentage of monocotyledons,

with moist pine-barrens next, and the three last groups the

smallest. Cypress ponds, shallower pine-barren ponds, and sand-

hill ponds seem to have the longest flowering periods, and river-

swamps, hammocks, and bluffs the shortest.

In general the smallest percentages of monocotyledons and the

shortest flowering periods belong to those groups a large propor-

tion of whose members range inland to the Piedmont region and

mountains, while the typical coastal-plain habitats have many

monocotyledons and longer flowering periods. Investigations

of this kind will perhaps hereafter throw a great deal of light

on the origin and age of the flora of various other parts of Eastern

North America.

It will be noticed that the percentages in the second column add

up 168.2. This gives an idea of the extent of overlapping of

the different habitat-groups. If the number of species common

to two or more habitats decreases in geometrical progression with

the number of habitats, which is not an unreasonable supposition,

then about 60% of the species would be confined to one

habitat each, 24% to two, 10% to three, 4% to four, and so on.

RELATIONS OF THE TypicaL Hapitat-Groups to EacH

OTHER.

Having completed a preliminary outline of the habitat-groups

which may be considered fairly typical of the Altamaha Grit

region, in which outline they have been treated in linear sequence,

it will be appropriate to pause at this point and show their re-

ee . <A

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 109

lations to each other in two dimensions, by means of the conven-

tional diagram appended.

In this diagram the units are represented by circles. These

are connected by three kinds of lines (the lengths and directions

of which have no significance). A double line indicates contiguity

2 iy as “as

RG, ER Se

CS eo VY

e 49, yO

Ge IES

‘7 ROCK S

OUTCROPS OAK 4

SHALLOWER aa RIDGES F-__

PONDS L ~~

DRY PINE- \

ESCARPMENT

PONDS

BRANCH

SWAMPS

UPPER THIRO LL — f

OF COASTAL PLAINS: ~~~ =

RING alge

Conventional diagram showing relations of the principal habitat-groups to each other, and

to some other parts of the Southeastern United States.

110 HARPER

of two habitats, with more or less intergradation and several

or many species in common. A dotted line indicates several

species in common without contiguity, and a single continuous

Jine with two marks across it indicates contiguity with few or no

species in common.

In nature all these areas are bordered by transition zones,

which are usually too narrow to have any species confined to them

and have therefore beenignored. Of course several of the typical

habitat-groups partake more or less of the nature of transitions

between those on either side, but all those here recognized con-

tain some characteristic species.

Around the edges of the diagram the dotted lines leading off

in various directions indicate affinities of certain habitat-groups

with others outside of the Altamaha Grit region, as have already

been pointed out in the detailed descriptions.

SoME EXCEPTIONAL HABITATS.

There remain to be considered a few classes of habitats in the

Altamaha Grit region which are known as yet only from single

examples. Although it is not yet possible to generalize much

concerning these, some of them are so peculiar that they deserve

mention, and if other examples of them are discovered hereafter

they can then perhaps be properly classified.

The most striking of these exceptional habitats occur in the

northwestern corner of Berrien County, within a few miles of

Tifton, and were visited the last week in September, 1902.

About three miles west of Tifton there is a small area of damp

shady woods, containing the following species:

Cercis Canadensis

Magnolia grandiflora

Liquidambar Styraciflua

Liriodendron Tulipifera

Morus rubra

Acer rubrum

Nyssa Ogeche

Arundinaria sp.

Myrica cerifera

Decumaria barbara

Chionanthus Virginica

Hamamelis Virginiana

Baccharis halimifolia

Osmunda regalis 2

Helenium autumnale

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 111

Dioscorea villosa

Iris versicolor 1}

Mesadenia Elliottii2,

Mesospherum radiatum 2

Cynoctonum Mitreola

Rudbeckia foliosa @)

Ludwigia microcarpa

Eupatorium perfoliatum 2

Selaginella apus

Eryngium Virginianum 2

Elionurus tripsacoides 1

pout a mile and a half southwest of Jiuuun, in dense woods

along a small branch, are the following:

Magnolia grandiflora

Quercus nigra

Liquidambar Styraciflua

Myrica cerifera

Decumaria barbara

Pieris nitida

Asimina parviflora

Vitis rotundifolia

Parthenocissus quinquefolia

Rubus nigrobaccus

Aralia spinosa

Rhus copallina

Sabal glabra

Itea Virginica

Callicarpa Americana

Smilax pumila

Mitchella repens

Osmunda regalis 1

Helenium autumnale

Dryopteris Floridana

(Cuscuta compacta) ©

Pteridium 2

Panicum Currani2

Osmunda cinnamomea 1

Elephantopus nudatus 1

Arisema triphyllum 2

Panicum Tennesseense 2}

Viola primulzfolia 2

Botrychium obliquum 27

[Schlotheimia Sullivantii,

About a mile southwest of this there is a small area of what

appears at first glance to be ordinary moist pine-barrens, but its

_ flora is more like that in the two preceding lists (particularly the

first) than that of the moist pine-barrens previously discussed.

The following species were noted there.

Pinus Elliottii

Taxodium imbricarium

LD HARPER

Pinus serotina

Rhus radicans

Rudbeckia foliosa @)

Erianthus strictus 2

Ludwigia microcarpa

Iris versicolor?

Dichromena colorata 1!

Helenium autumnale

Eryngium Virginianum 2

Boltonia diffusa

Manisuris rugosa 2

Elionurus tripsacoides 1

About another mile farther on in the same direction, between the

sand-hills and swamp of Little River, is another peculiar piece

of rich woods, but I have not enough notes on its flora to give a

list here. (Chimaphila maculata grows there, among other things.)+

These three lists combined contain 57 species representing

53 genera and 35 families: Composite, with seven species, being

the largest family. Just about one-fourth of the species have not

been observed anywhere else in the Altamaha Grit region. The

remainder mostly grow in hammocks or on river-bluffs, orafewin —

swamps of various kinds. Their ranges present no marked ©

peculiarities, except that, as in the case of hammocks and blufts,

more of them range northward than coastward. But seven or ;

eight of them are reported from the West Indies or other parts of

tropical America, which is rather significant.

A large proportion of the species are known to have a decided —

fondness for limestone, and the conclusion is irresistible that there

is some geological peculiarity about these spots where they grow.

It is extremely likely that the Lafayette formation is absent here, —

and possibly the Altamaha Grit also, allowing the underlying j

calcareous formations to approach the surface. This conclusion

is strengthened by the fact that many if not most of these plants

grow also in places where the Lafayette and Grit are evidently ~

absent. A moist thicket in the Lower Oligocene region near

Leslie contains a flora very similar to that enumerated in the ©

first of these three lists, and probably for the same reason. Just —

why the calcareous strata should be so near the surface in these

places is not clear, for there is apparently no topographic —

1See Bull. Torrey Club, 31: 24. 1904.

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 113

peculiarity which would account for it. The places are neither

on hilltops or steep slopes nor in deep valleys, but their proximity

to each other is doubtless significant.

In various other parts of the region are small areas of wet woods

having a flora somewhat intermediate between the above and

that of the common branch-swamps, but these are not yet very

well understood.

Ona hillside sloping toward the swamp of the Ocmulgee River

in the northeastern corner of Coffee County opposite Lumber

City, and about a mile from the river, is a peculiar moist belt

extending horizontally along the hillside for some distance,

marked by a dense growth of shrubs, chiefly Alnus rugosa.

Following this same belt to a railroad cut near by, it was found

to be connected with a stratum of Altamaha Grit there exposed.

There may be other similar places in the region, but I have not

yet come across them.

The Big Pond in Appling County (mentioned in a previous

paper!) is another interesting feature, probably unique for the

Altamaha Grit region. What little I could see of the vegetation

around its edges resembles that of sand-hill bogs and non-alluvial

swamps. What may grow in the pond itself is entirely unknown.

The occurrence of a few ““bottomless”’ ponds, usualiy called

lime-sinks by the natives, in the Altamaha Grit region has been

mentioned above. The only example of this that I have seen

(one in Coffee County) contained no floating plants, and the vege-

tation around its edges (trees, shrubs, and herbs), resembled that

of a branch-swamp more than that of any other kind of pond.

It was surrounded at least in part by moist pine-barrens.

Further study of these places is needed.

The sandy west bank of the Ohoopee River near the center of

Tattnall County, opposite the sand-hills and near some of the

rock outcrops already mentioned, has a flora resembling in part

that of sand-hills, hammocks, and rock outcrops, but with few if

any species peculiar to it. Somewhat similar conditions are met

- with along the Ocmulgee River opposite Lumber City.

This about completes the classification according to habitat of

Sis Morey Glo. 325 USO, IST. £905. |

114 HARPER

the native vegetation of the Altamaha Grit region, representing —

it as it might have appeared a hundred years ago or more, before

civilized man began to tamper with it. There now remain to be

considered the

WEEDS.

““Weed’’ is here used to denote a plant which is believed not to

be indigenous in the region, whether it is detrimental to the in-

terests of civilized man or not. The weeds of the Altamaha

Grit region are principally confined to yards, roadsides, and rail-

roads. (Plate XVII, Fig. 1.) Very few of thern invade culti-

vated fields, and none encroach on the territory of the native

plants except where the latter have been destroyed or weakened

by civilization. Weeds at present constitute about 10% of the

total number of species in the region, but probably only a

minute fraction of 1% of the number of individuals. In other

words, most of them are not at all abundant.

In the following list the species are arranged in systematic

sequence (in the same order as in the taxonomic part of this work).

After the name of each is its frequency number, and then the

region where the species is believed to have originated. No

attempt is made to indicate duration, time of flowering, etc., as —

was done in the treatment of the native plants. All but two of

them are herbs, and probably mostly annuals.

Erechthites hieracifolia North America?

Achillea Millefolium Europe?

Anthemis Cotula Europe

Helenium tenuifolium Mississippi Valley?

Bidens bipinnata Mexico?

Acanthospermum australe

Gnaphalium purpureum

ie obtusifolium

Leptilon Canadense

Erigeron ramosus

Isopappus divaricatus

Iva microcephala

Ambrosia artemisizfolia

Xanthium strumarium

Specularia perfoliata

Sambucus Canadensis

Diodia teres

Tropical America

North America?

Eastern U. S.?

North America?

Central U. S.?

Southern U. S.?

. North America?

oe ce

Eastern U. S.?

Len

HHN HM HHHN QWHN HN BH BuUNH

Richardia scabra Tropics

Plantago aristata Central U. S.?

Veronica peregrina Europe?

Scoparia dulcis Tropics

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 115

Ilvsanthes gratioloides

Linaria Canadensis

Verbascum Thapsus

i. Blattaria

Perilla frutescens

Verbena bracteosa

Solanum nigrum

5g Carolinense

rostratum

Datura Tatula

a Stramonium

Polypremum procumbens

Daucus pusillus

Spermolepis divaricatus

(nothera laciniata

Passiflora incarnata

Helianthemum rosmarinifolium

Sida rhombifolia

Euphorbia maculata

Croton glandulosus

Lespedeza striata

Trifolium repens

Cassia Tora

Par oceidenbtalis

Prunus angustifolia

Lepidium Virginicum

Coronopus didymus

Nymphea orbiculata

Sagina decumbens

Portulaca pilosa

Mollugo verticillata

Boerhaavia erecta

Alternanthera repens

Chenopodium ambrosioides

Rumex hastatulus

Juncus bufonius

Mayaca fluviatilis

Stenophyllus Floridanus

Fimbristylis laxa

Cyperus compressus

i squarrosus

Lipocarpha maculata

Hordeum nodosum

Festuca octoflora

Eragrostis amabilis

ee ciliaris

simplex

refracta

Eleusine Indica

Capriola Dactylon

Cenchrus tribuloides

Panicum cognatum

Echinochloa colona

Syntherisma sanguinale

Anastrophus compressus

Marchantia polymorpha

“é

HARB He HH BP HHH ON HN HW HON AAW AD Ao a

HHPRNHANBPH ON DH NWEHNHNWWHNHHH OH

Northern Hemisphere

North America?

Europe?

Asia

Central U. S.?

Cosmopolitan

Eastern U. S.?

Central U. S.

South America?

Old World Tropics?

West Indies?

Central U. S.?

Mexico

Tropics?

Westward?

Tropical America

Eastern U. $.?

Tropical America

Eastern Asia

Europe

Tropics

Westward?

North America ?

Europe?

Lime-sink regions of Ga.

and Fla.

Eastern U. S.?

Tropics

Tropical America?

Tropics

Central U. S.?

Cosmopolitan

Florida mostly

Tropics?

Tropics

Tropics?

Europe?

Tropics?

Asia

Tropics

So 126 Waitsek

Tropics

Tropics?

Central U. $.?

Tropics

Cosmopolitan

116 HARPER

Summary. The commonest weeds are Helenium, Acantho-

spermm, Diodia teres, Stenophyllus Floridanus, Lespedeza striata,

Eragrostis simplex, Euphorbia maculata, and Syntherisma,

approximately in the order named. Three of these, Heleniwm,

Acanthospermum, and Lespedeza, are known to have come into

Georgia since the recollection of some of the older inhabitants,

one from the west, one from tropical America, and one from

Asia.!. Two others, Stenophyllus and Eragrostis, are definitely

known only from Georgia and Florida, and have been described

only within the last ten or twelve years, but they can hardly

be native in thiscountry. The other three, Diodia, Euphorbia,

and Syntherisma, are so common in the Eastern United States

that they are qften considered indigenous. Most of the other

weeds in the whole list have been noted but once or twice in our

territory. ;

Composite and Graminez are the largest families in the above

list, but a larger proportion (100%) of our Ambrosiacee and

Solanaceze, and several families represented by a single species

each, are weeds. Solanum and Eragrostis are the largest genera

in the list, and it is noteworthy that they have no native

representatives in our territory.

As for the ranges of these weeds, quite a number are not known

outside of North America, but it is difficult to imagine what their

habitats could have been before the country was settled. (This

class of supposed native weeds is doubtless much larger in almost

all other parts of the country.) In such cases one is almost

forced to the conclusion that the species have originated (by

mutation or otherwise) since the discovery of America. Of

those whose origin is known the majority came from the tropics,

but some of them are probably just as much weeds there as here.

Several are probably natives of the western plains and prairies,

and a few came from Europe with the early settlers.”

1 Dr. H. A. Mettauer, the veteran botanist of Macon, tells me that he

can remember when Lespedeza striata first appeared there, and that it —

came in the shape of packing around some Chinese or Japanese crockery.

* Compare this list of weeds with one for Sumter County in Bull. Torrey

Club 27: 421. 1900.

r -

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA WAL

For pollination about 21 species have anemophilous flowers,

22 white, and 10 yellow. Other colors are less frequent. It is

surprising how little is known about the dissemination of even

the worst of these weeds, and it is a mystery how the eight com-

monest ones above mentioned have spread over so much territory.

About eight species in the whole list have wind-borne seeds,

seven adhesive, and five fleshy fruits.

The enumeration of weeds naturally leads to a discussion of

other

EFFECTS OF CIVILIZATION.

Most of the descriptions in the foregoing pages, up to the begin-

ning of the weed list, would have been equally true a hundred or

even a thousand years ago. But civilized man now apparently

threatens the ultimate destruction of all vegetation, and even in

a thinly settled country like the wire-grass region of Georgia

the effects of civilization are far-reaching and cannot well be

ignored.

The greatest damage to native vegetation, amounting in most

cases to total destruction, is of course caused by clearing the land

for cultivation or for buildings. In the Altamaha Grit region at

present probably not over 5% of the total area has suffered

in this way. This is in marked contrast with Middle Georgia

and the Cretaceous and Eocene regions of South Georgia, where

the population is much denser and nearly all the land which is

not too steep or too wet or too rocky has already been cleared

and cultivated at some time or other.

The next greatest injury is done by lumbermen in removing

the pine trees (lumbering in this region being almost exclusively

confined to pine). A pine-barren area which has been cut over

with the present wasteful methods presents a desolate appearance

for years afterward. (Plate XVII, Fig. 2.) But fortunately this

has little effect on the shrubs and herbs, for the amount of light

which they receive is not appreciably increased by removing the

trees, and there is never any such succession of different vegetation

after lumbering as is the rule in the denser forests farther inland.

The turpentine operators do about as much damage as the

lumbermen. Probably nine-tenths of the specimens of Pinus

118 HARPER

palustris and P. Elliott now standing in South Georgia have

been bled by them. Under the common system of turpentining

(since 1902 being slowly superseded by an improved system

invented by Dr. C. H. Herty), each tree is usually worked only

three years, and the operators try to get as much as possible out

of it in that length of time, without any regard for the future.

After the turpentine men are through with the trees (or even

before), many of them are blown over by the wind or destroyed

by fire. The improved system greatly prolongs the life of the

tree and lessens the danger from wind and fire, but it came too

late to save many of the present generation of pines in Georgia.!

The stock-raisers, with their thousands of cattle and sheep

which roam through the pine forests almost as freely as on the

western plains, living principally on wire-grass, contribute to the

_ destruction of the forests in two ways, grazing and burning.

Grazing alone seems to do little if any damage to the pine forests.

But the fires which are (and have been for several centuries, it is

said) started every winter or spring in order to burn off the dead

leaves of the wire-grass so that the cattle can more readily get at

the new growth, are a more serious matter. These fires (plate

XVIII, fig. 2.) are of course mostly confined to the dry pine-

barrens, but in very dry weather they may burn well down toward

the swamps and even through cypress ponds. On sand-hills

there is practically no grass to burn, and the dead leaves probably

do not accumulate there fast enough to allow of a fire every year.

Too frequent fires, although they seem to do no harm to

the mature and sound pine trees (which are unfortunately

rare now), prevent the young ones from getting a start and play

havoc with those that have been turpentined. Opinions differ

as to the effect of annual fires on the herbaceous vegetation, but

it seems to me that the damage done must be comparatively slight.

The whole dry pine-barren flora seems adapted to stand occa-

sional fires, which must have often been started by lightning even

before the earth was inhabited by man. Even if fire were kept

1 The relative merits of the different systems of turpentining are fully

discussed and illustrated by Dr. Herty in Bulletin 40 of the Bureau of

Forestry, U.S. Dept. Agriculture. His field experiments were all carried

on in the Altamaha Grit region.

7 ee ————L << eC eee mlm err

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 119

out of the pine-barrens for a hundred years it is not likely that the

composition of the flora would change percéptibly, as may be in-

ferred by comparing a pine-barren area burned over within.a few

months with one which has not been burned for several years.

The Lafayette and Columbia formations have hardly had time yet

to produce the type of forests with abundant shade and humus

which are familiar in most parts of the civilized world. If such

forests were capable of developing where dry pine-barrens are

now they would doubtless have done so centuries ago, and fire

would hardly have gotten a foothold in them. Opinions are

divided even among the natives of the wire-grass country as to

the desirability of burning off the grass every year, but those

who believe in this ancient practice usually act accordingly, and

the others are powerless to stop it.

Man has also exerted a profound influence on the flora by de-

stroying many of the native birds and quadrupeds which formerly

carried seeds from place to place, and introducing domesticated

and foreign species in their stead. The partial extermination

of the native birds (which mostly take place in other parts of the

country but is felt everywhere because they migrate) disturbs

the equilibrium in another way by allowing injurious insects to

increase. Again, the introduction of the honey-bee must have

some tendency, however slight, to modify the shape of the native

flowers on which it works.

Another adjunct of civilization, in Georgia confined to the

coastal plain, and having a slight but perceptible influence on

the vegetation, is the artesian well. These wells are becoming

quite numerous, and they evidently create new streams and in-

crease the flow of others. The removal of a large part of the

forests in the Piedmont region has greatly increased the amount

of sediment carried by the larger rivers, and probably modified

the flora of their swamps to some extent.

The remarkable stability of the pine-barren flora, as compared

_ with that which is familiar to most inhabitants of the United

‘States, is shown by the fact that after lumbering, after fire,

and even after cultivation, the same vegetation tends to re-

appear in a comparatively short time, almost without pre

liminary stages such as have been described in recent years by

120 HARPER

many writers in the north; all of which goes to show that the pine-

barrens represent a pioneer type. There is one slight exception to

this. Pinus Elliotti1 sometimes takes possession of land fromwhich —

Pinus palustris has been removed, and this has led some writers —

on forestry to believe that the latter species was becoming extinct

and the former taking its place. Even the natives commonly

believe that the long-leaf pine does not reproduce itself after

lumbering, but metamorphoses into the other species (the “‘slash

pine’). But in reality the succession of P. Elhonimeatremeas

palustris is the exception rather than the rule, at least in the

Altamaha Grit region, and has doubtless been exaggerated. In

their natural condition the habitats of these two pines are en-

tirely distinct, and if the whole region could be let alone for

fifty or a hundred years the equilibrium would doubtless be in

large measure restored.

All things considered, however, there is probably at the pre-

sent writing no part of the world more favorably situated for

phytogeographical study than the Altamaha Grit region, with

its great accessibility,! salubrious climate, and freedom from

many of the evils of modern civilization which characterize the

more densely populated parts of the country. But with the pop-

ulation increasing 5% a year (which means doubling in rs years)

there is danger that some types of vegetation will disappear

entirely before they can be sufficiently studied. At present the

damage has been chiefly confined to the dry pine-barrens, but

there is no telling when the rocks, swamps, and sand-hills will

begin to be sacrificed to commercialism.

’ Railroad mileage seems to be increasing faster there than anywhere

else in the Eastern United States, and the destructive effects of civiliza-

tion are hardly keeping pace with it.

PART II.

HISTORY OF BOTANICAL EXPLORATION OF THE

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION.

Before enumerating the known flora of the region a sketch of

the explorations on which our knowledge of it is based will bein

order.

Probably the first explorer to visit the region under consider-

ation was Hernando DeSoto, who with a large party entered

what is now Georgia at its southern border in the spring of 1540,

and proceeded northward toward the mountains, probably

leaving the state somewhere near its northwest corner. But

DeSoto was looking mainly for gold, and the descriptions of geo-

graphical features in the extant narratives of his expedition are

so vague and infrequent that it is impossible to trace his route

through South Georgia with any degree of accuracy. The “‘des-

erts’’ mentioned by his chroniclers were doubtless pine-barrens, !

but nothing is said about their vegetation.

After DeSoto’s memorable but ill-fated expedition nearly 2co

years seem to have elapsed before South Georgia was again ex-

plored. The colony of Georgia was founded by Oglethorpe at

Savannah in 1733, and the new settlers soon pushed inland from

there into the new country, some going up the Savannah River

to the fall-line, where they established the city of Augusta, and

others migrating southward along the coast. From Augusta a

chain of settlements gradually extended westward along the fall-

line, but the interior of South Georgia, including the pine-barrens,

was long avoided, because it was considered almost a desert.

Catesby and John Bartram, who were in Georgia about the time

of Oglethorpe or a little later, probably did not go into the

Altamaha Grit region, for it was then uninhabited, or nearly so.

William Bartram, in 1773 and a few subsequent years, and André

Michaux and his son about 14 years later, passed more than once

1 For this interpretation I am indebted. to the first chapter of Joel .

Chandler Harris’s Stories of Georgia, a small popular historical treatise

published in 1896.

121

122 HARPER

over the roads between Savannah and Augusta, and prob-

ably crossed the eastern end of the Grit in what is now Screven

County. Both Bartram and Michaux noted there an unfamiliar

shrub which must have been Clifiontza, one of the most character-

istic plants of the region.

In the last decade of the 18th century John Abbot, an English

artist and entomologist, was making the drawings for his

Natural History of the Rarer Lepidopterous Insects of Georgia

(edited by Sir J. E. Smith and published in London in 1797),

and he seems to have worked principally if not entirely in the

counties of Screven (laid off in 1793) and Bulloch (laid off in 1796),

though not altogether in the Altamaha Grit region.! Besides

a few new species figured by Abbot and described by Smith, he

was also the discoverer of Sabbatia gentianoides Ell., which came

from Bulloch County.

Early in the roth century @mler, Baldwin, Elliott, and Bey-

rich must have crossed the eastern end of the Altamaha Grit

country at about the same place where Bartram and Michaux

did, but they do not seem to have published any notes on it. ©

About 1830 Nuttall was in Tattnall County (established in

1801), and discovered there Arenaria brevifolia and a Sarracenia

which he took to be new.? And in his Sylva of North America? he

mentions having found Clijtonia at the same place where Bartram

did. This seems to be all that is on record about his travels in

the Altamaha Grit region.

About the same time Croom, on his semi- eae journeys from

North Carolina to Florida, must have passed through or close to

the inland edge of the region (somewhere between Louisville and

Hawkinsville), for he mentions finding at least one plant (Pent-

stemon dissectus) which is not known elsewhere. (James Jackson,

1The drawings mostly represent plants which can now be found in

those counties, and there is other evidence about the time and place of

some of Abbot’s subsequent work, in Darlington’s Reliquie Baldwiniane.

Also in White’s Statistics of Georgia (1849), under the head of ‘‘ Instances

of Longevity” in Screven County, is a statement that ‘‘ Mr. Abbot lived

to an advanced age.”’

2 See Torreya 4: 140. 1904.

Sosa hed.

a :

who discovered this species, must have gone into the region

somewhere to getit. See Bull. Torrey Club 32: 166, 167. 1905;

Torreya 5: 183, 184. 1905).

Since the era of railroads several well-known botanists have

passed through portions of the Altamaha Grit country without

being aware of the fact, or stopping to make any notes or

collections. Among these were Canby in 1869, Gray in 1875,

Kearney in 1893 and 1895, and Small in 1895.

Of botanists now living, Prof.S. M. Tracy seems to have been

the first to make any collections in this region. In the summer

of 1890 he spent a short time in Southwest Georgia, and made a

considerable collection, principally of grasses and sedges, for the

U. S. Department of Agriculture, near Cycloneta (Irby P. O.)

in Irwin County. These specimens are now in several of the

leading herbaria of the country, but none of them that I have seen

are accompanied by any indication of habitat. At least one

(Eryngium Ludovicianum) has already been cited in botanical

literature. !

In 1893 Dr. Charles Mohr, while doing some field work for the

Division of Forestry of the U. S. Department of Agriculture,

collected a few specimens in Dodge County near Eastman, among

them Gerardia divaricata (?), Dicerandra linearijolia, and Clino-

podium Carolinianum.

On August 14, 1900, Messrs. C. L. Pollard and W. R. Maxon,

from the U. S. National Herbarium, entered the Altamaha Grit

region for a short distance in Worth County, collecting a few

Specimens near Poulan. Up to the present writing these do not

seem to have been distributed, but one of them, Eryngium

Ludovicianum, was cited at the same place as Prof. Tracy’s speci-

men of the same species.

Mr. A. H. Curtiss of Jacksonville, Fla., has done considerable

work in Georgia, particularly on his last trip through the state,

intgor. From June 24 to 27 of that year he was in Berrien and

Coffee Counties, collecting Panicum erectifolium (no. 6817),

Xyris Baldwiniana (no. 6818), Lobelia Boykinit (no. 6819),

Amsonia rigida (no. 6820, distributed as A. Tabernemontana),

Eleocharis Torreyana (no. 6821, distributed as E. microcarpa),

1 See Coult. & Rose, Contr. U. S. Nat. Herb. 7: 49. 1901.

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 123

124 HARPER

and Oxytria crocea (?) near Allapaha, and Euphorbia er1ogonoides

(no. 6822, distributed as E. Curtisi ) and E. corollata angustifolia

near Pearson.

In June, t900, April and August, r901, and April, 1902, Mr. C. ©

L. Boynton of Biltmore, N. C., passed through the Altamaha ~

Grit region, making collections in the vicinity of Rocky Ford,

Eastman, McRae, Lumber City, Baxley, and Tifton. Few of his

specimens from these places have been distributed to northern —

herbaria, and apparently the only one thus far! mentioned in

print is Marshallia ramosa, which he discovered near Eastman in

1900. .

Several botanists residing in Georgia have been in this region ~

at various times, but none of them have published anything about

it, and their specimens from that part of the state (if any) are

not accessible to the public.

My own travels have taken me through every county in the

Altamaha Grit region, in five different years, and in every month ~

of the year except November, December, and January. The dates,

counties visited, and numbers of specimens collected may be —

tabulated as follows.

1900.

Sept. 19. Dooly, Worth, Irwin, Berrien (658-669).

Sept. 20-28. Ware, Appling, Coffee (671-724).

TgOt.

June 4. Screven.

June 6-19. Emanuel (802-820), Bulloch (821-916), Screven.

June 24—July 4. Screven, Bulloch (939-974), Emanuel (975-984),

Bulloch (984a—988), Emanuel (989-996), Tattnall (997-1002), Mont- —

gomery, Telfair.

July 4. Wilcox, Dooly.

August 8. Mitchell, Thomas.

August 9. Thomas (1172-1181).

August 11, 12. Decatur.

August 13, 14. Decatur.

1902.

June 25. Dodge.

June 28. Wilcox, Dooly.

July 14. Dooly, Wilcox.

July r5-Aug. 1. Irwin (1414-1422), Coffee (1423-1463), Appling,

Ware.

1 At least up to April, 1905.

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 125

Sept. 20—-Oct. 4. Thomas, Colquitt (1640-1676a), Worth, Berrien

(1677—1696a), Worth (1697, 1698), Berrien (1699-1701), Irwin

(1702-1704), Berrien (1705-1707), Irwin (1708-1711), Wilcox, Dooly.

1903.

June 23-July 5. Tattnall (1851-1862), Montgomery (1863-1872),

Telfair (1873), Dodge.

July 6-7. Wilcox, Dooly.

August 8. Decatur.

August 13. Decatur (1929).

August 14, 15. Decatur (1931, 1932).

August 18. Decatur.

August 18. Thomas, Mitchell.

August 20. Mitchell, Thomas (1938).

August 22-26. Thomas, Colquitt (1904-1948), Worth.

August 28, 29. Worth, Berrien, Irwin, Worth, Dooly (1955-1957).

Sept. 1. Dooly.

Sept. 8-12. Dodge (1976a—1980), Telfair, Montgomery (1981-1986)

Telfair, Montgomery (1987-1990), Telfair (1990a), Coffee (1991,

1992), Appling (1993, 1994), Wayne.

Sept. 20-23. Pierce, Appling, Coffee (2010-2014), Irwin, Wilcox,

Dooly.

1904.

February 2-9. Dooly, Wilcox, Irwin, Coffee (2044-2050), Appling,

Ware.

February 16. Decatur.

March 31, April 1. Screven, Bulloch (2079, 2080), Screven (2081-

2083+).

April 1-4. Screven (2089, 2090), Bulloch (2091), Screven.

April 4-6. Emanuel (2092-2008).

April 23-29. Laurens, Montgomery (2145, 2146), Tattnall (2147-

2160), Bulloch (2161-2169).

May 5-7. Ware, Coffee, Berrien (2189-2191), Coffee (2192), Berrien

(2193-2196).

May 9-18. Berrien (2197), Irwin, Coffee (2198-2205), Irwin, Wilcox,

(2206-2209), Irwin (22I0, 2211). ;

May 18, 19. Wilcox (2212), Dooly.

TAXONOMIC CLASSIFICATION OF THE FLORA.

{n the following pages are arranged in systematic sequence ~

the species which have already been classified according to habitat

and adaptations, together with a few which do not appear in the

foregoing habitat lists because their habitats are not sufficiently

understood. The sequence is mainly that of Engler & Prantl’s

Natirlichen Pflanzenfamtlien, but reversed, for it seems more

expedient to begin with the flowering plants, which are best —

known, and to place the comparatively little known bryophytes

and thallophytes last, ending with forms whose status in the

vegetable kingdom is not universally accepted. In so doing I

follow the usage of most systematists from Linnzus to Gray.

This implies no discredit to the accepted theories of evolution,

but is primarily a matter of convenience. There seems to be no

logical reason why the top of the series is not just as good to

begin with as the bottom. This is analogous to the practice of

~ geologists, who always begin their stratigraphic sections at the

top.

As far as the arrangement of genera and species within the

families is concerned, I usually follow Small’s Flora of the South-

eastern United States, which is the latest systematic treatment of ~

the plants of that region. Ina few cases I have deviated from

Dr. Small’s arrangement in order to bring closely related genera —

or species nearer together.. The treatment of genera and species —

herein is in most cases a little more conservative than that in

Small’s Flora.

Nomenclature is in a somewhat unsettled state at present,

pending the adoption of the Philadelphia or the Vienna rules, and ~

in trying to avoid the defects of the older systems and adopt the —

best features of the new I have doubtless allowed some incon- ~

sistencies to creep in, all of which cannot very well be eliminated —

until the nomenclature of the whole flora of the southeastern

126

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 127

states is revised according to one or the other of the new systems.

But fortunately most of the plants of the Altamaha Grit region

were not known to the systematists of the 18th century (as will be

shown farther on), and their synonymy is not yet as involved as is

that of the plants of most other parts of Eastern North America.

As the names of families form no part of the names of plants

and are comparatively few, it does not seem necessary that they

should be determined by strict rules. And as no two modern

authors agree exactly as to the correct name for each family, I

have used those family names which were best known a dozen

years ago.

Pretty full synonymy for most of the species here enumer-

ated can be found either in Watson’s Bibliographical Index,

MacMillan’s Metasperme of the Minnesota Valley, the fifth

volume of the Memotrs of the Torrey Botanical Club, or in Mohr’s

Plant Life of Alabama. Consequently in this catalogue syno-

nyms are usually omitted except for such species as are not

mentioned in any of these works, or have had a recent change

of name. Theuse of parenthetical citations of authors, which

has become common in the last fifteen years, largely obviates

the necessity or giving synonyms in a work of this kind. A

slight variation of the parenthetical citation is here intro-

duced. Where a species has been transferred from one genus ~

to another, or a variety from one species to another in the same

genus, the name of the original author is put in parentheses, as

usual. But where a variety has been raised to a species, or

vice versa, brackets are used instead. There are a few cases

where a combination of both is necessary (e. g., Taxodium

ambricarium). This device will add somewhat to the definiteness

of citations where synonyms are omitted.

The names of species believed not to be indigenous to the

region are printed in small capitals. Other accepted names are

in full-face type, and all synonyms (except those of genera) in

italics. The place of publication of every genus and species is

given, when known, and most of them I have verified personally.

The abbreviations of authors’ names and of the titles of their

works are mostly those in common use, and will be understood

by all systematists.

128 HARPER

Common names are given in many cases, and divided into

three classes. Those which I know to be used in the Altamaha

Grit region are enclosed in quotation marks, those which seem

not to be used there, but in other parts of Georgia, are in paren-

theses, and those which J am not sure about have no such marks.

All common names are printed in small capitals, and each is

placed immediately after the citation of the specific name, or

after the generic name if it is applied indiscriminately to all the

species of a genus.

The remarks under each species includes first its habitat or

habitats, often with notes on its relative abundance, and then its

known distribution within the region, usually by counties if it is

not common throughout. When a species has not been observed

in every county it is not always safe to assume that it grows in

all of them, and for species which are known in only a few count-

ies it may be possible hereafter to discover climatic or other

barriers which prevent them from spreading in some directions.

For this reason I have gone into what may seem unnecessary

detail in discussing the distribution of all but the commonest

species. The counties enumerated in each case are arranged

as nearly as possible in geographical order from-northeast to

southwest, and the names of those within the region are printed

in small capitals, the word county being usually omitted.!

The numbers in parentheses associated with the county names

refer to my collection numbers,” and the date on which any par-

ticular number was collected can be found (approximately at

1In August, 1905, the Georgia legislature created eight new counties,

seven of which include parts of the Altamaha Grit region. But as the

field work on which this flora is based was of course all done (and the

specimens labeled) before the change was made, and at this writing no

accurate map of the new counties has yet been published, it is obviously

impracticable to correlate my notes with the new state of affairs at

present. Consequently the new counties are here ignored, and the

distribution given in the following pages is based on the map which

forms the frontispiece, which shows the political boundaries as they

existed during my residence and subsequent explorations in Georgia.-

2 All the vascular plants I have collected in Georgia since the middle i

of June, 1900, have been numbered consecutively, and the numbers for

bryophytes and thallophytes have been interpolated by the addition of

the letters a, b, c, etc. Nearly complete sets of these plants, aggregating

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 129

least) in the chronological summary of my travels a few pages

back, if desired.

Some authors of local floras have been particular to cite

localities only for existing herbarium specimens. This of course

is the safest rule to observe when one is writing up the flora of

a region which he has not explored much himself, but in the

present case it would be totally inadequate. Had I followed

this rule I would have been restricted to about 550 specimens

collected by myself and not over 50 collected by other persons,

representing perhaps 500 species. As it is, ] have usually tried

while in the field to note each plant at least once in each county

each season, and I have probably by this time ten stations for

each species, on the average (over a hundred for some, though),

making several thousand individual records in all, which is prob-

ably more than the total number of specimens from the whole

state of Georgia represented in any one herbarium at present.

The records of local distribution in the following list are based

solely on my own notes and collections. This eliminates any

variation due to different personal equations, except where my

own views may have changed unconsciously between seasons.

Some species collected in this region by other botanists have been

enumerated a few pages back, but to include them, and all other

available specimens, would not have added one per cent. to the

number of species in the list or the number of stations. An-

other reason for not including specimens collected by others is

that most of them have the serious defect of not being accom-

panied by sufficient indication of habitat, which renders them

almost worthless for my purposes; for throughout this work

habitat is regarded as of the greatest importance. Further-

more, completeness is not essential in a preliminary sketch of

this kind.

now about 2500 numbers (representing perhaps 1700 species), can be

found at the New York Botanical Garden, U. S. National Herbarium,

' Gray Herbarium of Harvard University, Missouri Botanical Garden, and

Edinburgh Royal Botanic Garden. Partial sets are in the possession of

the Field Columbian Museum, British Museum, University of Nebraska,

and the Botanical Gardens at Kew, Berlin, Paris, and Vienna. Most of

the trees and shrubs are represented in the herbarium of the Arnold

Arboretum. From a dozen to a hundred or more specimens are in the

collections of each of several smaller institutions and private individuals.

130 HARPER

After the local distribution of each species is given its time of —

flowering, as far as known. In compiling these data I have

made use of a long series of phenological notes, mostly from the —

vicinity of Macon and Washington, Ga., kindly furnished me by ~

Miss E. F. Andrews (author of Botany All ihe Year Round), ~

and of my own notes made in all parts of Georgia in the last ten —

years. Some correction has of course been made for difference

of season in different latitudes, when collating notes of this kind

from the northern half of the state. Plants in the Altamaha Grit

region have just as definite flowering periods as those anywhere ~

farther north, however the same species may behave in sub- —

tropical Florida and farther south, where there is not so much

distinction between seasons.

The treatment of each species ends with a synopsis of its known

geographical distribution, first with considerable detail as to its ©

occurrence in other parts of Georgia, based on personal ex-

perience, and then its total known range, compiled from various —

manuals, monographs, and local floras. In discussing distribution

within the state a distinction is often made between the upper —

third and the upper fourth of the coastal plain. By upper third

is meant all north of the Altamaha Grit, and by upper fourth all —

north of the pine-barrens, or in other words only the Cretaceous —

and Eocene regions and fall-line sand-hills.

The total ranges I have attempted to correlate as far as pos-

sible with the physiographic divisions outlined near the beginning

of this work, but the data for doing so are as yet much less com- —

plete than might be desired, for in most floras hitherto published

ranges are given in terms of political divisions only. It should —

be borne in mind that the pine-barrens so frequently mentioned

below always constitute only a part of the coastal plain (in ©

Georgia about two-thirds), so that a species confined to the pine- —

barrens is in that respect always more restricted in range than ~

one merely confined to the coastal plain.

The ranges here given have been compiled principally from —

Mohr’s Plant Life of Alabama (which is about the only work of its

kind in which natural divisions are made almost as prominent as

political ones), and Small’s Flora of the Southeasiern United —

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 131

States, the ranges in which are probably based on more copious

material than those in Dr. Mohr’s great work. Several other

publications of more limited scope have been freely consulted,

and their titles will be found in the bibliography. The ranges

indicated in manuals and monographs are of course chiefly com-

piled from herbarium specimens, which are too often insuf-

ficiently labeled or otherwise unsatisfactory. More accurate

results can be obtained by consulting a number of reliable local

floras. This I have done in some cases, but it is too laborious

a task to be followed consistently throughout. One of the

greatest desiderata in systematic botany at present is the

accurate determination of ranges,' and this catalogue it is

hoped will be a slight contribution toward that end.

The advisability of mentioning ranges at all in a local flora

‘may well be questioned by some. For no two authorities agree

as to the ranges of many species, and any range even when

apparently well known is hable to need revision by reason of

errors in determination of some of the material, or changes in

accepted specific limits, or more commonly for extensions of

known range by discovery.? And if geographical variation of

species was the rule, rather than the exception, it might be argued

that no plants outside our territory should be considered abso-

lutely indentical with those within. But fortunately most species

do not vary perceptibly from one place to another, so range often

becomes an important character of a species. So on the whole

it seems best to attempt to give the known range of each as

accurately as possible, in order to show the affinities of our flora

with that of other parts of the country. As most if not all of

the species have come into the region from elsewhere since

Pleistocene times, it becomes a matter of considerable interest to

study their origin, and some facts of this kind have already been

brought out in the summaries of the foregoing habitat lists.

1See Robinson, Science, Il. 14: 472-473. 1901.

2 Some botanists have even gone so far as to print ranges on herbarium

labels, but this practice is scarcely to be recommended, for range is a

property of the species and not of the individual, and if a specimen so

labeled turns out to have been erroneously identified the range assigned

to it loses its meaning.

By HARPER

No descriptions of the plants are attempted in this cata-

logue and no new combinations are published, though a few

will probably be necessitated by the new rules of nomemcla-

ture. All the species mentioned, unless otherwise specified, are —

pretty fully described in Dr. Small’s Flora, which should be in the —

hands of all who make any use of this paper. There is a good ~

deal of information about each species scattered about through q

the foregoing pages, however, and to find it all the reader should —

consult the index. ;

Scattered through the catalogue at the proper places will be q

found references to morphological and anatomical studies by —

Kearney, W. E. Britton, Theo. Holm, and others, in which about —

fifty of our species are discussed. These will doubtless be of

some service to any one who may hereafter have occasion to —

make a more thorough study of the flora of the same or a similar ~

region.

References are also given to published illustrations of some of —

the rarer species, and little-known illustrations of some of the ~

commoner ones, especially those which are not included in

familiar illustrated works like Sargent’s Szlva and Britton &

Brown's Illustrated Flora. .

CATALOGUE OF SPECIES.

SPE RMATOREY TA.

CICHORIACEZ.

KRIGIA Willd., Sp. Pl. 3: 1618. 1804.

K. Virginica (L.) Willd., 1. c.

Adopogon Carolinianus (Walt.) Britton, Mem. Torrey Club

5:346. 1894.

Dry pine-barrens and rock outcrops, or sometimes a roadside

weed. SCREVEN (2083), BULLOCH, TATTNALL, and doubtless

in most of the other counties. Fl. March—May.

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States, but natural

range uncertain, on account of its marked tendency to be-

| come a weed. :

LYGODESMIA D. Don, Edinb. New Phil. Jour.6:311. 1829.

L. aphylla (Nutt.) DC., Prodr. 7:198. 1838.

Dry pine-barrens near the inland edge of our territory in IRWIN

and witcox. Fl. May-July. More frequent in the lime-

sink region.

Known only from the pine-barrens of Georgia and Florida.

HIERACIUM L., Sp. Pl. 799. 1753.

There seem to be at least two representatives of this genus in

our territory, both growing in dry pine-barrens. One has

been noted in BULLOCH (860), where it flowers in June, and

the other in IRWIN, BERRIEN, and coLgulirtt, (165 3), flowering

in September and October. They seem to be near relatives

of H. Gronovi L., but cannot very well be determined in

the present state of our knowledge of the genus.

_ COMPOSITZ (CARDUACEZ).

CHAPTALIA Vent., Jard. Cels. pl. 61. 1800.

) C. tomentosa Vent., 1. c.

C. integrijolia (Mx.) Nutt.; Gen. 2:182. 1818.

Thyrsanthema semtflosculare (Walt.) Kuntze, Rev. 1: 369. 1891.

133

134 HARPER

Moist pine-barrens, rather common throughout. Fl. Feb.- 7

April. Evergreen. a

North Carolina to Florida and Texas, in the pine-barrens. —

CARDUUS L., Sp. Pl. 820. 2753) Unsaee

C. spinosissimus Walt., Fl. Car. 194. 1788.

Dry pine-barrens along railroads near Fitzgerald, probably —

introduced. Fl. May. More common near the coast. ;

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States, mainly in —

the coastal plain, but native range uncertain.

C. revolutus Small, Fl. 1307. 1903.

Moist or intermediate pine-barrens. COFFEE, DOOLY, WORTH

(7697), coLquitT. Fl. Aug.—Sept. Occurs also janeiae

Lower Oligocene region.

South Carolina to Florida, in the pine-barrens.

C. LeContei (T. & G.) Pollard, Bull. Torrey Club 24:157. 1897 ©

Moist pine-barrens, COFFEE (1425). July, Igo2.

Ranges westward to Louisiana in the pine-barrens.

SENECIOL., Sp. Pl. 866. 1753.

S. tomentosus Mx., Fl. 2:119. 1803.

On rock outcrop in TATTNALL, April 26, 1904, in flower.

Said to range from New Jersey to Florida, Arkansas, and Texas,

but Dr. Mohr does not report it from Alabama, and its

distribution is not well worked out. Elsewhere in Georgia I ©

have seen it only on granite outcrops around Stone Moun- —

tain, and in dry pine-barrens near Omaha. In the vicinity ©

of Dismal Swamp it is a common roadside weed, according ~

to Kearney. ; |

For a study of its leaf-anatomy see Kearney, Contr. U.S. Nat. Herb. ~

5 5 509. Igot.

MESADENIA Raf.; Loud. Gard. Mag. 8:247. 1832.

M. Elliottii Harper, Torreya 5:184. 1905.

" Cacaha ovata Walt.*, Bil, Sk..22310.. nae

Seen only in damp woods, where the Lafayette formation is ©

supposed to be absent (see page 111), in the northwestern ~

corner of BERRIEN (7701). Fl. Aug.-Sept. Grows also —

farther inland, apparently under similar geological conditions,

in Houston, Early, and perhaps other counties. :

Ranges westward to Louisiana in the coastal plain.

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA ise

M. lanceolata virescens Harper, Torreya 5: 185.

1905.

Rather common in moist pine-barrens.

DODGE, TELFAIR,

APPLING, COFFEE, WILCOX, IRWIN, BERRIEN (664, 1678 type),

DOOLY, WORTH, COLQUITT, THOMAS. FI. Sept.—Oct.

Apparently confined to the region.

ERECHTHITES Raf., Fl. Lud. 65. 1817.

EPP RACIFOLIA (.) Raf.; DC. Prodr. 6:294. 1837.

Low. grounds near Moultrie, Aug. 22, 1903, evidently intro-

duced.

Widely distributed in Eastern North America, but natural

range and habitat unknown. Also in the

Bahamas

(Northrop).

ARNICA L., Sp. Pl. 884. 1753.

Beracanlis (Walt.) B.S. P., Prel. Cat. N. Y. 30. 18881; Porter

& Britton, Mem. Torrey Club 5:342. 1894.

Intermediate pine-barrens, rare. BULLOCH, LAURENS. FI.

April—June.

Ranges from southeastern Pennsylvania to Florida, mostly in

the coastal plain. In Georgia extends inland to Richmond

and Johnson Counties and coastward to Effingham.

ACHILLEA L., Sp. Pl. 868.

PIE LEFOLIUM L., Sp. Pl. 899. 1753.

A weed along roadsides, mostly near dwellings.

TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, BERRIEN. FI. May—Oct.

Widely distributed in the Northern Hemisphere, but probably

not native in the United States.

1753. YARROW.

BULLOCH,

ANTHEMIS L., Sp. Pl. 893. 1753.

EepcotwunA L., Sp. Pl. 894: 1753. Doc-FENNEL.

In similar situations to the preceding. SCREVEN, WILCOX,

BERRIEN, and probably elsewhere. Fl. May—Aug.

Native of Europe, abundantly naturalized in the United States.

1 As complete synonymy for new combinations is not given in the

Prelimiary Catalogue of Anthophyta and Pteridophyta, I have added

in this and the seven or eight similar cases in this flora, a reference to the

first subsequent publication in which the omission is supplied.

136 HARPER

GAILLARDIA Foug., Mem. Acad. Sci. Par. 1786: 5. pl. 1, 2. 1786. :

G. lanceolata Mx., Fl. 2:142. 1803. 4

Dry pine-barrens, sand-hills, etc.; not common. TATTNALL,

MONTGOMERY, COLQuITT. Fl. June—Sept.

South Carolina to Florida and Texas in the coastal plain, gs 4

inland to Kansas. 7

LEPTOPODA Nutt., Gen. 2:174. 1818.

L. Helenium Nutt., l.c.

L. decurrens Macbride; Ell., Sk. 2:446. 1823. 7

Moist pine-barrens and shallow ponds. scREVEN, BULLOCH —

(2167), EMANUEL, TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, COFFEE, WILCOX,

IRWIN, BERRIEN, and perhaps in all the other counties. Fl.

April-May.

South Carolina to Florida and Louisiana, in the pine-barrens.

HELENIUM L., Sp. Pl. 886. 1753.

H. nudiflorum Nutt., Trans. Am. Phil. Soc. Il. 7:3875guayae

Leptopoda brachypoda T. & G., Fl. 2:388. 1842. .

Low grounds near the Canoochee and Ohoopee Rivers and —

Pendleton Creek in TATTNALL, June, 1903, in flower. Grows

also near the sources of the Ohoopee River, a little outside

of our limits. |

Virginia to Florida, Missouri, and Texas, in the coastal plain.

H.autumnale L.,Sp. Pl. 886. 1753. (3

In low grounds, particularly where the Lafayette formation —

seems to be absent. DOOLY, IRWIN, BERRIEN, COFFEE (7/4).

Fl. Aug.—Oct.

Widely distributed east of the Rocky Mountains, but perhaps: —

not everywhere native.

H, TENUIFOLIUM Nutt., Jour. Acad. Phila. 7760.@agam—

BItTER WEED.

Our commonest weed, along roads and railroads throughout. —

Fl. May—Nov. :

Now widely distributed in the southeastern states, but proba-—

bly native only in the Mississippi valley or farther west. It q

has spread rapidly in Georgia in the last 15 or 20 years (see —

Bull. Torrey Club, 28:484. 1901), but it is still rather ~

scarce in the flat pine-barrens toward the coast..

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 137

HYMENOPAPPUS L’Her.; Mx., Fl. 2:103. 1803.

H. Carolinensis (Lam.) Porter, Mem. Torrey Club, 5:338. 1894.

Dry sandy soil, BULLOCH and MONTGOMERY; perhaps not

native. May-June. Common around Millen, just north of

our limits.

Said to range from South Carolina to Florida, Kansas, and

Texas, just as in the case of Gazllardia lanceolata, which it

also resembles in habitat. Not reported from Alabama.

MARSHALLIA Schreb.; Gmel. Syst. 2:1208. 1791. (Not of

page 836 of same work.)

PHYTEUMOPSIS Juss;. Poir., Suppl. 42405. 1816.

M. ramosa Beadle & F. E. Boynton, Biltmore Bot. Stud. 1:8.

Pile. LOOL.

Dry rock outcrops, TATTNALL (1855) and popce. Fl. June.

Occurs also in Johnson County, near the inland edge of

our territory.

Endemic or nearly so. (See Bull. Torrey Club, 32:170. 1905;

horneya, 52204. To9OS.)

M. graminifolia (Walt.) Small, Bull. Torrey Club, 25: 482. 1898.

Moist pine-barrens, not rare. COFFEE, IRWIN (1416), BERRIEN,

COLQUITT, THOMAS (7780). FI. July—Sept. Not known

farther inland, but extends well down into the flat pine-

barren region.

North Carolina to northern Florida and Louisiana, in the

pine-barrens.

ACTINOSPERMUM EIl., Sk. 2:448. 1823.

A. angustifolium (Pursh) T. & G., Fl. 2:389. 1842.

Baldwinia multiflora Nutt., Gen. 2:176. 1818.

Sand-hills and sand-hammocks; frequent from BULLOCH to

COFFEE (697) and the northeastern corner of BERRIEN. FI.

September. Inland to Laurens County (opposite Dublin),

and along the Canoochee, Altamaha, Satilla, and Little

Satilla Rivers well down into the flat country.

Also known from several stations in Florida, and on the coast

of Alabama.

138 | HARPER

BALDWINIA Nutt., Gen. 2: 175. 1818.

Brunifiora Nutty lic:

Dry, intermediate, and moist pine-barrens; common not only

in our territory but throughout the pine-barrens of Georgia,

tz. e., from the inland edge of the Lower Oligocene to within a

few miles of the coast. Fl. July-September. .

North Carolina to northern Florida and Louisiana, strictly

confined to the coastal plain.

B. atropurpurea Harper, Bull. Torrey Club 28: 483. r1go1.

Moist pine-barrens, not rare. BULLOCH, COFFEE, WILCOX,

IRWIN, BERRIEN (662, type), DOOLY, WORTH, COLQUITT

(7644). Fl. Aug-—Oct. Also in Wayne and) Pierce

Counties, in the flat pine-barren region. (See Bull. Torrey

Club 31:26. 1904; 32:270. 10905; Torreya 5: a04neose)

Not known elsewhere.

BIDENS LL.) Sp. Pl. 8322 1753.

B. BIPINNATA L., 1. c. Spanish NEEDLES.

A weed. Seen in the streets of Tifton, Sept. 27, 1902. More

common in the older-settled parts of the state.

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States and Mexico,

but natural range and habitat uncertain.

COREOPSIS L., Sp. Pl. 907. 1753.

C. nudata Nutt., Gen. 2:180. 1818.

Common in shallow ponds, and occasionally in branches. —

BULLOCH, TATTNALL (7001), COFFEE (2798), IRWIN, BERRIEN, 4

cotguitt. Fl. April-June. Widely distributed in the ~

pine-barrens of Georgia.

Also reported from northeastern Florida.

C. angustifolia Ait., Hort. Kew. 3: 253. 1789.

Moist pine-barrens. COFFEE, WILCOX, IRWIN, BERRIEN (667), 4

DOOLY, COLQUITT (1666), THOMAS. FI. July—Sept.

North Carolina to Florida and Louisiana, in the pine-barrens. q

Several species very closely related to this have been pro-

posed, and some of my material may perhaps be refer-

able to one or more of them. 7

C. delphinifolia Lam., Encyc. 2:108. 1786.

(@) C. Wrayz. Nutt., Jour. Acad. Phil. 7:76; 1éeqe

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 139

Chiefly in dry pine-barrens. TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY,

TELFAIR, WILCOX, DOOLY. Fl. June-Aug. Extends inland

to Sumter County and coastward to Effingham.

Virginia (?) to Alabama (?). Range imperfectly understood.

C. lanceolata L., Sp. Pl. 908. 1753.

Dry pine-barrens and sand-hills. BULLOCH (2169), TATTNALL,

MONTGOMERY, BERRIEN. FI. April-June.

Has a wide distribution in the Eastern United States, which

has not been carefully worked out. In Georgia known only

from the coastal plain.

VERBESINA L., Sp. Pl. 901. 1753.

V. Virginica L., l.c.

Wooded bluffs along the Oconee and Ocmulgee Rivers near

Mount Vernon and Lumber City. Fl. September. More

common in the upper third of the coastal plain, and in

Middle Georgia.

Pennsylvania to central Florida, Missouri, and Texas, in the

Piedmont region and coastal plain.

HELIANTHUS L., Sp. Pl. 904. 1753.

H. australis Small, Fl. 1268. 1903.

MONTGOMERY: Dry woods along Oconee River near Mount

Vernon, June 29, 1903 (1864).

Said to range south to Florida and west to Louisiana.

H. Radula (Pursh) T. & G., Fl. 2:321. 1841.

Normally in intermediate pine-barrens ; common throughout

our territory and the rest of the pine-barrens of Georgia.

Fl. Sept.—Oct.

Georgia and Florida to Louisiana (?), in the pine-barrens.

H. angustifolius L., Sp. Pl. 906. 1753.

Hisics | pile-batrens, IRWIN, coLourTT. Fl. Sept.—Oct.

Known also from a few stations in the upper third of the

coastal plain and in Middle Georgia.

New Jersey to Florida, Missouri, and Texas, mostly in the

coastal plain.

H. undulatus Chapm., Fl. ed. 3, 253. 1897.

Moist pine-barrens, especially along the edges of branch-

140 HARPER.

swamps. TELFAIR, COFFEE (671), IRWIN, BERRIEN, WORTH, 4

coLguiTT. Fl. Sept.—Oct.

Pine-barrens of Georgia, Florida, and Alabama.

RUDBECKIA L., Sp. Pl. 906. 1753.

Re hitta. son eleloo7 mana,

Usually in dry pine-barrens. BULLOCH (823,870), TATTNALL, —

MONTGOMERY, COLQUITT, MITCHELL, DECATUR. Fl. May— ©

Sept.

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States, but only as

an introduced plant northeastward, so that its natural range

is uncertain.

R. foliosa C. L. Boynton & Beadle; Small, Fl. 1256. 1903.

BERRIEN: Low grounds southwest of Tifton, where the Lafay-_ q

ette formation is presumably absent (7692); DooLty: Around

a lime-sink east of Wenona, just at the edge of our territory

(1962). Fl. July—Sept.

North Carolina to Florida.

Re nitida Nutt, jour. Acadh Philan 74735. Same

Mostly in intermediate pine-barrens. BULLOCH, TATTNALL,

MONTGOMERY, DODGE. FI. June, July. Not observed west ~

of the Ocmulgee River. Extends inland to Johnson and ~

Laurens Counties, perhaps little if at all beyond our limits. :

Said to range westward to Texas, but not reported from Ala- —

bama.

R. Mohrii Gray, Proc. Am. Acad. 17:217. 1882. (See Bull. —

Torrey Club 27: 435. 1900.)

Usually in and around shallow ponds, more rarély in moist —

pine-barrens. APPLING, DODGE, DOOLY, IRWIN, BERRIEN,

WORTH, COLQUITT. Fl. June-Sept. Extends imlandiiiie

Pulaski, Sumter, Calhoun, and Early Counties in the Lower ~

Oligocene region, and coastward to Ware and Lowndes in ~

the flat country.

Otherwise known only from Middle and West Florida.

TETRAGONOTHECA L., Sp. Pl. 903. 1753.

T. helianthoides L., 1. c.

Dry pine-barrens in the northern part of Correr County, be- —

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 141

tween Pridgen and Barrow’s Bluff, May 14, 1904, in flower.

Doubtless elsewhere in our territory, but nowhere common,

and not free from the suspicion of being introduced in some

places.

Virginia to Florida and Mississippi, in the Piedmont region

and coastal plain.

BERLANDIERA DC., Prodr. 5: 517. 1836.

EB. pumila (Mx.) Nutt., Trans. Am. Phil. Soc. Il. 7:342. 1840.

B. tomentosa (Pursh) Nutt., l.c.°343.

Dry pine-barrens, sand-hills, etc.; not abundant. TATTNALL,

MONTGOMERY, TELFAIR, COFFEE, DECATUR. Fl. April—Sept.

Pretty widely distributed over South Georgia.

North Carolina to Florida and Arkansas, in the coastal plain.

SIUPHIUM, Ee Sp) “PE oro, 1754.

S. Asteriscus angustatum Gray, Syn. Fl. ed. 2, 17: 449. 1886.

S. angusium Small, Fl. 1244. 1903.

(?) S. lanceolaium Nutt., Trans. Am. Phil. Soc. II.7:341. 1840.

corouittT: Dry pine-barrens south of Moultrie, Aug. 24,

1903 (1947).

Nuttall’s plant, which may be the same as ours, came from

the vicinity of Milledgeville.

Known otherwise from Gadsden County, Florida, and

Baldwin and Mobile Counties, Alabama.

S. compositum Mx., Fl. 2:145. 1803.

TELFAIR: Dry pine-barrens southwest of McRae, July 4, 1903.

North Carolina to northern Florida and Alabama, from the

mountains to the coastal plain.

ACANTHOSPERMUM Schrank, Pl. Rar. Hort. Monac. 2: fl.

Eee ro1G.

PeeMUSTRALE (L.) Kuntze, Rev. 1:303. 1891.

One of our commonest weeds, growing along roads and rail-

roads in nearly every settlement, usually with Helenium

tenuifolium. Fl. May—Oct.

Introduced from the tropics, and now common from North

Carolina to Florida and Louisiana, especially in the coastal

plain. ‘

142 HARPER

GNAPHALIUM L., Sp. Pl. 850. 1753.

Gy PURPUREUM Ll), ope) Elinor aamen 7537

A weed of fields and roadsides, noted in May, 1904, near —

Fitzgerald and Nashville. More common in other parts

Or the state.

Widely distributed in North America, but natural range Bee

habitat unknown.

G. OBTUSIFOLIUM L., Sp. Pl. .851. 1753. RABEIa Dopncea

Seen from train in Ashburn, WortH Co., Aug. 29, 1903.

Very common in the northern half of the state.

Range similar to that of the preceding.

PTEROCAULON Ell, Sk. 2:323. 1823.

CHLZNOBOLUS Cass., Dict. Sci. Nat. 49:337. 1827.

CH#NOLOBUS Small, Fl. 1235. 1903.

P. undulatum (Walt.) Mohr, Contr. U. S$. Nat. Herb. 6: 790.

TOOL ) DLACK ROOT:

P. pycnostachyum (Mx.) Ell., Sk. 2:324. 1823.

Chenolobus undulatus Small, Fl. 1236. 1903.

Normally in intermediate pine-barrens; nearly throughout

our territory and in all the pine-barrens of Georgia, espe-

cially coastward. Fl. May—June.

North Carolina to Florida and Alabama, in the pine-barrens.

PLUCHEA: Cass., Bull. Soc. Philom. 1817)33¢nsuom

LpProGyne [lly Sky 23322) 4ro23eee

P. petiolata Cass., Dict. Sci. Nat. 42:2. 1826.

TELFAIR: Ocmulgee River swamp near Lumber City, Sept. 11,

1903. More frequent farther inland.

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States south of

latitude 38°.

P. imbricata [Kearney] Nash, Bull. Torrey Club 23: a 1896.

Branch- and creek-swamps and shallow ponds. TATTNALL,

MONTGOMERY, APPLING, COFFEE (1430), COLQUITT, Fl. June—

Sept. Not observed farther inland, but grows in the flat

country around Okefinokee Swamp. Easily distinguished

from the next.

Otherwise known only from eastern Florida.

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 143

E==bitrons (L.) DC., Prodr._5.: 451. 1836.

In shallow ponds, especially cypress ponds. TATTNALL,

COFFEE, IRWIN, coLguiTT. Fl. June—Sept. Also farther in-

land and nearer the coast, but confined to the pine-barrens.

Rarely if ever associated with the preceding.

New Jersey to South Florida and Texas, in the coastal plain.

Also in the Bahamas (Northrop).

Leaf-anatomy described by Kearney, Contr. U. S. Nat. Herb.

5:508. Igo.

BACCHARIS L., Sp. Pl. 860. 1753.

B. halimifolia L., 1. c.

Principally in creek- and river-swamps, but also around extinct

sawmills and in some other places where it cannot possibly

be native. BULLOCH, EMANUEL, MONTGOMERY, BERRIEN.

Flowers very late if at all in our territory.

Massachusetts to Florida and Texas, chiefly along the coast.

For discussion of its leaf-anatomy see Kearney, Contr. U.S.

INeiimilier by 5 21407,208: 1900), 508,509. TOOL.

IONACTIS Greene, Pittonia 3: 245. 1897.

I. linariifolia (L.) Greene, l. c.

MONTGOMERY: Dry pine-barrens near Mount Vernon, June 30,

1903. Flowers late. Occurs sparingly in all parts of Georgia.

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States.

Leaf-anatomy discussed by W. E. B itton, Bull Torrey Club

B02 507: 2). 200. 1903.

DCLLINGERIA Nees, Gen. & Sp. Ast. 176. 1832.

D. reticulata (Pursh) Greene, Pittonia 3: 53. 1896.

Diplopappus obovatus (Nutt.) T. & G., Fl. 2:184. 1841.

Intermediate pine-barrens, etc.; nearly throughout our

territory and coastward, but not known farther inland.

South Carolina to central Florida, in the pine-barrens.

LEPTILON Raf., Am. Month. Mag. 2: 268. 1818.

ie CANADENSE (L.) Britton, lll. Fl. 32391. 7. 3627. 1808.

A roadside weed. TATTNALL: Collins; cotguittT: Moultrie.

Common farther inland.

Widely distributed in North and South America, Europe and

Asia, but natural range and habitat unknown.

144 HARPER

ERIGERON L., Sp. Pl. 863. 1753. : 2

E. ramosus (Walt.) B.S. P., Prel. Cat. N. Y. 27. 1888; MacM.,

Met. Minn. 526. 1802.

MONTGOMERY: Dry sandy soil near Mount Vernon, June 30,

1903. Probably not native.

Widely distributed in North America, doubtless a weed in

most places.

Bevermus (i.e de Gi 32 c7o;aroAn,

Intermediate and moist pine-barrens and shallow ponds,

nearly throughout the pine-barrens of Georgia. Fl. April—

August.

Virginia to South Florida and Louisiana, in the coastal plain.

ASTER L., Sp. Pl. 872. 1753.

A. eryngiifolius T. & G., Fl. 2: 502. 1843.

DECATUR: Moist pine-barrens near Recovery, Aug. 14, 1903.

(@o32.)) Rare. Pie simmer:

Known otherwise only from adjacent parts of Florida. (See

Ball orreys Clilrs2 109; noes.)

A. squarrosus Walt., Fl. Car. 209. 1788. (Not of All euzece)

Intermediate pine-barrens, etc. SCREVEN, EMANUEL, TATTNALL,

APPLING, COFFEE (710), IRWIN, BERRIEN (658), COLQUITT.

Frequent in our territory and coastward. Flowers probably

in November. Extends inland a little beyond our hmits,

in Johnson, Laurens, and Dooly Counties.

North Carolina to northeastern Florida, in the pine-barrens.

A. adnatus Nutt., Jour. Acad. Phila. 7:82. 1834.

Intermediate pine-barrens; less common than the preceding.

BERRIEN, COLQUITT, THOMAS. Alsoin Sumter, Lee, Mitchell,

and Early Counties in the Lower Oligocene region. Flowers

probably in November.

Pine-barrens of Georgia, Florida, and Alabama. Also in the

Bahamas (Britton).

SERICOCARPUS Nees, Gen. & Sp. Ast. 148. 1832.

S. bifoliatus (Walt.) Porter, Mem. Torrey Club 5:322. 1894.

S. torttfolius (Mx.) Nees, Gen. & Sp. Ast. 151. 1832.

Aster Collinsit Nutt.

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 145

Usually on sand-hills, sometimes in dry pine-barrens. BUL-

LOCH, MONTGOMERY, APPLING, IRWIN, COLQUITT, THOMAS,

DECATUR. Fl. Aug.—Sept.

Virginia to Florida and Louisiana, in the coastal plain.

BOLTONIA L’Her., Sert. Angl. 27. 1788.

B. diffusa Ell., Sk. 2: 400. 1823.

DODGE: Low grounds southeast of Eastman; BERRIEN: Moist

pine-barrens southwest of Tifton, where the Lafayette for-

mation is presumably absent (See p. 112). Fl. Septem-

ber. More common in the Lower Oligocene region.

South Carolina to Florida, Illinois, and Texas, in the coastal

plain.

SOLIDAGO L., Sp. Pl. 878. 1753. GoLDEN-ROD.

S. Boottii Hook., Comp. Bot. Mag. 1:97. 1835.

On sand-hills, near the hammocks at their bases. MONTGOMERY

(1983), COFFEE. Fl. September. Also noted along the Flint

River in Sumter County and the Altamaha in Liberty.

Virginia to northeastern Florida and Texas, in the coastal

plain.

S. brachyphylla Chapm.; T. & G., Fl. 2: 218. 1842.

COFFEE: Woods at edge of Ocmulgee River swamp opposite

Lumber City, Sept. 11, 1903. DooLy: Edge of lime-sink

east of Wenona (7960). Fl. Aug.—Oct. Also noted in

Sumter and Clarke Counties, farther inland.

Middle Georgia to Florida and Mississippi.

S. odora Ait., Hort. Kew. 3: 214. 1789.

Sand-hills and dry pine-barrens. MONTGOMERY, COFFEE (699),

IRWIN, BERRIEN, COLQUITT. FI. Sept.—Oct. Extends in-

land to the mountains.

New England to Mexico.

EUTHAMIA Nutt., Gen. 2:162. 1818.

E. Caroliniana (L.) Greene; Porter & Britton, Mem. Torrey Club

53321. 1894.

Solidago tenuifolia Pursh, Fl. 540. 1814.

Usually a weed, in dry or slightly damp uncultivated soil.

COFFEE, WILCOX, BERRIEN, COLQUITT. FI. Sept.—Oct.

146 HARPER a

Massachusetts to Florida and Texas, mostly in the coastal plain, ©

but natural range and habitat uncertain. .

CHRYSOMA Nutt., Jour. Acad. Phila. 7:67. 1834.

C. pauciflosculosa (Mx.) Greene, Erythea 3:8. 1895.

MONTGOMERY: Sand-hills of Gum Swamp Creek (1986) and —

Little Ocmulgee River, Sept. 10, 1903; not quite in flower.

(See Bull. Torrey Club 32: 168,169. 1905.) 4

South Carolina to Florida and Mississippi, mostly along the

coast. Anatomy discussed by Lloyd, Bull. Torrey Club

eMC), jy lg OKO.

ISOPAPPUS. T.°& G.,) Fl. 2: 230) soa

I. pivaricatus (Nutt.) T. & G., lc.

A weed in dry sandy soil. DODGE, TELFAIR, IRWIN. FI.

July—-Sept. First discovered near Savannah by Dr. Baldwin, —

and ranges inland at least to the vicinity of Atlantasaam

South Carolina to northern Florida, Texas, and Kansas; arange ~

much like that of Hymenopappus and Gaillardia. Perhaps

native westward, but certainly not in Georgia.

CHONDROPHORA Raf., New Fl. N. A. 4:79. 1836.

C. nudata (Mx.) Britton, Mem. Torrey Club 5:317. 1894.

Intermediate and moist pine-barrens, throughout our territory —

and neighboring pine-barren regions, often very abundant. —

Fl. Aug.—Sept.

New Jersey to Florida and Texas (?), in the pine-barrens.

C. virgata (Nutt.) Greene, Erythea 3:91. 1895. }

Rock outcrops. TATTNALL (1857), DOOLY (1955). FI. Sep- ©

tember.

Otherwise definitely known only from Carboniferous rocks in —

the mountains of Alabama. (See Bull. Torrey Club 32: 168. ©

1905.)

CHRYSOPSIS Nutt., Gen. 2: 150. 1818.

C. gossypina (Mx.) Nutt., l. c.

Sand-hills and dry pine-barrens. IRWIN, BERRIEN, COLQUITT. —

Fl. Sept.Oct. Scattered over the pine-barrens of Georgia 7

in similar situations. 3

Virginia (?) to Florida and Louisiana (?), in the coastal plain. |

;

‘

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 147

C. graminifolia (Mx.) Nutt., Gen. 2: 151. 1818.

Dry pine-barrens, sand-hills, etc.; frequent but not abundant.

Fl. Aug._Nov. Ranges nearly all over Georgia in dry sandy

soil, like Jonactts and Solidago odora.

Maryland to South Florida and Texas. Also in the Bahamas

(Britton).

CARPHEPHORUS Cass., Bull. Soc. Philom. 1816: 198. 1816.

C. tomentosus (Mx.) T.& G., Fl. 2:66. 1841.

Rather dry flat pine-barrens, not abundant. APPLING (1993),

PIERCE. Fl. September. Also in Wayne Co. in the flat

country, but never seen farther inland.

North Carolina to Florida (?), in the pine-barrens.

C. Pseudo-Liatris Cass., 1. c.

Iuatris squamosa Nutt., Jour. Acad. Phila. 7:73. 1834.

COLQUITT: Seen two or three times in moist pine-barrens near

Moultrie, September, 1902 (1665). Fl. Sept.—Oct. Not

known elsewhere in Georgia.

South to West Florida, west to Louisiana (?), in the pine-

barrens.

This species furnishes an interesting example of reduction of

transpiration by means of reduced scale-like cauline leaves,

which are rather rigid and closely set. Other characteristic

inhabitants of the pine-barrens of Georgia (not all of them

occurring in the Altamaha Grit region however) having a

somewhat similar habit are the three Asters mentioned

above, Carphephorus corymbosus (Nutt.) T. &. G., Trilisa

paniculata (Walt.) Cass., Tulsflora Carolinensis (Walt.)

Gmel., and Hypericum pilosum Walt.

LACINIARIA Hill, Veg. Syst. 4:49. pl. 46. 1762.

L. elegans (Walt.) Kuntze, Rev. 1:349. 1891.

Chiefly on sand-hills; not abundant. COFFEE, IRWIN, BERRIEN,

coLtguiTT. Fl. Aug—Oct. Also in the upper third of the

coastal plain.

Virginia to northern Florida, Missouri, and Texas, in the coastal

plain.

L. squarrosa (L.) Hill, 1. c.

COFFEE: Dry pine-barrens east of Douglas, July 19, 1902, in

‘148 HARPER

flower. iss seen once in Sumter County and oncé on the

mountains of Northwest Georgia.

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States.

L. gracilis (Pursh) Kuntze, l. c.

Rather dry-pine-barrens. BERRIEN (1683), WORTH. Also in

Thomas County, a little south of our limits. Fl. Oct.

South to central Florida, west to Louisiana (?).

L. graminifolia (Walt.) Kuntze, 1. c.

Dry pine-barrens. IRWIN, BERRIEN, COLguiTT. Fl. Sept.—Oct.

Virginia to Florida and Alabama, in the Piedmont region

and coastal plain.

L. spicata (L.) Kuntze, 1. c.

Moist pine-barrens. DODGE, COFFEE, WILCOX, IRWIN, BERRIEN,

DOOLY, COLQUITT (1652). FI. Aug—Oct. Also in Sumter

County. i

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States, but in the —

South apparently confined to the coastal plain.

L. tenuifolia (Nutt.) Kuntze, 1. c.

Sand-hills and dry pine-barrens. MONTGOMERY, DODGE, COFFEE,

IRWIN, BERRIEN, coLguitr. Fl. Aug.—Oct. Inland to the —

fall-line sand-bills.

North Carolina to Florida, in the coastal plain.

TRILISA Cass., Bull. Soc. Philom. 1818:140. 1818.

T. odoratissima (Walt.) Cass., l. c. ‘‘ DEER-ToONGUE.”

Usually in intermediate pine-barrens, throughout the pine- —

barren region of Georgia. Fl. Aug.Sept. 4

Virginia to central Florida and Louisiana, in the pine-barrens. —

For some interesting notes on this species, and a colored ]

plate, see Meehan’s Monthly 8:177-178. pl. r2. 1808.

T. paniculata (Walt.) Cass., 1. c.

In similar situations to eh preceding, and having about the —

same distribution in Georgia, but rather less common. Fl. .

Aug.—Sept.

Virginia to northern Florida, in the pine-barrens.

MIKANIA Willd., Sp. Pl. 3:1742. 1804. ;

WitLtucB2Zya Neck., Elem. 1:82. 1790. (Not Waullughbeja

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 149

Scop.; Schreb., Gen. Pl. 162. 1789.) (See Fernald, Bot. Gaz.

31:189. 1901.)

WILLoUGHBYA Kuntze, Rev. 1:371. 1891.

WiLLoucHB@yva Porter & Britton, Mem. Torrey Club 5: 313.

1894.

WiLLUGHB@A Britton & Brown, Ill. Fl. 3:313. 1808.

M. scandens (L.) Willd., Sp. Pl. 3:1743. 1804.

Swamps of streams originating north of our territory. (See

classification of streams on pp. 27, 28.) DODGE: Gum Swamp

Creek near Eastman. coFrFEE: Along Ocmulgee River

opposite Lumber City Fl. July—Oct. Scattered over the

state from Clarke County to Camden.

Massachusetts to Indiana, Florida, and Texas. Also in the

Bahamas (Northrop).

CONOCLINIUM DC., Prodr. 5:135. 1836.

C. celestinum (L.) DC., 1. c.

- TELFAIR: Ocmulgee River swamp near Lumber City, Sept. 11,

1903. More common farther inland.

New Jersey to Missouri, South Florida, and Texas.

EUPATORIUM L., Sp. Pl. 836. 1753.

E. compositifolium Walt., Fl. Car. 199. 1788. ‘““Doc FENNEL.’’

Common in dry pine-barrens, etc., throughout, but only along

_ roads or paths or in other places which have been tampered

with in some way, so that its status as a native is doubt-

ful. Fl. October. Extends from Clarke County (see Bull.

Morrey Club 27: 341. 1900) to the coast.

North Carolina to northern Florida and Texas.

E. serotinum Mx., Fl. 2: 100. 1803.

COFFEE: Ocmulgee River swamp opposite Lumber City, Sept.

II, 1903. Extends inland to Whitfield County and coast-

ward to Camden, but not common in Georgia.

Maryland to Iowa, South Florida, and Mexico.

_E. semiserratum DC., Prodr. 5:177. 1836.

TELFAIR: Ocmulgee River swamp near Lumber City, Sept. 11,

1903. Alsoin Charlton and Thomas Counties.

Virginia to Florida, Missouri, and Texas, in the coastal plain.

150 HARPER

E. tortifolium Chapm., Bot. Gaz. 3:5. 1878.

coLguitt: Dry pine-barrens south of Moultrie (7946). Fl.

Aug.—Sept. Also reported from the fall-line sand-hills in

Richmond County (A. Cuthbert), and from the pine-barrens

of Decatur County (type-locality, Chapman) and ‘neighbor-

ing parts of Alabama and Florida.

? E. Mohrii Greene; Mohr, Contr. U.S. Nat. Herb. 6:762. pl. r1.

Igol.

APPLING: Flat pine-barrens near Prentiss (1994); BERRIEN:

Margin of shallow pond near Tifton (1687).

E. lecheefolium Greene, Pittonia 3:177. 1897.

DOOLY: Dry pine-barrens east of Wenona, Sept. 1, 1903. Also

known from the lime-sink region of Decatur County, and

neighboring parts of Florida and Alabama.

E. album L., Mant. 111. 1767.

_ Dry pine-barrens and sand-hills. COFFEE, WILCOX, BERRIEN,

COLQUITT, DECATUR. Fl. July—-Sept. Ranges inland to the

mountains of Northwest Georgia.

Widely distributed in the Southeastern United States.

E. rotundifolium L., Sp. Pl. 837. 1753.

Intermediate and moist pine-barrens, etc., nearly throughout

South Georgia. Fl. July—Sept. Occurs rarely in North-

west Georgia.

Widely distributed in the Southeastern United States, and ex-

tending northward to Long Island, mostly in the coastal plain.

E. verbenefolium Mx., Fl. 2:98. 1803.

With the preceding or in similar situations, but less common.

DODGE, TELFAIR, APPLING, IRWIN, COLQUITT. FI. Aug.—Sept.

Also in the flat country toward the coast, and in Pike County,

Middle Georgia.

Range similar to that of E. rotundifolium, but extending north-

eastward to Massachusetts. (See Rhodora 7:76. 1905.)

E. perfoliatum L., Sp. Pl. 838. 1753. BoNnEsET.

Branch-swamps, and places where the Lafayette formation

is supposed to be absent; not common. BERRIEN, COLQUITT.

_ FI. September.

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States.

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION .OF GEORGIA 151

SCLEROLEPIS Cass., Bull. Soc. Philom. 1816: 198. 1816.

p. unifiora (Walt.) B. S. P., Prel. Cat. N. Y. 25. 1888; Porter,

Mem. Torrey Club 5:311. 1894.

Cypress and other ponds, mostly near the inland edge of the

neZION, WELCOX, COLQUITT, DECATUR. Fl. May-July.

Commoner in the Lower Oligocene region.

New Jersey to Florida and Alabama, in the coastal plain.

STOKESIA L’Her., Sert. Angl. 27, pl. 38. 1788.

S. levis (Hill) Greene, Erythea 1:3. 1893. (Figured in Meehan’s

Native Flowers and Ferns, 2: 49-52. pl. 13, 1879.)

DODGE: Moist pine-barrens near Suomi, Sept. 9, 1903 (1980);

past flowering. Not known elsewhere in Georgia.

South Carolina to Louisiana, in the pine-barrens.

ELEPHANTOPUS L., Sp. Pl. 814. 1753.

E. nudatus Grac, Proc. Am. Acad. 15:47. 1880.

TELFAIR: Rather dry pine-barrens near Lumber City, Sept. 11,

1903. BERRIEN: Low woods southwest of Tifton, Sept. 29,

nge2 (sce Pp) Ltr.) Also in Camden and Clinch Counties,

in the flat country.

Delaware to Florida and Arkansas, in the coastal plain.

VERNONIA Schreb., Gen. Pl. 2:541. 1791.

V. oligophylla Mx., Fl. 2:94. 1803.

TATTNALL: Flat pine-barrens near Collins (7002); sandy west

bank of Ohoopee River west of Reidsville, June 24, 1903. Fl.

June-July. Seen oncein Chatham County, once in Laurens,

and once in Sumter. Rare.

North Carolina to Florida, in the pine-barrens.

V. angustifolia Mx., Fl. 2:94. 1803.

Dry pine-barrens and sand-hills; common in all the pine-barren

region of Georgia. Also on the Pine Mountains of western

Middle Georgia (see Bull. Torrey Club 30: 294. 1903).

North Carolina to Florida, Arkansas, and Texas, mostly in the

coastal plain.

V. sp. (related to V. Noveboracensis, but probably undescribed).

COFFEE: Damp shady woods near Douglas (723, 1424). FI.

July—Sept.

152 HARPER

AMBROSIACE.

(All our species weeds.)

EVA is Spee Vell to8Sea rsa:

I. MICROCEPHALA Nutt., Trans. Am. Phil: Soc. 7:346. 1840.

A roadside weed, not common. TELFAIR (several stations), —

IRWIN (Fitzgerald), pEcatur. Fl. September. More com- —

mon in Dooly, Sumter, and Mitchell Counties, in the

Lower Oligocene region. Also in a few places east of ©

Okefinokee Swamp, and in Florida.

Natural range and habitat unknown.

AMBROSIA L., Sp. Pl. 987. 1753.

A. ARTEMISIZFOLIA L., Sp. Pl. 988. 1753. RAGWEED.

In streets or around dwellings. TATTNALL: Collins; BERRIEN:

Tifton. Fl. Aug.—Sept. Much commoner farther inland.

Widely distributed in North America, but natural range and —

habitat unknown.

XANTHIUM L., Sp. Pl. 987. 1753.

X. STRUMARIUM L., 1l.c. COCKLEBUR. 3

Streets of Tifton, Sept. 27, 1902. Very common farther in=§

land, where it is often a pest in cultivated fields.

Widely distributed in Eastern North America, but natural —

range and habitat unknown.

LOBELIACE.

LOBELIA L., Sp. Pl. 929. 1753.

L. cardinalis L., Sp. Pl. 930. 1753. (CarpinaL FLOWER)

COFFEE: Ocmulgee River swamp opposite Lumber City, Sept.

1, 1903. Fl. July—Sept. More common in the upper third

of the coastal plain.

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States, but wanting 1

over considerable areas. :

L. glandulosa Walt., Fl. Car. 218. 1788.

Moist pine-barrens, notrare. COFFEE, IRWIN, BERRIEN, WORTH ;

coLoguiTr (1663). Fl. Aug.—Oct. |

Virginia (?) to central Florida, in the pine-barrens.

L. flaccidifolia Small, Bull. Torrey Club 24:338. 1897.

Swamps of creeks and coastal plain (7. ¢., not muddy) rivers. —

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA Le)

TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, TELFAIR, COLQUITT (1676). FI.

June-July. Also just outside of our territory in Johnson

and Thomas Counties (discovered in the latter county by

Dr. Small).

Not definitely known outside of Georgia. See Bull. Torrey

Club 31:25. 1904.

L. Boykinii T. & G.; DC., Prodr. 7:374. 1839.

Cypress and other ponds, infrequent. COFFEE (2199), WILCOX

Fl. May-June. More common in the Lower Oligocene

region.

South Carolina to Florida, in the pine-barrens.

L. Nuttallii R. & S., Syst. 5:39. 1819.

Intermediate pine-barrens. EMANUEL (S14), COFFEE, IRWIN

(7418), COLQUITT, THOMAS. Inconspicuous, and doubtless

grows elsewhere in the region, where it has been overlooked.

Bi. June—July.

New Jersey to West Florida, mostly in the coastal plain.

CAMPANULACE 2.

SPECULARIA Heist.; Fabr. Enum. Pl. Hort. Helmst. 121. 1759.

©. PERFOLIATA (L.) A. DC., Mon. Camp. 351. 1830.

A weed along the streets of Nashville, May 6, 1904.

Widely distributed in North America, but natural range and

habitat unknown.

CAPRIFOLIACEZ.

LONICERA L., Sp. Pl. 173. 1753.

L. sempervirens L., 1. c. HonrysucKLte. WoopBINeE.

_ Wooded bluffs along the muddy rivers (see pp. 27, 102).

BULLOCH, MONTGOMERY. FI. April-June. Also along the

Flint and Chattahoochee Rivers in Southwest Georgia, and

the Oconee River in Middle Georgia.

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States west of New

England. Leaf-anatomy discussed by Kearney, Contr. U.S.

Nat. Herb. 5: 507,508. 1901.

VIBURNUM L., Sp. Pl. 267. 1753.

V. obovatum Walt., Fl. Car. 116. 1788.

Swamps of rivers originating north of our territory. SCREVEN:

154 HARPER

Ogeechee River; TATTNALL: Ohoopee River. Fl. March— 4

April. Known from quite a number of stations in the ~

Eocene and Lower Oligocene regions, also in Lowndes and

Charlton Counties, nearer the coast.

Virginia to central and Middle Florida, in the coastal plain.

V. rufotomentosum Small, Bull. Torrey Club 23:410. 1896. —

Brack Haw. ;

? V. rufidulum Raf., Alsog. Am. 56. 1838. (See Sarg.,

Silva) NE ae 242366) On OO25)

Bluffs and hammocks, along the rivers rising north of our

territory. EMANUEL: Little Ohoopee River; MONTGOMERY:

Oconee River; TELFAIR, COFFEE, WILCOX: Ocmulgee River.

Fl. April-May.

Widely distributed in Georgia and the other southeastern

states.

Ve nudum) Wop) bl 20sae urs 2:

Principally in branch-swamps; common throughout our

territory, and to some extent coastward, but not known in

the adjacent lime-sink region. Reappears near Americus

and at a few stations in Middle Georgia.

Long Island to Florida and Louisiana, and in a few interior

states.

V. nitidum Ait., Hort. Kew. 1:371. 1789.; Mohr, Contr, US's

Nat lerb. 0: 744. roo.

In similar places to the preceding, but usually in larger swamps

and much less common. BULLOCH (831), MONTGOMERY,

COFFEE, IRWIN, BERRIEN. Fl. April. (See Bull. Torrey

Club 30: 341. 1903.)

North Carolina to Florida and Mississippi, in the coastal plain.

SAMBUCUS L., Sp. Pl. 269. 1753.

5. CANADENSIS 1.71. ¢. ELDER.

TELFAIR: Low grounds along railroad near Helena, July 3, 1903.

Evidently not native. Common farther inland.

Widely distributed in Eastern North America, but its status as

a native has been questioned by Dr. Gray (Am. Nat. I: 493-

494. 1867) and is worth looking into.

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 155

RUBIACE.

GATIUM-L- Sp. Pla r05! 1753.

G. uniflorum Mx., Fl. 1:79. 1803.

In rich soil at the inland edge of our territory. wiLcox: Upper

Seven Bluffs; booty: Around lime-sink east of Wenona.

Fl. May. Not seen nearer the coast, but extends inland to

sumter, Glascock, and Clarke Counties (see Bull. Torrey

‘Club 27:340. 1900).

south Carolina to Texas.

G. hispidulum Mx., 1. c.

sand-hills and hammocks. BULLOCH (966), COFFEE, IRWIN,

THOMAS. Also farther inland.

New Jersey (?) to central Florida and Louisiana (?), in the

coastal plain.

Leaf-anatomy discussed by Kearney, Contr. U. S. Nat. Herb.

R500 5074 |. OO. TOOL.

G. pilosum Ait., Hort. Kew. 1:145. 1789.

Dry pine-barrens, etc. BULLOCH (947), TATTNALL, COLQUITT.

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States.

DIODIA L., Sp. Pl. 104. 1753.

Pe teres Walt., Fl. Car. 87. 1788.

Spermacoce hyssoptfolia J. E. Smith, Abbot’s Insects of Ga.

75. pl. 38. 1797.

One of our commonest roadside and railroad weeds. Grows

in dry exposed places all over the state. On Altamaha Grit

outcrops in TATTNALL possibly indigenous, Fl. May—Oct.

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States, but natural

range and habitat uncertain.

D. sp. (near D. Virginiana, but probably undescribed).

BERRIEN: Margin of shallow pine-barren pond near Tifton,

Sept. 26, 1902 (7052).

RICHARDIA L., Sp. Pl. 330. 1753.

PeOSCABRA L., l. c.

Streets of Collins, June 25, 1903. Common in cultivated ground

in Sumter, Lowndes, and some other counties in other parts

of the coastal plain.

A native of the tropics, naturalized in the coastal plain from

south Carolina to Florida and Mississippi.

(156 _HARPER

MITCHELLA L., Sp. Pl. 111. 1753.

M. repens L., 1. c. (PARTRIDGE BERRY.) :

Bluffs, hammocks, etc. TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, COFFEE, ~

WILCOX, BERRIEN. .

Common nearly throughout the Eastern United States.

CEPHALANTHUS L.., Sp. Pl. 95. 1753.

C. occidentalis L., 1. c. Button BusH. Button WILLOW.

In creek- and river-swamps and around deep ponds; usually ~

near permanent water. Grows in ponds near the Altamaha ~

Grit escarpment in SCREVEN, WORTH, and DECATUR, and in

the swamps of the Ogeechee, Ohoopee, Ocmulgee, and other —

large streams. Fl. all summer. .

Nearly throughout the Eastern United States and in: the

neighboring tropics.

PINCKNEYA Mx., Fl. 1: 105. pl. 13. 1803.

P. pubens Mx., l.c. ““Mar1pENn’s BuLusHEs.”’ “‘PERUVIAN.”’ (KEN- —

TUCKY MAGNOLIA).

Mussaenda bracteolata Bartr.; Humboldt, Ideen zu einer Geo- {

graphie der Pflanzen, 70. 1807. 4

Branch-swamps and sand-hill streams throughout. Fl. June-_

July. Wanting in the adjacent lime-sink region, but re-

appears at several points in and near Americus, the only —

stations known north of the Altamaha Grit escarpment. —

(See Bull. Torrey Club 2'7: 435. 1900; 32: 147. 1905.) Eaxaam

tends southeast to within 20 miles of the coast in Chatham 7

and Glynn Counties.

Ranges from extreme southern South Carolina to Middle ©

Florida. More abundant in the Altamaha Grit region than ~

in all the rest of its rangecombined. (See Torreya 5: 114. ©

1905).

HOUSTONIA L., Sp. Pl. 105. 1753.

H. longifolia Gaert., Fr. & Sem. 1: 226. pl. 49. 7. 8. 1788.

Bluffs, rock outcrops, etc., infrequent. TATTNALL, MONT- ~

GOMERY, COFFEE. Fl. May—Noy. More common farther

inland.

Widely distributed in Eastern North America north of lat. 32°.

s |

}

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 1a7/

-H. rotundifolia Mx., Fl. 1: 85. 1803.

Sand-hills and dry pine-barrens. SCREVEN, BULLOCH, MONT-

GOMERY, COFFEE, IRWIN, BERRIEN. Fl. Feb.—April. In-

land to Johnson and Stewart Counties.

South Carolina to central Florida and Louisiana, in the pine-

barrens.

OLDENLANDIA L., Sp. Pl. 119. 1753.

Oe anitiora L., |. c.

Moist or rather dry pine-barrens. COFFEE (7II), THOMAS.

Fl. Aug.Sept. Extends inland to Sumter County and

coastward to McIntosh.

Long Island to South Florida and Louisiana in the coastal

plain, mostly in the pine-barrens.

PLANTAGINACE.

PLANTAGO L., Sp. Pl 112. 1753.

IPARISTATA Mx., Fl. r : 95. 1803.

A weed in the streets of Collins and Fitzgerald. Fl. May—June.

More common in some of the older cities farther inland.

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States, perhaps

native westward.

BIGNONIACE/:.

TECOMA Juss., Gen. 139. 17809.

ie radicans (L). DC.; Prodr. 9 : 223. 1845. Cow Irtcu.

Rock outcrops in TATTNALL and creek- and river-swamps in

MONTGOMERY and coFFEE. Fl. May—Oct. More frequent

in Middle Georgia and the upper third of the coastal plain,

but there usually as a weed, particularly around fences and

stumps in fields.

Widely distributed in the Southeastern United States, but

natural range uncertain.

BIGNONIA L., Sp. Pl. 622. 1753.

~B. crucigera L., Sp. Pl. 624 (=B. capreolata L., 1. c.) Cross-

VINE.

Chiefly in creek-swamps, occasionally also along branches and

rivers. SCREVEN, BULLOCH, EMANUEL, MONTGOMERY, DODGE,

158 HARPER

COFFEE, BERRIEN, COLQUITT (1674). Fl. March-May. Far-

ther inland its habitat is more varied.

Nearly throughout the Southeastern United States except in

the mountains (and probably not common in Florida, as

it prefers shade). 4

OROBANCHACEZ.

CONOPHOLIS Wallr., Orob. 78. 1825.

C. Americana (L.) Wallr. 1. c. :

In rich woods along bluffs and ravines at the extreme inland —

edge of our territory, and not properly belonging to this flora. —

BULLOCH: Bluff along Ogeechee River near Echo (2097) 7

DECATUR: Ravine near Faceville (1933). Fl. March—April.

Occurs also a short distance south of our territory, in

Thomas County. More frequent in the Paleozoic, Cre-—

taceous, and Eocene regions, but not known in Middle

Georgia. ,

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States, but appar-—

ently wanting over considerable areas. 4

LENTIBULARIACEZ.

UTRICULARIA L., Sp. Pl. 18. 1753.

U. cornuta Mx., Fl. 1 : 12. 1803.

Moist pine-barrens. COFFEE, WILcox (abundant at several ‘

stations). Fl. May—July. Known also from Sumter, Early,

and Decatur Counties in the Lower Oligocene region.

From Newfoundland west to Minnesota and lowa in the

glaciated region, and south to central Florida (?) and

Louisiana in the coastal plain. (See Rhodora 7 : 76. 1905.)

U. juncea Vahl, Enum. 1 : 202. 1805.

Moist pine-barrens. DODGE, COFFEE (673), IRWIN, BERRIEN, —

DOOLY, coLquiTT. Fl. July—Sept. Inland to Sumter®™

County and coastward to Okefinokee Swamp and vicinity.

Long Island to central Florida and Texas (?), in the coastal.

plain. Also in the West Indies and South America.

U. subulata L., Sp. Pl. 18. 1753.

Moist pine-barrens and edges of branch-swamps, sand-hill bogs,

and rock outcrops. EMANUEL, TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY,

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 159

IRWIN, BERRIEN. FI. April-July. Inland to Sumter County.

Massachusetts to Florida, Arkansas, and Texas, in the coastal

plain. Also in the West Indies and South America.

U. macrorhyncha Barnhart Bull. Torrey Club, 25:515. 1808.

Moist pine-barrens. BULLOCH, MONTGOMERY, COFFEE, IRWIN,

BERRIEN. Fl. April-Sept. Inland to Sumter County.

Also in Florida and perhaps Alabama.

U. inflata Walt. Fl. Car. 64. 1788. MiILL-wHEEL (S. W. Ga.)

In small permanent ponds along the Altamaha Grit escarpment,

and therefore not properly belonging to our flora. scREVEN

(2086), witcox. Fl. March—July. More common in the

Lower Oligocene region.

Maine to Florida, Tennessee, and Texas, in the glaciated region

and coastal plain, but not always indigenous. (See Rhodora

We 70s 1905.)

PINGUICULA L., Sp. Pl.37. 1753.

P. lutea Walt., Fl. Car. 63. 1788.

Moist or rather dry (intermediate) pine-barrens. SCREVEN

(2085), BULLOCH (8359), EMANUEL. FI. April. Also in

Sumter County.

North Carolina to central Florida and Louisiana, in the pine-

barrens.

P. elatior Mx., Fl. r:11. 1803.

Moist pine-barrens. SCREVEN, BULLOCH, TATTNALL, MONT-

-GOMERY (2145), WILCOX, IRWIN, BERRIEN. Fl. March-May.

Not known farther inland, but extends down into the flat

country almost to the coast.

North Carolina to central Florida and Alabama (?), in the

pine-barrens.

P. pumila Mx., l. c.

Moist or rather dry pine-barrens. COFFEE (2192), BERRIEN.

Fl. April-May. Not noted elsewhere in the state, but it is

so inconspicuous that it is easily overlooked, especially

when not in flower.

South Carolina to central Florida and Louisiana, in the ,

pine-barrens.

—

160 HARPER

ACANTHACE.

RUELLIA L., Sp. Pl. 634. 1753.

(?) R. humilis Nutt., Trans. Am. Phil. Soc. I]. 5:182. 1834.

Dry pine-barrens and sand-hills, rare. BULLOCH, TATTNALL.

PS ftime:

West to Arkansas and Texas.

CALOPHANES D. Don: Sweet, Brit. Fl. Gard. I. pf. @paaeeema

C. oblongifolia (Mx.) Don, l. c.

Sand-hills and dry pine-barrens, not rare. BULLOCH, COFFEE,

WILCOX, BERRIEN. Fl. April-June. Extends inland to the

fall-line sand-hills of Richmond and Columbia Counties.

Virginia to Florida, in the coastal plain.

C. humistrata (Mx.) Shuttl.; Nees in DC. Prodr. 11: 108. 1847.

MONTGOMERY: Oconee River swamp near Mount Vernon. FI.

June. More abundant in the Ogeechee River swamp near

Millen, a few miles north of our territory.

Also reported from Florida.

SCROPHULARIACE.

BUCHNERA L., Sp. Pl. 630. 1753.

B. elongata Sw., Prodr. 92. 1788.

Dry pine-barrens; rather rare. BULLOCH, COFFEE. FI. May— —

Aug. Inland to Sumter County and coastward to Charlton. —

South Carolina to South Florida and Texas, in the coastal plain. —

Also in the West Indies and South America. (See notes

under Andropogon tener.) .

GERARDIA L., Sp. Pl. 610. 1753.

G. setacea Walt., Fl. Car. 170. 1788.

Chiefly in dry pine-barrens. APPLING, COFFEE (2012), IRWIN,

BERRIEN, COLQUITT (1658). Fl. Sept.—Oct. .

New Jersey to Florida and Texas, in the pine-barrens.

G. filifolia Nutt., Gen. 2:48. 1818

Dry pine-barrens and sand-hills. EMANUEL, TATTNALL, MONT-

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 161

GOMERY, TELFAIR, IRWIN, BERRIEN, WORTH, COLQUITT (1669).

Fl. Sept.Oct. Also in the flat pine-barren region, and in

Sumter County.

South to Florida, west to Louisiana (?), in the pine-barrens.

G. Skinneriana Wood, Class Book 408. 1847.

Normally in intermediate pine-barrens. COFFEE (704),

BERRIEN, WORTH, COLQUITT (1670). Fl. Sept.—Oct. Also

in Sumter County.

From Massachusetts west to Minnesota and Iowa in the

glaciated region, south to central Florida and Louisiana in

the coastal plain. (See Rhodora 7:75. 1905.)

G. paupercula [Gray] Britton, Mem. Torrey Club 5: 295. 1894.

Moist pine-barrens. IRWIN, BERRIEN, WORTH, CoLquiTT. FI.

Sept.Oct. Also a little outside of our territory in Dooly

and Thomas Counties.

Widely distributed in the glaciated region of the north, but

distribution southward not well worked out.

G. purpurea L., Sp. Pl. 610. 1753.

IRWIN: Moist pine-barrens in and near Fitzgerald, Oct. 4, 1902.

(7710). Fl. Sept—Oct. More frequent farther inland.

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States. Also in the

Bahamas (Northrop).

G. filicaulis [Benth.] Chapm., Fl. 299. 1860.

WORTH: Rather dry pine-barrens, more grassy than usual, near

Tyty, Sept. 30, 1902. (1698).

Known also from Florida and Louisiana.

G. aphylla Nutt., Gen. 2:47. 1818.

Intermediate and moist pine-barrens. COFFEE (703), IRWIN,

BERRIEN, WORTH, coLguiTT. Fl. Sept.—Oct. Also seen at

least once in the flat pine-barrens, in McIntosh County.

North Carolina (?) to northeastern Florida and Louisiana, im

4 the pine-barrens.

G. linifolia Nutt., Gen. 2:47. 1818.

Moist pine-barrens and shallow ponds, not common. TELFAIR,

APPLING, DOOLY, BERRIEN, COLQUITT, THOMAS. FI. Aug.—

162 HARPER

Sept. Inland to Sumter County and coastward to McIntosh

and Okefinokee Swamp and vicinity.

Delaware to Florida in the coastal plain, mostly in the pine-

barrens.

DASYSTOMA Raf., Jour. Phys. 89: 99.

D. pectinata (Nutt.) Benth. in DC. Prodr. tro:521. 1846.

Sand-hills and oak ridges. TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, COFFEE,

WILCOX, COLQUITT, BERRIEN. Fl. Aug.—Sept. Ranges in-

land to the mountains of Northwest Georgia (see Torreya

5:56. 1905), and sparingly coastward.

North Carolina to Florida and Arkansas, mostly in the coastal

1819.

plain.

AFZELIA J. F. Gmel., Syst. 2:927. 17091.

SEYMERIA Pursh. Fl. 736. 1814.

A. pectinata (Pursh) Kuntze, Rev. 2: 457. 1891.

Same habitat as the preceding, and often associated with it.

MONTGOMERY, COFFEE, BERRIEN, COLQUITT, THOMAS. FI.

Aug.—Sept.

*South Carolina to central Florida and Texas, in the coastal

plain.

A. cassioides (Walt.) Gmel., 1. c.

Seymeria tenurtjolia Pursh, Fl. 737. 1814.

Rather dry (especially if flat) or moist pine-barrens, or even on

rock outcrops, throughout our territory and to some extent

coastward. Fl. Aug. Sept.

North Carolina to central Florida and Texas, mostly in the

pine-barrens. Also in the Bahamas (Britton).

MACRANTHERA Torr.; Benth. in Hook. Comp. Bot. Mag.

Ls 2032) O35 <

Conrapia Nutt., Jour. Acad. Phila. 7:88. pl. rz, 12. 1834.

(Not Mart. 1829.)

M. fuchsioides (Nutt.) Torr., 1. c.

In branch-swamps, sometimes eight feet tall. IRWIN, BERRIEN,

WORTH, COLQUITT, THOMAS. FI. Sept.—Oct.

South to Florida and west to Louisiana, in the coastal plain.

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 163

VERONICA L., Sp. Pl. 9. 1753.

V.F PEREGRINA L., Sp. Pl. 14. 1753.

A weed in Swainsboro, April 6, 1904. More common in Middle

Georgia.

Widely distributed in the Northern Hemisphere, but natural

range and habitat unknown. Perhaps of European origin.

SCOPARIA L., Sp. Pl. 116. 1753.

Erememlers: I. loc.

A weed in the streets of Douglas, in rather damp soil. FI.

Aug.—Sept.

More common in similar situations nearer the coast (McIntosh,

Glynn, Camden, Lowndes, and Decatur Counties).

Georgia and Florida to Texas; also in the tropics, where it

probably originated.

ILYSANTHES Raf., Ann. Nat. 13. 1820.

I. refracta (Ell.) Benth. in DC. Prodr. 10: 418. 1846.

Usually in small branch-swamps and in moist places on rock

outcrops. TATTNALL, DODGE, COFFEE, IRWIN, DooLy. FI.

April-July. Also on damp rocks in Middle Georgia and the

mountains of Alabama (Mohr), and a weed in ditches along

railroads near Americus. Around mayhaw ponds and in

moist pine-barrens in Sumter and Lee Counties...

North Carolina to Mississippi.

1 GRATIOLOIDES (L.) Benth. in DC. Prodr. 10: 419. 1846.

BULLOCH: A weed along damp roadsides near Bloys, June 11,

Igol.

Widely distributed in the United States, Asia, and South

America. Natural range and habitat uncertain.

SOPHRONANTHE Benth.; Lindl., Intr. Nat. Syst. ed. 2, 445.

1836.

S. hispida Benth.,1.c.

Gratiola subulata Baldw.;Benth. in DC. Prodr. 10: 405. 1846.

Rather dry flat pine-barrens, and corresponding places on

sand-hills (see p. 89). TATTNALL, APPLING, .. COFFEE,

164 HARPER

(689, 1444). Fl. July—Sept. Also in similar places nearer

the coast, but not known farther inland.

South to central Florida, west to Louisiana, in the pine-barrens.

S. pilosa (Mx.) Small, Fl. 1067. 1903.

Gratiola pilosa Mx., Fl. 1:7. 1803.

Intermediate and moist pine-barrens. BULLOCH, MONTGOMERY,

DODGE, COFFEE, IRWIN, THOMAS, DECATUR. Fl. June—Aug.

Pretty widely distributed in the coastal plain, and also

occurring in Meriwether County with other coastal plain

plants. (See Bull. Torrey Club 30:294. 1903.)

New Jersey to central Florida and Texas, mostly in the coastal

plain. Also in the mountains of Alabama (Mohr).

GRATIOLA L., Sp. Pl. 17. 1753.

G. ramosa Walt., Fl. Car. 61. 1788.

G. quadridentata Mx., Fl. 1:6. 1803.

Small branch-swamps and shallow ponds. BULLOCH (840),

COFFEE, WILCOX, IRWIN, BERRIEN, DOOLY, COLQUITT. FI.

summer. Common in the Lower Oligocene region.

South Carolina to central Florida, in the pine-barrens.

G. spherocarpa Ell., Sk. 1:14. 1816.

BULLOCH: Wet woods near Bloys, June 15, 1901. FI. March—

April (in Middle Georgia, where it is more common).

New Jersey to Illinois, Florida, and Mexico.

MONNIERA P. Br., Hist. Jam. 269. pl. 28. f. 3. 1756.

M. Caroliniana (Walt.) Kuntze, Rev. 2: 463. 1891.

Herpestis amplexicaulis (Mx.) Pursh. Fl. 418. 1814.

BERRIEN: Shallow pond near Tifton, Oct. 2, r902. Fl. all

summer. Not seen nearer the coast, but common in the

Lower Oligocene region. Also occurs in a pond near Omaha,

Stewart Co., which is not far from the only station reported

for itin Alabama by Dr. Mohr. (See Contr. U.S. Nat. Herb.

6:722. 1901; Bull. Torrey Club 32: 457.) woosm)

Said to range from Maryland to Florida and Louisiana in the

coastal plain, but there are evidently some considerable

gaps in its known range.

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 165

PENTSTEMON Soland. in Ait. Hort. Kew. 3:511. 17809.

P. multiflorus Chapm.; Small, Fl. ro61. 1903.

APPLING: Dry sandy places around Big Pond, Sept. 12, 1903.

IRWIN: Sand-hills of Allapaha River (seen from train), Oct.

3, 1902. Fl. Aug.-Oct. Also occurs around the large ponds

of Decatur County, in the lime-sink region. Also in Florida.

P. pallidus Small, Fl. 1to60. 1903.

COFFEE: Moist hillside near Altamaha Grit outcrops along

Ocmulgee River opposite Lumber City, Sept. 11, 1903.

(See p. 113).

“New York to Missouri, Georgia, and the Indian Territory.”’

P. hirsutus (L.) Willd. Sp. Pl. 3: 227. 1801.

Normally in dry pine-barrens. BULLOCH (826), TATTNALL,

MONTGOMERY, COFFEE, WILCOX, BERRIEN. FI. April—June.

Common in Middle Georgia.

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States.

P. dissectus Ell., Sk. 2: 129. 1822.

On rock outcrops in TATTNALL (1856, 2158) and pooLy. Also

in sandy places in TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, and WILCOX

(2208), where the local geological conditions are imperfectly

understood. Fl. April-May. These are all the known

stations for this species. For additional notes on it see

Bull. Torrey Club 32: 166,167. 1905, Torreya, 5: 114. 1905.

LINARIA Juss., Gen. Pl. 120. 1789.

L. Floridana Chapm., Fl. 290. 1860.

Rosemary sand-hills in EMANUEL (976), and base of sand-hills

of Ohoopee River in TATTNALL. Evidently flowers early.

Known otherwise only from the coast of Alabama and West

Florida. (See Bull. Torrey Club 30:340. 1903.)

L. CanapDeEnsis (L.) Dumont, Bot. Cult. 2:96. 1802.

A weed, most frequent in cultivated fields. scREVEN, BUL-

LOCH, TATTNALL, BERRIEN. Fl. March-April. Common in

Middle Georgia.

Widely distributed in North America, but natural range and

habitat unknown.

ve Ne Oe

166 HARPER

VERBASCUM L., Sp. Pl. 177. 1753.

V. Tuapsus L., l. c. MULLEIN.

Seen only at Pitts, wiLcox Co., in 1902 and 1903. More com-

mon in long-settled regions.

Widely distributed in North America, also in Europe, where

it is perhaps native.

Vee DIATTARTA sys. Spay elton sm 75ae

Seen from a train at Ogeechee, SCREVEN Co., June 4, Igor.

Distribution similar to that of the preceding.

. LABIATA.

MESOSPH RUM P. Br., Hist. Jam. 257. 1756.

M. radiatum (Willd.) Kuntze, Rev. 525. 1891.

M. rugosum (L.) Pollard, not M. rugosum (Benth.) Kuntze.

Moist pine-barrens and edges of branch-swamps, often where

the Lafayette formation seems to be absent. DODGE,

APPLING, COFFEE, WILCOX, IRWIN, BERRIEN, DOOLY, WORTH,

COLQUITT, THOMAS. Fl. June-Aug. Not observed east of

the Oconee and Altamaha Rivers, but common west of

them, from Sumter County nearly to the coast.

North Carolina (?) to South Florida and Texas, in the coastal

plain. Also in the tropics.

PERILLA Ard.; lL. Gen. Pl ed. 6. Add. 57S eie7o@

P. FRUTESCENS (L.) Britton, Mem. Torrey Club 5:277. 1894.

TATTNALL: Roadside just west of the Ohoopee River near the

center of the county, June 24, 1903.

Native of Asia, naturalized (escaped?) in several places in the

Eastern United States.

LYCOPUS Li Spi iP aet ager

L. rubellus Moench, Meth. Suppl. 146. 1802.

COFFEE: Ocmulgee River swamp opposite Lumber City, Sept.

Ty, COOSA OO)

New York to Florida, Missouri, and Louisiana.

L. pubens Britton; Small, Fl. 1049. 1903.

Moist pine-barrens and shallow ponds. IRWIN, BERRIEN,

WORTH, COLQuiITT (1648). Fl. Sept.—Oct.

South to northeastern Florida, west to Mississippi (?), in the

pine-barrens.

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 167

KCELLIA Moench, Meth. 417. 1794.

K. hyssopifolia (Benth.) Britton, Mem. Torrey Club 5: 279. 1894.

In and near branch-swamps and shallow ponds. BULLOCH

(837), COFFEE.

Virginia (?) to Middle Florida and Louisiana (?), in the coastal

plain.

K. nuda (Nutt.) Kuntze, Rev. 2:520. 1891.

Intermediate and moist pine-barrens. COFFEE (680), IRWIN,

BERRIEN, COLQUITT.

Distribution not well understood. Originally described from

the *‘ mountains of Carolina and Georgia,” but now known

only from the pine-barrens of South Carolina, Georgia,

northern Florida, and Alabama.

DICERANDRA Benth., Bot. Reg. 15: (under pl. 1300). 1829.

D. odoratissima Harper, Bull. Torrey Club, 28: 479. pl. 29. f. 3.

TgOl.

(PLATE 18, Fic. 2.)

Sand-hills, particularly toward the hammocks at their bases.

BULLOCH (?), TATTNALL, COFFEE (695, type), WILCOX, BER-

RIEN (1695). FI. Sept.-Oct. Known otherwise only from

similar situations in Liberty, Pierce, and Ware Counties,

in the flat country. For additional notes see Bull. Torrey

Clubrsr-25. Toe4; 322166. 1905; Torreya5:114. 1905.

D. linearifolia (Ell.) Benth. in DC Prodr. 12: 243. 1848.

Habitat similar to that of the preceding. EMANUEL, MONT-

GOMERY, DODGE, IRWIN, BERRIEN (1699). Fl. Sept.—Oct.

All the flowering specimens I have seen in this region have

corollas colored like those of D. odoratissima (white with

purple spots), but elsewhere the normal color is pink-purple.

Common in dry pine-barrens in the lime-sink region, also

on the fall-line sand-hills in Taylor County, where Elliott

discovered it. (See Bull. Torrey Club 31:12. 1904.)

Known also from the pine-barrens of Florida (?) and Alabama.

CLINOPODIUM L.,Sp. Pl. 587. 1753.

Our species shrubs.

C. Georgianum Harper, Bull. Torrey Club 33: 243. 1906.

C. Carolinianum (Mx.) Heller, Cat. 7. 1898; not Mill., 1768.

168 HARPER

MONTGOMERY: Bluff along Oconee River near Ochwalkee.

poDGE: Hammock of Gum Swamp Creek east of Eastman.

Fl. Sept._Oct. More common in the upper parts of the

coastal plain, and in Middle Georgia.

North Carolina (?) to Florida (River Junction) and Mississippi

(?), in the Piedmont region and coastal plain.

C. coccineum (Nutt.) Kuntze, Rev. 2:515. 1891.

Sand-hills and sand-hammocks. EMANUEL (981), TATTNALL

(seen once), MONTGOMERY (1872). Flowers all summer,

and perhaps throughout the year.

Known otherwise only from West Florida and southwestern

Alabama.

SALVIA: lL. Sp. cPh, 2as mses

S. lyrata L., 1. c.

Dry pine-barrens, etc.; not common. BULLOCH, TATTNALL,

MONTGOMERY, WILCOX, DooLY. FI. April-May. Also in

Middle Georgia.

New Jersey to Missouri, central Florida, and Texas.

S. azurea Lam., Jour. Nat. Hist. 1: 409. 1792.

Dry pine-barrens and sand-hills. COFFEE, IRWIN, BERRIEN

(7705), WORTH, coLguiTT. Fl. Sept.—Oct. Also inland to

Middle Georgia.

South Carolina to Florida (?), Arkansas and Texas.

PHYSOSTEGIA Benth., Lab. 504. 1834.

P. denticulata (Ait.) Britton, Mem. Torrey Club 5: 284. 1894.

Moist pine-barrens, mostly near creeks. BULLOCH (891),

TATTNALL, COFFEE. Fl. June, July.

Virginia to central Florida and Texas (?) in the coastal plain.

SCUTELLARIA L., Sp. Pl. 598. 1753.

S. multiglandulosa [Kearney] Small; Harper, Bull. Torrey Club

217 33.0. OOO.

Dry pine-barrens. BULLOCH ($22), EMANUEL, WILCOX, IRWIN,

DECATUR. Fl. May—June.

Also in Middle Georgia, Florida, and perhaps Alabama.

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 169

S. integrifolia L., Sp. Pl. 599. 1753.

BULLOCH: Edge of branch-swamp near Bloys, June 15, 1gor.

(585).

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States.

S. pilosa Mx., Fl. 2:11. 1803.

MONTGOMERY: Dry woods along Oconee River near Mount

Vernon, June 29, 1903. Also in Middle Georgia.

Range about the same as that of the preceding.

S. Mellichampii Small, Fl. 1022. 1903.

MONTGOMERY: Bluff along Oconee River near Ochwalkee,

July 1, 1903. Also occurs on the same side of the same

river near Dublin, in the next county above.

Known otherwise only from the type-locality in the southern

corner of South Carolina.

S. lateriflora L., Sp. Pl. 598. 1753.

COFFEE: Ocmulgee River swamp opposite Lumber City, Sept.

II, 1903. |

Widely distributed east of the Rocky Mountains.

TRICHOSTEMA L., Sp. Pl. 598. 1753.

T. lineare Nutt., Gen. 2:39. 1818.

sand-hills, dry pine-barrens, and rock outcrops. DODGE,

COFFEE, IRWIN (2703), DOOLY, coLguiTT. Fl. Aug.—Oct.

Also in Middle Georgia.

Connecticut to Florida, Arkansas, and Louisiana.

VERBENACE 2.

CALLICARPA L., Sp. Pl. 111. 1753.

C. Americana L.,1.c. FrencH MULBERRY.

Hammocks, river-bluffs, etc., BULLOCH, TATTNALL, MONT-

GOMERY, DODGE, WILCOX, COFFEE, BERRIEN. Fl. June—

July. Grows nearly all over Georgia, but only as a ruderal

plant in some places.

Ranges nearly throughout the Southeastern United States

except in the higher mountains.

VERBENA L., Sp. Pl. 18. 1753.

V. carnea Med.; Schauer in DC. Prodr. 11:545. 1847. (See

Bull. Torrey Club 33: 242. 1906.)

170 HARPER

V. Carolina, Caroliniana, and Carolinensis of authors.

Sand-hills and dry pine-barrens.

GOMERY, COFFEE, BERRIEN,

Also farther inland.

North Carolina to central Florida and Mexico (?), in the

coastal plain.

V SBRACTHOSA, Mx. El. 42 4137 0802,

A roadside weed.

May-—Aug.

British Columbia to Florida. Perhaps native on the prairies,

where Michaux discovered it.

EMANUEL, TATTNALL, MONT-

coLquiTr. Fl. April=yuig

EMANUEL: Graymont; wiLcox: Pitts. FI.

BORRAGINACE 2.

BATSCHIA Gmel. Syst. 2 :315. 17091.

B. Carolinensis (Walt.) Gmel., 1. c. (See Bull. Torrey Club,

siehe aysting 10lel)

Lithos permum hirtum Lehm., Asperif. 305. 1818.

L. Gmelint (Mx.) Hitchcock, Spring Fl. Manh. 30. 1894.

BERRIEN: Sand-hills of Allapaha River (21789). Fl. April—

June. Also extends inland to the fall-line sand-hills, but

not common in Georgia.

Widely scattered east of the Rocky Mountains, but distribution

not well understood.

ONOSMODIUM Mx., Fl. 1: 132. 1803.

O. Virginianum (L.) A. DC., Prodr. 10:70. 1846; Mackenzie,

Bull, Torrey Club, .32):\407—4902, 2005.

BERRIEN: With the preceding, May 5, 1904; also in dry

pine-barrens near Tifton. Irwin: Dry pine-barrens near

Fitzgerald. Fl. May—June. Also inland to Middle Georgia.

Connecticut to Florida and Louisiana, mostly in the coastal

plain and Piedmont region.

SOLANACE/.

All our species weeds.

SOLANUM L., Sp. Pl. 184. 1753.

S. NIGRUM L., Sp. Pl. 186. 1753.

BULLOCH: Near Bloys, June 12, Igor.

Cosmopolitan, but natural range and habitat unknown.

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA Gil

©. CAROLINENSE L., Sp. Pl. 187. 1753.

A weed in the streets of our three largest cities, Fitzgerald,

Tifton and Moultrie. Fl. May—Oct. Very common in the

upper parts of the state.

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States, but natural

range and habitat unknown.

S. ROSTRATUM Dunal, Sol. 234. pl. 24. 1813.

Around dwellings, etc. EMANUEL: Graymont; wILcox: Pitts,

Queensland.

Introduced from the western plains.

DATURA L., Sp. Pl. 179. 1753. “‘Jimson WEED.”

WeebArunA op. Pl ed; 2,256) 1762.

Near dwellings. MONTGOMERY: Ailey; WiILcox: Queensland.

Common in the older-settled parts of the state.

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States, also in

South America, where it probably originated.

D. StrRamonium L., Sp. Pl. 179. 1753.

BULLOCH: Near Bloys, June 12, 1901. Much rarer in the

South than the preceding, but said to be more widely dis-

tributed in the tropics. It may be doubted whether these

two forms are specifically distinct. (See Tully, Am. Jour.

wet. ©:5254—258. 1823). Perhaps DD. Tatula its a native

of the New World and D. Stramonium of the Old World.

POLEMONIACE.

PALO Ep eel rsh. 1753.

P. subulata L., Sp. Pl. 152. 1753. (Including P. Hentzi Nutt.)

Dry pine-barrens, sand-hills, etc.; frequent but not abundant.

BULLOCH (827), EMANUEL, TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, COFFEE,

WILCOX, IRWIN, BERRIEN. Fl. March—June. Inland to Mid-

dle Georgia.

New York to Michigan and Georgia.

P. amoeena Sims, Bot. Mag. 31: pl. 1308. 1810. (Including

P. Waltert (Gray) Chapm. and P. Lighthipet Small.)

Dry pine-barrens. BULLOCH (2163), COFFEE, WILcox. FI.

April-June. Frequent in Middle Georgia.

Widely distributed in the Southeastern United States.

172 HARPER

CUSCUTACE.

CUSCUTA L.; Sp: Pll req: 9752:

C. indecora Choisy, Mem. Soc. Genev. 9: 278. pl. 3. f. 5. 1841.

CoLguITT: On a considerable variety of herbs, in moist pine-

barrens, at two or three places near Moultrie (1650.) FI.

September. Not seen elsewhere in Georgia.

Ranges mostly westward, but distribution not well workedi out.

C. compacta Juss., Choisy, 1.c.9: 281. pl. 4.7.2. 1841. LOVE VINE.

On shrubs, mostly in swamps. DOOLY, COFFEE, BERRIEN,

coLguitT. Fl. September. Pretty well distributed over

the state, perhaps less common eastward.

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States, but probably

not everywhere native.

CONVOLVULACEZ.

BREWERIA R. Br., Prodr. 1 : 487. 1810.

B. humistrata (Walt.) Gray, Syn. Fl. 2 :217. 1878.

Dry pine-barrens, sand-hills, etc. BULLOCH, TATTNALL, MONT-

GOMERY, COFFEE, IRWIN, BERRIEN, COLQUITT. Fl. May—Sept.

Inland to Middle Georgia (see Bull. Torrey Club 27: 328.

1900) and coastward to Cumberland Island. Varies con-

siderably in the width of its leaves.

Virginia to Florida and Louisiana, mostly in the coastal plain.

B. aquatica (Walt.) Gray, l.c.

Around shallow ponds (not cypress ponds. See p. 79).

BULLOCH, IRWIN, BERRIEN, coLquiTT. Fl. June—July.

More common in the Lower Oligocene region.

Virginia (?) to central Florida and Texas (?), in the coastal

plain; but the only Alabama station reported by Dr. Mohr

is in the Paleozoic region. There are evidently some sur-

prising gaps in its known range.

DICHONDRA Forst., Char. Gen. Pl. 39. pl. 4o. 1776.

D. Carolinensis Mx., Fl. 1 : 136. 1803.

TELFAIR: Ocmulgee River swamp near Lumber City, Sept. 11,

1903. Not free from the suspicion of being introduced. In

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 173

Sumter and Thomas Counties, outside of our territory, I have

seen it in places where it cannot possibly be indigenous.

Said to range from Virginia to Florida and Texas in the coastal

plain, and throughout the tropics.

ASCLEPIADACE&.

ANANTHERIX Nutt., Gen. 1: 169. 1818.

A. connivens (Baldw.) Feay; Wood, Class-Book, 594. 1861.

Moist pine-barrens, rather rare. (See Bull. Torrey Club,

31:24, 25. 1904.) COFFEE (1420), IRWIN, BERRIEN, DOOLY,

coLtguitT. Fl. July. Also nearer the coast in Charlton

and Lowndes Counties, and in central Florida, but not known

farther inland.

ASCLEPIAS L., Sp. Pl. 214. 1753.

A. cinerea Walt., Fl. Car. 105. 1788.

Dry or intermediate pine-barrens, frequent throughout, but

nowhere abundant. Fl. June-July. Inland to Johnson,

Dooly, and Lee Counties, and coastward nearly to the south-

eastern corner of the state.

South Carolina to central Florida, in the pine-barrens.

A. Michauxii Decne. in DC. Prodr. 8: 569. 1844.

Intermediate pine-barrens; scarce; rarely more than one or

two specimens visible at a time. BULLOCH, BERRIEN. FI.

April-June.

South Carolina to northeastern Florida and Mississippi, in the

pine-barrens.

A. verticillata L., Sp. Pl. 217. 1753.

Dry pine-barrens; rather rare. EMANUEL, MONTGOMERY. More

common farther inland, almost anywhere in the upper parts

of the state, where it flowers all summer.

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States.

Root-anatomy discussed by W. E. Britton, Bull. Torrey Club

30 : 608-609. 1903.

A. perennis Walt., Fl. Car. 107. 1788.

MONTGOMERY: Oconee. River swamp near Mount Vernon,

June 27, 1903. More common in similar situations in the

174 HARPER

Lower Oligocene region, where it flowers from May to August.

Seen once on the St. Mary’s River near Traders Hill.

South Carolina to Florida, Mississippi, Indiana, Arkansas, and

Texas, mostly in the coastal plain.

A. lanceolata Walt., Fl. Car. 107. 1788.

Edges of branch- and creek-swamps. TELFAIR, COFFEE, IRWIN,

DOOLY. June-Aug. Pretty widely distributed through the

pine-barrens of Georgia, but nowhere abundant.

New Jersey to central Florida and Texas, in the pine-barrens.

A vatiesata ly op. Pl ers. an 7 530

WILcox: Upper Seven Bluffs on the Ocmulgee River, May 17,

1904. Hardly belongs to our flora. More common in the

upper third of the coastal plain, and in Middle Georgia,

where it flowers in May and June. Also reported from

Thomas County, just south of our territory (Mrs. Taylor).

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States south of lat. 41°

QE ANTS) TO), 1G")

A. humistrata Walt., Fl. Car. 105. 1788.

A. amplexicaulis Mx., Fl. 1: 115. 1803. (Notof J. E. Smith.)

Sand-hills and very dry pine-barrens; not abundant. BULLOCH

(833), TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, WILCOX, IRWIN, BERRIEN.

Fl. April-June. Pretty well distributed over South Georgia,

but scattered, and probably not always indigenous. (For

morphological notes see Bull. Torrey Club 30 : 339. 1903.)

North Carolina to central Florida and Mississippi, in the

coastal plain.

A. tuberosa Wo. op. Ely 2r7een 753:

Dry pine-barrens and sand-hills; not common. BULLOCH,

MONTGOMERY, COFFEE. Fl. May—Sept. More common in

Middle and Southwest Georgia.

Widely distributed east of the Rocky Mountains, but often

only a weed.

PODOSTIGMA Ell., Sk. 1: 326. 1817.

STYLANDRA Nutt., Gen. 1: 170. 1818.

P. pedicellata (Walt.) Vail; Small, Fl. 939. 1903.

P. pubescens EIl., 1..c.

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 175

Ss Peniila Nitti: Ihe:

Anantherix aol INibtaaehrancKeAm|,) Pini: Soc. in 5:

1834.

Rather dry flat pine-barrens; rare. Collected once in corFEE

County, July 24, 1902. (1442), A single specimen seen

about a month later in Camden County, near the coast.

Elliott reported it also from Effingham County.

North Carolina to central Florida, in the pine-barrens.

APOCYNACE.

TRACHELOSPERMUM Lemaire, Jard. Fleur. 1: pl. 67. 1851.

T. difforme (Walt.), Gray, Syn. Fl. 2:85. 1878.

Only in swamps of streams rising north of our territory.

Along the Ohoopee River in TATTNALL near Ohoopee, and

the Ocmulgee in TELFAIR and COFFEE near Lumber City. FI.

June. Also seen along the Ogeechee River near Millen, a

few miles outside of our limits, and to be expected farther

down the same river.

Delaware to Florida (River Junction), West Tennessee, and

_ Mexico, nearly confined to the coastal plain.

AMSONIA Walt., Fl. Car. 98. 1788.

A. rigida Shuttl.; Small, Fl. 935. 1903.

Shallow ponds. BERRIEN: Near Allapaha (also collected

there by Curtiss); cotquitt; Near Moultrie. Fl. May.

More commoninthe Lower Oligocene region, particularly

around mayhaw ponds.

Has been collected also in Florida.

A. ciliata Walt., 1. c.

Dry pine-barrens; not common. MONTGOMERY, WILCOX,

pooty. Fl. April-May. More frequent in the Lower

Oligocene region.

North Carolina to Florida, Arkansas, and Texas, in the coastal

plain.

A. tenuifolia Raf., New Fl. N. A. 4:58. 1836.

(?) A. ciliata filtjolia Wood, Class-Book, 589. 1861.

Sand-hills and very dry pine-barrens, more rarely on rocks.

176 ) HARPER

BULLOCH (915), EMANUEL, TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, DODGE,

TELFAIR, COFFEE. Fl. April-May. Extends inland to Lau-

rens and Dooly Counties, and coastward to near Waycross.

Total range unknown. Ido not regard this plant as specifically

distinct from the preceding, but to treat it as a variety would

necessitate an increase in the number of synonyms. (See

Bull. Tertey -Ciub: 334240, 241. 7) 1906))

MENYANTHACEA.

LIMNANTHEMUM 5S. G. Gmel., Nov. Act. Petrop. 14 : 527. pl.

Eig Pie 7lOYS)-

L. aquaticum (Walt.) Britton, Trans. N. Y. Acad. Sci. 9: 12. 1889.

L. trachyspermum (Mx.) Gray, Man. ed. 5. 390. 1867.

Scarcely belongs to our flora. Grows ina pond at the extreme

edge of the region, in wiLtcox County near Queensland, and

in ditches in MONTGOMERY and TATTNALL. Fl. summer.

Delaware to South Florida and Texas, in the coastal plain

(but not reported from Alabama). Probably introduced

in many places where it has been mistaken for a native (see

Rhodora 7:78. 1905).

GENTIANACE.

BARTONIA Muhl.; Willd., Neue Schrift. Ges. Nat. Fr. Berlin

26s 4 44a LAO:

B. lanceolata Small, Fl. 932. 1903.

(?) B. tenella brachiata Wood, Class-Book 586. 1861. (See

Bull. Torrey Club 33:240. 1906.)

Moist and intermediate pine-barrens; not abundant. APPLING,

COFFEE, IRWIN, COLQUITT, THOMAS, DECATUR. FI. July—

Oct. Also in the Eocene and Lower Oligocene regions.

Range not fully worked out. Confined to the coastal plain,

or nearly so.

SABBATIA Adans., Fam. 2 : 503. 1763.

S. gentianoides Ell., Sk. 1: 286. 1817.

Moist pine-barrens at two or three places in COFFEE County;

rare. Said to have been discovered in BuLLocH. Fl. July—

Aug. Also occurs in Sumter, Lee, and Charlton Counties,

but nowhere abundant.

Reported also from northeastern and northwestern Florida.

Ss.

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA Way

decandra (Walt.) Harper, Bull. Torrey Club 27 : 432. 1900.

In and around cypress ponds; not common. TATTNALL,

COFFEE, IRWIN, BERRIEN, COLQUITT. FI. July-Aug. Also

in similar situations in Sumter, Ware, and Charlton Counties.

Known also from several stations in northern Florida.

wrolosa Hernald,:Bot.. Gaz. 33-2155. 1902.

(Including S. Harpert Small, Fl. 928. 1903.)

Chiefly in creek-swamps. BULLOCH (964), EMANUEL, TATTNALL,

MONTGOMERY (1566), DODGE, TELFAIR, COFFEE, WILCOX,

IRWIN, DOOLY, COLQUITT, THOMAS. FI. June-Aug. Also in

Johnson, Dodge, Early, and Decatur Counties in the Lower

Oligocene region, and in Ware, Charlton, and Camden in the

flat country. (For additional notes see Bull. Torrey Club

30 : 338, 339. 1903.)

South Carolina to Florida and Alabama, in the pine-barrens.

. campanulata (L.) Torr., Fl. N. & Mid. U.S. rary. 1824.

Secraciis (Mx) Sal., Parad: Lond: pl. 32.1806.

Moist pine-barrens, shallow (not cypress) ponds, and margins

of creek-swamps. BULLOCH (963), EMANUEL, TATTNALL,

MONTGOMERY, TELFAIR, COFFEE, WILCOX, BERRIEN, COLQUITT.

Fl. June-Aug. Also in Sumter and Charlton Counties.

Massachusetts (?) to central Florida and Louisiana, mostly in

the coastal plain. Also in the Bahamas (Northrop).

. Elliottii Steud., Nomencl. ed. 2. 2: 489. 1841.

Boa ponieuaa (ix) Pursh Bll Ski 2: 282) 1817.

Normally in intermediate pine-barrens. APPLING, COFFEE

(6ST), IRWIN, BERRIEN, coLguiTT. Fl. Sept.—Oct. Not

known farther inland, but common in the flat country toward

the coast.

Virginia (?) to central Florida, in the pine-barrens.

paniculata (Mx.) Pursh, Fl. 138. 1814.

Dry pine-barrens; rare. EMANUEL (990), TELFAIR, WILCOX.

Fl. June-Aug. Alsoin Washington, Sumter, and Lee Coun-

ties in the Lower Oligocene region.

Virginia to Florida, in the pine-barrens.

178 HARPER

S. lanceolata (Walt.) T. & G.; Gray, Man. 356. 1848.

S. corymbosa Baldw.; Ell., Sk. 1: 283. 18127.

Moist pine-barrens. BULLOCH (856), TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY,

TELFAIR, DODGE, COFFEE, WILCOX, IRWIN, BERRIEN, WORTH,

cotguitt. Fl. June-July. Alsoin Chatham and Bryan

Counties, in the flat country.

New Jersey to central and northwestern Florida, in the pine-

barrens.

S. macrophylla Hook., Comp. Bot. Mag. 1:171. 1835.

Moist pine-barrens, particularly near branch-swamps. EMAN-

UEL, TELFAIR, COFFEE, WILCOX, IRWIN (I4I5), BERRIEN.

Fl. July. Also near Americus. Sometimes difficult to

distinguish from the preceding.

South to northern Florida, west to Louisiana, in the coastal

plain.

LOGANIACEZ.

GELSEMIUM Juss., Gen. 150. 1789.

G. sempervirens (L.) Ait. f., Hort. Kew. ed. 2) 2) sio7ipeaaeenme

YELLOW JESSAMINE.

Bluffs, hammocks, rock outcrops, etc. SCREVEN, EMANUEL,

TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, COFFEE, DOOLY. Fl. March. Fre-

quent from Middle Georgia to the coast.

Widely distributed over the Southeastern United States ex-

cept in the mountains.

Leaf-anatomy studied by Kearney, Contr. U. S. Nat. Herb.

5 2505. Igot.

SPIGELIA L., Sp. Pl. 149. 1753.

S. Marilandica L., Syst. ed. 12. 734. 1767. (PINK-ROOT.)

Bluffs along the muddy rivers. MONTGOMERY: Stallings’

Bluff; correr: Barrow’s Bluff; witcox: Upperpocuer

Bluffs (2209). Fl. May. More common farther inland,

all the way to the mountains.

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States, but wanting

over considerable areas.

CYNOCTONUM J. F. Gmel., Syst. 2: 443. r791.

C. Mitreola (L.) Britton, Mem. Torrey Club 5 :258. 1894.

Mitreola petiolata (Walt.) T. & G.

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 179

BERRIEN: Low woods west of Tifton, where the Lafayette

‘formation is presumably absent, Sept. 30, 1902. (See

p. 11z.) In Sumter County I have seen it in a very similar

place, with some of the same associates.

Virginia to South Florida, Tennessee, and Mexico, mostly in

the coastal plain. Also in the West Indies and South

America.

C. sessilifolium (Walt.) Gmel., 1. c.

CoFFEE: Seen only once in moist pine-barrens, Douglas, July

21, t902. Grows also in Pike (see Bull. Torrey Club

30 : 294), Sumter, and Charlton Counties.

North Carolina to central Florida and Louisiana, in the coastal

plain, with the above-mentioned exception.

POLYPREMUM L., Sp. Pl. 112. 1753.

P. PROCUMBENS L., l. c.

A weed in dry or damp sandy soil. TATTNALL: Collins;

COFFEE: Douglas. More common in older settled regions,

from Middle Georgia to the coast. Fl. all summer.

Pennsylvania to South Florida and Texas. Also in the West

Indies and Mexico, where it is perhaps native.

OLEACEZ.

OSMANTHUS Lour., Fl. Cochin. pl. 28. 1790.

O. Americanus (L.) Gray, Syn. Fl. 2:78. 1878. (DEvi~t Woop.)

One of the most characteristic small trees of hammocks. Also

occasionally on bluffs or in non-aliuvial swamps. Some-

times nearly a foot in diameter and 30 feet tall. EMANUEL,

TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, DODGE, TELFAIR, COFFEE, WILCOX,

BERRIEN, COLQUITT. Ranges inland to Stewart County and

coastward to theislands. Inthe Eocene region (particularly

in Randolph County) its usual habitat is shady ravines.

North Carolina to Florida and Louisiana, strictly confined to

the coastal plain.

CHIONANTHUS L., Sp. Pl. 8. 1753.

C. Virginica L., 1. c. GRAYBEARD.

On bluffs along the large rivers in MONTGOMERY and WILCOX.

180 HARPER

Also in woods where the Lafayette formation is supposed to

be absent in BERRIEN a few miles west of Tifton, and around

the Rock House in pooty. More common farther inland,

flowering in April and May in Middle Georgia.

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States south of

the glaciated region.

Leaf-anatomy studied by Kearney, Contr. U. S. Nat. Herb.

5 2504-505. Igo. .

ADELIA P.' Br: Hist. jam 4or aco

A. acuminata Mx., Fl. 2:225. pl. 48. 1803.

Swamps of the muddy rivers. Noted along the Ogeechee near

Rocky Ford, the Oconee near Mount Vernon, and the

Ocmulgee near Lumber City. A large shrub, but scarcely

arborescent. Extends up the Savannah and Flint Rivers

to the fall-line; coastward limit not known.

South Carolina to Tennessee, Illinois, Missouri, and Texas, in

the coastal plain.

FRAXINUS L:, Sp: Pl r0s7. 17530) shee

F. Caroliniana Mill., Gard. Dict. ed. 8. 1768. (No. 6).

Swamps of all our creeks and rivers, muddy or otherwise;.

common. A small tree or oftener a shrub. Pretty widely

distributed over South Georgia.

Virginia to Florida, Arkansas, and Texas, in the coastal plain.

STYRACACE.

STYRAX: Ly “Spee 44d uy cee

S. grandifolia Ait., Hort. Kew. 2:75. 1780.

Sandy banks of rivers, etc. TATTNALL (215/), COFFEE (1992),

BERRIEN. Fl. April-May. Extends inland to the fall-lme

_ sand-hills in Richmond County (A. Cuthbert). Also in the

vicinity of Thomasville (Mrs. Taylor).

Southeastern Virginia to northeastern Florida and Louisiana,

in the coastal plain.

Leaf-anatomy described by Kearney, Contr. U.S. Nat. Herb.

5: 504. Igor.

S. pulverulenta Mx., Fl. 2:41. 1803.

Wet pine-barrens; not common. BULLOCH: near Bloys (gor)

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 181

and Statesboro; IRWIN: near Fitzgerald. Fl. April.

Virginia to Florida, Arkansas, and Texas, in the coastal plain.

MOHRODENDRON Britton, Gard. & For. 6: 463. 1893.

M. dipterum (L.) Britton, 1. c.

Inhammocks; ratherrare. COFFEE, BERRIEN. More common

in the upper third of the coastal plain, on sandy river-banks,

extending inland to Stewart County atleast. Fl. spring. A

small tree.

South Carolina to West Florida and Louisiana, in the coastal

plain.

SYMPLOCACE.

SYMPEOCOS L., Sp. Pl. ed. 2. 747. 1763.

Seeuimectoria (IL) WU Mer, Trans. linn. Soc) I 2176. 1791.

Hammocks, bluffs, and rock outcrops. EMANUEL, TATTNALL,

MONTGOMERY, DOOLY, BERRIEN. Fl. March-April. Only

a shrub in our territory. Ranges nearly all over Georgia,

but can hardly be called common.

Widely distributed over the Eastern United States between

latitudes 30° and 309°.

Leaf-anatomy described by Kearney, Contr. U.S. Nat. Herb.

5 3503-504. 1901.

SAPOTACE.

BUMELIA Sw., Prodr. 49. 1788.

B. lanuginosa (Mx.) Pers., Syn. 1: 237. 1805.

COFFEE: Sand-hills of Seventeen Mile Creek; witcox: Ham-

mock of House Creek. Pretty well distributed over South

Georgia, but not common.

South to South Florida, and west to Missouri, Kansas, and

Texas, mostly in the coastal plain. —

B. reclinata Vent., Choix. 22. 1803.

B. lycioides reclinaia Gray, Syn. Fl. 2:68. 1878.

TATTNALL: Sand-hills of Ohoopee River (1851) and Rocky

Creek; MONTGOMERY: Very dry pine-barrens on both sides

of the Oconee River near Mount Vernon and Ochwalkee.

Fl. spring.

Reported also from Florida and Louisiana (but not Alabama).

182 HARPER

EBENACEZ.

DIOSPYROS L., Sp. Pl. 1057. 1753.

D. Virginiana L., 1.c. ‘“‘PERsIMMON.”’

Usually in dry pine-barrens, but also in swamps and shallow

(not cypress) ponds and on sand-hills. SCREVEN, TATTNALL,

MONTGOMERY, TELFAIR, COFFEE, IRWIN, BERRIEN. FI.

spring. Never very large in our territory, and in dry pine-

barrens usually only a shrub. (Perhaps does not fruit in

that condition.) Common nearly all over Georgia. This

has perhaps the greatest adaptability to different habitats

of any North American tree. It seems equally at home in

the maritime counties and in the mountains, in ponds and

lime-sinks and on sand-hills, in old fields and in creek-

bottoms. It is liable to turn up almost anywhere within its

climatic limits, perhaps on account of the readiness with

which its seeds are transported by small quadrupeds.

Ranges nearly throughout the Eastern United States south of

latitude 41°.

VACCINIACE.

VACCINIUM L., Sp. Pl. 349. 1753.

V. nitidum Andr., Bot. Rep. 7: pl. 480. 1807. “GOPHER BERRY.”

(Perhaps including V. Myrsinites Lam.)

Dry and intermediate pine-barrens and low places in sand-

hills. BULLOCH, TELFAIR, APPLING, COFFEE, BERRIEN,

THoMAS. FI. spring. Common in the flat pine-barrens

toward the coast. Evergreen.

South to central Florida.

V. spp.

One or two larger species (deciduous) grow in sandy places

along the Ohoopee River in Tattnall County. One was

observed with ripe fruit June 26, 1903, and another in the

same condition April 26, 1904.

BATODENDRON Nutt., Trans. Am. Phil. Soc. II. 8: 261. 1843.

B. arboreum (Marsh) Nutt., 1. c. “SPARKLEBERRY.’’

Hammocks, sand-hills, and bluffs; common. Often associated

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 183

with Osmanthus. Fl. May. A large shrub, often tree-

like. Pretty well distributed over the state, with consider-

able variation in habitat. In Middle Georgia it grows both

on sandy river-banks and rocky mountain-summits.

Widely distributed in the Southeastern United States.

Leaf-anatomy studied by Kearney, Contr. U. S. Nat. Herb.

5 2502-503. Igor.

POLYCODIUM Raf., Am. Month. Mag. 2:266. 1818.

P. cesium Greene, Pittonia 3 :325. 1898. ‘“‘GOOSEBERRY.”’

Ssand-hills and dry pine-barrens; common. Fl. April. A

low shrub, rarely over two feet tall. Pretty widely distributed

in the pine-barrens of Georgia, also in South Carolina and

Florida.

P. revolutum Greene, 1. c.

BERRIEN: Sand-hills of Allapaha River, May 5, 1904, in flower

@igr): A larse) shrub, six feet tall.

Known otherwise only from the type-locality in Lake County,

Florida.

GAYLUSSACIA HBK., Nov. Gen. 3 :275. 1818.

Gamrondosay (.) hb. ce, Go; Torn, Fl. Ni Y¥.- 12440. 1843.

‘“HUCKLEBERRY.’’

From intermediate pine-barrens to non-alluvial swamps;

common and variable. Fl. April. In the pine-barrens it

is often only about a foot tall, and is then var. nana Gray

(represented by no. 2094 Irom EMANUEL Co.). In sand-

hill bogs the leaves are apt to be more or less pubescent

and it is then var. tomentosa Gray (no. S20 from EMANUEL

Co.). The largest forms grow in the swamps. It is almost

impossible to decide where to draw the lines between the

different forms. This is one of the best edible berries in our

territory.

Pretty widely distributed in the Eastern United States, in one

form or another, but in Georgia apparently confined to the

coastal plain.

_ G. dumosa (Andr.) T. &. G.; Gray, Man. 259. 1848.

Sand-hills, dry and intermediate pine-barrens, or rarely on

184 : HARPER

rock outcrops; common. FI. April. Pretty widely dis-

tributed in South Georgia, and on the sunny slopes of some

of the mountains in the northern part of the state (see Small, .

Bull] Norrey, Club 21 -1s=rom neown

Newfoundland to Louisiana, rarely more than 300 miles from

the ‘coast (see Rhodora,.7 275. Loos):

ERICACEA.

CHOLISMA Raf., Am. Month. Mag. 4:193. 1819.

(Original spelling Xoztisma. See Greene, Torreya 4 :173—

174. 1904.)

C. ligustrina (L.) Britton, Mem. Torrey Club 4: 134. 1894.

COLQUITT: Swamp of Ochlocknee Creek near Moultrie (1673).

More common farther inland, for instance in Middle Georgia,

where it flowers in May and June.

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States.

What appears to be a dwarf form of this, a knee-high shrub,’

grows in wet pine-barrens in BULLOCH (888), TATTNALL,

COFFEE, IRWIN, and Camden Counties.

C. ferruginea (Walt.) Heller, Cat. 6. 1808.

The typical form (a small tree or large shrub, sometimes

twenty feet tall) grows in hammocks and on sand-hill

bluffs in COFFEE (2047) and BERRIEN Counties, flowering in

May. The var. jruticosa, scarcely differing except in size,

is common in intermediate flat pine-barrens in APPLING,

TELFAIR, COFFEE (652), IRWIN, BERRIEN, and COLQUITT, and

still more so in the flat country toward the coast. There

seem to be all gradations between the two extremes.

South Carolina to central Florida, in the lower half of the

coastal plain.

PIERIS D. Don, Edinb. New Phil. Jour. 17: 159. 1834.

P. Mariana (L.) B. & H.

Sand-hills, dry and intermediate pine-barrens, particularly

the last named. BULLOCH (867), EMANUEL, TATTNALL,

MONTGOMERY, COFFEE, WILCOX, IRWIN, BERRIEN, THOMAS.

Fl. April-May. Less common in other parts of the coastal

plain.

-ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 185

Rhode Island to Florida, in the coastal plain. Also reported

from Tennessee and Arkansas, but not Alabama.

P. nitida (Bartr.) BH.

Moist pine-barrens, swamps (not muddy), ponds and ham-

mocks; common. Fl. March-April. Throughout the pine-

barren region of Georgia, and known from several places in

the upper fourth of the coastal plain, where the Columbia

sand is present.

Virginia to central Florida and Louisiana, in the coastal plain.

Leaf-anatomy discussed by Kearney, Contr. U. S. Nat-

PleTOn |: 5O00—-SOl. TOOL.

P.} phillyreifolia (Hook.) DC., Prodr. 7: 599. 1839.

Biaemedeia Look. Ic Plant, 2: 122. 1837; andl. Bot. Reg.

30: pl. 36. 1844.

BERRIEN: On Taxodium imbricarium in ponds and moist pine-

barrens between Sparks and Adel, May 7, 1904. More

frequent in the flat country, in Charlton, Lowndes, and

Brooks Counties, especially Lowndes, where it flowers in

_ February.

Also occurs in West Florida and Mobile County, Alabama.

For a description of some of the unique features of this plant

Secelormeya 2. 21-22. 5903.

LEUCOTHOE D. Don., Edinb. New Phil. euiset ze eso) “L834:

L. racemosa (L.) Gray, Man. ed. 2. 252. 1856.

Mostly in and around creek-swamps; not common. EMANUEL,

TATTNALL, COLQUITT (1672). FI. spring.

Massachusetts to Florida, Missouri, and Louisiana, mostly in

the coastal plain.

Leaf-anatomy studied by Kearney, Contr. U. S. Nat. Herb.

5 2500. Igot.

L. elongata Small, Bull. N. Y. Bot. Gard. 1: 284. 1899.

In and around sand-hill ponds. MONTGOMERY, BERRIEN.

Very similar to the preceding, and perhaps only a xerophytic

modification of it.

Virginia to Florida, in the coastal plain.

L. axillaris (Lam.) Don, l. c.

Non-alluvial creek-swamps; not common. COFFEE, BERRIEN,

186 HARPER

COLOUIT WH LewAvoril rime:

Virginia to northeastern Florida and Mississippi, in the coastal

plain. Difficult to distinguish from L. Catesbez (Walt.)

Gray, which ranges from Virginia to Georgia in the mountains

and Piedmont region.

Leaf-anatomy studied by Kearney, Contr. U. S. Nat. Herb.

5 2499-500. f. SO. 1901.

L. platyphylla Small, Bull. Torrey Club, 28: 290. Igor.

EMANUEL: Edge of non-alluvial swamp at base of hammock

of Little Ohoopee River, April 5, 1904 (2093). Not ob-

served elsewhere. Seems to differ from the preceding only

in having slightly broader leaves.

Georgia and Mississippi, in the coastal plain.

KALMIA L., Sp. Pl. 391. 1753.

K. hirsuta Walt., Fl. Car. 138. 1788.

Intermediate and moist pine-barrens, and corresponding places

on sand-hills; frequent. BULLOCH (961), EMANUEL, MONT-

GOMERY, DODGE, TELFAIR, APPLING, COFFEE (657), IRWIN,

BERRIEN, COLQUITT, THOMAS. FI. June-Sept. Not known

farther inland, but quite common in the flat pine-barrens.

North Carolina to northern Florida and Mississippi, in the

pine-barrens.

AZALEA L., Sp. Pl. 150. 1753. “HONEYSUCKUE:”

A. viscosa L., Sp. Pl. 151. 1753.

Moist pine-barrens, particularly towards the edges of swamps.

EMANUEL, MONTGOMERY, WILCOX, IRWIN, COLQUITT, DECATUR

(1929.) Fl. May-July. Widely distributed over South

Georgia, but not known in the other parts of the state.

New England west to Ohio and south to Florida, Arkansas,

and Texas, mostly in the glaciated region and coastal plain.

A enuditotay ds, Op. laced. 2.) 2140 e7O2.

Intermediate and moist pine-barrens and edges of swamps.

In pine-barrens often only knee-high. Commonin SCREVEN,

BULLOCH, and EMANUEL, flowering in March and April.

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 187

Perhaps overlooked elsewhere in the region for lack of

flowers. Common in rich woods farther inland, all the way

to the mountains. In Georgia I have seen only the ordinary

pink-flowered form.

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States between

latitudes 30° and 43°.

A. candida Small, Bull. Torrey Club 28 : 360. 1901.

On or near Altamaha Grit outcrops, especially on banks of

ereeks and rivers. TATTNALL (2858), COFFEE, BERRIEN.

Flowers before the middle of April. (See Bull. Torrey Club

32 :166. 1905.) Known otherwise only from the type-

locality in Lowndes County, just south of our territory, and

perhaps from neighboring parts of Florida.

ELLIOTTIA Muhl.; Ell., Sk. 1: 448. 1817.

E. racemosa Muhl., 1. c.

(PvATps DODXe (Pie. 2) ean pi XX)

Oak ridges and bases of sand-hills; rare. BULLOCH (962),

TELFAIR (1873), COFFEE (2011). Said to occur also in

SCREVEN and EMANUEL, probably within our territory

(Gee Plant World 6:60. 1903). FL June-July.

Confined to the coastal plain of Georgia and adjacent parts of

South Carolina. Formerly known from Burke, Richmond,

and Columbia (?) Counties, and Aiken Co., S. C., but it has

not been seen in the wild state outside of the Altamaha Grit

region for nearly thirty years. (See Jour. N.Y. Bot. Gard.

POPagi ae LiPo me tT OOLA Aid Gardening 222031. sept. 14,

tg01; Plant World, 5:87—-90. pl. 12. 1902; Sarg., Silva N. A.

Anny an iZeOOn mborreyem sg: 100. 1902 lull, Lorrey,

Clilys2 105100. 1905.)

PYROLACE.

CHIMAPHILA Pursh, Fl. 299. 1814.

C. maculata (L.) Pursh, Fl. 300. 1814. (PIPSISSEWA.)

BERRIEN: Rich woods near Little River, southwest of Tifton,

Sept. 29, 1902. (See page 112 of this volume, also Bull.

Torrey Club 31:24. 1904.) Frequent in Middle Georgia,

where it flowers in June.

Ranges northward to Canada.

188 HARPER

CLETHRACE.

CLETHRA L., Sp. Pl. 3096. 1753.

C. alnifolia L., 1. c.

Moist pine-barrens, branch- and creek-swamps, etc.; quite

common. Fl. July—Aug. Pretty widely distributed over

South Georgia, but not known in other parts of the state.

Maine to northern Florida and Louisiana, in the glaciated

region and coastal plain. (See Rhodora 7:75. 1905.)

UMBELLIFERA.

DAUCUS. L., Sp: Ply 2427 275304 (Caneom)

DS PUSILLUS Mix; hil iS enOAe too. ne

Streets of Fitzgerald, May 17, 1904. More common in older

towns farther inland, at least as far as Athens.

South Carolina to Middle Florida, British Columbia (?), and

Mexico. Natural range and habitat uncertain. Certainly

not native in Georgia.

OXYPOLIS Raf., Neog. 2. 1825.

O. rigidior (L.) C. & R. Contr. U.S. Nat. Herb. 7 svoseereoe

Branch-swamps and wet woods; rare. COFFEE (722), BERRIEN.

Also in Middle Georgia, where it flowers September’ to

November.

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States, but rare in

the coastal plain.

O. ternata (Nutt.) Heller, Cat. 5. 1898.

Moist pine-barrens; inconspicuous and probably rare. IRWIN,

BERRIEN (600), WORTH, CoLQuITT. Flowers probably in

November. Not seen elsewhere.

North Carolina to West Florida, in the pine-barrens.

O. filiformis (Walt.) Britton, Mem. Torr. Club 5 : 239. 1894.

Moist pine-barrens. Frequent throughout our territory and

in all the rest of the pine-barrens of Georgia (but only on the

Columbia formation. See Science II. 16:69. 1902). FL

July—Aug.

Virginia to central Florida and Louisiana, in the pine-barrens.

Anatomy discussed by Rennert, Bull. Torrey Club 30: 403-411.

jpi—38 TLOOR.

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 189

ANGELICA L., Sp. Pl. 250. 1753.

A. dentata (Chapm.) C. & R., Bot. Gaz. 12 : 61. 1887.

Dry pine-barrens and sand-hills, in the southwestern half of

our territory. IRWIN, BERRIEN, COLQUITT (10654). Fl. Sept.—

Oct. ; €

Known otherwise only from Gadsden and Franklin Counties,

Middle Florida,

THASPIUM Nutt., Gen. 1: 196. 1818.

T. trifoliatum aureum (Nutt.) Britton, Mem. Torrey Club

53240. 1894.

pooty: Around lime-sink east of Wenona, Sept. 1, 1903.

Does not properly belong to this flora, but ranges farther

inland, all the way to the mountains. FI. spring.

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States.

ZIZIA Koch, Nov. Act. Ces. Leop. Acad. 12 : 128. 1824.

Z. Bebbii [C. & R.] Britton, Mem. Torrey Club 2 : 35. 1890.

On river-bluffs; rare, and not characteristic of our flora.

MONTGOMERY: Near Ochwalkee; witcox: Upper Seven

Bluffs. Fl. spring.

Ranges northward, mostly in the mountains, to West Virginia.

Z. arenicola Rose, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. 29: 442. 1905.

coLouiItT: Base of sand-hills of Ochlocknee Creek near

Moultrie, Aug. 22, 1903. (no. 1940, type). Also in some-

what similar situations in Sumter County.

Not known elsewhere.

SPERMOLEPIS Raf. Neog. 2. 1825.

S. DIvARIcATUS (Walt.) Britton, Torrey Club 5 : 244. 1894.

A weed in dry sandy soil. BULLOCH: near Bloys: EMANUEL:

Swainsboro; BERRIEN: Nashville and vicinity. Fl. spring.

Common around Millen, a little farther inland.

North Carolina to Florida, Kansas, and Texas. (See remarks

under Isopappus divaricatus, p. 146). Natural range and

habitat uncertain.

ERYNGIUM L., Sp. Pl. 232. 1753.

E. yuccifolium Mx., Fl. 1: 164. 1803.

E. aquaticum L., in part.

190 HARPER

BULLOCH: Moist pine-barrens near Bloys, June, 1901. TATT- —

NALL: Rock outcrop near Pendleton Creek, June 26, 1903.

Fl. June. More common farther inland, usually in dry

soil, but habitat not well understood.

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States south of

latitude 41°, but probably not everywhere indigenous.

E. synchztum [Gray] C. &. R., Contr. U. S. Nat! ValeRoae yaa

Tgoo.

Normally in intermediate pine-barrens. EMANUEL, MONT-

GOMERY, DODGE, TELFAIR, COFFEE, IRWIN, WILCOX, DOOLY.

Fl. summer. Extends inland to Johnson, Sumter, and

Calhoun Counties and coastward to Camden.

South to Florida, west to Arkansas (?) and Texas, in the pine-

barrens.

E. virgatum Lam., Encyc. 4: 757. 1796.

? E. wntegrijolium Walt., Fl. Car. 112. 1788.

Moist pine-barrens; seen only in the southern part of our

territory. COLQUITT, THOMAS (IISI), DECATUR. Fl. Aug—

Sept. Also in several counties nearer the coast, and at a few

places in Middle Georgia (see Bull. Torrey Club 30 : 294.

THOR)

Western North Carolina to northern Florida and Texas.

E. Ludovicianum Morong, Bull. Torrey Club 14:51. 1887.

Moist pine-barrens. DODGE, WILCOX, COFFEE (709), IRWIN,

BERRIEN, DOOLY, WORTH, COLQUITT. (1664). FI. July—

Oct. Extends inland to Jefferson (M. H. Hopkms) and

Sumter Counties, and coastward to Charlton. Close to the

preceding but easily distinguished in the field (see Bull.

Torrey Club 28: 477. 1901; 32 223) ra0A)F

Known also in the coastal plain of Louisiana and Texas.

E. Virginianum Lam., Encyc. 4:759. 1796.

?B. aquaticum ., Sp. Pl 232. 1753.) (Gm panee

BERRIEN: Low grounds where the Lafayette formation is

absent, west and southwest of Tifton, September, 1902

(1690). Also occurs in very similar surroundings in Sumter

and Lee Counties (see remarks under Cynoctonum Mztreola,

De Bz):

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 191

New Jersey to Florida and Texas (?) (but not reported from

Alabama), in the coastal plain. It should perhaps also

turn up in the West Indies, like several of its associates.

SANICULA L., Sp. Pl. 235. 1753.

S. Marilandica L., 1. c.

MONTGOMERY: Bluff along Oconee River near Ochwalkee,

July 1, 1903. More common farther inland.

Widely distributed in North America north of latitude 32°.

CENTELLA L., Pl. Rar. Afr. 28. 1760.

GiyceriA Nutt., Gen. 1:177. 1818. Not R. Br. (Changed to

Chondrocar pus in errata.)

C. repanda (Pers.) Small, Fl. 859. 1903.

Hydrocotyle rentjormis Walt., Fl. Car. 113. 1753.

Moist pine-barrens, shallow ponds, etc. Quite common in our

territory and throughout the pine-barrens of Georgia. FI.

July—Aug.

Maryland to South Florida and Texas, in the coastal plain.

Said to have a wide distribution in the tropics, but this

deserves investigation.

ARALIACE.

ARALIA L., Sp. Pl. 273. 1753.

A. spinosa L.,1.c. PRickiy AsH.

Bluffs and hammock-like places along rivers, but apparently

never in genuine hammocks. SCREVEN, BULLOCH, TATTNALL,

MONTGOMERY, TELFAIR, COFFEE, BERRIEN. Fl. August.

Widely distributed over the state in shady places, from the

mountains of Northwest Georgia nearly to the coast.

Nearly throughout the Eastern United States south of the

glaciated region.

CORNACEE.

CORNUS L., Sp. Pl. 117. 1753.

©; florida, L.; 1. :c:. “Docwoop.”

A characteristic inhabitant of hammocks, occurring also on

bluffs, and in rich woods along the Altamaha Grit escarp-

192 HARPER

ment (presumably on the Chattahoochee formation). In —

regular hammocks it grows in EMANUEL, DODGE, COFFEE,

wiLcox, and doubtless other counties, and along the es-

carpment it has been noted in SCREVEN, BULLOCH, EMANUEL,

WILCOX, WORTH, and pDEecaTur. Fl. March-April. Out-

side of our territory it DEO Danis grows in every county in

Georgia.

Ranges nearly throughout the Eastern United States south of

latitude 43°.

NYSSA’ Sp. Pl cogs! ace

N. Ogeche Marsh., Arb. Am. 97. 1785. “TupELo Gum.”

OGEECHEE [.IME.

Common nearly throughout (not yet noted in Screven, Bulloch,

Emanuel, Dodge, and Decatur), in streams of all sizes, and

rarely in ponds. Fl. April-May. Extends coastward to

within about 20 miles of the ocean, but in the other direction

it seems to stop abruptly at the Altamaha Grit escarpment,

particularly in Dooly and Worth Counties. (See Bull.

Torrey Club 32:147. 1905.) A large shrub or small tree,

quite differentin aspect from its congeners. Fruit very acid,

used to some extent for preserves.

Ranges from extreme southern South Carolina to he vicinity

of Apalachicola, Florida. Like Pinckneya pubens, which

has a very stmilar range, it is probably more abundant in our

territory than in all the rest of its range combined.

N. uniflora Wang., Am. Holz. 83. pl. 27. f. 57. 1787.

N. aquatica L., Sp. Pl. tos3) im part:

Only in swamps of streams rising north of our territory.

SCREVEN and BULLOCH: Ogeechee River; EMANUEL: ©

Little Ohoopee River; TATTNALL: Ohoopee River; MONT--~

GOMERY: Oconee River near Mount Vernon; MONTGOMERY

and TELFAIR: Gum Swamp Creek near McRae; TELFAIR: —

Ocmulgee River. Fl. April. Extends down the Altamaha —

River to within about 20 miles of the coast. Pretty widely

scattered in South Georgia, in similar situations, and known

from a few places above the fall-line near the western border

of the state. (See Bull. Torrey Club 30 s2049 neGa")

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 193

Virginia to Florida, Illinois, and Texas, mostly confined to the

coastal plain.

Leaf-anatomy discussed by Kearney, Contr. U.S. Nat. Herb.

5 :498-499. 1901.

IN; biflora Walt., Fl. Car. 253. 1788. “Biack GuM.”’

Common in ponds, branches, creeks, and small rivers, probably

on every square mile of our territory. |

Grows nearly all over South Georgia. Farther inland mostly

replaced by N. sylvatica Marsh., with which it perhaps

intergrades. (No distinction is made between them by the

natives.)

New Jersey to Florida and Texas, mostly in the coastal plain.

HALORAGIDACE.

PROSPERPINACA L., Sp. Pl. 88. 1753.

P. palustris L., 1. c.

Branch-swamps, etc.; not common. EMANUEL, MONTGOMERY,

coLouitT. Fl. summer.

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States and south-

ward.

Pepectinata Wam., lab. © :214. pl. 50. 7. Tf. 1701.

Branch-swamps and shallow ponds. BULLOCH (844), EMANUEL,

TATTNALL, COFFEE, IRWIN. Fl. May—Aug. Also in Sumter

County, in the Lower Oligocene region.

Massachusetts to central Florida and Texas, in the coastal

plain.

A form apparently intermediate between these two species

grows in moist pine-barrens and branch-swamps in BULLOCH,

COFFEE (1427), IRWIN (2270), and BERRIEN. See Bull.

Torrey Club. 33: 238-239. 19006.

MYRIOPHYLLUM L., Sp. Pl. 992. 1753.

M. heterophyllum Mx., Fl. 2: 191. 1803.

Seen only in permanent ponds along the inland edge of our

territory, in SCREVEN (2084) and witcox. FI. spring and

summer. More frequent in sluggish streams in the upper

third of the coastal plain.

Range not well worked out, no doubt partly because of the:

difficulty of accurately determining the species.

194 ; HARPER

ONAGRACES.

KNEIFFIA Spach, Hist. Veg. 4: 373. 1835.

K. linearis (Mx.) Spach, Hist. Veg. 4:376. 1835.

Dry pine-barrens. BULLOCH (2164), TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, —

COFFEE, WILCOX, IRWIN, BERRIEN. Fl. April-May. Also at

least as far inland as the pine-barrens of Sumter County.

Including K. arentcola, subglobosa, and longipedicellata, which

lam unable to distinguish, this ranges from Connecticut (?)

to Florida and Arkansas, mostly in the coastal plain.

RAIMANNIA Rose, Contr. U.S. Nat. Herb. 8 : 330. 1905.

R. LAcINIATA (Hill) Rose, 1. c.

Cnothera sinuata L., Mant. 2 : 228. 1771.

Fields, roadsides, etc. EMANUEL: Near Swainsboro; IRWIN:

Fitzgerald; BERRIEN: near Nashville. Flowers mostly in

spring. More common in Middle Georgia.

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States and Mexico,

but certainly not native eastward.

GAURA L., Sp. Pl. 347. 1753.

G. Michauxii Spach, Nouv. Ann. Mus. Paris, 4: 379. 1835.

Dry pine-barrens and sand-hills. DODGE, IRWIN, BERRIEN,

coLquitTT. Fl. July—Oct. Extends inland to Middle Georgia,

but only as a weed in many places.

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States south of —

latitude 38°. .

LUDWIGIA L., Sp. Pl. 118. 1753.

L. alternifolia L., 1. c. {

COFFEE: Ocmulgee River swamp opposite Lumber City, Sept.

IT, 1903. IRWIN: a weed near Cycloneta, Oct. 2, 1902. FI.

all summer. More common farther inland, in Middle and

Southwest Georgia, but usually a weed in ditches. Probably

native in some places where the Lafayette formation is

absent.

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States, but natural

range and habitat uncertain.

LL. hirtella Raf., Med. Rep. II. 5 : 358. 1808.

_ Moist pine-barrens; not abundant. DODGE, COFFEE, IRWIN,

Se ee ee a

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 195

BERRIEN, DOOLY, coLguiTT. Fl. June-Aug. Inland to

Laurens, Sumter, and Early Counties in the Lower Oligocene

region, and coastward to Camden.

New Jersey to West Florida, Arkansas, and Texas, mostly in

the pine-barrens.

L. virgata Mx., Fl. 1 : 89. 1803; Harper, Torreya4 : 162.7.1. 1904.

Rather dry pine-barrens; not common. TATTNALL (999),

MONTGOMERY, IRWIN. Fl. June-Sept. Also inland to

Sumter County and coastward to Chatham and Charlton.

North Carolina to Florida and Alabama (?), in the pine-barrens.

L. linearis Walt., Fl. Car. 80. 1788.

Moist pine-barrens; apparently rare. COFFEE (720), DOoLY. FI.

Aug.—Sept. Alsoin some other parts of the pine-barrens of

Georgia, where it is inclined, like several of its congeners,

to become a weed in moist sandy ditches along railroads.

New Jersey to northern Florida and Louisiana, in the coastal

plain.

L. linifolia Poir., Suppl. 3 : 513. 1813.

Shallow ponds. BERRIEN, coLguiTT. Fl. July—Sept. More

common in the Lower Oligocene region, but occurs also in

Charlton County, in the flat country.

North Carolina to central Florida and Alabama, in the pine-

barrens.

L. spherocarpa Ell., Sk. 1:213. 1817.

wiLcox: Small permanent pond near Queensland, just on the

edge of our territory, May 17,1904. Belongs more properly

to the adjacent Lower Oligocene region, where it is frequent.

Massachusetts to West Florida, in the coastal plain.

L. pilosa Walt., Fl. Car. 89. 1788.

Common throughout the whole pine-barren region of Georgia,

in and near branch-swamps, shallow ponds, etc. FI. all

summer.

North Carolina to Florida and Louisiana, in the coastal plain.

L. suffruticosa Walt., Fl. Car. 90. 1788.

ica piiaia Nex Elen 200. 1803.

COFFEE: Margin of sand-hill pond near Chatterton, July 29,

196 HARPER

1902. Known also from Sumter, Lee, Bryan, Charlton,

Clinch, and Lowndes Counties, mostly around ponds.

North Carolina to South Florida, in the pine-barrens.

L. glandulosa Walt., Fl. Car. 88. 1788.

COFFEE: Ocmulgee River swamp opposite Lumber City,

Sept. 11, 1903. Also in Americus, along Muckalee Creek.

South Carolina to Illinois and Texas, sometimes a weed.

L. microcarpa Mx., Fl. 1:88. 1803.

BERRIEN: In places where the Lafayette formation is apparent-

ly absent, west and southwest of Tifton, September 1902.

(See pp. r10-112). Also in Johnson, Dooly, Sumter, Lee,

Dougherty, and Early Counties in the Lower Oligocene

region, apparently always in the same relation to the

Lafayette formation.

North Carolina to South Florida and Mississippi (?) (but not

reported from Alabama), in the coastal plain. Also in the |

Bahamas (Britton.)

ISNARDIA L., Sp. Pl. 120. 1753.

I. palustris L., 1. c.

| Shallow ponds, BULLOCH and BERRIEN. Widely distributed

over the state, commonly a weed in ditches. Fl. all summer.

Cosmopolitan, but natural range uncertain.

MELASTOMACE:.

RHEXIA L., Sp. Pl. 346. 1753.

R. Alifanus Walt., Fl. Car. 130. 1788.

R. glabella Mx., Fl. 1:222. 1803. (See Bull) Tormeyseiie

332238. 1900.)

Moist or intermediate pine-barrens; common throughout the

pine-barren region of Georgia. Fl. June-Aug. The hand-

somest species of the genus.

North Carolina to northern Florida and Louisiana, in the

coastal plain, nearly confined to the pine-barrens.

R. stricta Pursh, Fl. 258. 1814.

Moist pine-barrens and ponds. APPLING, COFFEE (715), IRWIN,

DOOLY, and doubtless elsewhere. (In1g01 and 1902 J noted

what I took to be Rk. Virginica at many other stations in

‘

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 197

this region, and coastward, but it is probably all R. stricta.

- This cannot be verified, however, without going over the

same ground again). Fl. summer.

“South Carolina to Florida and Louisiana” (Mohr). ‘‘ Georgia

and Florida’’ (Small). At any rate confined to the pine-

barrens.

R. filiformis Small, Bull. Torrey Club 25 : 468. 1808.

Chiefly in rather dry pine-barrens and in corresponding places

on sand-hills. BULLOCH, TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, DODGE,

COFFEE, WILCOx. FI. all summer. Scattered over the

whole pine-barren region of Georgia.

Reported only from Georgia and Florida, but doubtless has a

wider range.

Roe eManriana Iy., Sp. PL, 346. 1753.

COFFEE: Moist pine-barrens and margins of ponds, along

seventeen Mile Creek north and east of Douglas, July, 1902.

In the vicinity of Americus it flowers June-September.

Long Island to Florida, Missouri, and Texas, mostly in the

coastal plain.

R. ciliosa Mx., Fl. 1: 221. 1803.

Moist pine-barrens and sand-hill bogs. DODGE, APPLING,

COFFEE, WILCOX, IRWIN, COLQUITT, THOMAS (1175), DECATUR.

Fl. June-Sept. Occurs nearly throughout the pine-barrens

of Georgia, also in Pike County, Middle Georgia (Bull.

Torrey Club 30 : 294. 1903).

Maryland to central Florida and Louisiana, mostly in the pine-

barrens.

R. lutea Walt., Fl. Car. 130. 1788.

Moist pine-barrens. BULLOCH (890), EMANUEL, TATTNALL,

DODGE, COFFEE (772), WILCOX, IRWIN, BERRIEN, COLQUITT.

Fl. June-July. Also coastward, but rarely farther inland.

North Carolina to northern Florida and Louisiana, in the pine-

barrens.

LAURACE.

BENZOIN Fabr., Enum. Pl. Hort. Helmst. ed. 2, 401. 1763.

B. melisszefolium (Walt.) Nees, Syst. 494. 1836.

198 : HARPER

MONTGOMERY: Margin of pond in sand-hills of Little Ocmulgee

River opposite Lumber City, Sept. 10, 1903 (19859). Not

seen elsewhere.

North Carolina to Florida (?), Illinois, and Lowi in the

coastal plain.

MALAPOENNA Adans., Fam. 2 :447. 1763.

M. geniculata (Walt.) Coult., Mem. Torrey Club 5 :164. 1894.

In and around ponds; rare. MONTGOMERY (with the preceding),

COFFEE, IRWIN (1422). Also in Bryan and Glynn Counties,

in the flat pine-barren region. Not seen in flower.

Virginia (?) to Florida and Louisiana, in the coastal plain.

Also in Tennessee (Gattinger). The range of this is greatly

in need of study.

PERSEA Gaert. f. Fr. & Sem. 3 : 22. 1805.

P. pubescens (Pursh] Sarg., Silva N. A. 5:7. pl. 302. 1895.

“SWEET Bay.’’

Normally in non-alluvial swamps; also to some extent in

adjacent hammocks and alluvial swamps. EMANUEL, TATT-

NALL, MONTGOMERY (with the preceding, and elsewhere),

DODGE, TELFAIR, COFFEE (2048), IRWIN, BERRIEN, THOMAS.

Varies in size from a shrub to a tree over a foot in diameter

and 60 to 75 feet tall. Not common farther inland, but

frequent in the flat country.

Virginia to Florida and Mississippi, in the coastal plain.

Leaf-anatomy studied by Kearney, Contr. U. S. Nat. Herb.

5 : 489. Igol.

CACTACEA.

OPUNTIA Mill., Gard. Dict. ed. 7. 1759.

O. vulgaris Mill., Gard. Dict. ed. 8. 1768. PrickLy PEAR.

Sand-hills and hammocks. BULLOCH, EMANUEL, MONTGOMERY,

DODGE, COFFEE, WILCOX, BERRIEN. Fl. May-July. Widely

distributed over the state, even on rocky mountain-summits

in Middle and Northwest Georgia (Bull. Torrey Club

28 : 476. 1901), if it is all the same species.

Massachusetts to Florida and Alabama, mostly within 300

miles of the coast.

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 199°

PASSIFLORACE.

PASSIFLORA L., Sp. Pl. 955. 1753. -

P. INCARNATA L., Sp. Pl. 959. 1753. Maypop.

A weed, rare in our territory. TATTNALL: Near Collins;

TELFAIR: Near Helena. Not seen nearer the coast, but

common in the upper parts of the state, mostly in old fields.

Widely distributed in the Southeastern United States, but

certainly not native in Georgia. Probably introduced from

tropical America.

Peoutea Lop, Pl. 958: 1752.

MONTGOMERY: Oconee River swamp near Mount Vernon,

June 27, 1903. More common in the upper third of the

coastal plain, and in Middle Georgia.

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States south of

latitude 40°.

VIOLACE.

WIOLAGIA Spe Pi os3trr753" ) VIOLETS:

V. pedata L., l.c.

EMANUEL: Near Swainsboro, April 5, 1904. Possibly not

native. More common farther inland.

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States, but only asa

weed in some places.

V. villosa Walt., Fl. Car. 219. 1788.

sand-hills and hammock-like places; rare. BULLOCH, TATTNALL.

More common in Middle Georgia.

New Jersey to Florida, etc. Range not well known.

V. primulefolia L., Sp. Pl. 934. 1753.

Damp woods, etc.; not common. SCREVEN, MONTGOMERY,

BERRIEN, COLQUITT. Fl. March—April. More common far-

ther inland.

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States.

V. sp. (Related to V. primulejolia but evidently distinct

and probably undescribed).

‘COLQUITT: Swamp of Ochlocknee Creek near Moultrie, Sept.

DIS WO A OA)

200 HARPER

V. denticulosa Pollard; Harper, Bull. Torrey Club 28: 475. 1901.

Wet woods, corFEE: Several stations near Douglas (724,

type). BULLOCH: Several stations near Statesboro (2166).

Quite abundant at both places, and doubtless grows else-

where in the region. Fl. April. Seen also in Charlton

County.

Not yet detected elsewhere.

V. lanceolata L., Sp. Pl. 934. 1753.

EMANUEL: Between Kemp and Covena, April 5, 1904, in flower.

Also grows in Jefferson and Sumter Counties, in the Lower

Oligocene region. Not common in Georgia.

From Nova Scotia west to Minnesota in the glaciated region,

and south to Florida (?) and Texas in the coastal plain.

(See Rhodora 7:74. 1905). Also in the mountains of

Tennessee (Gaitinger).

CISTACEZ.

HELIANTHEMUM Tourn.; Adans., Fam. 2 : 443. 1763.

H. Carolinianum (Walt.) Mx., Fl. 1: 307. 1803.

Halimum Carolinianum (Walt.) Grosser, Engler’s Pflanzen-

FELC A 4A rOOse

Dry pine-barrens. SCREVEN (20ST), BULLOCH (832), EMANUEL.

Doubtless grows in most of the other counties, but easily

overlooked when not in flower. Fl. March-April.

North Carolina (?) to Florida and Texas, in the coastal plain.

H. ROSMARINIFOLIUM Pursh, Fl. 364. 1814.

Halimium rosmarinijolium (Pursh) Grosser, 1l.c. 49.

A weed in dry sandy places. SCREVEN, BULLOCH (986). FI.

June-July. Also noted in Effingham, Jefferson, and

Pulaski Counties. Often very abundant (see Bull. Torrey

Club 30 : 337-338. 1903).

South Carolina to Texas (?), in the coastal plain. Natural

range and habitat unknown. Perhaps native westward,

like several of its associates.

LECHEA L., Sp. Pl. go. 1753.

?L. Torreyi Leggett; Britton, Bull. Torrey Club 21: 251. 1894.

COFFEE: Slightly damp place at base of sand-hills of Seventeen

4 .

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA : 201

Mile Creek north of Douglas, July 22, 1902 (1436). Grows

also in similar situations in Ware and Charlton Counties,

in the flat country.

South Carolina to Florida and Louisiana (?), in the pine-

barrens.

? L. tenuifolia Mx., Fl. 1:77. 1803.

COFFEE: Sand-hills of Satilla River (7443) and Seventeen

Mile Creek (7461), July, 1902. Also in Ware County near

Waycross.

Said to range nearly throughout the Eastern United States.

? L. patula Leggett, Bull. Torrey Club 6:251. 1878.

THOMAS: Intermediate pine-barrens about four miles northeast

of Thomasville, Aug. 9, 1901 (1177).

South Carolina to Florida, and Mississippi (?) in the pine-

barrens.

TURNERACE.

PIRIQUETA Aubl. Pl. Guian. 1: 298. pl. 117. 1775.

P. Caroliniana (Walt.) Urban, Jahrb. Kel. Bot. Gart. Berlin

Pee WOO Ry.

TATTNALL: Sandy west bank of Ohoopee River, June 24, 1903.

IRWIN: Rather dry pine-barrens near Ocilla, July 15, 1902.

Rare. Fl. summer. Occurs also in Screven (near Millen),

Sumter, and Charlton Counties, but usually as a weed.

North Carolina to Florida in the coastal plain, but range and

habitat not fully understood. Also in South America.

THEACE.

GORDONIA Ellis, Phil. Trans. 60: 518. pl. II. 1770.

G. Lasianthus L., Mant. 2:570. 1771. “Rep Bay.”

Strictly confined to non-alluvial branch- and creek-swamps.

MONTGOMERY, DODGE, TELFAIR, APPLING, COFFEE (693),

IRWIN, Fl. July—Sept. Outside of our territory it grows

in Richmond (a remarkable outlying station near the fall-

line) and Laurens Counties, and at several places in the flat

country, including Okefinokee Swamp.

Virginia (?) to central Florida and Louisiana (?) in the coastal

plain. Not at all common.

202 HARPER

HYPERICACEZ.

TRIADENUM Raf. Med. Rep. II. 5 : 352. 1808.

T. petiolatum (Walt.) Britton. Ill. Fl. 2 : 437. f. 2465. 1897.

Swamps of the muddy rivers. MONTGOMERY, TELFAIR, COFFEE.

Fl. September. More common in the Eocene and Lower

Oligocene regions. Not known nearer the coast. ?

New Jersey to Florida (?), Missouri, and Louisiana, in the

coastal plain.

Tee Virsinicum (L:) Rat, Fie Del 3 os sccce:

Moist pine-barrens; not common. COFFEE, WILCOX. FI.

summer. Extends inland at least to Sumter County, and

coastward to Okefinokee Swamp.

From Nova Scotia west to Manitoba and Nebraska (?) in the

glaciated region, and south to northern Florida and Louisi-

ana in the coastal plain.

Anatomy and morphology discussed by Holm, Am. Jour. Sci.

IV. 16 : 3690-376. 7. 1-8. Nov. 1903.

SAROTHRA L., Sp. Pl. 272. 1753.

S. gentianoides L., 1. c.

Usually a roadside weed in sandy soil, but also on rock outcrops

in TATTNALL and pooLy. Perhaps native on sand-hills as

well. Fl. all summer. Grows also on granite outcrops in

Middle Georgia, and as a weed nearly all over the State.

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States, but natural

range and habitat uncertain.

Stem-anatomy studied by W. E. Britton, Bull. Torrey Club

30+ 505-5 F903:

HYPERICUM L., Sp. Pl. 783. 1753.

H. maculatum Walt., Fl. Car. 189. 1788.

MONTGOMERY: Very dry pine-barrens near Glenwood, July 1,

1903. More common farther inland, often as a weed. FI.

June-July.

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States, but probably

not everywhere native.

H. myrtifolium Lam., Encyc. 4: 180. 1796.

Shallow ponds of all kinds (sand-hill, cypress, etc.), more

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 203°

rarely in moist or even rather dry pine-barrens. BULLOCH,

TATTNALL, TELFAIR, COFFEE, WILCOX, IRWIN, BERRIEN,

DOOLY, COLQUITT, THOMAS. FI. June—Aug. Nearly through-

out the pine-barren region of Georgia.

South Carolina to central Florida and Mississippi, in the

pine-barrens.

H. fasciculatum Lam., Encyc. 4 :160. 1796.

Moist pine-barrens, branch-swamps, and shallow ponds;

common throughout the pine-barrens of Georgia. FI.

April-Aug. (I have not been able to distinguish H. as-

palathoides Willd., which differs chiefly in size.)

North Carolina to central Florida and Texas, in the pine-

barrens.

H. galioides pallidum Mohr. Contr. U.S. Nat. Herb. 6: 621. 1901.

Swamps of streams of the second class (see p. 28). TATT-

NALL: Ohoopee River; MONTGOMERY and TELFAIR: Gum

Swamp Creek. Fl. July. More common in the Lower

Oligocene region.

Reported also from Florida, Alabama, and Mississippi, in the

coastal plain.

me opacum, I. &. G., Fl. 1: 163. 1838.

Intermediate pine-barrens, etc. APPLING, COFFEE, IRWIN,

DOOLY, COLQUITT, THOMAS. FI. summer. Extends inland

to Sumter County and coastward to Camden, but not re-

corded east of the Altamaha River and its tributaries.

South to central Florida and west to Louisiana, in the pine-

barrens.

H. acutifolium Ell., Sk. 2:26. 1821.

Shallow cypress ponds. IRWIN, coLquitr. More common

in Sumter County, where it flowers July-September.

Also reported from Florida and Alabama, but distribution

not well understood.

H. gymnanthum Engelm. & Gray, Bost. Jour. Nat. Hist. 5:

DURE. Troy late

BULLOCH: Shallow pine-barren pond near Bloys, June 27, 1001

(957). More common in the Lower Oligocene region.

204 HARPER

Said to be widely distributed in the Eastern United States

(but perhaps not everywhere native’).

ASCYRUM L., Sp. Pl. 788. 1753.

A. stans Mx., Fl. 2:77. 1803.

Moist pine-barrens; not common. DODGE, COFFEE, BERRIEN,

coLoguitt. Fl. summer. Extends inland to Sumter

County and coastward to Camden.

New Jersey to central Florida, Arkansas, and Texas, mostly

in the coastal plain.

Leaf-anatomy described by Kearney, Contr. U. S. Nat. Herb.

5 2405. LOO:

A. pumilum Mx., 1. c.

Dry and intermediate pine-barrens, etc. TATTNALL, COFFEE

(676), IRWIN, BERRIEN, DOOLY, COLQUITT, THOMAS.

South to Florida and west to Mississippi, in the pine-barrens.

MALVACE.

HIBISCUS L., Sp. Pl. 693. 1753

H. aculeatus Walt., Fl. Car. 177. 1788.

Intermediate pine-barrens; rather rare. TATTNALL, COFFEE,

witcox. Fl. July-Aug. Also in Sumter, Lee, Lowndes,

Charlton, and Chatham Counties.

South Carolina to northern Florida and Louisiana, in the pine-

barrens.

SIDA L., Sp. Pl. 683. 1753.

S. RHOMBIFOLIA L., Sp. Pl. 684. 1753. TEA WEED.

Streets of Douglas and Tifton. Also in several other South

Georgia cities. Fl. July—Aug.

North Carolina to Florida and Louisiana, in the coastal plain.

Introduced from the tropics.

CALLIRHOE Nutt., Jour. Acad. Phila. 2: 181. 1821.

C. Papaver (Cav.) Gray, Mem. Am. Acad. II. 4:17. 1848.

TATTNALL: Sandy west bank of Ohoopee River, June 24, 1903.

Rare. June-July. Also in Pulaski (according to Croom,

Am. Jour. Sci. 28: 168. 1835) and Dooly Counties in the

Lower Oligocene region.

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 205

South to Florida and west to ee (Ga prance Mexaisi.(2)):

in the pine-barrens.

VITACES.

PARTHENOCISSUS Planch. in DC. Mon. Phan. 5? : 447. 1887.

P. quinquefolia (L.) Planch.,1.c. 448. VrirGintA CREEPER.

Hammocks, blufts, etc. BULLOCH, EMANUEL, MONTGOMERY,

WILCOX, BERRIEN. Fl. earlysummer. More common farther

inland.

Widely distributed in Eastern North America. Also in Cuba

(?) and the Bahamas.

AMPELOPSIS Mx., Fl. 1: 159. 1803.

A. arborea (L.) Rusby, Mem. Torrey Club 5: 221. 1894.

Hedera arborea (L.) Walt.; Cissus stans Pers.; Vitis bipiinata

Gis) a & G.

Swamps of the muddy rivers. MONTGOMERY: Near Mount

Vernon; TELFAIR: Near Lumber City; corrEE: Barrow’s

Bluff. Fl. June. More common in the Lower Oligocene

region, where it is often a weed along fences, etc.

Virginia to Florida, Illinois, and Mexico, in the coastal plain.

Also in Cuba.

WEIS A Sp. Pii2ce. 17153.

V. estivalis Mx., Fl. 2: 230. 1803. WuLpD GRAPE.

MONTGOMERY: Stallings’ Bluff on the Oconee River near Mount

Vernon, June 30, 1903. Fl. late spring. Widely distributed

- over the state, mostly inland.

Nearly throughout Eastern North America.

V. rotundifolia Mx., Fl. 2 : 231.-1803. MuscapDINE. BULLACE.

Hammocks, bluffs, and non-alluvial creek-swamps. EMANUEL,

TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, DODGE, TELFAIR, COFFEE, BERRIEN.

Fl. May. Grows nearly all over the state in a variety of

habitats, from muddy swamps to drifting sands on the coast.

Widely distributed in the Southeastern United States.

V. sp.

An unidentified species closely related to the preceding

is abundant in the Oconee River swamp near Stallings’

Bluff, MontcomMErRy County, but was not collected for lack

of flowers and fruit.

206 HARPER

RHAMNACE.

CEANOTHUS L., Sp. Pl. 195. 1753.

C. Americanus L., 1. c. RED-SHANK.

Bluffs, dry pine-barrens, etc. BULLOCH, MONTGOMERY, COFFEE,

witcox. Fl. May—June. Not notieed nearer the coast,

but common farther inland, particularly in Middle Georgia.

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States.

C. microphyllus Mx., Fl. 1: 154. 1803.

Dry pine-barrens and sand-hills; frequent but nowhere abun-

dant. Noted in most of the counties. Fl. late spring.

Extends inland to Sumter Co.

Reported also from several stations in East Florida.

BERCHEMIA Neck.; DC., Prodr. 2:23. 1825.

B. scandens (Hill) Trel., Trans. Acad. Sci. St. L. 5: 364. 1889.

RATTAN VINE.

Creek- and river-swamps. TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, TELFAIR.

More common in the Lower Oligocene region, but extends

coastward to Camden County.

Virginia to Florida, Missouri, and Texas, in the coastal plain;

also in Northwest Georgia (See Bull. Torrey Club 28 : 474.

rgo1) and adjacent Tennessee (Gattinger).

Leaf-anatomy described by Kearney, Contr. U.S. Nat. Herb.

2952 4042 (190.

ACERACE.

ACER U) Sp. Pl) ros 5.y 2754"

A. rubrum L.,1.c. MapLe. ReEDBUD.

Creek- and river-swamps, common. Fl. February. Probably

grows in every county in Georgia (including varieties or

closely related species which I have not attempted to dis-

tinguish).

Common throughout temperate Eastern North America.

(See maps in Bulletin 59 of the U. S. Bureau of Forestry,

1905.)

ZESCULACES.

ZESCULUS L., Sp. Pl. 344. 1753:

A. Pavia L., 1.c. BucKEYE.

Bluffs along the muddy rivers, near the inland edge of our

a eee

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 207

territory. BULLOCH, MONTGOMERY, wiLcox. Fl. March—

April. Common in the upper third cf the coastal plain,

to which it is almost confined in Georgia. I have never

noticed it above the fall-line, or nearer the coast than the

above-mentioned localities.

Virginia to Middle Florida, Missouri, and Texas, mostly in the

coastal plain.

CELASTRACEZ.

EUONYMUS L., Sp. Pl. 107. 1753.

E. Americanus L., |. c.

MONTGOMERY: Stallings’ Bluff on Oconee River; hammock

of Gum Swamp Creek west of Erick. DooLy: around the

Rock House. Fl. May—June. More common farther in-

land, all the way to the mountains.

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States south of

the glaciated region, mostly outside of the pine-barrens.

AQUIFOLIACE 2.

TEE Xe Spe le rane 1753

. opaca Ait., Hort. Kew. 1:169. 1789. HOoLty.

Hammocks, bluffs, etc. BULLOCH, EMANUEL, TATTNALL,

MONTGOMERY, DODGE, TELFAIR, COFFEE, WILCOX, BERRIEN,

pooLty. Fl. April-May. Grows nearly all over Georgia

in shaded places, but nowhere abundant.

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States south of

latitude 41°, but said to be wanting in the higher mountains.

. vomitoria Ait., Hort. Kew. 1 :170. 1789.

EMANUEL: Hammock of Little Ohoopee River; MONTGOMERY:

Sand-hills.of Gum Swamp Creek. So rare thatit may be

doubted if it is indigenous in our territory. More common

in the maritime counties.

Virginia to Florida and Texas, mostly near the coast.

Leaf-anatomy studied by Kearney, Contr. U. S. Nat. Herb.

5 : 296-297. 1900.

. myrtifolia Walt., Fl. Car. 241. 1788.

Usually in cypress ponds; a handsome shrub or small tree

208 HARPER

(See Torreya 5: 164. 1905.). Noted in every county ex- —

cept Emanuel, Laurens, Dodge, Telfair, Wilcox, Worth, and

Thomas. Especially abundant in the central part of

BERRIEN County, but elsewhere one is not likely to see it —

every day. Extends inland to Sumter County and coast-

ward to the vicinity of Okefinokee Swamp.

North Carolina to Florida and Louisiana, in the pine-barrens.

I. decidua Walt., Fl. Car. 241. 1788.

Only in swamps of the muddy rivers, usually associated with

Quercus lyrata. BULLOCH, MONTGOMERY, TELFAIR, COFFEE.

Fl. March. Extends inland to the Paleozoic region.

Widely distributed in the Southeastern United States in muddy

places (therefore not to be expected in the mountains).

I. ambigua (Mx.) Chapm., Fl. 270. 1860; Robinson, Syn. Fl.

N. A. 1:389. 1897; Loesener, Monog. Aquit 482—s78

IQOT.

Cassine Caroliniana Walt., Fl. Car. 242. 1788. Not of Lam.,

1783.

Ilex Carolimmana (Walt.) Trel., Trams. Acad? Sei scan

5 :347. 1889. Not of Mill., 1768.

Hammocks and sand-hammocks. EMANUEL (980), MONTGOM-

ERY. Alsoin similar situations in Pierce County, a little

southeast of our territory.

North Carolina to Florida and Louisiana, in the pine-barrens.

I. coriacea (Pursh) Chapm., Fl. 270. 1860. Robinson, Syn. FI.

N. A. 1:390. Loesener, Monog. Aquif. 136-138. 1902.

“T. lucida (Ait.) T. & G.’’ of authors since 1878, but not Prinos

lucidus Ait., according to Loesener, |. c.

Non-alluvial swamps, etc. EMANUEL (S13), APPLING, COFFEE,

DOOLY, WORTH, COLQUITT, THOMAS. Fl. May—June. Ex- —

tends inland to the vicinity of Americus and Cuthbert,

and coastward to Bryan County and the vicinity of Oke-

finokee Swamp.

Virginia to Florida and Louisiana, in the coastal plain. Also

in Mexico (Loesener).

Leaf-anatomy described by Kearney, Contr. U.S. Nat. Herb.

5 3493. Igot.

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 209

I. glabra (L.) Gray, Man. ed. 2. 264. 1856. ‘‘GALLBERRY.”’

Intermediate and moist pine-barrens and branch-swamps;

very common throughout. Fl. late spring. Widely dis-

tributed in South Georgia, and reported once from Middle

Georgia (C. L. Boynton, Biltmore Bot. Stud. 1: 144-145.

1902). A valuable honey plant. The bushes are some-

times used as coarse brooms for sweeping yards.

Nova Scotia to central Florida and Louisiana, mostly in the

coastal plain. (See Rhodora 7:74. 1905.)

Leaf-anatomy described by Kearney, Contr. U. S. Nat. Herb.

Bi 492: TOOL.

CYRILLACEA.

CLIFTONIA Banks; Gaert. f., Fr. & Sem. 3 : 246. pl. 225. f. 5.

1805.

C. monophylla (Lam.) Sarg., Silva N. A. 2:7. pl. 52. 1891.

peloveny..””

C. ligustrina (Willd.) Spreng., Syst. 2 : 316. 1825.

Non-alluvial branch- and creek-swamps, etc.; common. Noted

in every county except Screven, Laurens, Dodge, and Worth,

_and it probably grows in them too. Fl. March—April.

Never seen northwest of the Altamaha Grit escarpment,

but extends in the other direction to within about 25 miles

of the coast. Its distribution in Georgia is thus much like

that of Pinckneya and Nyssa Ogeche (see Bull. Torrey Club

32:147. 1905). Usually a shrub, but arborescent in the

larger swamps. Its wood is said to be used to some ex-

tent for hames, and its flowers are an important source of

honey.

Extreme southern South Carolina to southeastern Louisiana,

in the pine-barrens.

CYRILLA L., Mant. 150. 1767.

C. racemiflora L., 1. c. ‘‘Tyty.”’

Branch- and creek-swamps, etc.; often with the preceding but

adapted to more alluvial conditions. Noted in every county

except Screven, Laurens, and Appling, but not quite so

abundant in our territory as Clijtonia. Fl. June-July. Has.

210 HARPER

a wider range in Georgia than the preceding, extending

inland to Chattahoochee County in the Cretaceous region,

up the Flint River to the Pine Mountains (see Bull. Torrey

Club 30:294. 1903), and coastward to Glynn County

and Okefinokee Swamp. Its maximum dimensions are less

than those of Cliftonia, but it is equally important as a

honey plant. Not a true evergreen, but most of the leaves

persist well into the winter season.

Virginia to Florida and Texas, in the coastal plain (with the

exception above noted).

ANACARDIACEZ:.

RHUS L., Sp. Pl. 265. 1753. SUMAC.

RK: copaliina L.; Sp. Pll 26627 2753:

Dry pine-barrens, hammocks, etc. (7. e., in places where the

flora has been largely derived from farther north). Fre-

quent, but not abundant. Noted in most of the counties.

Fl. July-Sept. Never arborescent in our territory. Widely

distributed over the state, in various habitats, often a weed

in old fields in the northern portions.

Ranges nearly throughout the Eastern United States, but not

everywhere native.

R. aromatica Ait., Hort. Kew. 1:367. 1789.

witcox: Upper Seven Bluffs on the Ocmulgee, May 17, 1904.

Scarcely belongs to our flora, but common in several counties

in the Eocene region, where it flowers in March.

North to Vermont and Minnesota, west to Texas.

-R. Vernix L. (in part), Sp. Pl. 265. 1753. Porson SuMAc.

Branch-swamps, sand-hill bogs, etc. SCREVEN, EMANUEL,

TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, DODGE, COFFEE, WILCOX, IRWIN,

BERRIEN, DOOLY, WORTH, COLQUITT. Less common in

other parts of the coastal plain, and rare in Middle Georgia.

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States, ae in

the glaciated region and coastal plain.

R. Toxicodendron L., Sp. Pl. 266. 1753. Porson Oak.

Dry pine-barrens and sand-hills; not common. BULLOCH (948).

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 211

TATTNALL, COFFEE, BERRIEN. Pretty well scattered over

the state.

New Jersey (?) to Florida and Texas.

R. radicans L., 1. c. Porson Oak.

Creek- and river-swamps and other damp shaded places.

SCREVEN, TELFAIR, COFFEE, BERRIEN. Fl.May. More com-

mon farther inland.

_ Widely distributed in the Eastern United States, apparently

mostly a weed in the North.

EMPETRACE.

CERATIOLA Mx., Fl. 2: 222. 1803.

C. ericoides Mx., l. c. “‘ROSEMARY.”’

For illustrations see Curt. Bot. Mag., 54: pl. 2758. 1827;

Bolen lore. Club !30 2284.7. 2. s903, and pl. «x1, 7.2. of

this volume.

’ EMANUEL: Sand-hammock on Fifteen Mile Creek near Rose-

mary Church, June 28, 1901 (975). Known also from the

fall-line sand-hills in Richmond County, where it grows

larger and more luxuriantly; and reported from the sand-

hills of Brier Creek, at the northwestern corner of Burke

County, by Croom (Am. Jour. Sci. 26: 315. 1834. See also

Bull. Torrey Club 32 : 160. 169, 1905.)

South Carolina to central Florida and Mississippi, in the

coastal plain. Our plant bears a striking superficial re-

semblance to species of Darwinia and Calycothrix, two

Myrtaceous genera of western Australia.

EUPHORBIACE.

EUPHORBIA L., Sp. Pl. 450. 1753.

E. Floridana Chapm., Fl. 401. 1860.

Only in the extreme southwest end of our territory. DECATUR:

High sand-hills beyond Recovery, Aug. 14,1903 (1931).

Known otherwise only from West Florida and southwestern

Miaibaman (see Bulle Torrey Club 32 : 162. 1905.)

Be corollata, Us) Sp. Pi. 450. 1753.

Sand-hills, dry pine-barrens, etc.; not common. MONTGOMERY

COFFEE (12455), IRWIN, BERRIEN, COLQUITT, THOMAS. FI.

212 ; HARPER

April-Nov. More common farther inland. A weed in old

fields in Middle Georgia.

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States, but natural

range uncertain.

E. eriogonoides Small, Bull. Torrey Club 25 :614. 1808.

Normally in intermediate pine-barrens; rare. BULLOCH:

near Bloys (846); BERRIEN: near Adel (2196). Fl. May—

June. These are probably the only natural stations known

for it. At the type-locality (Darien Junction, McIntosh

Co.), also near Pinebloom and Tifton, and in Wayne County

between Jesup and Screven, it grows in rather damp sand

along railroads. Mr. Curtiss’s specimen from Pearson,

COFFEE Co. (see p. 124) had a similar habitat.

Reported also from Florida, probably in similar situations. -

E. gracilis Ell., Sk. 2: 657. 1824.

E. gracilis rotundifolia Wood, Class-book 627. 1861.

Normally on sand-hills, more rarely in dry pine-barrens.

BULLOCH (826), EMANUEL, TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, TEL-

FAIR, COFFEE, DECATUR. Fl. April-Aug. Extends inland

(naturally) to the vicinity of Dublin and Hawkinsville,

and coastward to Bryan and Charlton Counties. More

common as a weed along railroads, like the preceding,

extending as far inland as Sandersville in this way. Early

in the season it is almost leafless. When fully developed

its leaves vary from linear to orbicular, or even broader.

(Wood’s variety is nothing but one of the extreme varia-

tions, connected with the other forms by all possible

gradations.) E. Ipecacuanhe L., which replaces this on the

fall-line sand-hills of Richmond County, exhibits similar

variations, as has been noted by Chapman, Wood, DeVries,

and others.

South Carolina to Florida, in the coastal plain.

JES WAC IOI EOE S05 Wella Zs isce Vin isete

A common weed, mostly along railroads. Still commoner

in the older-settled parts of the state. Seems to grow be-

tween the rails of every railroad in the Eastern United

States (from Massachusetts to Florida at least).

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA Diltss

Throughout the United States east of the Rocky Mountains,

but natural range and habitat unknown.

E. cordifolia Ell., Sk. 2: 656. 1824.

COFFEE: Hammocks and sand-hills of Seventeen Mile Creek;

rather rare. Known also from Richmond (A. Cuthbert),

Dooly, and Sumter Counties, farther inland, and Cumber-

land Island.

South Carolina to central Florida and Mississippi, in the

coastal plain.

JATROPHA L., Sp. Pl. 1006. 1753.

eestimulosa’ Mx., Fl. 2: 216. 1803. “NETTLE.”’

Sand-hills and dry pine-barrens; not common, and still less

abundant. BULLOCH, EMANUEL, MONTGOMERY, COFFEE, BER-

RIEN, THOMAS. Fl. April-Sept. Inland to Middle Geor-

gia and coastward to Cumberland Island.

Virginia to South Florida, Arkansas, and Texas, mostly in the

coastal plain.

STILLINGIA L., Mant. 1:19. 1767.

S. sylvatica L., Mant. 1: 126. 1767. “‘QUEEN’s DELIGHT.”

Dry pine-barrens and sand-hills; common but not very abun-

dant. Fl. AprilJuly. Pretty widely distributed over

the coastal plain of Georgia, and seen once in Newton

County, Middle Georgia.

Virginia to central Florida, Arkansas, and Texas, confined to

the coastal plain as far as known, with the above-mentioned

exception.

S. aquatica Chapm., Fl. 405. 1860.

Cypress ponds; rather rare. TATTNALL, APPLING, COFFEE,

BERRIEN. Fl. April—July. Extends inland to Ellaville (see

Bull. Torrey Club 27: 429. 1900), in the Eocene region, and

the pine-barrens of Sumter and Lee Counties, in the Lower

Oligocene region, and coastward to the vicinity of Waycross.

South Carolina to West Florida in the coastal plain, and only in

the pine-barrens as far as known, with the above-mentioned

exception.

For some morphological notes see Bull. Torrey Club 28 : 474.

Igol.

214 HARPER

SEBASTIANA Spreng., Neue Endeck. 2:118. pl. 3. 1821.

S. ligustrina (Mx.) Muell. Arg. in DC. Prodr. 15? : 1165. 1862.

Hammocks, river-banks, etc. TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, TEL-

FAIR, COFFEE. Fl. June. Extends inland to the fall-line

in Glascock County, and to some extent coastward.

North Carolina to Florida and Louisiana, in the coastal plain.

TRAGIA L., Sp. Pl. 980. 1753.

T. linearifolia Ell. Sk. 2 : 563. 1824.

PI urens linearis Mx. Pl v2 3175.) Too2:

Dry pine-barrens and sand-hills; not common. BULLOCH

(834), WILCOX.

Also in Florida and southwestern Alabama.

CROTONOPSIS Mx., Fl. 2: 185. 1803.

C. linearis Mx., Fl. 2: 186. pl. 46. 1803.

Rock outcrops. TATTNALL, DOOLY (7956). Fl. summer. Also

occurs on granite outcrops in Middle Georgia.

Total range and habitat uncertain. C. spinosa Nash, which

grows in the lime-sink regions of Mitchell and Lowndes

Counties, may not be distinct from this.

CROTON L., Sp. Pl. 1004. 1753.

C. argyranthemus Mx., Fl. 2 : 215..1803.

Chiefly on sand-hills; less frequently in dry pine-barrens.

EMANUEL (984), TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, COFFEE, BERRIEN,

DOOLY, DECATUR. Fl. May—Aug. Extends inland to Dooly,

Mitchell, Miller, and Early Counties in the Lower Oligocene

region, and coastward to Liberty and Charlton Counties.

South Carolina to Florida and Texas, in the pine-barrens.

C. GLANDULosuS L., Amoen. Acad. 5 : 409. 1760.

Streets of Tifton, Sept. 27, 1902. More common in the older

cities of South Georgia. Fl. May—Oct.

Widely distributed in the Southeastern United States and

tropical America. Natural range and habitat unknown.

The North American forms have been referred to several

varieties, most of which are not known in a state of

nature and have probably originated since this country

was settled by civilized man.

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 215

POLYGALACE:.

POLYGALA L., Sp. Pl. yor. 1753.

P. cymosa Walt., Fl. Car. 179. 1788.

Chiefly in cypress ponds; common all over the pine-barren

region of Georgia (wherever such ponds exist). Fl. May-

Sept.

Delaware to central Florida and Louisiana, in the pine-barrens.

P. ramosa Ell., Sk. 2: 186. 1822.

Intermediate and moist pine-barrens; nearly as common as

the preceding, flowering at the same time, and having about

the same general distribution in Georgia and elsewhere.

Beinteae., Sp: Pl. 7os: 1753.

Intermediate and moist pine-barrens; frequent but not abun-

dant, throughout the pine-barren region of Georgia and a

little farther inland. Fl. April—Sept.

Long Island to central Florida and Louisiana, in the coastal

plain.

PY nana [Mx:| DC., Prodr. 1 3.328. 1815.

Dry and intermediate pine-barrens; not abundant. BUL-

LOCH (S71), EMANUEL, TATTNALL, COFFEE (713), BER-

RIEN. Fl. April-June. Not observed in other parts of

the state.

South Carolina to central Florida and Louisiana, in the pine-

barrens, with the exception of some outlying stations in

Alabama reported by Dr. Mohr (Contr. U. S. Nat. Herb.

Gi>550. 1901)

Eeeceuciata lu op. Pl 70) 1753.

Moist pine-barrens; not common. MONTGOMERY, COFFEE,

IRWIN, COLQUITT, DECATUR. FI. all summer. Pretty well

scattered over South Georgia, and extending inland to

Meriwether County (see Bull. Torrey Club, 30 : 294. 1903).

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States, mostly in

the glaciated region and coastal plain (see Rhodora 7:74.

1905).

216 HARPER

P. Harperi Small, Fl. 688. 1903.

BULLOCH: Rather dry (intermediate) pine-barrens near Bloys,

June 15, 1901 (896, type). More common in similar sit-

uations in the flat country: Effingham (Curtiss 6839, July

10, 1901), Chatham, Bryan, Camden, Charlton, and Ware

Counties. Fl. June-Aug.

Also known from Louisiana, and will doubtless turn up in other

states.

(?) P. Chapmani T. & G., Fl. 1: 131. 1838.

TATTNALL: Rock outcrops near Ohoopee River (1853) and

Pendleton Creek, also in intermediate pine-barrens near

Ohoopee. MONTGOMERY: Dry pine-barrens near Mount

Vernon (1565). iIRwin: Rather dry pine-barrens around

a shallow pond near Fitzgerald (7421). Fl. June-July.

Also in Lowndes County.

South to Florida and west to Mississippi, in the pine-barrens.

Pe anicarnata 7S pela Onan ee

Dry and intermediate pine-barrens; rather rare and incon-

Spicuous. BULLOCH, TATTNALL, APPLING, IRWIN, BERRIEN.

Fl. May—Sept. Inland to Sumter County, coastward to

Ware County, and at a few stations in the mountains.

New Jersey to Florida, Illinois, and Texas, mostly in the

pine-barrens.

Pe setaceas Vix. sh au2 ease

Intermediate pine-barrens. Even less conspicuous than the

preceding and probably still rarer. COFFEE (1439), BERRIEN.

Fl. May—July. Not known farther inland, but more fre-

quent in the flat pine-barrens toward the coast.

North Carolina to central Florida, in the pine-barrens.

P. polygama Walt., Fl. Car. 179. 1788.

BULLOCH: Dry pine-barrens near Bloys, June, 1901 (945).

More common farther inland, in Middle Georgia and else-

where. Fl. May—July.

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States, but probably

not everywhere native.

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 217

P. grandiflora Walt., 1. c.

Dry pine-barrens; rare. BULLOCH (958), IRWIN. Also in

Sumter and Charlton Counties. Fl. June—Sept.

south Carolina to central Florida and Mississippi, in the

coastal plain.

OXALIDACE:.

OXATIS E:, Sp. Pls 433. 1753:

O. recurva Ell.. Sk. 1:526. 1821; Small, Bull. Torrey Club

21 2471-474. Pl. 422. 1894.

SCREVEN: Dry pine-barrens near Sylvania, April 1, 1904

(2082). EMANUEL: Near Swainsboro; April 5, 10904.

Possibly not native. More common farther iniand, but

usually as a weed.

Widely distributed in the Southeastern United States, but

natural range and habitat uncertain.

LINACEZ.

EINUM Esp Ele 277. 27 53.

L. Floridanum [Planch.] Trel., Trans. St. L. Acad. Sci. 5 :13.

1886.

Intermediate pine-barrens; not abundant. BULLOCH (949),

TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, IRWIN, DECATUR. Fl. June—July.

Inland to Washington and Sumter Counties and coastward

to Ware and Charlton.

South Carolina to central Florida and Louisiana (?), in the

coastal plain.

LEGUMINOSE.

PHASEOLUS Le) Sp. Pl 723. 1753.

P. polystachyus (L.) B.S. P., Prel. Cat. N. Y. 15. 1888; MacM.,

Met. Minn. 312. 1892.

Wooded bluffs along the muddy rivers. MONTGOMERY:

Stallings’ Bluff; TELFAIR: near Lumber City; wiLcox:

Upper Seven Bluffs. Fl. June. More common farther

inland and northward.

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States.

218 HARPER

APIOS Moench, Meth. 165. 1794.

A. tuberosa Moench, 1. c.

COLQUITT: Branch-swamps near Moultrie, Sept. 23, 1902,

Aug. 22, 1903. Fl. August. Known also from Sumter

and Camden Counties.

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States.

CLITORIA Lz, Sp.) Pl 75s-en see

C. Mariana L., 1. c.

Sand-hills; rare. BULLOCH, MONTGOMERY. . Fl. May—Aug.

Also in Middle Georgia, in Sumter County, and on Cumber-

land Island, usually as a weed.

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States, but natural

range and habitat uncertain.

BRADBURYA Raf., Fl. Lud. ro4. 1817.

B. Virginiana (L.) Kuntze, Rev. 1: 164. 1801.

MONTGOMERY: Bluff along Oconee River above Ochwalkee,

July 1, 1903. More common in the upper third of the

coastal plain, but usually a weed.

Maryland to South Florida, Arkansas, and Texas, in the

coastal plain; also in tropical America, where it perhaps

originated.

GALACTIA P. Br., Hist. Jam. 298. 1756.

°G. mollis Mx., Fl. 2:61. 1803.

BULLOCH: Dry pine-barrens near Bloys (825). TATTNALL:

Sandy west bank of Ohoopee River, June 24, 1903. Also in

Dooly, Sumter, and Lee Counties, in the Lower Oligocene

region.

North Carolina to Florida, in the pine-barrens.

G. regularis (L.) B. S..P., Prel. Cat.-N. Y. 14. 2888-eSaibtar

Mem. Torrey Club 5: 208. 1802.

Sand-hills, especially toward the hammocks at their bases.

TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, TELFAIR, COFFEE (1450), BERRIEN.

Fl. June-July. Inland to Richmond County and coast-

ward to Effingham.

New York to Florida and Louisiana, in the coastal plain.

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 219

G. erecta (Walt.) Vail, Bull. Torrey Club 22 : 502. 1895.

_ Dry pine-barrens; infrequent. BULLOCH (824), EMANUEL,

MONTGOMERY, COFFEE, IRWIN. Fl. June-July. Also in

Johnson, Laurens, and Sumter Counties, in the Lower

Oligocene region.

North Carolina to West Florida and Louisiana, in the pine-

barrens.

ERYTHRINA L., Sp. Pl. 706. 1753.

E. herbacea L., 1. c.

Figured in Meehan’s Native Flowers and Ferns II. 2 : 45-48.

PITIE. 1880:

Hammocks; rare. COFFEE, witcox. Fl. May. Also occurs

in a few similar places along the Oconee, Flint, and Chat-

tahoochee Rivers, in the older parts of the coastal plain.

North Carolina (?) to South Florida and Texas (?), in the

coastal plain.

DOLICHOLUS Medic., Vorles. Churpf. Phys. Ges. 2 :354. 1787.

D. simplicifolius (Walt.) Vail, Bull. Torrey Club 26 :114. 1899.

“DOLLAR WEED.’ .

Sand-hills and dry pine-barrens; common but not abundant.

BULLOCH, EMANUEL, TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, COFFEE,

BERRIEN, COLQUITT, THOMAS. FI. April—Sept.

Virginia to Florida and Louisiana, in the coastal plain.

LESPEDEZA Mx., Fl. 2:70. 1803.

Eeenitta (.) Ell., Sk. 2:207. 1822.

Sand-hills; rather rare. DODGE (1975S), BERRIEN. Fl. Sep-

tember. More common farther inland,. particularly in

Middle Georgia.

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States, but often

merely a weed in old fields.

mecepens(l.) Bart. Prodr. Bl. Phila. 2:77. 1818.

coLguitT: Sand-hills of Okapilco Creek near Moultrie, Sept.

1902 (I06T).

General distribution and habitat like that of the preceding.

L. strRiATA (Thunb.) H. & A., Bot. Beechey 226. 1836. (JAPAN

CLOVER.)

220 HARPER

A common weed along roads and railroads, particularly in

and near towns. Now distributed nearly all over Georgia

and other southeastern states. Fl. Aug.—Oct.

Native of Eastern Asia.

MEIBOMIA Heist.; Fabr., Enum Pl. Hort. Helmst. 168. 1759.

(DEsmopium Desv.) BEGGAR-LICE.

M. tenuifolia (T. & G.) Kuntze, Rev. 1:198. 1891.

Sand-hills and dry pine-barrens. . IRWIN, BERRIEN, COLQUITT

(1660). Fl. Sept.—Oct.

North Carolina to Florida and Louisiana, in the coastal plain.

M. Michauxii Vail, Bull. Torrey Club 23:140. 18096.

Desmodium rotundtfolium (Mx.) DC., Prodr. 2 :330. 1825.

Wooded bluffs along the muddy rivers. TELFAIR: Near Lum-

ber City; witcox: Upper Seven Bluffs. More common

farther inland and northward.

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States.

M. arenicola Vail, 1. c.

Desmodium lineatum (Mx.) DC., 1. ¢.

Dry pine-barrens; not common. MONTGOMERY, IRWIN (1704)

BERRIEN, COLQUITT. Fl. Sept—Oct. Also in Sumter and

Charlton Counties.

Maryland to Florida and Louisiana, in the coastal plain.

M. nudiflora (L.) Kuntze, Rev. 1:197. 1891.

MONTGOMERY: Wooded bluffs on both sides of the Oconee

River near Mount Vernon and Ochwalkee. Fl. June—Aug.

More common farther inland and northward.

A characteristic inhabitant of mesophytic forests nearly

throughout temperate Eastern North America.

STYLOSANTHES Sw., Prodr. 108. 1788.

S. biflora (L.) B.S. P., Prel. Cat. N. Y. 13. 1888; Britton, Mem:

Torrey Club 5 :202. 1894.

Sand-hills, dry pine-barrens, etc.; not abundant. BULLOCH

(946), EMANUEL, TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, COFFEE, BERRIEN,

DOOLY, COLQUITT, DECATUR. FI. May—July. Pretty well

distributed over South Georgia, also in several places in

Middle Georgia, where it is perhaps only a weed.

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 22k

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States. Also in

Mexico and Africa (?).

ZORNIA Gmel., Syst. 2: 1096. 1791.

Z. bracteata (Walt.) Gmel., 1. c.

Sand-hills; rare. EMANUEL, MONTGOMERY. Also farther in-

land, in Laurens and Sumter Counties, and on Cumberland

Island. Sometimes a weed.

Virginia to central Florida and Mexico, in the coastal plain.

Also in Africa.

ZESCHYNOMENE L., Sp. Pl. 213. 1753.

Peavaronmica. (i) Bb. 9. P. Prel Cat. N.Y: 13. 1888; Britton,

Mem. Torrey Club 5: 202. 1894.

BERRIEN: Edge of branch-swamp, Tifton, Sept. 19, r9g00. Not

seen elsewhere in the region, and perhaps not indigenous.

It is evidently a mere weed in some other parts of South

Georgia.

New Jersey to Florida and Louisiana, in the coastal plain.

Perhaps native near the coast.

KUHNISTERA Lam., Encyc. 3:370. 17809.

K. pinnata (Walt.) Kuntze, Rev. 1: 192. 1891.

Petalostemon corymbosus Mx., Fl. 2:50. 1803.

Sand-hills; common. Noted in every county except Screven,

Laurens, Coffee (which is rather surprising), Worth, and

Mitchell; but there is no known reason why it should not

grow in these also. Fl. Sept—Oct. Extends inland to the

fall-line in Richmond and Glascock Counties.

North Carolina to Florida and Mississippi, in the coastal plain.

PETALOSTEMON Mx., Fl. 2:48. 1803.

P. albidus [T. & G.] Small, Fl. 630. 1903.

Dry pine-barrens, etc. DODGE, WORTH, COLQUITT, THOMAS.

Fl. Aug.—Sept. More common in the Lower Oligocene

region, but occurs also in Camden County.

Also in Florida and southeastern Alabama.

AMORPHA L., Sp. Pl. 713. 1753.

A. fruticosa L., 1. c.

Swamps and banks of rivers rising north of our territory.

222 HARPER

TATTNALL, TELFAIR, COFFEE. FI. spring. Pretty well scat-

tered over the state in more or less calcareous situations.

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States, but dis-

tribution not fully understood.

A. herbacea Walt., Fl. Car. 179. 1788.

Dry pine-barrens mostly. BULLOCH (895, 942), TATTNALL,

MONTGOMERY, cCoLguiTT. Fl. June. Also in Lee and

Charlton Counties.

North Carolina to central Florida, in the coastal plain.

PSORALEA L., Sp. Pl. 762. 1753.

(Our three species if standing alone might well be regarded

as representatives of as many different genera.)

P. gracilis Chapm.;T. & G., Fl. 13303. 1838. (GAs syaonmyaaam)

Dry or intermediate pine-barrens. BULLOCH, EMANUEL (805),

witcox. Fl. May—June. Also in Chatham and Bryan

Counties, near the coast, and in Florida.

P. canescens Mx., Fl: 2:57. 1803. (PLATE SOG a hice

Dry pine-barrens and sand-hills; frequent but not abundant,

BULLOCH (S21), EMANUEL, TATTNALL, TELFAIR, COFFEE,

WILCOX, IRWIN, BERRIEN, COLQUITT, DECATUR. Fl. May—

June. Inland to Richmond (A. Cuthbert), Johnson, and

Sumter Counties, and coastward to Camden.

This, like the Bapttsias which it so much resembles; and fie

some of its western relatives, becomes a tumble-weed in the

fall.

North Carolina to central Florida and Alabama in the coastal

plain, mostly in the pine-barrens.

P. Lupinellus Mx., Fl. 2:58. 1803.

Sand-hills, or more rarely in dry pine-barrens. BULLOCH

(875), EMANUEL, TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, DODGE, WILCOX,

COFFEE. Fl. June-July. Inland to Johnson, Laurens,

Pulaski, Dooly, Sumter, and Lee Counties in the Lower

Oligocene region, and coastward to Bryan.

North Carolina to central Florida, in the pine-barrens.

TIUM Medic., Vorles. Churpf. Phys. Ges. 2:73. 1787.

T. apilosum (Sheldon) Rydb.; Small, Fl. 619, 1903. :

Astragalus glaber Mx., not Lam.

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 223

Sand-hills and very dry pine-barrens; not abundant,

BULLOCH (907, 914), EMANUEL, TATTNALL. Fl. June.

Also in Richmond (A. Cuthbert), Johnson, and Sumter

Counties.

North Carolina to Florida (?), in the coastal plain, mostly in

the pine-barrens.

T. intonsum (Sheldon) Rydb., 1. c.

Astragalus villosus Mx., not Gueldenst.

BULLOCH: Dry pine-barrens near Bloys, June 11, 1901 (872).

Also in Laurens and Dooly Counties, in the Lower Oligocene

region, where it flowers in March and April.

South Carolina to northern Florida and Alabama, in the coastal

plain.

WISTARIA Nutt.,Gen. 2 :115. 1818.

W. frutescens (L.) Poir., Tab. Encyc. 3 :674. 1823.

Branch- and creek-swamps; not common. EMANUEL (2092),

TATTNALL, TELFAIR, wiLcox. Fl. April-Aug. Probably

more common in the upper third of the coastal plain.

Virginia to Florida and westward, in the coastal plain.

CRACCA L., Sp. Pl. 752. 1753.

OPHROSTAN ers. iyi 2/5320." 1oO3.

C. Virginiana L., 1. c. “DEvIL’s SHOESTRING.”’

Dry pine-barrens and sand-hills, abundant throughout.

Grows nearly all over the state, even on mountain-summits

in Northwest Georgia (Pigeon Mountain, 2329 feet), but

less common north of the fall-line.

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States, perhaps

usually as a weed northward.

C. hispidula (Mx.) Kuntze, Rev. 1 :175. 189r.

Intermediate pine-barrens; rare. BULLOCH (S49), BERRIEN.

Associated at both places with Euphorbia ertogonoides.

Fl. May-June. Also in Chatham and Bryan Counties.

Virginia to Florida and Mississippi, in the pine-barrens.

INDIGOFERA L., Sp. Pl. 751. 1753.

I. Caroliniana Walt., Fl. Car. 187. 1788.

Sand-hills, hammocks, etc. BULLOCH, MONTGOMERY, DODGE,

224 HARPER

TELFAIR, APPLING, COFFEE, BERRIEN. Fl. June—Aug. Ex-

tends inland to the Pine Mountains of Middle Georgia (see

Bull. Torrey Club 30 : 294. 1903), and coastward to Cumber-

land Island, but in some places only a weed. |

North Carolina to Florida and Louisiana, in the coastal plain, —

with the above-mentioned exception.

TRIFOLIUM L., Sp. Pl. 704. 1753.

T:; REPENS L., Sp: Pl. 767. 1753. Ware Crowe

Lulaville and Fitzgerald, May 17, 1904. Common in Middle

Georgia and northward, introduced from Europe.

LUPINUS) Ly. Sp 3b lease.

L. villosus Willd., Sp. Pl. 3 : 1029. 1805. (PLaTtE XXII, Fie. 2).

Dry and intermediate pine-barrens; not abundant. TATTNALL

(2148), BERRIEN. Fl. April.

North Carolina to northern Florida and Louisiana, in the pine-

barrens.

L. diffusus Nutt., Gen. 2 :93. 1818. b

Sand-hills; not common. BULLOCH, EMANUEL (2097), TATT-

NALL, COFFEE, wiLtcox. Fl. April. Extends inland to

Richmond and Laurens Counties.

North Carolina to central Florida and Mississippi, in the

coastal plain.

Pe perennis: 2 isp.) Bivona 7530

t Ee gracilis Nutt., Jour. Acad: Pina. 17)= 115eewease

Sand-hills; not common. BULLOCH (969), TATTNALL, MONT-

GOMERY, COFFEE, BERRIEN. Fl. April. Also on the sandhills

of the Oconee River opposite Dublin, and on sand-banks

along the head-waters of the same river in Middle Georgia

(see Bull. Torrey Club 27:328. 1900).

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States, but often

in unnatural habitats northward.

Root-anatomy studied by W. E. Britton, Bull. Torrey Club

BO O05. 003.

CROTALARIA L., Sp. Pl. 714. 1753.

C. rotundifolia (Walt.) Poir., Suppl. 2:402. 1811.

Sand-hills, etc.; rather rare. BERRIEN, COLQUITT, THOMAS.

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF .GEORGIA 225

More common in the upper third of 'the coastal plain, and in ~

Middle Georgia, where it flowers May-—September. Also in

Glynn County near Brunswick.

Widely distributed in the Southeastern United States, also

in Mexico and South America, but not everywhere native.

C2 Purshn DC., Prodr. 2 :124. 1825.

Dry and intermediate pine-barrens; frequent but not abundant.

BULLOCH (S557), TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, COFFEE, IRWIN,

coLguiTT, THOMAS. FI. May-June. Inland to Sumter

County and coastward to Ware.

South Carolina to South Florida and Louisiana, confined to

the pine-barrens or nearly so.

BAPTISIA Vent., Dec. Gen. Nov., 9. 1808.

B. perfoliata (L.) R. Br. in Ait. f. Hort. Kew. ed. 2.3.25. 1811.

‘““GOPHER WEED.”

Pericaulon perfjoliatum Raf., New Fl. N. A. 2:51. 1836.

Dry pine-barrens and sand-hills, abundant in the eastern part

of our territory. SCREVEN, BULLOCH, EMANUEL, TATTNALL, ©

MONTGOMERY, TELFAIR (eastern part, rare), APPLING (two or

three miles north of Baxley only), COFFEE (extreme north-

eastern corner). Fl. April-June. Coastward to the upper

edge of Bryan County, and inland to the fall-line sand-hills

of Georgia and South Carolina. Not definitely known from

the intervening Eocene region, or farther west than Telfair

County. Why its range is so restricted (much like that of

Elliottia) is an unsolved problem.

For description of some of its peculiar morphological features

see Gray, Am. Jour. Sci. III. 2 : 462. 1871; Ravenel, Proc.

eee eA S202 301-203" 1872.

B. lanceolata (Walt.) Ell., Sk. 12467. 1817.

Dry pine-barrens and sand-hills, principally the former.

Common in all the pine-barren region of Georgia, and as far

inland as Americus. Fl. March—April.

North Carolina to northern Florida and Alabama (Baldwin

Co.), in the coastal plain, very nearly confined to the pine-

barrens.

226 : HARPER

B. alba (L.) R. Br. in Ait. f., Hort. Kew: ed. "2) 3):

Dry pine-barrens, etc.;not common. TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY,

IRWIN. Fl. April-June. More frequent in the upper third

of the coastal plain, and inclined to become a weed.

Minnesota (?) to Florida (?); but distribution not well worked

out.

B. leucantha T. & G., Fl. 12385. 1840.

Swamps of the muddy rivers. monTGOMERY: Near Mount -

Vernon; COFFEE: Near Barrow’s Bluff. Fl. spring.

Distribution in Georgia and elsewhere not well worked out,

but said to be similar to that of the preceding. —

GLEDITSCHIA L., Sp. Pl. 1056. 1753.

G. aquatica Marsh., Arb. Am. 54. 1785.

River-swamps. SCREVEN and BULLOCH: Along the Ogeechee

River near Dover, June 19, 1901; TATTNALL: Along Ohoopee

River near Ohoopee, June 26, 1903. FI. spring. Also

in Laurens County a little north of our limits, and prob-

ably in many other places in the upper third of the coastal

plain. ;

Distribution not well worked out; but confined to the coastal

plain or nearly so. Reported from South Carolina to

Florida, Indiana, Missouri, and Texas, but not from Alabama.

CASSIA. Li Sp Bl 276), asee

C. Tora L., 1. c. CoFFEE WEED.

Streets of Tifton, Sept. 27, 1902. More common in and around

some of the older cities of South Georgia, especially

Americus.

Nearly throughout the Southeastern United States. Jn-

troduced from the tropics.

C, occrpEeNTALIS L., .Sp..Pl. 397, 17535 (‘Cormmeriieeu

With the preceding; also at Faceville, Decatur Co., Aug. 13,

1903. Has about the same distribution in Georgia as well

as in other parts of the world.

CERCIS L., Sp. Pl. 374. 1753.

C. Canadensis L., 1. c. REDBUD.

Not a characteristic inhabitant of our territory, but growing

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 224

only in those exceptional places with rich (perhaps cal-

careous) soil which constitute considerably less than 1%

of the whole area. On wooded bluffs along the muddy

rivers in BULLOCH, MONTGOMERY, atid WILcox, also near the

Rock House in Dooty and in the woods where the Lafayette

formation seems to be absent (see p. 110) in BERRIEN.

Farther south seen in Effingham, Charlton, Brooks, and

Thomas Counties. More common in the upper third

of the coastal plain, and in Middle and Northwest Georgia,

where it flowers in March.

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States between

New England and latitude 30°.

MIMOSAE.,

MORONGIA Britton, Mem. Torrey Club 5: 191. 1894.

M. uncinata (Willd.) Britton, 1. c.

Dry pine-barrens and sand-hills; not common. BULLOCH,

TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, COFFEE, WILCOX, IRWIN, BERRIEN,

Fl. May—June. (Perhaps includes M. angustata, which I

have never succeeded in distinguishing.) Also in Middle

Georgia, and coastward to Cumberland Island; sometimes

a weed.

Southeastern United States mostly.

KRAMERIAE,

KRAMERIA Loefl., Iter Hisp. 195. 1758.

? K. secundiflora DC., Prodr. 1:341. 1824. ‘“‘SAND-SPUR.’’

Sand-hills. BULLOCH (971), EMANUEL, TATTNALL, MONT-

GOMERY, TELFAIR, COFFEE, WILCOX. Fl. June-July. In-

land to Laurens County and coastward to Bryan. (See

Bull. Torrey Club 30 :336. 1903.)

Also in central and West Florida (but not reported from

Alabama). It may well be doubted whether our sand-hill

plant is identical with the type of this species, which came

from Mexico. The absence of the genus from Alabama

(as far as known) is perhaps significant. Its range suggests

that of Frelichta Floridana (which see).

228 HARPER

ROSACE.

PRUNUS ‘L., Sp) Pl. 472) 753)

P. Caroliniana (Mill.) Ait., Hort. Kew. 2: 540. 1789.

EMANUEL: Hammock of Little Ohoopee River, April 5, 1904.

Known at a few other points in South Georgia, but so rare

that its indigeneity might be questioned. It is commonly

cultivated in some of the older cities cf the state and readily

escapes.

Supposed to be native somewhere in the coastal plain between

North Carolina and Texas.

-P. serotina Ehrh., Beitr. 3:20. 1788. WILD CHERRY.

With the preceding, also near the Ocmulgee River in the

northeastern corner of COFFEE County. Very rare in our

territory, but increases in abundance toward the mountains.

Fl. March—April.

Ranges nearly throughout the Eastern United States, and said

to occur also in Mexico and Northwestern South America.

P. ANGUSTIFOLIA Marsh., Arb. Am. 112, 1785.) Wimp eeeome

IB (Glace, Nbc Il Rasa, ws.

Roadsides, old fields, etc. SCREVEN, BULLOCH, DODGE, COFFEE.

Rare in our territory, but common in the older parts of the

state.

Scarcely native in Georgia; believed to have been introduced

by the aborigines from somewhere westward.

P. umbellata Ell., Sk. 1:541. 1821. Hoc Puiu.

COFFEE: Woods near the Ocmulgee River opposite Lumber City,

Sept. 11, 1903. More common in Middle and Southwest

Georgia, both along rivers and as a weed like the preceding.

Fl. March—April.

South Carolina to Florida, Missouri, and Louisiana.

CHRYSOBALANUS L.

C. oblongifolius Mx., Fl. 1 :283. 1803. GROUND OAK.

(Figured without name in Abbot’s Georgia Insects, pl. 68.

1797.)

Sand-hills and very dry pine-barrens; rather common. Noted

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 229

in every county except Screven, Dodge, Worth, and Thomas.

Fl. June. Inland to Laurens and Dooly Counties in the

Lower Oligocene region, and coastward to Pierce and

Charlton in the flat country.

South to central Florida and west to Mississippi, in the pine-

barrens. :

CRALTAGUS La op. Bl 475. 1753... Haw.’

C. apiifolia (Marsh.) Mx., Fl. 1: 287. 1803.

Swamps of rivers rising north of our territory. EMANUEL,

TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, COFFEE. Fl. spring. Grows in

similar situations at several other stations in South Georgia.

Usually shrubby, rarely if ever a tree. .

Virginia to Florida, Missouri, and Texas, chiefly in the coastal

plain. :

C. estivalis (Walt.) T. & G., Fl. 1:468. 1840. May Haw.

C. lucida Ell. not Mill.

TELFAIR: Shallow pond between Scotland and Towns, seen

from train Sept. 10, 1903. TATTNALL: Bank of Ohoopee

River west of Reidsville (2760). Reported from BERRIEN

County by the natives. Most frequent in the Lower

Oligocene region.

south Carolina (?) to Florida and Texas, in the coastal plain.

©] vidis L., Sp. Pl. 476. 1753.

C. arborescens Ell., Sk. 13550. 1821.

Only in swamps of the muddy rivers. Ogeechee River near

Rocky Ford (also near Millen, just north of our territory) ;

Oconee River near Mount Vernon. Fl. March-April. More

common in the upper third of the coastal plain, and per-

haps also in the Paleozoic region.

North Carolina to northern Florida, Missouri, and Texas.

?C. Michauxii Pers. Syn. 2 :38. 1806.

C. glandulosa Mx., not Ait (?).

SCREVEN: Oak ridge two or three miles west of Sylvania, April

2,1904. TATTNALL: Sand-hills of Rocky Creek, June 24,

1903. Also in Richmond, Pulaski, and other counties of

the coastal plain.

North Carolina to Georgia.

230 HARPER

C. uniflora Muench., Hausv. 5 :147. 1770.

BULLOCH: Sand-hills and dry pine-barrens near Bloys, June,

1901. More common in the upper third of the coastal plain,

and in old fields in Middle Georgia.

New Jersey to Florida and Arkansas.

AMELANCHIER Medic., Phil. Bot. 1:155. 1789.

A. Canadensis (L.) Medic., Gesch. 79. 1793.

On bluffs and in other places where more or less mesophytic

conditions prevail. TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, COFFEE, WIL-

cox, DpooLty. Fl. spring. More common farther inland,

especially in Middle Georgia, where it flowers in March and

April.

Widely distributed in temperate Eastern North America.

A. sp. (See Bull. Torrey Club 33:237. 1906.)

EMANUEL: Sandy bog in pine-barrens near Graymont, June 6,

tgor (&r9). Also in Richmond County.

ARONIA Medic.

A. arbutifolia (L.) Pers.

Mostly in branch-swamps; frequent. BULLOCH, EMANUEL,

MONTGOMERY, TELFAIR, COFFEE, WILCOX, IRWIN, BERRIEN,

COLQUITT, THOMAS, DECATUR. Fl. March-April. Also coast-

ward to Camden County. Like Viburnum nudum, with

which it commonly associates, it is rare or absent in the

Lower Oligocene region of Georgia, but reappears in the

Eocene region and in a few moist sandy places in Middle

Georgia.

Newfoundland to Minnesota in the glaciated region, south to

Florida, Arkansas, and Louisiana in the coastal plain. Rare

in the intervening highlands. (See Rhodora 7:74. 1905.)

Leaf-anatomy discussed by W. E. Britton, Bull. Torrey Club

30 =595- 1903. .

. AGRIMONIA L., Sp. Pl. 448. 1753.

A sp.

pooLty: Around lime-sink east of Wenona, Sept. 1, 1903

(1961). Does not strictly belong to our flora, but rather to

that of the upper third of the coastal plain.

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 231.

j RUBUS L., Sp. Pl. 492. 1753.

R. CUNEIFOLIUS Pursh, Fl. 1:347. 1814. ‘‘BRIER-BERRY.”’

Roadsides, old fields, etc., and perhaps sometimes in dry pine-

barrens. BULLOCH, DODGE, WILCOX, IRWIN, BERRIEN, COL-

QUITT, and probably all other South Georgia counties. FI.

spring.

Connecticut to Florida, Missouri, and Louisiana, mostly in

the coastal plain, but natural range and habitat uncertain.

R. Nigrobaccus Bailey, Ev. Nat. Fr. 306, 370, 379. f. 59, 60.

1898. BLACKBERRY.

Damp woods and swamps, apparently only where the Lafayette

formation is thin or absent. COFFEE, BERRIEN. Also in

similar situations in Camden County and elsewhere in

South Georgia.

Owing to uncertainty of specific limits in this genus the

range of this cannot be given satisfactorily.

R. Trivialis Mx., Fl. 1: 296. 1803. DEWBERRY.

Dry pine-barrens, or perhaps oftener a weed. SCREVEN,

EMANUEL, BULLOCH. FI. spring. Common in old fields in

Middle Georgia.

Widely distributed in the Southeastern United States, but

natural range and habitat uncertain.

HAMAMELIDACE.

LIQUIDAMBAR L., Sp. Pl. 999. 1753.

L. Styraciflua L., l.c. ““Swert Gum.”

Common in river-swamps and on bluffs and rock outcrops,

also often in moist pine-barrens, where it is only a shrub

(and apparently sterile). Fl. March. Grows all over the

state, reaching its best development north of our territory,

in swamps or alluvial bottoms.

Common from Connecticut to Missouri, Florida, and Texas.

Also in Mexico and Central America, if it is all the same

species.

Leaf-anatomy studied by Kearney, Contr. U. S. Nat. Herbs

5:490. 1901. For a discussion of some other properties

of this species see Bull. 58, U. S. Bureau of Forestry.

232 HARPER

HAMAMELIS L., Sp. Pl. 124. 1753.

H. Virginiana L., 1.c. Witcu Hazev.

Hammocks, bluffs, etc.; frequent. BULLOCH, EMANUEL,

TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, DODGE, TELFAIR, COFFEE, WILCOX,

BERRIEN, DOOLY. Widely distributed over the state, more

common farther inland. Flowers from October to January

in Middle Georgia.

Throughout the Eastern United States north of latitude 30°.

SAXIFRAGACE.

ITEA WL, Sp: Pip roo..a75er

Toavarcinitca aL c

Chiefly in creek-swamps. BULLOCH, MONTGOMERY, COFFEE,

BERRIEN, COLQUITT. Fl. June—April. Coastward to Camden

County, and inland at least to Athens in Middle Georgia.

New Jersey to South Florida and Arkansas, most abundant

in the coastal plain.

Leaf-anatomy studied by Kearney, Contr. U. S. Nat. Herb.

5 :490-491. I90OT.

DECUMARIA L., Sp. Pl. ed. 2. 1663. 1763.

D. barbara L., l. c.

Only in the peculiar low woods already mentioned (see p. 110),

west and southwest of Tifton, BERRIEN Co., September,

1902. Also in Camden County, but more common farther

inland, at least as far north as Northwest Georgia, but per-

haps notinthe mountains. Fl. May.

Virginia to Florida and Louisiana.

Leaf-anatomy studied by Kearney, Contr. U. S. Nat. Herb.

BUNAgT)) LOOE:

SARRACENIACE.

SARRACENIA L., Sp. Pl. 510. 1753. PITCHER PLANTS.

S. minor Walt., Fl. Car. 153. 1788.

S. variolaris Mx. Fl. 1:310. 1803. (See Bull. Torrey Club

30 : 331-332. 1903.)

Moist and intermediate pine-barrens; common (but not

as abundant as the next) in every county except Decatur.

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 233

Fl. April-May. Also in every county in the flat country,

and inland to Johnson, Sumter, and Early Counties in

the Lower Oligocene region.

North Carolina to central and Middle Florida, strictly confined

to the pine-barrens.

Suitlavayl:, 1. c. . PircHers.”

Probably the most abundant and conspicuous herb in our

_ moist pine-barrens. Much more rarely in branch-swamps

and shallow ponds. Noted in every county in our territory

except Laurens and Decatur (see plate XXIII). Its inland

limit coincides very closely with the Altamaha Grit escarp-

ment, not extending beyond it more than a mile or two,

if at all (see Bull. Torrey Club 32 :147. 1905). FI. April.

Toward the coast it extends only to Effingham, Wayne,

Pierce, Ware, Lowndes, and Brooks Counties in the flat

country. In other states its range is not so restricted, for

it has been found above the fall-line in Virginia and

North Carolina (see Torreya 3 :123-124. 1903).

Dinwiddie County, Virginia (see Torreya 4:123. 1904), to

northern Florida and Alabama, mostly in the coastal

plain. Also in western North Carolina (Small & Heller.)

S-cubra Walt., Fl. Car: 152.1788.

Sand-hill bogs and moist pine-barrens; ratherrare. BULLOCH,

EMANUEL (SIO), TATTNALL (2147), MONTGOMERY (1871). FI.

April. Known otherwise in the state only from Richmond

and Sumter Counties (see Bull. Torrey Club 27 : 428. 1900;

30 3334. 1903).

North Carolina to West Florida and Mississippi, mostly in the

coastal plain.

S. psittacina Mx., Fl. 1:311. 1803; Croom, Ann. Lyc. N. Y.

AppLOU, T3237).

S. calceolata Nutt., Trans. Am. Phil. Soc. 4:49. pl. 1. 1833.

S. pulchella Croom, Am. Jour. Sci. 25:75. 1833.

Moist pine-barrens, from BULLOCH to COLQuITT, inland to WIL-

cox, and coastward to Charlton County. Abundant but

inconspicuous; usually with S. minor or S. flava or both

ofthem. Fl. April. Never seen northwest of the Altamaha

234 HARPER

Grit escarpment. (Michaux reported it from Augusta,

but that is almost certainly an error, as the plant has not

been seen within 60 miles of there since Michaux’s time.)

South to Florida and west to Louisiana, in the pine-barrens.

S. purpurea L., Sp. Pl. 510. 1753.

TATTNALL: Sand-hill bog near Reidsville, April 26, 1904,

past flowering (2151). Known from only one or two other

stations in Georgia (see Bull. Torrey Club 31 :23. 1904).

Ranges throughout the glaciated region of the northern states

and adjacent Canada, and in the coastal plain from North

Carolina to Middle Florida and West Tennessee, but absent

from most of the intervening territory (see Rhodora 7:74.

1905).

The following natural hybrids have been noticed in ourterritory,

each in moist pine-barrens in company with both parents.

S. flava x minor Harper, Bull. Torrey Club 30: 332. 1903.

31:22. 1904. 32.2462. 7. 4. To05: (Gee plate ee eenyeans

1, and plate XXV, fig. 2).

BULLOCH (855), COFFEE (1437).

Also reported from South Carolina (Macfarlane, Trans. &

IPTROC, EXO SOs IPB TE 8 AAO), - ROCA).

S. minor x psittacina Harper, Bull. Torrey Club 33:

COFFEE, WILCOX, IRWIN (2217), COLQUITT.

Not known elsewhere.

DROSERACE.,

DROSERA L., Sp. Pl. 281. 1753.

D. filiformis Raf., Med. Rep. II. 5 :360. 1808.

coLguitr: Abundant in moist pine-barrens at several stations

within a few miles of Moultrie (7645) and Autreyville. Not

seen in flower or fruit. Also occurs in Thomas County,

a little south of our limits, but not known in other parts of

the state.

Massachusetts to Delaware, and Georgia to West Florida and

Mississippi, in the coastal plain; but there seem to be some

considerable gaps in its range; or perhaps the Bon Aer and

southern plants are not identical.

OE ae

one

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 235

? D. capillaris Poir., Encyc. 6:299. 1804.

Moist pine-barrens; common but inconspicuous. Probably

grows in every county in the region, but only noted in

BULLOCH, MONTGOMERY, DODGE, TELFAIR, COFFEE, WILCOX,

IRWIN, BERRIEN, COLQUITT, and DECATUR. FI. June—Aug.

Ranges nearly throughout South Georgia, wherever the

Columbia sand occurs.

Our plant does not agree exactly with published descriptions

of D. capillaris, and might just about as well be D.

brevijolia Pursh. ‘These two species are said to range from

North Carolina to Florida and Louisiana in the coastal plain.

The fact that the whole foliage of this plant (whichever species

it may be) is red is rarely if ever mentioned in descriptions.

CAPPARIDACE/.

ALDENELLA Greene, Pittonia 4 :212. 1900.

A. tenuifolia (LeConte) Greene, 1. c.

Polanisia tenurjolia (LeConte) T. &. G., Fl. 1: 123. 1838.

Sand-hills and sand-hammocks; rather rare. TATTNALL (1861),

MONTGOMERY. Fl. June-Aug. Also in Liberty, McIntosh,

Wayne, and Pierce Counties in the flat country.

Reported also from Florida and southeastern Alabama.

CRUCIFERA.

WAREA Nutt., Jour. Acad. Phila. 7:83. 1834.

W. cuneifolia (Muhl.) Nutt., 1. c. 84.

Cleome cunetfolia Muhl.; Nutt. Gen. 2:73. 1818.

Stanleya gracilis DC., Syst. 2 :512. 1821.

sand-hills, particularly toward the hammocks at their bases;

sometimes with the preceding, and almost as rare. MONT-

GOMERY (I9SI), TELFAIR, COFFEE. Fl. July—Sept. Also

in Richmond (A. Cuthbert) and Pierce Counties. Found

by Elliott on the fall-line sand-hills somewhere between

Milledgeville and Columbus.

South Carolina (Bartram, according to DeCandolle) to South

Florida, in the coastal plain.

This, the only native crucifer in our flora, has considerable

affinity with the preceding family, as was noticed by Nuttall

236 HARPER

when he described it. The similarity of its habitat to that

of the preceding species is probably not without significance,

LEPIDIUM L., Sp. Pl. 643. 1753.

L. Vircinicum L., Sp. Pl. 645. 1753. PEPPERGRASS.

A weed in the streets of Collins, Fitzgerald, Tifton, Nashville,

and doubtless other places. More common farther inland.

Widely scattered from Canada to Central America, but

natural range and habitat unknown.

CORONOPUS Gaert., Fr. & Sem. 2 : 293. 1791.

CC) pipymus (L.) J. E-Smith, FE Brit. 3 0onssesce:

Streets of Swainsboro, April 6, 1904. More common in older

cities.

Canada to Brazil; also in Europe. Natural range and hab-

itat unknown. ,

PAPAVERACE.

SANGUINARIA L., Sp. Pl. 505. 1753.

S. Canadensis L., 1. c. (BLOopROOT.)

wiLcox: Upper Seven Bluffs on the Ocmulgee River, May 17,

1904. Not properly belonging to our flora. More common

in the upper third of the coastal plain and farther inland,

ranging northward to Canada.

The Wilcox County plant is probably identical with a specimen

from Sumter County, without flowers or fruit, which was

made by Prof. Greene the type of his S. rotundtfolta (Pit-

tonia 5 :308. 1905). It does not seem best to take up

Prof. Greene’s species until more is known about it, however.

BERBERIDACE.

PODOPHYLLUM L., Sp. Pl. 505. 1753.

P. peltatum L., 1. c. (May Appz.)

BULLOCH: Wooded bluff along Ogeechee River near Echo,

March 31, and April 4, 1904, in flower (2079). Like the

preceding, this does not properly belong to our flora, but is

more common in the older parts of the country. It is

nowhere abundant in Georgia.

Ranges northward to Canada.

Anatomy described by Holm, Bot. Gaz. 27: 419-433. j. I-I0.

1899.

‘

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA Dat

NYMPHA ACE.

CASTALIA Sal., in Koenig & Sims, Ann. Bot. 2:71. 1805.

C. odorata (Dryand.) Woodv. & Wood in Rees Cycl. 6:—.

1808. WATER LILY.

Not a typical member of our flora, because it seems to require

permanent stagnant water. Grows in a pine-barren pond

‘near the Altamaha Grit escarpment in SCREVEN, and in an

artificial pond (Heard’s Pond) just within our southern

_ border in THomasS. FI. April—Aug.

Widely distributed in the glaciated region and coastal plain

of the Eastern United States, but mostly wanting in the

Piedmont region and mountains, or if occurring there prob-

ably introduced. (See Rhodora 7 :78. 1905.)

NYMPHAA L., Sp. Pl. sro. 1753.

N. fluviatilis Harper, Bull. Torrey Club 33: 234-236, f.2, 1906.

““BONNETS.’’

In slow-flowing water in small rivers and in swamps of the

larger rivers. In the Ogeechee near Rocky Ford and

Dover (also at several points north of our territory), in the

Ohoopee near Ohoopee and Reidsville, in the Oconee

swamps near Mount Vernon, in the Little Ocmulgee near

Lumber City, and in the Withlacoochee near Nashville.

Flowers in June, and doubtless also somewhat earlier and

later. Pretty widely distributed in South Georgia, from

Glascock and Crawford Counties to McIntosh, but not yet

known in other states (see original description).

N. orgicurata Small. Bull. Torrey Club 23 : 128. 1896.

Known in our territory only from Heard’s Pond in THomas

County, an artificial pond made by damming up an ordinary

branch-swamp. (1178). This happens to be the type-

locality, but the species is evidently not native there. (See

Bull. Torrey Club 30:331; 32:146. Rhodora 7:78.) It is

native however not far away, in the large lime-sink ponds

of Decatur and Lowndes Counties (see Bull. Torrey Club

30 :331 and errata. 1903; 31:14. 1904), and adjacent

Florida.

238 HARPER

BRASENIA Schreb.

B. purpurea (Mx.) Caspary.

Like Castalia, this does not properly belong to our flora. It

grows in ponds along the escarpment in SCREVEN and

WILcox, and adventive in Heard’s Pond, tHomas County,

with the preceding, and in accidental ponds (caused by

building a railroad embankment across branches without

allowing any outlet) in the northern corner of TELFAIR and

adjacent portions of popcre. Fl. May—June.

General distribution in North America about the same as that

of Castalia odorata. Said to grow also in Cuba, Central

America, Asia, Africa, and Australia, but probably it is

not native in all that territory, or else there is more than

one species involved. The same or a related species has

been found fossil in Europe.

MAGNOLIACEZA.

LIRIODENDRON L., Sp. Pl. 535. 1753.

L; Tulipifera Ul. c., (Quire TRpe)): | Porusmeg

Chiefly in branch-swamps, frequent throughout. Apparently

a little more abundant in coLquiTt than in any other county

in our region. Fl. April. Probably grows in every county

in Georgia, reaching its best development in mountain

valleys.

Ranges throughout the Eastern United States between lati-

tudes 30° and 42°.

MAGNOLIA L., Sp. Pl. 535. 1753.

M. grandiflora L., Syst. ed. 10. 2: 1082. 1759. ““Macno.ia”’!

LOBUOLIY. 4

Hammocks, bluffs, Altamaha Grit escarpment, etc.; frequent

but not abundant. EMANUEL, TATTNALL (1862), MONTGOMERY,

DODGE, TELFAIR, COFFEE, WILCOX, BERRIEN, DOOLY, WORTH,

THOMAS, DECATUR, and doubtless in the remaining counties

as well. (Magnolia P. O. in Mitchell County, which seems

to be on or near the escarpment, is in all probability named

1 How the technical name Magnolia could have penetrated to some of

the remotest rural districts is a problem for the philologist.

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 239

for this tree.) Fl. May—June. Widely distributed over

South Georgia up to within about ten miles of the fall-line.

(See in this connection Croom, Am. Jour. Sci. 25:314-315.

1834.)

North Carolina to central Florida, Arkansas, and Texas,

strictly confined to the coastal plain.

Weesianca iy op. Pl ied. 2, 755. 1703. “Bay.” “Wit Bay.”

A small tree in branch-swamps, very common. Also in non-

alluvial creek-swamps one of our largest trees (24 by 80

feet in COFFEE County), and in wet pine-barrens often

abundant as a knee-high shrub,! flowering and fruiting

freely. Noted in every county except Laurens and Mitchell

(but my work in the portions of those counties included in

this flora has been confined to about five miles of car-window

observations in each case). Fl. April-July. Ranges

throughout South Georgia, and inland to Carroll County in

western Middle Georgia, where it reaches a considerable

size. Abundant in Chattahoochee County, in the Cretaceous

region.

Massachusetts (one station, doubtfully native), Long Island

(rare) and eastern Pennsylvania to central Florida, Arkan-

sas and Texas, mostly in the coastal plain.

Leaf-anatomy described by Kearney, Contr. U.S. Nat. Herb.

5 :488-489. Igor.

ANONACEZ.

ASIMINA Adans., Fam. 2 :365. 1763. Pawpaw.

A. parviflora (Mx.) Dunal, Monog. Anon. 82. pl. 9. 1817.

Hammocks, bluffs, etc. EMANUEL, TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY,

TELFAIR, COFFEE, WILCOX, BERRIEN. Fl. March—April.

Widely distributed in Middle and South Georgia.

North Carolina to central Florida and Mississippi (?), in the

Piedmont region and coastal plain.

A. speciosa Nash, Bull. Torrey Club 23 : 238. 1896.

Only south of the Altamaha River, in dry pine-barrens, sand-

hills, etc. APPLING, COFFEE (1435), and the northeastern

1A similar form has been noted by Dr. Hilgard in Jackson County,

' Mississippi (Geol. and Agric. Miss., p. 368. 2816. 1860.)

240 HARPER

corner of BERRIEN. Fl. April-May. Also coastward in

Pierce, Charlton, and Camden Counties, and reported from

adjacent Florida.

A. angustifolia Gray, Bot. Gaz. 11 :163. 1886.

Dry pine-barrens and sand-hills; not common. TATTNALL,

MONTGOMERY, COFFEE, WILCOX, BERRIEN, COLQUITT. FI.

May. Inland to Lee, Early, and Decatur Counties in the

Lower Oligocene region (especially common around Bain-

bridge), and coastward to Cumberland Island and adjacent

Florida.

RANUNCULACEA.

Represented by only three species, none of them common.

THALICTRUM L., Sp. Pl. 545. 1753.

T. macrostylum (Shuttl.) Small & Heller, Mem. Torrey Club

BUSH erage

MONTGOMERY: Bluff along Oconee River near Ochwalkee,

July 1, 1903 (1867). More frequent in the lime-sink region.

Western North Carolina to Middle Florida.

CLEMATIS L., Sp. Pl. 543. 1753.

C. reticulata Walt., Fl. Car. 156. 1788.

COFFEE: Lower slopes of sand-hills of Seventeen Mile Creek

near Douglas, July 30, 1902. (1463). Also known farther

inland, in Sumter and Marion Counties.

South Carolina to Florida, Arkansas, and Texas, in the coastal

plain.

C. crispa L., 1. ¢:

Swamps; rare. TATTNALL: Along Ohoopee River; COLQUITT:

Branch-swamp near Moultrie. Fl. spring and summer.

Widely distributed in the Southeastern United States.

CARYOPHYLLACE.

ARENARIA L., Sp. Pl. 423. 1753.

A. Caroliniana Walt., Fl. Car. 141. 1788.

A. squarrosa Mx., Fl. 1 :273. 1873.

On sand-hills; not rare in the eastern part of our territory.

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 241

BULLOCH (QII), EMANUEL, TATTNALL, COFFEE. Fl. April—June.

Extends inland to the fall-line in Richmond County and

coastward to Bryan County.

Long Island to West Florida, in the coastal plain.

A. brevifolia Nutt.; T. & G., Fl. 1: 180. 1838.

TATTNALL: Flat rocks near Ohoopee River (2157). FI. early

spring. This is supposed to be the type-locality, or very

near it (see Torreya 4 :138-141. 1904). Known elsewhere

in the state only from granite outcrops in Middle Georgia,

where it is quite abundant in spots.

Occurs also in the upper parts of North Carolina and Alabama.

SAGINA L., Sp. Pl. 128. 1753.

Se PECUMBENS, (Ell.) T.&G., Fl. 22177. 1838.

A weed. Lulaville, May 17, 1904. More common in the

older-settled parts of the state.

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States south of

latitude 41°, but natural range and habitat unknown.

STIPULICIDA Mx., Fl. 1:26. 1803.

S. setacea Mx.,1.c. pl. 6.

Sand-hills, etc.; rather common. BULLOCH, EMANUEL, TATT-

NALL, MONTGOMERY, DODGE, TELFAIR, COFFEE, WILCOX,

BERRIEN, COLQUITT. FI. April—July, if not later. Less

common in other parts of South Georgia.

North Carolina to Florida and Mississippi, in the coastal plain.

PORTULACACES.

PORTULACA L., Sp. Pl. 445. 1753.

12 SeTICORIN IDEA IRN oe

A weed, mostly around dwellings; not common! TELFAIR,

COFFEE, COLQUITT. Not noticed farther north.

Doubtless introduced from the tropics.

TALINUM Adans., Fam. 2 :245. 1763.

T. teretifolium Pursh, Fl. 365. 1814.

Figured in Meehan’s Native Flowers & Ferns 2 :53-56. pl. I4-.

1879.

Rock outcrops. TATTNALL (1859), pooLy. (See Bull. Torrey

242 HARPER

Club 32 :143, 160. 7. r. 1905. The illustration in Torreya

4 :140 represents another station for it.) Known elsewhere

in the state only on flat granite rocks in Middle Georgia,

where it flowers from May to September.

New York to Alabama, mostly in the Piedmont region.

AIZOACE:.

MOLLUGO L., Sp. Pl. 89. 1753.

M. VeRTICILLATA L., 1: c.

witcox: Near dwelling, Queensland, May 17, 1904. More

common in the older-settled parts of the state.

Widely distributed in North and South America, but natural

range and habitat unknown.

NYCTAGINACE.

BOERHAVIA L., Sp. Pl. 3. 1753.

Bee PRE CTAG IY. silence

A weed in Tifton, Sept. 27, 1902. More common in larger and

older cities in other parts of the state (e. g., Athens, Ameri-

cus, Brunswick). Fl. June—Oct.

South Carolina to Mexico and the West Indies. Certainly

not native in Georgia, and probably introduced from the

tropics.

ILLECEBRACE.

GIBBESIA Small, Bull. Torrey Club 25 :621. 1808.

G. Rugelii (Shuttl.) Small, 1. c.

MONTGOMERY: Lower slopes of sand-hills of Little Ocmulgee

River, Sept. 10, 1903. (2990). Fl. Aug—Sept. Known

otherwise only from the lime-sink regions of Decatur and

Lowndes Counties, and a few places in Florida.

SIPHONYCHIA T.&G., Fl. 1:172. 1838.

S. Americana (Nutt.) T. & G., Fl. 1:173. 1838.

Sand-hills;not common. COFFEE (700), IRWIN, BERRIEN 1606).

Fl. Sept-Oct. Inland to Richmond County (A. Cuthbert).

South Carolina to Florida, in the pine-barrens, with the above

exception. “spn

S. pauciflora Small., Fl. 4o2. 1903.

' Hammocks and sand-hills. Perhaps intergrades with the

‘

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 243

preceding. BULLOCH (967, type), DODGE, TELFAIR, COFFEE.

Fl. June-Sept. Extends inland to the vicinity of Augusta

(A. Cuthbert) and Dublin.

_ Also in Florida.

PARONYCHIA Adans., Fam. 2 : 272. 1763.

P. herniarioides (Mx.) Nutt.; Spreng., Syst. 1:822. 1825.

Sand-hills and sand-hammocks. BULLOCH (912), EMANUEL

(975), TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, COFFEE, WILCOX. (See

Bull. Torrey Club 30: 328. 1903.) Inland to Taylor (H. M.

Neisler) and Pulaski Counties and coastward to Bryan.

North Carolina to central Florida, in the coastal plain.

Eetipatia Chapm., Fl. -ed. 2,607. 1883.

Hammocks, sand-hammocks, and sandy river-banks. EMAN-

UEL, TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY (15809), TELFAIR, COFFEE.

Extends inland to several points along and near the Flint

River in the lime-sink region, and coastward down the

Altamaha River to McIntosh County.

Not definitely known outside of South Georgia.

AMARANTHACE.

FRCLICHIA Moench, Meth. 50. 1794.

F. Floridana (Nutt.) Moq. in DC. Prodr. 137: 420. 1849.

MONTGOMERY: Sand-hills and hammock of Gum Swamp Creek

and Little Ocmulgee River, Sept. 10, 1903; a little past

flowering. Also occurs in sandy soil in Richmond, Sumter,

TELFAIR; Liberty, and Charlton Counties, but apparently

there only as a weed.

Reported also from several places in Florida and one in

Alabama, but whether native or not cannot be ascertained

at present. Material from the Great Plains region formerly

referred to this has been made the type of a new species

(F. campestris) by Dr. Small.

ALTERNANTHERA R. Br., Prodr. Fl. Nov. Holl. 416. 1810.

_A. REPENS (L.) Kuntze, Rev. 2 : 536. 1891.

_ A, Archyrantha (L.) ;

A weed along streets and near dwellings. In Helena and at

244. HARPER

a farmhouse about five miles north of Whigham. More

common nearer the coast, in Savannah, Brunswick, and

Thomasville.

Widely distributed in the tropics, and naturalized along the

southern coasts of the United States.

CHENOPODIACES. ~

CHENOPODIUM L., Sp. Pl. 218. 1753.

C. AMBROSIOIDES L. (or perhaps C. anthelminticum L.)

Streets of Tifton, Sept. 27, 1902. Common in older com-

munities.

Introduced from the tropics.

POLYGONACE.

ERIOGONUM Mx., Fl. 1: 246. 1803.

E. tomentosum Mx., l.c., pl. 24.

Sand-hills and very drv pine-barrens; common throughout

South Georgia, where the Columbia sand is present (see

Science, II. 16:68. 1902), from the fall-line to within

about 2c miles of the coast along the Altamaha River.

Fl. July-Sept. One can hardly imagine a Georgia sand-

hill without this plant on it.

South Carolina to central Florida and southeastern Alabama,

strictly confined to the coastal plain.

RUMEX L., Sp. Pl. 333. 1753.

R. HASTATULUS, Baldw.; Ell:, Sk. 1:416. 1817.

Fields and roadsides; often with Linaria Canadensis. BUL-

LOCH, EMANUEL, and probably other counties. Fl. April—

May.

New York to Florida, Texas, and Kansas, mostly in the

coastal plain. Natural range and habitat unknown.

POLYGONELLA Mx,, Fl. 2 : 240. 1803.

P. Croomii Chapm., Fl. 387. 1860.

Sand-hills. A diminutive diffusely-branched shrub. EMAN-

UEL, TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY (2985). Fl. September, and

perhaps later.

Not definitely known elsewhere. See Bull. Torrey Club

3211150100. L905,

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 245

fee. gtacilis (Nutt.) Meisn., in DC. Prodr. 14:80. 1856.

_ Sand-hills. DODGE (1977), MONTGOMERY, and doubtless else-

where. In corFree County I have collected a form (2070)

with linear acute leaves, but apparently otherwise identical.

Fl. September. Coastward to McIntosh County.

south Carolina to Florida and Mississippi, 1n the pine-barrens.

THYSANELLA Gray, Bost. Jour. Nat. Hist. 5 : 24. 1845.

T. fimbriata (Ell.) Gray, 1. c. (excl. descr.).

Sand-hills. TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, COFFEE, WILCOX, BER-

RIEN (2694). Fl. Sept.—Oct. Extends inland to the fall-

line sand-hills in Taylor County, where Elliott discovered it

Geen bully Dorey Club: 3n.:12.\ 109004), and coastward. to

Bryan County.

Also in Florida and southeastern Alabama.

BRUNNICHIA Banks; Gaert., Fr. & Sem. 1:213. pl. 45. f.

Pel 700.

B. cirrhosa Banks, 1. c.

Swamps of the muddy rivers. Oconee River near Mount

Vernon, and Ocmulgee River near Lumber City. Fl. July—

Aug. Extends down the Altamaha to Doctortown and

Barrington, but more frequent along the Flint and Chatta-

hoochee Rivers in the upper third of the coastal plain.

South Carolina to Florida (River Junction), Illinois, and Ar-

kansas, in the coastal plain.

ARISTOLOCHIACE.

ARISTOLOCHIA L., Sp. Pl. 960. 1753.

A. Serpentaria L., Sp. Pl. 961. 1753.

WiLcox: Upper Seven Bluffs, May 17, 1904. Does not prop-

erly belong to our flora, but is more common in the upper

third of the coastal plain and northward to the mountains

and beyond, much as in the case of Sanguinaria and Podo-

phyllum, already mentioned.

Connecticut to Michigan, northern Florida, and Missouri.

LORANTHACE.

PHORADENDRON Nutt., Jour. Acad. Phila. II. 1 : 185. 1848.

P. flavescens (Pursh) Nutt.; Gray, Man. ed. 2, 383, 1856. ‘“‘Mrs-

TEETOR.: ;

246 HARPER

In our territory its usual host is Nyssa biflora, and it grows

wherever that does, in swamps and ponds. SCREVEN, BUL-

LOCH, TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, COFFEE, WILCOX, IRWIN,

BERRIEN, DOOLY. Distributed nearly all over Georgia.

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States south of

the glaciated region.

Leaf-anatomy described by Kearney, Contr. U. S. Nat. Herb.

5 : 487. 19or.

MORACE.

MORUS L., Sp. Pl. 986. 1753.

M. rubra L., 1. c. MULBERRY.

In our territory only where the Lafayette formation seems to

be absent, in rich or slightly calcareous soil. MONTGOMERY:

Stallings’ Bluff; BERRIEN: Woods west of Tifton (see p. 110);

pooLy: Around the Rock House. Fl. spring. More com-

mon farther inland, particularly in the Paleozoic region

(Northwest Georgia).

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States.

ULMACE.

ULMUS Ly 9Sp.. Pin 2255 27535) ne

U- alata Mix iP Sie Ose

DOOLY: In lime-sink between Wenona and the Rock House,

near the Altamaha Grit escarpment, Sept. 1, 1903 (1963).

A large tree. More common farther inland, like most other

species growing along the escarpment.

Widely distributed in the Southeastern United States.

What is probably another species grows in some of the muddy

river-swamps.

PLANERA Gmel., Syst. 2 :150. 1791.

P. aquatica (Walt) Gmel., 1.c. HornBEam. (WaTER) Em.

River-swamps. SCREVEN, BULLOCH (2080), TATTNALL, MONT-

GOMERY, COFFEE. Fl. Feb.—March. Pretty widely dis-

tributed in South Georgia, from Crawford and WSs

Counties to McIntosh and Clinch.

North Carolina to Florida, Illinois, and Texas, in the coastal

plain.

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 247

CUPULIFERZ.

OUERCUS L., Sp; Plvoo4, 1753, OAxs:

» Q. alba L., Sp. Pl. 996. 1753. WuiTE Oak.

Rather rare in our territory. Usually on bluffs with Poly-

stichum acrostichoides (see Fern Bull. 13 :13. 1905). MONT-

GOMERY: Along Oconee River near Mount Vernon and

Ochwalkee; COFFEE: Barrow’s Bluff; pooLty: Around the

Rock House. More common farther inland, particularly

toward the mountains.

Throughout the Eastern United States north of latitude 209°.

Q. minor [Marsh.] Sarg., Gard. & For. 2 :471. 1889. Post Oak.

MONTGOMERY: Stallings’ Bluff, June 29, 1903. More common

farther inland, like the preceding, and having nearly the

same range.

Q. Margaretta Ashe. ‘Post Oak.”

Sand-hills, oak ridges, etc.; common. Ranges nearly all over

South Georgia.

North Carolina to Florida and Alabama, in the coastal plain.

Q. lyrata Walt., Fl. Car. 235. 1788. (Post Oak.)

Only in swamps of rivers which rise north of our territory;

usually with Jlex decidua. BULLOCH: Ogeechee River;

EMANUEL: Little Ohoopee River; MONTGOMERY: Oconee

River; TELFAIR: Ocmulgee River. More common in the

upper third of the coastal plain. Extends sparingly inland

to Columbia, Gwinnett (Small), and Carroll Counties, and

down the Altamaha to McIntosh. 5

North Carolina to Florida (?), Missouri, and Texas, mostly

in the coastal plain.

Q. Michauxii Nutt., Gen. 2:215. 1818.

Noted in our territory at each of the same places as the pre-

ceding, and on the same dates. Its general distribution in

Georgia and elsewhere is much the same, except that it

seems to range a little farther north.

Q. geminata Small, Bull. Torrey Club 24: 438. 1897. “‘LivE

Oax.”’

Sand-hills, hammocks, etc. Noted at several stations in

248 HARPER

TATTNALL, COFFEE (2050), and BERRIEN. Doubtless grows

in some of the other counties, but probably not in all, as it

seems to be confined to the lower half of the coastal plain,

like Cholisma ferruginea, Castanea alnifolia, and Serenoa.

Fl. April. In corrEe County it becomes as much as two

feet in diameter, and thirty feet tall. Its trunk is ascending

or curved, never strictly erect.

Ranges mostly southward, but distribution not well worked

out. Until recently confused with Q. Vuzurginiana. (See

Bull. Torrey Club 32 :465. 1905.)

Q. pumila Walt., Fl. Car. 234. 1788. ‘Oak RUNNER ”

Intermediate and dry pine-barrens; not rare. SCREVEN (2080),

BULLOCH (905), TATTNALL, TELFAIR, APPLING, COFFEE (1457),

IRWIN, BERRIEN, WORTH, COLQUITT, DECATUR. FI. March.

Common toward the coast, but apparently wanting in the

upper third of the coastal plain.

North Carolina to Florida, in the pine-barrens.

Q. digitata [Marsh.] Sudw., Gard. & For. 5:98,99. 1892. (SPAN-

ISH OAK): > REDO May 7

Dry pine-barrens. Noted only in coFFEE County, but doubt-

less occurs elsewhere in the region, where the Columbia

formation is thin or absent. Common farther inland, es-

pecially in Middle Georgia.

Widely distributed in the Southeastern United States north

of latitude 30°.

Q. Catesbei Mx., Hist. Chen. Am. pl. 29, 30. 1801. “‘BLACK

Jack.” ““TuRKEY Oak.”

On every sand-hill, and in dry pine-barrens; abundant through-

out. Fl. March. Pretty widely distributed in South Geor-

gia, and seen also on the rocky slopes of the Pine Mountains

(see Bull. Torrey Club 30 : 294. 1903). Usually a small tree

trunk rarely over a foot in diameter.

North Carolina to central Florida and Louisiana, in the coastal

plain (with the exception above noted).

Q. Marylandica Muench., Hausv. 5 :253. 1770. ‘“‘DOLLAR-LEAF

OAR io BLACK PACKS,

Dry pine-barrens, where the Lafayette loamis at or near the

a ee a ee a

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 249

surface. SCREVEN, BULLOCH, EMANUEL, TATTNALL, MONT-

GOMERY, APPLING, COFFEE, WILCOX, DOOLY, DECATUR. More

common farther inland, particularly in Middle Georgia.

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States south of

latitude 41°.

ener op. Pl oo5. 1753. Gn part.) ~~ WatER OAK.”

Q. aquatica {[Lam.| Walt., Fl. Car. 234. 1788.

Chiefly in creek-swamps with Acer rubrum; not very common.

SCREVEN, EMANUEL, TATTNALL, BERRIEN, DOOLY, COLQUITT,

THOMAS. More common in the upper third of the coastal

plain, and in Middle Georgia.

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States south of

latitude 39°. e

Q. brevifolia [Lam.] Sarg., Silva 8: 171. pl. 437. 1803.

Q. cinerea Mx. “‘TurKEyY Oak” (HIGH-GROUND WILLOW Oak).

sand-hills and dry pine-barrens throughout, usually with Q.

Catesbei and almost as common. A small tree, rarely a

foot in diameter. Ranges from the fall-line sand-hills al

most to the coast.

North Carolina to central Florida and Texas, in the coastal

plain.

Q. laurifolia Mx., Hist. Chen. Am. pl. 17. 1801. ‘“‘ WATER OAK.”’

The prevailing oak in hammocks and allied habitats SCREVEN,

EMANUEL, TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, DODGE, COFFEE, WILCOX,

BERRIEN. Pretty widely distributed in South Georgia.

Differs from its nearest relatives in being evergreen, like

most hammock trees, and therefore unmistakable in winter.

Virginia to central Florida and Louisiana, in the coastal plain.

Leaf-anatomy discussed by Kearney, Contr. U. S. Nat. Herb.

5 :295. 1900. Both Kearney and Small speak of this

species as deciduous, but it is decidedly evergreen in Georgia,

and Croom found it so in North Carolina (Cat. Pl. Newbern,

47. 1837.)

Q. Phellos L., Sp. Pl. 994. 1753. WuiLLow Oak.

Ocmulgee River swamp at Barrow’s Bluff, correE County,

May 14, 1904; and probably elsewhere in similar situations.

250 HARPER

Fl. March. Distribution in Georgia not well worked out,

but it is known to grow also in the Paleozoic region, and

around mayhaw ponds in the Lower Oligocene region. This

tree looks much like the preceding in summer, but in winter,

and still more so in early spring when the leaves are unfold-

ing, it is very distinct.

Staten Island to central Florida, Missouri, and Texas.

CASTANEA Adans., Fam. 2: 375. 1763.

C. pumila (L.) Mill. (no. 2), Dict. Gard. ed. 8. 1768. CHINQUAPIN.

EMANUEL: Rosemary sand-hills, June 28, 1901; MONTGOMERY:

sand-hills of Gum Swamp Creek, Sept. 10, 1903; WILCOX:

Upper Seven Bluffs, May 17, 1904. Grows also in Pierce

County in situations similar to that first mentioned, but it

is more common farther inland, all the way to the mountains.

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States south of

latitude 40°.

C. alnifolia Nutt., Gen. 2 :217. 1818. ‘“‘CHINQUAPIN.”’

C. nana Muhl.; Ell., Sk. 2:615. 1824; Kearney, Bull. Torrey

Club 21: 261-262. pl. 206. 1894; Small, Bull. Torrey Club

23: 126. 18096. :

C. alntfolia pubescens Nutt., Sylva 1:19. pl. 6. 1842.

Dry and intermediate pine-barrens. APPLING, COFFEE (2202),

IRWIN, BERRIEN. Fl. May. Common in the flat country

‘toward the coast, but not known farther inland.

South Carolina to northern Florida, in the lower half of the

coastal plain. Also reported from Arkansas and Louisiana

(Sargent).

BETULACE.

ALNUS Gaert., Fr. & Sem. 2 : 54. pl. 90.1791. ALDER.

A. rugosa (DuRoi) Koch, Dendrol. 2 :635. 1872.

In branch-, creek-, and river-swamps; not common. SCREVEN,

BULLOCH, TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, DODGE, TELFAIR, COFFEE,

witcox. Flowers in January, being probably our earliest

spring flower. More common farther inland, especially

in Middle Georgia.

Nearly throughout the Eastern United States.

;

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 251

BETULA L., Sp. Pl. 982. 1753. Burcu.

Beoniera i., |. c

Banks of creeks and rivers. SCREVEN, TATTNALL, TELFAIR,

THOMAS (1938). Extends down the Ogeechee, Canoochee,

and Altamaha Rivers to within about 20 miles of the coast.

More common farther inland, particularly in Middle Georgia,

and reaching its largest dimensions probably in Northwest

Georgia. .

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States outside of

New England.

OSTRYA Scop., Fl. Carn. 414. 1760.

O. Virginiana (Mill.) Willd., Sp., Pl. 4:469. 1805.

BULLOCH: Rich woods along Ogeechee River near Echo;

DODGE: Hammock of Gum Swamp Creek east of Eastman;

BERRIEN: Rich woods near Little River, southwest of Tifton.

Rare coastward, but more common farther inland.

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States and adjacent

Canada.

CARPINUS L., Sp. Pl. 998. 1753.

C. Caroliniana Walt., Fl. Car. 236. 1788. IRoNWwoobp.

MONTGOMERY: Oconee River swamp near Mount Vernon,

TELFAIR: Ocmulgee River swamp near Lumber City; DOOLY:

Lime-sink between Wenona and the Rock House. More

common farther inland.

Has about the same range as the preceding.

SALICACEZ:.

SALIX L., Sp. Pl. rors. 1753. WILLow.

S. nigra Marsh., Arb. Am. 139. 1785.

Banks of rivers, often with Betula nigra, usually overhanging

the water; not abundant. TATTNALL, (see Plate IX, Pig. 1.)

MONTGOMERY, TELFAIR, COFFEE, THOMAS. Also ina few wet

places away from rivers (TATTNALL, TELFAIR, and BERRIEN)

probably introduced in some way since the country was

settled up. Fl. spring. Widely distributed over the state

but most common in the older parts.

Throughout the United States, or nearly so.

252 HARPER

MYRICACEZ.

MYRICA L., Sp. Pl. 1024. 1753.

M. Carolinensis Mill., Gard. Dict. ed. 8. 1768. (BAYBERRY.)

(Included in M. cerifera by nearly all 19th century authors.)

Sand-hill bogs, non-alluvial swamps, moist pine-barrens, etc.

BULLOCH, EMANUEL (982), MONTGOMERY, COFFEE, IRWIN,

DOOLY, coLquitr. Fl. spring. Pretty well scattered over

South Georgia. . |

Nova Scotia to Lake Erie in the glaciated region, south to

northern Florida and eastern Louisiana in the coastal plain.

(See Rhodora 7:74. 1905.)

Leaf-anatomy described by Kearney, Contr. U. S. Nat. Herb.

5 F204. LOC.

M. cerifera L., 1. c: MyrtT Le.

BULLOCH: Rich woods along Ogeechee River near Echo (oppo-

site Rocky Ford), March 31 and April 4, 1904. BERRIEN:

Low rich woods west and southwest of Tifton, Sept. 29 and

30, 1902 (seepp.1i0, 111). Fl.March. Quite abundant near

the coast, and scattered pretty well over South Georgia,

reaching its best development probably in the Cretaceous

region. This species seems almost always to indicate the

absence of the Lafayette formation.

Maryland to South Florida, Arkansas, and Texas, in the

coastal plain.

Leaf-anatomy briefly described by Kearney, Contr. U.S. Nat.

Hlerb..5) 2204. ) Looe:

M. pumila [Mx.] Small, Bull. Torrey Club 23 : 126. 18096.

Usually in dry or intermediate pine-barrens. SCREVEN, EMAN-

UEL (992), TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, TELFAIR, APPLING,

COFFEE, COLQUITT. Common in the flat country toward

the coast, and extending inland to Sumter, Lee, and Early

Counties in the Lower Oligocene region.

North Carolina to Florida and Mississippi, in the pine baa

Also in upper Alabama (Mohr).

JUGLANDACE:.

HICORIA Raf., Med. Rep. II. 5 :352. 1808. ‘‘Hickory.”

H. aquatica (Mx. f.) Britton, Bull. Torrey Club 15 : 284. 1888.

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA Dae

Swamps of muddy rivers. Oconee River near Mount Vernon

and Ocmulgee River near Lumber City. Also in a few

localities coastward, but more frequent in the upper third

of the coastal plain.

Southeastern Virginia to central Florida, Illinois, and Texas,

in the coastal plain.

H. sp. Another species (perhaps more than one), grows in

hammocks in COFFEE, WILCOX, and doubtless other counties,

but I have never identified it. It is probably identical with

some species growing farther inland, very likely H. alba or

Hf. glabra.

SAURURACE.

SAURURUS L., Sp: Pl. 341. 1753:

S. cernuus L., 1. c.

River-swamps, cypress ponds, etc.; not common. SCREVEN,

MONTGOMERY, TELFAIR, COFFEE, BERRIEN. Fl. May. Scat-

tered over the state from northwest to southeast, but

apparently absent in most of the counties

Widely but erratically distributed over the Eastern United

States outside of New England. Its general as well as its

local distribution 1s difficult to explain.

ORCHIDACE/:.

EPIDENDRUM L., Sp. Pl. 952. 1753.

LARNANDRA Raf., Neogen. 4. 1825. (Based on the following

species. )

E. conopseum R. Br. in Ait. f. Hort. Kew. ed. 2, 5 :219. 1813.

Figured in Curt. Bot. Mag. 62: pl. 3457. 1835.

- Usually on Magnolia grandiflora in hammocks. MONTGOMERY

(1870), DODGE, COFFEE. Also in the latter county on M.

glauca in a non-alluvial swamp near by. Fl. June—July.

Extends inland to Dooly and Early Counties in the Lower

Oligocene region and coastward to Brooks, Thomas, and

DWeeatina ssce Bulli Gorey Club 32): 159. 1905.)

South Carolina to Florida and Mississippi, in the pine-barren

region and coastward.

254 HARPER

TIPULARIA Nutt., Gen. 2 :195. 1818.

PLEcTRURUS Raf., Neogen. 4. 1825.

T.discolor (Pursh) Nutt., 1. c.

(2?) Limodorum untfolium Muhl., Cat. 81. 1813. (nomen nudum.)

EMANUEL: Hammock of Little Ohoopee River, April 5, 1904.

More common in the upper parts of the coastal plain, and

northward. Also in Thomas County, a little south of our

limits. Fl. August.

Vermont to Michigan, Middle Florida, and Louisiana.

For notes on the mycorhiza of this species see Clifford, Bull.

Torrey Club 26 : 635-638. pl. 372. 1899.

POGONIA Juss., Gen. Pl. 65. 1789.

P, divaricata (L.). R. Br.in Ait. 1, Hort, Kewed. 2,5 7207s memar

Moist pine-barrens, especially near branch-swamps; not

common. BULLOCH (S83), EMANUEL (812, 816), COFFEE,

WILCOX, IRWIN, BERRIEN. Rarely as many as a dozen

specimens can be seen at one time. Fl. May—June.

New Jersey to northern Florida and Alabama, mostly in the

pine-barrens. Also in the mountains of East Tennessee

(Gattinger).

P. ophioglossoides (L.) Ker., Bot. Reg. 2: pl. 148. 1816.

In similar situations to the preceding, but commoner. BUL-

LOCH (2162), TATTNALL, COFFEE, WILCOX, IRWIN, BERRIEN,

coLguitt. Fl. April—May.

Widely distributed in the coastal plain and glaciated region

of temperate Eastern North America, but rare in the

mountains and Piedmont region. Also reported from Japan.

LIMODORUM L., Sp. Pl. 950. 1753.

L. tuberosum L., 1. c.

Moist pine-barrens. BULLOCH (877), COFFEE, WILCOX, IRWIN,

BERRIEN. Fl. May—July. Inland to the vicinity of Ameri-

cus and coastward to Charlton County.

General distribution in North America similar to that of the

preceding. Also reported from the Bahamas (Northrop).

L. graminifolium (Ell.) Small, Fl. 322, 1329. 1903.

In similar situations to the preceding, of which it is demere

i 3

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 255

only a reduced form. BULLOCH (851), COFFEE, BERRIEN,

Fl. May-July. Also in Bryan County.

North Carolina to central Florida and Louisiana, in the pine-

barrens.

HABENARIA Willd., Sp. Pl. 4:44. 1805.

H. blephariglottis (Willd.) Torr., Comp. 317. 1826.

Intermediate and moist pine-barrens and sand-hill bogs; not

common. MONTGOMERY, APPLING, COLQUITT (I944), DE-

catur. Fl. Aug.—Sept. Inland to the vicinity of Americus,

but probably more abundant in the flat pine-barrens toward

the coast.

Widely distributed in the glaciated region and coastal plain

(see Rhodora 7:73, 74. 1905). Also in Middle Tennessee

(Gattinger).

Hevetians (L.) R. Br.in Ait: f. Mort. Kew. ed. 2, 5 : 194. 1813.

Often with the preceding, and commoner. COFFEE, IRWIN,

WORTH, COLQUITT (1943), MITCHELL, THOMAS, DECATUR. Fl

July—Aug. Inland to Americus (and rarely in Northwest

Georgia), and coastward to Glynn and Camden Counties.

Range similar to that of the preceding, but extending farther

inland in the South and not quite so far west in the North

(see Rhodora 7 :73. 1905). :

Plants intermediate in appearance between this and the pre-

ceding, and probably hybrids, have been seen growing with

them in coLquitt and Lowndes Counties. The same pheno-

menon has been noted elsewhere by Dr. Morong (Bull. Tor-

rey Cli 20) 2 409). 1893):

WW, cristata (Mx.) R. Br., 1. ¢.

Moist pine-barrens and swamps; not common. COFFEE, COL-

QUITT, THOMAS, DECATUR. Fl. July—Aug. Also inland to

Sumter County, but I do not know how far coastward,

for I have probably sometimes confused it with the next.

New Jersey to Florida, Missouri, and Louisiana, mostly in

the coastal plain.

H. integra (Nutt.) Spreng., Syst. 3 :689. 1826.

Moist pine-barrens. DOOLY, COLQUITT (1948), DECATUR. FI.

256 HARPER

August. Not easily distinguishable from the preceding a short

distance away, and certainly more closely related to it than

to the following species. Occurs also in the flat country.

New Jersey to Florida (?) and Louisiana, in the coastal plain.

Also in Middle Tennessee (Gattinger).

H. nivea (Nutt.) Spreng., 1. c. (Plate XXV, Fig. 1.)

Intermediate and moist pine-barrens; not abundant. BuUL-

LOCH (852, 954), EMANUEL, TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, DODGE,

TELFAIR. Fl. June-July. Also in the Lower Oligocené

region in Sumter and Lee Counties, and coastward to

Bryan County.

Delaware and South Carolina to Florida, Arkansas, and Louisi-

ana, nearly confined to the pine-barrens.

BURMANNIACE.

BURMANNIA L., Sp. Pl. 287. 1753.

B. capitata (Walt.) Mart., Nov. Gen. & Sp. Pl. Bras. 1:12. 1824.

(See Torreya 1:34. ig01; Bull. Torrey Club 28: 470. 1901.)

Moist pine-barrens; not rare but very inconspicuous. DODGE,

COFFEE, IRWIN, BERRIEN (669), DOOLY, WORTH, COLQUITT,

DECATUR. Fl. Aug.—Oct. Seems to reach its inland limit

near Cordele, at the extreme edge of our territory.

North Carolina to central Florida and Louisiana, in the pine-

barrens. Also in the West Indies and South America (if

the tropical plant is correctly identified).

B. biflora L. ought to grow in our territory, but I have never

seen it there. Apteria, the related genus, is known at

several points in the Upper Oligocene region, just south of

our limits.

IRIDACE/.

IRIS @., sp. Pl 38) 2753.

I. versicolor L., Sp. Pl. 39. 1753.

Mostly in and near branch-swamps, more rarely around per-

manent ponds or in low woods. BULLOCH, TATTNALL,

MONTGOMERY, DODGE, TELFAIR, COFFEE, WILCOX, BERRIEN,

coLtguitt. Fl. April-May. Pretty widely distributed in

the pine-barrens of Georgia, but not seen in other parts

of the state.

Nearly throughout the glaciated region and coastal plain of

temperate Eastern North America. Also said to occur

throughout Tennessee (Gaitinger) and Alabama (Mohr).

SISYRINCHIUM L., Sp. Pl. 954. 1753.

S. Atlanticum Bicknell, Bull. Torrey Club 23: 134. pl. 264. 1896.

Moist pine-barrens. TATTNALL (2149), BERRIEN (2797), and

doubtless other counties. Fl. April.

Said to range from Maine to Florida. My material could be

referred with equal certainty to S. Floridanum or S. jus-

catum, two species described by Mr. Bicknell in 1899 from

the pine-barrens of the Gulf states.

DIOSCOREACE&.

DIOSCOREA L., Sp. Pl. 1032. 1753.

D. villosa L., Sp. Pl. 1033. 1753.

In shaded situations, only in those exceptional places already

mentioned where the Lafayette and perhaps the Altamaha

Grit too is wanting. BULLOCH: Wooded bluff near Echo;

witcox: Upper Seven Bluffs; BERRIEN: Low woods west of

Tifton; DooLy: Lime-sink near the Rock House. FI. April—

July. Commoner farther inland, all the way to the moun-

tains. Its local and general distribution is very similar to

that of Cercis Canadensis (which see), which accompanies

it at each of the above-mentioned stations.

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States north of

latitude 30°.

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 257

AMARYLLIDACEZ.

HYMENOCALLIS Sal. Trans. Hort. Soc. 1 :338. 1812. SPIDER

LILy.

H.sp. (See Bull. Torrey Club 32 : 463-465. f. 5. 1905.)

A species with only two flowers, more rarely one, on a scape,

and narrow leaves, grows in creek-swamps in COFFEE and

coLguiTT, flowering in April and May. (See Plate XXIV,

Fig. 2). Although its characters are not at all obscure, and

good specimens have been collected (outside of our terri-.

tory), it cannot be determined in the present rather confused

state of the literature relating to this genus. It was.

evidently known to LeConte, but does not seem to have

been given a tenable name in his writings.

H.sp:

What is probably a totally different species, identical with one

which is frequent in the Lower Oligocene region, was ob-

served in the Ocmulgee River swamp near Barrow’s Bluff,

COFFEE County, May 14, 1904, but not in flower.

MANFREDA Sal., Gen. Pl. Fragm. 78. 1866.

M. Virginica (L.) Jackson, Ind. Kew. 2 : 161. 1894; Rose, Contr.

Winss Nat. blerb. es rs 5. ego

Wiggue: Vareiricd Wee aime ae een, ase

Rock outcrops in TATTNALL and DODGE, and dry pine-barrens

in coLrguiTT. Fl. June-July. More common farther in-

land, all the way to the mountains, but nowhere abundant.

Widely distributed in the Southeastern United States.

HYPOXIS L., Syst. ed. 10, 2 :986. 1759.

H. juncea J. E. Smith, Spicil. 15. pl. 16. 1792.

H. filsjolia Ell, Sk. £2397. 1827.

MONTGOMERY: Outer base of sand-hills of Gum Swamp Creek

west of Erick, Sept. 10, 1903; COFFEE: Intermediate pine-

barrens near Bushnell Junction, May 10, 1904. FI. May—

Sept. Accompanied at the first locality by Sporobolus

Curtiss, which frequently grows with it in the flat country

toward the coast.

South Carolina to Florida and Mississippi, in the pine-barrens.

Also in the Bahamas (Northrop).

HAMODORACE.

GYROTHECA Sal., Trans. Hort. Soc. 1: 327. 1812.

G, tinctoria (Walt.) Sal., 1. c. (See Torreya I : 33-34. 1901.)

258 HARPER

Branch-swamps, etc.; not common. COFFEE, WILCOX, IRWIN.

Fl. June-July. More characteristic of other parts of the

pine-barrens, ranging inland to Sumter County and coast-

ward to Camden.

Massachusetts to South Florida and Mississippi, in the coastal

plain. Also in the West Indies (?).

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 259

LOPHIOLA Ker, Curt. Bot. Mag. 40: pl. 1596. 1813.

(The affinity of this genus with the preceding is too obvious

to allow them to be placed in different families merely on

account of a difference in the number of stamens, as has

been done by Engler & Prantl and subsequent authors.)

L. aurea Ker, 1. c. (See Barnhart, Torreya 4 :132, 135. 1905.)

Moist pine-barrens. MONTGOMERY (seen from train near

Erick, July 4, r901, July 3, 1903), COFFEE (1432), WILCOX

(common in southeastern corner), IRWIN (1417). Fl. June—

July. Also in Ware County, a little southeast of our limits.

New Jersey to West Florida and Mississippi, in the pine-barrens,

AVE TRIS) i sp. Pl 420: 1753:

A. obovata Nash; Small, Fl. 286. 1903; Torreya 4 : 102. 1903.

Intermediate pine-barrens; not rare. WARE (probably extra-

limital), COFFEE (2201), WILCOX, IRWIN, BERRIEN. Fl. May.

Known otherwise only from the type-locality in northeastern

Florida. (See Bull. Torrey Club 32 : 463. 1905.)

Before this species was described I noted what I took to be

A. farinosa in many similar places in the region, but it was

probably all A. obovata. What seems to be genuine A.

jarinosa grows in the Lower Oligocene region and farther

inland, however.

A. lutea Small, Bull. N. Y. Bot. Gard. 1:278. 1899.

Intermediate or slightly moist pine-barrens. Quite common

in COFFEE and BERRIEN (2193), and in some of the counties

nearer the coast. (See Bull. Torrey Club 32: 154. 1905.) FI.

May.

South to Florida and west to Louisiana(?), in the pine-barrens.

What is doubtless a hybrid between this and the preceding was

seen growing with them in corrEE County, May 11, 1904.

A. aurea Walt., Fl. Car. 121, 1788.

Moist pine-barrens. TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, DODGE, TEL-

FAIR, COFFEE, WILCOX, IRWIN, DOOLY, COLQUITT, THOMAS.

Fl. June-July. Inland to the southeastern part of Sumter

County, and coastward to the vicinity of Waycross.

Virginia to Florida and Texas, in the pine-barrens.

260 HARPER

SMILACACE:.

SMILAX L., Sp. Pl. 1028. 1753.

S. pumila Walt., Fl. Car. 244. 1788.

Very elastic in habitat, growing in dry pine-barrens, sand-

hills, hammocks, bluffs, etc. BULLOCH, EMANUEL, TATTNALL,

MONTGOMERY, DODGE, COFFEE, WILCOX, IRWIN, BERRIEN

(1688), coLguitt. Flowers in September, and probably at

other times. Pretty widely distributed in South Georgia,

but never seen more than a mile or two above the fall-line

South Carolina to central Florida and Texas, very nearly

confined to the coastal plain.

S. auriculata Walt., Fl. Car. 245. 1788; Chapm., Fl. 476. 1860.

S. Beyrichit Kunth, Enum. 5: 207. 1850; Morong, Bull. Torrey

Club 21 3430. 1894.

MONTGOMERY: Sand-hills of Little Ocmulgee River opposite

Lumber City, Sept. 10, 1903. Also in the hammock of

the Altamaha River in McIntosh County, and on St. Simon’s.

Island, Glynn County.

North Carolina to Florida and Mississippi, mostly near the

coast. Also in the Bahamas (Northrop). See Nash, Bull.

Torrey Club 22: 144. 1895; Mohr, Contr. U.S. Nat. Herb. 6:

445. Igol. : :

S. laurifolia L., Sp. Pl. 1030. 1753. BamsBoo VINE.

_ In swamps, especially non-alluvial creek-swamps. SCREVEN,,

BULLOCH, (955) TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, DODGE, APPLING,,

COFFEE, WILCOX, IRWIN, COLQUITT, DECATUR. Pretty com-

mon throughout South Georgia, except perhaps in the

lime-sink region and near the coast.

New Jersey to South Florida, Arkansas, and Louisiana, in the

coastal plain. Also in East Tennessee (Gattinger).

Leaf-anatomy described by Kearney, Contr. U. S. Nat. Herb.

Br Ao0s nO, Loom

S. Walteri Pursh, Fl. 249. 1814. SARSAPARILLA.

In Gum Swamp Creek near McRae, July 3, 1903. More com-

- mon in the upper third of the coastal plain.

New Jersey to northern Florida, Tennessee (?), and Louisiana,

in the coastal- plain.

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 261

Leaf-anatomy studied by Kearney, Contr. U. S. Nat. Herb.

5 :487. 19or.

LILIACE.

NOLINA Mx., Fl. 1:207. 1803.

N. Georgiana Mx., 1. c. 208.

BULLOCH: Sand-hills of Big Lott’s Creek, June 27, 1902 (965);

DODGE: Rock outcrop near Eastman, Sept. 8, 1903. FI.

spring. Common on the fall-line sand-hills in Richmond,

Columbia, Jones, and Bibb Counties, and known from

Washington, Johnson, and Laurens Counties in the upper

. third of the coastal plain.

Said to occur in corresponding parts of South Carolina, and

in Florida.

YUCCA Sp: Pl. er9; 1753.

Y."filamentosa L.,1.c. “Bear Grass.”’

Dry pine-barrens, sand-hills, etc.; not common.

BULLOCH,

EMANUEL, COFFEE, IRWIN, BERRIEN, DOOLY.

Fl. May—June

Common in the upper third of the coastal plain, and in

Middle Georgia, but there apparently only as a weed in old

fields.

Widely distributed in the Southeastern United States, but

natural range and habitat not well understood.

OXYTRIA Raf., Fl. Tell. 2:26. 1836; Pollard, Bull. Torrey Club

24 2405. 1897.

O. crocea (Mx.) Raf., 1. c.

BERRIEN: In and near small open branch-swamps, near Nash-

ville (2194) and Tifton, May, 1904, in flower. Rare.

(Collected by Curtiss near Allapaha, in the same county).

Total range not well worked out.

LILIUM L., Sp. Pl. 303. 1753.

L. Catesbei Walt, Fl. Car. 123. 1788.

L. spectabile Sal., Ic. Pl. Rar. 9. pl. 5. 1791.

Moist pine-barrens, rather rare. COFFEE, DOOLY, WORTH,

“corguitt. Fl. Aug.-Sept. Pretty widely distributed

through the pine-barrens of Georgia, but rarely as many as

a dozen specimens visible at once.

262 HARPER

North Carolina to central Florida and Mississippi, in the pine-

barrens.

NOTHOSCORDUM Kunth, Enum. 4 :457. 1853.

N. bivalve (L.) Britton, Ill. Fl. 1: 415. f. roor. 1896.

Allium striatum Jacq., Coll. Suppl. 51. 1796.

BERRIEN: Shallow exsiccated pond near Tifton, Oct. 2, 1902,

in flower (1706). Also occurs as a weed in some other

places a few miles away, but possibly not indigenous in

our territory at all. I have seen it oftener on flat granite

outcrops in Middle Georgia.

Said to range from Virginia to Chile, but natural range and

habitat not well understood.

ALLIUM L., Sp. Pl. 294. 1753.

A. Cuthbertii Small, Fl. 264. 1903.

WILCOX: Rock outcrops near the center of the county, May 18,

1904, in flower (2272). Also occurs on and near the fall-

line sand-hills in Richmond County (type-locality).

Distribution and habitat not well worked out.

MELANTHACE.

MELANTHIUM L., Sp. Pl. 339. 1753.

M. Virginicum L., 1.c. |

Moist pine-barrens; not common. TELFAIR, WILCOX, IRWIN.

Fl. June-July. Also in Sumter County near Americus.

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States north of

latitude 30°.

ZYGADENUS Mx., Fl. 1: 213. 1803.

Z. glaberrimus Mx., Fl. 1 : 214. pl. 22. 1803.

Sandy bogs, etc.; rare. MONTGOMERY (1984), THOMAS. FI.

July—Aug. Seen once near Americus.

Virginia (?) to West Florida and Louisiana in the coastal plain,

very nearly confined to the pine-barrens.

OCEANOROS Small, Fl. 252. 1903.

.O. leimanthoides (Gray) Small, 1. c.

Amianthium leimanthoides Gray, Ann. Lyc.N. Y.4:125. 1837.

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 263

Zygadenus lermanthoides Wats., Proc. Am. Acad. 14 : 280. 1879.

Sand-hill bogs, rare. EMANUEL (959), MONTGOMERY. FI.

June. Not seen elsewhere in the state.

_ New Jersey to Alabama, in the coastal plain and mountains.

TRACYANTHUS Small, Fl. 250. 1903.

T. angustifolius (Mx.) Small, 1. c. 251.

Amianthium angustifolium Gray, Ann. Lyc. N. Y.4: 124. 1837.

Zygadenus angustifolius Wats., Proc. Am. Acad. 14: 280. 1879.

Moist pine-barrens, borders of branch-swamps, and sand-hill

bogs. BULLOCH, TATTNALL (2150), MONTGOMERY, COFFEE,

WILCOX, BERRIEN, and probably in other counties, but

easily overlooked when not in flower. Blooms from about

the middle of April to the middle of May. Not seen farther

inland, but extends coastward to Glynn County.

North Carolina to central Florida and Mississippi, in the

pine-barrens, Also in western North Carolina (Small &

Heller).

CHROSPERMA Raf., Neogen. 3. 1825.

C. muscetoxicum (Walt.) Kuntze, Rev. 2: 708. 1891.

Dry pine-barrens, etc.; rare. BULLOCH, EMANUEL (815), MONT-

GomeRY. Fl. May-June. Extends inland to Middle Geor-

gia, where it grows usually in rich woods.

' New Jersey to Arkansas, West Florida, and Louisiana.

CHAMALIRIUM Willd., Mag. Nat. Fr. Berl. 2 : 18. 1808.

C. luteum (L.) Gray, Man. 503. 1848.

Dry or rather dry pine-barrens; not common. WARE (perhaps

extralimital), COFFEE, BERRIEN, May 5, 1904, in flower.

Grows also in rich woods in Middle Georgia, like the

preceding.

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States.

TOFIELDIA Huds., Fl. Angl. 2 2157. 1778.

T. racemosa (Walt.) B.S. P., Prel. Cat. N. Y. 55. 1888; Morong,

Mem. Torrey Club 5 : 109. 1894. (See Plate XXIV, Fig. 1).

Moist pine-barrens. Common from MONTGOMERY County

264 ' HARPER

southwestward, and probably northeastward also. Fl. June—

Aug. Inland to Sumter and Randolph Counties and coast-

ward to Charleston.

New Jersey to northern Florida and Louisiana, in the coastal

plain.

JUNCACE.

JUNCUS -E.) Sp. Gel 2252 isee

J. Elliottii Chapm., Fl. 494. 1860.

“J. acuminatus (?) Mx.” Ell., Sk. 1 : 409. 1817.

(?) J. Pondit Wood, Class-Book, 724. 1861.

Branch-swamps, etc., sometimes ruderal; rather rare. BUL-

LOCH (841, 864, S69), EMANUEL. Possibly not indigenous.

North Carolina to central Florida and Texas, in the coastal

plain. ¢

J. diffusissimus Buckl., Proc. Acad. Phila. 1862 :9. 1862.

EMANUEL: Marshy place near Stillmore, July 3, t90z (995).

(See Bull. Torrey Club 30: 327. 1903.) As I have not met

with it since, its indigeneity may be doubted.

Ranges mostly westward.

J. trigonocarpus Steud., Syn. Pl. Cyp. 308. 1855.

Moist pine-barrens, etc.; common. EMANUEL, DODGE, COFFEE

(717), IRWIN, BERRIEN (667), DOOLY, WORTH, COLQUITT,

pEcATUR. Fl. Aug.—Sept. Inland to Americus and Meri-

wether County (see Bull. Torrey Club 30: 294. 1903) and

coastward to Charlton County.

South Carolina to Middle Florida and Mississippi, mostly in

the pine-barrens.

J.: polycephalus Mx., Fl. 1: 292. 1803.

Typically in rather open branch-swamps, more rarely in other

related habitats. BULLOCH, EMANUEL, TATTNALL, MONT-

GOMERY, TELFAIR, COFFEE, WILCOX, IRWIN, COLQUITT.

Pretty widely distributed in the pine-barrens of Georgia.

North Carolina to northern Florida and Texas, in the pine-

barrens.

J. scirpoides compositus Harper, Bull. Torrey Club 33: 233. 1906.

Margins of sand-hill ponds and bogs. DODGE, COFFEE (1445),

; ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA — 265

BERRIEN. Fl. July. Also in several counties nearer the

coast, but not seen farther inland.

South Carolina to Florida, in the coastal plain.

J. biflorus Ell.; Sk. 1 : 407. 1817.

J. marginatus biflorus Chapm., Fl. 495. 1860.

J. aristulatus pinetorum Coville; Small, Fl. 259. 1803.

. Typically in moist pine-barrens, more rarely on sand-hills

or around the bogs at their bases. BULLOCH (868), EMANUEL,

TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, DODGE, TELFAIR, COFFEE, IRWIN,

BERRIEN, DOOLY, coLguiTT. Fl. May—June. Pretty widely

distributed in the pine-parrens of Georgia (see Bull. Torrey

Clubs 33: 232. 1906.)

North Carolina to Florida, in the pine-barrens.

J. repens Mx., Fl. r:191. 1803.

Cephaloxys flabellata Desv., Jour. Bot. 1:324. pl. 2. 1808.

Branch-swamps and shallow ponds, or more commonly a

weed in ditches. EMANUEL, COFFEE, IRWIN. Pretty well

distributed over the pine-barrens of Georgia.

North Carolina to Florida, Arkansas, and Texas, in the

coastal plain. Also in Cuba.

Anatomy discussed by Holm, Bull. Torrey Club 26: 359-364.

pl. 363. 1899.

J. dichotomus Ell, Sk. 1: 406. 1817; Wiegand, Bull. Torrey Club

27:525-527. 1900.

SCREVEN and BULLOCH, in various habitats, but not well under-

stood and perhaps not indigenous. Quite common along

the Central R.R. from Millen to Savannah.

This has been more or less confused with other species, and

its distribution has not been satisfactorily worked out.

ie eurontus L., Sp: Pl. 328. 2753.

BULLOCH: A weed on damp roadsides near Bloys (S62).

Cosmopolitan, but natural range and habitat unknown.

BROMELIACE.

DENDROPOGON Raf., Neogen. 3. 1825.

D. usneoides (L.) Jackson, Ind. Kew. 1:733. 1893. ‘‘Moss.’

Hancine Moss.

ats 7

266 HARPER

Tillandsia usneoides L., Sp. Pl. ed. 2. 411. 1762.

On various trees, mostly in hammocks and river-swamps. It

seems to have a decided preference for trees growing in

calcareous soil, and is therefore not as common in our terri-

tory as in the lime-sink region and along the coast. Ranges

throughout South Georgia, but I have never seen it in

Middle Georgia except once near the Chattahoochee River

a mile or two above the fall-line in Muscogee County. Its

range is similarly restricted in Alabama, according to Mohr

and Earle, but just why this should be the case is a mystery.

Virginia to South Florida and Texas, in the coastal plain.

Also in tropical America.

For an anatomical study see F. H. Billings, Bot. Gaz. 38:

gg-120. 7. I. pl. S-II. 1904.

: PONTEDERIACE.

PONTEDERIA L., Sp. Pl. 288. 1753.

P. cordata L., 1. c.

A typical inhabitant of cypress ponds, more rarely in other

ponds, and in streams. Quite common throughout the

pine-barrens of Georgia and in brackish marshes along the

coast. Not seen farther inland than the outlying area of

pine-barrens near Omaha (see Bull. Torrey Club 32: 457. /.

392 905:)

In our territory it nearly always has narrow leaf-blades,

quite different from the robust broad-leaved forms in the

brackish marshes, but all gradations between them can be

found. Fl. April—Aug.

Nearly throughout the glaciated region and coastal plain of

temperate Eastern North America (see Rhodora 7: 73. 1905).

Also reported from Central and South America, which de-

serves closer investigation.

COMMELINACE.

TRADESCANTIA L., Sp. Pl. 288. 1753.

T. reflexa Raf., New Fl. N. A. 2 :87. 1836; Small, Bull. Torrey

Club 24232. (18072

Sand-hills; rare. BULLOCH, COFFEE. Fl. June.

Range not fully worked out.

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 267

CUTHBERTIA Small, Fl. 237. 1903.

C. graminea Small, 1. c.

Tradescentia rosea Vent., in part.

Sand-hills. BULLOCH (913), EMANUEL (S17), TATTNALL, MONT-

GOMERY, TELFAIR, COFFEE, WILcox. Fl. May—July. Also

on the fall-line sand-hills in Richmond County, where it was

discovered.

Maryland (?) to Florida, Missouri (?), and Texas (?), in the

coastal plain.

ERIOCAULACE.

ERIOCAULON L., Sp. Pl. 87. 1753.

E. decangulare L., |. c. Buttons. “ WuiTE-HEADS.”’ (See

Plate XXIV, Bie. a

One of the most abundant and shamacietsthie plants of moist

pine-barrens; more rarely inswamps. Common throughout

the pine-barrens of Georgia, and a little farther inland

almost to Sandersville and Americus. Fl. June—Sept.

New Jersey to central Florida and Texas in the coastal plain,

and locally inland in the mountains of North Carolina,

Tennessee, and Alabama.

Anatomy discussed by Holm, Bot. Gaz. 31:17-37. f. I-95.

Jan. 1got.

E. lineare Small, Fl. 236. 1903. (See Plate XXIII, and XXV,

Biss 2).

With the preceding in our territory, and equally abundant

wherever it grows, but as it is almost invisible except in

Spring, I have not noted it so often. (See Bull. Torrey

Club 32 : 461-463. 7. 4. 1905). BULLOCH (830, type, collected

in a branch-swamp, an exceptional habitat), TATTNALL,

MONTGOMERY (2146), COFFEE, WILCOX, IRWIN, BERRIEN. FI.

April-May. Inland to Sumter County.

Not yet known outside of Georgia. (see Torreya 5 :114. 1905).

E. compressum Lam., Encyc. 3 : 276. 1789.

Cypress and other ponds; not rare. SCREVEN, TATTNALL,

COFFEE, WILCOX, IRWIN, BERRIEN, and doubtless elsewhere.

Flowers in March and April, and easily overlooked later in

the season.

New Jersey to central Florida and Texas, in the coastal plain.

268 HARPER

SYNGONANTHUS Ruhl. in Urban, Symb. Ant. 1 : 487. 1900.

S. flavidulus (Mx.) Ruhl. in Engler’s Pflanzenreich 4°° : 256. 1903.

Eriocaulon flavidulum Mx., Fl. 2 :166. 1803. (Not £. fla-

vidulum Ruhl., Pflanzenreich 49°: 33. 1903.)

Dupatya flavidula Kuntze, Rev. 2:745. 1891.

Moist pine-barrens and margins of sand-hill ponds and bogs,

always on the Columbia sand; common. EMANUEL (803),

TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, DODGE, TELFAIR, APPLING, COFFEE,

WILCOX, IRWIN, BERRIEN, DOOLY, COLQUITT, DECATUR. FI.

May-Sept. Seen only once farther inland (near Coney,

Dooly Co.), but common in the flat country toward the

coast.

Virginia (?) to central Florida and Alabama, in the pine-

barrens.

LACHNOCAULON Kunth, Enum. 3 : 497. 1841.

L. anceps (Walt.) Morong, Bull. Torrey Club 18 : 360. 1891.

With the preceding or often in slightly drier places; less com-

mon. EMANUEL (S04), TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, COFFEE,

IRWIN, BERRIEN, COLQUITT,. DECATUR. FI. April—Aug.

Pretty widely distributed in South Georgia, mostly in the

pine-barrens.

North Carolina to central Florida and Mississippi, in the

coastal plain. Also on Lookout Mountain, Alabama (A.

Ruth).

XYRIDACE.

XKYVRIS dU Sp: ely Aen, 17/58

X. Baldwiniana Schult., Mant. 1:351. 1822.

Moist pine-barrens and margins of sand-hill ponds. BULLOCH

(845), TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, COFFEE, IRWIN, COLQUITT.

Fl. all summer. Inland to the pine-barrens of Laurens

and Sumter Counties. Originally discovered in Camden

County, in the southeastern corner of the state, but probably

not seen there lately.

North (?) Carolina to central Florida and Texas, in the pine-

barrens.

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 269

X. flexuosa Muhl.; Ell. Sk. 1:51. 1816.

X. torta of many authors (see Torreya 5 : 129. 1905).

Intermediate pine-barrens; not abundant. TELFAIR, COFFEE,

IRWIN, BERRIEN, COLQUITT,*-THOMAS, DECATUR. Fl. July—

Aug. General distribution in Georgia about like that of

the preceding.

New Jersey to Florida, Arkansas, and Texas, mostly in the

pine-barrens.

X. fimbriata Ell., Sk. 1:52. 1816.

Sand-hill ponds and related habitats. APPLING, COFFEE, IR-

WIN, BERRIEN, DOOLY, COLQUITT. FI. July—Sept. Extends

inland to Sumter County and coastward to Camden, but I

have not yet observed it north of the Altamaha River and

its tributaries, perhaps because I have not been in that part

of the state much when it was in flower.

New Jersey (?) to central Florida and Louisiana, in the

pine-barrens.

X. Smalliana Nash, Bull. Torrey Club 22 :159. 1895.

COFFEE: Cypress pond at outer edge of sand-hills of Seventeen

Mile Creek near Chatterton, July 29, 1902, in flower (1453).

Also noted in Stewart (see Bull. Torrey Club 30 :325. 1903;

32 2457. 1905) and Pulaski Counties, and in Okefinokee

Swamp.

Discovered in central peninsular Florida.

X. Elliottii Chapm., Fl. 500. 1860.

ae oreuijolia Mx.) Elle Skt 252: 1816.

coFFEE: Margins of sand-hill ponds, etc.; three or four stations

within seven miles of Douglas, July, 1902 (1448). FI. June-

Aug. Also in several counties nearer the coast.

South Carolina to central Florida and Mississippi, in the

pine-barrens.

X. sp.

COFFEE: With the two preceding, at two stations a few miles

apart (1452). Fl. July—Aug. Scapes erect, solitary or

nearly so. Flowers closing earlier in the morning than

those of X. Smalliana.

270 HARPER

X. platylepis Chapm., Fl. 501. 1860.

Moist pine—barrens and sand-hill bogs; rather rare. COFFEE

(1423), COLQUITT (1941), THOMAS (1774). Fl. July—Aug.

Not observed elsewhere in the state.

South Carolina to central Florida, in the pine-barrens.

X. sp.

Chiefly in creek-swamps. A shade-loving species, with acute

spikes and dark bracts. COFFEE, BERRIEN (1700), WORTH,

coLtouiTT. Fl. Aug.—Sept. What seems to be the same thing

extends inland to Sumter County and coastward to the

vicinity of Okefinokee Swamp.

X. neglecta Small, Bull. Torrey Club 21 :300. 1894.

(?) X. bulbosa minor Wood, Class-Book. 728. 1861.

COFFEE: Sand-hill ponds (1446) and moist pine-barrens (2013)

Fl. summer.

Known otherwise from northeastern Florida and the pine-

barrens of Mississippi.

X. ambigua Beyr.; Kunth, Enum. 4:13. 1843.

MONTGOMERY: Branch-swamp near Mount Vernon, June 29,

1903, in flower (1863). Discovered by Beyrich in Effingham

County. .

North Carolina to northern Florida and Texas, in the pine-

barrens.

X. brevifolia Mx., Fl. 1:23. 1803.

coFFEE: Rather dry pine-barrens and corresponding places

in the sand-hills, three or four stations. Fl. spring. More

common in the flat country toward the coast.

North Carolina to central Florida, in the pine-barrens.

MAYACACEZ.

MAYACA Aubl., Pl. Guian. 1:42. 1775.

M. Aubleti Mx., Fl. 1:26. 1803.

M. Michauxit Schott & Endl., Melet. 1:24. 1832.

Moist pine-barrens and sand-hill bogs; not rare. EMANUEL,

TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, DODGE, COFFEE, WILCOX, IRWIN,

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA uel

DOOLY, WORTH, coLguiTT. Fl. all summer. Inland to

Americus and coastward to Folkston.

Virginia to Florida and Texas, in the coastal plain.

M. fluviatilis Aubl., 1. c., pl. 15.

In our territory seen only in Heard’s Pond, THomas, where it

is of course not native. (See remarks under Nympha

gorbiculata, p. 237). Possibly only a form of the preceding

(see Bull. Torrey Club 30 : 234. 1903).

Commoner in Florida and the tropics.

LEMNACE.

LEMNA L., Sp. Pl. 970. 1753.

L. sp.

MONTGOMERY: Floating in large sand-hill pond opposite

Lumber City, Sept. 10, 1903.

ARACEZ.

ARISAMA Mart., Flora 14: 459. 1839.

A. triphyllum (L.) Torr., Fl. N. Y.2: 239. 1843. (INDIAN TuRNIP).

BERRIEN: Low woods just southwest of Tifton, Sept. 29, 1902.

Fl. spring. Scattered over the state, most common north-

ward. (Seen once within 5 feet of sea-level in Liberty

County.)

Nearly throughout temperate Eastern North America, but

rather rare in the coastal plain.

PELTANDRA Raf., Jour. Phys. 89:103. 1819.

P. sagittifolia (Mx.) Morong, Mem. Torrey Club 5: 102. 1894.

Figured in Meehan’s Native Flowers and Ferns, 1: 121-124.

pl. 31. 1879.

Non-alluvial swamps; rare. COFFEE (1449), BERRIEN. FI.

May-July. Known otherwise in the state only from

Okefinokee Swamp. Said by Elliott (Sk. 2 :632) to have

once been abundant near Savannah.

Virginia (?) to central Florida and Mississippi, in the pine-

barren region.

ORONTIUM L. Sp. Pl. 324. 1753.

O. aquaticum L.. 1. c.

Sluggish but not muddy creeks and rivers. BULLOCH: Big

242 HARPER

Lotts Creek, June 24, 1901, April 28, 1904 (seen from train).

MONTGOMERY: Little Ocmulgee River; COFFEE: Seventeen

Mile Creek (1456); BERRIEN and worTH: Little River. Fl,

March. Pretty widely distributed over South Georgia.

Massachusetts to Central New York, central Florida, Missouri,

and Texas, mostly in the glaciated region and coastal plain.

see Rhodora x '184,, 20263 nS Ow yaenger

PALM.

SERENOA Hook. f., in B. & H., Gen. Pl. 3 : 926, 1228. 1883.

S. serrulata (Mx.) “Saw PaLmertTo.”

Sand-hills, dry and intermediate pine-barrens, or rarely in

creek swamps. Very common in the lower counties, but

rather rare or absent in the upper ones. It does not quite

reach the Altamaha Grit escarpment, and I have not seen

it in the counties of Screven, Emanuel, Laurens, Dodge,

Dooly, Worth, Mitchell, and Decatur, in our territory.

But in the last-named it is known at two or three places in

the lime-sink region. It is very abundant in the flat pine-

barrens toward the coast, and extends even to the dunes on

the outer edges of the sea islands. Its size seems to vary

approximately in inverse proportion to its distance from the

coast. Flowers in June (perhaps not every year though),

and fruits in September.

South Carolina to South Florida and Louisiana, in the lower

half of the coastal plain.

SABAL Adans., Fam. 2 :495. 1763.

S. glabra (Mill.) Sarg., Silva N. A. 10 3:38. 1896. PALMETTO.

S. Adansonu Guerns.; S. minor (Jacq.) Pers.; S. pumila (Walt.)

Ell.; Chamerops acaulis Mx.

Mostly in swamps of rivers rising north of our territory

SCREVEN, BULLOCH, TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, TELFAIR, COF-

FEE, BERRIEN. Fl. June-July. Scattered over the coastal

plain of Georgia, most common in the upper third, but

stopping abruptly at the fall-line.

North Carolina to central Florida, Arkansas, and Texas, in

the coastal plain.

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 273

CYPERACE.

CAREX L., Sp. Pl. 972. 1753.

C, reniformis [Bailey] Small, Fl. 220. 1903.

Swamps of rivers rising north of our territory. TATTNALL:

Ohoopee River swamp west of Reidsville (2153); COFFEE:

Barrow’s Bluff, May 14, 1904.

Known otherwise only from Mississippi and Louisiana.

C. alata Torr., Ann. Lyc. N. Y. 3 : 396. 1836.

WiILcox: Pond near Queensland, just on the edge of our terri-

tory, May 17, 1904 (2207). What is probably the same

thing (for I collected it the next day along the same river

near Millen) was seen from a train in the Ogeechee River

swamp at or near Halcyondale, scREVEN Co., June 4, 1901.

12 | ova oneal

New Hampshire to Michigan in the glaciated region, south

to Florida and Mississippi in the coastal plain.

C. tenax Chapm.; Dewey, Am. Jour. Sci. II. 19 : 254. 1855.

C. Chapmani Sartw.

Sand-hills; rare. TATTNALL, COFFEE. More common on the

fall-line sand-hills in Richmond County, and known also

from Pulaski County.

South Carolina to West Florida, in the coastal plain.

C. venusta Dewey, Am. Jour. Sci. 26: 107, pl. T. f. 62. 1834,

TATTNALL: Bog at head of branch near Reidsville, April 27,

1904. wiLcox: With C. alata (see above). Fl. April. Also

in Laurens County.

North Carolina to Florida.

C. debilis Mx., Fl. 2:172. 1803.

With C. renijormis at both stations mentioned above. FI.

April.

South Carolina to Florida and Louisiana.

eemtiiceps Mx Bl 2170. 1803.

In swamps with the preceding. TATTNALL (2152), COFFEE

(2205, an exceptionally slender form). Fl. April.

Eastern United States.

274 HARPER

C. glaucescens Ell., Sk. 2 2553. 1824.

Chiefly in branch-swamps. MONTGOMERY, TELFAIR, COFFEE,

IRWIN, COLQUITT, THOMAS. Remarkable for its late flower-

ing, June-July. Inland to Americus and coastward to

Charlton County.

South Carolina to Florida and Mississippi, in the coastal plain.

Cosp, \ (See Bull? Vorrey Club 32 = 40019055)

Differs from the preceding in having its pistillate spikes on

stouter mostly erect peduncles, and flowering regularly

about three months earlier. It is not at all rare, and was

doubtless known to southern botanists of a century ago,

but it is almost impossible to decide if any of them have

ever given it a tenable name, on account of the confusion

in this particular group.

Cypress ponds principally. COFFEE, WILCOX, BERRIEN, and

doubtless other counties. Seems to be pretty well dis-

tributed over the pine-barrens of Georgia.

C. macrokolea Steud., Syn. Pl. Cyp. 223. 1855.

What I took for this species was noted in cypress ponds in

IRWIN (near Ocilla, July 15, 1902) and DECATUR (near

Climax, Aug. 13, 1903). More study is needed to determine

the specific limits of this and the two preceding.

Florida to Missouri (?) and Texas, in the coastal plain.

C. Walteriana Bailey, Bull. Torrey Club 20 : 429. 1893

CG. siriaia’ Mx,, Fl. 22174, 1803) Not of Gilioien7ee

In rather permanent ponds; not common. SCREVEN (2090),

IRWIN. FI. April. Inland to Dooly County and coastward

to Effingham, but details of distribution imperfectly under-

stood. See Bull Torrey Club 32 : 460. 1905.

‘New Jersey to Florida, in the pine-barrens.

C. squarrosa L., Sp. Pl. 973. 1753.

COFFEE: Rather dry swamp of Ocmulgee River near Bartow Ss.

Bluff, May 14, 1904 (2204). Fl. April. No other station

seems to be known for it within two or three hundred

miles. See Bull. Torrey Club 32 : 460. 1905.

Connecticut to Michigan, Georgia, and Texas (?).

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 275

C. bullata Schk., Riedgr. Nachtr. 85. f. 166. 1806.

Swamps of rivers rising north of our territory. TATTNALL:

Ohoopee River swamp (2155); COFFEE: Ocmulgee River

swamp opposite Lumber City, Sept. 11, 1903. Fl. spring.

I have also collected it in the Ogeechee River swamp

in Effingham County.

A glaciated region and coastal plain plant, ranging from New

Hampshire to Pennsylvania and Georgia. See Rhodora 8:

28-29. 1906.

C. turgescens Torr., Ann. Lyc. N. Y. 3 : 419. 1836.

Moist pine-barrens and edges of branch-swamps. BULLOCH

Grim), CORFER, WILCOX, BERRIEN. El) April. Not ob-

served elsewhere.

North Carolina to Florida (?) and Louisiana, in the pine-barrens.

Cerliomiscawe c Lor: Ann Lyc. N. Y. 1 2357. 1825.

C. fulua Muhl., Gram. 246. 1817. Not of Good. 1794.

C. castanea EM., Sk. 2:546. 1824. Not of Wahl. 1803.

Sphagnous bogs, etc.; rare. EMANUEL (SIS), COFFEE, BERRIEN

(2190). Fl. April. I have not seen it elsewhere in the state,

but both Muhlenberg’s and Elliott’s specimens came from

Georgia, the latter from Chatham County.

North Carolina to Florida and Mississippi, in the pine-barrens.

C. intumescens Rudge, Trans. Linn. Soc. 7:97. pl. 9. f. 3. 1804.

BULLOCH: Branch-swamp near Pulaski, June 24, 1901 (939);

COFFEE: Swamp of Ocmulgee River near Barrow’s Bluff,

May 14, 1904. FI. April-May. More frequent in Middle

Georgia.

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States.

C. folliculata L., Sp. Pl. 978. 1753.

TATTNALL: Swamp of Ohoopee River west of Reidsville,

April 26, 1904, just past flowering (2159). The typical

form not known elsewhere in Georgia.

Ranges northward to Canada.

Var. australis Bailey, Proc. Am. Acad. 22 :62. 1886.

BULLOCH: Branch-swamp near Bloys, June 11, 1901 (582);

COFFEE: Edge of swamp of Seventeen Mile Creek, July 10,

276 HARPER

1902. Flowers later than the type, or at least retains its

perigynia longer. Known also from Johnson and Sumter

Counties (see Bull. Torrey Club 27 : 462. 1900.)

South Carolina to Florida and Louisiana, in the coastal plain.

SCLERIA Berg., Kgl. Sv. Acad. Handl. 26 :142. 1765.

S. Michauxii Chapm., Fl. 532. 186c.

(?) S. hirtella Sw., Prodr. 19. 1788.

coLquiTT: Moist pine-barrens, several stations near Moultrie,

September, 1902. With the typical form is often one with

glabrous leaves, but apparently otherwise identical (1646).

Fl. summer. Also in McIntosh, Glynn, and Charlton

Counties in the flat country.

South Carolina to central Florida and Louisiana, in the pine-

barrens.

S. verticillata Muhl.; Willd., Sp. Pl. 4 :317. 1805.

coLquiTT: Moist pine-barrens, with the preceding and else-

where; rare (1647). Also in Sumter and Early Counties,

in the Lower Oligocene region.

Glaciated region and coastal plain of the Eastern United States,

but with many gaps in its known range (not reported from

Alabama, for instance). Also in Mexico and the West Indies,

if it is all the same species.

S. pauciflora Muhl.; Willd., Sp. Pl. 4 :318. 1805.

BULLOCH: Rather dry pine-barrens near Pulaski, June 24,

tg01 (940). Grows also on dry slopes of the mountains of

Northwest Georgia.

New Hampshire to Missouri, Cuba, and Texas; but not reported

from Alabama.

S. glabra [Chapm.] Britton; Small, Fl. 200. 1903.

sand-hills chiefly. EMANUEL (S07), TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY,

COFFEE (1460), WILCOX, DECATUR. Identity of my speci-

mens still a little doubtful.

North Carolina to Florida and Mississippi, in the pine-barrens.

S. trichopoda Wright; Britton, Ann. N. Y. Acad. Sci. 3: 232.

1883. (as syn.)

S. reticularis pubescens Britton, 1. c.

Moist pine-barrens, etc. MONTGOMERY, DODGE, COFFEE, BER-

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA AAT

RIEN, DOOLY, COLQUITT (1643). Fl. summer. Somewhat

variable in morphological characters, as well as in habitat.

Extends coastward to Okefinokee Swamp, and inland to

Pike County, Middle Georgia (see Bull. Torrey Club 30: 294.

=903).

New Jersey(?) to the West Indies and Mexico.

S.ztriglomerata Mx., Fl. 2 : 168. 1803.

Hammocks and bluffs. MONTGOMERY, wWiILcox. Fl. May-—

June. More common farther inland.

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States.

S. Baldwini (Torr.) Steud., Syn. Pl. Cyp. 175. 18555.

Cypress ponds. TATTNALL (998), COFFEE, BERRIEN, COLQUITT.

Fl. May—June. Inland to Pulaski, Sumter, and Early

Counties, and coastward to Bryan, McIntosh, Ware, and

Charlton.

South to central Florida and west to Texas, in the pine-barrens.

S. gracilis Ell., Sk. 2 2557. 1824.

Shallow ponds, more rarely in moist pine-barrens. BULLOCH

(908, 943), TATTNALL, DODGE, IRWIN, DOOLY. Inland, to

Sumter, Lee, and Early Counties, and coastward to Charlton.

South Carolina to central Florida and Texas, in the pine-

barrens. Also reported from Cuba.

RHYNCHOSPORA Vahl, Enum. 2 : 229. 1806.

(Original spelling Rynchospora).

R. inexpansa (Mx.) Vahl, Enum. 2 : 232. 1806.

Moist pine-barrens; rather rare. BULLOCH, MONTGOMERY,

COFFEE. More common in the upper third of the coastal

plain.

Virginia to Florida(?)and Louisiana, mostly in the coastal plain.

R. mixta Britton; Small, Fl. 197. 1903.

BULLOCH: In Big Lott’s Creek near Bloys, June 27, 1901 (974).

Coastal plain of Georgia and Florida.

R. compressa Carey; Chapm., Fl. 525. 1860.

Moist pine-barrens; rare. COFFEE (2200), IRWIN (I4I4).

Reported also from Alabama, Florida, and Cuba.

278 HARPER

R. cymosa (Willd.) Ell., Sk. 1:58. 1816. (excl. descr.)

BULLOCH: Rather dry sandy roadside near Bloys, June 11, 1901

(880); TATTNALL: Flat rocks near Ohoopee River, June 24,

1903. Fl. May—June. Extends inland to Middle Georgia. 2

New Jersey to Missouri, Florida, and Texas.

R. perplexa Britton; Small, Fl. 197. 1903.

IRWIN: Shallow pond near Fitzgerald, July 17, 1902. Also

in mayhaw ponds in Sumter County. (Identity of my

specimens somewhat uncertain.)

“North Carolina to Florida.’’ Doubtless confined to the

coastal plain.

R. Torreyana Gray, Ann. Lyc. N. Y. 3 :197. 1835.

Intermediate and moist pine-barrens. BULLOCH (884, 941),

TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY (1868). Fl. June. Coastward to

Bryan County. Not seen SOLHINTTES: of the Ocmulgee and

Altamaha Rivers.

New Jersey to Georgia, in the oie denned (Reported from

Alabama by Dr. Mohr, but the specimens so labeled in his

herbarium are some other species.)

R. rariflora (Mx.) Ell., Sk. 1:58. 1816.

Intermediate and moist pine-barrens; not common. BULLOCH

(879), TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, WILCOX, BERRIEN. FI.

May-June. Inland to Washington and Sumter Counties.

North Carolina to central Florida and Texas, in the coastal

plain. |

R. Grayii Kunth, Enum. 2 :539. 1837.

Dry pine-barrens and sand-hills; frequent in most of the

counties. Fl. April-June. Inland to Richmond, Sumter,

and Early Counties, and coastward to Cumberland Island.

North Carolina to central Florida and Texas, in the coastal

plain.

R, dodecandra Baldw.; Gray, Ann. Lyc. N. Y. 3 : 207. 1835.

Hammocks and sand-hammocks. EMANUEL (977), TATTNALL,

MONTGOMERY, COFFEE, WILcox. Fl. May. Inland to the

lime-sink region of Decatur County, and coastward to Bryan,

McIntosh, and Wayne.

a ee ee ee ee

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 279

North Carolina to South Florida and Mississippi, in the pine-

barrens and coastward.

R. fascicularis (Mx.) Vahl, Enum. 2 : 234. 1806.

Moist pine-barrens and margins of ponds; not common. coF-

FEE (1440), THOMAS (1173). Also in Okefinokee Swamp

and east of there.

North Carolina to central Florida and Louisiana, in the pine-

barrens.

R. distans (Mx.) Vahl. Enum. 2:235. 1806.

Mostly in intermediate pine-barrens, but usually in places

which have been tampered with. BULLOCH (878), COFFEE

(684, 1447). Nos. 684 and &78 grew along roadsides, and

the same plant occurs in the same way in Charlton County

just east of Okefinokee Swamp. No. 1447, from the margin

of a sand-hill pond, looks a little different, and may not be

identical with the others. The same thing occurs among

the sand-hills of the Little Satilla River in Wayne County

west of Hortense.

south Carolina to Florida, in the pine-barrens.

R. brachycheta Sauv., An. Acad. Cienc. Habana, 8 : 85. 1871.

(?) R. fascicularis trichoides Chapm.

BULLOCH: Unfrequented road in rather dry pine-barrens, June

I5, 1901 (897). Probably either a depauperate form of

the preceding, or else not indigenous.

North Carolina (?) to Cuba.

R. Baldwinii Gray, Ann. Lyc. N. Y. 3: 210. 1835.

Moist pine-barrens. BULLOCH (852), MONTGOMERY, COFFEE,

IRWIN, BERRIEN, COLQUITT, DECATUR. Fl. May—June. Coast-

ward to Effingham, Bryan, McIntosh, Ware, and Charlton

Counties.

North Carolina to Florida and Mississippi, in the pine-barrens.

R. solitaria Harper, Bull. Torrey Club 28: 468. 1901; 31:19. 1904.

Moist pine-barrens; rather inconspicuous. IRWIN, BERRIEN

(608, type; 1677, from same place), coLrguitt. Fl. May—

cir

Not known elsewhere. (See Torreya 5 :114. 1905.)

280 HARPER

R. ciliaris (Mx.) Mohr, Contr. U. S. Nat. Herb. 6 : 408. 1ger.

R. ciliata Vahl, Enum. 2 : 235. 1806.

Normally in intermediate pine-barrens; not rare. BULLOCH

(887), MONTGOMERY, APPLING, COFFEE (683, 70I), WILCOX,

IRWIN; BERRIEN, WORTH, COLQUITT, DECATUR. Fl. May—

Aug. Inland to Sumter, Lee, and Mitchell Counties, and

coastward to Ware and Charlton.

North Carolina to central Florida and Mississippi, in the

pine-barrens.

R. leptorhyncha Sauv., An. Acad. Cienc. Habana, 8 :84. 1871.

(Our specimens not quite typical. See Bull Torrey Club 33:

231-232. 1906.)

COFFEE: Cypress ponds about three miles south of Douglas,

July 24, 1902. Also in Pulaski and Sumter Counties in

the Lower Oligocene region. Fl. June—July.

Also in western Cuba, where it was discovered.

R. filifolia Torr., Ann. Lyc. N. Y. 3: 366. 1836.

COFFEE: Cypress ponds near Douglas (1434) and Chatterton.

Fl. summer. Also in a similar place in Charlton County.

Not seen elsewhere.

North Carolina to central Florida and Texas, in the pine-

barrens.

R. gracilenta Gray, Ann. Lyc. N. Y. 3: 216. 1835.

Moist pine-barrens; infrequent. TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY,

COFFEE, IRWIN, Fl. June-July. Also in Sumter County.

New Jersey to northeastern Florida and Texas, in the coastal

plain.

R. axillaris (Lam.) Britton, Bull. Torrey Club 15: 104. 1888.

Cypress ponds, branch-swamps, etc.; common in most if not

all of the counties in the pine-barren region of Georgia.

Fl. May-July. .

Long Island to central Florida, Arkansas, and Louisiana, in

the coastal plain.

R. glomerata paniculata [Gray] Chapm., Fl. 528. 1860. ©

Branch-swamps, etc.; not common. MONTGOMERY, TELFAIR,

eee ee ee

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 281

IRWIN, coLguitT. Fl. June-July. More common farther

inland.

Widely distributed in the Southeastern United States, mostly

in the coastal plain.

R. alba macra Clarke; Britton, Trans. N. Y. Acad. Sci. 11: 88.

1892.

Wet pine-barrens; rare. COFFEE (716), IRWIN. Fl. Sept.—

Oct. Not seen elsewhere in the state.

South to Florida, west to Texas, in the pine-barrens.

R. semiplumosa Gray, Ann. Lyc. N. Y. 3: 213. 1835.

Intermediate and moist pine-barrens; not rare. BULLOCH

(853, 893), EMANUEL, DODGE, COFFEE (706), WILCOX, IRWIN,

BERRIEN, COLQUITT, DECATUR. Fl. May-July. Inland to

Sumter and Lee Counties, coastward to Charlton.

South to Florida, west to Louisiana, in the pine-barrens.

R. plumosa Ell., Sk. 1: 58. 1816.

Dry pine-barrens and rock outcrops; apparently rare. BUL-

LOCH (859), TATTNALL (2756), COFFEE. FI. April—June.

South Carolina to West Florida and Louisiana, in the pine-

barrens.

R. oligantha Gray, Ann. Lyc. N. Y. 3: 212. 1835.

_ Moist pine-barrens; inconspicuous. COFFEE, WILCOX, IRWIN,

BERRIEN. Fl. May—June. Also in Sumter County.

North Carolina to northeastern Florida and Texas, in the

pine-barrens.

R. Chapmani M. A. Curtis, Am. Jour. Sci. II. 7: 409. 1840.

Moist pine-barrens, or sometimes along roadsides or in other

unnatural places; rare. COFFEE, IRWIN (1420), DECATUR.

Fl. July—Aug. Also in Bryan County.

North Carolina to northern Florida and Louisiana, in the

pine-barrens. —

R. pusilla Chapm. Fl. 528. 1860.

Moist or intermediate pine-barrens; rare. TATTNALL (997),

COFFEE.

South to Florida and Cuba, west to Texas.

282 HARPER

R. corniculata (Lami.) Gray, Ann. Lyc. N. Y. 3: 205. 1835.

Ceratoschenus longirostris (Mx.) Torr., Ann. Lyc. N. Y,

3: 260: 1836:

Mostly in and near branch- and creek-swamps. APPLING,

COFFEE, IRWIN, DOOLY, WORTH, COLQUITT, THOMAS. FI.

June—Aug. More common in some other parts of the pine-

barrens, particularly in the flat country.

Delaware to Ohio, northern Florida, Missouri, and Texas, a

rather anomalous distribution. Mostly in the coastal plain.

DICHROMENA Mx., Fl. 1:37. 1803.

D. latifolia Baldw.; Ell., Sk. 1:90. 1816.

Moist pine-barrens or oftener in ponds; frequent. TATTNALL

(1000), TELFAIR, COFFEE, IRWIN, BERRIEN, DOOLY, WORTH,

coLguiITT, THOMAS. Fl. May—July. Inland to Sumter

County and coastward to McIntosh (where it was discovered)

and Camden Counties.

Virginia (?) to central Florida and Texas, in the pine-barrens.

The flowers of this species and the next are presumably ento-

mophilous, a rare character in the Cyperacee. (See page 60

of this work, also Hilgard, Geol. & Agric. Miss. 369. 1860.)

D. colorata (L.) Hitchcock, Rep. Mo. Bot. Gard. 4: 141. 1893.

BERRIEN: Low grounds southwest of Tifton, Sept. 29, 1902.

(see p. 112.) Fl. May-June. Inland to Dooly, Lee, and

Early Counties in the Lower Oligocene region and coast-

ward to the islands, always‘in places where the Lafayette

formation seems to be absent.

New Jersey to the West Indies, Tennessee (?), Texas, and

South America.

STENOPHYLLUS Raf., Neogen. 4. 1825.

S. Warei (Torr.) Britton, Bull. Torrey Club 21 : 30. 1894.

sand-hills. BULLOCH (972), EMANUEL, TATTNALL, MONT-

GOMERY (several stations), COFFEE (1459). Fl. July—Aug.

Inland to the sand-hills opposite Dublin and Hawkinsville,

and coastward to Bryan, Liberty, Wayne, and Lowndes

Counties.

Previously reported only from Florida.

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 283

S. FLoripAnus Britton; Nash, Bull. Torrey Club 22 : 161. 1895.

““WATER GRASS.”

A common weed in cultivated fields, around dwellings, etc.,

nearly always on Columbia sand. Now pretty well distrib-

uted through the pine-barren region of Georgia, and inland

at least as far as Houston County, but how and when it first

appeared in the state, probably no one knows. It is

scarcely visible before the middle of June, but after that

it comes up rapidly, and flowers in July and August.

Otherwise known only from Florida. Certainly not indige-

nous in Georgia, and natural range and habitat still un-

known. See Bull. Torrey Club 28 : 467. rgor.

S. ciliatifolius (Ell.) Mohr, Bull. Torrey Club 24: 22. 1897.

sand-hills chiefly. BULLOCH (973), TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY,

DODGE, COFFEE (696), IRWIN, BERRIEN, CoLquiTT. FI.

July—Sept. Also on the fall-line sand-hills (A. Cuthbert)

and in the Lower Oligocene region. Less frequent coastward.

North Carolina to Florida and Texas in the coastal plain,

mostly in the pine-barrens.

FIMBRISTYLIS Vahl, Enum. 2 : 285. 1806.

F. autumnalis (L.) R. & S., Syst. 2:97. 1817.

Trichelostylis autumnalis Chapm., Fl. 522. 1860.

Low grounds and swamps; apparently usually a weed. cor-

FEE, IRWIN, COLQUITT. Fl. summer. Pretty well scattered

over the state; probably indigenous in Middle Georgia if

anywhere.

Throughout the Eastern United States and tropical America,

but natural range and habitat not fully understood.

HerAxaA Vahl) Enum. 222092. 1806:

In a ditch in Moultrie, Aug. 22, 1903. Occurs in similar

situations in Americus and Leslie, Sumter County, and on

moist rocks in Middle Georgia, where it may be indigenous.

Pennsylvania to Missouri, Florida, and Texas. Also in the

tropics.

F. puberula (Mx.) Vahl, Enum. 2 : 289. 18006.

Chiefly in intermediate pine-barrens; not abundant. BULLOCH

284 HARPER

(858, 866), EMANUEL, TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, COFFEE,

WILCOX, IRWIN, BERRIEN, cCoLguiTT. Fl. May-July. I

have never observed it in salt marshes as Dr. Mohr did in

Alabama (see Contr. U. S. Nat. Herb. 6 : 400. igor).

South Carolina to Florida and Texas, in the pine-barrens.

ELEOCHARIS R. Br., Prodr. Fl. Nov. Holl. 1 : 224. 1810.

E. melanocarpa (Baldw.) Torr., Ann. Lyc. N. Y. 3 1 31r, 1836.

Moist pine-barrens and sandy margins of ponds. BULLOCH

(910), MONTGOMERY, DODGE (in accidental pond, not indige-

enous), COFFEE, wiLcox. Fl. April to July. Inland to

Pulaski and Lee Counties and coastward to Bryan and

Charlton. Originally discovered near Savannah.

Massachusetts to Indiana in the glaciated region, south to

central Florida in the coastal plain. Also reported from the

West Indies. (See Rhodora 7:72. 1905.)

For some morphological notes on this species see E. J. Hill,

Bull. Torrey Club 25 : 392-394. pl. 344. 1808. ,

E. Baldwinii (Torr.) Chapm., Fl. 519. 1860.

Normally in intermediate pine-barrens, but most abundant

in unfrequented roads and paths in the pine-barrens, where

it forms a dense, close turf, often excluding all other vege-

tation for several square feet. Easily recognizable, even

from a moving train, by its characteristic habit and color.

APPLING, COFFEE (085, 1451 from sandy margin of a cypress

pond), IRWIN, BERRIEN, THOMAS. Common in the flat

country toward the coast, but never seen northwest of the

Altamaha Grit escarpment, and rarely north of the Altamaha

River.

Otherwise known only from Florida.

E. prolifera Torr., Ann. Lyc. N. Y. 3: 316. 1836.

IRWIN: Shallow pond near Fitzgerald; THomas: Heard’s Pond

(therefore not indigenous); DECATUR: Cypress pond near.

Climax. More frequent in Sumter County.

North Carolina to Florida and Louisiana, in the coastal plain.

E. tuberculosa (Mx.) R. & S., Syst. 2: 152. 1817.

Moist pine-barrens. BULLOCH, EMANUEL, TATTNALL, COFFEE,

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 285

WILCOX, BERRIEN, coLquitT. Fl. April—June. Pretty widely

distributed in South Georgia; also occurs in Meriwether

County, Middle Georgia.

Massachusetts to Pennsylvania, Florida, Arkansas, and Texas,

mostly in the coastal plain. (See Rhodora 7:72. 1905.)

E. bicolor Chapm., Fl. 517. 1860.

Moist pine-barrens; very inconspicuous. IRWIN: Near Fitz-

_ gerald, Oct. 4, 1902 (r7rr); coLguittT: Near Moultrie, Sept.

24, 1902 (1665).

Known otherwise from the type-locality in Gadsden County,

Florida, near the southwestern end of our region.

E. ochreata (Nees) Steud.

BULLOCH: Wet woods (imperfectly understood) near Bloys,

June 26, 1901 (952). Associated with a few other species

rarely seen elsewhere in the region.

Virginia to central Florida and Mississippi, in the coastal

plain. Also in tropical America.

E. Robbinsii Oakes, Hovey’s Mag. 7:178. 1841.

COFFEE: Sand-hill pond near Seventeen Mile Creek, July 30,

tg02. Also in Pulaski, Sumter, and Lee Counties, in the

Lower Oligocene region. (See Bull Torrey Club 30: 323.

1903.)

Known from two or three localities in the pine-barrens of

North Carolina and Florida. More common in the glaciated

region from New Brunswick to Michigan. (See Rhodora

Toe 2OAe LSOQ)) 7.720 LOOS:)

E. interstincta (Vahl) R. &. S. Syst. 2 : 148. 1817.

E. equisetoides (Ell.) Torr., Ann. Lyc. N. Y. 3: 290. 1836.

Only in permanent ponds and therefore not properly belonging

to our flora. TELFAIR: Accidental pond near Helena (see

note under Brasenia), July 4, 1903; DECATUR: Pond along

the escarpment (see p. 82) between Faceville and Recovery,

Aug. 14, 1903. Occurs in several other places in South

Georgia, both in natural and artificial ponds.

Massachusetts to Michigan in the glaciated region, south to

central Florida and Mexico in the coastal plain. Also in the

West Indies. See Rhodora 7:72. 1905.

286 HARPER

SCIRPUS: LL; sp. Pla r75se

S. Eriophorum Mx., Fl. 1: 33. 1803; Fernald, Proc. Am. Acad.

34 2: 500. 1899.

Moist pine-barrens; rather rare. APPLING, WILCOX. Pretty well

scattered over the state, but in most places as a weed inditches

and moist railroad cuts. In the coastal plain it is very

apt to be found where the Lafayette formation has been

artificially removed, exposing the underlying Tertiary strata.

New Jersey to northern Florida, Arkansas, and Texas, mostly

in the coastal plain. .

;

S. cylindricus [Torr.] Britton, Trans. N. Y. Acad. Sci. 11: 79. 1892.

DECATUR: With Eleocharis interstincta (see above), abundant

in that locality. It does not seem to occur actually within

our limits. Elsewhere in South Georgia I have seen it in .

Stewart, Sumter, Decatur (Cane Water Pond), and Lowndes |

Counties, in permanent ponds. Fl. May-June.

Maryland to northern Florida and Louisiana, in the coastal

plain.

FUIRENA Rottb., Descr. et Ic. 70. 1773.

F. squarrosa hispida [Ell.] Chapm., Fl. 514. 1860.

Moist pine-barrens. EMANUEL, TATTNALL, DODGE, COFFEE,

WILCOX, BERRIEN (665), DOOLY, coLguiTrT. Fl. June—Sept.

Widely distributed in South Georgia, and known from a few

places in Middle Georgia.

New York to Florida and Texas, mostly in the coastal pie

F. breviseta Coville; Harper, Bull. Torrey Club 28: 466. 1go1.

Moist pine-barrens and around shallow ponds; not common.

COFFEE, IRWIN, DOOLY. Fl. July—Sept. Inland to Sumter,

Calhoun, and Early Counties in the Lower Oligocene region,

and coastward to Liberty and Lowndes.

North Carolina to Florida and Texas, in the pine-barrens.

KYLLINGA Rottb., Descr. et Ic. 13. 1773.

K. pumila Mx., Fl. 1: 28. 1803.

Wet woods; rare. BULLOCH (953), COLQUITT. FI. June—Sept.

More common farther inland, extending up into Northwest

Georgia. :

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 287

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States south of

latitude 30°.

CYPERUS L., Sp. Pl. 44. 1753.

C. echinatus (Ell.) Wood, Class-Book 734. 1861.

Hammocks and sand-hammocks; ratherrare. EMANUEL (979)

MONTGOMERY, DODGE, COFFEE (I455.)

Widely distributed in the Southeastern United States, but

natural range and habitat not well worked out.

Martindalei Britton, Bull. Torrey Club 15:98. 1888.

Sand-hills and dry pine-barrens. MONTGOMERY, COFFEE (1402),

coLouITT. Fl. summer.

Otherwise known only from the pine-barrens of West Florida

and Alabama. C. filiculmis Vahl, a closely related species,

is widely distributed in the Eastern United States.

C.'cylindricus (Ell.) Britton, Bull. Torrey Club 6 : 316, 339. 1879.

Hammocks, rare. MONTGOMERY, COFFEE (1454). Our speci-

mens are scarcely typical, and may represent a distinct species,

C. ovularis (Mx.) Torr., Ann Lyc. N. Y. 3: 278. 1836.

BULLOCH: Dry pine-barrens near Bloys, June 27, tgo1 (960).

Not seen since, and possibly not indigenous. Grows also

in Middle and Northwest Georgia.

New York to Missouri, Florida, and Texas.

C. retrofractus (L.) Torr.; Gray, Man. 519. 1848.

Sand-hills;not common. BERRIEN, COLQUITT. FI. July—Aug.

Occurs also in the upper third of the coastal plain, and in

several places in Middle Georgia. See Bull. Torrey Club

30: 321-322. 1903.

New Jersey to Florida, Arkansas, and Texas, mostly in the

coastal plain.

C. Haspan L., Sp. Pl. 45. 1753.

In and near branch-swamps. BULLOCH, EMANUEL, TATTNALL,

COFFEE, WILCOX, BERRIEN, DOOLY, WORTH, COLQUITT.

Fl. June-Aug. Also in the upper and lower thirds of the

coastal plain, and in Meriwether County (see Bull. Torrey

Chile sors264. » 1902).

288 HARPER

Virginia to South Florida and Texas, mostly in the coastal

plain. Also in the tropics (if it is all the same species).

C. pseudovegetus Steud., Syn. Pl. Cyp. 24. 1855.

Shallow ponds and other damp places; not common. TatTT-

NALL, MONTGOMERY, BERRIEN. More common in the upper

third of the coastal plain. Occasional in Northwest Georgia.

Delaware to Florida, Tennessee, Indian Territory, and Texas,

mostly in the coastal plain.

C. compressus L., Sp. Pl. 46.-2752:

A weed of fields and roadsides. corrEE: Douglas (675);

coLguiTT: Moultrie and Autreyville. Fl. summer.:° Scat-

tered pretty well over the state, at least in the Palzozoic

region and coastal plain.

Introduced from the tropics.

C.-souarrosus, W4-Cemt. bli 2) 20 icon

A diminutive weed, abundant along the streets of Douglas, in

what was once flat pine-barrens (674). Also in similar

places in Wayne, Charlton, and Clinch Counties, and re-

ported from adjacent Florida.

Introduced from the tropics.

DULICHIUM Pers., Syn. 1:65. 1805.

D. arundinaceum (L.) Britton, Bull. Torrey Club 21: 29. 1894.

Sphagnous bogs, creek-swamps, sand-hill ponds, etc. MONT-

GOMERY, COFFEE, BERRIEN, COLQUITT, DECATUR. FI. July-

Aug. Pretty well scattered over South Georgia, but never

observed farther inland (7. e., above the fall-line).

Nearly throughout the glaciated region and coastal plain of

North America. Occurred in Europe in the Pleistocene

period. (See Rhodora 7:72. 1905; 8:28. 1906.)

Anatomy and morphology discussed by Holm, Am. Jour. Sci.

IV. 3: 429-437. 7. 1-8. 1897.

LIPOCARPHA R. Br., App. Tuckey Exp. Congo, 459. 1818.

L. macuLaTa (Mx.) Torr., Ann. Lyc. N. Y. 3: 288. 1836.

Moist roadsides and ditches. booty: Near Cordele; IRWIN:

Fitzgerald. Fl. ee Scattered over South Georgia, but

not common.

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 289

Virginia to central Florida and Alabama in the coastal plain,

but natural range and habitat unknown. Also in the West

Indies.

The representation of Cyperacee in our territory is remark-

able for the large number of species of Rhynchospora (27 being

here enumerated), the small representation of Scirpus (only one

normally belonging to the region, and that rare in the natural

state and at the same time not a typical Scirpus), and the

moderate number of Carices (16 species and a variety). In these

respects the flora of the Altamaha Grit region probably resem-

bles that of the tropics more than it does that of the glaciated

region, which would not be the case with some other families.

GRAMINE.

ARUNDINARIA Mx., Fl. 1: 73. 1803. REED.

A. tecta (Walt.) Muhl., Gram. tot. 1817.

Moist pine-barrens, mostly near branch-swamps; not common.

IRWIN, BERRIEN (2795), DOOLY, coLguITT. Fl. May.

The species of Arundinaria are very imperfectly understood,

and it is not at all certain that this one is identified cor-

rectly, so it is scarcely worth while to attempt to give its

whole range.

What may be another species occurs in some of the muddy

swamps and rich woods.

HORDEUM L., Sp. Pl. 84. 1753.

Pervonosum I. oop. Pl.ved. 2. 126. 1752.

Streets of Fitzgerald, May 17, 1904. Also in Athens (Middle

Georgia), and northward and westward. Fl. April.

Probably native of Europe.

FESTUCA L., Sp. Pl. 73. £753.

'F. octorrora Walt., Fl. Car. 81. 1788.

Ppearcncuae Willd, ‘Sp. PE Ips 419. 1797.

Sandy roadsides near Ohoopee, Fitzgerald, and elsewhere,

~ Fl. April-May.

Widely distributed 1n the United States, probably introduced.

from the tropics.

290 HARPER

UNIOLA L., Sp. Pl. 71. 1753.

U. latifolia Mx., Fl. 1:70. 1803.

MONTGOMERY: Stallings’ Bluff on the Oconee River near Mount

Vernon, June 29, 1903. More common in the upper third

of the coastal plain, and in Middle Georgia.

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States between

latitudes 30° and 40°.

- Leaf-anatomy discussed by Holm, Bot. Gaz., 16 : 168-171.

pl. 15. 1891.

U. laxa (L.) B.S. P., Prel. Cat. N: Y. 60. 1888; Serine ema

Dorrey ‘Clu 5 ssn. 0 reed:

COFFEE: Margins of creek-swamps, July, 1902; not common.

Scattered over the state, but nowhere abundant.

New York to central Florida, Tennessee, and Texas.

MELICA L., Sp. Pl. 66. 1753.

M. mutica Walt., Fl. Car. 78. 1788.

wiLcox: Upper Seven Bluffs, May 17, 1904. Belongs more

properly to the Eocene region of the coastal bes and to

Middle Georgia. Fl. March—April.

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States between

latitudes 32° and 309°.

ERAGROSTIS Beauv., Agrost. 70. 1812.

(All our species weeds.)

E. aMaBivis (L.) Wight & Arn.,; Hook. & Arn., Bot. Beechey

251. 1840. (Not E. amabilis Walt.)

coLquiTT: Moist roadsides, etc.; about half a dozen stations

within a few miles of Moultrie. This species has a remark-

ably restricted range in the United States, being known only

from coLguiTT, Thomas, and Brooks Counties, Georgia, and

Jefferson and Suwanee Counties, Florida, all of which are

within too miles of each other. (See Bull. Torrey Club 31: 17.

1904.) How and when it was introduced is still a mystery.

Native of Asia.

Excrrtaris*(L.) Link, Hort. Berol. 1 : 1o2:nersere

Streets of Ocilla, July 15, 1902. Occurs in similar situations

in the Lower Oligocene region.

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 291

South Carolina to South Florida and Mississippi, in the coastal

plain. Introduced from the tropics.

EB. stImPLex Scribn., Bull. Div. Agrost. U.S. Dept. Agr. 7, ed. 3.

2501, Qo.

“E. Brownei Kunth”; Chapm., Fl. 664. 1883.

A common weed along railroads. TELFAIR, IRWIN, BERRIEN,

_ DOOLY, WORTH, COLQUITT (1656), THOMAS, and doubtless

other counties. (See Bull. Torrey Club 31:17. 1904.) Also

in the flat country toward the coast, and in Florida.

Natural range and habitat unknown.

E. rerracta (Muhl.) Scribn., Mem. Torrey Club 5: 49. 1894.

. APPLING: Sandy roadside northeast of Prentiss, Sept. 12, 1903.

Delaware to central Florida and Texas, but natural range and

habitat uncertain

TRIPLASIS Beauv., Agrost. 81. 1812.

_T. Americana Beauv., |. c. pl. 16. f. Io.

Uralepis cornuta Ell., Tricuspis cornuta Gray, Triplasis

cornuta Benth.

Sand-hills; inconspicuous and probably not common. MONT-

GOMERY, DODGE, BERRIEN, COLQUITT (1659). Fl. Sept.—Oct.

Extends inland to the fall-line sand-hills of Richmond

(A. Cuthbert) and Taylor Counties, and southeastward

nearly to the coast.

North Carolina to central Florida and Louisiana, in the

coastal plain.

TRIDENS R. & S., Syst. 2:34. 1817.

TRICUSPIS Beauv.,.Agrost. 77. 1812. (Not of Pers.)

URALEPIS and WrInpsoriIA Nutt., 1818.

T. ambiguus (Ell.) Schult., Mant. 2 : 333. 1824.

Poa, Ell.; Windsoria, Nutt.; Tricuspis, Chapm.; Triodia,

Vasey; Szeglingia, Kuntze.

Triodia Elliott Bush, Trans. Acad. Sci. St. Louis 12: 73. 1902.

Moist pine-barrens and shallow ponds; rather rare. BULLOCH,

DODGE (1979), BERRIEN, coLguiTT. Fl. June—Sept. Also

in Sumter and Charlton Counties. There are some peculi-

arities about its habitat which are not well understood.

292 HARPER

It is likely to be found in the same kind of places as Brewerza

aquatica and Kellhia hyssopijolia, and with practice one

can learn just about where to look for it.

South Carolina to northern Florida and Texas, in the pine-

barrens.

ELEUSINE Gaert., Fr. & Sem. 1:7. 1788.

E. Inpica (L.) Gaert., 1. c. 8.

Roadsides, etc. APPLING (two stations), WoRTH (Ashburn).

More common in almost any other part of the state.

Introduced from the tropics.

CAMPULOSUS Desv., Bull. Soc. Philom. 2 : 189. 1810.

C. aromaticus (Walt.) Trin.; Steud., Nomencl. ed. 2, 272. 1841.

Moist pine-barrens; not abundant. BULLOCH (898), TATTNALL,

MONTGOMERY, DODGE, COFFEE, WILCOX, IRWIN, BERRIEN,

WORTH, COLQUITT, and probably in most of the other coun-

ties. Ranges throughout the pine-barren region of Georgia

and a little farther inland, to Sandersville and Americus.

Fl. May—Aug.

Virginia to central Florida and Louisiana, mostly in the pine-

barrens.

CAPRIOLA Adans., Fam. 2:31. 1763.

C. Dactyton (L.) Kuntze, Rev. 2: 764. 1891. ‘‘ BERMUDA GRASS.”

Streets of Tifton, Sept. 27, 1902. Doubtless occurs in many

other places, where 1 may have passed it without making a

note of it. Common in Middle and Southwest Georgia, both

as a valuable pasture and lawn grass and as a despised weed.

Introduced from the tropics.

DANTHONIA DC., Fl. France 3:32. 1805.

D. sericea Nutt., Gen., 1:71. 1818.

TATTNALL: Rock outcrops near Ohoopee River and Pendleton

Creek, June, 1903; past flowering. More common in Middle

Georgia. .

Massachusetts to northern Florida and Arkansas.

SPOROBOLUS R. Br., Prodr. Fl. Nov. Holl. 1: 169. 1810.

S. Floridanus Chapm., Fl. 550. 1860.

Habitat variable, embracing rocks, shallow ponds, small

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 293

branch-swamps, moist and intermediate pine-barrens.

TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, APPLING, COFFEE, BERRIEN, COL-

guiTT. Fl. September. More abundant in Sumter and

Mitchell Counties, in the Lower Oligocene region.

Known otherwise only from northern Florida.

For some notes on this species see Bull. Torrey Club 28: 464-

BOG.) OO:

S. teretifolius Harper, Bull. Torrey Club 33 : 229-231. 7.7. 19006.

Moist pine-barrens; not rare. DODGE, COFFEE (677), IRWIN,

BERRIEN, DOOLY, COLQUITT (1642 type). Fl. July—Sept.

Not known elsewhere.

S. Curtissii [Vasey] Small; Scribn., Bull. Div. Agrost. U.S. Dept.

Agr.7:142.f.124. 1897. (The name was used by Kearney in

Bull. Div. Agrost. 1: 24. 1895, but in such a way as would

hardly constitute publication.)

Intermediate pine-barrens and corresponding places in sand-

hills; rare. MONTGOMERY, APPLING. Fl. Aug.—Sept. Also

in the flat country, and in adjacent parts of Florida.

S. gracilis (Trin.) Merrill, Rhodora 4: 48. 1902.

S. junceus (Mx.) Kunth, Rev. Gram. 1:68. 1835.

S. ejunicdus Nash; Britton, Manual, 106. r1gor.

Dry pine-barrens and sand-hills; not abundant. MONTGOMERY,

COFFEE, BERRIEN, COLQUITT. FI. July—Sept. Also in vari-

ous other parts of South Georgia.

Has a wide and rather anomalous distribution in the Eastern

United States.

MUHLENBERGIA Schreb.

M. expansa (Poir.) Trin., Unifl. 193. 1824. (fide Merrill, Rhodora

AREAS HOO2:

M. trichopodes (Ell.) Chapm., Fl. 553. 1860.

Two forms of this occur in our territory, but the differences

between them are not easily described. One I have seen

in dry or intermediate pine-barrens in APPLING, COFFEE,

COLQUITT (1641) and Sumter Counties, and the other in

moist pine-barrens in DODGE, BERRIEN, COLQUITT (1667)

and McIntosh Counties. The moist pine-barren form is

—

294 HARPER

handsomer and stouter than the other, with broader and

straighter leaves, the bases of which when old finally split

up into fibers as in many species of Sisyrinchium. A micros-

copic examination of the leaf shows at once the reason for

this, and reveals certain differences in the form and arrange-

ment of the vascular bundles, but whether these characters

are constant enough to be of specific valueI cannot say. It

has not been customary to separate species of grasses by

such minute leaf-characters, and furthermore it is not known

at present which of the two forms is the type of the species.

Both forms seem to flower at the same time, in August and

September, and I have seen specimens of both from other

states.

The species is said to range from South Carolina to northeastern

Florida and Mexico.

The leaf-anatomy, apparently of the moist pine-barren form,

has been described by Kearney in Contr. U. S. Nat. Herb.

5: 288. 1900. ;

STIPA TL Sp. Pl 78) purse

S. avenacea L., 1. c.

TATTNALL: Sandy west bank of Ohoopee River; wiLcox: Upper

Seven Bluffs. Fl. April-May. More common in Middle

Georgia.

New York to Missouri, Florida, and Texas.

ARISTIDA L., Sp. Pl., 82. 1753.

A. spiciformis Ell., Sk. 1: 141. 1816.

Rather dry (intermediate) flat pine-barrens, and corresponding

places in sand-hills. APPLING, COFFEE (636), BERRIEN,

COLQUITT, THOMAS. Fl. July—Sept. Never seen near the

escarpment or northwest of it, or northeast of the Altamaha

River, but common in all the counties east of those men-

tioned and south of the river, 2.e., in the flat country around

Okefinokee Swamp.

South Carolina (?) to central Florida and Mississippi, in the

pine-barrens.

For a morphological note see Bull. Torrey Club 28: 464.

TgoT..

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 295

A. palustris [Chapm.] Vasey, Contr. U.S. Nat. Herb. 3:45. 1892.

. Cypress and other ponds in the pine-barrens. COFFEE (690),

IRWIN, BERRIEN, DOOLY, coLquiTT. Fl. September. Inland

; to Sumter, Lee and Early Counties in the Lower Oligocene

region, and coastward to the vicinity of Okefinokee Swamp,

but not known northeast of the Altamaha River.

South to central Florida and west to Louisiana, in the pine-

barrens.

A. virgata Trin.; Spreng. Neue Entdeck. 2:60. 1821.

A. condensata Chapm., Bot. Gaz. 3:19. 1878.

A. Combsu Scribn. & Ball, Bull. Div. Agrost. U. S. Dept.

PG = Aa) 7]. L 7. “OOO:

MONTGOMERY: Sand-hills of Gum Swamp Creek (1982) and

Little Ocmulgee River, Sept. 10, 1903. Inland to the fall-

line sand-hills near Augusta (A. Cuthbert), and coast-

ward to Liberty, McIntosh, and Wayne Counties.

Also in northern Florida.

AS stricta Mx), Fl. 1: 41. 1803. ‘‘ WIRE-GRASS.”’

Everywhere in dry pine-barrens; doubtless the most abundant

vascular plant in our territory. Of little intrinsic value, but

its abundance makes it of considerable economic importance,

it being the principal food supply for countless thousands

of cattle and sheep. Other uses are being discovered for it,

such as its manufacture into matting.

Virginia (?) to central Florida and Louisiana, confined to the

pine-barrens or nearly so. Alsointhe Bahamas (Hitchcock).

_ A. sp. (near Mohrit).

MONTGOMERY: Sand-hills of Little Ocmulgee River, Sept. to,

1903 (1988). Grows in tufts which die out at the genet

as they grow at the edges, giving a sort of ‘“‘fairy- ee

appearance.

CENCHRUS L., Sp. Pl. 1oso. 1753.

~ BERRIEN: Brookfield, Sept. 27, 1902.

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States, probably

introduced from the tropics.

296 HARPER

PANICUM (L.) Sp) Blass a7

P.{Currani Ashe, Jour. Elisha Mitchell Sci. Soc. 15 : 113. 1898.

BERRIEN: Rich woods (see p. 111) southwest of Tifton,

Sept. 29, 1902. Also in similar situations in Brooks County,

in the Upper Oligocene region.

Scattered over the Southeastern United States, but not very

well known.

P. Ashei T. G. Pearson, Jour. Elisha Mitchell Sci. Soc. 15: 35. 1808.

COFFEE: Sand-hills and hammock of Seventeen Mile Creek,

July, 1902; rare (1435). Also on sandy river-banks in

Middle Georgia.

Distribution not fully worked out.

P. scabriusculum Ell., Sk. 1: 121. 1816.

Branch-swamps, etc.;not common. BULLOCH (881), EMANUEL,

COFFEE, IRWIN. Fl. June. Inland to Sumter County and

coastward to Charlton.

North Carolina to Florida (?) and Texas, in the coastal plain.

P.ETennesseense Ashe, Jour. Elisha Mitchell Sci. Soc. 15: 52. 1898.

BERRIEN: Rich damp woods southwest of Tifton, Sept. 209,

1902 (1689).

“New York and Illinois to Tennessee and Florida’’ (Small).

P. longiligulatum Nash, Bull. Torrey Club 26 : 574. 1899.

BULLOCH: Branch-swamp near Bloys, June 10, 1t90r (839).

Otherwise known only from Florida.

P. lucidum Ashe, Jour. Elisha Mitchell Sci. Soc. 15 : 47. 1808.

BULLOCH: Wet woods near Bloys, June 7, 1901 (829). Also

in Clarke County, Middle Georgia.

New Jersey to Florida and Mississippi.

P. barbulatum Mx., Fl. 1: 49. 1803.

MONTGOMERY: Stallings’ Bluff on the Oconee River, june 29,

1903.

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States.

P. angustifolium Ell., Sk. 1: 129. 1816.

BULLOCH: Dry pine-barrens near Bloys, June 7, tg01 (628).

Doubtless grows elsewhere in our territory. .

“ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 297

Virginia to Florida and Texas, mostly in the coastal plain.

-P. Combsii Scribn. & Ball, Bull. Div. Agrost. U. S. Dept: Agr.

205742: 7. LO. 1900.

COFFEE: Moist pine-barrens near Douglas, Sept 22, 1903

(2014). BERRIEN: Shallow pond near Tifton, Sept. 26,

1902 (1679).

Krown otherwise only from West Florida.

Pavircatum i. Sp. Pl. 50. 1753.

WORTH: Low grounds east of Tyty, with P. hemitomon,

Sept. 30, 1902. Scattered over South Georgia, in dry or

wet places, but natural habitat uncertain.

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States.

P. cocnatum Schult.

IRWIN: In Lafayette soil along railroad cuts, Cycloneta and

southward, Oct. 2, 1902, beginning to flower (1702). Also

in the Eocene region. Becomes a tumbleweed in late fall.

Said to range from South Carolina to Minnesota and Arizona,

but natural range and habitat unknown.

P. verrucosum Muhl., Gram. 113. 1817.

P. debile Ell., Sk. 1: 129. 1816. (Not of Desf., 1800.)

Moist pine-barrens, branch-swamps, etc.;not common. IRWIN,

BERRIEN, WORTH, COLQUITT. FI. September. Also in Sum-

ter County.

Massachusetts to central Florida and Louisiana, in the coastal

plain.

P. stenodes Griseb., Fl. Brit. W. I. 547. 1864.

P. anceps strictum Chapm., Fl. 573. 1860. Not P. strictum

Re ese

Margins of ponds, particularly cypress and sand-hill ponds;

not common. COFFEE, COLQUITT. FI. summer. Inland to

Sumter and Early Counties and coastward to Ware and

Charlton.

South to South Florida and west to Texas, in the pine-barrens.

Also reported from the West Indies and South America,

but it is not certain that our plant is identical with the

tropical one.

298 HARPER

P. hemitomon Schult., Mant. 2: 227. 1824. MatDEN Cane.

Brachiaria digitarioides (Carpenter) Nash; Britton, Manual

77. 1901. (For other synonyms see Merrill, Circ. Div. Agrost.

US Wepteene rani: Seangoms)

Open branch-swamps and adjacent moist pine-barrens. COF-

FEE, WILCOX, IRWIN, DOOLY, woRTH. Fl. June. More

abundant in some other parts of South Georgia, especially

in Okefinokee Swamp.

Delaware to Florida and Texas, in the coastal plain.

P. melicarium Mx. Fl. 1: 50. 1803.

Steinchisma hians (Ell.) Raf.; Seringe, Bull. Bot. Soc. Genev.

I: 220. 1830. (fide Ind. Kew.)

Moist pine-barrens or oftener along damp sandy roadsides,

perhaps not indigenous. BULLOCH (838), WILCOX, COL-~

QUITT.

North Carolina to South Florida, Missouri, and Texas, in the

coastal plain. Also in the tropics.

OPLISMENUS Beauv., Fl. Owar. et Benin 2 : 14. pl. 08. f. I. 1807.

O. setarius (Lam.) R. & S., Syst. 2 : 484. 1817.

Panicum Nuttallianum Steud., Nomencl. ed. 2. 2: 260. 1841.

TELFAIR: Ocmulgee River swamp near Lumber City, Sept. 11,

1903. Widely distributed over the coastal plain of Georgia,

but most frequent in the upper third. Fl. Aug.—Oct.

South Carolina to South Florida and Texas, nearly confined

to the coastal plain, though a shade-loving species.

ECHINOCHLOA Beauv.

EB. corona (L.) Link, Hort. Berol. 2: 209. 1833.

Railroad yard, Tifton, Oct. 2, 1902. More common in the

older cities of Georgia.

Widely distributed in the Southeastern United States, also in

the tropics, where it doubtless originated.

ANTHANANTIA Beauv., Agrost. 48. 1812.

A. villosa (Mx.) Beauv., Agrost. Ill. 8. pl. ro. f. 7. 1812.

Dry pine-barrens and sand-hills. IRWIN, BERRIEN (1686),

coLtguiTT. Fl. Aug.—Oct. Also in Richmond (A. Cuthbert),

Sumter, and Brooks Counties.

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 299

South Carolina to central Florida and Texas in the coastal

plain, mostly in the pine-barrens.

A. rufa (Ell.) Schult. Mant. 2: 258. 1824.

Moist pine-barrens. DODGE, COFFEE, IRWIN, BERRIEN, DOOLY,

WORTH, COLQUITT (165T). Fl. Aug.—Oct. Alsoin McIntosh

County.

South Carolina to northeastern Florida, in the pine-barrens.

SYNTHERISMA Walt., Fl. Car. 76. 1788.

S. SANGUINALE (L.) Crop Grass. Crap Grass. Crap GRASS.

Chiefly in cultivated fields and around dwellings. pDopcE,

IRWIN, BERRIEN, and doubtless elsewhere where I have not

taken the trouble to note it.

Common almost everywhere in the Eastern United States.

Introduced from the tropics.

> ANASTROPHUS Schlecht., Bot. Zeit. 8: 681. 1850.

A. COMPRESSUS (Sw.) Nash; Britton, Manual 75. 1901.

WoRTH: Tyty, Sept. 30, 1902. Also near Union, Waycross,

and doubtless many other places in South Georgia, always

as a weed.

Introduced from the tropics.

A. paspaloides (Mx.) Nash; Britton, Manual 75. 1go1.

TELFAIR: Ocmulgee River swamp near Lumber City. Scat-

tered over South Georgia in damp places, but like several

other of our plants which range southward to the tropics,

its indigeneity is a little doubtful. Fl. summer.

North Carolina to Florida and Texas in the coastal plain.

Also in the West Indies.

PASPALUM L., Syst. ed. 10, 2: 855. 1765.

Ee pacox Walt, Bl. Car. 75: 1788.

BULLOCH: Moist pine-barrens near Bloys, June 15, 1901 (900).

South Carolina to central Florida and Texas, in the coastal

plain.

_P. Curtisianum Steud., Syn. Pl. Glum. 26. 1855.

Moist pine-barrens. COFFEE (672), IRWIN, BERRIEN, WORTH,

coLguiITT. Fl. Sept.—Oct.

300 HARPER

South Carolina to central Florida and Mississippi, in the

pine-barrens.

SORGHASTRUM Nash; Britton, Manual 71. 1gor.

S. secundum (Ell.) Nash; Small, Fl. 67. 1903. ‘‘ Witp Oats.”

“Andropogon nutans L.,”’ J. E. Smith, in Abbot, Insects of

Garenee at sal Oe

Andropogon secundum Ell., Sk. 1: 580. 1821.

Sorghum secundum (Ell.) Chapm., Fl. 583. 1860.

Chrysopogon secundus (Ell.) Benth.; Vasey, Grasses U. S. 29.

1885.

Dry pine-barrens and sand-hills. APPLING, COFFEE (7/Q),

WILCOX, IRWIN, BERRIEN, DOOLY, WORTH, COLQUITT. FI.

Sept._Oct. Doubtless grows in most of the other counties,

but it is not recognizable when _not in flower. Widely

distributed over South Georgia, from the fall-line sand-hills

of Richmond (A. Cuthbert) and Taylor (where Elliott dis- .

covered it) to the flat pine-barrens. See Bull. Torrey Club

PAIS NOB) HOMER Sha) 2. ROY,

Also reported from Florida as far down as Tampa, and doubt-

less grows in the coastal plain of South Carolina and Alabama

as well.

. nutans (L.) Nash; Small, Fl. 66. 1903.

Sorghum avenaceum (Mx.) Chapm., Fl. 583. 1860.

Dry pine-barrens. BERRIEN, COLQUITT (1657). FI. Sept.—Oct.

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States, most common

northward.

The three known species of this genus have been much con-

fused, and it is difficult to identify them from most descrip-

tions, because they all look about alike when pressed. But

they areamply distinct in life, and were pretty well described

by Dr. Chapman in the first edition of his Flora. The other

species (Sorghum nutans Chapm., Sorghastrum Linneanum

Nash) grows in many places in the upper third of the coastal

plain of Georgia.

ANDROPOGON L., Sp. Pl. 1045. 1753.

A. furcatus Muhl.; Willd., Sp. Pl. 4: 919. 1806.

Dry pine-barrens; not common. BERRIEN (1685), COLQUITT.

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 301

Fl. July—Sept. Also in the upper third of the coastal plain.

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States and Canada.

often a weed in old fields in the North.

Anatomy of leaves and roots studied by W. E. Britton, Bull.

Mocpey eCluly 30.2 580; 500: pl. 27e. 1903.

? A. Tracyi Nash

Moist pine-barrens. IRWIN (abundant near Fitzgerald), BER-

RIEN (2707). Fl. Sept.—Oct.

peewarcmicus L., Sp. Pl. 1046. 1753.

Dry pine-barrens. SCREVEN, WILCOX, and doubtless else-

where. Inland to the mountains, where it grows on dry

sunny slopes. (See Torreya 5:56. 1905.)

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States, but probably

not everywhere native.

Ree Moni Elack:; Vasey, Contr. U.S: Nat. Herb. 3: 11. 1892.

IRWIN: Moist pine-barrens near Fitzgerald, Oct. 4, 1902 (1708).

West to Mississippi, in the pine-barrens.

A. corymbosus [Chapm.] Nash; Britton, Manual 69. 1901 (without

proper synonymy).

IRWIN: With the preceding (17709).

Virginia to Florida and Mississippi (?), in the coastal plain.

A. scoparius Mx., Fl. 1: 57. 1803. Broom SEDGE.

BERRIEN: Rather dry pine-barrens near Brookfield, Sept. 27,

1902 (1684). Possibly not indigenous.

Nearly all over North -America, but usually as a weed.

Anatomy of leaves and roots described by W. E. Britton,

Bull Torrey Club, 30: 588, 508-599. pl. 27d. 1903.

A. tener (Nees) Kunth, Rev. Gram. 2: 565. pl. 197. 1832.

Dry and intermediate pine-barrens, usually where the Lafay-

ette formation is at or near the surface; often abundant.

Rarely on rocks. DODGE, TELFAIR, COFFEE, WILCOX, DOOLY,

COLQUITT, THOMAS, DECATUR. Fl. summer. Inland to

Sumter County and coastward at least to Lowndes.

West to Texas and south to Argentina.

This species is as good an illustration as any of the singular fact

that nearly all the species in our territory which range

302 HARPER |

southward to the tropics have a noticeable tendency to

become weeds. Some of course are known to have been

introduced from the tropics, and occur with us only as

weeds, but in the case of many which grow in natural

habitats like this one there is an indefinable something

about their appearance which leads one to suspect that they

may not beindigenous. The explanation of this is probably

that a species which ranges through ‘several degrees of

latitude is usually capable of adjusting itself to different

edaphic as well as climatic factors, and is therefore able

to encroach on the territory of less tolerant species.

There is of course another category, of strictly native

plants which are now supposed to have a very wide range

but will be found on further study to be distinct from the

related forms in the tropics. With practice one can usually

distinguish the strictly native from the doubtfully native

plants without much trouble.

ELIONURUS H. & B.; Willd., Sp. Pl. 4: 941. 1806.

(Original spelling Elyonurus.)

E. tripsacoides H. & B., 1. c.

Rottbellia ciliata Nutt., Gen. 1 : 83. 1818.

Andropogon Nuttall Chapm., Fl. 580. 1860.

BERRIEN: In those peculiar Lafayette-less spots already men-

tioned several times (see pp. 111, 112) southwest of Tifton.

Collected once in a similar place near the southwestern

corner of Camden County.

Also in East Florida, and in the tropics.

MANISURIS L., Mant. 2: 164. 1771.

M. rugosa (Nutt.) Kuntze, Rev. 2:780. 1891.

Rottbellia corrugata Baldw., Am. Jour. Sci. 1:355. 1819.

Moist pine-barrens, etc.;not common. DOOLY (1959), WORTH,

BERRIEN, CoLguiTT. Fl. Aug.—Sept. Not known farther

inland, but extends coastward to Echols and Charlton

Counties (originally discovered in Camden County).

South to Florida and west to Texas, in the pine-barrens.

Also in Delaware.

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 303

M. Chapmani (Hack.) Nash; Small, Fl. 56, 1326. 1903.

“ Rottbellia rugosa Nutt.”’ Chapm., Fl. 575. 1860.

Shallow ponds; rare. DOOLY, BERRIEN (1650), Fl. Aug.—

Sept. More common in the Lower Oligocene region (see

Bull. Torrey Club 27: 425. 1900).

North Carolina to Florida and Alabama, in the pine-barrens.

M. cylindrica (Mx.) Kuntze, Rev. 2: 779. 1891.

Dry pine-barrens; rare. BULLOCH (835, 904), TATTNALL. FI.

May-June. Also in Dooly, Sumter, and Lee Counties, in

the Lower Oligocene region.

Also in northern Florida and Mississippi, in the pine-barrens.

ERIANTHUS Mx., Fl. 1:54. 1803.

E. strictus Baldw.; Ell., Sk. 1:39. 1816.

BERRIEN: Low grounds where the Lafayette formation is

absent, southwest of Tifton, Sept. 29, 1902 (1691). Also

in the Altamaha River swamp in McIntosh County. I have

seen it somewhere else in South Georgia under similar con-

ditions, when I did not know what it was and therefore

could not very well make a note of it.

Georgia to Florida, Tennessee, and Texas, mostly in the coastal

plain. :

E. saccharoides Mx., Fl. 1: 55. 1803.

Moist pine-barrens and small branch-swamps. WORTH, COL-

~QUITT (1662), Fl. September.

New Jersey (?) to Florida and Texas (?), in the coastal plain.

E. brevibarbis Mx., 1. c.

BERRIEN: Moist place at base of sand-hills of Little River

southwest of Tifton, Sept. 29, 1902 (1693).

Delaware (?) to Florida and Texas (?), in the coastal plain.

ALISMACE,

SAGITTARIA L., Sp. Pl. 993. 1753.

S. Mohrii J. G. Smith; Mohr, Bull. Torrey Club 24:19. pl. 289.

@ PSO PAOOntiWs, Sa Naber. .07.383. Pl. 3, LOOL.

Moist pine-barrens and open branch-swamps; also a little

inclined to become a weed in ditches. EMANUEL (994),

Meee)

RWSL n°

+ oe

tes:

{ q

304 HARPER

MONTGOMERY, COFFEE (715), WILCOX, IRWIN, DooLy. FI.

May—Sept. (See Bull. Torrey Club 28: 462. 1901; 30: 327.

1903).

Known otherwise only from Mobile County, Alabama.

(?) S. graminea Mx., Fl. 2: 190. 1803.

Small ponds and branches; not common. BULLOCH (950),

COFFEE. Fl. April—Aug.

ECHINODORUS Engelm.; Gray, Manual 460. 1848.

E. radicans (Nutt.) Engelm., 1. c.

Swamps of rivers rising north of our territory. TATTNALL:

Ohoopee River near Ohoopee; MONTGOMERY: Oconee River

near Mount Vernon. Fl. summer. Like most of its associ-

ates, this is more frequent in the Lower Oligocene region.

North Carolina to Florida (Apalachicola), Illinois, and Texas,

in the coastal plain. (Its occurrence in Florida only along

the Apalachicola River is significant, for that is the only

river in that state which rises north of the pine-barrens, as

noted on p. 74.)

TYPHACE. ;

SPARGANIUM L., Sp. Pl. 971. 1753.

S. androcladum [Engelm]. Morong, Bull. Torrey Club 15: 78.

1888. ;

TELFAIR: Edge of swamp of Sugar Creek near McRae, July

4, 1903. DOOLY: Small pond near the Rock House, Sept. 1,

1903. More common farther inland.

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States.

CONIFER.

PINUS L., Sp. Pl. tooo. 1753. PINEs.

P. palustris Mill. (no. 14). Gard. Dict. ed.8.1768. “LONG-LEAF

PINE.”

P . australis Mx. f., Hist., Arb. Am. 1: 64. pl. 6. 1810.

For illustrations see plates 2, 3, 5, 6, 18 and 26 of this

volume,

In dry and intermediate pine-barrens everywhere in our

territory, far more abundant than jall the other trees

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 305

combined. In the region under consideration one can hardly

get out of sight of this species, except in the depths of some

swamp. It is equally abundant in all that part of Georgia

underlaid by Oligocene or later rocks (7. ¢., the ‘‘pine-

barrens’), except in Okefinokee Swamp, where it is absent,

and in the Upper Oligocene and maritime regions, where it

is infrequent. It ranges nearly throughout the coastal

plain (but is rare or wanting in most of the Eocene region),

and near the western boundary of the state it extends

inland to the mountains a little north of latitude 34° (see

Torreya 5: 55-60. 1905).

Extreme southern Virginia to central Florida and eastern

Texas (see Torreya 3: 122. 1903; Bray, Bull. Bureau Fores-

[OM SuDeOt Aen 472 212353) Pl. 1.0. Map Tl: 1904).

Confined to the coastal plain except in Georgia and Ala-

bama as above noted. This is perhaps the most abundant

and important tree in North America at the present time.

For a summary of almost everything known about this and

the following species of Pinus see Mohr’s Timber Pines of

the Southern United States, especially the revised edition.

P. Elliottii Engelm., Trans. Acad. Sci. St. Louis 4: 186. pl. 1-3.

WESG. “SLASH PINE.”

(?) P. Cartbeéa Morelet, Rev. Hort., de la Cote d’Or. 1851.

(?) P. Bahamensis Griseb., Fl. Brit. W. I. 503. 1864.

P. heterophylla Sudw., Bull. Torrey Club 20:45. 1893.

(excl. syns.)

(See G. R. Shaw, Gard. Chron., March tg and Aug. 6, 1904.)

For illustrations see plates 4, 5, 14 f. 2, and 17 f. 2.

Moist pine-barrens, branch-swamps, cypress ponds, etc.

(never in mud or permanent water); common throughout,

probably on every square mile of our territory, but far

less abundant than the preceding. In Georgia its inland

limit coincides with that of the pine-barrens (1.e., with the

boundary between the Eocene and Oligocene regions). From

there to the coast it can be found almost everywhere, in-

cluding Okefinokee Swamp and some if not most of the sea

islands, where P. palustris is absent.

306 HARPER

In many places it occurs as asecond growth (known as “‘old-

field slash-pine’’) in drier situations than its natural habitat.

Perhaps its tendency to become a weed is correlated with

the fact that it ranges southward to the tropics (see remarks

under Andropogon tener, above).

South Carolina to South Florida and Louisiana, in the pine-

barrens and coastward. Believed by some to be identical

with a species growing in the Bahamas, Cuba, and perhaps

other tropical regions. In Georgia it seems to be confined —

to the Columbia formation, but not quite to the Lafayette.

P,. Teda L., Sp. Pl. 1000. 1753. ‘“‘SHORT-LEAF PINE.”

In our territory almost confined to the swamps of creeks and

small rivers. Has been noted in most of the counties. FI.

March—April.

Found in nearly all parts of the southeastern United States

below tooo feet above sea-level, and northward in and near

the coastal plain to Delaware; but so commonly a weed in

old fields that its natural habitat is difficult to determine in

some sections.

’

P, serotina Mx., Fl. 2: 205. 1803. ‘‘Biack PINE.’

P. rigida serotima Loud., Encyc. Pl. 979. 7. 1824-1827. 1829.

P. Teda serotina Wood, Class-Book 660. 1861. Illustrated in

Pilapenie ise 2:

Moist pine-barrens, sand-hill bogs and branch-swamps; com-

mon throughout, but not abundant. Noted in every county

except Mitchell. Fl. March-April. Invariably associated

with the Columbia formation, and can be found almost

anywhere in South Georgia, including Okefinokee Swamp

but excepting the lime-sink region and the sea islands. Its

range terminates abruptly at the fall-line. Most abundant

in the flat pine-barrens toward the coast.

Norfolk County, Virginia (see Torreya 3 : 122. 1903) to central

and West Florida, strictly confined to the coastal plain. -

P. echinata Mill. (no. 12), Gard. Dict. ed. 8. 1768.

>, mitts Mx., Fl. 2: 204. 1803. (SHORT-LEAF PINE.)

On bluffs along the muddy rivers; rare. MONTGOMERY, COF-

FEE, WILCOX. Occurs in a few widely separated localities

—s—- -

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 307

in the pine-barrens nearer the coast, but most abundant

in the Eocene region (see Bull. Torrey Club 31: 15. 1904)

and thence northward to the mountains.

Long Island (?) to Missouri, northern Florida, and Texas.

P. glabra Walt., Fl. Car. 237. 1788. Spruce Pine. ‘‘ WHITE

Pine.”’ (Bottom WHITE PINE.)

P. mitis paupera Wood, Class-Book 660. 1861.

Hammocks and bluffs; frequent but not abundant. sSCREVEN,

BULLOCH, EMANUEL, TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY, TELFAIR, COF-

FEE, WILCOX, THOMAS. Fl. April. Reaches a diameter

of three feet in COFFEE County. Rarer toward the coast

and commoner in the upper third of the coastal plain,

but not quite reaching the fall-line. Its distribution in

Georgia is very similar to that. of Magnolia grandzflora,

with which it is commonly associated.

South Carolina to northern Florida and southeastern Louisiana,

in the coastal plain.

TAXODIUM L. C. Rich., Ann. Mus. Par. 16: 278. 1810.

ie distichum (i): C: Rich: 1. c..2098. 1810. . ““CypREss.2”’

wuomillustrations see pl. of 2-and pl. 27.4. 3.

River-swamps, almost confined to those streams which rise

north of our territory and have eroded their channels through

the superficial formations into the Tertiary strata. Occurs

all along the Ohoopee, Oconee, Ocmulgee, Little Ocmulgee,

and Ochlocknee Rivers. (The latter is a little anomalous

in some respects among our supposed endemic streams,

and if investigated it might be found to have some of its

sources in the lime-sink region.) Fl. spring. In Georgia

this species is confined to the coastal plain, and is most

abundant in the upper third. The characters and dis-

tribution of this and the following species have been more

fully discussed elsewhere (see Bull. Torrey Club 29 :383-—399.

MOOZ S32 OS EL 5.1 LOOS ))

Delaware to Florida, Tennessee, Indiana, Missouri, and Texas,

almost confined to the coastal plain.

A form apparently intermediate between this and the next

grows in the Ogeechee, Little Ohoopee, Allapaha, and

308 HARPER

Withlacoochee Rivers, and in Ochwalkee and Gum Swamp

Creeks. (See Plate X XI, Fig. 1).

T. imbricarium [Nutt.] Harper, Bull. Torrey Club 29: 383. 1902.

‘““Cypress.’’ (For illustrations see Bull. Torrey Club 32: 109,

TIO, 113, 114. 1905; and plates 5, 6, 7, 10, 27eamcmeaman

this work.)

Common throughout in moist pine-harrens, branch-swamps,

and cypress ponds, usually with Pinus Elliottu. Noted in

every county in our territory; least abundant in SCREVEN,

EMANUEL, MONTGOMERY, and the upper part of BULLOCH,

where there are few or no cypress ponds and where this

species does not grow in most of the branches as it does

on the other side of the Altamaha River. Ranges through-

out the pine-barrens of Georgia, including Okefinokee

‘Swamp, and known from a few outlying stations in the

upper fourth of the coastal plain.

Virginia (Dismal Swamp) to Florida and Mississippi, in the

coastal plain.

JUNIPERUS ©. Sp. UPI 10385) Seager

JoVirsinianay Ly Sp. Pl roso, n75ce 2 CEDAR

TATTNALL: Along the Ohoopee River near Ohoopee; COFFEE:

Along Ocmulgee River near Lumber City. More common

in the upper third of the coastal plain and northward,

particularly in the lme-sink and Palzozoic regions.

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States, but often

as an escape from cultivation, so that it is difficult to deter-

mine its natural range accurately.

Pav © EVA AS

ISOETACE.

ISOBLES Wr ops lel toon s7icer

I. flaccida Shuttl.; Chapm., Fl. 602. 1860.

Branch-swamps. BULLOCH (843, 951), COFFEE (12429), and

doubtless elsewhere Known also from Laurens and Sumter

Counties in the Lower Oligocene region, and from Florida.

pee Bully Dorey Club 30: 420. noes >

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 309

: SELAGINELLACEA.

SELAGINELLA Beauv., Prodr. Aitheog. 101. 1805.

: _§.acanthonota Underw., Torreya 2:172. 1902. (Plate XXVIII,

—

Biss. '2),

Sand-hills along the tributaries of the Altamaha River. Tatt-

NALL (1852), MONTGOMERY (1987). Extends down the

Altamaha to Liberty County. (See Bull. Torrey Club

Boe 2 7.) .3) L905.)

A form not quite typical (1957) grows on rock outcrops in

DooLy County near Arabi.

North Carolina to Florida (?), in the pine-barrens. |

S. arenicola Underw., Bull. Torrey Club 25: 541. 1808.

TATTNALL: Rock outcrops near Ohoopee River (1854) and

Pendleton Creek (1560), June, 1903. (See Fern Bull. 13: 15.

1905.)

Previously known only from the lime-sink region of Decatur

County, and from Lake County, Florida, on Columbia sand.

S. apus (L.) Spring, in Mart., Fl. Bras. 17: 119. 1840.

_ BERRIEN: Damp woods west and southwest of Tifton, Sep-

tember, 1902. More common in the upper fourth of the

coastal plain, and northward.

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States

LYCOPODIACE.

LEYCORODIUM Wasp. Piv\ i100. (57 53.-

L. Carolinianum L., Sp. Pl. rroq. 1753.

Moist pine-barrens; comparatively rare. EMANUEL, TATTNALL,

COFFEE (1428), IRWIN, COLQUITT, DECATUR. Extends inland

to a few miles beyond Americus, and coastward to Bryan

and Charlton Counties, always on Columbia sand.

New Jersey to central Florida and Mississippi, in the coastal

plain.

L. alopecuroides L., Sp. Pl. 1102. 1753.

Moist pine-barrens, sand-hill bogs, etc.; rather common.

SCREVEN, BULLOCH, EMANUEL, TATTNALL, MONTGOMERY,

TELFAIR. COFFEE, IRWIN, BERRIEN, COLQUITT, THOMAS,

310 HARPER

DECATUR. Scattered nearly all over South Georgia, where-

ever there is wet Columbia sand.

Long Island to Florida and Mississippi, mostly in nae coastal

plain. f

L. prostratum Harper, Bull. Torrey Club 33 : 229. 1906.

L. pinnatum [Chapm.] Lloyd & Underw., not Lam.

Moist pine-barrens; sometimes with the preceding but less

common. COFFEE (705), IRWIN, BERRIEN, COLQUITT, DECA-

TUR. I have seen it also in Meriwether, Sumter, Calhoun,

Early, and Ware Counties, but never east of the Altamaha

River and its tributaries.

Known also from the pine-barrens of West Florida and Ala-_

bama.

POLYPODIACE.

DRYOPTERIS Adans., Fam. 2 : 20, 551. 1763.

D. Floridana (Hook.) Kuntze, Rev. 2: 812. 1891. y

BERRIEN: Rich damp woods near Tifton, Sept. 29, 1902

(7657). Known also in Sumter, Early, and Thomas (W/7rs.

Taylor) Counties, and a few stations in Florida and

Alabama.

POLYSTICHUM Roth, Tent. Fl. Germ. 3: 69. 1800.

P. acrostichoides (Mx.) Schott, Gen. Fil. 2 “(LO: 4) eave

Bluffs, etc., at or near our inland boundary (see pp. 102~106).

MONTGOMERY (two stations), WILCOx, DOOLY. Associated

with Quercus alba at each place, as is usually the case (see

Pern wbulls 13522. v905):

Nearly throughout temperate Eastern North America.

ONOCLEA L. Sp. Pl. 1062. 1753.

QO. sensibilis L., 1. c.

MONTGOMERY: Oconee River swamp near Mount Vernon,

June 30, 1903. Rarely nearer the coast, but frequent in

the upper third of the coastal plain.

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States bectle of

Florida, but scarce in the pine-barren region.

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA oli

LORINSERIA Presl., Epimel. Bot. 72. 1852.

L. areolata (L.) Presl, 1. c.

Wocdwardia angustifolia J. E. Smith, Mem. Acad. Tor. 5 : 411.

1793.

Wet woods and various other kinds of swamps. TATTNALL,

MONTGOMERY, COFFEE, IRWIN, BERRIEN, COLQUITT. Prob-

ably grows in nearly every county in Georgia.

Nearly throughout the Eastern United States.

ANCHISTEA Presl, Epimel. Bot. 71. 1852.

A. Virginica (L.) Presl, 1. c.

Woodwardia Virginica J. E. Smith. Mem. Acad. Tor. 5 : 412.

1793.

Moist pine-barrens, open branch-swamps, and various kinds

of ponds. Noted in most of the counties. Ranges nearly

throughout South Georgia, but never seen farther inland,

Nova Scotia to Michigan in the glaciated region, south to

central Florida, Arkansas, and Texas, in the coastal plain.

see Rhodora 7:71. 1905.

For references to some interesting literature on this species

see Contr. U. S. Nat. Herb. 5:428 (footnote). 1901; Fern

Bullies vio! Loos:

ASPLENIUM L., Sp. Pl. 1078. 1753.

A Filix-foemina (L.) Bernh., Schrad. Neues Jour. Bot. 17:26.

1806.

Damp shaded places on bluffs; rare. MONTGOMERY: Stallings’

Bluff; w1tcox: Upper Seven Bluffs. Scattered over South

Georgia, but commoner in the upper half of the state.

Nearly throughout the north temperate zone in one form or

another.

A. platyneuron (L.) Oakes; D. C. Eaton, Ferns N. A. 1:24. 1879.

Rich or damp woods; rare. With or near the preceding at

both places, also at two stations in the upper part of BUL-

LOCH (956). Commoner in the upper fourth of the coastal

plain, and still more so in Middle Georgia and northward.

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States.

oe HARPER

PTERIDIUM Scop., Fl. Carn. 169. 1760.

P. aquilinum pseudocaudatum Clute, Fern Bull. 8:39. 1900.

(as syn.)

Chiefly in dry pine-barrens, less frequently in hammocks or ~

on sand-hills or rocks. Common throughout, and often

abundant.

Long Island to Florida and Texas.

MARGINARIA Bory, Dict. Class. Hist. Nat. 6 : 587. 1824.

M. polypodioides (L.) Tidestrom, Torreya 5: 171. 1905. ©

Polypodium incanum Sw.

(For other synonyms see Tidestrom, 1. c.)

On angiospermous trees in swamps and hammocks, also on

projecting ledges of Altamaha Grit. TATTNALL, MONTGOM-

ERY, DODGE, TELFAIR, COFFEE, BERRIEN. Scattered all over

the state.

Widely distributed in the Southeastern United States and

tropical America.

— . OSMUNDACEZ.

OSMUNDA L., Sp. Pl. 1063. 1753.

O. spectabilis Willd. Sp. Pl. 5:98. 1810; Underw., Torreya

Bien OOS”

In various kinds of swamps; rather 'rare. MONTGOMERY,

IRWIN, BERRIEN, COLQUITT. Scattered over the state.

Nearly pinodeneue temperate Eastern North America. ee

related to the European O. regalis L.

O. cinnamomea L., Sp. Pl. 1066. 1753.

Moist pine-barrens, branch-swamps, sand-hill bogs, etc.; com-

mon in most of the counties in our territory, and in all other

parts of Georgia.

Throughout the Eastern United States.

OPHIOGLOSSACEZ.

BOTRYCHIUM Sw., Schrad. Neues Jour. Bot. 18007: 110. 1801.

B. obliquum Muhl.; Willd., Sp. Pl. 5:63. 1810.

BERRIEN: Rich damp woods near Tifton, Sept. 29, 1902

More frequent in Middle Georgia, but nowhere abundant.

Widely distributed in the Eastern United States.

—

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 313

The treatment of the cellular cryptogams which constitute

' the remainder of this catalogue is necessarily less complete than

_. that of the vascular plants. Their bibliography has not been as

carefully investigated as has that of the higher plants since the

nomenclature reforms of recent years, and consequently in some

cases I have not been able to cite the place of publication cor-

rectly. For local distribution in Georgia in most cases I can

only cite localities for specimens collected, for I am not suff-

ciently familiar with these plants to identify many of them in the

field. Most of the mosses have been determined by Mrs. Eliza-

beth G. Britton, the hepatics by Miss Caroline C. Haynes, and

the fungi by Dr. W. A. Murrill, and their assistance is hereby

gratefully acknowledged.

Our knowledge of the general distribution of most of these

plants is very fragmentary, for they are not usually mentioned

in local floras, and consequently many of them are known only

from the comparatively few stations where they have been col-

‘lected. For this reason I have not attempted to give the total

range in every case.

The number of cellular cryptogams known in the region will

of course be considerably increased by future field work. It has

been my custom while in the field to collect all bryophytes and

woody fungi which I was not sure I had already, and there may

not be over twice as many of these in the region as are listed here.

The fleshy and parasitic fungi remain almost untouched, but

it is not likely that they are very numerous, mainly for the same

reasons noted by Kearney (Contr. U.S. Nat. Herb. 5: 314. 1900)

on the coast of North Carolina and Lloyd & Tracy (Bull. Torrey

Club 28:81. r901) on the coast of Mississippi. The lack of

shade in the pine-barrens is unfavorable to the growth of a large

number of cryptogams, from ferns down. Lichens I have never

collected at all, but they are fairly abundant in hammocks and

some other places.

BRYORE YA.

MUSCI.

SEMATOPHYLLUM Mitt., Jour. Linn. Soc. 8:5. 1864. -

9. adnatum (Mx.) E. G. Britton, Bryologist 5:65. 1902.

On trunks of angiospermous trees. COFFEE (1434)). Also

314 HARPER

in Sumter, Clinch, and Lowndes Counties, in other parts

of the coastal plain.

Eastern United States

ISOPTERYGIUM Mitt.

I. micans (Sw.) E. G. Britton, Bryologist 5:67. 1902.

On damp decaying logs, in shade. coFFEE (144Q9a; also with

2046c). Also in Sumter and Randolph Counties, in the

upper third of the coastal plain.

New Jersey to Florida and Louisiana.

RHYNCHOSTEGIUM.

R. serrulatum (Hedw.) Jaeg. & Sauerb.

Habitat similar to that of the preceding.. BULLOCH (SS4C,

in part). Also in Randolph County.

Eastern North America.

THUIDIUM Br. & Sch.

T. sp.

BERRIEN: On roots of trees in non-alluvial swamp of Little

River west of Tifton (17700a).

LEUCODON Schwaegr. Suppl. 2:1. 1816.

L. julaceus minor

COFFEE: On bark of Acer rubrum, on bank of Sevonieae Mile

Creek (1434a).

HEDWIGIA Ebrh., Hann. Mag. 1781.

H. albicans viridis (Schimp.)

TATTNALL: On cliffs of Altamaha Grit near Pendleton Creek

(7860b). This genus is rare in the coastal plain, on

account of the scarcity of dry non-calcareous rocks which it

prefers.

THELIA Sull.

T. asprella (Schimp.) Sull.

TATTNALL: On ledge of Altamaha Grit near Ohoopee River

- (1857a); COFFEE: On the ground in hammocks and sand-

hammocks (1434d).

Eastern North America.

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 315

LESKEA Hedw.

1, denticulata Sull.

COLQUITT: On rough bark of old dead tree in Ocklocknee

Creek swamp near Moultrie (1673a).

Middle and Southeastern United States.

FONTINALIS L.

F. flaccida R. & C., Bull. Soc. Bot. Belg. 27!:134. pl. 9; Bot.

Gaz. 13: 201. pl. 19. 1888.

TATTNALL: About low-water mark in rocky bed of Ohoopee

River at the shoals west of Reidsville (2r51a). I have

collected what has been identified as the same thing in a

cypress pond near Brunswick, a totally different habitat.

BRACHELYMA Schimp., Syn. Musc. Europ. ed. 2. 557. 1876.

B. robustum (Cardot) E. G. Britton, Bryologist 7:48. May 1904.

Crypheadelphus robustus Cardot, Rev. Bryol. 31:8., 1904;

Brotherus in Engler & Prantl, Nat. Pflanzenfam.1° : 731.

1905.

On trees and bushes subject to inundation, along all three

classes of streams. TATTNALL: Ohoopee River west of

Reidsville; CoFFEE: Ocmulgee River at Barrow’s Bluff;

WILcox: abundant along branches about five miles southeast

of Rochelle. Our largest moss (Sphagnum excepted).

Occurs also in Jefferson, Laurens, Pulaski, and Miller

Counties, in the upper third of the coastal plain. (The

species is based on material from the two counties last

mentioned. )

Not known elsewhere.

TETRAPLODON Br. & Sch.

T. australis Sull. & Lesq. Mosses U.S. 53. 1856.

coLguitT: On old cow dung in moist pine-barrens north of

Moultrie, Sept. 24, 1902 (z66Sa). Prehistoric habitat

unknown.

New Jersey to Florida, in the coastal plain.

. - RHIZOGONIUM Brid., Bryol. Univ. 2:664. 1827.

R. spiniforme (Hedw.) Bruch, Flora 29:134. 1846.

COFFEE: Abundant on rotten logs and bases of trees in non-

316 HARPER

alluvial swamp of Seventeen Mile Creek, February, 1904

(2046a). Also in Lowndes County.

Otherwise known only from Florida, Alabama (Mobile Co.),

Louisiana, and some tropical countries.

FUNARIA Schreb.

F. hygrometrica (L.) Sibth., Fl. Oxon. 288. 1794.

BULLOCH: Wet woods near Bloys (&8&4c, in part).

Cosmopolitan, but apparently not native everywhere.

PHYSCOMITRIUM Brid.

P. turbinatum (Mx.) Brid.

BULLOCH: With the preceding (884a). Alsoin Clayton County,

Middle Georgia.

Throughout most of the United States.

SCHLOTHEIMIA Brid., Mant. Musc. 114. 1819.

S. Sullivantii C. Mull.

On trees, especially Magnolias, in hammocks and swamps.

MONTGOMERY, BERRIEN, CoLguiTT. Also in Effingham and

Brooks Counties, nearer the coast.

South Carolina to Florida and Louisiana, in the coastal plain.

PTYCHOMITRIUM Br. & Sch.

P. incurvum (Schwaegr.) Sull.

TATTNALL: Ledge of Altamaha Grit near Ohoopee River

(7857b). Rare and inconspicuous.

Ranges northward to Canada.

GRIMMIA Ebrh., Beitr. 1; 168. 1787.

G. leucophza Grev., Act. Soc. Wern. 4: fl. 6.

TATTNALL: Cliffs of Altamaha Grit near Ohoopee River (1858a)

and Pendleton Creek, June, 1903. Probably not previously

reported from the coastal plain. More common on granite

outcrops in Middle Georgia.

North to New York and Ohio. Also in the Mediterranean

region.

LEUCOBRYUM Hampe, Flora 20: 282. 1837.

L. glaucum (L.) Schimp.

TATTNALL: Cliffs of Altamaha Grit near Pendleton Creek,

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA Sly

June 26, 1903, Quite common in some other parts of

_ Georgia, usually on bases of trees.

DICRANUM Hedw., Fund. 2: 91. 1782.

D. Bonjeani DeNot.

BERRIEN: Sand-hills of Little River southwest of Tifton,

Sept. 29, 1902. Also on Cumberland Island.

SPHAGNUM L.

§. cuspidatum [Ehrh.] Russ. & Warnst.

coFFEE: Non-alluvial swamp of Seventeen Mile Creek near

Gaskin’s Spring; abundant (694a, 2203a, in fruit).

Eastern North America.

Var. angustilimbatum Warnst.

popDGE: Sand-hill pond in sand-hills of Gum Swamp Creek

east of Eastman (7976b). Also in Okefinokee Swamp.

_§. Fitzgeraldi immersum Warnst.

COFFEE: Shallow sand-hill pond in sand-hills of Satilla River

south of Douglas (1448a).

S. Garberi L. & J.

popGE: Edge of sand-hill pond east of Eastman (1976c).

S. Harperi Warnst., Bot. Centralb. Beihefte 16: 250. 1904.

DoDGE: With the preceding (1976d, type). Only locality known.

S. tenerum [Aust.] Warnst., Hedwigia 29: 194. 1890.

BERRIEN: Sand-hill bog near Little River, Sept. 29, 1902. Also

in Charlton County

S. macrophyllum Bernh.

Ponds, and swamps of endemic (7. e., not muddy) streams.

SCREVEN, COFFEE, IRWIN, COLQUITT. Also in pine-barren

ponds in Sumter County.

New Jersey to Florida and Alabama, in the coastal plain.

S. cymbifolium Ehrh.

Non-alluvial swamps. BULLOCH (S29a), COFFEE (2203), in

3 fruit). Also in Sumter and Decatur Counties and doubt-

less elsewhere in the state.

Cosmopolitan.

318 HARPER

S. acutifolium Ehrh.

IRWIN: Swamp near Fitzgerald, July 16, 1902 (1420a).

HEPATIC.

= ANTHOCEROS L., Sp. Pl. 1139. 1753.

A. Carolinianus Mx., FI.

BULLOCH: Wet woods near Bloys (884b). Scattered over the

state.

FRULLANIA Raddi, Atti Soc. Ital. Sci. Mod. 18: (9). 1818.

F. Kunzei Lehm. & Lindenb.

TATTNALL: Rocks near Ohoopee River (1S60a). COFFEE: On

bark of rotten log in non-alluvial swamp of Seventeen Mile

Creek (2046d). Also in Walton, Sumter, and Lowndes

Counties.

F. Caroliniana Sull.

COFFEE: With the preceding (2046e). Also in Sumter and

McIntosh Counties.

ARCHILEJEUNEA [Spruce] Schiffn.

A. clypeata (Schw.) Schiffn.; Engler & Prantl, Nat. Pflanzenfam.

Ee OnE LOO ss

On trunks of angiospermous trees, mostly inswamps. COFFEE

(7434¢), CoLQuiTT (7677a). Also in’ Clarke) \Wiamenelar

Echols, and Thomas Counties. ~

Middle and Southeastern United States.

MASTIGOLEJEUNEA.

M. auriculata (Hook. & Wils.) Schiffn., 1. c. 129. 1893.

CcoLguiTT: On rough bark of old dead tree in swamp of Och-

locknee Creek near Moultrie (7673b). Also in Lowndes

County.

Ranges west to Louisiana, in the coastal plain. Also in

tropical America.

HARPALEJEUNEA.

H. ovata [Hook.) Schiffn., 1. c. 127. 1893.

COFFEE: On bank of Magnolia glauca in non-alluvial swamp of

Seventeen Mile Creek near Gaskin’s Spring, February, 1904

(with 20467, 2047a, and 2047)).

Virginia to Georgia. Also in western Europe.

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 319

LEJEUNEA Lib.

L. Americana [Lindb.] Evans, Mem. Torrey Club 8:154. 1902.

COFFEE: On bark of rotten log of Gordonia in non-alluvial

swamp of Seventeen Mile Creek, Feb. 5, 1904 (2046, in

part).

North Carolina to Florida and Texas. Also in tropical America

PORELLA L., Sp. Pl. 1106. 1753.

P. pinnata L.

On bark of trees subject to inundation, along rivers and

creeks. MONTGOMERY, COFFEE, COLQUITT. Scattered over

the state.

Temperate Eastern North America. Also in Europe and

Cuba (Mohr).

RADULA Dumort., Comm. Bot. 112. 1822.

R. sp. (undetermined). |

COFFEE: On bark of rotten log of Gordonia in non-alluvial

swamp of Seventeen Mile Creek near Gaskin’s Spring, Feb.

5, 1904 (2046c).

SCAPANIA Dumort., Ree d’Obs. Jung. 14. 1835.

S. nemorosa (L.) Dumort., |. c.

Swamps, bluffs, and rock outcrops; terrestrial. TATTNALL

(1860C), MONTGOMERY (1863¢), COLQUITT (1674a). Prob-

ably commoner in the upper parts of the state.

Europe and temperate North America.

BAZZANIA 5S. F. Gray, Nat. Arr. Brit. Pl. 1: 704. 1821.

B. trilobata (L.) S. F. Gray, l. c. :

COFFEE: On rotten wood and bases of trees in non-alluvial

swamp of Seventeen Mile Creek near Gaskin’s Spring, Feb.

5, 1904 (2046b). Notseen elsewhere in Georgia.

Ranges north to New England. Also in Europe.

KANTIA 8. F. Gray, Nat. Arr. Brit. Pl. 1: 706. 182r.

K. Trichomanis (L.) S. F. Gray, l. c.

MONTGOMERY: Perpendicular clayey bank of ravine near

Stallings’ Bluff on the Oconee River (1863b). Also in

Chattahoochee, Stewart, and Lowndes Counties, in similar

situations.

320 HARPER

ODONTOSCHISMA Dumort.

O. prostratum (Sw.) Trevis.

Chiefly on roots of trees in swamps (not muddy) and ravines.

MONTGOMERY (I863a), COFFEE, IRWIN (I4I5a), BERRIEN

(1699a), COLQUITT (1674), in part). Also in Chattahoochee,

Lowndes, and Clinch Counties, and in Okefinokee Swamp.

CEPHALOZIA Dumort., Rec. d’Obs. Jung. 18. 1835.

C. Virginiana Spruce.

COLQuITT: On small rotten log in swamp of Ochlocknee Creek

near Moultrie (1674b, in part). Also in Lowndes County.

Virginia to Louisiana.

PLAGIOCHILA Dumort., Rec. d’Obs. Jung. 14. 1835.

P. Ludoviciana Sull

COFFEE: On bark of Magnolia glauca in non-alluvial swamp of

Seventeen Mile Creek near Gaskin’s Spring (1448b, 2047).

Also in Clarke County.

West to Louisiana (Mohr).

P. undata Sull. ©

COFFEE: With the preceding (1448c, 2047a). Also in Clarke,

Chattahoochee, and Brooks Counties.

PALLAVICINIA 5S. F. Gray, Nat. Arr. Brit. Pl. 1: 775. 1821.

P. Lyellii (Hook.)

On the ground in non-alluvial swamps, etc. COFFEE, BERRIEN,

COLQUITT. Scattered over the state; one of our commonest

hepatics.

MARCHANTIA L., Sp. Pl. 1137. 1753.

M. potymorpuHa L., l. c.

TATTNALL: Fruiting abundantly along railroad near Ohoopee,

in a place where some cross-ties had. been recently burned,

June 26, 1903. Natura] habitat uncertain.

Cosmopolitan.

THALLOPHYTA.

FUNGI.

ASTREUS Morgan, Jour. Cin. Soc. Nat. Hist. 12:19. 1889

A. hygrometricus (Pers.) Morgan, l. c. 20.

Sand-hills. COFFEE. DODGE Also in Lee County.

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA BVA

. LENTINUS.

L. sp.

On rotten logs. witcox, coLtouitr. Also in Columbia County.

SCHIZOPHYLLUM Fr.

S. commune Fr.

COFFEE: On fallen trunk of Magnolia glauca in swamp of

_ Seventeen Mile Creek near Gaskin’s Spring (694b).

BOLETUS L.

B. Ananas M. A. Curtis, Am. Jour. Sci. I]. 6:351. 1848.

COFFEE: Rather dry pine-barrens near Douglas, July 31, 1902.

Also in Meriwether County.

ELFVINGIA Karst., Finlands Basidsv. 333. 1880.

E. fasciata (Sw.) Murrill, Bull. Torrey Club 30:298. 1903.

DODGE: On dying trunk of Magnolia grandiflora at base of

sand-hills of Gum Swamp Creek east of Eastman (1976a).

Also in Randolph County.

COLTRICIA S. F. Gray, Nat. Arr. Brit. Pl. 1:644. 1821.

C. parvula (Klotzsch) Murrill, Bull. Torrey Club 31:345. 1904.

Among ashes in dry pine-barrens. IRWIN, BERRIEN (1696a).

Also in Bartow and Glynn Counties.

Pennsylvania to Georgia and Alabama.

INONOTUS Karst., Medd. Soc. Faun. & Fl. Fenn. 5: 39. 1879.

I. amplectens Murrill, Bull. Torrey Club 31:600. 1904.

TELFAIR: On living twigs of Astmina parviflora in swamp of

Ocmulgee River about a mile above Lumber City (rggo0a,

type).

Not known elsewhere.

CORIOLUS Quel., Ench. Fung. 175. 1886; Murrill, Bull. Torrey

(Clheilo) 6778 WLI eV

C. versicolor (lu.) Quel., 1. c.

On dead trees and fallen logs. COFFEE (693a), DOOLY (1962a)

Scattered over the state.

C. pargamenus (Fr.) Pat., Tax. Hymen. 94. 1900.

- BULLOCH: On small dead tree in wet woods near Bloys (884d).

Also in Bibb and Chattahoochee Counties.

one HARPER

ALG

BATRACHOSPERMUM Roth.

B. vagum keratophytum (Bory) Sirdt.

(Determined by Dr. M. A. Howe.)

BERRIEN: Swift-flowing branch in small non-alluvial swamp

or bog in sand-hills of Allapaha River about three miles

east of Allapaha, May 5, 1904 (2189a).

SPIROGYRA.

©: Sp. (according to Dr. TE. Hazen):

COFFEE: Shallow cypress pond at outer edge of sand-hills of

Seventeen Mile Creek near Chatterton July 29, 1902 (1453).

MYXOMYCETES. .

LYCOGALA Mx.

L. epidendrum (L.) Buxb.

On rotten logs in swamps. MONTGOMERY, COLQUITT (1676a).

Also in Brooks County, south of our limits. ,

STEMONITIS Gled.

S. sp.

BULLOCH: On pine stump in dry pine-barrens near Bloys

(984a). Possibly not indigenous

SUMMARY OF THE CATALOGUE.

The total number of families, genera, and species and varieties

at present known to occur naturally in the Altamaha Grit region

may be tabulated as follows:

ee Species and

Groups Families Genera | SOs

Gamopetalee 31 m2 238

Archichlamydez 58 138 260

Monocotyledones 23 80 23

Gymnosperme I 3 9

Pteridophyta 6 I4 IQ

Musci 20 28

Hepatice » Ts 17

Thallophyta TZ 13}

Total dicotyledons- 89 260 498

Total angiosperms 112 340 Gata

Total spermatophytes rng 343 720

Total vascular plants IIQ 357 730

Total cellular cryptogams 47 58

Grand total 404 7907

ke | a

The 75 weeds which have already been listed separately

(pages 114, 115) are not included in this enumeration, and all

the following statistics will refer to native plants only, unless

otherwise specified.

How nearly complete this catalogue is can only be conjectured.

Considering the uniformity of the environmental conditions in

different parts of the region, the open character of the forests,

the conspicuousness of many of the species (at least 300 being

large enough to be recognizable from a moving train), and the

fact that I have passed through every county in the region more

than once, it is not likely that more than 25 per cent. of the

vascular plants (according to our present conceptions of species)

haveescapedme. The total number of spermatophytes probably

does not exceed 1000, pteridophytes 25, and bryophytes too.

The number of thallophytes may ultimately run up to several

hundred, but it is not likely that they are in the majority here

as they are in most other parts of the world.

323

324 HARPER

Two interesting things are brought out by the above table.

The uniformity of the flora is shown by the small number of

species; only 739 vascular plants known in 11,000 square miles.

There are several states in the Union with a smaller area which

contain nearly twice as many species. Second, the comparative

newness of the flora is probably correlated with the large pro-

portion of mcnocotyledons, which here constitute 30 per cent.

of the total angiosperms. All parts of the coastal plain and

glaciated region which have been sufficiently studied seem to

have very nearly thesame proportion, while in the Metamorphic

and Paleozoic regions the monocotvledons average only about

Dis Ose Ceiaub,,” 3

Among the vascular plants it will be noticed that there are

three times as many genera as families, and twice as many

species as genera.

Largest families. The twelve largest families (each of which

contains more than 1.5 per cent. of the total spermatophytic

flora), and the number of native genera and species in each, are

as follows: Composite (including Cichoriacez), 45 genera, 88

species; Cyperacez, 12 genera, 79 species; Graminee, 21 genera,

55 species; Leguminose (including Cesalpiniaceee and Mimo-

sacez), 24 genera, 43 species; Scrophulariacee, 10 genera, 24

species; Ericaceze (including Vacciniacee, Pyrolacee, and Cleth-

race), 12 genera, 23 species; Labiatz, 9 genera, 18 species;

Cupulifere, 2 genera, 16 species; Umbellifere, 7 genera,14 species;

Onagracee, 4 genera, 13 species; Euphorbiacez, 7 genera, 12

species; Orchidacez, 5 genera, rr species.

The relations of these twelve largest families to the nineteen

typical habitats previously described may be summarized as

follows. In the table below, the number immediately following

each family name indicates the number of native species, and

the numbers in the columns the number represented in each

habitat.

The last column, which does not strictly belong to this table,

but is added here for convenience, shows the ratio of each

family to the total number of spermatophytes.

1 See Torreya 5: 207-210. 1905.

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 325

soyAydoyeurteds | ammnanocnoanoo re

Tl@ JO “yusc1eg AMAMHHHOAHHE :

ca 4 [e)

S]N]q-IOATYy BS GG) MMSE SSeese I) Te Sse 5

sxspoWmUtTe Hi mt! | ammatee 5d

Pi H 3 v

syoouleYy-pues ELIS Gon ll) Bote sells ut ee 2s

spuod jj1y-pues etfs Saleh te) DAM aD a SES) 3

: .|sdurems TerAnite-vON | Pt Pod ha Dees 1s :

4 s30q [tu-pues HHAtHH | A ] Ways} S) (o) »

- <

“Op 9Jelpoutiezuy cahwl Vi i tl esti) fe

‘ za

; OmmMmoneHH OAT! ODN am

STTEU-Pues I S at! q

‘Op yueudreosqy hE tet th i WT SSou 82 =

‘op semoreys | qanelilolliinng 5

spuod sseidAég | SSIS Sin aed a eae B

sIoAtl Appuyl SPL GHD oCieEGy se USS GIRS. G

ssepp pue jo ss9ary | SR Us eh ceseill ais a

Ln |

sduteMs-39019 | Hi twl ad Pe pHs 2

we)

= + GH

sdureMs-youeig | ntMnNAH{ A] Inv+x 4

mrMAr~mM) | | Aanoa n

sueiieq-oeutd 4stoy iS) Hoo fl

F y 2 5

: otana Ne}

Op eyeIpeutieqyuy | 2 mA gO A a nO ‘o

a Ve)

sueiieq-eutd Arq | Shh oat ie aS 3

sdoioyno x90 Eel GAG N ial Fok MCL Mise) iS

45)

° q

a im oO

a S a | oS

n g H o

st bg) 25)

< 0 8 HmB TOTO is On @

& Og HO pH 7 alte} S| s=

le “Hop 8 (3) B na, a

gee’ oesgesege | 24

es Bs ghe shes gseon One

SER OGRE OSU EAE a

n Al 85 WS 33's o EF oe

z BeereegeGeere | » ©

maHon ot

3 OpnANPONACOOGS “ea, ey

= ; 2 3B

< i= +

2 Ov

Leal

326 HARPER

Many interesting conclusions can be drawn from this table,

but only a few of them will be mentioned here. It will be noticed

first of all perhaps that Cyperacee occur in all the habitats,

Composite in all but one, Ericaceze in all but three, Grami-

nee in all but four, Scrophulariacee in all but five, and Orchi-

dacez in only six. It happens that intermediate pine-barrens

is the only habitat in which all these families are repre-

sented.

If we add together the figures in each row and divide by the

number of species in the corresponding family, we shall get a

ratio representing roughly the adaptability to different habitats

of the species in each family. In this respect Ericacez lead,

with a ratio of 2.87, and Graminez come last, with 1.22.

This is perhaps correlated with the fact that Graminez are more

characteristic of old regions and Ericacee of new regions, in

temperate Eastern North America at least. The ratio for the

whole Altamaha Grit region was shown on page 108 to be about

1.68.

It will be noticed further that Orchidacee do not usually

associate with Cupulifere, Leguminose, or Euphorbiacez, and

that the habitats in which the three last-mentioned families

do not occur contain nearly twice as many monocotyledons (see

page 107) as those in which they do. This may indicate that

these three families are comparatively highly specialized with

respect to the orders to which they belong.

To eliminate from the above table differences due to the

greater number of species in some habitats than in others, we

should express the figures in each column in terms of their

ratios to the number at the bottom of the column. Doing this,

we would find that while Composit2 are most numerous in dry

pine-barrens, they are most prominent in intermediate pine-

barrens where they constitute 21% of the flora. Likewise

Leguminosz constitute about 17% of the flora of dry pine-

barrens and sand-hills. Cyperacez are much more numerous in

moist pine-barrens than anywhere else, but most prominent in

cypress and escarpment ponds. Graminez, too, have nearly

twice as many representatives in moist pine-barrens as in any

other one habitat, but are more prominent in the shallow pine-

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA Oot

barren ponds. Euphorbiaceze, like Leguminose, are most

numerous and prominent in dry pine-barrens and on sand-hills,

‘Largest genera. The twenty-one largest genera in the Altamaha

Grit region seem to be Rhynchospora, with 27 species; Carex,

with 17; Quercus, 14; Panicum, 14; Xyrts, 11; Polygala, 11; Lud-

wigia, 10; Eupatorium, 10; Juncus, 10° Gerardia, 8; Ascleptas, 8;

Sabbatia, 8; Scleria, 8; Eleocharis, 8; Hypericum, 7; Andropogon,

- 7; Ilex, 7; Cyperus, 7; Laciniaria, 6; Rhexta, 6; Pinus, 6.

The relations of these 21 genera to the 19 typical habitats are

shown in the following table. The names of the genera are

arranged systematically, each followed by the number of species

just mentioned. Under each habitat is the number of species

of each of these genera which it contains.

Pinus is represented in all the habitats, J/ex in all but three,

and Rhynchospora in all but six. No Quercus ever associates with

a Juncus or Eleocharis in our territory. Xyris is represented in

every group in-which Quercus is not, and associates with Quercus

in only one.

Quercus would seem to be essentially an old and mesophytic

genus. It does not occur in any habitat with over 35% of

monocotyledons, but it does occur in all that have less than 20%.

The proportion of monocotyledons in the nine groups in which it

does occur is about 20%, and in the remaining ten, 37%. These

figures would be just about reversed for Juncus and Xyris, and

still more so for Eleocharis.

Sabbatia, Ludwigia, Rhexia, and Hypericum, characteristic

dicotyledonous coastal plain genera, show a marked liking for

the society of monocotyledons, while Carex, Cyperus, and Pant-

cum, cosmopolitan monocotyledonous genera, lean a little the

other way.

Commonest species. The 45 commonest species in the region,

grouped according to size, and arranged as nearly as possible

according to relative frequence in each group, are about as

follows. (The left-hand columns are to be read first.)

TREES.

Pinus palustris Pinus Elliotti

-Quercus Catesbzi Magnolia glauca

Nyssa biflora Taxodium imbricarium

328

HARPER

SHN]G-IEATy H 1 [oo

syOOWIUIE FT A ese a

syOOUUTeY-pues Pate fe

i Se ee

spuod * ][ty-pues bh eer) sce yl mes |

Sdurems [erAn|[e-uo0N| VO TW de Bei tit Le

ssoq ][Ty-pues Ro te Werner vie nh ee

‘Op a4eIpeutiezuy Deh Wolk To ete Sttsbiaiy} so en

s][TU-pues aeHHol | tl} i tl tea at at dle]

‘Op jueudreosq Lia ai) ew | Lol

‘Oop 198MOTTeEYyS HHH [| HANAAH | SH HAHAH] wm] | a

spuod ssordég | Pl tt Haet hme |} ama wink | w]e

sroary ApH | Wee ee SSRs ets eS iol ih ll ibs

ssefo puz jo szoary | Het Uo A eee Say ema poi bh fps

sdurems-901) | PUSS eh eee ey tah yh bt jes

sdwems-youeig Pe eee A] Peal aaa] a

sueiteg-suld 4Stoy\, HMMM MiNnd oe | ae Or Sas e

‘Op a}erpeul1szuy HOmAAH AMON AH | pouea i! |=

susiteq-ourd Arq mame] | tl] Holl] | Hal scl

sdoiojno 390% PP Wa Sey ey ee Deeg, ih ty)

& >

Ss N

cal a [as] ~

a ie uw

Ne} 9 eS

a Ecco 4 mg SH A. nn" 8

SS a Qe S A Sy ay meee ae bo

< BES G85 BH ww aH Gu Qlo

Soo Rs Wa Ss iw 5] 0 asess&

a eee SO S-o we oO] Sn wn eo HO Oly

ASGVOr KS Hon SHES Om HIS

a G55 ne sadn e SE Eka ee f5 ale

13) —_ oc

o AROFG IMAM O] EM One aon <I

Table showing relations of the 21 largest genera to the 18 typical habitats.

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 329

Pinus serotina

Nyssa Ogeche

Quercus brevifolia

Liriodendron Tulipifera

SHRUBS.

Ilex glabra

Pinckneya pubens

Hypericum fasciculatum

Cyrilla racemiflora

HERBS.

Aristida stricta

Sarracenia flava

Eriocaulon decangulare

Chondrophora nudata

Eriocaulon lineare

Sarracenia minor

Cracca Virginiana

Eriogonum tomentosum

Kuhnistera pinnata

Quercus Margaretta

Pinus Teda

Acer rubrum

Liquidambar Styraciflua

Pieris nitida

Cliftonia monophylla

Viburnum nudum

Ilex myrtifolia

Pteridium aquilinum pseudo-

caudatum

Pontederia cordata

Ludwigia pilosa

Stillingia sylvatica

Baptisia lanceolata

Baldwinia uniflora

Polygala cymosa

Baldwinia atropurpura

Syngonanthus flavidulus

Oxypolis filiformis

Helianthus Radula

Baptisia perfoliata

Mesadenia lanceolata virescens

Marshallia graminifola

The distinction between trees and shrubs is not a sharp one,

and some of the above will be found in both categories a few

pages farther on.

Notable absentees. From a phytogeographical standpoint the

plants which do not occur in a given region are almost as im-

portant as those which do. I have elsewhere (Bull. Torrey

Club 32: 147. 1905) called attention to a number of species

which are conspicuous by their absence, but it may not be out

of place to repeat some of the same data here in a different

way, with a considerable number of additions.

The following genera, each having three or more representa-

tives in the Eastern United States and at least one in South

Georgia, are wanting, or if present very rare, in the Altamaha

Grit region.

Monarda Asarum

Nama (Hydrolea) Celtis

Cicuta Boehmeria

Hydrocotyle Populus

Svida (part of Cornus) Uvularia

Jussiza Trillium

Lythrum Homalocenchrus

Tilia Potamogeton

Rosa Typha

Hydrangea Adiantum

Ranunculus Phegopteris

Polygonum (in the broadest sense)

330 HARPER

The following genera are represented in the Eastern United

States (including South Georgia) by a single widely distributed

species which scems to be absent from the Altamaha Grit region.

Catalpa Negundo

Phryma Platanus

Epiphegus Penthorum

Oxydendrum Fagus

Decodon Hexalectris

Sassafras Medeola

Thegenera Aster, Solidago, Viola, Acer, Crategus, and Scirpus

probably have fewer representatives in this region than in any

other area of equal extent in temperate Eastern North America,

with the possible exception of parts of Florida for Aster and

Viola and some of the mountainous regions for Scirpus.

The following species, not included in the genera in the second

list, are known in the upper and lower thirds of the coastal plain

of Georgia, but not in the Altamaha Grit region, which is the

middle third.

Polymnia Uvedalia L.

Plantago sparsiflora Mx.

Elephantopus elatus Bertol.

-Carolinianus Willd.

Monniera acuminata(Walt.) Kuntze.

Viburnum semitomentosum (Mx.) Rehder

Teucrium Nashii Kearney

Verbesina aristata (Ell.) Heller

Tubiflora Carolinensis (Walt.) Gmel.

Benzoin odoriferum Nees

Cicuta Curtissii C. & R.

Kalmia latifolia L.

Bumelia lycioides (L.) Gaert.

Rhexia Floridana Nash

Hypericum mutilum L.

Cassia Marilandica L.

Magnolia pyramidata Pursh

Dirca palustris L.

Nymphea orbiculata Small

Arenaria lanuginosa (Mx.) Rohrb.

Quercus Virginiana Mill.

i minima [Sarg.] Small.

Boehmeria: cylindrica (L.) Willd.

Juncus effusus L.

‘« megacephalus M. A. Curtis

Rhapidophyllum Hystrix (Pursh) W. & D.

Uvularia perfoliata L.

Rhynchospora miliacea(Lam.) Gray

caduca Ell.

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 331

Scirpus fontinalis Harper

‘* validus Vahl

‘« Americanus Pers.

Eleocharis mutata (L.) R. & S.

Cyperus strigosus L.

Eustachys Floridana Chapm.

Panicum gibbum Ell.

sf gymnocarpon Eli.

Sagittaria latifolia Willd.

Typha latifolia L.

Dryopteris patens(Sw.) Kuntze

Lycopodium Chapmani Underw.

Phegopteris hexagonoptera(Mx.) Fee

Several of these absentees grow in calcareous soil, or in open

(i. e., not shaded) muddy places, or in permanent ponds, which

have no counterpart in the region under consideration, and their

absence is thus easily explained: but in other cases the reasons

for this peculiar distribution are as yet obscure.

Structure and adaptations. All but a few of the flowering

plants will fail into the classes of trees,.shrubs, woody and her-

baceous vines, and ordinary herbs. Among the trees the fol-

lowing are first-class forest trees, with trunks one to three feet

in diameter and fifty to a hundred feet tall. (Evergreens are

indicated by heavy type, as in the habitat lists.)

. Nyssa uniflora

Persea pubescens

Gordonia Lasianthus

Liquidambar Styraciflua

Liriodendron Tulipifera

Magnolia grandiflora

i glauca

Quercus alba

fs Michauxit

a lyrata

Quercus Phellos

Hicoria aquatica

Taxodium distichum

ae imbricarium

Pinus palustris

“ Elliottii

‘“ Teda

serotina

glabra

(Some species which have been noted only once in the region

are omitted from this and the following lists.)

The following are small trees, rarely over a foot in diameter

and forty feet tall in our territory.

Mohrodendron dipterum

Cornus florida

Nyssa biflora

Diospyros Virginiana

Acer rubrum

Ilex opaca

Gleditschia aquatica

Cercis Canadensis

Prunus umbellata

Crategus Michauxii

SS viridis

Magnolia glauca

Planera aquatica

Morus rubra

Quercus Margaretta

“geminata

ee Cabesiocel

oe Marylandica

nigra

brevifolia

laurifolia °

Betula nigra

Ostrya Virginiana

Carpinus‘Caroliniana

Salix nigra

HARPER

Taxodium imbricarium

Juniperus Virginiana

The following in our territory vary in size from shrubs to small

trees

Osmanthus Americanus

Fraxinus Caroliniana

Bumelia lanuginosa

Diospyros Virginiana

Cholisma ferruginea

Nyssa Ogeche

Ilex myrtifolia

Cliftonia monophylla

Quercus geminata

The following are shrubs in our territory, though a few of them

become arborescent elsewhere.

To show at a glance what fami-

lies the shrubs represent, and the number of species in each, the

species in each family (where more than one) are connected by a

brace.

{ Baccharis halimifolia

) Chrysoma pauciflosculosa

( Viburnum rufotomentosum

4 obovatum

) nudum

L nitidum

} Cephalanthus occidentalis

/ Pinckneya pubens

; Clinopodium Carolinianum

coccineum

Callicarpa Americana

Chionanthus Virginica

Adelia acuminata

{ Styrax grandifolia

q ‘« pulverulenta

Symplocos tinctoria

Bumelia reclinata

[ Vaccinium nitidum

| Batodendron arboreum

j Polycodium cesium

ie . revolutum

| G xaylussacia’ frondosa

dumosa

( Cholisma ligustrina

ee ferruginea fruticosa

Pieris Mariana

“ nitida

I.eucothoé racemosa

4 Ss elongata

i axillaris

Kalmia hirsuta

Azalea viscosa

nudiflora

candida

| Elliottia racemosa

Clethra alnifolia

—

Aralia spinosa

Benzoin melisseefolium

1 Malapoenna geniculata

Persea pubescens

( Hypericum myrtifolium

| ei fasciculatum

4 io galioides pallidum

plese opacum

| Ascyrum stans

{ Ceanothus Americanus

i microphyllus

Aésculus Pavia

Euonymus Americanus

(Ilex vomitoria .

~~.

| “ ambigua

4 “ coriacea

| “ glabra

L “* decidua

Cyrilla racemiflora

f Rhus copallina

j “ aromatica

| Vernix

L ‘* Toxicodendron

Ceratiola ericoides

§ Stillingia aquatica

1 Sebastiana ligustrina

Amorpha fruticosa

herbacea

( Chrysobalanus oblongifolius

Crategus apiifolia

| = zestivalis

4 uniflora

Amelanchier Canadensis

Sp.

Aronia arbutifolia

| Rubus nigrobaccus

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 333

Liquidambar Stvraciflua

Hamamelis Virginiana Puoradendron flavescens

Itea Virginica § Quercus pumila

Magnolia glauca Castanea pumila

Asimina parviflora l is alnifolia

( re Speciosa Alnus rugosa

4 angustifolia , Myrica Carolinensis

| Polygonella Croomii ; “_ cerifera

“pumila

It will be observed that a few species, notably Magnolia glauca,

are included in more than one of the foregoing lists of woody

plants, but this is done advisedly. Magnolia glauca occurs in

our territory. as one of the largest trees in non-alluvial creeke

swamps, as a small tree in branch-swamps, and as a low shrub

in moist pine-barrens; and these three forms seem perfectly dis-

tinct as far as size is concerned (but probably not in any other

way.) In other words, there is no reason to suppose that the

shrubs in the moist pine-barrens will ever become trees, or that

the small trees in the branch-swamps will ever become large

trees. Whether the shrubs ever come directly from the seeds of

the trees, and vice versa, is another question. Similarly in the

case of Liquidambar, there seem to be no intermediate stages

between the shrubs in moist pine-barrens and the trees in river-

swamps.

Our woody vines are as follows: |

Lonicera sempervirens Berchemia scandens

Tecoma radicans Rhus radicans

Bignonia crucigera Wistaria frutescens

Trachelospermum difforme Rubus trivialis

Gelsemium sempervirens Decumaria barbara

Pieris phillyreifolia Brunnichia cirrhosa

Parthenocissus quin«uefolia Smilax auriculata

Ampelopsis arborea : laurifolia

Vitis zstivalis os Walteri

““ rotundifolia

The herbaceous vines are somewhat more numerous, namely:

CLIMBING. TRAILING.

Mikania scandens Mitchella repens

Cuscuta indecora Breweria humistrata

*¢ compacta i aquatica

Phaseolus polystachyus Lespedeza repens

~ Apios tuberosa Meibomia Michauxi

Galactia mollis He arenicola

i regularis Zornia bracteata

Bradburya Virginiana Morongia uncinata

Clematis reticulata Krameria secundiflora

334 HARPER

Clematis crispa Siphonychia Americana

Dioscorea villosa Paronychia riparia

Mayaca Aubleti

Lycopodium pinnatum |

About two-fifths of the vines are Leguminosze. In the above list —

I have made no distinction between twiners and tendril-climbers ;

and the distinction between climbing and trailing vines is not

always a sharp one. Galactia regularis and perhaps others in

the list may behave in either way, according to opportunity.

Among the vascular plants the only epiphytes are Epidendrum,

Dendropogon, and Polypodium; and the only parasites Conopholis

(which scarcely belongs to our flora), Phoradendron, and the two

species of Cuscuta. ’

The remaining vascular plants, about 550 in number, are

nearly all ordinary terrestrial herbs, most of them perennial.

Flowering and dissemination. I have not yet consolidated

the data in regard to time of flowering, colors of flowers, and

modes of dissemination for the whole flora as I have for the

several habitat-groups, but some statistics of this kind for the

four largest families, Composite, Leguminosze, Cyperacez, ana

Gramineze, may be of interest.

The phenological diagrams subjoined show’ in a striking

manner how autumnal flowers predominate among the Com-

posite and Gramineze in our territory, just as in other parts of

temperate Eastern North America. The diagram for Cyperaceze

shows little of interest except a decided “hump” in April,

which is due almost entirely to the genus Carex. The other

genera are mostly summer-flowering. The similarity of the

Leguminose diagram to that for Cyperacee is striking, but at

present unexplainable. .

In the Composite there are more yellow flowers than any

other kind, as we should expect from experience. 25 species

have yellow flowers, 21 purple, 16 white, 1o yellow and dark ~

purple, 4 cream, 4 blue and yellow, and the remaining 8 various —

colors more difficult to classify. Too little is known about the

dissemination of our Composite. At least 39 species, and

' probably a majority of the whole 88, have wind-borne achenes,

and three or four, if not more, are “‘tonoboles,’’ but the remainder

have not been sufficiently studied.

ee ee ee a ee ee ee ee

Jan. Feb. Mar. April May June July Aug. Sept. Oct. Nov. Dec.

Fic. 18—Phznological diagram for 87 native species of Cichoriacee and Com-

posite,

Jan. Feb. Mar, April May June July Aug. Sept. Oct. Nov. Dec.

Fic. 19—Phenological diagram for 38 native species of Leguminosz (including

Czesalpiniaceze and Mimosacez.)

Jan. Feb. Mar. April May June July Aug. Sept. Oct. Nov. Dec.

+ —— p= =-

{

(

{

--4

{

(

Fic. 21—Pheenological diagram for 49 native species of Graminez.

336 HARPER

In the Leguminose there are 10 purple flowers, 9 cream, 8

blue, 7 yellow, and 4 or 5 of other colors. For dissemination,

in g species, if not more, the seeds are ejected by the sudden

twisting of the valves of the legume as it splits open; 7 species

have barbed fruits, 4 or 5 are tumbleweeds, and 2 (Kuhnistera

and Cercis) probably have their legumes transported mainly

by the wind.

The grasses and sedges seem to be all anemophilous, with the

possible exception of the genus Dichromena. For dissemination

the perigynia of most species of Carex seem to be adapted for

floating and the barbed achenes of Rhynchospora and the re-

flexed spikelets of Cyperus retrofractus for attachment to animals. ~

Among the grasses the seeds of a few species are carried by ani- .

mals on their fur and a few more by the wind, but in most

species the exact mode of dissemination is still unknown.

GEOGRAPHICAL AFFINITIES OF THE FLORA.

Viewed as a whole, the ranges of the plants under discussion

show in general a striking correspondence with the geological

divisions of the continent as outlined near the beginning of this

work. The following statistics are based on those native species

whose ranges are pretty well known, only about 700 in number;

but it is not likely that the percentages given here will be materi-

ally altered by future researches, for the finding of more species

of restricted range in the region hereafter will doubtless be to a

considerable extent counterbalanced by the extension at the

same time of the known ranges of species already reported

from the region.

About 60% of the species studied are confined to the coastal

plain, or essentially so. Most of these (33% of the whole) are

confined to the pine-barrens or lower three-fourths of the coastal

plain (disregarding for the time being the extension of a few of

them into the tropics). The majority of these endemic pine-

barren species (nearly 17% of the total) are not known in

Georgia farther inland than the Altamaha Grit escarpment.

Accurate information as to their inland limits in the Carolinas,

where no Altamaha Grit is known, is greatly to be desired.

Of the 40% not confined to the coastal plain, 31% (of the

whole 700) grow almost anywhere in the Piedmont region of

nie

Le ee ee ee ee ee en

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 337

Georgia, and many of them also reach the mountains and

northern states. These widely distributed species are mostly

plants of rock cutcrops, dry pine-barrens, hammocks, river-

swamps, and bluffs, as has already been pointed out in the

discussions of these habitats, and are very largely dicotyledons.

About 4.4% occur in the Piedmont region only in a few isolated

localities, mainly in sandy bogs. The remainder, about 4.6%,

grow in bogs and allied habitats in the glaciated region, but

are absent or very rare in the Piedmont region and southern

mountains.!

The above percentages may be tabulated as foliows:

Reaching inland limit in Altamaha Grit region oy

Reaching inland limit in Lower Oligocene region 16

Confined to pine-barrens 33

Inland to Cretaceous and Eocene regions only 27 27

Confined to coastal plain 6

Common in Piedmont region 3B

Only in bogs in Piedmont region 4

In glaciated region but rare in Piedmont 4.6

Not confined to coastal plain 40 | 40

Total 100.0 |1£00 | 100

The ranges may be correlated with arbitrary lines (parallels

of latitude and political boundaries) as follows. A little more

than half (53%) of the species are reported to range north of

latitude 36° 30’ (and theretore into the so-called ‘Manual

region’’), mostly in the coastal plain of course, some along the

coast, some in the Mississippi valley, and some on both sides of

the mountains. About 5% range both northward into the

Manual region and southward into the West Indies or Mexico

(provided the tropical species are all identical with ours), and

2.7% range southward into the tropics but not northward.

Most of the species common to the Altamaha Grit region and the

West Indies, 50 or 60 in all, are such as are not confined to the

Lafayette, a formation which is not definitely known outside

of our coastal plain. In the other parts of the coastal plain of

Georgia, where Lafayette-less areas are nore common, the per-

centage of tropical species is doubtless greater, though I[ have

“not yet collected accurate statistics of this kind for any other

region. Probably none of our native species reach Europe or

1 See Rhodora, 7: 09-80. April, 1905.

338 _ HARPER

the Pacific coast, or if they do their identity or indigeneity in

those parts is doubtful.

The following species and varieties, none of which seem to be

very rare (each having. been found in at least three counties),

are not certainly known outside of the Altamaha Grit region.

Mesadenia lanceolata virescens Harper

Marshallia ramosa Beadle & Boynton

Pentstemon dissectus Ell.

Polygonella Croomii Chapm.

Rhynchospora solitaria Harper

Sporobolus teretifolius Harper

An equal number are known in the upper or lower thirds of

the coastal plain, but have not yet been reported in any other

state, viz.

Baldwinia atropurpurea Harper

'Dicerandra odoratissima Harper

Zizia arenicola Rose

Viola denticulosa Pollard

Nymphea fluviatilis Harper

Eriocaulon lineare Small

The following, founded on material from the Altamaha Grit

region, are now known in other states.

Sabbatia gentianoides Ell.

Polygala Harperi Small

Arenaria brevifolia Nutt.

Siphonychia pauciflora Small

Juncus scirpoides compositus Harper

BIBLIOGRAPHIC HISTORY.

Finally, the bibliographic history of the flora of the Altamaha

Grit region since the time of Linneus’ Species Plantarum may

be summarized very expeditiously by means of a couple of

diagrams. These, like most: of the foregoing statistics, refer

to vascular plants only, the cellular cryptogams being omitted

from the calculations for the reasons given on page 313.

In the first diagram the uppermost curve represents graphi-

cally the dates of description of our genera, beginning with 1753.

The abscissas represent dates, as indicated at the base of the

diagram, while the ordinates represent the number of genera

which had been published up to any given date. In cases

where the name originally given to a genus has been changed

for any reason, only the original date is taken into consideration.

The curve for genera suggests the following points of interest.

Just about half of our genera were known to Linnzus, doubtiess

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 339

because the great majority of them are represented in the

Carolinas, Virginia, and other regions which had been explored

by botanists before his time. Comparatively few new genera

- in the list have been described since the time of Torrey & Gray,

-and none of these were based on new species. Michaux de-

1770 1800 1820 ~ 1840 1860 1880 1900. 359

350

1733 1770 1800 1820 1840 1860 1880 1906

Fic. 22—Diagram showing dates of description of genera of vascular plants and

species of trees and shrubs.

scribed (and doubtless discovered) more of our genera than any

other one author since Linnezus, 15 being credited to him,

most of these being based on single species which he discovered

about 15 years before they were published. The following

genera included in this work contain only species which have

been described since Michaux’s time and were presumably dis-

covered in the roth century.

Elionurus H. & B. 1806.

Triplasis Beauv. 1812.

Lophiola Ker 1813.

Elliottia Muhl. 1817.

Baldwinia Nutt. 1818.

Anantherix Nutt. 1818.

Tipularia Nutt. 1818.

340 HARPER

Dicerandra Benth. (Ceranthera Ell. 1821).

Actinospermum Ell. 1823.

Lygodesmia Don 1829.

Warea Nutt. 1834.

Macranthera Torr. (Conradia Nutt. 1834).

Siphonychia T. & G. 1838.

Thysanella Gray 1845.

Phoradendron Nutt. 1848.

Gibbesia Small 1898.

Aldenella Greene 1900.

Sophronanthe (Benth. 1836), and perhaps one or two other

genera, were based on species discovered in the roth century

but now include some of Michaux’s or earlier species.

The middle curve in the first diagram is based on the dates of

original description of our woody plants, and the lowest one

gives the same data for trees alone, so the distance between the

two curves corresponds to the number of shrubs. These show

that just about one-third of our trees and shrubs were known

to Linneus, and that very few new ones have been described

since the time of Elliott.

The second diagram is for ail our species of vascular plants

whose bibhographic history is known, about 7oo in number.

The upper curve represents original descriptions, as in the first

diagram, and the lower is compiled from the dates on which the

same species received their present names. :

We see from this diagram that not quite one-fourth of our

species were known to Linneus (how many of these were

originally described by him and how many by earlier authors I

have not attempted to show), and that more than half of the

whole number were unknown at the beginning of the roth

century. Michaux is the authority for more of them than

any one else since Linnzus, having described over 100, or

something like 14% of the whole. Walter is a close second,

with 13% credited to him. It will be noticed also that more

of our species have been described in the last fifteen years than

in fifty years previous to that, and as many in the last ten years

as in forty years previously. This is due partly to the narrowing

conception of species and partly to the activity of Dr. Small

and his contemporaries in field work.

The lower curve shows that over 14% of our plants still bear

(o) a © oO (oe) [o>] (2)

fm] m em) rs) = S

ar ao 2 s 5 A 2 a = nN 3 iB S ‘= Bate

= 2 i lao} fe)

s + ee eines ee

: | is tabs pte OC tee

: OS, ree | | 2

A : Teale Gee ae rare peter | lias

e l :

2 sete a4 | :

: —f — — — 40881 =

2 2 | | 4

Co) | aoe Oe eae in aera ner ee oven Nie maaan nae alle eg ae ns, mel ee eee ee So ph ake —_— —_—_ —_— ve

6 2 ! iE =| O48!

e) cE Se We :

a a eee = aH

: 3 I ae ola eel gee a

fs é Prise tal ee GBI Be

= = ee Sel i | lt BPE

z ee

} s | | | | SUS,

Olmert ere yp | ape ees aes | oe

g 8 ¢- —--J--!'~ ~+ ~~ joes Zo

Bb ai j | a 8

a coe a eae pal ' | Oran

: i SS Oe eiiaes

e e l a =

a ae Se Sy,

Bo Bp ce Se at Se ae :

1 : 7 oo! 4

Se se E

- Se a Stell

<q = Seer at ese eee | E

iS = + ) , l ea ‘ “ee

g en ee | Teo ee ee

at | [ory Sapte tar gee ene ee (eae

= j . aS

> ae S a a ‘i

342 HARPER

the names that Linneus gave them, and also illustrates the

great activity of the nomenclature reformers in the last two

decades. (The differences between two such curves are probably

less for this region than they would be for almost any of the

older-settled and more densely populated parts of the civilized

world.) |

CONCLUSIONS.

The most important points brought out in the foregoing

pages seem to be the following:

The most satisfactory system of geographical classification of

the vegetation of temperate Eastern North America is one based

on geology.

The coastal plain, which is defined on strictly geological

grounds, is probably the most distinct natural subdivision of

temperate Eastern North America, differing notably from all

‘other subdivisions in soil, topography. and geological history,

and to a corresponding extent in its flora.

The Aitamaha Grit region of Georgia is a centrally located

and otherwise fairly typical portion of the coastal plain, in many

respects homogenous and in some respects unique. Its bound-

aries are fairly well defined, and its flora differs perceptibly

from that of adjacent regions.

The comparatively recent submergence of this region, which

has been demonstrated by purely geological evidence, is borne

out by the phytcgeograpnical evidence herein set forth.

Owing to the comparative newness of the soil, and other

considerations, open pine forests which give little shade are

eminently characteristic of the region. With this state of affairs

are correlated marked adaptations for reduction of transpiration

in most of the plants inhabiting the region.

Similar types of soil and topography recur in all parts of the

region, the climate is essentially uniform throughout, and the

final details of plant distribution seem to be governed mainly

by the amount of water in the soil—which in turn depends on

topography—and by variations in the thickness of the mantle of

Columbia sand.

All natural features of this region seem remarkably stable,

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 343

and any changes which may be taking place in the flora through

natural causes must be extremely slow. The changes due to

civilization have hitherto been much less marked than in most

other parts of temperate Eastern North Atnierica.

The species indigenous to the region are in general rather re-

stricted in range, most of them being confined to the coastal

plain, as far as known, and about one-third of them to the pine-

_ barren portion of the coastal plain. A few range southward

into the tropics (and most of these are quite variable in habitat),

but probably none cross the Atlantic Ocean or the Great Plains.

As a rule the most widely distributed species of vascular plants

occupy habitats which are likewise widely distributed in Eastern

North America, and belong to taxonomic groups relatively high

in the scale.

As a whole the species composing this flora were mostly made

known to science during the nineteenth century. But the woody

_ plants have been known relatively much longer than the herbs,

and the trees somewhat longer than the shrubs.

BIBLIOGRAPHY.

t. Works in which the plants or other natural features of the Altamaha

Grit region are described or mentioned (though in most of these no dis-

tinction is made between the region under consideration and those ad-

joining it). Arranged chronologically.

1797. Abbot, John The natural history of the rarer lepidopterous

insects of Georgia. Including . . . the plants on which they feed.

Edited by J. E. Smith, who wrote the descriptions of new species.

Folio. 104 plates, with text. London.

Some if not most of the plants figured in this work are believed to have

come from the northeastern portion of the Altamaha Grit region.

1817. Elliott, Stephen. Sketch of the botany of South Carolina and

Georgia. Vol. 1. Charleston, 1816-1821.

Contains on page 286 the original description of Sabbatia gentianoides

from Bulloch County. Several plants described as having been

collected near Louisville by James Jackson may have also come

from the Altamaha Grit region, as has been pointed out elsewhere.

1833 (?). Nuttall, Thomas. Description of a new species of Sarracenia.

Trans. Am. Phil. Soc. 4: 49-51. pl. T.

Mentions its occurrence in Tattnall County. See Torreya 4: 140. 1904.

344 HARPER

1849. White, George. Statistics of the State of Georgia. 624 +77 pp.

and map. Savannah.

1855. White, George. Historical Collections of Georgia. 745 pp

New York.

The most valuable features of these two works are the detailed descrip-

tions of the counties. The supplement of the former contains

among other things an alleged state flora, but as no localities are

given for any of the species it has no obvious connection with that

part of the state under consideration.

1876. Janes, Thomas P. Handbook of Georgia. vii +256 pp. and map.

Atlanta (published by the state agricultural department).

A descriptive work, somewhat similar in scope to the preceding. Con-

tains a list of woody plants, prepared by State Geologist George q

Little, but there is no evidence that any of these were observed in the

Altamaha Grit region.

1881. MHilgard, E. W. The later Tertiary of the Gulf of Mexico. Am.

joursscry Ml 22258 o5- pleas. (aap):

The map shows an area of ‘‘ Miocene (?) sandstone”’ in Georgia, corres-

ponding approximately with the present known area of the Altamaha

Grit, but there is no reference to it in the text. It was probably

inserted on the authority of Dr. Loughridge (see next title).

1884. Loughridge, R.H. Report on the cotton production of the state

of Georgia. Tenth Census U. S., 6:259-450. Map.

A valuable compendium of the geological, geographical, and agricultural

features of the state, which has scarcely been surpassed since. The

boundaries of the Altamaha Grit are located fairly accurately, ex-

cept toward the west, and some outcrops of the rock are described.

A bottomless ‘“‘lime-sink’’ (see page 24 of this work) is mentioned

in the description of Bulloch County.

1885. Henderson, J. T. The Commonwealth of Georgia. pp. i-viti,

3-184, 184a, 184b, 185-379. 15 colored double-page maps and 13

text figures. Atlanta. (Constitutes part 2 of vol. 11 of Publications

of Georgia Department of Agriculture.)

This also contains many notes on the geology, geography, and agri-

culture of the state, largely copied from the preceding.

1892. Dall, W. H., & Harris, G. D. Correlation papers.—Neocene.

Bull. 84, U. S. Geol. Surv. ;

Altamaha Grit described on pages 81 and 82, with references to some

previous literature on the subject.

1893. Foerste, Aug. F. Studies on the Chipola Miocene of Bainbridge,

Georgia, and of Alum Bluff, Florida, with an attempt at correlation

of certain Grand Gulf Group beds with marine Miocene beds eastward.

Am. Jour. Sci. II]. 46:244-254. Oct. 1893.

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 345

In the same journal for December 1893 and July 1894 the discussion is

continued by the same author and Prof. Raphael Pumpelly, but

without special reference to the Altamaha Grit. See Bull. Torrey

Club 32:150 (footnote). 1905.

1896. Nesbitt, R. T. Georgia: her resources and possibilities. Pp.

Xvili+475. Atlanta (published by the state agricultural depart-

ment). :

A work of similar scope to Henderson’s ‘‘Commonwealth’’ (1885),

containing fewer maps and more illustrations (most of the latter

half-tones), and about the same geographical matter, with the ad-

dition of county descriptions.

1898. McCallie, S. W. A preliminary report on the artesian-well

system of Georgia.. Bull. 7, Geol. Surv. Ga. 214 pp. Illustrated.

Contains some valuable notes on the stratigraphy and topography of

the coastal plain, but without mentioning the Altamaha Grit by

name.

1899. Gannett, Henry. A dictionary of altitudes in the United States.

Third edition. Bull. 160, U. S. Geol. Surv.

Pages 122-131 refer to Georgia, and include several stations in the

Altamaha Grit region.

1899. U.S. Geological Survey. (Precise levels from Atlanta to Bruns-

wick). 20th Annual Report, 1:380-383.

From about Cochran to Jesup this line of levels passes through the

Altamaha Grit region, and the figures given show in a striking manner

its elevation above contiguous regions.

1900. Coulter, J. M., & Rose, J. N. Monograph of the North Amer-

feqnnUimibelliferse: Contr WU. ts. Nat. Herb. 7:1-256. Dec. 31,

Ig0Oo.

On page 49 are cited two specimens of Eryngium integrifolium Ludo-

vicianum, both from the Altamaha Grit region.

Igor. Beadle, C. D., & Boynton, F. E. Revision of the species of Mar-

shallia. Biltmore Bot. Stud, 1: 3-10. pl. r-11. April 8, 1901.

Contains description of M. ramosa, n. sp., based on a single collection

from the Altamaha Grit region by C. L. Boynton.

Igor. Small, John K. The rediscovery of Elliottia. Jour. N. Y.

Bot. Gard. 2:113-114. Aug. 1901. Copied in American Gardening

22 AOS Se Pum shay eGo.

Refers to the finding of this rare plant in Bulloch County.

Igor. Stevens, O. B., & Wright, R. F. Georgia, Historical and Indus-

trial. 955 pp., several maps, and numerous illustrations. Atlanta

(published by the state agricultural department).

A successor to the works of Janes, Henderson, and Nesbitt (mentioned

above), and much more comprehensive.

346 HARPER

1902. Sargent, C. S. Elliottia racemosa. Silva N. A. 14:31. pl. 712.

1903. Small, John.K. Flora of the Southeastern United States. xii +

1370 pp) New York, “july 22: 1g08:

Reviewed by Beadle in Torreya 3: 125-127. 1903; Pollard in Plant .

World, 6: 192-195. 1903; Clute in Fern Bull. 111: 27-128. 1903 ;

Coville in Science II. 18: 626-627. Nov. 13, 1903; and Baker in Jour.

Bot. 42: 56-58. 1904.

Contains descriptions of the following new species based wholly or

partly on material from the Altamaha Grit region, collected in

Bulloch County in 1901:—Eriocaulon lineare, Siphonychia pauct-

flora, Polygala Harperi, and Sabbatia Harperi.. But the type-

localities are not designated with sufficient accuracy to show that

the plants came from this region, :

1904. Warnstorf, C. Neue europaische und. exotische Moose. Bot.

Centralb. Beihefte 16: 237-252.

The last species described in this paper is Sphagnum Harpert, based

on a single collection from the Altamaha Grit region.

1904. U.S. Geological Survey. Report of progress of stream measure-

ments for the calendar year 1903. Part JI. Southern Atlantic,

eastern Gulf of Mexico, and eastern Mississippi River drainage.

Water Supply and Irrigation paper No. 08.

On pages 71-84 are some statistics of the flow of the Canoochee and

Ohoopee Rivers in and near the Altamaha Grit region.

1904. Murrill, W. A. The Polyporacee of North America. IX.

Inonotus, Sesia, and monotypic genera. Bull. Torrey Club 31: 593-

610. Nov. 1904.

Contains description of Inonotus amplectens, n. sp., based on a single

collection from the Altamaha Grit region.

1905. U.S. Department of Agriculture. (Annual summaries, Georgia

section of climate and crop service of the Weather Bureau, for 1904

and several preceding years.)

Reports from several stations in the Altamaha Grit region are included,

and have been used in compiling the climatic data in this work.

‘I905. Ames, Oakes. Contributions toward a monograph of the American

species of Spiranthes. Orchidacee 1:113-156. April 8, 1905.

Cites a specimen of S. Beckit from the vicinity of Lumber City, pre-

sumably collected by C. L. Boynton. |

1905. Bush, B.F. The North American species of Puirena. Rep. Mo.

Bot. Cont 16:87—99. .

Cites a specimen of F. hispida from Tifton (mo. 665).

1905. Fippin, E. O., & Drake, J. A. Soil survey of the Bainbridge area,

Georgia. Field operations of the Bureau of Soils, U. 5. Dept.

Agriculture, for 1904. 25 pp.andmap. July, 1905.

The area mapped is all in Decatur County, and about half of it is located

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 347:

in the Altamaha Grit region near its southwestern end. The re-

mainder of the survey covers portions of the Lower Oligocene, Chat-

tahoochee, and Uppermost Oligocene regions.

1905. Derry, J.T., & Wright, R.F. Georgia’s resources and advantages.

too pp. (including numerous full-page illustrations) and several

maps. Atlanta (published by the state department of agriculture).

_ This is practically a much condensed edition of Stevens & Wright’s

“Georgia, Historical and Industrial,’’ which was published four years

earlier.

1905. Rose, J. N. Two new Umbelliferous plants from the coastal

plain of Georgia. Proc. U. 5.’ Nat. Mus. 29:441-4 42. pl. 3. Oct.

1905.

The type specimen of one of them, Zzz7a arenicola, is from the Altamaha

Grit region.

1905. Ely, C. W., & Griffen, A. M. Soil survey of Dodge County,

Georgia. Field operations of the Bureau of Soils, U. S. Dept.

Agriculture, for 1904. 20 pp. and map.. Oct. 1905.

About three-fifths of Dodge County is in the Altamaha Grit region.

There are references to the Altamaha Grit region or its flora at the

following places in my own writings, though I did not distinguish it until

the summer of 1903, or mention 1t by name until September, 1904:

Bull. Torrey Club 28:458—465, 467, 468, 470, 475-477, 479, 480, 483, 484.

(, 2O> Tic Bo ANOS, Uo\en.

Torreya I:115-117. Oct. 1gor.

Plant World 5:87-90. pl. 13. 1902.

Bull. Torrey Club 29: 386, 393, 394, 397- June, 1902.

Plant World 6:60. 1903.

Bull. Torrey Club 30:282—285. f. 2. May, 1903; 320, 324, 327, 328, 331, 332,

B60es 45. | une, 1903.)

Torreya 3:106. July, 1903.

Bulle Porey Club 31:13, 15, 27, Lo, 22-20, Jan. 1904.

Torreya 4:139-141. (lllust.) Sept. 1904.

Torreya 4:162. Nov. 1904.

Bull Norrey,. Club 32:108, 109, TI1. jf. 2-4. 1905.

Fern Bull. 13:3, 13-16. 1905. :

Rhodora 7:76-77 (one sentence). April, 1905.

Bull) Torrey Club 32:141-147, 150-153, 159, 160, 162, 165-170. 7. I, 3.

1905.

Bull. Torrey Club 32:452, 460-467. 7. 4, 5. Sept. 1905.

Torreya 5:164. Sept. 1905.

Torreya 5:183-185. Oct. 1905.

Also in the following reports of meetings of the Torrey Botanical

Club:

Bull. Torrey Club 28: 648. Nov. t901;Science II. 14:850. Nov. 29, 1901.

348 HARPER

Torreya 3:77-78. May, 1903. (See Just’s Bot. Jahresb. 311. 508. 1904.)

Science II. 21:920-g21. June 16, 1905; Torreya 5:113-115. Jume, 1905. ~

2. Other works consulted. To enumerate all from which suggestions

have been derived would involve several hundred titles, but the following

seem to be the most important, and in some of them may be found refer-

ences to other works of like nature, together covering almost the whole

field of phytogeography. A few titles mentioned in footnotes on the

preceding pages, or in my own earlier papers, are not repeated here.

The names of authors are arranged alphabetically, and the works

of each (where more than one) chronologically.

Adams, Chas. C. Southeastern United States as a center of geographical

distribution of flora and fauna. Biol. Bull. 3:115-131. July, rgo2.

Reviewed by Cowles’in Bot. Gaz. 34:385. Nov. 1902.

Adams, Chas. C. Postglacial origin and migrations of the life of the

northeastern United. States. Jour. Geog. 1:303-310, 352-357-

Map. 1902.

Adams, Chas. C. The postglacial dispersal of the North American biota.

Biol. Bull. 9:53-71. 7. 1. June, 1905; Rep. 8th Int. Geog. Cong.

623-637. Map. 1905.

Atkinson, G. F. Relation of plants to environment (or plant ecology)

(Outlines of a course of lectures). 67 pp. Ithaca, 1904.

Contains an excellent bibliography.

Bartram, William. Travels through North and South Carolina, Georgia,

East and West Florida (etc.). xxiv +526 pp., frontispiece, map,

and 7 plates.’ Philadelphia, 1791, London, 1792 (these two not seen),

Dublin, 1793, London, :794. Also a German translation, published

in Berlin in 1793.

A most interesting narrative, describing faithfully the flora and other

geographical features of these regions as they appeared in the 18th

century. The author in all probability crossed the extreme north-

eastern end of the Altamaha Grit region more than once, but there

is no direct evidence of it in the book.

Beal, W. J. Some unique examples of dispersion of seeds and fruits.

Am. Nat. 32:859-866. 1808.

Beal, W. J. Michigan Flora. Ann. Rep. Mich. Acad. Sci. 5:1-147. 1905.

The first 34 pages contain some very interesting phytogeographical as

well as historical information.

Beck von Mannagetta, G. Ueber die Umgrenzung der Pflanzenformationen.

Oesterr. Bot. Zeit. 52:421-427. 1902.

Reviewed by Cowles in Bot. Gaz. 36:396. Nov. 1903.

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 349

Blankinship, J.W. Plant formations of eastern Massachusetts. Rhodora

5:124-137. May, 1903.

This is the first work of its kind for New England, and contains several

original ideas well worth imitating.

Bray, W.L. The ecological relations of the vegetation of western Texas.

Pony Ga7.)32.90~123) 105-2175) 202-208. fF. F-24. | 190r.

The author had the advantage of working in a sparsely settled region

whose geology and climatology were already pretty well known,

and he made good use-of his opportunities. Two papers dealing

with the forests of the same general region by the same author,

published as bulletins of the U. S. Bureau of, Forestry in 1904, are

also of considerable interest.

Brendel, F. Notes on the flora of southern Florida. Am. Nat. 8:449-

452. Aus. 1874.

One of the earliest discussions of the geographical affinities of this

flora. :

Britton, W. E. Vegetation of the North Haven sand plains. [New

Haven County, Connecticut. | Bull. Torrey Club 30:571-620. il.

23-28. Nov. 1903. (Thesis):

The area discussed is comparable in many respects with the sand-hills

of the Altamaha Grit region, and resembles most of them in being

on the left side of the stream. Unfortunately no distinction is made

by the author between native and introduced plants.

Catesby, Mark. The Natural History of Carolina, Florida, and the

Bahama Islands. 2 vols. London, 1754. (There was also an

earlier edition.)

The latter part of the second ‘volume contains some interesting

geographical matter.

Clarke, Henry L. The philosophy of Mower seasons. Am. Nat. 27:7609-

Felis SSODlioy WAS

Clements, F.E. Asystemofnomenclature for phytogeography. Engler’s

Bow wahrb, Beibl2 7o:1 20.) Aue. 29, 1902.

Advocates giving technical names to all classes of habitats, and presents

an elaborate system of this kind.

Clements, F. E. The devclopment and structure of vegetation. Bot.

suny. Nebr. 7:5-175. April, r904:

An excellent synopsis of the subject, witha good bibliography, but no

index or table of contents. Reviewed by Ganong in Science, II.

20:177. Aug. 5, 1904; and by Cowles in Bot. Gaz. 38 : 303-304.

Oct. 1904.

Clements, F. E. Research methods in ecology. xvii+334 pp., 85 figs.

Lincoln, Neb. 1905.

Covers most of the same ground as the preceding, with considerable

additional matter and a greatly improved typography, but no index.

Reviewed by MacMillan in Science II. 22: 45-46. July 14, 1905.

350 HARPER

Clements, F. E. See also Pound & Clements.

Coulter, J. M. Plant Relations. 264 pp., 206 figs. New York, 1899.

One of the best of the modern text-books.

Coulter, S. M. An ecological comparison of some typical swamp areas.

Rep. Mo. Bot. Gard. 15:39-71, pl. 1-24. 1904. (Thesis.) |

Contains a good deal of information and some excellent illustrations,

but few generalizations or deductions. Reviewed by J. M. Coulter

in Bot. Gaz. 38:156-157. Aug. 1904.

Coville, F. V. Botany of the Death Valley Expedition. Contr. U.S.

Nat. Herb. vol. 4. 363 pp., 22 plates and map. Nov. 29, 1893.

Pages 10-55 and 284-300 are the most valuable to the reader who has

no special interest in the region or its flora.

Cowles, H. C. The ecological relations of the vegetation on the sand

dunes of Lake Michigan. Bot. Gaz. 27:95-117, 167-202, 281-308,

201-30 tn ja eon ae ESO: (Thesis.) (Contr. Hull Bot. Lab.

No. 13.)

One of the foremost works of its kind, cited in most subsequent American

phytogeographical papers.

Cowles, H. C. The physiographic ecology of Chicago and vicinity; a

study of the origin, development, and classification of plant societies.

Bot. Gaz. 31:73-108, 145-182. jf. I-35. 1901. -(Contr., Hull Bot.

Lab. No. 24.)

This is of rather broader application than the preceding, and will

probably for a long time remain a standard. To praise it would be

superfluous.

Cowles, H. C. The influence of underlying rocks on the character of

the vegetation. Bull. Am. Bureau Geog. 2:163-176, 376-388.

f. I-10. «gor. (Contr. Hull Bot. Lab. No. 34.)

Argues that topographic history is more potent than paolenier! age

or chemical composition of the strata in determining the character

of the vegetation.

Cowles, H. C. Recent contributions to American phytogeography: the

Eastern United States. Bot. Gaz. 34: 383-387. Nov. 1902.

Cowles, H. C. Recent contributions to American phytogeography.

Bot. Gaz. 35:147-149. Feb. 1903.

Croom, H. B. Botanical communications. Am. Jour. Sci. 25: 69-78.

Oct. 1833; 26:313-320. July, 1834; 28:165-168. April, 1835.

These papers contain some very interesting notes on plants observed

near if not in the Altamaha Grit region.

Davis,W.M. Systematic geography. Proc. Am. Phil. Soc. 41:235—-259.

Igo2.

Davis,W.M. <A scheme of geography. Jour. Geog. 3:20-31. Jan. 1904

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 351

Davis, W.M. Geography in the United States. (Vice-presidential

address.) Science II. 19:121-132,178-186. Jan. 1904;Am. Geol. 33:

156-185. March, 1904.

DeCandolle, A. Géographie botanique raisonnée, ou exposition des

faits principaux et des lois concernant la distribution géographique

des plantes de l’époque actuelle. 2 vols. Paris, 1855.

Reviewed by W. J. Hooker in Hook. Jour. Bot. 8:54—64, 82-88, 112-121,

I5I-157, 181-191, 214-219, 248-256. 1856; also by Gray in Am.

Journ: Sei, Il, 22:4290-432. /1856.

Drayton, John. A view of South Carolina, as respects her natural and

civil concerns. 252 pp. (Illus.) Charleston, 1802.

Contains some very interesting notes on the geographical features,

particularly of the coastal plain. Much of the description would have

applied equally well to the corresponding parts of Georgia.

Drude, Oscar. Handbuch der Pflanzengeographie. 582 pp. Stuttgart,

1890.

Drude, Oscar. Deutschlands Pflanzengeographie. 502 pp. Stuttgart,

1896.

Reviewed by Pound in Am. Nat. 30:465-468. 18096.

Engler, A. Die pflanzengeographische Gliederung Nordamerikas. No-

tizbl. Kgl. Bot. Gart. & Mus. Berlin, App. 9:1-94, and maps. May

ing, 1902.

A pretty accurate piece of work for one based entirely on scattered

phytogeographical literature written by many different persons

from as many different points of view. Reviewed by Cowles in

Bot. Gaz. 34:316-317. Oct. roo2.

Engler, A., & Drude, O. (editors). Die Vegetation der Erde.

Six volumes have thus far appeared, and reviews of each by Dr. Cowles

may be found in recent volumes of the Botanical Gazette.

Fendler, A. On prairies. Am. Jour. Sci. Il. 41:154-158. March, 1866.

Considers fire the leading factor in the replacement of forests by grass

land. Some of his observations may have some bearing on the

pine-barren question.

Flahault, C. A project for phytogeographic nomenclature. (Translated

from French.) Bull. Torrey Club 28:391-409. July, 1gor.

Contains an extensive bibliography, among other things. Reviewed

by Cowles in Bot. Gaz. 32:376. Nov. 1901.

Ganong, W. F. The cardinal principles of ecology. Science II. 19: 493-—

498. March 25, 1904.

(Gaskill, Alfred). Why prairies are treeless. (Abstract.) Science II.

Ameen.) \ielll\iy mal | OVO).

S574 HARPER

Gattinger, A. The flora of Tennessee (ed. 2) and a philosophy. of botany.

296 pp. Nashville, 1901. (Published by the state.)

The correlations of vegetation with geology, in the introductory pages,

are excellent, except for the coastal plain (West Tennessee), which

the author had not. often visited. Biiet

Gray, Asa. Analogy between the flora of Japan and that of the United

States. Am. Jour: Sci. Il. 2:135-136. 1846.

Gray, Asa. Statistics of the flora of the Northern United States. Am.

Jour. Sei. Il) 22:204-232.. 18563) 23:62—-84) 300 ogame

A very interesting paper. The author recognizes five-natural divisions

of the region (pp. 394-395), and discusses their flora, but does not

define them in terms of any environmental factors.

Gray, Asa. Diagnostic characters of new species of phznogamous

plants, collected in Japan by Charles Wright. . . . With observa-

tions upon the relations of the Japanese flora to that of North America,

and of other parts of the North Temperate zone. Mem. Am. Acad.

6: 377-449. 1859.

Gray, Asa. Forest geography and archeology. Am. Jour. Sci. III.

16: 85-94, 183-196. 1878.

Gray, Asa. The pertinacity and predominance of weeds. Am. Jour.

Sei. II]. 18: 161-167. 1870.

Gray, Asa. Characteristics of the North American flora. Am. Jour.

set Il 282222=240, ~“r8sa"

This may perhaps be considered the best of Dr. Gray’s papers, from a

phytogeographical standpoint. It has never since been surpassed

by anything of similar scope. .

Grisebach, A. H. R. Die Vegetation der Erde. 2 vols. Leipsic, 1872.

Haddon, Alfred C. The saving of vanishing data. Pop. Sci. Monthly

62: 222-229. Jan. 1903.

Addressed primarily to zoologists and anthropologists, but the general

principles involved are equally important to phytogeographers.

Harshberger, J. W. An ecologic study of the flora of mountainous North

Carolina. Bot. Gaz. 36: 241-258, 368-383. Oct. 1903.

An excellent discussion of the relation between physiographic history

and phytogeography in a region whose flora is the most ancient of

any in Eastern North America.

Harshberger, J. W. A phyto-geographic sketch of extreme southeastern

Pennsylvania. Bull. Torrey Club 31: 125-159. 7. r-g. March, rgo4.

Of somewhat similar scope to the preceding paper, and more free from

some of its mechanical defects, such as lack of italics and

illustrations.

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 24513)

Harshberger, J. W. The comparative age of the different floristic ele-

ments of Eastern North America. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila.

56: 601-615. Oct. 1904.

Largely a compilation of the phytogeographical work of several writers,

from which some interesting but not always obvious conclusions are

drawn.

Harshberger, J. W. Methods of determining the age of the different

floristic elements of Eastern North America. Rep. 8th Int. Geog.

Cong. 601-607. 1905.

Essentially an abridgment of the preceding paper.

Hildebrand, F. Die Verbreitungsmittel der Pflanzen. 162 pp. 8 figs.

Leipsic, 1873.

Hilgard, E. W. Report on the Geology and Agriculture of the State of

Mississippi. Xxiv-+ 391 pp. & map. Jackson, 1860 (published by

the state).

Contains an excellent discussion of the details of geology, soil,

topography, vegetation, and the relations between them, for nearly

all parts of the state. But for the fact that plants are mentioned

in this work only incidentally, and no complete enumeration of them

is attempted, this would be one of the most satisfactory local floras

ever published.

Hilgard, E. W. Soil studies and soii maps. Overland Monthly (3-12),

Dec. 1801.

Hill, E. J. Means of plant dispersion. Am. Nat. 17: 811-820, 1028-1034.

1883.

Contains much of interest to phytogeographers.

Hitchcock, A.S. Ecological plant geography of Kansas. Trans. Acad.

Sci. St. Louis 8:55-69. Map. March 8, 1898.

This seems to be the first of the now rather numerous American works

containing the word “‘ecological’’ in its title.

Hitchcock, A. S. A brief outline of ecology. (Presidential address.)

Trans. Kans. Acad. Sci. 17: 28-34. t1got.

Hollick, Arthur. The relation between forestry and geology in New

Jersey. (Report on forests, in) Ann. Rep. State Geol. N. J. for

1899, 177-201. 1g00. Also essentially the same in Am. Nat.

33: 1-14, 109-116. 1899.

A very interesting discussion of the causes affecting distribution of trees.

Jackson, Joseph. Through Glade and Mead: a contribution to local

natural history. (Witha flora of Worcester County, Massachusetts. )

xiv + 332 pp. and several full-page illustrations (9 half-tones in the

regular edition and about a dozen platinum prints in the special).

Worcester, 1894.

Although this deals with a region very different from that here dis-

cussed, and from a very different standpoint, I have derived much

354 HARPER

inspiration from it, especially when living in the region covered by

the work. It deserves to be much more widely known than it is. —

Kearney, T. H. The plant covering of Ocracoke Island; a study in the

ecology of the North Carolina strand vegetation. Contr. U. S. Nat.

Herb. 5: 261-319. 7. 33-50. Aug. I, 1900.

An excellent paper, probably the first of its kind for the coastal plain.

Reviewed by Cowles in Bot. Gaz. 34:384. Nov. 1902.

Kearney, T. H. The Lower Austral element in the flora of the southern

Appalachian region. <A preliminary.note. Science II. 12: 830-842.

Nov. 30, 1900.

This is one of the earliest discussions of the phytogeographical pro-

blems of the southeastern states. Reviewed by Cowles in Bot.

Gaz. 31:208. March, 1901. See also Rhodora 7:78, 79; Torreya

5:58. April, 1905.

Kearney, T. H. Report on a botanical survey of the Dismal Swamp

region. Contr. U. S. Nat. Herb. 6: i-x, 321-550. pl. 65-73, f. 51-84,

and 2 maps. Nov. 6, rgotr.

This easily ranks among the foremost of American phytogeographical

works. Reviewed by Cowles in Bot. Gaz. 34: 384-385. Nov. 1902.

See also Bull. Torrey Club 29: 387. June, 1902; Torreya 3: 121. Aug.

1903.

Kerner von Marilaun, A. Pflanzenleben. 2 vols., 734 & 896 pp., and

about z2o0o0c illustrations. Leipsic and Vienna, 1890-1891.

English translation by F. W. Oliver and others. 2 vols. in 2 parts

each.

Second edition, 2 vols., 766 & 778 pp. 1896-1898. (Not seen.)

’ Reviewed by Cowles in Bot. Gaz. 26:361-362. 18098.

This perhaps comes nearer to covering the whole field of botany than

any other one work, and is full of valuable suggestions.

Knowlton, F. H. The misuse of ‘‘formation’’ by ecologists. Sci-

ence II. 19: 467-468. March 18, 1904.

Kraemer, Henry. Plant morphology and taxonomy. Am. Jour. Pharm.

77: 401-416. Sept. 1905.

Livingston, B. E. Physiological properties of bog water. Bot. Gaz.

39:348-355. May, 1905.

Discusses a problem of which the Altamaha Grit region furnishes

innumerable examples. Also refers to several of his earlier papers

which are worth consulting.

Lloyd, F. E., & Tracy, S. M. The insular flora of Mississippi and Louis-

iana. Bull. Torrey Club 28: 61-101. pl. S—1zr. March, toot.

MacDougal, D. T. Some aspects of desert vegetation. Plant World

6: 249-257. pl. 32-36. jf. 1-5. Nov. 1903. (Contr. N. 7 Yoo Boc

Gard. No. 46.)

Interesting to compare with the sand-hill vegetation herein described.

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA 355

MacMillan, Conway. The Metasperme of the Minnesota valley. xiii +

826 pp. Minneapolis, Dec. 29, 1892. (Published by the state.)

_A remarkable work for its time, containing besides a great mass of

synonyms and statistics some very interesting suggestions in regard

to geographical distribution. Reviewed by Jos. F. James in Science

21: 221-223. April 21, 1893.

MacMillan, Conway. Minnesota Plant Life. 568 pp., 4 plates, 240

figures. St. Paul, 1899. (Published by the state.)

A finely illustrated work, with a good deal of interesting information

in the first 25 and last 100 pages. Reviewed by Cowles in Bot.

Gaz. 29: 283-285. 1900.

McCarthy, Gerald. The study of local floras. Jour. Elisha Mitchell,

Sei, Soe. 47:25-20. 1887.

McGee, W J The Lafayette formation. Ann. Rep. U. S. Geol. Surv.

E21-°347-521. pl. 32-41. f. 28-72. 1892.

This monograph, which no coastal plain botanist can afford to over-

look, combines the substance of several earlier papers on the same

subject, with the addition of considerable new matter and illustra-

tions. Reviewed by Upham in Am. Geol. 14: 115-116. 18094.

Merriam, C. Hart. Laws of temperature control of the geographic

distribution of terrestrial animals and plants. Nat. Geog. Mag.

6:229-238. pl. 12-14. 1894.

Several other papers by Dr. Merriam are often cited in modern phyto-

geographical works, but this one seems to contain the essence of

all of them. The fact that one of his “‘ life-zones’’ coincides approxi-

mately with the coastal plain has obscured the true significance of

the latter in the minds of many botanists ever since. See Bull.

Torrey Club 31:10. 1904.

Mohr, Charles. Plant Life of Alabama. Contr. U. S. Nat. Herb. vol.

6. 921 -pp., 1 map, and 12 other plates, made from drawings of

individual plants. July 31, 1901. Also published by the Geo-

logical Survey of Alabama, with the addition of a biography and

portrait of the author.

By far the most important phytogeographical work, and at the same

time the best state flora, hitherto published for the southeastern

states. Reviewed by Clements in Science II., 15:23-24. Jan. 3,

1902.

Nash, Geo. V. Notes on some Florida plants. Bull. Torrey Club 22:

I41I-161. 1895.

Some interesting phytogeographical notes on the first six pages.

3 Olsson-Seffer, Pehr. Tht principles of phytogeographic nomenclature.

Bot. Gaz. 39:179-993. March, 1905.

Pinchot, Gifford. A primer of forestry. Part I—The forest. Bull.

U. S. Dept. Agr. Div. Forestry, 241: 1-88. pl. 0, 1-47. f. 83. 1899.

356 HARPER

Pound, Roscoe, & Clements, Frederic E. Phytogeography of Nebraska.

Ed. 2. 442 pp. Lincoln, rgoo.

This work and its predecessor are too well known to require any com-

ment here. The fact that the names of piants are not italicized,

a mere mechanical detail, is perhaps its most obvious defect. Re-

viewed by Colton Russell’in Am. Nat. 35: 600-602. tgor.

Reed, Howard S. A brief history of ecological work in botany. Plant

World 8: 163-170, 198-208. 1905.

Robertson, Charles. The philosophy of flower seasons, and the phano-

logical relations of the entomophilous flora and the anthophilous

insect fauna. Am. Nat. 29:97-117. pl. S-ro. Feb. 1895.

. Robinson, B. L. Problems and possibilities of systematic botany.

(Presidential address.) Science II. 14:465-474. Sept. 27, 1gor.

(Reprinted as publication no. 18, Bot. Soc. Am.)

Rowlee, W. W. The swamps of Oswego County, N. Y., and their flora.

Am. Nat. 31: 690-699, 792-800. 1897.

Schimper, A. F. W. Pflanzengeographie auf physiologische Grundlage.

'SYy Ay ©) OF (= 0k: am oer

Reviewed by Cowles in Bot. Gaz. 27: 214-216. 1899.

English translation and revision by Fisher, Groom & Balfour. 1903.

Reviewed by Pollard in Plant World 7:52. Feb. 1904; and Cowles in

Bot. Gaz. 37: 392-393. May, 1904.

Shaler, N.S. Notes on the Taxodium distichum, or bald cypress. Mem.

Mus. Comp. Zool. Harvard Coll. 161: 1-15. 1887.

Shaler, N.S. General account of the fresh-water morasses of the United

States. Ann. Rep. U.S. Geol. Surv. 10: 255-339. pl. 6-19. Ff. 2-38,

1890.

Contains much of botanical interest. See Bull. Torrey Club 29: 387.

TQO2.

Shaler, N. S. The origin and nature of soils. Ann. Rep. U. S. Geol.

Suibve L202 ons scene eo. 27 OO

Reviewed by Upham in Am. Geol. 14:114-115. 1894. This paper

should form a foundation for all detailed phytogeographic work,

especially that relating to succession of vegetation.

Shaler, N.S. Aspects of the earth; a popular account of some familiar

geological phenomena. 344 pp. and numerous illustrations. New

York, 1806.

Shimek, B. The flora of the Sioux Quartzite in Iowa. Proc. Ia. Acad.

SCLUAn 72 770 at S070 5s 20 at enOgge

Discusses some interesting phases of distribution ,which find an analogy

in the rock outcrops of the Altamaha Grit region.

a, all

ALTAHAMA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA S574

Smith, Eugene A., and others. Report on the geology of the coastal

plain of Alabama. xxiv+759 pp. Illustrated. Montgomery, 1894

(published by the state).

One of the most important contributions to the knowledge of coastal

plain geology ever published. Contains many interesting notes on

the trees and other vegetation characterizing different formations.

Spalding, V.M. ‘‘The Plains” of Michigan. Am. Nat. 17: 249-259. 1883.

Describes a region similar in some of its phytogeographical and economic

aspects to the pine-barrens of the coastal plain.

Spalding, V.M. The distribution of plants. Am. Nat. 24: 819-831. Sept.

1890.

Spalding, V. M. The rise and progress of ecology. (Presidential ad-

dress.) Science II. 17:201-210. Feb. 6, 1903.

Warming, E. On the vegetation of tropical America. Bot. Gaz. 27: 1-18.

Jan. 1899.

Warming, E. Lehrbuch der oekologischen Pflanzengeographie. Second

German edition, translated from the Danish by E. Knoblauch and

revised by P. Graebner. 442 pp. Berlin, 1902.

The first edition was reviewed by Coulter in Bot. Gaz. 22: 173-175. 1896.

White, C. A. The relation of phylogenesis to historical geology. Science

Me 222105113. July 28, 1905.

Woodworth, J. B. The relation between baseleveling and organic

evolution. Am. Geol. 14:209-235. Oct. 1894.

(Zon, Raphael.) Principles involved in determining forest types. (Ab-

stract.) Science II. 22:56-57. July 14, 1905.

PEA Ele

Fic. 1.—Flat outcrop of Altamaha Grit on right bank of Ohoopee

River, Tattnall Co. June 24, 1903. Dry and intermediate

pine-barrens in background ; : j s F : 41

Fic. 2.—Cliffs of Altamaha Grit in pine-barrens near Pendleton

Creek, Tattnall Co. April 25, 1904. Pinus palustris and a few

small specimens of [iquidambar appear in the view f poe 71

(360)

PAGE

PLATE I.

ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. SCI., VOL. XVI.

RIG. i.

Fic. 2.

PLATE II.

Fic. 1.—Dry pine-barrens near Douglas; typical winter aspect.

Fic

Feb. 7, 1904. Numerous small oaks can be seen, most if not

all of them probably Q. brevifolia. A “‘dreen’’ or incipient

branch-swamp, characterized by Pinus Elliotti (both large and

small specimens), begins near the center of the view and flows

toward the left -.

2.—Dry pine-barrens about three miles south of Moultrie,

Colquitt Co. Aug. 25, 1903. Trees nearly all Pinus palustris.

A good deal of Pteridium in the foreground E

(362)

PAGE

PLATE II,

oma

op)

fal

dp)

Se Age ae

(363)

‘5 e

y —_—_—

\ _—— come

4 ‘a

: .

| s

suf Se ; S

ce ets

PEAR ele

Fic. 1.—Intermediate pine-barrens south of Moultrie, Colquitt Co.

Sept. 20, 1902. (The pines here are all turpentined, as is now

the case nearly everywhere in this region) . : : : 50

PAGE

Fic. 2.—Moist pine-barrens about two miles northeast of Moultrie.

Sept. 22, r902. Shows Pinus Elliottit, Sarracenia flava, Er1o-

caulon decangulare, Laciniaria spicata, Mesadenia lanceolata °

virescens, etc. 54

(364)

PAG wile

NNALS N. Y. ACAD. SCI., VOL. XVII.

IG. «

PLATE IV.

Fic. 1.—Moist pine-barrens (in foreground) about three miles south

of Moultrie, Colquitt Co. Aug. 25, 1903. Sarracenia flava

conspicuous. A small branch-swamp in the middle distance 54

PAGE

Fic. 2.—Branch-swamp near Fitzgerald, Irwin Co. Oct. 4, 1902.

Considerably denser than the one shown on Plate V. The

trees seem to be mostly Nyssa biflora and Pinus Elliotiz.

Moist pine-barrens in foreground : : : : : 63

(366)

PLATE IV.

eee, eT Ut a

PLATE V.

Small branch-swamp in pine-barrens near Douglas, Coffee Co.

Feb. 7, 1904. Contains Pinus Elliottat, Taxodium imbricarium,

and very few,shrubs. Dry pine-barrens with Pinus palustris

in foreground : : . : : : «03; 2OhmaaOe

(368)

PAGE

ake

Deatbc? Ve"

PLATE VI.

(369) . eh : 8

PLATE VI.

Winter aspect of an ‘““endemic”’ creek-swamp. Twenty Mile Creek,

Coffee County. Feb. 5, 1904. Trees all deciduous, and

nearly all Taxodium imbricarium. Dendropogon usneotdes is

on some of them. A fringe of shrubs, mostly Cyrilla and

Fraxinus Caroliniana, along the edge. Dry pine-barrens

with a specimen of Pinus palustris in the foreground 66, 308

PAGE

(370)

. :

ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. SCI., VOL. XVII. PLATE VI.

PEIN, WN,

Interior of the same swamp shown on Plate VI. Feb.

Sy (372)

PLATE VII.4

ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. SCI., VOL. XVII.

JNM, SITIO,

Fic. 1.—Swamp of Little River about four miles west of Tifton, a

looking directly up the middle of the stream from a railroad

trestle. Sept. 30, 1902. The larger trees are Taxodium tm-

bricartum and the smaller ones Fraxinus Caroliniana . : 66

Fic. 2.—A river of the second class: the Ohoopee, looking upstream

from Shepard’s Bridge, Tattnall Co. June 24, 1903 . : 69

(374)

PLATE VIII.

ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. SCI., VOL. XVII.

Fic. 2.

Be age, PEATE TN:

(375)

PLATE IX.

PAGE

Fic. 1.—Looking across the Ohoopee River from the right bank

at same point shown on Plate VIII, fig. 2. April 26, t904.

Salix nigra on sandy bank opposite, and Pinus palustris on

sand-hills beyond

c ; : : : 69

Fic. 2.—One of the muddy rivers: the Ocmulgee. Looking down-

stream from the railroad bridge near Lumber City. Sept. 11,

1903. Jaxodium dtstichum on both banks. 71 esr

(376)

PLATE IX.

VOL. XVII.

’

ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. SCI.

Fic. 1.

Fic. 2.

PLATE X. ae | i

(377) :

EGA exe

Fic. 1.—Cypress pond about 3 miles south of Douglas, Coffee Co.

July 24, 1902 ~— 4 3 : 5 : 3 F :

Fic. 2.—Artificial section through sand-hills of Gum Swamp Creek

on western border of Montgomery Co., exposing about 20 feet

of homogeneous Columbia sand. July 3, 1903 ‘ : Bis (hs)

(378)

PAGE

ca)

JEG. i.

PLATE XI.

PAGE

Fic. 1.—Sand-hills of House Creek near Bowen’s Mill, Wilcox Co.

May 17, 1904. The trees are Pinus palustris and Quercus

Catesb@i, as usual. Patch of Chrysobalanus in foreground SO

Fic. 2.—Scene on sand-hills of Little Ocmulgee River on western

border of Montgomery Co., showing Quercus Catesbet, Pinus

palustris, and Selaginella acanthonota. Sept. 10, 1903 . eee:

(380)

ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. SCI., VOL. XVII. PLATE XI.

IRIE, WTI,

Fic. 1.—Scene on Upper Seven Bluffs on the Ocmulgee River,

Wilcox Co. May 17, 1904. Showing especially Magnolia

grandtfiora and Quercus alba : 18, 102, 103

Fic. 2.—Sand-hill bog near center of Tattnall Co. April 26, 1904.

The only known locality in the region for Sarracenia purpurea.

Pines nearly all P. serotina. Magnolia glauca and Clijlomia in

background 92, 300

PAGE

(382)

PLATE XII.

he tet

a '? oe 8H

len!

fe)

SCL;

ANNALS N. Y. ACAD

PAW eile

Non-ailuvial swamp of Seventeen Mile Creek near Gaskin’s Spring,

Coffee Co. May 12, 1904.. The large tree is Magnolia glauca,

85 inches in circumference. Next to it on the left is a trunk

of Gordonia, and next to that, Persea. Osmanthus, Jtea, and

Vitus rotundifolia are also visible : : : é oo OS

(384)

PAGE

PLATE XIII.

©)

op)

PLATE XIV.

Fic. 1.—Winter aspect of same non-alluvial swamp shown on Plate

XIII. Feb. 6, 1904. Trees and shrubs nearly all evergreen

Fic. 2.—A sand-hill pond. Sand-hills of Satilla River in Coffee

County south of Douglas. July 25, 1902. Trees mostly Pinus

Elliott . : ‘ ‘ é

(386)

PAGE.

ANNALS N Y. ACAD. SCI., VOL. XVII.

PLATE Dave

Fics. 1 and 2.—Sand-hammock on Fifteen Mile Creek near Rose-

mary Church, Emanuel Co. June 28, 1901. Rhynchospora

dodecandra and Paronychia herniarioides in upper picture,

Pinus palustris and Quercus Catesbet in both : ; : 97

(388)

ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. SCI., VOL. XVIT. PLATE XV-

Fic. tr.

| PEA Davale

Fics. r and 2.—Hammock of Seventeen Mile Creek ne ye

Spring, Coffee Co. Feb. 6, 1904. Quercus laurifolia

_ prominent tree, and Magnolia grandiflora next .

(390)

ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. SC

III, OTL:

PAGE

Fic 1.—The two commonest weeds, Helenium tenuifolium and

Acanthospermum australe. Streets of Douglas, Sept. 22, 1900 116

Fic. 2.—Pine-barrens after lumbering and fire. Near Ohoopee,

Tattnall Co., June 26, 1903. Herbaceous flora scarcely affected.

The young pines in the foreground are Pinus Elliotti1. (The

water in the foreground is more or less accidental, being in an

excavation along a railroad embankment) 117, 118

(392)

PLATE XVII.

ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. SCI., VOL. XVII.

PLATE XVIEL

ea (393)

PLATE XVIII.

Fic. 1.—Fire burning in dry pine-barrens (after lumb

Covena, Emanuel Co. April 5, 1904 . : ;

Fic. 2.—Dicerandra odoratissima at the type-locality.

Igoo ; e . e e te . tes = 'i8)

(394)

‘

" ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. SCI., VOL. XVII. PLATE XVIII.

PLATE XIX.

(395)

PLATE Ix

Fic. 1.—Asclepias humistrata, a typical sand-hill plant. Sand-hills

of House Creek, Wilcox Co., May 17, t904. Note the vertical

leaf-blades : : : S74.

Fic. 2.—Elliottsia racemosa, near ‘Bloss, Bulloeh Cor June 29, 1901. 187

(396)

PAGE

PLATE XIX.

op)

1S)

JDILIMIND, NOX 4

as ges COM e)

| PLATE Oe

-Elliottia racemosa, near Bloys, Bulloch Co. June 29,

view of flowers BED pari ga eeriee huh oe : es

(398)

ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. SCI., VOL. XVII. PLATE XX.

JENLWEINS, 2OOU2

Fic. 1.—Nyssa Ogeche (in center and left fore ground) in Allapaha tat

River east of Allapaha, Berrien Co. May 5, 1904. Taxodium

(one of the puzzling intermediate forms) at right. Pznus

Teda in background . ; ; , : : : 5 HO

Fic. 2.—Ceratiola ericoides in sand-hammock near Rosemary Church,

Emanuel Co. June 28, r9o1 i ‘ : : 3 pe Diet

(400)

mNALS N. Y. ACAD. SCI., VOL. XVII.

PLATE XXI.

Bees oy ;

PVA Dexa:

(40r)

PLATE ONL

Fic. 1.—Psoralea canescens in dry pine-barrens near Bloys, Bu

Con inerzon nooner 3 Bi} sees : : :

Fic. 2.—Lupinus villosus (no. ors), in. tavormedtate -sfbste- (9

near Ohoopee, Tattnall Co. April 25, 1904 .

(402)

ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. SCI., VOL. XVII. PLATE’ XXII.

PLATE XXIIL.*

‘ i . . . a nail Pts ; ~

Sarracenia flava in moist pine-barrens (already defores

Douglas, Coffee Co. May 15, 1904. Eriocaulon line

spicuous in foreground : 3 5 ‘ :

(404)

ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. SCI., VOL. XVII. PLATE?XXIII.

“PLATE XXIV.

Ges)

Jeet, OXI

Fic. 1.—Sarracenia flava X minor in most pine-barrens, Douglas Ose

(within a few feet of place shown in Plate XXIII). July 22,

tgo2z. Withit can be seen JZ arshallia graminijolia, By locaulen

decangulare, and Tofieldia . zed

Fic. 2.—Hymenocallis sp. in Seventeen Mile Creek swamp, Callies

Co. May 12, 1904 : Ree 255)

(406)

PLATE XXIV.

Fic. 2.

Ric. 1.

‘PLATE XXV.

(407)

PUAD Ey XO.

Fic. 1.—Habenaria nivea (No. 954) in intermediate pine-barrens

near Bloys, Bulloch Co. June 26, 1901. The larger of these

two plants was mentioned in Bull. Torrey Club, 30: 327, 1903 256

PAGE

Fic. 2.—Eriocaulon lineare in moist pine-barrens, Douglas. May

16, 1904. Sarracenia flava X minor associated with it . 234, 267

(408)

PLATE XXV.

ist e

ACAD. SCI., VOL

N Y

ANNALS

JE 8INIS, OCONEE

: (409)

PLATE XXVI.

PAGE

Pinus palustris in dry pine-barrens near Douglas, Feb. 7, 1904.

The specimen in the foreground is just three feet in diameter at

the place indicated by thetape . : : ; é . 304

(410)

PLATE XXVI.

ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. SCI., VOL. XVII.

PLATE XXVII.

Fic. 1.—Taxodium imbricarium in Twenty Mile Creek, Coffee Co. ei

Sept. 24, I9g00 . . ° 5 - : : «1 308

Fic. 2.—Taxodium imbricarium in moist, pine-barrens, Coffee Co.

Feb. 3, 1904 5 .

c c 4 > 308

Fic. 3.—Base of trunk of Taxodium distichum in swamp of Oconee

River near Mount Vernon, Montgomery Co. June 27, 1903 307

(412)

ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. SCI., VOL. XVII. PLATE XXVII.

Fic. 3.

PLATE XXVIII.

Fic. 1.—Taxodium imbricarium in winter. Twenty Mile Creek og

near Gaskin’s Spring, Coffee Co. Feb. 5, 1904 . : = BOL)

Fic. 2.—Selaginella acanthonota on sand-hills of Little Ocmulgee

River, Montgomery Co. Sept. 10, 1903 3 : c « +300

(414)

PLATE XXVIII.

SCI., VOL. XVII

PN we Cie Bs

ANNALS N

Annals (octavo series), established in 1823, contain

Cc contributions and ey of researches, together with

—— er the iacictioies of the ead sey was discon-

iS . the issue of Volume XVI, 1898, and merged in the

Jssues is one dollar per part or three dollars per volume.

por are ae as soon as the ‘separate papers are

2) The Memoirs (quarto cone established in 1895, are is-

as neers intervals. It b intended that ae volume shall

signe I is Genera to Acrondimiesl Memoirs, Vol-

0 Zodlogical Memoits, etc. The price is one dollar per

THE LIBRARIAN

New York Academy of Sciences

American Museum of Natural History.

New York City.

aes fe b :

Se fe) 8

: ie) : Z See

SE a cS 4

-- 2G = o :

= 4 25 > Ss

eS i Be

4 Ee Zo

ee = oe

2 fe ae =a

<q << gS

ae He |

=) re Ba

aietbey EA UN UREN 1

“Corresponding Secretary—R. E. Dones, neater 4

| Treasurer —EMERSON McMitun, 40 Wall Street,

| Librarian—Ratpu W. Tower, American Museum,

Editor —Cuarves Hee os 4 Hast aie Street,

“SECTION OF BIOLOGY |

| Chairman—Hienry. E. Crampron, Barnard cee

o | Seeretary—M. A. BicEetow, Teachers Nie

Pema s. W. Gude Collenbia ee ty

cane a JULIEN, Columbia Se aes

ah ve he “SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND parece LOG’ OH

fs bis Chairman—RovERt MacDouveat, New York Universit

| Secretary—R. ish Woopworty, Columbia University.

“77th Street eae Central Park, West.

ANNALS

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

VoL. XVII, Parr II, SEPTEMBER, 1907.

_ {Awwats N. Y. Acap. Scr., Vol. XVII, No. 2, Part II, pp. 415-436.

THE ORIGIN OF VERTEBRATE LIMBS.

RECENT EVIDENCE UPON THIS PROBLEM FROM STUDIES ON PRIM-

- ITIVE SHARKS.

By Raymonp C. Ossurn.

For nearly thirty years the Fin-fold Theory has been commonly

accepted to explain the origin of the limbs of the Vertebrata.

This theory has as its main thesis that all fins, both paired and

unpaired, have arisen in situ and in the same manner, as local

developments from the body wall. Thus conceived, they are

primarily external structures which have as their primitive form

a longitudinal fold of skin supplied with muscles, nerves, and

blood-vessels derived in a segmental way from the adjoining

body wall, and with supporting structures which have had their

origin within the fins. This theory first took form in the work

of Thacher (’77), Mivart (’79), and Balfour (’78), all of whom

arrived at the same conclusion independently, the first two on

anatomical grounds, the last from the embryological standpoint.

The theory has been ably supported by Dohrn (’83 and oz)

Paul Mayer (86), Wiedersheim (’92), Mollier (’93), Rabl (or),

Dean ('02), Regan (’o4), and others.

Opposed to this view is the older ‘‘Archipterygium” or Gill-

arch Theory, first definitely stated by Gegenbaur (’65 and ’7o)

and maintained by him through all his later work (’9s). Ranged

on this side of the question are Bunge (’74), von Davidoff (79

and ’80), Furbringer (’96 and ’o2), Braus (’98 and ’o4), and others

of the Gegenbaur school. As far as the origin of the unpaired

_ fins is concerned, the gill-arch theorists admit that they arose

as local outgrowths, and go farther than their opponents in

assuming a rigid metamerism of all the structures of the unpaired

415

416 OSBURN

fin, deriving the median fin skeleton from processes (dorsal and

hemal spines) of the axial skeleton, while according to the

fin-fold theory the skeleton is supposed to have been developed

independently of the vertebral column. But it is in the origin

of the paired fins that differences of opinion are most in evidence,

for while the fin-fold theorists consider that the paired fins have

had in a general way a similar origin to the unpaired, the gill-

arch theorists hold that they have been modified from gills.

and that the girdles and rays of the fins are directly homologous

with the supporting structures (arches and rays) of the gills.

During all the years in which these theories have been under

discussion unsettled points have not been lacking, and within

recent time a number of objections have been urged against the

fin-fold theory. With the hope of deciding some of these vexed

questions and with a-view to testing the validity of the objec-

tions raised, the writer has been led to investigate the develop-

ment of the paired and unpaired fins of a cestraciont shark

(Heterodontus japonicus, Duméril), a form belonging by direct

lineage to a group of very ancient sharks,—much older, as far

at least as can be judged by paleontological data, than any

selachian that has hitherto been investigated.! For comparison |

the writer has had various stages of Spinax, Mustelus, and

Torpedo, and has been especially fortunate in having access to

a number of embryonic stages of Chlamydoselachus anguineus

Garman, a form generally recognized as being one of the most

primitive of modern Selachii. The'series of Cestracion (Hetero-

dontus) embryos at my command is very complete. For the use

of all this valuable material my thanks are due to Professor

Bashford Dean, to whom I am also grateful for much encourage-

ment and many helpful suggestions in pursuit of the work.

The present paper embodies only the main results of my

studies and will be followed by another more extended in scope,

in which will be given the evidence upon which these results

are based and in which the literature of the subject will be treated.

It may be briefly stated that the results of my work indicate

that many of the objections raised against the fin-fold origin

1 All references to Cestracion, Chlamydoselachus, and Spinax in the

following pages are from my own observations, unless otherwise accredited.

THE ORIGIN OF VERTEBRATE LIMBS A17

of the paired fins apply equally well to the unpaired fins, which

are held, even by those who have raised the objections, to be

of strictly metameric and local origin. Other objections can

be shown to be based upon faulty evidence, or upon facts which

bear a different and more probable interpretation.

The principal objections to the fin-fold theory are, briefly

stated, as follows:

A. Relating to the comparison of the paired fin girdles with

gill arches the followers of Gegenbaur contend that:

I. The pectoral girdle arises in serial order withthe gill arches.

Il. The pectoral girdle makes its appearance earlier than the

basalia and rays. .

Ill. The basalia grow out of the girdles and the rays out of

the basalia.

IWe Zhe dorsal-end ‘of the pectoral chk comes into relation

with the visceral muscles.

V. The pelvic girdle is the homolog of the pectoral in every

respect and so corresponds to a gill arch.

B. Relating to the supposed migration of the paired fins

from the gill region:

I. The pelvic fins have been shown to undergo slight migra-

tion or shifting during ontogeny.

II. Asa proof of migration there appears a strong collector

nerve in the anterior part of the pelvic fins.

III. Also, in the early development of the pelvic fin the most

anterior muscle-buds degenerate without entering the fin, while

those just posterior to these are compelled to reach backward

to enter the fin.

C. Relating to the contrast of paired with unpaired fins:

I. The skeleton of the unpaired fins consists of modified

vertebral (spinous and hemal) processes.

II. The girdles of the paired fins have nothing to represent

them in the unpaired fins.

III. The presence of post-axial rays in the pectoral fin proves

the primitive biseriality of the paired fins.

IV. The fin-rays of the paired fins do not arise separately

and later become fused to form basalia as the fin-fold theory

would lead us to expect.

418 OSBURN

V. The fusion of the muscle-buds in the paired fins before

the appearance of the skeleton precludes the possibility of the

metameric origin of the latter.

‘VI. The early discrepancy between muscles and rays in the

pelvic fin proves the primitive dysmetamery and independent

origin of the paired fin skeleton.

Let us now examine the foregoing objections point by point

and determine whether they are well founded.

I. The pectoral girdle cannot be considered serially homolo-

gous with the gill arches for the following reasons:

(1) The first anlage of the pectoral girdle lies almost its

whole length below the gill arches, as shown by Braus’s recon-

structions (’04) of Spinax, and by my own observations on

Cestracion.

(2) It arises near the external wall of the body, while the

gill arches arise near the pharyngeal wall, according to my

studies on Cestracion.

(3) The thickening of mesenchyme from which the girdle is

differentiated takes its origin next to the ectoderm and spreads

in an inward direction till it occupies all the region in which the

pectoral fin skeleton arises, which latter is therefore of external

origin, since it arises out of this mesenchyme thickening. The

gill arches, on the other hand, arise next to the enteron.

(4) The study of Cestracion shows that the first anlage of the

pectoral fin lies wholly within the region of spinal muscles.

(s) In Cestracion at least, the pectoral girdle is relatively

much farther from the last gill arch at its first appearance than it is

during later growth. That is, it grows toward the gill-arch region.

(6) The first four points apply with even more force to the

pelvic girdle which in a general way must be considered the

homolog of the pectoral.

II. The observations of E. Ruge (’o2) and Braus (’04) that

the pectoral girdle of Spinax miger is the first part of the fin ~

skeleton to make its appearance are probably not to be ques-

tioned, but since Spinax is the only form so far examined in

which the time relations are thus, and as in Cestracion, which

THE ORIGIN OF VERTEBRATE LIMBS | 419

is unquestionably a much older type of fish, the first anlage

of the skeleton undoubtedly makes its appearance in the region

of the base of the rays and the neighboring part of the primary

basal, we must conclude that this objection is at least not final.

On the contrary, it seems plain from the evidence at hand that

Spinax is the exception to the rule.

III. Against this objection we must weigh the following

facts:

(1) The writer finds that in Cestracion the rays and basalia

begin to appear before the girdle. Other investigators since

the time of Balfour (’78) have found the same to be true in

various species (Spinax excepted).

(2) The basalia and rays do not “grow’’ out of any pre-

existing structure, but are differentiated, both in the same

manner, out of the same band or layer of mesenchyme. This

layer gives rise also to therudiment of the girdle. The above

distinction is an important one since upon it depends the inter-

pretation that all of these skeletal structures of the fins are

developed iu situ by differentiation instead of ‘‘growing out.”

The latter term implies internal development and change of

location during the process, a condition contrary at least to

the present observations.!

IV. The fact that the dorsal end of the pectoral girdle has

relations with the visceral musculature (trapezius group, in-

nervated by viscero-motor nerves), has been interpreted by

the gill-arch theorists to show a primitive connection,—“‘die

alten Relikte der einstmaligen kopfmuskelversorgung des Schult-

ergurtels”’ (Furbringer ’o2). The connection is beyond question,

‘but that the above conclusion is not final is evident from the

fact that in Cestracion the first anlage of the pectoral girdle

arises entirely ventral to that anlage of the trapezius, quite

separated from it, and comes into relation with the visceral

muscles only by its later dorsal growth. This is true also of

Spinax, as shown by my preparations of a 20 mm. embryo.

1 By way of comparison, it is worthy of notice that the muscle-buds do

grow into the fins. They disarrange the mesenchyme cells and push

them out of the way during their progress. Nothing of this nature

takes place in connection with the development of the fin skeleton.

420 OSBURN

V. The pelvic girdle cannot be strictly homologized with

the pectoral, point for point, for the following reasons:

(1) Inthe oldest fossil sharks in which the pelvic is sufficiently

known (Pleuropterygide) there is no pelvic girdle developed

beyond the condition of basalia. If the gill-arch theory were

true, the pelvic girdle should be best developed in the oldest

forms. .

(2) In the lowest modern sharks (Notidanide) there is in

the adult no evidence of a dorsal prominence in the pelvic to

correspond with the scapular portion of the pectoral. It is

difficult to see how the pelvic girdle of Chlamydoselachus, a

long, flat plate pierced with eight nerve foramina, could be

made to homologize with the pectoral girdle of any shark.

(3) In none of the stages of Chlamydoselachus in my pos-

session in which the pelvic is sufficiently developed (from 110

mm. upward) is there any indication of a dorsal prominence.

The pelvic girdle develops as a flat basale-like plate.

(4) The argument for the anterior prominence which is

present in some sharks and which was originally homologized

with the scapula by von Davidoff has already been given up by

the gill-arch theorists. The small dorsal prominence recently

described (Braus ’04) in the pelvic of Spinax and homologized

with the scapula can scarcely be considered homologous, for

the reason that it is situated posterior to the nerve foramen,

while the scapular portion of the pectoral girdle is always, so

far as my observations have extended, anterior to the foramen.

The various parts of the pelvic girdle cannot, therefore, be

homologized with all parts of the pectoral, and certainly the

pelvic girdle is much farther removed from comparison with

the gill arch.

B. It becomes evident that no migration yet shown is quan-

titatively sufficient to account for the distance between the

pelvic fin and the gill region, for:

I. The slight measurable migration which the pelvic may

undergo in its ontogeny cannot be accepted as evidence in favor.

of migration from the branchial region.

(1) The pelvic fin in some cases migrates forward during

ontogeny.

THE ORIGIN OF VERTEBRATE LIMBS 421

(2) The supposed demonstration of migration in the pelvic

fin at an early period is better explained as due to the concen-

tration of the fin froma longer basis, as I will show under another

heading.

(3) The migration of the pelvic, as well as of other fins, has

been shown biometrically to occur in accord with the shifting of

the center of gravity during development (in Cestracion by Dean

02). By the same method it has been proved that the pelvic

shifts its position in correlation with the dorsals (in Spinax by

Punnett 04). Hence the observed migration becomes merely an

adaptive process without any special meaning in phylogeny.

- (4) While we have no direct evidence that any fin has ever

migrated backward to any extent, we have abundant proof of

the migration of the pelvic fins forward in many Teleosts, in

extreme cases to a position in front of the pectorals. This,

also, can be due only to adaptation.

(5) No satisfactory reason has ever been offered why a fin

when once in the most important place in the body, viz. the

pectoral position, should ever have migrated out of it into a

region of such minor importance as the pelvic fin occupies in

sharks and other primitive fishes.

II. The argument based upon the collector nerve is negatived

at once by the following facts:

(1) Collector nerves appear also in the unpaired fins, both

in the anterior and posterior parts of the fins, as Paul Mayer

(86) showed in Acanthias, Heptanchus, and Centrophorus, and

as my own observations show in the first and second dorsals

of Cestracion. Yet it is contrary to the Gegenbaurian con-

ception of the unpaired fins that they have migrated at all in

their phylogeny.

(2) A small posterior collector is known in the pelvic fins of

certain species. This is assumed by the gill-arch theorists to

be due to a secondary migration of the fin in a forward direction.

‘However, the results of Punnett’s studies (’oo) on Mustelus

indicate that in this species the pelvic fin of the female migrates

farther forward than that of the male and yet has no posterior

collector, while that of the male, which indicates less migration,

none the less possesses it.

“ oa

422 OSBURN

(3) In those Teleosts which show a migration of the pelvic

to a thoracic position, the nerves of the fin are carried forward

during the process, while no nerves are picked up on the way

and no new collector is formed as a result of the migration.

The hypothesis of migration is therefore very far from meet-

ing all the conditions. The only adequate explanation (Mollier

’93) is that all the fins have shortened up at the base and have

formed the collectors by bringing together nerves which once

entered separately to innervate the longer fin. In favor of this

view we have direct evidence that the fins of modern sharks

do shorten up at the base during ontogeny, and we know also -

that the fins of the oldest fossil sharks (Pleuropterygide, Acan-

thodide, and Diplacanthide) were of the fin-fold character,

broadest at the base and without any posterior indentation or

notch such as modern selachian fins possess.

III. The facts of the degeneration of the most anterior

muscle-buds, and of the backward extension of those buds

immediately posterior to these to enter the fin, can not be

accepted as proof of the migration of the fin, as has been so

strongly urged by the gill-arch theorists (Braus ’98), for:

(1) The same process occurs at the posterior border of the

same fin. The observations of Braus (’98) demonstrate that

in Spinax the last pelvic muscle-bud degenerates without enter-

ing the fin, while the buds immediately in front of it are com-

pelled to reach forward to enter. My preparations of Spinax

show that four such buds extend forward to attain their posi-

tions in the fin, and the same condition is observed in

Cestracion.

(2) But, most significant, the same process, I find, occurs

in the unpaired fins. In the dorsal fins of Cestracion the most

anterior buds extend backward while the most posterior reach

forward to enter the fin. Again, in Paul Mayer’s work (86)

published more than twenty years before this objection to the

fin-fold theory was raised, we learn from his description of

the unpaired fins of Scyllium and Pristiurus that there are

abortive muscle-buds both before and behind the dorsal fins,

and we may observe from his plates that the most posterior

THE ORIGIN OF VERTEBRATE LIMBS 423

and most anterior buds which enter the fins have to reach out

of position to accomplish it.

(3) The fact that in the pelvic fin these most anterior muscle-

buds are the earliest to appear is not to be taken as a proof

that they are phylogenetically older than those which appear

later, as the gill-arch theorists assume (Braus ’98), but, rather,

they appear first because they are most anterior, for it is in the

nature of all such serial structures to develop from anterior to

posterior, e. g., gills, somites, pronephric tubules, etc.). This

condition is observed in the unpaired fins as well as in the

paired, for in the dorsals of Cestracion the most anterior buds

are the first to develop. The same principle, according to my

observations, holds also among the various fins, the pectoral

preceding the pelvic, the first dorsal preceding the second, in

time of development, etc., yet this cannot be considered a proof

that the first dorsal is phylogenetically older than the second

nor the pectoral older than the pelvic. (According to the gill-

atch theory the pelvic should be the older, yet it develops

later than the pectoral.)

These facts are readily interpreted on the hypothesis that

the bases of the fins once extended over a larger number of body

segments than at present. In the pelvic it is evident that the

shortening has been much greater at the anterior than at the

posterior edge of the fin. As a result the present fin is now

situated in advance of what was once its posterior limit, though

the anterior edge of the present fin is much farther back than

formerly. Certainly this is not migration, but a concentration

of the fin basis in a manner similar to that occurring in the

unpaired fins.

C. If the six objections given under this heading can be

answered, the paired fins should be compared rather than con-

trasted with the unpaired fins.

I. lf it were true, as the opponents of the fin-fold theory main-

tain, that the skeleton of the unpaired fins consists of modified

spinous and hemal processes, then evidently the skeleton of the

paired fins could not have a similar origin to that of the unpaired.

Opposed to such a view, however, are the following facts:

(1) In the first and second dorsals, the anal, and the superior

424 OSBURN

caudal fins there is not the least indication of such a close

relation of the rays to the vertebral processes as we should

expect from the above view of their origin. In the lowest

sharks, especially in such forms as do not possess fin spines,

the rays of the dorsal and anal fins are usually widely separated

from the axial skeleton, according to the present studies on

many species. In the ancient fossil shark Cladoselache, also,

the rays of the dorsal fin are widely separated from the vertebral

column.

(2) In ontogeny the skeleton of the unpaired fin is plainly

developed from a plate of thickened mesenchyme which first

appears next to the ectoderm.

(3) During early development the unpaired fin skeleton is

never in contact with the axial skeleton, as shown by my studies

of Cestracion, Chlamydoselachus, Spinax, Mustelus, and others.

(4) The only exception to the last statement, and the only

case where corresponding rays are known to come into contact

with vertebral processes, are found in the inferior caudal fin,

and even here there are frequent discrepancies. This fin is

then an exception to the rule, and if all the unpaired fins have

had a similar origin, as seems probable, we must explain the con-

dition in this fin as due to secondary fusion of the rays with

hemal spines to secure better support. On account of their

mechanical relation to the ventral lobe of the caudal fin, which

is the chief organ of propulsion, these rays stand in need of

just such support. (This is the part of the fin which becomes

the functional caudal in Teleosts.) Examples of parallel cases

are the dorsal spines of sharks (undoubted secondary struc-

tures), which, in order to secure firmer support, have become

secondarily attached to the axial skeleton, and the superior

rays of the secondarily diphycercal tail of Dipnoi.

II. With regard to the comparison of the girdles of the

paired fins with the basalia of the unpaired fins a number of

facts present themselves.

(1) The girdles exhibit so much variation in form that they

show themselves to be adaptive structures such as the basalia of

unpaired fins are admitted to be.

THE ORIGIN OF VERTEBRATE LIMBS 425

(2) In the fossil Cladoselache we have the evidence that

the pelvic girdle was formed in the same way as the basalia of

unpaired fins,—indeed it is in the same condition as many of

the unpaired fins of modern sharks.

(3) In the Notidanide, which are without doubt the lowest

and most primitive of recent sharks, the pelvic girdle is merely

a flat plate, not more complicated in form than the basalia of

many unpaired fins, and in Chlamydoselachus twelve of the

twenty-five rays of the pelvic fin attach directly to the girdle,

thus indicating its primitive position in the category of basalia.

(4) In the more primitive Ganoids the skeleton of the paired

_ fins has a close resemblance to that of the unpaired, as Thacher

and Mivart demonstrated long ago. Regan (’o04) has recently

brought forward a remarkably clear case in Psephurus gladius

in which the series formed by the anal, pelvic, and pectoral is

most convincing. The pelvic resembles the anal even more

than it does the pectoral.

III. The presence of post-axial rays in the pectoral fins of

the fossil Pleuracanthus, and to a limited extent in modern

selachians, is held by the gill-arch theorists to prove the ‘‘ primi-

tive biseriality’’ of the paired fin skeleton. Opposed to this

conclusion we have the facts:

(1) The fossil Pleuropterygide, Acanthodide, and Diplacan- |

thide, all of which occur in older strata than does Pleuracanthus,

have the fins all decidedly of the fin-fold type, with not even

any opportunity for the presence of post-axial rays.

(2) Post-axial rays are entirely absent from the pelvic fins

of all sharks, modern and ancient (unless we are to accept

the questionable cartilages in the mixipterygium of Pleuracan-

thus, the homology of which with post-axial fin-rays is at least

doubtful.)

(3) The occurrence of post-axial rays in the pectoral fins of

recent sharks is so sporadic and variable, and they are wanting

entirely in so many species, that they are better considered as

adaptive structures without peculiar phylogenetic significance.

(4) There are known cases of post-axial rays in the unpaired

fins (dorsal of Raja, anal of Heptanchus; also the dorsal of the

Devonian Ganoid, Ccelacanthus), where they have all the

426 OSBURN

appearance of those in the pectoral. This again shows their

adaptive nature.

(5) In {higher vertebrates which have taken up aquatic life

we have well-known examples of extra or supernumerary digits

formed adaptively on the post-axial side of the limb. This

in the whales is proved to have taken place by a longitudinal

division of the fifth digit (Ktkenthal ’88 and Symington ’06).

A migration of the fifth digit into a well-marked post-axial

position for adaptive purposes is also well illustrated in certain

aquatic reptiles and mammals, as I have elsewhere indicated

(Osburn ’o6).

IV. Kerr (99) pointed out that the real stumbling-block

for those who have found themselves unable to accept the fin-

fold theory lies in the fact that the fin-rays do not arise separately

and later become fused to form the basalia. However, when

we examine the mode of formation of the fin skeleton this diffi-

culty disappears. It must be noted that the skeleton structures

of the fin are the last of all to develop, and that the fin already —

has approximately its permanent shape when the skeleton begins

to take form. It consequently makes its appearance as an

adapted structure, suited to the mechanical needs of the fin

at the time it develops. In the unpaired fins, which the gill-arch

theorists consider primitively metameric, the process is precisely

similar to that in the paired fins. Wherever, in the unpaired

fins, the rays have become joined to form basalia, these basalia

are present from the first, according to the writer’s studies,

just as they are in the paired fins, and they are not formed by

the fusion of separate rays. There is, then, no more difficulty

in accepting the origin of the paired fin basalia from rays than

there is in accepting such an origin for the unpaired fins,

since both proceed exactly alike. In neither case is there any

fusion of once discrete rays to form basalia, but in both the

basalia are adaptively formed as such from the first, due to the

failure of the mesenchyme to differentiate into smaller elements.

V. The opponents of the fin-fold theory have lately insisted

(Furbringer ’02, Braus ’o4) that the fusion of the muscle-buds

described by Mollier (’93) in the paired fins proves the original

dysmetamery of the paired fin skeleton, since the fusion to

THE ORIGIN OF VERTEBRATE LIMBS 427

form the ‘‘musculi radiales” takes place before the appearance

of the rays.

The writer’s investigations on Cestracion show conclusively

that such an argument cannot be considered valid, for the reason

that fusion occurs also in all the unpaired fins, which are held by

the gill-arch theorists to be strictly metameric. I have carefully

traced the process from its inception and compared it with the

same process in the paired fins and there is no observable dif-

ference. On the other hand, it only shows more ear the

close relation of the paired and unpaired fins.

VI. The discordance or discrepancy between muscles and

rays which has also been strongly urged as proof of the primitive

dysmetamery and independent origin of these structures in the

paired fins (Braus ’o4) has likewise no place in argument against

the fin-fold theory, for again the same condition is found to

occur in the unpaired fins. My reconstructions of the first and

second dorsal fins of Cestracion show the same sort of discrepancy

that has been proved to exist in the paired fins.

In the foregoing pages the objections to the fin-fold theory

have been considered; we may now mention the following

objections to the gill-arch theory:

J. The indications are that the primitive fin possessed a

far greater number of rays than the primitive gill.

II. There has never been discovered any indication of an

intermediate stage representing a transition from the gill to the

fin.

III. My observations indicate that the paired fin girdles

have not been abstracted from the branchial region by the

spinal muscles in the manner assumed by the gili-arch theorists.

IV. The gill-arch theory violates important time and place

relations.

To further explain these statements:

I. The gill-arch theorists have tried to show that the gill

tays have degenerated, and they reason that at one time the

gill might have had rays enough to equal those of the primitive

fin. The only evidence of degeneration thus far produced has.

been in the hyoid arch, the rays of which are reduced somewhat

in number, but that is no indication that the number of rays

in the true gills has been diminished by more than one-half.

Certainly in Cestracion there is no evidence of any reduction in

the number of rays in the true gills.

II. It would seem that, if the paired limb had been derived

in the way the gill-arch theorists maintain, there should remain —

in ontogeny some indication of the intermediate steps through

which the gill passed while becoming a fin. That no such steps

are known to occur in embryology, paleontology, or comparative

anatomy is a very forcible argument against such an origin of

the fins. 5

Fusions of gill rays resembling somewhat by their branching

structure the basalia and rays of a fin have been described in

sharks (Braus ’04). However, the only cases of this kind thus

far made known have occurred in the hyoid arch, and even

the most sanguine adherent of the gill-arch theory would scarcely

maintain that the hyoid is progressing in the direction of be-

coming a fin.

III. Because both the spinal and the visceral (trapezius)

muscles attach to the dorsal end of the pectoral arch, we are

hardly justified in supposing that the one is abstracting it from

the other. Yet on this basis the gill-arch theorists assume that

the anterior spinal muscles not only deprived the branchial

region of the pelvic arch but passed it over to their neighbors

and proceeded to abstract another. Why this kleptomania

should have been satiated with two arches, while half a dozen

yet remained, does not appear.

If the above assumption were true, it might indeed make a

strong argument for the gill-arch origin of the paired limbs, but

that it is without foundation appears in the light of the following

facts in selachian embryology:

(1) As we have shown, the pectoral girdle is differentiated

from a thickening of mesenchyme cells which grows inward

from the region of the epidermis.

(2) According to my observations on Cestracion and Spinax,

the first anlage of the pectoral fin is situated entirely ventral

to the place of origin of the trapezius muscle, and it is by the

later growth of both these structures that they finally come

428 OSBURN

ea a ee

THE ORIGIN OF VERTEBRATE LIMBS 429

into contact. The connection must, therefore, be interpreted

as secondary.

(3) The pectoral girdle of Cestracion as it develops moves

toward the gill region. When it first appears, the scapular por-

tion of the girdle is separated from the last gill arch by a con-

siderable space, but as development proceeds the girdle and the

arch approach each other until the intervening space is elimi-

nated. At first this space is fully twice as great as that between

the gill arches; at 35 mm. it is half passed over, and at 60 mm.

the arch and girdle are practically in contact. In the adult

they overlap slightly.

There is, moreover, no evidence that gill arches may be

crowded or pushed out of the branchial region. It has, on the

other hand, been proved that the sixth gill of Cestracion de-

generated im situ, if the structures which Mrs. Hawkes (’o5)

describes are to be interpreted as the vestiges of a gill arch.

IV. First, as to time relations, it is important to note that

all the other structures of the fin make their appearance in ad-

vance of the skeleton, and before the gill arches are differentiated.

On the assumption that the fin has been formed out of a displaced

gill, we should expect to find the skeleton developing in an

outward direction and carrying with it the other structures

which form the fin. But instead of this, the fin fold, with its

muscle-buds, nerves, and blood-vessels, as well as the primitive

support of the fin (the mesenchyme thickening), is well developed

before the skeleton becomes evident. Moreover, the fin skeleton

does not grow into the fin fold, for there is no disarrangement

or shifting of parts as the skeleton appears, but the skeleton

forms in situ by differentiation of the original mesenchyme

support. This is just as it should be on the fin-fold theory,

but exactly opposite to what would be expected on the gill-arch

theory, if time relations stand for anything. The order of ap-

pearance, furthermore, is precisely as it is in the unpaired fins.

Second, with regard to place relations, we have already shown

that the first rudiment of the pectoral arch is more ventral than

that of the gill arch, that it is more external, and that in Ces-

tracion at least it grows toward the gill region as it

develops.

TT ha

: ,

A number of arguments in favor of the fin-fold theory yet

remain, and may be summarized as follows:

I. All fins of sharks arise as longitudinal folds of the epi-

dermis.

II. The muscle-buds which give rise to the muscles of the

fins originate exactly alike in both kinds of fins.

III. The nerves which supply the paired fins take their

origin in the same way as those of the unpaired.

IV. The origin of the blood supply is alike in both kinds of

fins.

V. The earliest support of the fins, a plate of thickened

mesenchyme, is of the same character in paired and unpaired

fins and arises in the same manner in both.

VI. The time, place, and manner of differentiation of the

fin skeleton is similar in all the fins.

VII. The later growth of the fin fold and the constriction

of the fin at its base are similar in paired and unpaired fins.

VIII. Fusion of rays, basalia, etc., occur sporadically as

well as regularly in the fins of both categories.

IX. Fin spines are known in both kinds of fins.

X. Ceratotrichia or horny dermal rays are present in all the

fins of sharks.

Examining the above arguments in the order given:

I. Whether or not the longitudinal folds which give rise to

the fins have once been entirely continuous is a matter of no

great consequence,—though it seems entirely possible from the

evidence at hand that the fins may have been connected in their

early history. Be that as it may there is no disputing the fact

that all the fins of sharks, and indeed of practically all fishes

(the only known exceptions are very rare and embrace forms

of highly specialized development, e. g., Lepidosiren, Gambusia),

originate as folds of skin. It must be noted that these folds

are always longitudinal. The gill membrane, which may be

considered the homolog of the fin according to the gill-arch

theory (since it contains the rays of the gill), is, on the other hand,

vertical in origin. If time and place relations have any meaning

in embryology we cannot avoid the conclusion that the most

primitive ancestral fin was a fin fold. Add to this the evidence

430 OSBURN

THE ORIGIN OF VERTEBRATE LIMBS 431

from the oldest fossil sharks ( Pleuropterygide, Acanthodide,

and Diplacanthide) and we have a clear case.

II. The muscle-buds supplying the fins on the dorsal side

of the body arise from the dorsal ends of the myotomes, while |

those supplying the fins on the ventral side, paired and unpaired

alike, arise in exactly the same manner from the ventral ends of

the myotomes. There is nothing in this process to indicate

otherwise than that the fins have arisen zu situ as outgrowths

from the body wall.

III. The fins on the dorsal side of the body are supplied by

branches of the dorsal rami of the spinal nerves, the same in

character as those which supply the adjoining parts of the body,

while on the ventral side, paired and unpaired fins alike are

similarly supplied with branches of the ventral rami.

IV. In the embryology of Cestracion I have carefully fol-

lowed the development of the blood supply in both kinds of fins.

In every case the blood-vessels are those which also supply

the adjoining body wall, and which take their origin as dorsal

branches of the dorsal aorta, or, in other words, are typical

body wall blood-vessels.

V. The earliest support of the fins, paired and median alike,

is, as we have already stated, a dense or thickened mesenchyme.

The thickening in all cases begins next to the ectoderm and

becomes noticeable immediately after the fin fold makes its

appearance. As growth progresses this denser mesenchyme ex-

tends inward until it occupies all of the region in which, later on,

the fin skeleton is formed. The procartilage is differentiated

right in place out of the mesenchyme support, and later becomes

chondrified to form the cartilaginous skeleton. This sequence

in development is just what the fin-fold theory would lead us

to expect, and it seems altogether probable thatsuch has been

the phylogenetic history of the supporting structures of the

fins.

VI. In Cestracion the first indication of the formation of

the skeleton is seen in the region near the middle of the fin,

and the bases of the rays and the adjoining portions of basalia

' appear at the same time and are the first structures to be ob-

served. The differentiation spreads in all directions, and the

432 OSBURN

girdles, in the case of the paired fins, appear very rapidly. In

the unpaired fins the process is identical, except for the girdles.

We must insist upon the fact that the rays do not “grow out”’

of the basalia but that both structures are differentiated in the

same way out of the same mesenchyme plate. Similarly the

girdles do not grow out of the basalia, nor vice versa.

VII. As we have seen, the fin fold originates in precisely

the same way in paired and unpaired fins. The process of

further development is also similar in both. The base of the fin

grows relatively slowly, while the body is elongating and the

external part of the fin fold is pushing out very rapidly. This

results in a concentration of the fin base, in the manner described

by Mollier (93) for the paired fins. The median fins pursue a

similar course, though usually the process is not carried to such

a degree. The shape taken by the fins during development

depends upon what Mollier has termed their “direction of

growth.’’ The amount of constriction at the base of the fin

is presumably measured by the amount of mobility required

GiB yelavey sate

VIII. The so-called “fusions” of rays and basalia, which,

in reality, are merely failures to differentiate separately out of

the mesenchyme and are not due to the growing together of

parts, may occur at any part of the fin skeleton, but according

to my observations made on many preparations, as well as on

data provided by the plates of various authors, they occur

much more commonly at or near the ends of the series of rays.

It would seem that mechanical conditions would naturally be

most effective in producing them here. The mode of formation

of these “‘fusions’’ and the manner of their occurrence, both of

which are similar in all fins, lead us to conclude that they are

of one kind with the larger basalia and that all such sporadic as

well as regular cases are produced in adaptation, 7. e., to meet

the mechanical needs of the particular fin in which«such struct-

ures occur.

IX. While spines are not found in the paired fins of modern

sharks, they are to be found in those of some of the oldest

fossil forms (Diplacanthide and Acanthodide, also Gyracan-

thus, Haplacanthus, and Heteracanthus). This shows the very

THE ORIGIN OF VERTEBRATE LIMBS 433

similar nature and potentiality of the two kinds of fins at a

very remote period,—Upper Silurian and Devonian.

X. Horny fin-rays or ceratotrichia are very characteristic

structures of the fins of sharks and occur nowhere else in the

body. The importance of these structures in phylogeny has

recently been discussed by Goodrich (’04) who finds them to be

very ancient and very conservative. They occur alike in the

paired and unpaired fins of all sharks, even the most ancient.

(Goodrich’s failure to find the ceratotrichia in the paired fins

of Cladoselache can be attributed only to insufficient material,

for an examination of the many specimens in the American

Museum of Natural History proves their presence beyond a

doubt.) As these structures occur equally in every respect in

all the fins, and develop in the same way and at the same relative

time, they may be taken to indicate a community of origin for

all of the fins.

When we consider the facts derived from embryology, anat-

omy, and paleontology which are arrayed in the preceding

pages, the conclusion is borne in upon us that the paired and

unpaired fins are primarily similar structures, and the evidence

from the present investigations is overwhelmingly in favor of

the origin of all fins as local outgrowths from the body wall.

Columbia University, New York City,

March 28, 1906.

LITERATURE REFERRED TO.

Balfour, F. M. ,

78. Monograph on the Development of Elasmobranch

Fishes. London, 1878.

Brauss, H.

’98. Ueber die Extremitaten der Selachier, Verh. Anat.

Gesellschaft. Apr., 1898.

’04. Tatsachliches aus der Entwickelung des Extre-

mitatenskelettes bei den niedersten Formen, Hdckel-

jestschrift (Jenaischer Denkschriften XI), Jena, 1904.

74. Ueber die Nachweisbarkeit eines biserialen Archi-

pterygium bei Selachiern und Dipnoern. Jena.

Zeitschr. fir Naturwissenschajt, Bd. VIII, Jena

1874.

434 OSBURN

Ravidoff, M. von

79. Beitrage zur vergleichenden Anatomie der hinteren

Gliedmassen der Fische. Morph. Jahrb., V, 1870.

80. Ueber das Skelet der hinteren Gliedmassen der

Fische. Morph. Jahrb., V1, 1880.

Dean, B.

’02. Biometric Evidence on the Problem of the Paired

Limbs of the Vertebrates. Am. Naturalist, Vol. —

SOGOU 902:

Dohrn, A.

83, Studien zur Urgeschichte des Wirbelthierkdérpers,

VI. Mitt. Zool. Stat. Neapel, V.

’02. Studien zur Urgeschichte des Wirbelthierkdérpers,

XXII. Mitt. Zool. Stat. Neapel, Bd. XV, 10902.

Fiirbringer, M.

’96. Extremitaten Theorie. Festschrijt fur Gegenbaur

Ili, Leipzig, 1896.

’02. Morphologische Streitfagen. Morph. Jahrb., XXX,

1902.

Gegenbaur, C.

765. Untersuchungen zur vergleichenden Anatomie der

Wirbelthiere. 1, Schultergirtel der Wirbelthiere.

2. Brustflosser der Fische. Leipzig, 1865.

70. Ueber das Skelet der Gliedmassen der Wirbelthiere

in allgemeinen und der hintergliedmassen der

Selachier insbesondere. Jena. Zeitschr., V, 1870.

’95. Das Flossenskelet der Crossopterygier und das

Archipterygium der Fische. Morph. Jahrb., Bd.

XXII, 1895.

Goodrich, E. S. ;

’04. On the Dermal Fin-rays of Fishes, Living and

Extinct. Quart. Journ. Microscop. Sci., March,

1904.

Hawkes, O. A. M.

’05. The Presence of Vestigial Sixth Branchial Arch

in the Heterodontide. Journ. Anat and Physiol.,

Wolk: 1005:

4 Kerr, J. G.

"90.

Kiikenthal,

88.

Mayer, P.

86.

THE ORIGIN OF VERTEBRATE LIMBS 435

Hypotheses as to the Origin of Paired Limbs of

Vertebrates. Proc. Cambridge Philos. Soc., X,

Pt. IV, 1899.

Ueber die Hand der Cetaceen. Anat. Anzeiger, 1888.

Die unpaaren Flossen der Selachier. Mutt. Zool.

Stat. Neapel, VI, 1886.

Mivart, St. Geo.

"79.

Mollier, S.

IOL.

Notes on the Fins of Elasmobranchs, with Con-

siderations on the Nature and Homologies of

Vertebrate Limbs. Tr. Zodl. Soc., London, X,

BO7O.

Die paarigen Extremitaten der Wirbelthiere. Anat.

Hefte, 1893.

Osburn, R. C.

06.

Punnett, R. C.

700.

04.

Rabl, C.

Monge

Adaptive Modifications of the Limb Skeleton in

Aquatic Reptiles and Mammals. Awnals, N. Y.

Acad. Sci., Vol. XVI, Pt. 3, March 1906.

On the Formation of the Pelvic Plexus, with

Especial Reference to the Nervus Collector in the

Genus Mustelus. Phil. Trans. Royal Soc. of Lon-

don, Vol. 192, 1900.

Merism and Sex in Spimax niger. Biometrika,

Vol. III, No. 4, 1904.

Gedanken und Studien. Zeitschr. Wiss. Zool., Bd.

f9,. ROO.

Regan, C. Tate.

04.

Ruge, E.

702.

The Phylogeny of the Teleostomi. Aznals and

Magazine Nat. Hist., 1904.

Die Entwickelungsgeschichte des Skeletts der vor-

deren Extremitat von Spinax niger. Morph. Jahrb.

Bd. XXX, 1902.

436 . OSBURN

Symington, J.

06. Observations on the Cetacean Flipper, with Special

Reference to Hyperphalangism and Polydactylism.

Journ. Anat. and Physiol., Vol. XL, Pt. 2, 1906.

Thacher, J.

’77. Median and Paired Fins. A Contribution to the

History of Vertebrate Limbs. Tr. Connecticut

Acad. Se. and Arts, III, 1877.

Wiedersheim, R.

’92. Das Gliedmassenskelett der Wirbelthiere mit beson-

derer Berichtsichtigung des Schulter- und Becken-

gurtels bei Fischen, Amphibien und Reptilien.

Jena, 1892.

Ete N. Y. Acap. Sct., VoL. XVII, No. 3, Part II, pp. 437-

508, Pll. XXIX-XXX.

THE ORDERS OF TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES.

A PRELIMINARY REVIEW OF THE BROADER FEATURES OF THEIR

EVOLUTION AND TAXONOMY.

By WILLIAM K. GREGORY.

In the course of their teaching work at Columbia Professors

Osborn and Dean have realized the need of students for a brief

general review of the evolution of the Vertebrata, in so far as this

may be inferred from the hard parts of existing and fossil forms.

The preparation of such a work was undertaken in 1902 by Pro-

fessor Osborn with the assistance of Dr. J. H. McGregor, and in

1904 the present writer was commissioned to work up the material

for the section on the Ganoids and Bony Fishes. The following

preliminary review of these forms is published with the hope of

eliciting the suggestions and criticisms of ichthyologists. It is

largely based upon the well-known writings of Smith Woodward,

Boulenger, Gill, Jordan and Evermann, and Jordan, to whom

most of the statements of fact should be credited, and it is also

intended in the main to reflect the views of those authorities.

But many other sources are drawn upon; the method of present-

ation is not the conventional one, and the classification adopted

(after considerable reflection) is believed to reconcile the marked

differences in method inthe American and English systems. The

writer is under obligations to Dr. O. P. Hay for certain valuable

suggestions and criticisms and to Professors Henry Fairfield

Osborn and Bashford Dean, his esteemed preceptors, for the

general methods of analysis.

The student seeking a general knowledge of the teeming hosts

and almost endless structural modifications of the teleostomous

fishes is at present confronted by two very distinct systems of

classification: the American system, as exemplified in the latest

classification adopted by President Jordan,! and the new

1A Guide to the Study of Fishes, 2 vols., 4to, New York. 1905.

; 437

438 WILLIAM K, GREGORY

English method of Dr. G. A. Boulenger.! The discovery of the

reasons for this divergence in method, of the common grounds

upon which both systems rest, and of a means of harmonizing

these differences in a new or compromise classification, may be

facilitated by a glance at the recent history of the taxonomy of

fishes, and by a brief reference to some of the principal functions

of ‘‘natural”’ classifications in general.

First, as to the history of systematic ichthyology.

In England Gtinther’s? classification was long held as orthodox.

It represented more especially the combined labors of Cuvier,

J. Muller, Agassiz, and Ginther himself, and was essentially pre-

evolutionary in method. The larger groupings were fairly

natural, but many of the smaller ones were really heterogeneous,

and held together by homoplastic characters. The chief criteria

of classification were external characters.

In America Cope and Gill approached the subject from the

standpoint of evolution. Cope in 1871 sketched out the broad

lines of a new classification based on a careful study of a large

osteological collection. This classification was founded to a large

extent upon internal, skeletal characters. As compared with

previous systems it was also founded on a larger number and range

of characters and was thus less subject to the deceptive effects

of characters resulting from convergent or parallel evolution.

Gill* had already recognized the naturalness of the assem-

blages called by him Nematognathi, Eventognathi. In 1872

Gill published his ‘‘ Arrangement of the Families of Fishes’’>

which was revised and extended in his memoir® of 1893.

1Teleostet (Systematic Part), The Cambridge Natural History, vol.

‘“‘ Fishes, Ascidians,’’ etc., 1904, pp. 539-727-

2An Introduction to the Study of Fishes, 8vo, Edinburgh, 1880,

Pp. Xi—Xvi.

’ ‘Observations on the Systematic Relations of the Fishes,’”’ Proc.

Amer. Assoc. Adv. Sct., 20th meeting, Indianapolis, 1871, pp. 317-343-

4 “Catalogue of the Fishes of the Eastern Coast of North America,”

Proc. Acad. Nat. Scz., Phila., 1861, pp. 1-63.

5 “Arrangement of the Families of Fishes, or Classes Pisces, Marsipo-

branchu, and Leptocardi,’”’ Smithsonian Misc. Coll., No. 247, 1872, pp.

i-xlvi, I-49.

6 ‘‘Families and Subfamilies of Fishes,’’ Wem. Nat. Acad. Scz., Vol. VI,

Pp. 125-138.

THE ORDERS OF TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES 439

In this classification which has been the basis of all subsequent

work of the American school, precision, classicism, and a strict

adherence to the canons of nomenclature reinforced a keen

analysis and a judicious weighing of taxonomic values. The

attempt was made to readjust these values so that they might

express more nearly the various degrees of affinity, and to intro-

duce more uniformity in the value assigned to the same taxo-

nomic grade in different groups of vertebrates. Many currently

recognized families were variously divided, the component parts

being elevated to the rank of separate families, while many

groups were labeled ‘‘of uncertain position.”” “The dictum

that “‘analysis must precede synthesis’’ was consistently followed,

and a great increase in the number of ordinal, subordinal, and

family divisions was deemed preferable to the premature group-

ings of the traditional classification. Attention was in this way

directed to the very numerous families and groups which were

really of uncertain affinities, but which had always been thrown

in with other divisions by the conservatism which resents the

introduction of new groups and new names. An important

synthetic step was the frequent use of the superfamily.

In England and on the Continent the Gtintherian system was

gradually found inadequate, and the importance of the skeleton

in classification became recognized as ichthyology and especially

paleichthyology developed. Dr. A. S. Woodward adopted the

broad features of Cope’s classification, which he improved in

many respects, but the older system still remained in general use.

The new and very notable classification of Dr. Boulenger, re-

ferred to above, is the first since that of Gunther to gain general

acceptance in England. Dr. Boulenger refers! to the classifica-

tion of Gunther as being to a ‘‘great extent based on physiological

principles,” whereas his new classification ‘‘aims at being

phylogenetic.” It is based upon his studies of the rapidly grow-

ing collection of fish skeletons in the British Museum; it reflects

also the labors of Cope, Gill, Sagemehl, A. S. Woodward, of

Jordan and his co-workers, and thus represents the most com-

prehensive analysis of osteological characters which has yet

appeared.

LOPp.cit., p: 542.

440 WILLIAM K. GREGORY

Boulenger’s classification is true to British tradition in the

fewness of its larger divisions; and many families, suborders, and

orders of the American system are not recognized as distinct

divisions. Thus the differences between the English and Ameri-

can systems are very salient. By the American method as

exemplified in Dr. Jordan’s latest work, 18 orders, about 33 sub-

orders, and considerably more than 200 families of true Teleosts

are recognized; by the English method all are swept into the

single ‘‘order’’ Teleostei which is codérdinate in value with the

orders Crossopterygii, Chondrostei, Holostei, and which is sub-

divided into thirteen suborders which for the most part have

the value of the orders of the American system. Boulenger’s

treatment of the ‘“‘suborder’’ Ostariophysi may serve as an in-

stance of this extensive synthesizing. Since this assemblage is

regarded as a natural one the divisions Heterognathi, Eventog-

nathi, Nematognathi are not used, and the Characins, Carps,

and Catfishes are all united as families in the suborder Ostario-

physi. In Boulenger’s definitions of these families the trench-

ant structural differences between them are revealed, but so far as

the classification itself indicates they might be no more separated

than, say the Tarpons (Elopide) from the Lady-fishes (Albu-

lide), or the Herrings (Clupeidz) from the Salmons (Salmonide).

These differences in method seem to arise from the dual

nature and function of a natural classification in the modern

sense. A natural classification must necessarily express, first,

degrees of homological resemblances and differences and, second,

degrees of genetic relationship; but it cannot at the same time

express both with equal accuracy, and its primary purpose is

to express degrees of homological resemblances and differences.

In comparing the end forms of diverging lines of descent we

find that between any two forms degrees of genetic relationship

are solely a function of time and of the rate of reproduction,

while degrees of homologous structural relationships are a

function of varying rates of evolution. To borrow an illustration

from mammalogy, we may suppose that a certain group of

pre-Tertiary mammals has given rise to the modern Insecti-

vores on the one hand and to the Bats on the other. Between

this ancestral group and each of the two modern groups a number

THE ORDERS OF TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES 441

of generations has elapsed which we may assume to be roughly

equal along both lines of descent. Therefore, in degree of blood

kinship to this ancestral group both Bats and Insectivores are

about equally far removed. But in homological structural re-

semblances the modern Insectivores are much nearer to this

sroup than are the Bats, and hence so far as classification is.

concerned, the ancestral group and the Insectivores would

probably be placed in a single order, while the Bats are set off in

another order. Here plainly, degrees of blood relationship do not

exactly correspond to degrees of homological structural resemblances

and differences, nor to the divisions of classification.

In order to make classification correspond even roughly to.

degrees of blood relationship, 7.e. to phylogeny, we must assign

varying systematic values to different characters in proportion

to their inferred relative phylogenetic age. For example, the

notochord and other chordate characters which appear in certain

larval Ascidians are regarded as of far greater phylogenetic age

than the typical characters of adult Ascidians, and hence these

transient characters are given a very high systematic value, so.

that through them the group is placed within the phylum

Chordata. On the other hand neomorphs or ‘“‘teleological”’

characters are given much lower systematic values. The unique

sucking-disc of the Remoras, for example, which is believed to

represent a modified spinous dorsal fin,! does not avail to remove

the family beyond the borders of the order Acanthopterygii.

In this way classification is roughly adjusted to phylogeny, but

the adjustment can never be complete or exact.

_ These considerations reveal the general defects of both the

American and English methods of classification. The American

system may fail to emphasize the underlying affinities of struc-

turally well-defined groups, as, for example, of the Nematognathi

or Catfishes with the Plectospondyli or Characins and Carps.

The English system emphasizes the larger phylogenetic affinities.

but may not give due value to the equally important structural

diversities.

Again the English system seems to follow the general principle

~1R. Storms, ‘‘The Adhesive Disk of Echeneis,” Ann. Mag. Nat. H1st.,

(6) II, 1888, pp. 67-76.

442 WILLIAM K. GREGORY

that when intermediate forms between related groups are dis-

covered, these connections of form and of kinship should be

expressed by the assembling of the extreme forms and the middle

forms in one group, usually without any higher subdivisions than

families. Thus the Zeus-like fishes are thought to be related

to the Flatfishes through the Eocene Amphistiide. Hence

Boulenger abandons the groups Zeoidea, Heterosomata, and by an

ingenious definition links the two in a new group called Zeorhombi.

Whether related groups are now continuous or discontinuous

is partly an accident of time and of the degree of completeness

of our collections of fossil and recent forms. Surely such terms

as Nematognathi for the Catfishes, Squamipinnes for the Cheto-

donts and their allies, and many other useful group-names stand

for perfectly clear types of structure, in forms clustered around

central types but grading into other groups at the peripheries.

The idea underlying the American method is that the best way

to map out the topography of this varied morphological expanse

is to assign a name to every conspicuous cluster of elevations,

even if some lesser outlying elevations may connect with neigh-

boring systems.

Thus the two classifications emphasize different sets of facts

about the same subject-matter, so that in a general way the Eng-

lish method emphasizes better both resemblances and phylogeneti-

gaps between different groups. Furthermore, as we have seen, the

results of the two methods are expressed in terms of a standard

ithe ‘‘order’’ which has a very different value in the two sys-

tems, in the English system covering the entire range of forms

from certain generalized Triassic physostomes (the Pholido-

phoridz) to the most advanced spiny-finned fishes and even to

such wonderfully metamorphosed beings as Mola and Malthe;

while in the American system the same term “‘order”’ implies

a much narrower range, as for example in the Haplomi.

The American and English methods are fortunately not en-

tirely irreconcilable or contradictory, not like the two horns of a

dilemma between which only a bad choice is possible. Con-

ceivably the differences may be adjusted, and all the antitheses

and syntheses which the two systems seek to convey may be

harmoniously expressed.

THE ORDERS OF TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES 443;

The first step is to note the necessity for a larger number of

grades of taxonomic divisions between the subfamily and the class

than is found in the English system, which deals only with the

order (Teleostei), the suborder, the division, the family, and

the subjamily. As degrees of homological resemblances and of

phylogenetic affinities are infinite in number even a highly differ-

-entiated system of classification must be more or less Procrustean

in nature, since in order to force all the different grades of assem-

blages into appropriate compartments some phylogenetic values

must be relatively compressed and others somewhat stretched.

But surely by using more grades of subdivision we may distort

the facts less than by using fewer grades; although common sense

must soon impose a limit to the increase in the number of

grades, since each grade requires a corresponding set of terms

throughout the system. One advantage ofa highly differentiated

system with many grades of divisions is that it permits us to

retain on different taxonomic levels many old useful and ex-

pressive names such as Malacopterygii, Isospondyli, which if

applied to divisions of the same taxonomic rank would compete

with each other as synonyms.

The process of the differentiation of taxonomic grades has been

going on for a long time in ichthyology and elsewhere, and it has

usually been accompanied by the elevation in rank of certain

taxonomic grades and the lowering in rank of others. Thus the

rank of the grade called “‘species’’ by Linnzeus has really been

lowered, since many of his species are now called “‘ genera’”’ and

his genera “‘ families’ while in Gill’s system many of Ginther’s.

“families ’’ were elevated to the rank of the division called by

Gill “‘superfamily.” From these inevitable shiftings many of

the differences between the American and English systems have

arisen.

The desirability of a highly differentiated system has suggested

the use of the terms class, subclass, infraclass, cohort, superorder,

order, suborder, division, superfamily, family, subfamily in the

accompanying classification, which is offered asa tentative com-

promise between the American and English systems.

The only ones of these terms requiring special comment are

the infraclass, superorder, cohort, and order. The infraclass is.

444 WILLIAM K. GREGORY

a division recently suggested by Professor Osborn to express

the relations of Marsupials to Placentals which together consti- ~

tute the subclass Eutheria Gill (not of Huxley) in contrast to the

subclass Monotremata. The differences between Marsupials

and Placentals do not seem to be more deep-seated than the

differences between the Crossopterygii on the one hand and the

Actinopteri Cope (all the remaining Ganoids and Teleosts),

onthe other. Hence I regard the Crossopterygii and Actinopteri

as infraclasses. Again the Dipnoi show many resemblances

to the Crossopterygii in their comparative anatomy, embryol-

ogy, and palzontology, and it seems advisable to express this

relationship by ranking the Dipnoi as an infraclass, coédrdinate

with the Crossopterygii and Actinopteri, the three groups being

embraced within the subclass Teleostomi, a procedure already

suggested in essentials by Gill.t After the exclusion of Polyp-

terus and its allies from the Ganoidei, this classic term with its

congeneric term Teleostei may be used in a perfectly clear sense

as by Jordan and Evermann, for the upper and lower divi-

sions of the Actinopteri. These divisions we may call cohorts,

the cohort having been used by Storr in 1780 in the classifica-

tion of the Mammals. The cohort Ganoidei may be taken to in-

clude the superorders Acipenseroidei Traquair, Lepidosteoidei (as

understood by Bridge in The Cambridge Nat. H1st., vol. ‘‘ Fishes,”’

etc.); the cohort Teleostei to include the superorders Mala-

copteroidei (embracing the orders Isospondyli, Ostariophysi),

Mesichthyes (Hay) (embracing the orders Haplomi, Synentog-

nathi, Salmoperce), Thoracostraci Swinnerton (embracing the

orders Hemibranchii, Lophobranchii), Acanthopteroidei (em-

bracing the orders Percesoces, Anacanthini, Labyrinthici (?),

Acanthopterygii, Selenichthyes, Tzniosomi, Plectognathi, Hypo-

stomides, Opisthomi, Pediculati). The superordinal relationships

of the eel-like orders Apodes, Symbranchi, Heteromi, whether

tothe Ganoid, Malacopteroidei, or Mesichthyes are not clear.

It will be seen that the classification given herewith adheres

tothe American standard in regarding as orders such great groups

as the Ostariophysi, the Acanthopterygii proper, the Haplomi,

1‘ Addresses in Memory of Edward Drinker Cope,” Proc. Amer. Philos.

Soc., Memorial Vol. I, 1900, pp. 15, 16.

altered; whenever the

THE ORDERS OF TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES 445

Isospondyli, etc., which seem in a general way to be of about the

same rank as the orders of the Mammalia. Such divisions

proposed by the American school as Squamipinnes, Berycoidei,

Percomorphi, etc., which often represent the breaking up of larger

assemblages, have been frequently adopted, while on the other

hand the synthetic results of the English system have been ex-

pressed in the present classification by the extensive grouping

of families into superfamilies, of orders into superorders, and so

forth. Fortified by considerable historic precedent, I have not

hesitated to raise or lower the rank of various groups while

retaining for them the old names. Gill’s principle of keeping

groups apart until they have been shown to belong together

has also been kept in mind. In regard to nomenclature old and

prior names have been retained wherever possible even where

the limits of the groups designated have become considerably

‘““core’”’ of an old group appeared to be

natural that name, after its content had been amended, has been

retained.

A CLASSIFICATION OF THE JAW-BEARING FISHES.

(Compare Plate X XIX.)

SupercLtass GNATHOSTOMATA

Crass PISCES

Subclass ELASMOBRANCHII Bonaparte

Superorder PLEUROPTERYGII Dean!

Order Cladoselachii Dean

Fam. Cladoselachide

Order Acanthodei Owen

Fam. Acanthoéssidze

‘“ Acanthodidz

‘« Diplacanthidz

Superorder IcHTHYoTomi Cope

Order Pleuracanthides Hay

Fam. Pleuracanthide

Superorder PLaciostomi Duméril

Order Diplospondyli Hasse (Opisarthri Guzll, Notidani Jordan,

1The reasons for believing the Pleuropterygii to be related to the

_- Acanthodeiare given by Dean in Journ. Morph., 1894, pp. tog-111._ The

iil

structural divergence between the two groups seems to warrant the

retention of the two orders as such.

446 WILLIAM K. GREGORY

Protoselachii) Parker & Haswell

Fam. Notidanide

** Chlamydoselachidze

Order Prosarthri Gil] (‘‘ Les Cestraciontes’’ Agassiz) :

Fam. Orodontide

““ Heterodontide (Cestraciontidez)

‘‘ Edestide

““ Cochliodontide Inc. Sedis1

y. Order Batidoselachii (nom. nov.) (‘‘ Tectospondyli’’ (Hasse)

Smith Woodward)

Suborder Cyclospondyli Hasse 2

Fam. Spinacide (Squalide)

Subfam. Squaline, Squalus, (Acanthias), Centrina, Cen-

trophorus, Spinax,Centroscyllium

Scymnine (Dalatiine), Scymnus, Somnosus

(Lemargus)

Echinorhinine

Suborder Tectospondyli (Hasse)

Div. 1. Pristes Gill

Fam. Pristiophoride

“ Pristidee

Div. 2. Rhinobati (nom. nov.)

Fam. Rhinobatide

** Tamiobatidez 3 Inc. Sedis

Div. 3. Rhine Gill (?)

Fam. Rhinide (Squatinide)

Div. 4. Rajze auct. (Pachyura Gill)

Fam. Rajide

Div. 5. Torpedines (nom. nov?)

Fam. Torpedinide (= Narcobatide)

Div. 6. Masticura (Gil)

Fam. Petalodontide Inc. Sedis

““ Psammodontide Inc. Sedis 4

Dasyatide (Trygonide)

‘“ Myliobatidee

Order Asterospondyli (Hasse) (Galei, Euselachii)

Superfamily Scylliorhinoidea (nom. nov. ?)

Fam. Scylliorhinide (Scylliide)

Superfamily Lamnoidea (nom. nov.?)

“ce

1Possibly allied to the Petalodontide and Rays (Eastman).

2See Jordan, 1905, Vol. I, pp. 545-547.

3 Devonian, possibly allied to Cestracionts (Jordan).

4 Possibly allied to Cestracionts but more raylike in dentition.

THE ORDERS OF TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES

. Carchariide (Odontaspide)

447

‘Mitsukurinide (Mitsukurina, Scapanorhynchus)

Alopeciidee

Lamnidze

Cetorhinidz

Rhinodontidze

Spbyrnidee

Galeidee

Superorder CHIMZROIDEI! auct.

Order Holocephali /. Miller

Fam,

ia}

Ptyctodontidz

Squalorajide

Myriacanthide -¢

Menaspidz

Rhinochimeridee

Callorhynchidz

Chimeridze

Sanclass ARTHROGNATHI Dean 2 Inc. Sedis.

Order Anarthrodira Dean

Suborder Stegothalami Dean

Fam.

Macropetalichthyide

Asterosteidze Inc. Sedis.

Order Arthrodira A. S. Woodward

Suborder Temnothoraci Dean

Fam.

Chelonichthyidze

Suborder Arthrothoraci Dean

ana:

Coccosteidee

Trachosteidee

Dinichthyide

Mylostomidze

Selenosteide

Subclass TELEOSTOMI (Bonaparte) Owen

Infraclass DipNeusti1 Haeckel

Order Ctenodipterini Pander

Fam.

Uronemidz

Ctenodontidze

Order Sirenoidei J. Miiller

Fam. Ceratodontide

Lepidosirenidze

Infraclass CROSSOPTERYGII Cope

-1$ee Garman in Bull. Mus. Comp. Zoél., Vol. XLI, pp. 243-272; and

Dean, ‘‘ Chimaeroid Fishes and their Development,’ Carnegie Inst.,

Washington, 1906.

2 The classificationis from Dean in Mem. N.Y. Acad. Sct. Vol. II, Part

III, r901, pp. 120-123.

448 WILLIAM K. GREGORY

Order Haplisitia Cope

Fam, Tarasiide

Order Osteolepida Boulenger

Suborder Rhipidistia Cope

Fam, Osteolepidz

** Rhizodontide (=Megalichthyide)

* _Holoptychide

Suborder Actinistia Cope

Fam. Ccelacanthide

Order Cladistia Cope

Fam, Polypteridz

Infraclass ACTINOPTERI Cope

Cohort Ganorpe! (J. Miller) Jordan and Evermann

Superorder AcCIPENSEROIDEI Traquair

Order Heterocerci Zzttel (Lysopteri) Cope

Fam. Paleoniscids

“ Platysomida

Catopteride (Dictyopygide)

Order Chondrostei J. Muller

Suborder Glaniostomi Cope

Fam Chondrosteide

‘* Acipenseridze

Suborder Selachostomi Cope

Fam. Polyodontide

Superorder LepipostrorpEe1 Bridge (Holostei J. Miller in part)

Order Protospondyli (A. S. Woodward)

Suborder Mesoganoidei nom. nov.

Fam. Stylodontide (Semionotide)

““ Lepidotidze

‘* Macrosemiidee

“ Dapediidee 1

“« Pholidophoride

Suborder Pycnodonti 2

Fam. Pycnodontide:

Suborder Aspidorhynchi nom. nov. (Aetheospondyli Woodw.

in part)

Fam. Aspidorhynchide

Suborder Ginglymodi Cope (Aetheospondyli Woodw. in part)

Fam. Lepidosteide

Suborder Halecomorphi Cope (Amioidei Litken)

1 Placed near the Pholidophoridz by Boulenger.

2Cf. Hay, Bibliography and Catalogue of the Fossil Vertebre of

North America, p. 372.

ih,

THE ORDERS OF TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES 449

Fam. Eugnathide (Caturide)

““ Pachycormide

“ Amiidee

“ Oligopleuride

‘Cohort TELEOSTEI

Superorder MaLacoPTEROIDEI nom. nov

Order Isospondyli Cope: (Malacopterygii (Cuvier) iBoulenger

in part)

Fam. Archeomenide

““ Leptolepidide

Elopidee

“< Albulide

Mormyridz

““ Hyodontide

Notopteridze

Osteoglosside

‘* ~ Pantodontide

** Ctenothrissidz

Phractolemidz

‘““ Saurodontide (Cope non Zittel)

““ Ichthyodectide Crook

“¢ Clupeidze2

Subfam. Thrissopatrinze

“ Engrauline

Clupeinz

Chaninze

Fam. Salmonide

Alepocephalide

Stomiatidee ”

Subfam. Chauliodontinz

‘* Gonostomatinz

Sternoptychinz

Stomiatine 2

Fam. Gonorhynchide

‘* — Cromeriidz

Order {Ostariophysi Sagemehl

Suborder Heterognathi Gilt

Fam. Characide ?

Subfam. Erythrininze

““ Hydrocyoninze

Serrasalmoninze

“ Ichthyoborine

(73

6é

1 Boulenger’s division into families is followed.

2 Boulenger’s classification.

450 WILLIAM K. GREGORY x

Subfam. Xiphostominze

e Anostominze a

‘¢ Hemiodontinze

“« Distichodontine

“ Citharininz

Suborder Glanencheli Cope (Gymnonoti Gill):

Fam. Gymnotide

Suborder Eventognathi Gz/l

Fam. Cyprinide

Subfam. Catostominz

““ Cyprininze

‘* Cobiditinze

‘‘ Homalopterinz

Suborder Nematognathi Gzll

Fam. Siluridee

Subfam. Clariine

st) wiltirin

Bagrinze

“* Doradinz

Malopterurinz

“ Callichthyinz

““ Hyophthalmine

Trichomycterinz

Fam. Loricariide

Subfam. Argine

“« Loricariinz

Fam. Aspredinidz

Superorder UNCERTAIN

Order Apodes (Linn.) Kaup

Suborder Archencheli Jordan

Fam. Anguillavide

Suborder Enchelycephali Cope

Fam. Anguillidee

** Nemichthyidz

“« Synaphobranchidee

Suborder Colocephali Cope

Fam. Murenide

Suborder Carencheli Gzil 2

Fam. Derichthyide

Suborder Lyomeri Gill and Ryder 2

Fam. Saccopharyngide

1 Boulenger’s classification.

2Incertz Sedis may deserve a higher rank coérdinate with Apodes.

7" ~~ ess, =

question.

a eS ee ee a ee eee a i ee Se ee

THE ORDERS OF TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES

‘Order Symbranchii Gill

Suborder Ichthyocephali Cope

Fam. Monopteridz

Suborder Holostomi Cope

Fam. Symbranchide

‘Order Heteromi (Gill) Boulenger 1

Fam. Dercetide (Inc. Sedis)

““ ~~ Halosauride

Lipogenyide

““ Notacanthide

*“ Fierasferidze

Superorder Mesicutuves (Hay) mihi

Order Haplomi Gzi/

Superfamily Aulopoidea (Gill) (Iniomi Gill)

Fam. Scopelide

‘“ Alepidosauride

Cetomimidze

‘“* Chirothricide Inc. Sedis

‘« — Enchodontide

““ Kneriide Inc. Sedis

“* Cobitopside Inc. Sedis

Superfamily Esocoidea Starks

Fam. Umbride

‘“* — Esocidee

Superfamily Dalloidea mihi (Xenomi Gill)

Fam. Dalliide

Superfamily Pceciloidea Starks

Fam. Poeciliide (Cyprinodontide)

Superfamily Amblyopsoidea Starks

Fam. Amblyopsideze

Superfamily Stephanoberycoidea nom. nov.

Fam. Stephanoberycide 2

Superfamily Galaxoidea nom. nov. UES Sedis)

Fam. Galaxiide:

““ Haplochitonide?

"Order Salmoperce Jordan and Evermann (Incerte Sedis)

Fam. Percopside

Order Synentognathi Gill

Fam. Belonide

“ Exoccetide

_Protaulopside (Inc. Sedis)

2 Placed by Boulenger in this order.

451

1 According to Jordan the naturalness of this assemblage is open to

452 WILLIAM K. GREGORY

Superorder THORACOSTRACI Swinnerton (Phen or e Hay)

Order Hemibranchii Cope1 :

Fam. Gasterosteidz

“« Aulorhynchidze

“« Aulostomidze

“ Fistulariidze

‘« Macrorhamphosidze

=. Centriscide

“« Amphisilidz

Order Lophobranchii2 Cuvier

Fam. Solenostomidz

“ Syngnathidee

Superorder ACANTHOPTEROIDEI nom. nov.

Order Percesoces (Cope) Guill

Superfamily Sphyreznoidea Slarks

Fam. Sphyrenideze

Superfam. Atherinoidea Starks

Fam. Atherinidz

‘« Chiasmodontidz

Superfam. Mugiloidea Starks

Fam. Mugilidz

Superfam. Polynemoidea mom. nov.

Fam. Polynemide

Order Anacanthini /. Miiller (?)

Fam. Macruride

“ Gadidee

Order Labryinthici Jordan (?) Inc. Sedis

Fam. Osphromenidz

“ Anabantidee

“* Ophiocephalidz

Order Acanthopterygii (Cuvier)

Suborder Berycoidei Jordan (?)

Fam. Berycide

“~~ Holocentridz

““ ~ Monocentride

“ Polymixide

Suborder Zeoidei Jordan (?)

Fam. Zeide

““ Amphistiide

1 Families as given by Boulenger.

2For the position of the Pegaside which are usually placed with this

order see p. 505.

: Placed by Boulenger in this assemblage.

THE ORDERS OF TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES 453

Suborder Heterosomata Bonaparte

Fam. Pleuronectide

Suborder Percomorphi Cope

Division Perciformes (Ganither) Boulenger

Superfamily Percoidea1

Fam. Aphredoderidz

‘* Elassomide

Centrarchide

Percidze

Apogonidz

Oxylabracidze

Acropomatide

Serranidee

Subfam. Serraninz

‘“ Grammistinz

Priacanthinz

Centropominze

Ambassinze

““ Pomatominz

““ Chilodipterinze

Lutjanine

Cirrkitine

Pentacerotinz

Fam. Sillaginide

““ Trichodontide

Scizenidee

Gerridze

“ Pristipomatide (Hemulide)

Sparideze

“ Mullidee

““ Pseudochromide (Latilide)

“ Cepolidze

Superfamily Embiotocoidea nom nov. (Holconoti Cope)

Fam. Embiotocide

Superfamily Toxotoidea Gill

Fam. Toxotide

Superfamily Pomacentroidea Gill (Chromides)

Fam. Cichlide

“* Pomacentridz .

Superfamily Labroidea Gill (Pharyngognathi Cope?)

Fam. Labride

“ ‘Seardiz

‘ Only the principal families as given by Boulenger are listed.

454 WILLIAM K. GREGORY

Division Squamipinnes (J. Miller)

Fam. Scorpidide

‘“ Caproide (Antigoniidz)

““ Cheetodontidze

“ Zanclidze

‘* Acanthuridee

““ Teuthidide

‘ Pygeide

‘« Siganidz

Division Nomeiformes nom. nov.

Superfam. Tetragonuroidea (Gz/l)

Fam. Tetragonuride

‘« Stromateide

*« Icosteidee

Division Scombriformes: Boulenger

Fam. Carangidz

‘‘ — Rhachicentridze

““ Scombridee

“ Trichiuride

“* — Histiophoridz

“ Xiphiide

“« Luvaride

““ Corypheenidee

‘« Bramidee

Suborder Kurtiformes Boulenger

Fam. Kurtide

Suborder Gobioidei Jordan and Evermann

Fam. Gobiide

Suborder Discocephali Jordan and Evermann?

Fam. Echeneidide

Suborder Pareioplitez Richardson (Scleroparei Goulenger)

Superfam. Scorpxnoidea Gill

Fam. Scorpznide

‘« Hexagrammide

‘* ~~ Comephoridz

Superfamily Rhamphocottoidea Guzll

Fam. Rhamphocottide

Superfam. Cottoidea (Gzl/)

Fam. Cottide

‘ Cyclopteridz

ch Liparidze

Superfam. Platycephaloidea Gill

1A grouping of the various Scombriform families into superfamilies

has not yet been successfully attempted.

THE ORDERS OF TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES 455

Fam. Platycephalide

“ Hoplichthyide

Superfam. Agonoidea Gzll

Fam. Agonidz

Superfam. Trigloidea Gzll

Fam. Triglidze

““ Dactylopteride

Suborder Jugulares (Linn.) Boulenger:

Superfam. Percophoidea Gzll

Fam. Trachinidee

Se hercopianda

““ Leptoscopidze

““ Notothentidz

‘“‘ — Uranoscopidee

Superfam. Callionymoideat nom. nov.

Fam. Trichonotide

“* Callionymidee

‘* — Gobiesocidee

Superfam. Blennoidea 1

Fam. Bleniide

“ Ptilichthyide

““ Batrachide

“ Pholididz

Zoarcidee

““ ~ Congrogadidee

“* Ophidiidee

“* Podatelidze

Order Selenichthyes Boulenger (Incertz Sedis)

Fam. Lamprididz

Order Tzniosomi. Jordan and Evermann (Incerte Sedis)

Fam. Trachypteride

Order Plectognathi /. Muiller 2

Suborder Sclerodermi (Cuvier) 1

Fam. Triacanthide

“ Triodontidz

fee Salisoiclae

“ Monacanthidee

““ Ostraciidee

Suborder Gymnodontes (Cuvier) 1

Fam. Tetrodontide

““— Diodontide

“ Molidze

1 Families as defined by Boulenger.

2 A division of this order into superfamilies is desirable.

456 WILLIAM K. GREGORY

Order Hypostomides Gz/l1

Fam. Pegasidz

Order Opisthomi Gzl/

Fam. Mastacambelidz

Order Pediculati Gz//2

Fam. Lophiide

“ Ceratiidz

““ Antenariide

Gigantactinidze

“ Maithidee

Infraclass CROSSOPTERYGII? Cope.

“These forms appear in the Upper Devonian, flower out in

the late Palzozoic, and one group, the Cclacanths, persists

almost unchanged throughout the whole series of formations

from the Lower Carboniferous to the Upper Chalk’’ (Woodward).

The superorder is sharply distinguished from the Actinopteri

by the following assemblage of characters, (1) The paired fins

are lobate,* i.e., with a cartilaginous axis, scaly externally and

fringed on both sides by dermal rays. (2) The dorsal and anal

fins are remarkably analogous to the paired fins in form and

probably in function, and in the relations of the dermal rays to

the endoskeletal supports; the median fins usually lack the

numerous supporting fin fulcra so characteristic of the primitive

Actinopteri. (The Osteolepide however exhibit modified enamelled

anterior ridge scales which resemble the fulcra of higher forms.)

(3) The axonosts of the dorsal and anal fins exhibit various

degrees of coalescence, so that finally the paddle-like median

fins probably enjoyed a high complexity and independence of

movement. (4) There are two dorsal fins in the primitive forms.

(5) The tail fin, in the earliest forms heterodiphycercal, often

coalesces with the posterior dorsal and anal fins into the gephy-

rocercal form.’ (6) A spiracle is present. (7) The distal end

1 Incertz Sedis, see page 505; may be only a division of the Acanthop-

terygii Pareioplite.

2 Families as defined by Boulenger.

3 (up06601, tassels, a fringe, rrepvyzor,a little wing, fin, in allusion to

the tassel-like pectoral fins, or to the fringe-like dorsals of Polypterus.)

4 Except possibly the ventral fin of Eusthenopteron and its allies.

5 See Appendix II.

THE ORDERS OF TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES it

of the hyomandibular has not yet segmented off to form a

symplectic, although the jaw suspension is methyostylic.! (8)

The mandible has usually several dentigerous splenials on its

inner side. (9) The large gular plates are bordered by small

anterior and numerous lateral gulars. (10) The scales are bony

with a heavy coating of ganoine, and apparently represent

clusters of shagreen-like denticles. (11) The ribs are both

hypaxonic (hemapophyses) and epaxonic (parapophyses).

There is much evidence that the Crossopterygii are nearly

related to the Dipnoi and Amphibia (pp. 444). And in the >

other direction Dean calls them “osseous sharks,’’ because: (1)

The scales seem to indicate derivation from clusters of shagreen

cusps. (2) Polypterus retains a spiracle, an optic chiasma, and

shark-like viscera including a spiral valve and a conus arteriosus.

(3) The lobate paired fins may be interpreted as having been

derived from the non-lobate form seen in Sharks and in the

pelvic fin of Eusthenopteron.

The Crossopterygii parallel the Actinopteri in (1) the replace-

ment of cartilage by bone, both in the endo- and exoskeletons,

(2) the aggregation and fusion of shagreen tubercles into scales

and plates, (3) the development (in the Coelacanths) of the swim-

bladder as a hydrostatic organ and its ossification, as in certain

catfishes, (4) the adaptive radiation of the body form from the

primitive fusiform type into short-bodied and long-bodied types

(even an eel-like form, Calamotchthys, being at last evolved),

(5) the modification of the heterocercal tail into the diphycercal

and gephyrocercal types, (6) the reduction in number of the der-

mal rays for closer correlation with the endoskeletal supports

and the development of mobile fins supported by strong dermal

rays, (7) the reduction and proximal withdrawal (especially in

Coelacanths) of the cartilaginous elements of the paired fins

part passu with the increase in size of the dermal fin rays. Nos.

4-7 enable the movements of the internal skeleton to be trans-

1]. e. with the metapterygoid and opercular bones assisting the hyo

mandibular in the support or bracing of the quadrate or mandible. See

Gregory, ‘‘The Relations of the Anterior Visceral Arches to the Chon-

drocranium,’’ Biological Bulletin, Vol. VII, No. 1, June, 1904, pp. 55-69.

458 WILLIAM K. GREGORY

mitted without loss of power to the dermal fins. In general

among vertebrates, as specialization for easy swimming progresses,

the sources of movement become more deeply seated, and the extent

and mobility of the freely flapping membrane increase. ‘This law is

illustrated among fishes, marine reptiles, and aquatic mammals.

Boulenger, followed by Bridge,! includes the Rhipidistia and

Actinistia under the “‘suborder’’ Osteolepida (here taken as an

order), with the following definition: ;

‘““The obtusely or acutely lobate pectoral fins articulate with the pectoral

girdle by a single basal endoskeletal element. WNostrils on the ventral

surface of the snout. Two dorsal fins and an anal fin. Dermal bones of

the ethmoid region often fused with one another and with the premaxille

in front and the frontals behind to form a continuous rostral shield.

Infra-dentary bones may be present. A series of lateral jugular plates

often present in addition to the pair of principal plates.”

In contrast with this the surviving order Cladistia (including

only the Polypteride) is thus defined:

“Pectoral fins uniserial and abbreviate, with three basal endoskeletal

elements. Nostrils on the upper surface of the snout. Entire skeleton

well ossified. Notochord replaced by bony amphiccelous vertebral centra.

Bones of the ethmoid region not fused to form a rostral shield. Infra-

deutary bones absent. Juglar plates reduced to a single pair of large

plates.”’

The following analysis of the ordinal characters of the Cros-

sopterygii was drawn up by Prof. H. F. Osborn and Dr. J. H.

McGregor after Cope and Smith Woodward.

1 Cambridge Nat. Hist. Vol. Fishes, etc., pp. 477, 481.

459

THE ORDERS OF TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES

"yU200 XT

“styzyvompjpy

*sndajgajod

*AqrAeo djnd s[dutg

*TeOLUOD

“Orquioy

“‘quosoid

(sosAydodrurey)

Sqit o1uoxedAY

pue (sesAydode

-Ingjd) stuoxeda

YAOg “x21q9,19A

snojaoo1ydure

peyisso Aq

pooeidat Ajesi1eT

*poonp

-o1 ApjeoIs aqo7Ty

*sTeSeq

salut, “oyeqoy

Ajasnyqo “4104S

"shel [eur

-Iop surpuodsor

-109 94} Isquinu ut

[enbe sjerpeiose g

*jeore001A4 des

TAL ‘soyUy oqur .

dn uexoiq [esiod

Agyxn

Speer dion

(adoQ) nessun]

oy ciika ee)

“Q 0 (@) wossq “nN

DUOGosID I

DULpus)

snYyUDIDIDD

PIOPAD

x21q,

-9}.10A PoyissoO ON

pe}ort4suo0du ()

ayeqo}

Ajesnyzqo “4104S

ayeqot

Ajesnyqo “4.1045

‘sheUl uy

[eWtop pue seys1e

[erqez1eA snonsty

-u09 Y4IM Jequinu

Ul sade s|eIpetr

Jepneg ‘[eors9Ayd

-Ip-o1sydes Ie,

“wins A1904.diseq,

poytOF YJIM jeue

pure [esiop IOT1e Sod

(4m)

ply} weovpaog

(edo) nysiuijsp

uBlUIed “OT

‘uOgieD “UOADG

shyzyqupose WY

sndajgo0jdrq

SNISANY T,

$1421031SC

Moy ‘ased

qe ADYBYS Peplod

o1quroy y

peyis

-SO @Iqo}JOA SUTY

ayeqoT

Ajyesnzqo “4104S

9yeq OT

Ajesnjzqo ‘4104S

‘mOgIeD “UOANG

UOsaIGOUsYISHA,

sesdopoz1yyy

SnposdadS

SHPOZLYST

MoT

aseq 7@ pepjoy

PIOPAD

peyis

-SO &1Go}.19A-SUIyy

ayeqoy

Ajasnzqo ‘4104S

ay eqoy

Ajasnzqo ‘4104S

UeIUOADG

snryotjqgojo ry

snosewin

Poploy Apeor4)

PIopsg

wid,

-9}19A PaYIssoO ON

peyorysuo0ou ()

ye10j0ed

uelyy osnjqo oto}

‘shel [eULop

YIM sepis 40g

uo poesursy ‘(su0])

eyeqoy ‘Ajaynoy

‘sheer [eulIop posoddo oy} uUeY} SnoJouINU Sse] S[EIPER

‘001d a[SUIS @ SUIUIIOT “PadseyPOO ole UY YoOee JO STeSeq

ay} [eIJUSA oY} pPue [esIOp 1OI10}sod oy} UT

*jepneo

® pue ‘[er}UeA uO ‘sTesIOop OM} Aq poJueseides uy weIpeyy

(PreEMpoomM *S “V)

seprdejoojsC,

(arenbexy)

epryuopozry |

(dog) nusypedyy

(avenbexy)

wpryoAydojory

IIDAYALIOSSOUD AAGCAOAAd NS

Sniojimoqieg “MOT

SNUSDAAD T,

proquoyy

quojsisiag

uMOUxU A)

ayeqoy Ajssn}qO

“snorjouinu o10Ur

yonu sker [eur

-I9q, “UOj}eTS3{S

erxe JO seyore

pesoddo ueyy

snoieumnu 910ur

‘sjpipDs pure SjDsS

-DQ JO SaTies IPT

-nsel ‘Uy UeIpeut

snonut}uo0os suC_

piusessey,

(edog) used x7

14429,

S31DIS

1D4qaj4a f\

pup psoyzojoNn)

ssuyf 202J9q

Jsuty, 1040499q

‘suit, UDIpa Ty

*ATINVA

>awad ao

460 WILLIAM K. GREGORY

Infraclass ACTINOPTERI! Cope.

This infraclass includes all the remaining ‘Ganoidei’ and

“Teleostei,’ the vast majority of living fishes. In fossil forms

these ray-finned types are readily distinguished from the lobe-

finned Crossopterygii or the Dipnoi.

Principal Characters. (Compare Crossopterygii, p. 456). (1) The

paired fins are non-lobate, i.e., the endoskeletal parts (basals or

“‘axonosts’’ and radials or ‘‘baseosts”’) are greatly reduced, so

that the blade or free portion of the fin is formed entirely of

dermal rays. (2) The median fins are unlike the paired fins;

they exhibit dermal rays which articulate proximally with

baseosts and these in turn with axonosts, which primarily cor-

respond in number with the neural and hemal spines; the median

fins are primitively bordered anteriorly by large fin fulcra (lost

in later and progressive forms). These fulcra or ridge-scales are

‘‘ medium, spine-like or \-shaped scales”’ (Bridge). (3) In the

most primitive forms there is only one dorsal fin, which may

give rise in the higher forms to two or more, (4)

caudal fin is primitively heterocercal, but in later forms is

modified into the homocercal, diphycercal, and gephyrocercal

types. (See Appendix II.) (5) The spiracles are reduced or

obliterated. (6) The distal end of the hyomandibular gives

origin to the symplectic (sometimes absent). (7) The jaw

suspension is methyostylic? and the mandible progressively

simplifies by the reduction of splenials and surangulars. (8)

The gular plates are progressively reduced; concomitantly the

branchiostegals become more and more important. (9g) The

scaly exoskeleton (sometimes reduced) consists either of (@)

rhombic bony scales covered with ganoine and articulating one

with the other, or (6) of cycloid or ctenoid scales with little

or no ganoine, the bony tissue lacking the Haversian canals,

or (¢c) of bony scutes and plates. (10) The ribs are hypaxonic

(hemapophyses) only. (11) Except in sturgeons, etc., the chon-

droskeleton largely ossifies, and the notochord is more or less

superseded by enveloping vertebra.

1(auris, ray, TTEPOY, wing, fin.)

2See footnote’ page 457.

THE ORDERS OF TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES 461

The infraclass Actinopteri exhibits an amazing variety of

forms grading from the shark-like cartilaginous Sturgeons and

Paddle-fishes to the most specialized bony fishes. Two more or

less continuous major groups or series are recognized, a more

generalized ancient series the Ganoidei (term used in the sense

explained on p. 444), and a more specialized modern series the

Teleostei. Because morphologically annectant forms are nu-

merous, it is difficult to draw a hard and fast taxonomic line

between the two groups.

Morphological Transition from Lower to Higher Types.! In

the more generalized fossil Ganoids (Acipenseroidei): (1) the

notochord is persistent (though strengthened by neural and

hemal arches), (2) intermuscular or epipleural bones are absent,

(3) infraclavicular plates are retained, (4) the scales are rhombic,

bony, with a heavy ganoine lacquer, often with a peg-and-

socket .articulation, (5) the dermal fin rays are much more

numerous than their endoskeletal supports, (6) large fulcra

strengthen the median fins anteriorly, (7) the tail is strongly

heterocercal (save in Belonorhynchide), (8) baseosts (radials)

persist in both pectoral and pelvic fins. But the higher or Hol-

ostean Ganoids (e. g. Caturus, Leptolepis, see page 464) approxi-

mate more and more to the Teleosts. Usually (1) the notochord

is surrounded or replaced by ring-like ossifications (pleuro- and

hypocentra) which finally (e. g. in Oligopleuride) become

perfect vertebrz; (2) the scales, losing the peg-and-socket articu-

lation, most of the ganoine, and the Haversian canals in the bone,

become rounded to cycloidal, and deeply overlap; (3) the infra-

clavicles are reduced or wanting, functionally replaced by the

cleithra, or ‘“‘clavicles’; (4) intermuscular (epipleural and

epineural) bones appear, giving the muscles better control of the

backbone, while the development of a bony supraoccipital gives

the body muscles a better hold upon the head; (5) the fins gradu-

ally lose the fulcra and the dermal rays and become closely cor-

related by reduction with their endoskeletal supports; (6) in the

tail fin an upturning and abbreviation of the caudal axis causes

an approach toward true homocercy (Appendix II); (7) baseosts

disappear from the pelvic and are reduced in the pectoral fins;

1 See Plate XXX.

ee.

462 WILLIAM K. GREGORY

(8) gular plates slowly give way to branchiostegals as the head

becomes narrower; (9) the splenials disappear from the mandible;

(10) the hinder expansion of the maxillary gives rise to a separate

supramaxillary; (11) the preoperculum withdraws from the

cheek and comes into closer relationship with the pterygopalatine

series, assisting in the support of the quadrate (note 1, p. 457);

(12) the chondrocranium is now much reduced, and replaced by

cartilage bones.

Cohort GanorbeE! (J. Miller, Jordan, and Evermann)

Superorder ACIPENSEROIDEI Traquair.

(Palte X XIX)

Notochord persistent, with neural and hemal arches. Teeth

small or wanting. Infraclavicles present. Paired fins actinop-

terous with a row of baseosts. A single dorsal and anal fin,

with dermal rays more numerous than their supports; caudal

fin (at least) with fulcra. Caudal fin heterocercal, the upper

lobe usually scaly. Chondrocranium apparently but little ossi-

fied, the cranial bones mainly dermal.

Order Heterocerci Zittel

Notochord persistent, but arches, spinous processes, and fin

supports more or less ossified; opercular apparatus well developed;

branchiostegal rays numerous. Unpaired, and usually also

paired fins fringed with fulcra. Scales rhombic or rhomboidal,

rarely cycloidal.

Paleoniscidz Devonian to Upper Jurassic

Platysomide Carboniferous and Permian

Dictyopygide (Catopteride) Incerte Sedis Trias

Order Chondrostei /. Miiller 1846.

Endoskeleton chiefly cartilaginous. Opercular apparatus im-

perfectly developed, the branchiostegal rays usually absent.

Trunk almost or completely naked or with rows of bony plates.

Chondrosteide Lias (Lower Jura)

Acipenseridze Tertiary and Recent

Polyodontidz Cretaceous (?) Eocene to Recent

Belonorhynchide Incertz Sedis Trias and Lias (Lower Jura)

THE ORDERS OF TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES 463

The earliest known Actinopteran, Chetrolepis, of the Lower Old

Red Sandstone and Upper Devonian, forerunner of the Palzoni-

scide, can be readily distinguished from the contemporary and

numerous Crossopterygians by its non-lobate paired fins, the

archaic form of its heterocercal tail, its lack of paired central

gular plates, and the corresponding development of lateral

branchiostegal rays, and by its minute rhomboidal, obliquely

arranged scales (almost suggesting those of Acanthodian Elasmo-

branchs). This generalized type may be traced on the one hand

into the deep-bodied Platysomide of the Carboniferous and

Permian, and, on the other hand, through the Chondrosteide,

into the long-bodied and more or less scaleless and degenerate

Sturgeons (Chondrostei). Possibly on account of the restriction

imposed by the simple rhombic type of squamation upon lateral

flexures of the body in swimming, we observe: (1) the occurrence

of deeply overlapping and even cycloid scales (Coccolepis of the

Palzoniscide), and (2) the partial or complete suppression of the

scales in Phanerosteon of the Palzoniscide, Dorypierus of the

Platysomide, and in the entire suborder Chondrostei. It is

noteworthy that the early Heterocerci, commonly grouped

together in the family Palzoniscide, include forms (e. g¢. Chetro-

lepis, Holurus, Coccolepis) which are so different in several

important respects that they might almost be regarded as the

types of distinct families.

The Catopteride present a morphological advance in the

direction of the Holostei, since they combine a Palzoniscid type

of head with an externally homocercal tail.

Dorypterus of the Upper Permian of Germany, regarded by

Smith Woodward as a specialized offshoot from the Platysomide,

is deep-bodied and Stromateus-like, and suggests Lampris in its

general body form and its many-rayed ventrals (Jordan, ’o5).

The Belonorhynchide may be either very aberrant Chon-

drostei or ‘‘abnormally modified Crossopterygians.”! There

is no trace of heterocercy in the tail (cf. the tail of Eusthe-

1 Reis, O. M., ‘‘ Zur Osteologie und Systematik der Belonorhynchiden

_- und Tetragonolepiden,”’ Geogr. Jahresh., 1891 (1892), p. 157

A. S. Woodward, Cat. Foss. Fishes, Brit. Mus., Part III, 1895, pp. vii,

Pl.’23.

464 WILLIAM K. GREGORY

nopteron among Crossopterygians); the large conical teeth are

separated by intervening minute teeth (cf. Rhizodontide among

Crossopterygii but also Cheirolepis among Heterocerci); the

opercular series is incomplete; the paired fins apparently exhibit

a very feeble lobation (A. S. Woodward); fin fulcra are minute or

absent; the sclerotic ring was probably ossified (cf. Undina

among Crossopterygians).

Superorder LEPIDOSTEOIDEI Bridge.

(HoLosTEI J. Miller in part.)

(Plate X XIX.)

The superorder includes those Actinopterous Ganoids which are

_ Lepidosteoid in the larger sense; it may have been derived from

some stich forms as the Catopteride (page 463) among the

Acipenseroidei, and indeed its oldest and most generalized

representative, Acentrophorus of the Upper Permian, was long

mistakenly referred to the Paleoniscide. But the group has

progressed beyond the Chondrostei in the following assemblage

of characters:

Notochord and vertebre varying inversely in development,

the vertebre ranging from incomplete pleuro- and hypocentral

rings to complete centra. Teeth well developed. Chondrocra-

nium more or less completely replaced by cartilage bones

corresponding to those generally present in Teleosts, ‘‘while

the palato-pterygoid cartilages, likewise modified by the growth

of cartilage bones, separately articulate with the lateral ethmoid

regions instead of meeting in a ventral symphysis beneath the

basis cranii”’ (Bridge). A supramaxillary (derived from the

hinder portion of the maxillary). The preoperculum no longer

extending over the cheek but coming into intimate relation with

the pterygoquadrate series and assisting in the support of the

mandible (see p. 462). Opercular apparatus usually complete,

with branchiostegal rays and often a gular plate; a bony supraoc-

cipital in the higher types; baseosts in paired fins reduced, in pelvic

fins lacking. The dermal rays in all fins extensively developed,

equal in number to the endoskeletal supports. Infraclavicles

replaced by cleithra (clavicles) meeting in a ventral symphysis.

Fulcra on median and paired fins present, or reduced in later

THE ORDERS OF TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES A465

forms; tai] hemiheterocercal (to homocercal). Scales rhombic

or rhomboidal, generally arranged in oblique series, frequently

united above and below by peg-and-socket articulations, and

grading into very thin rounded or cycloidal scales, which greatly

overlap. The mandible retains splenial and coronoid elements.

The principal divisions of the superorder Pep closrecicle: may

be broadly sketched as follows:

Suborder 1. Mesoganoidei nom. nov.

r. Trunk more or less fusiform. Mouth small, teeth either

styliform (Stylinodontide, Macrosemiidz), conical (Pholido-

phoride), or tritoral (Lepidotide).

Stylinodontide, examples: Acentrophorus, Trias, Up. Perm.; Semi-

onotus (Ischypterus) Upper Permian to Upper Jurassic.

Lepidotide, examples: Colobodus, Lepidotus, Trias to Cretaceous.

2. Trunk more elongate, mouth larger, marginal teeth styli-

form.

Macrosemiide, examples: Macrosemius, Ophiopsis, Notagogus, Trias

to Cretaceous.

3. Retaining rhombic ganoid scales, but approximating

in other characters toward the more generalized Isospondyles.

Pholidophoridz, examples: Pholidophorus, Phioldopleurus, Trias-Jura.

Dapediide, examples: Dapedius (placed near the Pholidophoride by

Boulenger).

Suborder 2. Pycnodonti Hay ex Agassiz

Trunk deeply fusiform or cycloidal. Teeth, prehensile on

premaxillary and dentary, tritoral on vomer and splenial, form-

ing a highly specialized crushing apparatus. Systematic posi-

tion uncertain but apparently an offshoot of the Lepidotus-like

genera (Woodward, ’98, p. 101).

Pycnodontide, examples: Pycnodus, Gyrodus, Microdon, Anomedus,

Lower Jurassic to Lower Eocene.

Suborder 3. Aspidorhynchi nom. nov.

(Aetheospondyli Woodward in part.)

Swordfish-like Lepidosteoids, ordinally united by Woodward

- with the Lepidosteide, but differing from them in the possession

of a predentary or premandibular bone and in the more normal

character of the vertebre.

466. WILLIAM K. GREGORY

Suborder 4. Ginglymodi Cope.

With opisthoccelus vertebre.

Lepidosteide, Lepidosteus, Up. Cretaceous to Recent.

Suborder 5. Halecomorphi Cope.

(Amioidei Liitken.)

Trunk elongate; mouth large; predaceous, with piercing teeth.

Exhibiting a progressive advance in the direction of the Iso-

spondyli.

1. Eugnathide. Vertebre absent or incomplete. Examples: Eug-

nathus, Caturus, Trias to Cretaceous.

2. Pachycormide. Swordfish-like Amioids. Vertebral axis without

segmental vertebre. Upper Lias (Lower Jurassic) to Upper

Cretaceous.

3. Amide. WVertebree complete. Pleuro- and hypocentra in caudal

region. Upper Jurassic to Recent.

4. Oligopleuride. WVertebre well ossified, with no distinct pleuro- and

hypocentra. Scales very thin and cycloid. Upper Jurassic to

Upper Cretaceous. This family may deserve a higher taxonomic

rank (Dean).

Cohort TELEosTE!! Owen.

The difficulty of separating the lower Teleosts from the higher

Ganoids has been commented upon above (page 461).

Although no phylogenetic series of genera has been definitely

traced, connecting the Lepidosteoidei (Holostei) and the Mala-

copteroidei, it is easy to arrange a morphological series? leading

back into some such Triassic Ganoids as the Pholidophoride.

These show rhombic ganoid scales, small fin-fulcra, ring-like

centra, and no intermuscular bones (i. e. ganoidean characters),

combined with a carp-like form, homocercal tail, and no gular

plates.. The Leptolepidide furnish the desired transition to the

Isospondyli; since they reduce the ganoine and fin fulcra, develop

a few intermuscular bones, and perfect the centra, changing the

rhombic into cycloid scales. In the early Cretaceous Clupeoids

the skeleton is so closely similar to that of the typical Jurassic

Leptolepidide that Smith Woodward? believes that the Clupeoids

“‘may well be direct descendants” of the Leptolepidide.

1 réleos, perfect, o6réor, bone.

2See Plate XXX,

2 Cat. Foss. Fishes, Brit. Mus., Part IV, 1901, p. vii.

;

THE ORDERS OF TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES 467

Superorder MALACOPTEROIDEI nom nov.!

Puysostomr? (J. Miller in part.)

(IsoSPONDYLI -+- OSTARIOPHYST.)

(Plate: SOS.)

The connection between the Ostariophysi or Characin-Carp-

Catfish series and the Isospondyli or typical soft-rayed fishes

(ec. g. Clupeide, Salmonide, Osteoglossidz) is indicated by the

following characters in common:

(1) The air bladder if well developed communicates with the

digestive tract by a duct. (2) The mesocoracoid arch is present.

(eine orbitosphenoid. is present. (4) The pelvic fins

if present are abdominal. (5) The fin rays (except the single

pectoral and dorsal spines of Catfishes) are soft or articulated.

(6) The presence of an adipose dorsal fin in many Heterognathi

(Characins) and Nematognathi (Siluroids) as in the Salmon-like

fishes. However all these common characters may have been

inherited from different ancestral families of the Mesoganoidei

(p. 465). Boulenger restricts the term Malacopterygii of Artedi

and of Cuvier to practically the same content as the term Iso-

spondyli of Cope, the two divisions, Malacopterygii and Ostario-

physi, being given coérdinate rank as suborders of the order

Teleostei. For the reasons given it seems better to use a new

term, Malacopteroidei, in a broad or superordinal sense to include

the two orders Isospondyli Cope and Ostariophysi Sagemehl.

Order Isospondyli? Cope

The name Isospondyli refers to the fact that, in contrast with

the Ostariophysi (see page 472), the anterior vertebre are not

coalesced, nor are their processes modified into Weberian auditory

-ossicles. The vertebral centra are calcified, without separate

pleuro- and hypocentra, but sometimes (in the Leptolepidide)

slightly perforated by the notochord. The broad maxillary

forms part of the margin of the upper jaw, in the more primitive

1 wahanuos, soft, mrepor, fin.

2 pv6os, bladder, 6rou“a, mouth, in allusion to the duct from the swim

bladder into the cesophagus.

31605, equal, GrovdvA0s, vertebra.

468 WILLIAM K. GREGORY

forms articulating independently of the premaxillary with the

ethmoid (contrast the Ostariophysi). A symplectic is usually

present!; the opercular bones are complete? (contrast the

Ostariophysi) ;the pharyngeal bones are simple, above and below;

the bony supraoccipital, in many forms still separated by the

parietals from the frontals, progressively gains contact with the

frontals (see page 471). Asin Ostariophysi and actinopterous

Ganoids, the precoracoid (mesocoracoid) arch is retained and

the pectoral arch is suspended from the skull by a bony post-

temporal. The simple air bladder (usually present) has a

pneumatic duct leading into the digestive tract. The dermal

rays of the median fins articulate with an equal number of

endoskeletal supports. The dorsal and anal fins are spineless,°

i. e. the fin rays are articulated, the pectorals (when present)

are abdominal. Intermuscular bones are present. The caudal

heemapophyses and neurapophyses progressively expand and fuse

into hypural and epural bones, the caudal portion of the verte-

bral column degenerating and becoming upturned, the tail finally

becoming completely homocercal. Ganoidean characters, such

as intergulars, interclavicles, fin fulcra, ganoine, splenials, coro-

noids, the intestinal spiral valve, and the multivalvular bulbus

arterious, are all greatly reduced or absent.

The ordinal characters of this group are all generalized as ~

compared with those of other Teleosts, which is equivalent to

saying that the order is a central one related to the ancestors of

the Mesichthyes and Acanthopteroidei. The generalized Lep--

tolepidide from the Jurassic and Cretaceous have already been

noticed.

The Elopidz are the most generalized of living Teleosts, with

numerous representatives in the Cretaceous (e.g. Spaniodon),

and with two surviving genera, Elops and the Tarpon (Ve-

galops), both of which retain the Ganoidean gular plates. A

progressive character is the forward and upward growth of the

supraoccipital, which attains such importance in higher orders,

1 Except in Mormyride, Phractolemidez, Cromeriide.

2 Except in Pantodontide.

3’ Compare, however, the non-articulated rays in the dorsal fin of the

Ctenothrisside.

THE ORDERS OF TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES 469

but the supraoccipital has not yet displaced the parietals in

the median line.

“The Albulide are merely Elopine fishes with a forwardly

inclined mandibular suspensorium, a small mouth, and reduced

branchiostegal apparatus. Their primitive character is, indeed,

shown by the presence of a muscular conus arteriosus with two

rows of valves inthe heart of the sole surviving species.! They

seem to differ from the Elopide in exactly the same manner

as the more generalized Pycnodontide differ from the Semi-

onotide among Jurassic fishes. Now, however, the splenial

bone has disappeared, and is no longer available to bear a

powerful dentition. A new modification, therefore, occurs for

the first time, and is almost constantly repeated in later fishes

which have teeth on the palate or the base of the skull. This

upper dentition is henceforth usually opposed not to the mandible

but to a dental arrangement on the tongue or hyoid apparatus”

(A. S. Woodward?). Among the Cretaceous Albulids, [stieus

is ancestral to the existing genus Bathythrissa, a long-bodied,

deep-sea form. The existing members of the Elopide and

Albulide undergo a developmental metamorphosis, the ribbon-

shaped larve frequently being abyssal, like the larve of Eels.

In both families the large maxillary is movably articulated above

the premaxillary to the ethmoid (Boulenger), and the jaws, oral

cavity, and throat are thickly studded with teeth.

The Osteoglosside are more specialized than the preceding

families in the union of the larger maxillaries with the pre-

maxillaries. The teeth, on the jaws, pterygoid and hyoid bones

are thickly clustered. The four existing genera parallel the three

existing genera of Dipnoi in habit and especially in distribution.

This probably indicates that the Osteoglosside existed in the

Jurrasic, side by side with the widely dispersed Dipnoi, the

ranges of the groups being subsequently restricted part passu.

The head is scaleless, protected by thick derm bones; the large

bony scales are composed of mosaic-like pieces. The huge Ar-

1**7. H. V. Boas, ‘ Ueber den Conus arteriosus bei Butirinus und bei

anderen Knochenfischen,’ Morphol. Jahrb., Vol. VI, 1880, p. 528.”

2 Catalogue of the Fossil Fishes in the British Museum, Pt. 1V, 1901, pp.

WAL, Walle

470 WILLIAM K. GREGORY

apawna gigas of Brazil, sometimes weighing 400 pounds, is more

or less anguilliform (Appendix I). Osteoglossum also presents

some approach toward the gephyrocercy of the tail fin (Ap-

pendix II). More generalized short-bodied genera (Dapedoglossus,

Brachyetus) are known fromthe Eocene. The peculiar Pantodon-

tide of West Africa, also short-bodied fishes, are essentially

Osteoglossid flying-fishes with the pectoral fins greatly enlarged

and the ventrals far forward as in the Ctenothrisside. A still

more aberrant member of the Malacopterygii, apparently related

to the Osteoglosside, is the unique Phractolemus ansorgu, which

might almost be placed in a separate suborder codrdinate with

the Scyphophori. The mouthis edentulous, projectile, proboscidi-

form; the supraoccipita! is in contact with the frontals; the

enormous interoperculars overlap below in the median line.

The Mormyride of the fresh waters of Africa north of the

tropic of Capricorn have a funnel-like cavity in the pterotic

region, closed by a lid-like supratemporal, possibly functioning

like a Weberian auditory apparatus since the air bladder com-

municates with the ear. Cope founded the order Scyphophori

chiefly upon this character, which is largely realized also in the

Hyodontidz or Moon-Eyes of North America. Boulenger

believes this group to be related to the Albulidze. The brain is

comparatively enormous. The Gymnarchide are eel-like Mor-

myrids, and like them have a feebly developed electric organ on

either side of the tail. The long dorsal fin enablesthem to swim

backward or forward equally well. The West African and

oriental Notopteridze (Feather- backs), which Boulenger

regards as ‘‘an eccentric modification of a type very similar to

the Hyodontide,’”’ are of a peculiar rhomboidal shape, with

very long anal fin (hypocercal type, Appendix II), which

characters (here possibly correlated with marsh-living, partly

terrestrial habits) are realized to a slight extent in Dorasoma (the

Gizzard Shad) and more strongly in Cozla among the Herrings.

“The primitive nature of the Chirocentride’’ (Sauro-

dontide), says Smith Woodward,' ‘“‘has long been inferred

from the presence of a rudimentary spiral valve in the intestine

of the sole surviving species, Chirocentrus dorab. This family

1 Cat. Foss. Fishes Brit. Mus., Part IV, 1901, p. Vii.

THE ORDERS OF TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES A471

of fishes is, indeed, now proved to be very old, dating back at

least to the beginning of the Cretaceous period, during which

it attained its maximum development.” The Cretaceous genus

_ Portheus attained gigantic size (4.7 m.). Like so many other

relics of Cretaceous fish faunas, the nearest living representative

of this family (Chirocentrus) is found in the Indian Ocean and

the seas of China and Japan.

The true Clupeoid fishes (Herrings, Anchovies, etc.) lead back

through the genus Thrissopater of the Middle Cretaceous to

the Elopide. The Anchovies (Engrauline) may be derived from

Spaniodon of the Upper Cretaceous, the Milk-fishes (Chanine)

from Prochanos of the Cretaceous, the Clupeinze from Pseudo-

beryx and several other genera from the Upper Cretaceous.

Certain Cretaceous Clupeoids, namely, the Ctenothrisside, were

formerly allocated with the spiny-finned Berycide (see p. 501),

on account of the forward displacement of the pelvic fins, and

of the spiny or non-articulated character of the four anterior rays

of the dorsal; but Boulenger points out that in the small pre-

maxillaries and enlarged maxillaries they agree with the Mala-

copterygii, whilst inthe forward position of the ventrals they are

“most nearly approached by the Pantodontide’’ (Boulenger).

The Salmonidze and their allies differ from the Clupeide

chiefly in (1) the presence of a small adipose fin, (2) in the con-

tact between the supraoccipital and the frontals, and (3) in the

vestigial condition of the oviducts, the ova (as in the Osteo-

glosside, Hyodontide) falling into the cavity of the abdomen

before exclusion (Boulenger); but their exact relationships are

not known. They are believed by Boulenger to be of ‘‘compara-

tively recent age, no remains older than Miocene. . . being

certainly referable to this family.”

The Alepocephalidz, deep-sea Clupeoids, lacking an adipose

dorsal, and with the rayed fin very far back.

The Stomiatide, aberrant deep-sea forms paralleling

the Scopeloids, but with the maxillary instead of the premax-

illary greatly enlarged, the pectoral fins often disappearing,

while the pelvic fins are large. Extremely variable in body

form, including long, eel-like forms, and short, Beryx-like forms.

The Gonorhynchide are believed by A. S. Woodward

472 _ WILLIAM K. GREGORY

to be nearly related to the Scopelide (p. 487), but are assigned

to the Isospondyli by Boulenger. They are represented in the

Upper Cretaceous of Europe and in the freshwater Eocene beds

of France and North America. The sole existing species is

known from the seas off Japan, South Africa, Australia, and New

Zealand. They are somewhat pike-like in form, with sturgeon-

like mouth and snout; they have scaly fins, peculiar ctenoid

scales of an advanced type, and a long ‘accessory scale’ on the

paired fins, like certain other members of this assemblage.

Resembling the Gonorhynchidzis the tiny fish Cromeria, recently

discovered in the White Nile, for which a new family has been

erected.

Superorder MALACOPTEROIDEI (cont'd).

(Plate XXIX.)

Order Ostariophysi! Sagemehl 1885.

(Plectospondyli Cope + Glanencheli Cope + Nematognathi Gill.)

In this principally fresh-water group, which comprises the

Catfishes, Carps, Characins and Gymnotids, the anterior four

vertebre are greatly modified, often codssified, their ribs and

neural and hemal elements forming a chain of bones connecting

the air bladder with the auditory organ. The importance of these

bones in classification was indicated by Cope in his diagnosis

of the orders Plectospondyli Cope (Carps and Characins), Glan-

encheli Cope (Gymnotids), and Nematognathi Gill (Catfishes).

These ossicles have been shown by Sagemehl to be severally

homologous and to have the same relations with the spinal

nerves, throughout the order, which is hence regarded by Bou-

lenger as ‘‘one of the most natural groups of the class Pisces.”

Points of agreement with the Isospondyli are: (2) the air

bladder, if well developed, communicates with the digestive tract

by a duct; (2) the pectoral arch is suspended from the skull; (3) .

the mesocoracoid (precoracoid) arch is present; (4) the pelvic

fins if present are abdominal; (5) the fin rays are soft and articu-

lated, except the pectoral and the dorsal spines of catfishes,

1 66radplov, a little bone, puGos, bladder, in allusion to the Weberian

auditory ossicles.

;

THE ORDERS OF TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES 473.

each of which results from the codéssification of the segments of

a single articulated ray.

Four suborders are here recognized: (1) Heterognathi Gill

(Characins), (2) Glanencheli Cope (Gymnonoti Gill, Gymnotids),

(3) Eventognathi Gill (Carps), (4) Nematognathi Gill (Catfishes).

These exhibit many divergences of form and structure, upon

which several orders have hitherto been based. On the other

hand, their common origin seems so well assured that Smith

Woodward and Boulenger, in adopting Sagemehl’s group

““Ostariophysee,” unite them into a single order, without major

divisions; but it here seems preferable to recognize the suborders

named above.

The Characins are undoubtedly the most generalized and are

regarded by Boulenger as representing the ancestral stock, which

gave off (1) the Gymnotids as a specialized eel-like side branch,

and (2) an undiscovered annectant form leading to both Catfishes

and Carps. The group is almost exclusively non-marine.

Order Ostariophysi(coni’d).

Suborder Heterognathi! Gull

The Characins.

The subordinal characters of this group, as compared with

those of the Carps and Catfishes, are nearly all primitive. Thus

barbels are lacking, the head is naked, the body covered with

eycloid scales, both premaxillaries and maxillaries form the

margin of the upper jaw,? the premaxillaries are not protrusile,

the jaws usually toothed; the upper pharyngeal bones are often as

many as four; lower pharyngeals are normal, armed with small,

sometimes villiform teeth; the osseous brain-case is not produced

between the orbits, an adipose dorsal is often present, the air

bladder is transversely divided into two portions; and (in contrast

with the Catfishes) the maxillaries are well developed, the fin

1érepos, different, yvvd@os, jaw, in allusion to the various modifica-

tions of the jaws and teeth.

2 Save in Ichthyoborus and Neoborus, which parallel the Nematognathi

in the reduction of the maxillary and its exclusion from the oral gape

(Boulenger).

ATA WILLIAM K, GREGORY

rays all soft, the body scaly, the parietals not fused with the

supraoccipitals.

None of their independent specializations is of subordinal

value, but in the typical Characins (1) the skull is ‘‘more or less

invaded by reéntering valleys from behind,”’ (2) the supraoccipi-

tal is ‘‘partly superior and carinated by a procurrent crest”

(Gill), (3) the ribs are mostly sessile, all the greater number of the

precaudal vertebrae being without parapophyses (Boulenger.)

The Characins, although clearly allied to the other Ostario-

physi, show many analogies in appearance with the Salmonide

among Isospondyles. They present a great range of genera and

species characteristic of the fresh waters of tropical America and

Africa south of the Sahara. In Africa they accompany their re-

mote relatives the Carps, but in tropical America they entirely

replace them. Many are extremely predaceous, others are ex-

clusively vegetable feeders; the dentition is equally diversified.+

A peculiar group, the Gymnotide, or Characin Eels, was given

ordinal rank (Gymnonoti) by Cope, Gill, and others, but Rein-

hardt has proved that they are simply a highly specialized

offshoot from the Characins, from which they differ chiefly in

the eel-like body, obsolete dorsal and pectoral fins, and forward

shifting of the anus to a point near the throat. They exhibit

close analogies (due to living in turgid rivers) to the eel-like

Mormyrs of Africa (Appendix I). The famous Electric Eel

(Gymnotus electricus) also parallels the Mormyrid Gymnarchus

and the Electric Catfish (Walapterurus) in the possession of an

electric organ on either side of the tail.

‘COMPARISON OF THE CHIEF DiaGNosTic CHARACTERS OF THE SUBORDERS

OF OSTARIOPHYSI.

(Compiled from Jordan and Evermann, Eigenmann, Boulenger.)

HETEROGNATHI EVENTOGNATHI NEMATCGNATHI

(Characins) (Carps) (Catfishes)

Bodyawieehumeear oCaly 05 Sick sheer Scaly or naked...Naked or armed

with bony plates.

Gad s.ueeienns INiailce diese: Creaae INaiedinea: wee Naked or armed

with bony plates.

Barbelsia neta INOS abe rece Present or absent Present.

IM Gui at cieremeeae Not protractile...More or less pro- Not protractile.

tractile.

1See Eigenmann, C. H., in Biol. Bull., Vol. VIII, Jan, 1905 p. 6r.

THE ORDERS OF TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES 475

Margin of upper (Characins) (Carps) (Catfishes)

TEA che eee Formed by pre- Formed by pre- Formed by pmx.

max. and max. max.orby pre- alone;mx. much

max. and max. reduced.

Mechonjaws....Often present.....Absent......:... Absent or limited

to pmx.

Upper pharyn-

Beals. Seon pee Tee Airey sires le eieaconate DES a OREN pee ee ? Normal.

Lower pharyn-

BAIN ae -ocmae Normal, toothless. Falciform, toothed. Normal.

Opercular appara-

(OS e cee Normal, complete. Normal, complete. Lacking suboper-

culum and some-

times operculum.

Braid CHase....... Not ossified later- Ossified laterally Ossified laterally

ally between between orbits. between orbits.

orbits.

eetals ss... Distinct from su- Distinct from su- Usually fused with

praoccipital. praoccipital. the supra occipi-

tal which is great-_

ly developed.

Adipose dorsal....Often present..... PANO G apiaowe Ue Often present.

mliaberelavicles’’). Absent.......... INSANE Ao pico eo Present.

Parapophyses on

precaudal

WER ahapae ANOSHME ns oda ae eee MNOSEMNG He So ness Often present.

IbyAoniciczeca...... Oftenworesemts mene NOSeibn eevee se ?

Order Ostariophysi (cont'd).

Suborder Nematognathi! Guill

The Catfishes.

The name Nematognathi refers to the reduction of the maxil-

lary to a slender element bearing the thread-like barbels; the

premaxillaries alone forming the margin of the upper jaw.?

Barbels are always present; the premaxillaries are not protractile,

jaw-teeth if present are limited to the premaxillaries; the skull

(as in Carps) is closed at the side by the orbitosphenoids and

ethmoid; the supraoccipital is greatly developed, and usually

fused with the parietals; an adipose dorsal fin is often present.

The Catfishes show certain resemblances to the Acipenseroidei,

in that: (1) the skin is naked, or armed with either bony

scutes or plates; (2) the suboperculum is absent; (3) certain

forms (Doras) exhibit fulcra-like scutes on the anterior border

of the median fins; (4) the clavicles are braced inferiorly: by

infraclavicular plates. The latter, however, are not generally

1vnua, thread, yva90S, jaw.

2 Except in Diplomystes (Eigenmann.)

A476 WILLIAM K. GREGORY

regarded as homologous with the infraclavicles seen in Ganoids

and all the resemblances to the Acipenseroidei are doubtless

analogical, not homological,

In the armored forms an elaborate system of tuberculated

bony plates protects the head and shoulders (in a manner analo-

gous to the plates of Dinichthyids among Arthrodires), and

is supported posteriorly by the coalesced neural arches and by

the stout shoulder girdle. The anterior fin ray, in the pectoral

and dorsal fins, forms a great bony spine, which is erected and

locked (in the dorsals) by an ingenious modification of the

underlying neural spines, or (in the pectorals) of the basals.

The adaptive radiation of structure and habit among the 1000

species of Siluroids is extraordinarily great, and may indicate

-a great antiquity for the group; but many seemingly annec-

tant forms still exist, and Eigenmann! traces all the higher

subfamilies back to the American Diplomysteidz, which retain

dentigerous maxillaries forming part of the border of the mouth.?

Fossil forms are rare. KRhineastes from the Wasatch or Lower

Eocene of North America is probably related to the Pimelodine,

from which, says Eigenmann,? “‘the present North American

forms are, not unlikely, lineal descents.’’ The gigantic Leopard

Catfish Bagarius yarrelt of India and Java is represented in the

Pliocene of the Siwalik Hills in Northern India.

Although some of the genera belonging to the least specialized

subfamilies Pimelodinze and Tachisurine are marine, the ma-

jority of Catfishes shun competition with the higher Teleosts by

living in muddy instead of clear water, a fact which may have

determined the survival of the group. In correlation with this

habit: (1) the eyes are often comparatively small; (2) the direction

in which food lies is detected by the barbels or even by the skin,

both of which in the naked forms are sensitively gustatory as

well as tactile in function (Herrick); (3) in many genera the

1“ Revision of the South American Nematognathi or Catfishes,”’ Calzf.

Acad. of Science, Occasional Papers, Vol. I, 1890.

2 The single genus Diplomystes should not be confused with the Clupeoid

genus Diplomystus.

3** A Catalogue of the Fresh-Water Tienes of South America,’”’ Proc. U-

Sh Nats Mauss Viole eiVE Teor ips it.

THE ORDERS OF TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES A477

_ difficulties of respiration in muddy water have been met by the

development of accessory organs enabling the fish to take oxygen

directly from the air. As inthe case of certain Dipnoi, this

condition has made possible more or less amphibious or even

terrestrial habits, with correlated specializations for locomotion.

Thus Doras, one of the South American forms, moves rapidly

on land, “‘projecting itself forward on the pectoral spines by the

elastic spring of the tail, travelling long journeys overland from

one drying pond to another, spending whole nights on the way.”’

Equally noteworthy are such bizarre forms as Malapterurus,

the Electric Catfish, the completely cuirassed Callichthys,

Chetostomus, Loricaria, the Sucking Catfish Pseudecheneis, and

the parasitic Bdellostoma-like Vandellia.

Order Ostariophysi (cont'd).

Suborder Eventognathi! Gill.

(Plectospondyli Cope in part.)

The Carps.

In the Carps the food is sucked in by the toothless protrusile

mouth and is masticated in the throat by the falcate toothed

lower pharyngeals, which thus function like the jaws of other

fishes. To this fact the name Eventognathi refers. In contrast

with the Catfishes, the Carps have no spine in the fins, the broad

parietals are distinct from the supraoccipital, the opercular appa-

ratus is complete (i. e. the suboperculum is present), scales are

usually present and there are no infraclavicular plates, nor an

adipose dorsal fin. On the other hand, a suggestive agreement

with the Catfishes is expressed in the naked head, the frequent

presence of barbels, the frequency with which the premaxillary

alone forms the margin of the upper jaw, and the closure of the

brain case laterally by the orbitosphenoids and ethmoid; while

further points of agreement with the Catfishes are found under the

ordinal characters of the Ostariophysi (p. 473). Again, some of

the Loaches parallel certain of the Catfishes, in (1) the elongation

_ of the body, (2) the reduction of the scales, (3) the presence of

an erectile, defensive spine (in this case suborbital), (4) the

1 ev, well, évTds, Within, yvabos, jaw.

478 WILLIAM K. GREGORY

presence of six barbels, (5) the inferior position of the mouth, —

(6) the fact that the air bladder is in immediate contact with —

the skin; and these independently acquired characters seem to

indicate the possession of ‘‘a potential of similar evolution” by

ancestors of each of the groups. :

The order does not present as wide a range of variation as

do the Nematognathi, possibly because of its more recent origin.

There are four families: (1) The Catostomide or Suckers’ (e.g.

Ictiobus) are the more primitive, in that the maxillary forms

part of the margin of the upper jaw while the pharyngeal teeth

are very numerous. On the other hand, in (2) the Cyprinide or

true Carps, the maxillary does not form part of the margin of

the upper jaw, simply assisting in the protrusion of the mouth,

while the pharyngeal teeth are reduced in number. About 200

genera and nearly 1000 species are known (Jordan). The

North American genera while very closely related, are separated

by characters which although reasonably constant are often of

slight structural importance (Jordan). An interesting speciali-

zation is the highly colored breeding dress of the males. (3) The

Cobitideze or Loaches (described above). (4) The Homalopteride,

mountain forms with depressed head and horizontally expanded

paired fins ‘“‘which sometimes form a sucking disk.’’ All members

of the order inhabit freshwater. Fossil forms date from the

Upper Tertiary and are closely allied to or identical with living

genera. The Eventognathi are probably ‘‘modern”’ (Middle

Tertiary) offshoots of the ostariophysan stem. The union of the

Eventognathi (Carps) with the Heterognathi (Characins) into

the order Plectospondyli while justly expressing the ultimate

kinship of these two groups arbitrarily separates them from the

Nematognathi (Catfishes).

Superorder UNCERTAIN.

Order Apodes! Linnaeus.

The Eels.

(Plate XXIX.)

Under this name Linnzus grouped many wholly unrelated forms

1 d, without, 7ovs, foot, from the absence of pelvic fins.

THE ORDERS OF TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES A7Y

which had independently lost the pelvic fins (Cf. Appendix I).

By successive eliminations the order has been restricted to

include only the Eels proper and their near allies, and the Morays.

“The typical Apodes are unique among the so-called teleostean

fishes in possessing more than five basal bonesinthe pectoral fin—

a feature characteristic of all the lower groups of Actinopterygii

- (A. S. Woodward').”’ They agree with the other physostomes

(Isospondyli, Ostariophysi, Haplomi, etc.) in the following

primitive characters: ‘(1) the air bladder (if present) communi-

cates with the digestive tract by a duct, (2) the fins have no

spines, (3) the small supraoccipital is separated from the frontals

by the distinct parietals. They agree with the Haplomi, Iniomi,

and higher Teleosts in the absence of the precoracoid (meso-

coracoid) arch. The Apodes are especially distinguished by the

following combination of characters: (i) the lack of any bony

connection between the skull and the shoulder girdle which is

in fact separated entirely from the skull. (2) The absence of

the premaxillaries, which are functionally replaced by the den-

tigerous vomer. (3) The coalescence of the vomer with the

ethmoid. (4) The reciprocal development of the maxillaries

and pterygopalatines, which functionally replace each other in

different families. (5) The reduction of the opercular bones,

which are deeply sunk in the integument. (6) The absence of

the symplectic, or possibly its non-separation from the hyoman-

dibular. (7) The absence of pelvic fins (except in the Anguilla-

vide (Hay) of the Cretaceous, p. 481). (8) The multiplication of

the vertebre (upto 225). (9) The anguilliform body. (10) The

disappearance or extreme reduction of the scales. (11) The loss

of the homocercal tail (vestiges of which seem to persist in Sim-

enchelys and which was well developed in the Cretaceous genera

Urenchelys and Anguillavus). (12) The union of the dorsal

and anal fins with the tail-fininto the gephyrocercal form. (13)

The occasional reduction of the vertical fins.

The order seems to be an offshoot from some long-bodied

Cretaceous Actinopteran with weak premaxillaries, slender,

_toothed maxillaries, teeth on the vomers and pterygopalatines.

The question of their relationship to the Isospondyliis not settled.

1Cat. Foss. Fishes, Brit. Mus., Part IV, root, p. x.

ASO WILLIAM K, GREGORY

On account (1) of their having more than five basal bones in the

pectoral fin, and (2) of the presence of true Eels in the Cretaceous

period, Dr. Smith Woodward! is of the opinion that the Apodes

are not degenerate offshoots from the Isospondyli as here defined,

but independent derivatives from some Holostean Ganoids. The

ancestral Apodes were possibly pelagic, subsequently invading

the rivers and giving off the fresh-water eels. These still require

the salt water for the development of the reproductive organs,

and undergo a remarkable metamorphosis, passing through a

‘Leptocephalus’ or Glass-eel stage quite similar to that of the

Albulids among Isospondyles. Extremely predatory and vor-

acious, sometimes becoming semiparasitic (Simenchelys; com-

pare similar results among Cyclostomes). Swimming rapidly

by lateral undulations, hence not requiring a homocercal

tail for propulsion. Teeth primarily adapted for seizing and

holding a struggling prey. The reduction of the maxillaries

their functional replacement by the more advantageously placed

pterygopalatines, and the separation of the latter from the

quadrate, finally resulting (nthe Morays) ina large snake-like

and very loose jaw-apparatus with backwardly inclined sus-

pensorium; these changes in turn necessitating the great reduc-

tion of the branchial and opercular bones, the total separation

of the shoulder girdle from the skull, and the development of

large branchial pouches for sucking in water.

The classification here adopted is as follows:

Order Apodes (Linn.) Kaup.

Suborder'1. Archencheli Jordan

Fam. Anguillavide Hay. Up. Cretaceous, Mount ee,

non, Syria.

Suborder 2. Enchelycephali Cope

Fam. Anguillide (Eels)

‘‘ Nemichthyide (Thread Eels)

‘“« Synaphobranchidz

Suborder 3. Colocephali Cope

Fam. Murenide (Morays)

1 Op. Cit., p.

THE ORDERS OF TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES 481

Suborder 4. Carencheli! Gill

Fam. Derichthyide

Suborder 5. Lyomeri! Gill and Ryder

Fam. Saccopharyngide (Gulpers)

(1) Archencheli. Upper Cretaceous ‘“‘Apodes with well-

developed cleithrum, pectoral arch, pectoral and ventral fins,

and a distinct caudal fin . . . Palatopterygoid arch de-

veloped. Scales rudimentary [vestigial] or absent; in some

cases a row of enlarged plates on each side, probably on. the

lateral lines. Ribs present. One genus Anguwillavus’”’ (Hay?

1903, Pp. 436).

(2) Enchelycephali Cope (Eyxelus, eel, Kedardr, head), includ-

ing according to Gill and Jordan, the Anguillide or true

Eels, Simenchelyide (Pug-nosed Eels), Ilyophide (Ooze Eels),

Synaphobranchide (Deep Sea Congers), Leptocephalide (Conger

Eels), Murznesocide, Nettastomide (Sorcerers), Nemichthy-

ide (Snipe Eels), Myride (Worm Eels), Ophichthyide (Snake

Eels); these are all (except Nemichthyide) included in the

family Anguillide by Boulenger. In these the gill openings are

well developed, leading to large interbranchial slits, the tongue

is present, the opercles and branchial bones are well developed,

the scapular arch is present.

(3) Suborder Colocephali Cope (xoAos, defective, xepadry, head),

including according to the American school the Murenide

(Morays), Myrocongride, Moringuidz; these are all called Mure-

nide by Boulenger. In this highly degenerate group the gill

openings are small, rounded, leading to restricted interbranchial

slits, the tongue is wanting, the pectoral fins (typically) are

wanting, the opercles reduced, the fourth gill arch modified,

strengthened, and supporting pharyngeal jaws, the maxillaries

are functionally replaced by the toothed palatopterygoid, the

premaxillaries by the toothed ethmovomer.

(4) Suborder Carencheli. According to Gill these deep-sea

forms differ from the true Eels and Morays in the retention of

1 Of more or less uncertain relationship to the typical Apodes; may

deserve separate ordinal rank.

2 Hay, O. P. “‘ Cretaceous Fishes from Mount Lebanon, Syria,’ Bull.

Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., Vol. XIX, 1902.

<0 ee

482 WILLIAM K. GREGORY

premaxillaries, which are united by suture with the maxillaries,

and immovably connected with the cranium.

(5) Suborder Lyomeri (Gill and Ryder). According to Boulen-

ger the very anomalous abyssal forms known as Saccopharyn-

gide (Gulpers), formerly set apart as a distinct order Lyomeri,

may be regarded as extremely degraded Eels, possibly related to

the Synaphobranchide, which have entirely lost the pterygo-

palatine arch, the branchiostegal rays, and the pharyngeal

bones, the enormous slender jaws being loosely slung from the

cranium by means of the slender hyomandibular and quadrate.

Superorder UNCERTAIN (cont'd).

Order Symbranchii! Guill.

These extraordinarily eel-like and apodal forms? are distin-

guished from the true Apodes by the following fundamental char-

acters: (1) The more normal structure of the skull, in which

the symplectic and metapterygoid are present, and the pre-

maxillary is well developed, forming the greater part of the oral

border. (2) In the more generalized family (Symbranchide)

the shoulder girdle is attached to the skull through the well-

developed forked posttemporal, but in the Amphipnoide the

absence of the posttemporal leaves the shoulder girdle free from

the skull, as in Apodes. (3): The gill openings on both sides

are confluent into a single slit beneath the throat. (4) All

known members of the group parallel Lepidosiren and Protop-

terus among the Dipnoi, both in environment and in habits.

The Amphipnoide possess lung-like respiratory diverticula of

the branchial chamber, on each side of the neck, which are

capable of taking oxygen directly from the air. From the

structure of the skull we may infer that the Symbranchii are

allied to the Isospondyli or possibly to the Haplomi.

Superorder UNCERTAIN (cont'd).

Order Heteromi?’ (Guill).

‘guy, together, Bpayyia, gills, in allusion to confluence of the gill

openings into a single ventral slit.

2 Compare Appendix I.

3 érepos, one of two, wos, shoulder, possibly in allusion to the attach-

ment of the shoulder to either the supraoccipital or the epiotic.

THE ORDERS OF TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES 483

The Halosauries, Thornbacks, etc.

This order as defined by Boulenger embraces certain eel-like!

deep-sea fishes formerly assigned to the suborders Lyopomi

Gill (Halosauridze) and Heteromi Gill (Notacanthide), together

with the more recently discovered Lipogenyidze which are said

to bridge over the gap between these two groups. To these

Boulenger adds the marine Fierasferide and the Cretaceous

Dercetide. All these families retain archaic or Isospondylous

characters in the abdominal position of the many-rayed ventral

fins (when present), especially in the union of the broad parietals

along the median line which widely separates the supraoccipital

from the frontals. ‘‘They are all characterized,’ says Smith

Woodward,‘ ‘‘by a primitive cranium of the Jurassic type; but

they exhibit the new specialization by which the extending

premaxilla gradually excludes the maxilla from the upper border

of the mouth. Their elongated shape alone is indicative of high

specialization; but no intermediate forms are yet known to afford

a clue to their more normally shaped ancestors.’’ On the other

hand, they parallel the Acanthopteroidei in the closure of the air

bladder, in the absence of the mesocoracoid arch, and in the

frequent appearance of spines in the fins. The pectoral arch is

suspended from the supraoccipital or the epiotic (as in the

Iniomi), the posttemporal is small and simple, or replaced by a

ligament. The group parallels the Macruride among the Ana-

canthini and many other eel-like forms in the loss of the homo-

cercal tail (which is, however, preserved in the Cretaceous Der-

cetide) and itsreplacement by the hypocercal type (Appendix IT).

The existing Halosaurus ‘‘cannot be clearly distinguished

from the Cretaceous Echidnocephalus; while Notacanthus of the

present fauna only seems to differ from Protonotacanthus of the

Cretaceous period in the possession of dorsal spines and fin-rays.

The Dercetide, on the other hand, are only known by fossils

from Cretaceous formations, in which they are widely distributed.

They are interesting as being the earliest type of fish in which

evidence of a distensible stomach has been observed.

1 See Appendix I.

2 Cat. Foss. Fishes, Brit. Mus., Part IV, 1901, p. Viil.

484. WILLIAM K. GREGORY

Their fins are less specialized than those of the. . . [Halo-

sauride and Notacanthide] and their trunk is provided with

paired longitudinal series of enlarged scutes [Compare Eurypholis

among Scopeloids].”’ (Smith Woodward loc. cit.)

Jordan is sceptical as to the naturalness of this assemblage

(1905, p. 484) especially as to the inclusion of the Fierasferide.

Possibly this order might be included in the superotder Mesich-

thyes defined below (p. 484), but the retention of the very

archaic type of cranium militates somewhat against this associa-

tion. On the other hand the closure of the air bladder, absence

of the mesocoracoid arch, and frequent appearance of spines in

the fins seem to separate the group from the Malacopterygii.

It may prove advisable eventually to raise the group to super-

ordinal rank, codrdinate with the Mesichthyes, Thoracostraci,

etc., retaining the divisions Lyopomi and Heteromi as orders.

Superorder MresicutuyveEs! (Hay) muh.

i (Plate XXIX.)

The groups of families known as Iniomi (Scopeloids), Haplomi

(Pikes, etc.), Salmoperczee (Sand-rollers), Synentognathi (Fly-

ing-fishes, etc.), are all doubtless descended from various soft-

rayed, isospondylous, or perhaps even Holostean stocks which

had evolved more or less toward the spiny-finned or physoclistous

type of structure. Hence these intermediate groups present

numerous combinations of the leading characters which dis-

tinguish typical soft-rayed and spiny-finned fishes. For example,

in some of them (Synentognathi) we find abdominal ventrals and

soft or non-articulated rays (Isospondyl characters), in combina-

tion with a closed air bladder (acanthopterous character),

while in others (Percopside), which are referred by Boulenger

to the Haplomi, an open air bladder, and an adipose dorsal fin

persist in combination with forwardly displaced ventrals and

spines in the fins. Hence asthe passage from typical soft-finned,

physostomous, to spiny-finned and physoclistous fishes is very

gradual systematists have experienced difficulty in segregating

1 wéoos, middle, txOus, fish, in allusion to the transitional character

of the group.

THE ORDERS OF TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES A485

ordinal assemblages around central forms without disrupting

natural connections at the peripheries. Although, as implied

_ by Jordan, any such attempt must over-emphasize certain breaks

in the sequence, yet on the whole the least distortion of natural

relationships seems to be secured in the following scheme. The

group Mesichthyes Hay,’ proposed as an order to include the

Haplomi, the Synentognathi, and the Percesoces, is here modified

by the addition of the Iniomi to the Haplomi, by the transference

of the Percesoces to the Acanthopterygii, and by the inclusion

in it of the order Salmoperce Jordan and Evermann, the whole

group being raised to superordinal rank, codrdinate with the

superorders Malacopteroidei, Thoracostraci, Acanthopteroidei.

In defense of this procedure I may say, first, that the close

connection between the Iniomi and Haplomi has led Boulenger

to merge the Iniomi in the Haplomi. Second, the removal of

the Percesoces to the Acanthopteroidei (already advocated by

Jordan and Evermann) is justified by the fact that in the Per-

cesoces for the first time among fishes with a closed air bladder

appear (1) a separate spinous dorsal, (2) the connection of the

pelvis with the clavicular arch, (3) the reduction of rays in the

ventrals to one spine and five soft rays. These characters

(usually found among the Percesoces in combination) serve

to separate them sharply from their supposed near allies, the

Synentognathi. Third, as to the inclusion of the Salmoperce

in the Mesichthyes, Boulenger unhesitatingly pronounces the

Sand-rollers to be progressive Haplomi, but it seems better to

regard them as codérdinate in rank with that group.

As constituted above the superorder may be separated from

the Malacopterygii by (1) the absence of the mesocoracoid

arch (a character believed by Swinnerton,? from the evidence

of embryology, to indicate a very ancient separation from the

Malacopterygii) and (2) (apparently) by the absence of the

orbitosphenoid. From the Thoracostraci the superorder may

1‘ Bibliography and Catalogue of the Fossil Vertebrata of North

America,’ Bull. U. S. Geol. Surv., No. 179, Washington, 1902, p. 397-

2‘** A Contribution to the Morphology and Development of the Pectoral

Skeleton of the Teleosteans,”’ Quar. Jour. Micros. Sci.,n.s., No. 1941, Vol.

49, Part 2, 1905, pp. 363-382.

ae te

OPN ;

486 WILLIAM K. GREGORY

be separated by the normal characters of the gills and coracoid,

from the Acanthopteroidei by either (1) the abdominal or sub-

abdominal position of the ventral fins, which (save in Percopside)

are entirely separated from the pectoral arch, or (2) by the feeble

development of spines in the fins, or (3) in the Haplomi, Salmo-

perce by the open air bladder, or (4) by the high number of

rays (usually more than six) in the ventrals.

The adipose dorsal fin seen in Salmonidze, Nematognathi,

Characinide among Malacopteroidei is retained in some families

(Scopelide, Alepidosauridze, Percopside) of the present super-

order. The number of rays in the ventral fins is progressively

reduced as follows: Iniomi 10 to 5, Haplomi 11 to 3, Salmoperce

9, Synentognathi 6, the number thus being higher, as a rule,

than in the Acanthopteroidei. The inarticulated rays or spines

in the fins exhibit various stages of development but are never

numerous: absent or at most incipient in Scopeloids and true

Haplomi, Synentognathi, distinct but very few in Salmoperce.

A separate spinous dorsal is never developed. The soft dorsal

is nearly always well back (save in Salmopercze) usually opposite

or nearly opposite the (usually short) anal. The parietals are

usually (save in Galaxoidea) separated by the supraoccipital.

By this character the Mesichthyes may be separated from the

Heteromi, from which they are further distinguished by the

normal non-anguilliform body and the broadly homocercal tail.

Our division of the superorder is as follows:

Superorder MresicutHvEs (Hay) mihi.

Order 1. Haplomi (Gill) Boulenger

crepe analy Aulopoidea (Gill) (Iniomi Gull)

Esocoidea Starks

Dalloidea nom. nov.

Peeciloidea Starks

Amblyopsoidea Starks

Stephanoberycoidea nom. nov.

(Incertz Sedis )

Fam. Chirothricide (af. Iniomi?)

‘‘ Kneriide

Superfamily Galaxoidea nom. nov. (af. Isospondyli?)

THE ORDERS OF TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES 487

Order 2. Salmoperce Jordan and Evermann

Fam. Percopside

Order 3. Synentognanthi Gill

Fam. Belonidze

Me xO COchidee

Superorder MresicutHyEes (Hay) (cont'd).

(Plate XXIX.)

Order 1. Haplomi! (Gill) Boulenger

The ‘superfamily Aulopoidea (Iniomi?), represented by a few

shore species and many deep-sea forms, combine characters of

' the Salmonoid Isospondyli and of the Haplomi. In so far as

the osteology is known they differ from the Isospondyli in the

absence of the mesocoracoid arch in the shoulder girdle and of the

orbitosphenoid in the skull and thus the group falls within

Boulenger’s definition of the Haplomi; while on account of the

close relationship of the Alepidosauridz to the more generalized

Enchodontide of the Cretaceous Smith Woodward includes

them allin the Isospondyli. Inthe Scopelide, the posttemporal

is forked and (as in the Salmonide, Clupeide) the upper branch

meets the epiotic, the lower the opisthotic, but here, not as in

the Isospondyli, the posttemporal merely touches and is not

firmly attached to the skull. In the Alepidosauride the upper

branch of the supratemporal is lacking, the simple supratemporal

being attached on the side of the occiput to the opisthotic. To

this peculiar mode of attachment of the shoulder girdle to the

Skull at the nape the word Iniomi alludes. Asin other Haplomi

and progressive Isospondyli the supraoccipital has thrust aside

the parietals to gain contact with the frontals, and sometimes,

as in the Salmonide, is itself partly overlapped by the parietals.

The most primitive genera (Aulops, Chlorophthalmus) retain the

Salmonoid adipose dorsal, a normal maxillary (fide Jordan)

and show no luminous spots. In the more specialized genera

1 GirXovs, simple, ®pmos, shoulder, in allusion to the want of the meso-

coracoid.

2 tywov, nape, @pos, shoulder.

488 WILLIAM K. GREGORY

the adipose dorsal is frequently lost, the premaxillaries lengthen

and grow fast to the slender maxillary which is excluded from

the oral border (Boulenger), and an elaborate system of photo-

phores is developed. The group is known from numerous fossil

genera in the Cretaceous and Eocene.

The Chirothricide (Cretaceous forms) are probably related

to the Scopeloids, but superficially resemble Flying-fishes (Exo-

cetus). The “wings,” however, are formed by the greatly -

enlarged ventral fins, which are placed very far forward.

The Cretaceous Enchodontide are said to agree with con-

temporary Isospondyls in most respects, but are progressive

in the backward enlargement of the delicate preniaxilla, which

nearly excludes the maxilla from the border of the mouth. The

long, slender teeth are acrodont (z.e., not in sockets but fused

with the supporting bone). An adipose fin is often present.

Their nearest existing relatives are the deep-sea Alepisauride.

The true Haplomi as understood by Gill, Jordan, and Starks,

include only the Mud-minnows (Umbride) and Pikes (Eso-=

cidz) of Europe, Asia, and America, the Killifishes (Peeciliide

or Cyprinodontide) of Southern Europe, Africa, Asia, and

America, and the famous subterranean Blind-fishes (Amblyop-

side) of the southern United States. These families have

been grouped by E. C. Starks! in a recent paper on the osteology

of the Haplomi as follows:

Esocide (Pikes)

Superfamily Esocoidea

Umbride (Mud-minnows)

Order Haplomi i Peeciloidea Poeciliide (Killifishes)

Cyprinodontinze

Poeciliinee y

at Amblyopsoi-

dea Amblyopside (Blind-fishes)

“The families of the Haplomi,’’ he says, “have either widely

diverged from each other or are not of the same line of descent.

The order is not held together by any important character,

though some very peculiar characters may be used to rather

widely separate three groups.”’

1‘*A Synopsis of Characters of Some Fishes belonging to the Order

Haplomi,’’ Biological Bull., Vol. VII, No. 5, Oct. 1904, pp. 254-262.

THE ORDERS OF TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES 489:

The order as thus constituted is trenchantly separated by the

_ loss of the mesocoracoid from the Isospondyli, with which it

agrees in: (1) the suspension of the shoulder girdle from the

skull by the posttemporal, (2) the abdominal position of the

pelvic fins, (3) the persistence of the pneumatic duct connecting

the air bladder with the gut, (4) the soft-rayed character of the

fins. The derivation of the group from Cretaceous Isospondyls

is probable. ‘“‘The Esocide”’ says Dr. Smith Woodward,! ‘‘are

essentially fresh-water Scopeloids, and the Cyprinodontide

[Poeciliidze] are generally admitted to be closely allied to this

family. Nothing of importance is known concerning their

geological history.”’ Jordan and Starks mention the following

additional characters as defining the Haplomi proper: (5)

alisphenoids not meeting in a median line in front of brain case,

(6) the supraoccipital wedges in between the parietals (a mor-

phological advance beyond the more primitive families of Isos-

pondylt), (7) the exoccipitals are separated by the basioccipital,

a frequent character among the lower Teleosts (Starks), (8) the

post-clavicle is composed of a single element, (9g) actinosts four,.

(10) opercular bones all present, (11) pectoral fins placed low,

(x2) dorsal fin placed more or less posteriorly, (13) head usually

covered with cycloid scales like those on the body.

To this assemblage Boulenger? adds besides the forms usually

called Iniomi the following families, and adopts a more elastic

definition of the order Haplomi.

1. Galaxiide or Southern Pikelets. This family and the

nearly related Haplochitonide are more primitive than the true

Pikes (Esocidz) in that: (1) the supraoccipital has not yet.

pushed aside the parietals to gain contact with the frontals,

(2) an adipose fin (in the Haplochitonidz) is present. Swinner-

ton? says of Galaxias, ‘‘In some respects, ¢.g., forward extension

of the cranial cavity, and the condition of the articular head

of the hyomandibular, it is as lowly as, or even more lowly

than, the salmon.’”’

'Cat. Foss. Fishes, Brit. Mus., Part IV, 1901, Pp. ix.

2Boulenger, G. A., Cambr. Nat. Hist., Vol. ‘‘ Fishes,” p. 605.

3‘*The Osteology of Cromeria ntlotica and Galaxias attenuatus,’’~Zoo:

Jahrb., 1903, Bd. XVIII, pp. 58-70.

490 WILLIAM K, GREGORY

These characters and the many similarities to the Salmonide

“incline Jordan to regard the Galaxiide and Haplochitonide

as Isospondyls. But they lack the mesocoracoid, and Boulenger

has consequently placed them with the Haplomi. In order to

express their wide differences from the typical Haplomi we set

them apart from the Esocoidea in a codrdinate superfamily

Galaxoidea. Boulenger shows that the present range of the

‘group in Southern Africa, Australia, New Zealand, and South

America may be accounted for by the fact that the genus

Galaxias is not confined to fresh waters but occurs also in the sea.

2. The Dalliide or Alaska Black Fishes. These peculiar

forms, in which the coracoids are coalesced and cartilaginous

and the actinosts are represented by a longitudinally divided

and distally fringed cartilaginous plate, were set apart by Gill

as the order Xenomi; but their close relationship to the true

Haplomi has been demonstrated by Starks.1 We may provision-

ally assign them to a separate superfamily, the Dalloidea.

3. The Stephanoberycide (Crowned Beryces). ‘‘This [abys-

sal] family has hitherto been placed near the Berycide, among

the Acanthopterygii, but there are no spinous rays in the dorsal

and anal fins, and the ventrals formed of one simple and four

or five branched rays are abdominal’ (Boulenger.) The air

bladder has a wide duct (Boulenger). Mr. Tate Regan (see p.498)

regards this family as possibly related to the ancestors of

the Anacanthini or Cods. Gill suggests that the Stephanobery-

cide may be degraded berycoids in which the ventral fins have

lost their normal connection with the clavicle.

4. The Percopside. The Sand-rollers inhabit the Great

Lakes, the rivers and streams of the northern Mississippi valley

and of Canada, and the Columbia River. This family (repre-

sented in the present fauna by only two genera, each with a single

species) is of extraordinary interest, since, according to Jordan

and Evermann, it is apparently derived directly from “the

extinct transitional forms through which the Haplomi and

Acanthopterygii have descended from allies of the Isospondyl1.

The group shows the remarkable combination of true fin spines,

1‘*The Osteology of Dallia pectoralis.”’ Zool. Jahrb., Bd. XXI, Heft 3

1904, Pp. 249-262.

THE ORDERS OF TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES 491

ctenoid scales, and a percoid mouth [Acanthopterygian charac-

ters| with the adipose fin [also open air duct], abdominal ventrals,

and naked head of the Isospondyli” (Jordan and Evermann).

“The relations of the Percopside with such archaic spiny-rayed

fishes as Aphredoderus and Elassoma are certainly not remote,

and the close resemblance of the head of Percopsis to that of

Gymnocephalus (Acerina) [the Ruffe of the Percide] may be

more than accidental’’ (Jordan). The family is made a suborder

(Salmoperce) of the Acanthopteri by Jordan and Evermann

with the following definition: “‘ Adipose fin present; dorsal and

anal with spines in very small number; ventral fins abdominal,

with more than 5 soft rays [9g], vertebre about 35.’’ On the other

hand, Boulenger believes that “‘an analysis of their characters

shows them to belong to the Haplomi, of which they may be

regarded as highly specialized members having evolved in the

direction of the Acanthopterygu.” By Boulenger the degree

of separation from other Haplomi is indicated in the synopsis of

families (p. 606) as,follows: ‘‘Dorsal and anal fins with true

spines; scales ctenoid; an adipose dorsal; ventral fins with 9

rays.’’ These characters taken together appear to us to justify

the ordinal separation of the Percopside from the Haplomi.

(5) Cobitopsidz. The Oligocene genus Cobitopsis may belong

with the Haplomi or Synentognathi. The family Ammodytide

may be related to the Cobitopside (Boulenger), or since one of

them, Embolichthys, has the ventrals beneath the throat (jugular)

the family may be allied to the Percophiida among the Acan-

thopterygii Jugulares (Gill, Jordan)—another instance of the

confusingly close analogical remembrances so ca uent among

teleostome fishes.

Superorder MESICHTHYES (cont'd)

Order Synentognathi! Gull.

(Plate XXIX.)

The Needle Fishes and Flying Fishes.

Jordan (1905, pp. 208-214) divides the group into two families.

, Sane > : ra - 3

1ouv, together, évrds, within, yva0os, jaw, in allusion to the fusion

of the lower pharyngeals.

492 WILLIAM K. GREGORY

as follows: (1) Belonidz, the Garfishes. These have strong

jaws and teeth, the third upper pharyngeal is small with few

teeth, the maxillary is firmly soldered to the premaxillary and

the vertebre have zygapophyses. (2) Exoccetide, the Skippers

(Scombresox), Half-beaks, and Flying-fishes. These have small

and nearly equal teeth, the maxillary is separate from the pre-

maxillary, the third upper pharyngeal is much enlarged, and there

are no zygapophyses on the vertebre. The genera Hemiexo-

cetus and Fodiator are intermediate in structure and in leaping

or flying habits between the Half-beaks (Hyporhamphus, Hemi-

rhamphus) and the true Flying-fishes. All these forms are in-

cluded in the single family Scombresocide by Smith Woodward

and Boulenger.

The order‘! retains archaic or isospondylous characters and

agrees with the Haplomi in the lack of fin spines, and in the

abdominal position of the ventrals, which have more than five

rays; and a further agreement with the Haplomi is the absence

of the mesocoracoid arch. A possible representative of the

coronoid of the lower jaw, is, however, retained. As in the

Thoracostraci? (1) the open communication between the swim

bladder and the gut has been lost (physoclistous condition),

(2) the parietal bones are absent or well separated by the supra-

occipital, (3) the exoccipitals are not united over the basi-

occipitals, (4) the scapula is suspended from the skull by a

simple non-furcate posttemporal, and (5) the supraclavicle

when present is small, (6) the postclavicle is absent, (7) para-

pophyses are developed on all the abdominal vertebree (Starks’).

In characters 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, aS well as in the high position of

the pectoral fins and in many other characters, they agree with

the typical Percesoces; andthus tend to connect the physostomes

(represented by the Haplomi) with the physoclists.

The character to which the name Synentognathi refers is the

complete union of the lower pharyngeals in the median line,

1 Starks, E. C., ‘“A Review of the Synentognathous Fishes of Japan,’”’

Proc. U. S. National Mus., Vol. XXVI, 1904, pp. 525-544. .

2Starks, E. C., ‘‘The Shoulder Girdle and Characteristic Osteology of

the Hemibranchiate Fishes,’’ Proc. U. S. National Mus., Vol. XXV, 1902,

Pp. 619-634.

THE ORDERS OF TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES 493

a condition independently acquired elsewhere, notably by the

labroid or pharyngognathous fishes among Acanthopterygians.

The upper pharyngeals are variously enlarged and afford good

differential characters for splitting the group up into families

(Starks, Jordan). A peculiar and characteristic detail is the

position of the lateral line, which is concurrent with the belly.

The Sauries (Scombresocide proper) “bear strong analogical

resemblances to the mackerels in form, color, and habits, as

well as in the dorsal and anal finlets’’ (Starks). Hence thename

Scombresocide or mackerel pikes.

Belone and Scombresox are known from the Upper Miocene of

‘Croatia and Algeria, while Hemirhamphus is recorded from the

Upper Eocene of Monte Bolca near Verona, Italy. Jordan

(1905, p. 214) suggests that the genera Exocetus, Exonautes,

and Cypselurus are of very recent [?Upper Tertiary] origin.

Boulenger (1904, p. 632) thinks that Protaulopsis, hitherto re-

ferred to the Sea-horse assemblage may belong to the Synentog-

nathi.

Superorder THorAcosTRaci! Swinnerton.

(Plate XXIX,

This superorder, which has been shown by several authors

_ to be a natural group, embraces (1) the order Hemibranchii of

SS eS OTe) —

Cope, including the Gasterosteride or Sticklebacks, the Aulo-

rhynchide or Tube-snouts, the Protosyngnathide, the Aulos-

tomide, the - Fistulariide or Cornet-fishes, the Macrorham-

phoside or Snipe-fishes, the Centriscide, the Amphisilide; (2) the

Lophobranchii of Cuvier, including the Solenostomatide or

‘Tube-mouths, the Syngnathide or Pipe-fishes and Sea-horses.

(The Pegasidz which are usually treated as Lophobranchs are

discussed on p. 505)

Setting aside for the moment the peculiar lines of specializa-

tion of this order, we have left certain primary ancestral charac-

ters in which the group resembles the Synentognathi and the

19@pa€, thorax, doTpaxov, potsherd, shelly test, in allusion to the

‘shelly exoskeleton of many of the forms.

(Phthinobranchii Hay, Hemibranchii Cope, Lophobranchii Cuvier,

Physoclisti in part.)

494 WILLIAM K. GREGORY

Percesosces, and thus represents a considerable advance upon the

Isospondyli. These are the loss of the mesocoracoid, the lack of

open communication between the swim bladder (when present),

and the gut, the separation of the parietals by the supraoccipital.

Archaic isospondylous characters are the abdominal or

subabdominal position of the pelvic fins (when present),

and the suspension of the shoulder girdle from the cranium

by a bony posttemporal. The latter bone is simple, non-

furcate, and immovably attached to or even fused with the

cranium.

Progressive characters are the following: (1) In the ancestral

types (the Sticklebacks which, as shown by Gill! lead beautifully

into the Aulorhynchidz) the pelvis is either free or attached to the

backwardly produced coracoids (hypocoracoids), but this con-

nection may be secondarily lost in the more specialized forms

through partial atrophy of the shoulder girdle; (2) the coracoids

(hypocoracoids) are much enlarged, forming so-called “infracla-

vicular plates’ often enameled externally; (3) the anterior

vertebre (except in Gasterosteids) are more or less modified or

coalesced, often forming a long tube; (4) the branchial arches

are always more or less reduced; (5) the branchial lamelle are

pectinated (Hemibranchit), or producedinto tufts (Lophobranchit) ;

(6) the dorsal fin often has a spiny portion consisting of free spines,

and the anal fin also occasionally develops a spine; (7) the snout

in the Gasterosteide is either conical or but slightly tubiform,

but in all the higher forms it is fully tubiform, the small mouth

being terminal and bounded solely by the premaxillaries; (8)

the scales are small (Fistulariide), reduced (Aulorhynchide),

or absent (Gasterosteidz), progressively superseded by bony

scutes; the latter process culminates in the complete bony

cuirass of Amphisile, which is fused with the enlarged ribs and

other portions of the endoskeleton.

In discussing the probable affinities of the Hemibranchii and

the Percesoces (excepting Sphyreena), Dr. Starks? enumerates the

1 Gill “On the Mutual Relations ot the Hemibranchiate Fishes,’’ Pros.

Acad. Nat. Sct. Phila., 1884, p. 154.

-“The Shoulder Girdle and Characteristic Osteology of the Hemi-

branchiate. Fishes.”’ Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., Voi. XXV, 1902, p. 622.

THE ORDERS OF TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES 495

following characters as common to both groups: (1) the parapo-

physes are developed on all the abdominal vertebre; (2) the

supraclavicle when present is small; (3) the exoccipitals are not

united above the basioccipital; (4) the supraclavicle, when

present is reduced in size;.(5) Fustularia and Aulostomus have

processes running backward from the epiotics, which are strikingly

similar to the epiotic processes possessed by all the Percesoces.

On the other hand, the Hemibranchs easily stand apart from the

Percesoces ‘‘in having no opisthotics and usually no parietals;

in having the posttemporals simple, not typically forked; and

in having the clavicle composed of a single piece when present

(composed of two pieces in the Percesoces).”’

The most generalized form, Gasterosteus, is carnivorous and

active, but the prey is the small “fry” of other fishes which

the Sticklebacks seek out “with the utmost industry, sagacity,

and greediness.”” The taste for minute prey to be sought by

poking about in odd corners may have determined some of the

peculiar specializations of the Sea-horse order. We may imagine

these to have continually sought smaller and smaller food until

the tiny particles came to be sucked up by the elongate muzzle.

After probably passing through a stage somewhat like Syngnathus

but less eel-like the ancestral Sea-horse did not need the quick-

darting form of body to capture its food or escape enemies; hence

the fan-like tail fin was suppressed (in Hippocampus), and the

rapidly vibrating pectoral and dorsal fins enabled the fish to

poise, humming-bird fashion, while sucking food through its tub-

ular beak. The pectoral fins have been thought also to assist in

drawing a steady current of water through the gillchamber. Ata

a very early period protection was secured by the development of

an osseous cuirass and (in certain forms) of fucus-like outgrowths

of the skin. Respiratory improvements consisted in the elabora-

tion of tufted gills from the pectinate type. For the elaborate

* nesting habits and attentive care of the eggs by both sexes in

the Sticklebacks, may have been substituted first the adhesion

' of the eggs to the abdomen of the male, then the develop-

'-ment in the male of abdominal grooves and ridges to hold

the eggs, finally, by fusion of opposite ridges, a perfected

pouch.

496 WILLIAM K. GREGORY

Superorder ACANTHOPTEROIDE!! (nom. nov.)

(Plate X XIX.)

The superorder ACANTHOPTEROIDEI may be taken to include

the orders Percesoces, Anacanthini, Labyrinthici, Acanthop-

terygii, Selenichthyes (Inc. Sedis), Tzniosomi, Plectognathi

Hypostomides (Inc. Sedis.), Opisthomi, Pediculati. The air

bladder if present is without open duct (save in certain Bery-

cidz), the parietals are always separated by the supraoccipitals,

the mouth is usually “‘bordered by premaxillaries to the ex-

clusion of the maxillaries, and if these should by exception enter

the oral edge they are always toothless’”’ (Boulenger). The

orbitosphenoids are typically absent (retained in Berycide).

The pectoral arch, typically of the Perciform type, is suspended

from the skull (save in Opisthomi). There is no mesocoracoid.

The ventral fins, if present, are usually below or in front of the

pectorals. The pelvic bones, if present, are typically attached to

the clavicular arch either movably and by ligament in most

Percesoces and Nomeiformes or more firmly in Acanthopterygii

and the remaining orders. Fins usually with spines, ventral

fins typically with 1 spine and 5 soft rays. Scales various,

typically ctenoid. Vertebre typically 10 + 14 but frequently

increased in number through “repetitive degeneration.”’

The superorder Acanthopteroidei represents the highest

phases of piscine evolution or “‘ichthyization.’”’ From the

swollen stream of central types realized in the Percesoces, the

short-bodied scombroids, zeoids, berycoids, percoids, by cen-

trifugal development many new types have been thrown off,

which constitute an irregular but less thickly crowded zone of

differentiation of the second degree, including such types as the

long-bodied Scombroids, the Squamipinnes or Cheetodontoids, the

Pharyngognathi or Labroids, the Pareioplitee (Scorpznids,

Cottids Triglids, etc.) the Jugulares (Blenniids, Trachinids, etc.)

the Gobioids. Each of these in turn has become a new center

or vortex of differentiation and they have thrown off such’groups

as the Heterosomata, the Plectognathi, the Hypostomides, Disco-

cephali Opisthomi, Pediculati,which may be said to constitute’the

sparsely filled zone of differentiation of the third degree(Pl. XXIX)

1Acanthopteri, «tOos, form.

See ee ee ee ee ee ee ee

Pe ee eee ee eee

THE ORDERS OF TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES 497

Superorder ACANTHOPTEROIDEI (cont'd).

(Plate XXIX.)

Order Percesoces! Cope.

This group, being on the borderland between soft-rayed and

spiny-finned fishes, may be classified with either, according to

the characters selected to separate the spiny-finned fishes from

the orders that lead upto them. Cope proposed the term to in-

clude only the Atherinide (Silversides), the Mugilide (Mullets),

the Sphyrenide (Barracudas), but Smith Woodward and

Boulenger? include not only the Synentognathi but also several

families which are regarded by the American school as Acan-

thopterygit.

If we accept the term in its limited sense the order is readily

defined from the Synentognathi, on the one hand, and from

the true Acanthopterygii, on the other. Although certain

Percesoces (e.g. Atherina area) show a general resemblance to

the more generalized Synentognathi (e.g. Chriodorus atherin-

oides), and although fossil forms may be discovered, intermediate

between the two orders, yet in the Percesoces a trenchant dis-

tinction from the Synentognaths and other physoclists with

abdominal ventrals is afforded by the fins, in the appearance (1)

of a separate spinous dorsal more or less remote from the soft

dorsal, and (2) of an anterior spine in the pelvic fins. Further-

more the ventral fins are more forward than in the Synentog-

nathi and the pelvic bones (save in Sphyrenide) are either

attached to the backwardly produced postclavicles (Mugilide,

Polynemidz) or by ligament to the clavicular symphysis (Ather-

inidez, Chiasmodontide). The ventral fin formula is now re-

duced tol, 5. In order to differentiate the Percesoces from the

true Acanthopteryeii ‘“we must turn to the well known external

characters—a spinous dorsal in conjunction with the abdominal

ventral fins, high pectoral fins, and unarmed opercles [1.e. opercu-

lum and preoperculum without posterior spiny processes].”’

(Starks.)

1 Perca, perch, esox, pike, in allusion to the mingling of ancathopterous

and haplomous characters.

2 Cambr. Nat. Hist., Vol. ‘“‘Fishes,’’ etc., p. 636.

3 Starks, E. C., ‘‘The Osteological Characters of the Fishes of the Sub-

order Percesoces,” Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., Vol. XXII, 1899, pp. 1 et seq.

498 WILLIAM K. GREGORY

Starks shows that the skull and shoulder girdle of Sphyrenide,

Atherinide, and Mugilide present a number of peculiar charac-

ters in common, among which are the following: (1) epiotics of

adult produced backward and more or less divided into bristle-

like filaments (2) supraoccipital developed posteriorly, not ex-

tending above level of balance of cranium, (3) postclavicle

divided into superior and inferior parts (Starks).

The Polynemidz or Threadfishes of the shores of the tropical

seas, and the deep sea Chiasmodontide present many detailed

resemblances! to the Sphyrenide-Atherinide-Mugilide group,

and probably belong in the present order. Jordan (’96) notes.

the resemblance of this family to the Scizenide of the Acanthop-

terygii on the one hand and to the Mugilide of the present order

on the other; but remarks that in both cases the resemblances.

may be merely analogical.

The Crossognathide (a Cretaceous family including Crosso-

gnathus and Syllemus of the American Cretaceous) are regarded

by Smith Woodward as forerunners of the Percesoces, Crosso-

gnathus agreeing very closely (so far as known) with the existing

Atherines, but differing in having one continuous dorsal fin with

the right and left halves of each Spine not completely fused

together (Smith Woodward) ,—a very primitive condition. How-

ever, Boulenger (1904, p. 565) believes that this family should

probably be placed with or near the Clupeidz among the Iso-

spondyli. The earliest members of the families Mugilide, Sphy-

renide, and Atherinide occur in the Upper Cretaceous of

England, Colorado, and New Mexico. (Zittel, 1902).

Superorder ACANTHOPTEROIDEI (cont'd).

(Plate XXIX.)

Order Anacanthini? (/., Miller)

The Cods.

The order Anacanthini, properly including only the true Cods.

(Gadide) and their allies (Macruride, Murznolepidide) was

formerly burdened by the inclusion of the Heterosomata.

1Boulenger, 1904, pp. 640, 641.

2a, ava, privative, akavOa, thorn, spine, in allusion to the typically

spineless condition of the anterior dorsal fin.

THE ORDERS OF TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES _ 499

4Pleuronectide) or Flatfishes, but this association has been

shown by Boulenger to be wholly unnatural. The Anacanthini

differ from the Acanthopterygii chiefly in: (1) the lack of fin

spines in the vertical and ventral fins (the first dorsal of some

Macrurids has a single spiny ray); (2) in the feeble, ligamentous

attachment of the pelvic bones to the pectoral arch; (3) the

separation of the prodtic from the exoccipital by the enlarged

opisthotic; (4) theloss ofthe primary homocercal tail (Appendix IT,)

the caudal fin-supports of the seemingly homocercal tail of the

Gadide being perfectly symmetrical above and below the

vetebral axis and composed mainly of dorsal and anal rays

(Boulenger!); (5) the position of the scapular foramen, which

lies between the hypercoracoid (scapula) and hypocoracoid

(‘coracoid’’), instead of perforating the hypercoracoid, as in

most other Teleosts. However Tate Regan has shown that in

one of the Macruridz the position of this “‘scapular foramen’”’ is

normal. As in the typical Acanthopterygii the parietals are

separated by the supraoccipital, the toothed premaxillaries

alone enter the upper margin of the mouth, the maxillaries simply

acting as levers for the protrusion of the mouth, the air bladder

is without open duct, the ventral fins are below or in front of the

pectorals.

Of the two principal families, Gadide and Macruride, the

Macruride are believed by Tate Regan and Boulenger to be, on

the whole, more primitive. “In the Macruride we pass from

the more generalized forms with cycloid scales, terminal mouth,

and continuous or subcontinuous dorsal fins, to those with

rough or spinous scales, inferior mouth, and projecting snout, and

a well differentiated anterior dorsal” (Tate Regan). Among the

more central Macrurids the genus Macruronus closely resembles

Merlucius of the Gadide in its skull, but is ‘“‘a true Macrurid

in the position of the ventrals and the absence of a caudal

fin” (Tate Regan). In the Gadide the scales are reduced, the

dorsal and anal fins are often divided into two or three portions,

and a secondary fan-like tail is formed from the dorsal and

anal fins. As to the derivation of the order, whether from

true Acanthopterygians or from some less specialized stock, such as

1Anu. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (7) Vol. X. Oct., 1902, p. 298.

5) OO) WILLIAM K. GREGORY

the Haplomi, Mr. Tate Regan, who has carefully studied the oste-

ology of the group, concludes that the absence of non-articulated

fin rays, the large number of rays in the ventrals, and the lack

of direct attachment of the pelvic bones to the clavicles, taken

together, must be regarded as primitive features. ‘“‘From their

anatomy and appearance,’ he says, “I am inclined to think

that the Gadoids are not related to the Percesoces, but are

derived from some Haplomous stock from which the Berycide

have also descended, and of which the Stephanoberycide may

well be the living representatives.’’!

The group is typically carnivorous, marine, often abyssal.

Fossil Gadoids are rare, but are recorded from the Eocene and

Miocene.

Superorder ACANTHOPTEROIDEI (cont'd).

Order Selenichthyes? Boulenger

(Plate XXIX.)

The Opahs.

The systematic position of the Opah or Kingfish (Family

Lampridide) is somewhat uncertain, but it seems entitled to

occupy at least provisionally a separate order. It may be re-

lated either (1) to the Thoracostraci as held by Boulenger,* or

(2) to such deep-bodied Scombroids as Brama and Mene (Gill).*

or it may possibly be “‘transitional between deep-bodied extinct

Ganoids [such as Dorypterus|] and the forms allied to Platax,

Zeus, and Antigonia’’ (Jordan). The Opahs resemble the

Bramidz in the heaviness of the shoulder girdle and in the great

dilatation of the coracoid (hypocoracoid); superficially they

1°°On the Systematic Position and Classification of the Gadoid or Ana-

canthine Fishes.”’ Aun. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (7), Vol. XI, May, 1903, pp.

459-400. St

2 Gedy vy, the moon, zy6vS, fish, in allusion to the gibbous form of the

body.

3Boulenger,G. A., ‘‘ Notes on the Classification of Teleostean Fishes.

Ill. On the Systematic! Position of the Genus Lampris, and on the

Limits7and Contents of the Suborder Catosteomi.”’ Ann. and Mag. Nat.

Hist., Vol. 10 (Ser.), Aug., 1902, pp. 147-152.

4 Gill, T. ‘‘On the Relations of the Fishes of the Family Lamprididze or

Opahs.”’ Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., Vol. XXVI, 1903, pp. 915-924.

THE ORDERS OF TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES 501

resemble Mene rather closely. The supposed relationships

either to the Thoracosfraci or to the Scombriformes turn upon

the resemblances of the shoulder girdle to that of Gasierosteus

among Thoracostraci and to that of such deep-bodied fishes as

’ Antigonia among the Acanthopterygii. The Opah differs from

typical Acanthopteri ‘“‘in-the absence of spines in the fins, and

the position of the ventral fins, together with the great number

of rays [14-17] in the latter, which is only met with in the lower

Teleosteans’’ (Boulenger). Gull suggests that the attachment

of the pelvis to the greatly enlarged hypocoracoids, as in the

Gasterosteidz, may be due to convergent evolution, and points

out that the Opah agrees with the Mackerel-like fishes in a

characteristic modification of the vertebre and in “‘the deep

bifurcation of the roots of the caudal rays which clamp the

hypural and epural bones.”’ The case is an instructive one as

illustrating the difficulty, without knowledge of the less special-

ized members of a group, of deciding whether resemblances to_

some other group are genetic or convergent.

Order Acanthopterygii ! Cuvier

The Spiny-rayed Fishes.

The structural characters enumerated under the superorder

Acanthopteroidei (page 497) are here seen in their most typical

condition. In addition, the opercle is always well developed.

the gill opening usually large and in front of the base of the pec-

toral fin, the scapula is typically perforated by the scapular

foramen, which may, however, appear between the scapula

andthe coracoid. It isnot certain whether the order is polyphy-

letic, or, as usually held, monophyletic and derived from Cre-

taceous Berycide, which are generally conceded to be directly

ancestral to the Perciformes. The Berycide retain such archaic

characters as an open swim-bladder, an orbitosphenoid, and more

than five soft rays in the ventrals. They are comparatively

numerous in the Upper Cretaceous and may conceivably have

given rise to the Stromateide through Berycopsis, to the deep-

bodied Scombroids through the Pempheridz, and to the Scor-

taxuavoa, a thorn, rrepvyzor, a fin, in allusion to the sharp spines in

the fins.

502 WILLIAM K. GREGORY

pidide through Azpichthys. On the other hand, all these and

other deep-bodied families, such as the Bramide, Kurtide,

Carangide, Menide, Bathyclupeide, Caproide (Antigoniide),

Zeide, Amphistiide, Chetodontide, may be the result of par-

allel evolution from similar but distantly related Cretaceous

families. Some of the Acanthopterygii may have been derived

from Cretaceous Percesoces (compare, for example, the suggestive

~resemblance of Sci@na to Polynemus), others from Cretaceous

Haplomi (e. g. Berycide, Aphredoderide, from Percopside).

Again the presence of Berycide, Stromateide, Scorpidide

(Aipichthys), Sparide, in the Upper Cretaceous and the flores-

cence of the order in the Eocene would push back the prob-

able origin of the different sections of the order to the Middle

Cretaceous, when very many Isospondyli and Haplomi were

doubtless independently evolving in the direction of the Acan-

thopterygii At any rate all the ancestral Acanthopterygi

probably were short-bodied, with the typical vertebral formula

of ro + 14, and all were in process of reducing the ventral

fin-formula to I, 5 (Boulenger).

The Acanthopterygii very early enjoyed an adaptive radiation

unequalled by that of any other order of fishes, so that by Lower

Eocene times Scombroids, Percoids, Labroids, Plectognaths,

Scorpenoids, Cottoids, Goboids, and Blennoids were already

well differentiated. The history of the order since the Eocene

is not fully known (Woodward).!

Superorder ACANTHOPTEROIDE! (cont'd).

Order Acanthopterygii Cuvier.

Suborder Percomorphi Cope.

Division Nometformes (divisio nova).

There is considerable divergence of opinion as to the systematic

position of the group of marine fishes formerly classified by

Jordan under the families Nomeide or Portuguese-men-of-war-

fishes, Centrolophide or Rudder-fishes, Stromateide or Butter-

1Cat. Foss. Fishes, Brit. Mus., Part IV, 1901, p. Xi.

THE ORDERS OF TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES 503

fishes, Icosteide or Rag-fishes, Acrotide, Tetragonuride or

Square-tails. By Gill and Jordan the first four families were

placed with the Scombroidea after the Bramide or Pomfrets,

while the Tetragonuride were segregated by Gill in a super-

family coérdinate with the Scombroidea. Boulenger sinks the

Nomeidz and Centrolophide in the Stromateide, the Acrotide

in the Icosteide, and believes that the near connection of the

Tetragonuride with the Stromateide is shown by the common

possession of cesophageal pouches beset with papille and gill-

raker-like knobs below the pseudobranchie. Both families are

pelagic or deep-sea, feeding on Crustaceans, the fry of other fish,

or more frequently upon Medusz, under the protection of whose

stinging tentacles certain of them swim, as in the Caranx medusi-

cola among Scombroids (Boulenger). The deep-sea Icosteide,

which have a flimsy cartilaginous skeleton, lack the cesophageal

teeth and the processes of the last gill arch, but Icosteus at least

has the gillraker-like knobs below the pseudobranchie and the

family is conceded by all to be allied to the Stromateide. The

Tetragonuride, though unlike the cycloid Bramide of the

Scombriformes in form, resemble them, according to Tate Regan,

in many significant details of the skeleton.

On the other hand, they present some resemblances to the

Mugilide near which they were placed by Giinther, and Boulenger

even places the whole group of families with the Percesoces,

thus removing them from all connection with the Scombriformes.

The group has apparently descended from some deep-bodied or

subcycloid forms resembling the Bramidz and probably retaining

the vertebral formula 10 + 14 which seems to be demanded for

the ancestral Acanthopterygians. This low formula is actually

very nearly realized inthe Black Ruffs or Rudder-fishes, Centro-

lophus, Palinurichthys (10 + 14 or 15), the number of vertebre

rising to 30-46 in the remaining Stromateide, 58 in the Tetra-

gonuride, and, finally, to as many as 70 in Acrotus of the Icos-

teide (Jordan ’96). In the Tetragonuride and Stromateide the

ventrals when present, have one spine and at most 5 soft rays,

as in Percesoces, Scombriformes, and typical Perciformes. As

we seem forced to rely on rather trivial but possibly significant

characters, the group may be distinguished from the Percesoces

504 WILLIAM K. GREGORY

by the presence of but a single long dorsal fin, the spinous

portion often much reduced, or else formed of numerous short —

spines. From the Scombriformes it may be distinguished by the

presence of the oesophageal pouches or when these are absent by

the gill raker-like knobs below the pseudobranchize. The small

cycloid scales (when present) of the Stromateide, Icosteide,

resemble those of many Scombriformes and of the Lampride,

while the scales of the Tetragonuride, which are described as hard,

bony, adherent, ciliated, and grooved or strongly keeled, may

perhaps be compared with the cycloid, heavily ridged or keeled

scales of the Bramide. The pelvic bones are free from the clavi-

cle in Tetragonuride, Icosteide, and in some Stromateide, in

others more closely, but still movably, attached by ligament

(Boulenger). On the assumption that this loose attachment

is “‘a primitive character and not the result of specializa-

tion, such as occurs in some cases among true Acanthoptery-

gians,’’ Boulenger, as we have said, removes the group from

the Scombriformes to the Percesoces. This enables him to

improve the technical definition of the Scombriformes, and,

furthermore, the Nomeiformes may well be remotely related to

the true Percesoces, by inheritance of the typical formule of

to + 14 in the vertebre andI, 5 in the ventral fins. But this

does not seem to lessen the phylogenetic significance of the

many resemblances of this group to the Scombriformes. Con-

vergence plus the inheritance of primitive characters hardly

seem enough to account for the detailed resemblances between

the Butter-fish, Rhombus (Poronotus) triacanthus of the family

Stromateide and the Common Pampano (Trachinotus carolinus)

of the family Carangide, or the osteological similarities between

the Tetragonuride and the Bramide. If, as Boulenger holds,

the families in question cannot be regarded as Scombriformes

without rendering it impossible to define that group, then I

suggest that they be segregated asa division, Nomeiformes, of the

suborder Percomorphi, codrdinate with and in the neighborhood

of the Scombriformes. Ifthe Upper Cretaceous genera Omosoma

and Platycormus are correctly referred to this group, the Nomei-

formes are older than any known Scombroids, and as old as any

other known Acanthopterygians.

THE ORDERS OF TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES 505:

Superorder ACANTHOPTEROIDEI (?)

(Plate X XIX.)

Order Hypostomides! Gull

The Sea-moths, Pegasidz, are often regarded as an offshoot

of the Stickleback-Sea-horse series, and they indeed resemble

different members of that assemblage in general appearance,

in the possession of a bony exoskeleton, pectinated gills, reduced

gill openings, a single dorsal fin, and in the loss of the preoper-

culum. But Boulenger? admits that the supposed relationship:

with the Thoracostraci is still somewhat doubtful, Gill assigned

the group to a separate suborder Hypostomides of the order

Teleocephali, following the suborder Acanthopterygii, and Day3

regarded Pegasus as a widely aberrant member of the Gurnard.

group, a view which seems favored by the following evidence.

Pegasus differs from the Thoracostraci in the fact that the greatly

enlarged pectorals are not vertical but horizontal, and the mouth

instead of being terminal as in the Sea-horses is placed beneath the

base of the elongate tubular snout. But these are also points.

of resemblance to certain of the Agonide3 among the cheek-

armored Acanthopterygii, with which there is also a general

agreement in the characters and arrangement of the dorsal

scutes, of the pectoral dorsal and caudal fins, in the dorsal position.

of the eyes, great reduction of the rays of the dorsal fins, etc.°

Order Opisthomi* Gill nec Cope

The Spiny Eels.

(Plate X XIX.)

These ‘‘spiny-finned eels,’’ forming the family Mastacambelide,.

were mistakenly grouped with the pelagic Notacanths (p. 483),

1 do, beneath, or@ua, mouth, in allusion to the position of the mouth

below the produced snout.

2 Cambridge Natural History, Vol. VII, p. 629.

3 Compare the figures of Pegasus draco in Day, Fishes of India pl. 1xi,.

fig. 1, and P. natans in Gunther, Introduction, etc., p. 483, with the

figures of certain Japanese Agonidz described by Jordan and Starks in

Proc. Nat. Mus., Vol. XX VII, 1904, p. 596, especially Podothecus thomp-

sont (fig. I1).

4 OmioGev, behind, @mos, shoulder, in allusion to the backward.

displacement of the pectoral arch.

506 WILLIAM K. GREGORY

by Cope. They parallel the true Apodes! in the anguilliform

body, the multiplication of the vertebre, gephyrocercal tail,?

loss of the ventral fins, reduction of the scales, and especially in

the severance of the pectoral girdle from all connection with the

skull, it being far removed from the skull and attached to the

vertebral column. The group inhabits brackish and fresh waters

of southern Asia and tropical Africa, and parallels the anguilli-

form Dipnoi, Gymnarchs (p. 470), and. Gymnotids of those

regions in its mud-loving habits and in the ability to respire air

directly. The allocation of this group to the Acanthopteroidei

(possibly to the Blenniidz, Boulenger) is‘indicated by a number

of characters, including the closed condition of the air-bladder,

the interjection between the parietals of the supraoccipital, and

the contact of the latter with the frontals, the presence of the

spines in the vertical fins, the exclusion of the maxillaries from

the border of the mouth.

APPENDIX I.

- Independent or homoplastic evolution of the eel-like jorm of body, illus-

ee in a list of eel-like vertebrates belonging to different families and

orders.

Criteria: anguilliform body with multiplication of vertebra, gephyro-

cercal tail, reduced pelvic limbs, usually predatory habits,

SUBCLASS ORDER, SUBORDER, ETC. FAMILY OR GENUS REMARKS.

~Cyclize Palzospondylus Incompletely anguilliform ,

Marsipobrancbii Hyperotreti Bdellostomide

s Hyperoarti Petromyzontidz

-Elasmobranchii Diplospondyli Chlamydoselachus Ventral fins only some-

what reduced.

.Dipneusti Sirenoidei Lepidosirenidze

Teleostomi Crossopterygii Calamoichthys

ss Chondrostei 3 (?) Belonorhynchys Incompletely anguilliform.

Isospondyli Stomiatide Tail not gephyrocercal.

ts ss Osteoglosside (Arapaima)

wy a Gymnarchidze

¢ Heteromi Notacanthide

a sf Halosauride

“ Heteromi (?) Dercetide

6 ss Fierasferide

ss Symbranchii All (2 families)

Apodes (proper) All (3 suborders and numerous families)

1 See Appendix I.

2 See Appendix II.

3 The scarcity of known eel-like forms among the Canoids is remark-

.ablee

;

THE ORDERS OF TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES 007

SUBCLASS ORDER, SUBORDER, ETC. FAMILY OR GENUS REMARKS.

Teleostomi Apodes (?) Car-

encheli Derichthyidze

as ApodesLyomeri Saccopharyngide

ss Nematognathi Several genera especially

$0 Clarias, Stegophilum.

oe Eventognathi Cobitide Tail not gephyrocercal.

co Gymnonoti _Gymnotide Eel-like Characins.

Haplomi Neochanna apeda (Galaxiide)

es Thoracostraci Several genera elongate but

: not strictly anguilliform

a Anacanthini Enchelyopus a Gadid

<6 Acanthop. Jugulares Ammodytide Tail not gephyrocercal..

“e “ Congrogadidz

ae s Blenniidz Chenops, Xiphasia,

Cryptacanthus Stathmonotus,

and many others.

ss ot Ptilichthyide

bs *s Zoarcide (Lycodes, Ly-

. cenchelys, and other

genera.)

fe ee Ophidiide

“s cs Ateleopodide (Podatelide)

i ss Brotulide (Bassoszetus

and 2 other genera)

ae Heterosomata Symphurus (a Soleid; body incont-

pletely elongate, tail gephy-

tocercal; apodal).

sé Tzeniosomi Trachypteride (Regale-

cus.)

ANGUILLIFORM AMPHIBIA, REPTILIA, MAMMALIA.

Amphibia Stegocephali Aistopodide (No limbs).

Ke Urodela Amphiumidze (Limbs vestigial).

CH Gymnophiona Coecilians (No limbs). 2

Reptilia Lacertilia Anguide (Ophisaurus, Anguis) (no.

limbs).

“s Ophidia Enhydrina (Body compressed, tail eel-

like).

fs Rhynchocephalia Saurophidium (?Aquatic)

(Limbs reduced).

<6 Pythonomorpha Tylosaurus etc. (But limbs functional).

a Crocodilia Metrtorhynchus (But limbs functional).

Mammalia Archzoceti Zeuglodon

APPENDIX II.

Evolution of the Caudal Fin. (Modified from Ryder: and Dollo?)

1**On the Origin of Heterocercy and the Evolution of the Fins and Fin-

Rays of Fishes.’’ Rept. U.S. Commission Fish and Fisheries, 1884, pp.

981-1107. Also in Am. Naturalist, 1885, pp. 90-97, 200-204.

2‘*Sur la Phylogénie des Dipneustes,’”’ Bull. Soc. Belgique de Geol.,

tome ix, 1895, pp. 79-128. ‘‘Results du Voyage du S. Y. Belgica . . .,”

Zoologie, Poissons, 4to, Anvers, 1904, pp. 234-239.

508 WILLIAM K. GREGORY

Stage 1, DipHycercy Notochord straight, cpisthure symmetrical and

separate from caudal fin.

Examples: Amphioxus, Paleospondylus, Cyclos-

tomes, certain Chimeroids (Hariotia), certain

Acanthodians, Chlamydoselachus, embryonic

sharks, ganoids, and teleosts.

Stage 2, HETEROcERCY Derived from diphycercy by development of the

true caudal fin beneath the notochord, the

opisthure upturned. The dermal portion may

become fan-like (rhipidoid).

Stage 3, Homocrercy Derived from heterocercy by progressive upturning

and reduction of the opisthure and by the co-

alescence of the posterior interhemals into

broad “hypurals,’ which form a fan-shaped

(rhipidoid) bony tail. The dermal portion may

be fan-like (rhipidoid) or pointed (gephyroid).

Examples: Clupea, Salmo.

Stage 4, EunHomocercy Derived from homocercy by the loss of the

(New term) opisthure, the reduction of the hypurals and

epurals, which are functionally replaced by

ossified dermal rays, producing a perfectly

symmetrical bony tail.

Examples: mackere: group.

(= Homocercal rhipidocercy Dollo.)

Stage 2’, GpPHYROCERCY Derived from heterocercy by degeneration of

the opisthure; the posterior portion of the

median superior and inferior fins fuse posteriorly

to form a new and symmetrical, pointed tail fin.

Examples: Polypterus, Ceratodus.

(=Heterocercal gephyrocercy Dollo.)

Stage 3’, Hypocercy (new term). Derived from homocercy by co-

alescence of the fan-like caudal with the pro-

longed anal, the conjoined inferior fins being

then pulled out into a long pointed tail fin.

Example: Notopterus, Macrouride.

(=Homocercal gephyrocercy Dollo.)

Stage 3’ IsocERcy Derived from homocercy or hypocercy by the

eB atrophy of the pointed tail and the development

of a new fan-shaped tail around the stump of

the old one.

Examples: Gadus, Anguilla Stmenchelys.

(=Dorso-caudal rhipidocercy Dollo.)

Lreptocercy A condition in which the tail ends in a long delicate

wisp, often an adaptation to deep-sea conditions.

May be derived from Stages 1, 2, 2’, or 3’.

[Annats N. Y. Acap. Scr., Vor. XVII, No. 4, Part II, pp. 509-518,

August, 1907.|

A PERIDOTITE DIKE IN THE COAL MEASURES

OF SOUTHWESTERN PENNSYLVANIA.

By J. F. Kemp anp J. G. Ross.

The discovery of dikes and other forms of intrusive rocks in |

the almost undisturbed Paleozoic strata west of the Appalachian

upheavals is a.matter of much scientific interest and has been

so esteemed in the several announcements which have been

hitherto made. The occurrences are all in localities where,

under ordinary circumstances, intrusive rocks would not be

anticipated, and they tend to make a geologist cautious in

inferring the necessary absence of igneous phenomena beneath

any region from the mere fact that they do not appear on the

surface. By way of introduction to a new occurrence it will be

of interest to recapitulate briefly with the accompanying outline

map the cases already known.

The first three discoveries were mentioned by Lardner

Vanuxem in his report on the Third District of New York in

1842, although one of them, the Syracuse Serpentine, had been

noted five years before.t The serpentine, however, was not

recognized as igneous in its nature, until the microscopic exam-

inations of Professor Geo. H. Williams demonstrated its true

character in 1887. Since then other neighboring occurrences

have been discovered from time to time and have been described

in the citations given below. Speaking in general terms, the

rock is a peridotite and penetrates the Onondaga Salt Group.

In some more recently afforded material C. H. Smyth, Jr., has

identified melilite, and it is possible that this mineral was once

1For a full account of this interesting rock and a sketch of its history

in the literature see Geo. H. Williams, ‘‘On the Serpentine (Peridotite)

Occurring in the Onondaga Salt Group at Syracuse, N. Y.,’’ Amer. Jour.

Se7.,, Aug. 1887, p. 137.

599

510 J. F. KEMP AND J. G. ROSS

a ee aes me

) hf ~y 3) }

{ “A 4 ——

Menominee H i =

b//, Marinette §, 3 Hints e % < boy) j

Warisd SS Tear ie all gdensbidka % |

oy rf

t \s - READS

Applat

PP fon. ° Mairi ste Ry bs) | F cortownl

Oshkash & @

Fort ie Litc'e Q s LZ le, S swede

. ta oO

° Sag mrate 2 Aster Cf) fe so a Sees ‘J

ono ik ree BRELREG OR ci 2 H “Lockport L , . Fe Sch aetna a]

| , 2 flint | ‘, ——-— 5 Bifralo PA TT Sele aibainy:

nee Grind Rahiage rt fac | y g

ml : » Lansing J oD) phaca ©

z1lel E ; E hrenrcirhe SS Binghprten sn .gstons

ew m ao rk Se ngs

ore focktard ere ttle Creek aaeson oth ee Hornelisville® Corpeng See scat:

»Llgin Leconte) | Ann £Fbor a7 SSH 3

ee Lepiyhkert,

6 OLR PY ee ee ry burs

Min, South Bera| \—Tateatos | pe: : Sach

en City ! wunksbarrc} fe ‘

H , “A are

: ; Say he S : i u 7

conta (Ompesport i j o Lima ° shield “lepton Poreshille eA tw le w oT

Bloomington i Kokoma Mario i Btanstiele Aug. bur eKeadi N- ene

1 kakiyets, i ) We Steeubgreaile di

wal ee hse MMuncee; Piqua’ A NEN ainte aT blaure Vine nile i = ca

pe paecatur | Richmonh sity feelel BrOUS — Zanesvitle « Chtrmbersburge |

ier Hauedndianupotis| een ‘Lancaster ae RY, fet ER =

of | r nea me Po

a ra) 1 eHanilton REA aoe Kitcersbifin +"

- & | eCincinnati f

ae ats ——— ——___| “72. &

= Ss Mawkisdehs ON rongnow 6 re

evtitle y b AS rennes oe os Rerton S =~

AYO But \

i ew Albany ofa” Bontvort fi i a Bie ,

es ay untiugton | (F g

Evansville Louisy Ue i QO \ cs a i A

l_ = . ° Leacing toi . 4 i

= OHI aS SS

Owensboro » Ws \ Ey e Jopeet ees

i te ‘ N 4 Miinchestont"

4 oH N ais io) oN NL Radnoke. Whynchbury Sere,

sot ¥ | ie ey, (ee tetersbury

Paducah, > = = pet SS : > = =" SST P

as a” V ¥ = Portsmouth

- : " C

Sa Ey Rees T SSS Eo: a _._ Dani, = ae

¢ ‘ ee ene Coleone zh ee

iy Nashville Taner =

T rE 1 nozrville RSA

Pe Nea Ning Bin iS es aia) ain i Raleigh a

£ iA N_/

4 7 | NOR TH c.A/R OLE

Asheville | \

FIGURE I.

Outline map of known localities of basic dikes from New York to western

Kentucky.

of general occurrence, but that it has disappeared in the course

of decomposition, to which it is quite sensitive. P. F. Schneider

has noted that one of the dikes strikes N. 5° E., and this bear-

ing has been used in plotting the map here employed.!

iN. H. Darton and J. F. Kemp, “‘A New Intrusive Rock near Syracuse,”

Bull. Geol. Soc. Amer., V1, p. 477, 1895. P. F. Schneider, “New Ex-

posures of Eruptive Dikes in Syracuse, N. Y.,”’ Amer. Jour. Sct., July

1902, p.24. See also Proc. Onondaga Acad. of Sciences, I, p. 110, 1903. C.

H. Smyth, Jr., “‘Petrography of the recently discovered dikes at Syracuse,

etc.,”” Amer. Jour. Sci., July 1902, p. 26. E.H. Kraus, ““A New Exposure

of Serpentine at Syracuse, N. Y.,”’ Amer. Geologist, May, 1904, p, 330.

—————— OO

_ A PERIDOTITE DIKE IN PENNSYLVANIA COAL MEASURES 511

The second record by Vanuxem is that of a dike near Manheim

Bridge, on East Canada creek, 75 or 80 miles east of Syracuse.

The dike comes up on a well-known fault between the Beek-

mantown limestone on one side and the Trenton and Utica

formations on the other. (See p. 270 of Vanuxem’s Report.)

The petrography of this and of more recently discovered neighbor-

ing dikes has been worked out by C. H. Smyth, Jr., who proves

that the rock is the rare and interesting species alnoite, a

melilite-basalt. The dike strikes with the fault, which varies

from N. 40° E. to N. 20° E., the former bearing being the

direction where the dikes are exposed. P. F. Schneider sub-

sequently identified five dikes, all of which cross the creek.

This rock is of much interest in connection with the new occur-

rence here described, even though no melilite has been as yet

demonstrable in the latter. Professor Smyth has also worked

out some extremely interesting data regarding the amount of

weathering since the disappearance of the glacial ice-sheet.

The third occurrence mentioned by Vanuxem is of four narrow

dikes near Ludlowville, N. Y., in the Genesee slate (p. 169 of

his Report). Ludlowville is about ten miles north of Ithaca

on the east side of Cayuga lake, and is approximately fifty miles

southwest of Syracuse. As will appear, the region about the

southern end of Cayuga lake is another center of fairly numerous

outbreaks. The original discovery has since been added to by

others in and near Ithaca, and in the largest case of all, in a

small ravine, a mile south of Glenwood, a dike, has been reported

by V. H. Barnett which is certainly 25 ft. and may be more

than too ft. in width. These dikes cut the Devonian strata as

high up as the Portage. The petrography has been most care-

fully worked out by G. C. Matson. Olivine and biotite are the

chief minerals present, with less abundant diopside, magnetite,

iC. H. Smyth, Jr., ‘‘ A Third Occurrence of Peridotite in Central New

York,’ Amer. Jour. Sci., April 1892, p. 322. ‘‘Alnoite Containing an

Uncommon Variety of Melilite,” Idem, August 1893, p. 104.‘ Weathering

of Alnoite at Manheim, N. Y.,”’ Bull. Geol. Soc. Amer., TX., 1897, p. 257.

P. F. Schneider, ‘‘ The Correlation of Some Alnoite Dikes in East Canada

Creek, N. Y.,’’ Science, Nov. 24, 1895, p. 673. The first dike discovered is

illustrated in the cut on p. 247 of Scott’s Introduction to Geology.

512 J. F. KEMP AND J. G. ROSS

ilmenite, perofskite, picotite, and apatite. Alteration products q

are also much in evidence, but no melilite was discovered. The

dikes strike nearly north and south and are believed by Mr.

Matson, from their relations with the gentle folds and faults to

have entered near the close of the Paleozoic.1

Three interesting bowlders have been found in the drift at

Aurora, Canandaigua, and Syracuse, apparently from not remote

sources. They are all obviously dike rocks of basic character,

and are in quite fresh condition. They are of unusual types,

each, however, differing from the dikes which have been found

in place. Full descriptions are given in the papers cited below. ?

In southwestern Pennsylvania, 200 miles from Ithaca, the

dike occurs which is shortly to be described in this paper. In

Elliott Co., Ky., 200 miles farther to the southwest there occur

two dikes less than a mile apart and cutting the Coal Measures.

The dikes strike northwest and the eastern one sends off a long

prong to the northeast. The longest exposure is a little less

than a mile in length, and the greatest width is fifty feet. The

rock is a typical peridotite in which olivine is much the most

abundant mineral, constituting with the serpentine referable

to it, more than half the mass. With it are pyrope, ilmenite,

enstatite, biotite, and apatite in decreasing order among the

original components, and serpentine, dolomite, magnetite,

and perofskite (first determined as octahedrite) among the

secondary.?

1J. F. Kemp, “‘Peridotite Dikes in the Portage Sandstones near Ithaca,

N. Y.,” Amer. Jour. Sci., Nov., 1891, p.410. In this paper several earlier

local records are mentioned. P. F. Schneider, “‘Notes on Eruptive Dikes

near Ithaca, N. Y.,” Proc. Onondaga Acad. Scz., I, 130; pe rgosee eae

Barnett, ‘‘ Notice of the Discovery of a New Dike at Ithaca, N. Y.,” Amer.

Jour. Sci., March, 1905, p. 210. G.C. Matson, “Peridotite Dikes near

Ithaca, N. Y.,’’ Jour. Geol., April-May, 1905, p. 264.

2J. F. Kemp, ‘‘A Remarkable Erratic from Aurora, N. Y.,”’ Trans. N.

Y. Acad. Sci., XI, 1892, p.126. B.K. Emerson, ‘‘ Notes upon Two Boulders

of very Basic Eruptive Rock from the West Shore of Canandaigua Lake,

etc.,” Am. Rep. N. Y. State Mus., 46, p. 251, 1893. This eruptive had a

piece of Trenton limestone adhering to it and showing contact effects.

C. H. Smyth, Jr., “‘On the Syracuse bowlder,”’ Amer. Jour. Scz., July,

1902, Pp. 30.

3J. S. Diller, “‘Peridotite of Elliott Co., Ky.,” Bull. U. S. Geol. Survey,

_A PERIDOTITE DIKE IN PENNSYLVANIA COAL MEASURES 513

Some 275 miles west of the Elliott Co. exposure there is a

similar dike in Crittenden Co., Ky. It appears in a fault, which

has the St. Louis beds of the Lower Carboniferous on the north-

west and the Upper Chester and Coal Measure beds on the

southeast. It strikes N. 44° E., is known over a stretch of six

miles, and is more than 20 ft. wide at one place. At least one

other dike has been discovered in the same section. The rock

is a mica-peridotite, 75 per cent. of the mass being biotite and

serpentine from olivine. Perofskite, magnetite, chlorite, and

calcite make up the remainder. Some fluorspar deposits are

-associated with the dike.!

More than 300 miles southwest of the last-named exposure is

found the peridotite of Pike Co., Ark. This again is a biotite-

bearing peridotite with augite, perofskite, and magnetite. It

certainly cuts both Carboniferous and early Cretaceous strata

and is believed to have entered at the close of the Cretaceous.?

In central Arkansas there are numerous basic dikes outside

the area of nephelite-syenite which are of peculiar mineralogical

composition. They are rich in biotite and augite but lack oli-

vine. No melilite could be identified.°

Leaving for the moment this review of earlier records, the

reader may now follow the details of the Pennsylvania occur-

rence, after which some general comparisons may be drawn.

The dike which furnishes the special subject for the present

paper lies in southwestern Pennsylvania about thirteen miles

north of the West Virginia state line. It was first noted more

than forty years ago, by Mr. Alexis H. Ross, a local resident,

but it seems not to have become known to any geologist. In

the last few years during which coal mines have been developed

38, 1887. Some interest has been excited in the possible discovery of

diamonds in this dike, and the same idea has been current with regard to

the Syracuse dike.

1J. S. Diller, ‘‘Mica-peridotite from Kentucky,” Amer. Jour. Sct.,

@et 1802, p-. 286.

2J. C. Branner, ‘‘Peridotite of Pike Co., Ark,” Amer. Jour. Sct., July

1889, p. 50. Rept. Geol. Surv. Ark., Il, p. 377, 1890.

3J. F. Kemp, ‘‘ Basic Dikes Outside the Syenite Areas of Arkansas,”

Rept. Geol. Surv. Ark., Il, p. 392, 1890.

514 J. F. KEMP AND J. G. ROSS

it has been found underground, and thus the best exposures and

the freshest rock have been obtained. Specimens were handed

to the senior writer in the fall of 1905 by J. G. Ross, the son of

Alexis H. Ross, and at the time Fellow in Mining in Columbia

University. The dike was announced and briefly described

before the Geological Society of America at the Ottawa meeting

December, 1905, and since then additional specimens have been

studied and an analysis has been prepared. The extent and

location of the dike have been worked out in detail by J. G.

Ross and his brother Donald.

The dike is in the Masontown quadrangle and on the east bank

of the Monongahela River. It cuts across one of the small

tributaries of the Monongahela called Middle Run, at whose

mouth is the coal-mining town of Gates. To the southeast it

has been found as far as the little town of Edenborn, where, in

the coal mines of the Frick Coal Company, it pinches out, after

forming three separate branches. ‘To the northwest, it appears

in the highway along the east bank of the Monongahela, but

efforts to find it on. the west bank have not been successful.

The details of situation are shown in Fig. 2.

The local geology is shown in detail in the Masontown—Union-

town folio, No. 82, of the U. S. Geological Survey. The Monon-

gahela series is exposed along the river bank with the Pittsburg

seam, at the mouth of Middle Run, 240 ft. below the river.

The Monongahela series is 380 ft. thick at this point, so that

the Waynesburg seam is r4o ft. above the river. Still higher

the Dunkard series covers the hill-tops. The dike certainly

cuts the Waynesburg seam and rises at least 20 feet higher in

the overlying Dunkard series.

On the surface the dike is narrow wherever discovered and is

single, except at the crossing of Middle Run. The observed

thicknesses vary from about one foot to about 3 feet, except in

the Waynesburg coal where it is 10 feet. Under ground, how-

ever, where the opportunities for exact study are better, the

thickness at the horizon of the Pittsburg seam reaches a reported

maximum of 35 feet. The dike moreover is known to spht up.

At the southeast, as it runs out, there are three narrow branches,

each a few inches across. At the extreme northwest there are

: g

\E aS

iN\

(NX

—

a fi

)

Ems

<a A

FIGURE 2.

The dike in Fayette Co., Penn. The line from Edenborn to Adah rep-

resents the dike. Scale xr inch=1 mile.

516 J. F. KEMP AND J. G. ROSS

two, one of which is three inches wide, the other many feet.

The latter makes as clean cut a diaphragm with respect to the

heading as would a stone flag set on edge. At a point about —

one-third its length to the southeast, there are again two parts

above ground. Apparently as the dike rose from the depths

toward the surface, it sent off stringers, or itself forked into two

or more parts. At the Pittsburg seam it expanded to its

greatest known width. At the same time it coked the coal,

and its effects may be detected for fifty feet on each side in the

seam. At the edges of the dike the coked coal has often become

involved in the igneous rock, which, itself, is finer grained from

the chill.

On the outcrop, the rock is weathered and nearly brown. It

breaks in spheroidal masses which are very tough and hard to

fracture. Where freshest in the mines it is blackish gray and

decidedly porphyritic. The phenocrysts may reach two or three

centimeters in diameter and are chiefly a pale green mineral

breaking along an even but not perfectly smooth surface. Small

phenocrysts of the reddish brown biotite characteristic of the

basic rocks may be detected with the eye, and quite large but

rounded masses of magnetite are scantily set in the matrix.

In its finer texture the rock has a granular aspect due to the

predominant but rounded grains of some mineral not recog-

nizable with the unaided eye.

Under the microscope the rock is found to be much altered in

all specimens, but in the freshest the original minerals can be de-

termined or inferred with much certainty. As in the other

similar cases biotite has resisted weathering much the best of

all, and its brownish yellow crystals seem in many cases slightly

if at all affected. It varies in size from small plates o.1 mm. in

diameter up to crystals two or three millimeters across. It is

strongly pleochroic, golden-brown to colorless, and has a

visible but small angle between the optic axes. —

Olivine is the most abundant component, but it has become

altered almost beyond recognition in nearly all cases. Its out-

ward shape, however, is characteristic, and in several instances

fresh nuclei have been detected which gave a positive result, when

optically tested. The olivine is itself so nearly colorless, and its

A PERIDOTITE DIKE IN PENNSYLVANIA COAL MEASURES 517

‘alteration products are themselves in almost all cases so pale

in tint that one would expect a molecule near forsterite. In

but two slides were its secondary minerals noticeably green,

and then they were undoubtedly chlorite. The alteration has

gone so far or has taken such a course as not to show serpentine

veinlets in marked development, but by careful search both

fibrous chrysotile and scaly antigorite have been detected.

The identity of the olivine is in consequence a little less apparent

than is often the case. Abnormally large and corroded or

rounded phenocrysts of olivine are also present up to two or three

em. in diameter, as was mentioned above. They are altered

like the rest but have fresh nuclei. To the unaided eye, they

resemble pyroxene more than olivine.

Magnetite is quite richly distributed, and the grains may reach

a size several millimeters in diameter. Much of it is shown by

the alteration product to be titaniferous. Perofskite is abundant

in small, highly refracting, brown grains. Apatite is present.

One garnet with a kelyphite rim has been detected, and pyrite.is

occasional. Almost all accurate traces of the ground mass,

whatever it was, have given way to calcite and dolomite, which

are richly present in the slides. Careful search has failed to

reveal the melilite which one would suspect to be present, from

the abundant calcite in the rock, nor can any other feldspathic

mineral be identified. In one instance isotropic material was

found, which was perhaps analcite, and through it was distrib-

uted very small stocky prisms which may once have been angites.

An analysis kindly made by Miss M. W. Adams yielded the

following results:

SiO » 28.83% INGA OARS Bren at Gn nae 75

IOS CE See he oes caw 5.67 RG Osis lara etn ete cu To QiE

ENP Ohta te ic talk atv as eck 2.94 IL Oars octal o Teens 3.96

IO) taseiat segs earge te oe 3.60 H,O— 0.83

DEO laa ageeaatene mM ae itil CO, 11.64

Wek Oe ctor eeocerieectrerear a 24.310 ee Ose eee Oni

(CO) are ee eae PES as ethyl Taig anak tae 100.98

It is possible to recast this analysis only in an approximate

way, but by several assumptions a result can be reached which

518 J. F. KEMP AND J. G. ROSS

is probably not far from the truth. In order to separate the

biotite, it is assumed that its composition is similar to the

analysis given in Rosenbusch’s Elemente der Gesteine, p. 234,

for one from a monchiquite (which analysis is quoted in the

’ Classification of Igneous Rocks, Table XIV.) On this basis the

results are as follows:

BH ObTEE ares eon a lare ccs so asta VP agen ee ne 20.89%

ON VaRe Re ee ak CSRS aa a ee ee 6.30

SSupSMbimMe ys sfc Bata isl eee ce a ee 29.25

Peroiskette ke its ten Ales aie eye id sepa alge ee ee 223m

Mma Graber cee sai) iat wschhskene Ae Te eka ta cle en 6.38

IN aKes ave ult = Agar etiiewen reeM ANT Soma Dk: 5 4 2.09

PAID CLC Riise cites? wae va ior'e Gaahis re ea eteinattd 8 Dae oe See ae 1.68

PATA CRUSH. Slee 5. dood kyuea a Monee telttc a tata Rea eer ee 1.58

GalGiteis 32525005, 5. ET AER In eee es a er 16.60

Ma OneSIGE goo Sk es eiglomuiers bee dee ee eee 8.23

Quarta ick oo lthinos eld ood es omean ee 4.98

Ma} (6] Ee Pan ee, CeO eT eA lery R EN PAR cro Sa + 100.29

NG eae a MET mEn ae I em MMe A 2 oc 3 0.83

Grand: Lotaice oil. oe a eae eee Oe IOI.12

It is evident that some very rich calcium-bearing mineral

must have contributed the calcite. Anorthite, diopside, and

melilite will at once suggest themselves. Anorthite is out of

the question, because the alumina fails. If diopside or some

other monoclinic pyroxene had been once in the rock, we ought |

to see the outlines of its crystals still remaining. Melilite is

the most probable, but if it were once present, its destruction

has been very thorough. A richly calciferous glass or basis

seems to be the only possible further assumption.

In conclusion acknowledgments are due to Drs. C. P. Berkey

and A. A. Julien for assistance regarding some puzzling features

of the microscopic mineralogy; to Miss Adams for the analysis,

and to Donald Ross for aid in the field.

[Annats N. Y. Acap. Sci., Vou. XVII, No. 5, Part II, pp. 519-562, PL.

XXXI and XXXII. Published September ro, 1907.]

ECORI BUTION TO THE GEOLOGY OF SOUTHERN

MAINE.

ISvv lis Jel, Ocininais, Jr. ID).

INTRODUCTION.

The aim of this paper is to set forth the salient features of

the geology of a small area in southern Maine from the points

of view of physiography, chemico-mineralogical petrology and

metamorphism, respectively. On the petrological side, the

igneous rocks are those especially considered, and all questions

of structure or stratigraphy among the sedimentary schists are

omitted.

The area discussed comprises that part of the Boothbay quad-

rangle which lies between the Sheepscot and the Damariscotta

river. The region is one of the typical examples of a fiord

coast, while its rocks are a metamorphic complex of schists and

gneisses, together with dike and plutonic igneous rocks ranging

in composition from aplite to dunite. The purpose of the map

is to illustrate the rock types described. It is not intended as a

complete geological map of the region.

_ The field work was done during the summer of 1905, the writer

being assisted by K. I. Cook and M. W. Adams. Microscopical

and chemical work has been carried on during the past two

winters in the laboratories of Columbia University. Prof. A.

W. Grabau of Columbia University had previously visited the

region with a summer field class from the Teachers’ School of

Science of the Boston Society of Natural History, and he

kindly placed his specimens and notes at the writer’s disposal.

The map of Cabbage Island (Fig. 1.) was worked out by this

class, and the diabase dikes on Linekin’s Bay were found by

him. Most of the rock types of the region were included in Dr.

519

Fic. 1.

Geological map of Cabbage

Island, Maine.

OGILVIE

Grabau’s collection, and especial

thanks are due to him for this

material.

The chemical analyses were

done by M. W. Adams, to whom

the writer is greatly indebted.

The methods followed were those

recommended by Washington in

his book The Chemical Analysis

of Rocks. The most important

oxides were determined in each

case, including both oxides of

iron, titanium and phosphorus.

The Lawrence Smith method was

used for the alkalies; the colo-

rimetric method for titanium, and

ammonia for the precipitation

of alumina, manganese being

neglected. The bluish-green cake

after the first fusion indicated

that manganese was present in

nearly every case. In the one

rock (a diabase) in which it ap-

peared to be greatest in amount,

it was determined on a separate

portion and found to be 0.35%.

The aim of the analyst was to

produce analyses that should be

“superior” in the sense of being

accurate, but which should be

inclusive of the rarer oxides only

in so far as the interest and im-

portance of the region seemed

to warrant.

There is no recent literature

dealing with the area here de-

scribed. Diabase dikes from the

eastern part of the Boothbay

x BS

i Birch NES /;

Nod

By Haley

Boothbay Harbor

‘g

(

\emas ca Kt

\ \

iste. GMillerid

NI 3

Cabbageld /7/

Acapbagera /1f))

SHEEPSCOT

BAY

Aero

®)

“p

1/7 Griftith Head

mee

ho)

TAR Yk

\ aie

“| 7:

)))

(

* EY copes

ne ‘Cape Newagen

Orfre cuckolds

a \

Capitol Id \/negro'd ¥y Pe y

wo)

Die, 2.

Peridotite

Sy OGILVIE

quadrangle were described by F. Bascom,! and these are in-

serted on the map (Fig. 2). Only the westernmost exposure of

these dikes was examined by us.. It was at first thought that

Dr. Bascom’s big dike might be the same rock-body as one of

the dikes of Cabbage Island and the neighboring mainland, but

repeated surveys across Linekin’s Neck showed that, unless

there is displacement by faulting, there are without doubt three

parallel dikes.

The only other literature dealing with the area is comprised

in the reports of C. H. Hitchcock. Of neighboring localities

Monhegan Island about twelve miles to the southeast has been |

described,? and in Knox County, about fifty miles to the

northeast some interesting rock types have recently been

studied.

PHYSIOGRAPHY.

The topography of the Boothbay quadrangle is characterized

by an alignment of ridges and depressions in a direction which

changes from due north and south in the southern portion to

N. 20° E. in the northern. That is to say, each ridge and

valley describes a curve. Tide-water enters all of the larger

valleys and extends beyond the northern boundary of the quad-

rangle. The tides rush up and down these narrow inlets with

great force and undoubtedly have great erosive power. Many

tributaries enter the main valleys at abnormal angles, and the

branches of the tributaries sometimes enter at abnormal angles,

also, so that it is not uncommon for a single stream course to

describe three sides of a square.

It is found that the major features which have produced the

adjustment are the strike and the joints of the rock. The

principal valleys are outlined by the strike, which has a general

north and south trend; the tributaries are adjusted to the joints,

1“ Dikes in the Vicinity of John’s Bay, Maine,’? Amer. Geol.,

XXIII, 1899, pp. 275-280. ;

2‘* Notes on the Geology and Petrology of Monhegan Island, Maine,”

by E. C. E. Lord, Amer. Geol., X XVI, 1900, p. 329.

3‘* Some Unusual Rocks from Maine,”’ by Edson S. Bastin, Jour. Geo/.,

XV rooG apy 176"

A CONTRIBUTION TO THE GEOLOGY OF SOUTHERN MAINE 523

of which the major ones have a N. 85° E. direction. Dikes

_ follow some of the joints.

The oldest rocks of the region are mica schists, which are

soft and easily eroded. Intruded into these are granitic rocks

of various types, which are hard. The metamorphism which

occasioned the schistosity followed the intrusion of the igneous

rocks, and the present adjustment of streams is in part to the di-

rection of the strike of the bands of soft rock, in part to the direc-

tion of the fissility. There has probably been some folding also.

Faulting on a small scale is frequent. Plate XXXI, Fig. 1

shows a small example of “‘Graben” on Negro Island. There

are many such, the faults being usually of the gravity type.

Whether there has been faulting on a larger scale, it is impossible

to say; but the fact that the eastern shore of the promon-

tories is invariably steep, while the western has a gentle slope

is suggestive.

The drainage is well adjusted, and the only notable pre-glacial

interruptions to the erosion cycle have been movements of

elevation and depression. Evidence of elevation is to be seen

in wave-cut cliffs and gorges, but these are at no great height

above the present level of the sea. If any such great subsidence

took place as has been described by Shaler in Mount Desert? it

was of too rapid a nature for shore features to be developed.

A single marine beach is to be seen on the north side of

a hill east of Boothbay Harbor at an altitude of about 100 feet.

The diabase dikes produce notable topographic features.

The dikes are harder than the surrounding schists, and in the

interior of the country away from the sea, they stand up as

conspicuous :ridges. The dikes have a columnar parting

which is either horizontal or slightly inclined. When within

reach of the waves this columnar structure affords oppor-

tunity for wave action, and the dike thus attacked is worn

away more rapidly than the surrounding rock, thus producing

a chasm. These two contrasting topographic effects are illus-

_ trated in Plate XXXTI, Fig. 2, and Plate XXXII, Figs. 1 and 2.

The altitude of the highest hills is of moderate uniformity;

it varies from 200 to 290 feet above sea. This level apparently

PAnnial Rept. U0. SoG. S.Vill, Pt. 11.

524 OGILVIE

does not represent a pene-plain, but is occasioned solely by the

attitude and resistance of the hardest rocks—the granites. The

softest rocks are the schists. These determine the course of

the rivers, and are near sea level, while the more basic igneous

rocks usually outcrop at intermediate altitudes. The eleva-

tions of intermediate hardness form knolls about 130 feet high.

There are no conspicuous glacial features. The drift is thin

and consists mainly of scattered bowlders. If any physiographic

work was done by the ice it was of the nature of excavation.

There are no deposits of sufficient extent to cause any changes in

drainage. Such lakes as exist are wholly or in part artificial.

Striz were found at the following localities and in the following

directions. The direction of ice motion was evidently nearly

southward.

TABLE I.

Glacial Strie.

Locality. Direction. Rock. Position on Map!

North end Adams Pond N.S. Schist 20 4eeE

West side Linekin’s Bay on

northern dike N. 10° W. | Diabase Sere

Beside road 3} miles south of

North Edgecomb N. 10° E. Gneiss T2230 4e

Beside road 1 mile south of

Edgecomb ING BO 1D Gneiss TAL

Same road 1 mile farther south| N. 5° E. Gneiss 2 ADRS

The fiord character of the coast of Maine is usually ascribed

to combined drowning and excavation by ice. The Boothbay

quadrangle offers no new evidence on these points. It is clearly

drowned, and ice excavation seems very probable; but there is

one feature that this history does not explain, and that is the

remarkable courses of the streams. As already mentioned it is

by no means uncommon for a stream to begin by flowing north,

to turn at right angles, and then after a short east or west course

to enter one of the southward draining estuaries. The most

conspicuous example is afforded by Adams Pond, Back River,

Oven Mouth and the lower Back River. Adams Pond is

1 The figures in this column indicate the position on the map in the

manner described by Kemp, Bull. Geol. Soc. Am. XVI, p. 411.

A CONTRIBUTION TO THE GEOLOGY OF SOUTHERN MAINE 525

artificial. It was thought that possibly there might have been

a reversal of drainage brought about by glacial agencies, the

Back River and Adams Pond valley having formerly drained

southward. ‘This seems clearly not to have been the case.

There is more or less sand about the southern end and sides of

Adams Pond, but nothing resembling a moraine and nothing in

the way of drift that could possibly have blocked a stream.

The valley widens northward and has every appearance of being

a normal erosion valley developed with the drainage in its

present direction. That it is pre-Glacial is evidenced by the

presence of both material and strie. The east-and-west Oven

Mouth on the other hand is a very narrow cut with precipitous

sides. Three tributaries enter it, two from the south and one

from the north, and the tributaries have a much older topo-

graphic expression than the Oven Mouth itself. This is clearly

due to the fact that the tributaries are developed along the

strike and have advantageous courses, while the Oven Mouth is

on a joint and cuts across hard layers. There seems no reason

to doubt that these tributaries originated after the Oven Mouth,

the latter being for practical physiographic purposes, the ocean,

and the streams developing as similar streams might arise on an

island. But the relation of the larger Back River valley to the

Oven Mouth is not so clear. It might have been developed like

the tributaries as a normal river valley subsequently drowned,

but since the Back River is pre-Glacial, on this supposition the

Oven Mouth would of necessity be pre-Glacial too, and the latter

is a very steep-sided gorge. It would seem that this and the

many similar streams in Maine must date their origin from a

time when the slope of the land was somewhat different from

what it is at present. The entire surface must actually have

been higher than at present, but with relative depression towards

the north. The recent drowning has led to the connection of

these various valleys by way of much younger tributaries along

the joints.

Sea cliffs are notable features of the present erosion cycle.

These present interesting variations with respect to the kind

of rock involved and the direction of the structure. The granite

and the schist each has its particular topographic expression,

526 OGILVIE

and the direction of the cliff with respect to the strike has its

effect upon the form of the resulting headland.

PETROLOGY.

It was the aim of the present investigation to deal only with

those rocks which are of igneous origin, whether metamorphic or

not. A considerable complex of schists and gneisses which ap-

pear to be of sedimentary origin was therefore left untouched.

Some of the types are distinctly doubtful in origin, and it is

quite possible that future research may add to the number of

igneous members. The probable sediments are clearly the oldest

components of the complex. By far the commonest of these

older and doubtful rocks is a sandy mica schist, of decidedly

sedimentary aspect. Realizing the uncertainty of the evidence

of its sedimentary origin, and because of its very wide-spread

occurrence throughout the coast region of Maine, it was thought

that an analysis would be of interest. The analysis (Table I1)

bears out the sedimentary hypothesis. The silica is higher than

in any of the igneous rocks of the region, though not excessive

for a granite. Lime, iron and magnesia are nearly equal in

amount, all being about 4%; the magnesia is relatively too high

for an ordinary granite; the sum of the alkalis is too low.

Though by no means conclusive the balance of chemical evidence

points towards a sedimentary origin; the same is true of mi-

croscopic, and of field details.

TABLE Ll.

Duplicate Analyses of Mica Schist (Probably of Sedimentary Origin) from

Spruce Point, Boothbay, Maine, by M. W. Adams.

S10 , 71.28% 71.60%

Or Thob7 12.38

Fe,0 ; .62 | 382

FeO 3.64 3.64

MgO 3-27 3-31

CaO 4.07 3.05

Na.O 2.70 2.46

K,O 1.86 1.89

H,O-+ sQit ees

H,O — .09 .09

CO; none none

ARNO) 5 it aif ls r.08

IP, Os .20 .20

Total IO 77 IOI.12

A CONTRIBUTION TO THE GEOLOGY OF SOUTHERN MAINE 527

It is thought to be in the interest of accuracy to publish these

_ duplicate analyses precisely as they were made. A better

- summation would have been obtained by making a composite of

the two.

Microscopically the rock is characterized by shreds of biotite

with parallel orientation, giving a typical schistose structure.

Quartz, orthoclase, a plagioclase near the albite end of the series,

brown hornblende and a very little augite make up the rest of

the rock, with a little accessory magnetite and apatite. The

pyroxene is of the common augite variety, slightly violet tinted

from titanium; it is usually twinned, but with no crystal boun-

daries. The whole is much strained, the feldspars being cracked

with minute fissures all parallel to each other, the cracks being

filled with sericite. The quartz is decidedly granular.

A specimen from Rutherford Island, given to the writer by

Dr. Bascom, is evidently of the same type of rock, but in thin

section contains a larger proportion of ferro-magnesian consti-

tuents and among these a larger proportion of brown hornblende.

The balance of evidence is that these schists are completely re-

crystallized, highly metamorphic sediments, originally of the

composition of arkose. The presence of the augite is the

strongest point against this origin.

Turning to the igneous rocks, there is evidence of at least two

periods of intrusion. The first of these antedated the meta-

morphism of the region. In the field these appeared to present

all variations in composition, grading from extreme basicity to

extreme acidity. Granite-gneiss, diorite, anorthosite, mon-

zonite, gabbro, hornblende schist and peridotite are a few of the

varieties. Analysis reveals the fact that these are not so widely

separated as they appeared, and that the majority belong among

the intermediate types. Cutting the above-mentioned rocks are

numerous less metamorphosed pegmatites and aplites which were

not studied by us in detail.

Of later age is a series of diabase dikes. These follow joint

planes for the most part and belong to two series, one trending

N. 85° E. the other N. 10° E. The physiographic effect of these

dikes has already been mentioned.

The classification adopted is the quantitative one recently

528 OGILVIE

proposed.! The following table includes the types found on the

Boothbay quadrangle, whose description follows.

Abviswis, JUL

Summary of Rock Types Found on the Boothbay Quadrangle.

Class. Order. Rang. Subrang. Old Name.

I. Persalane. 4. Britannare. 2. Toscanase 4. Lassenose Granite

i . Hispanare. 3. Almerase. 4. Sitkose. Quartz-augite di-

orite.

| 4. Tonalose. Quartz-mica di- :

Il. Dosalane. + 4. Austrare. 3. Tonalase. orite.

| 5. Placerose. Diabase.

1. Umptekase. 4. Umptekose.

| 5, Germanare { 2. Monzonase. 3. Monzonose. { Monzonite, oe

| 3. Andase. >. Lincolnose2 ) ane Ate

) 2. Kilauase. 2. Prowersose. Schist.

III. Salfemane. 5. Gallare. (4. Auvergnase. 3. Auvergnose. Diabase and Horn-

blende schist.

V.Perfemane. 1. Maorare. 1. Dunase. 1. Dunose. Peridotite(dunite)

In the following pages the rocks will be discussed under two

groups according to age. In one of these groups fall the more or

less metamorphosed rocks of all compositions; in the other the

younger rocks which according to the old nomenclature would

have been called diabases. The great scientific value of the new

system of classification becomes evident in a region such as the

one under discussion, where two series of rocks differing in age,

megascopic and microscopic characters are found to be closely

related in quantitative chemical characters and in the possible

(but not actual) proportions of certain “‘standard”’ minerals.

The authors of the new system expressly state that meta-

morphic rocks are excluded from their scheme. Nevertheless,

in the following pages the system is applied to metamorphic

rocks with great significance. It is of course evident that the

system is not applicable in cases where there is any doubt of

the igneous origin, or in cases where either weathering or per-

colating solutions have so altered the rock that its original

character cannot be determined. In the types in question it

was always possible to determine what the original was. The *

1 Cross, Iddings, Pirsson, Washington, Jour. Geol., X, 1902.

2 New name proposed in this paper.

A CONTRIBUTION TO THE GEOLOGY OF SOUTHERN MAINE 529

metamorphism was mainly of the nature of intense crushing,

without chemical addition or subtraction. In most cases there

were occasional less altered patches, where the original texture

and mineralogy could at least be inferred, if not actually

observed. It was found that the rocks were invariably originally

holocrystalline, usually of granitic texture. The authors of the

new system propose various prefixes for the description of

texture. These are used in the following pages when the original

texture could be observed. When a rock is thoroughly schistose

or gneissic the prefix ““meta’’is employed. Where it is meta-

morphic, but shows indications of what the texture was before

metamorphism, the prefix ““meta’’ is used and also a textural

prefix. Thus, “‘meta-grano-sitkose’”’ is a metamorphic rock

in which a former granitic texture is evident, while ‘“‘meta-

auvergnose,”’ is a hornblende schist in which all trace of original

texture is lost. In those cases where both metamorphic and

non-metamorphic portions were found, the metamorphism is

ignored in the nomenclature.

Only one rock in the region was seriously altered by weathering.

This was the most basic of the types, being an almost pure

olivine rock. It contains serpentine and other alteration

products, and in the analysis a notable amount of water and of

carbon dioxide was determined. The analysis as a whole could

not be recast in terms of the new system because of these ex-

traneous substances. Nevertheless it was perfectly possible to

classify fhe rock, since the alteration products were found on

microscopic examination to be all replacements of the olivine.

The composition of the olivine could be determined from the

analysis, and the alteration products could be ignored in classi-

fying. ‘The only possible chance for error in such a case lies in

the doubt about the original proportions between olivine and

magnetite, but the mathematical grouping is sufficiently broad

for classification to be made in this respect with reasonable

certainty.

The tedious labor involved in the production of “‘superior”’

analyses necessarily limits the number of them. In this case all

of the principal types were analyzed, but many subordinate

variations were of necessity examined only microscopically.

530 OGILVIE

The petrographic descriptions of the various types which were

not analyzed are given in each case after the discussion of the

similar type which was analyzed. It is however realized that

there may be errors in the inferred relationships and quantitative

development of these unanalysed types. The accurate mathe-

matical estimation of quantities of minerals seen under the

microscope is not without difficulty, and is apt to be inaccurate

where there are variations in coarseness of grain and where there

is a gneissic arrangement of minerals in bands. The problem

too becomes the more involved, when the majority of the min-

erals present are not the ones on which the classification is based.

With full regard for the uncertainties involved, calculations were

made and the unanalyzed rocks placed with their nearest analyzed

allies. In spite of the manifold possibilities of error, it is con-

fidently believed that only by such estimations will the real

significance of the metamorphic rocks be appreciated. For

example, a dark hornblende schist, consisting mainly of horn-

blende and plagioclase would in the old system have been reck-

oned with the gabbros. If any proportions were recorded at

all, merely the ratio between hornblende and feldspar would

have been noted. In the light of the new system it becomes

evident that that ratio has no significance at all, except as regards

metamorphism, and the essential and significant conception of

the type involves the splitting up of the hornblende into an-

orthite, diopside and hypersthene molecules which possibly

never existed as minerals in the rock, and whose ratios may show

more acid affinity than would be supposed on casual inspection.

It is not possible to do this without any analysis of the rock, but

given one good analysis of a type, it is possible to consider

slightly dissimilar types by means of microscopical inspection

only.

The acid rocks were the ones which received least attention

from us. These were very common and in no way notable, and

did not seem of sufficient importance to justify any great ex-

penditure of time on either mapping or analysis. The types will

be taken up proceeding from acid to basic within each of the two

series. It is, however, to be bornein mind that the acid types

are very much the most common.

A CONTRIBUTION TO THE GEOLOGY OF SOUTHERN MAINE 531

THE PERSALANES.

Grano-Lassenose. I. 4. 2.4. (Granite.) Occurrence.—This

type was found in the form of dikes on Damariscove Island,

There were many of the dikes, some running with the strike,

some cutting across it at various angles. There was considerable

variation in coarseness of grain, and the borders of the dikes

were often pegmatitic. The schist was much contorted near the

contact and was full of quartz lenses. In fact the whole island

was thoroughly injected. Time did not allow of detailed map-

ping of these dikes. Specimens were collected of all that were

found and slides were studied. All of the dikes appeared to be

of essentially the same type, so one analysis only was made

of them.

TABLE IV.

Chemical Composition and Classification of Damariscove Lassenose.

prope one vom

SiO , 67.59 1.126 | Qu 19.56

Al,O; 17.41 sit | Or 15.59

Fe,0,; Sai .009 | Ab 41.39

FeO 2.98 .040 An 14.18

MgO i 1.40 035 Cor a

CaO 2.05 .054 Hyp 6.27

Na,O 4.89 .079 Mag 2.09

K,O 2.59 .028 Ilm it, 52

lel oOia= 18 Ap 34

H ,O- oO4 |

COE none

TiO, 83 .O1O

1P 50) 3 .19 .OO1

Total IOL.30

On consulting Washington’s tables' it becomes evident that

lassenose is one of the commonest of rock types, hence a com-

parison with other regions would be futile.

_ Microscopic characters.—Microscopically the dikes are found

to be essentially alike, differing mainly in coarseness of grain.

They contain biotite, brown hornblende, a very little augite,

1Prof. Paper, r4., U. S.G.5.

aa2 OGILVIE

orthoclase, albite, oligoclase, titanite, apatite and quartz. In

some cases the dikes were but little metamorphosed, in others

they were intensely sheared, and there are all the intermediate

degrees of change. In the crushed varieties there is a pale biotite

poor in iron, associated at times with ordinary deep brown

biotite, at times with the orthoclase. The light biotite is

apparently secondary, of deep-seated or metamorphic origin.

Frequently the shreds of the secondary biotite are strung out in

lines having parallel orientation, giving the rock somewhat of a —

schistose structure. In the crushed varieties microcline is com-

mon, as are undulatory extinction in the quartz, microperthitic

intergrowths and some granulation. A few crystals of zoisite

were to be seen, apparently derived from the plagioclase as a

product of dynamic metamorphism. Reaction rims are frequent

between the biotite and the hornblende. It is very common to

see a hornblende individual with deeply corroded edges sur-

rounded by a radiating mass of biotite leaves interspersed with

feldspar and dotted with magnetite, the whole enclosed in a

biotite individual.

The feldspars, particularly orthoclase, contain inclusions of a

fine reddish black dust. Some mica is also present as inclusions.

The dust is to be seen especially in the central zones, the edges

being free from it. This type of inclusion is present in all the

rocks of the region. For reasons that will be discussed later

(see p. 538) these are thought to be titaniferous, and to consist of

several minerals notably perofskite, rutile,titanite and magnetite.

Norm and Mode.—Plagioclase was the commonest mineral;

next in abundance, biotite and orthoclase in about equal amounts,

hornblende, augite and zoisite were in small amounts. It ap-

pears that the norm agrees fairly well with the mode. The

disagreements are that there is no anorthite (all the plagioclase

being near the albite end of the series) and no corundum, and that

the actual percentage of orthoclase is less than the normative.

All of these discrepancies are accounted for by the presence of

biotite, hornblende, augite and zoisite. These minerals are too

variable to admit of accurate recalculation, but it is evident

that some potash is in the biotite, and Hme in the other three

with alumina distributed among them.

A CONTRIBUTION TO THE GEOLOGY OF SOUTHERN MAINE 533

Related Types.—On the mainland and neighboring islands are

many granitic dikes and bathyliths. Microscopic examination

of many of these revealed mineralogical similarity to the type

just described, but with some variation between the proportions

of constituents. An estimation of these constituents in terms of

standard minerals reveals the fact that class and order are

evidently the same as for the type just described, but that

there is some variation in the relative amounts of alkalies and of

lime. The commonest types from the mainland appear to fall

into I. 4. 3. 4, yellowstoneose, no analyses of which were made.

THE DOSALANES.

Meta-grano-sitkose. II. 3. 3. 4. (Quartz-augite-Diorite; Actino-

lite Schist.) | Occurrence.—The rock thus classified is one of the

most remarkable of the whole region. It forms dikes on

Fisherman’s Island in a country rock of sandy biotite schist.

The dikes frequently parallel the structure, and, as they weather

into a gray sand and frequently contain inclusions of the schist,

they appear deceptively like a sedimentary rock. They are how-

ever found unmistakably cutting the bedding at various angles.

Megascopic Character.—In a fresh hand specimen the igneous

nature of the rock is unmistakable. Pink with green spots is its

general appearance. The texture is moderately coarse to fine.

Actinolite and a schistose structure develop in the crushed parts.

Microscopic Character.—In the less crushed varieties the fol-

lowing minerals were observed, in order of abundance: a greenish

augite, quartz, plagioclase (albite and oligoclase), zoisite,

brown hornblende, titanite, biotite, apatite. In the more

crushed varieties actinolite develops almost to the exclusion

of the other ferro-magnesian minerals, while there is a marked

increase in zoisite; microcline is abundant, and the quartz is

_ completely crushed.

Similar Types.—The rock just described is confined to the

general vicinity of Fisherman’s Island. On Ocean Point are a

few dikes which may be of the same rock, but the actinolite is not

conspicuous in them. The dikes on Ocean Point are like most

of the dikes of the region in cutting their enclosing rock sharply,

in which respect they differ from the sitkose just described.

534 OGILVIE

The latter develop very conspicuous contact zones of actinolite

along the borders. The dikes are all small, usually three inches

or less in width, and they are not of great length. On the same

island are many large granitic dikes, microscopically similar

to the lassenose, which are thirty feet or more in width. ‘These

granite dikes are entirely distinct from the sitkose. Mega-

scopically the latter seems to contain primarily pink feldspar

and actinolite.

Comparison with Alaskan Sitkose.—It is worthy of note that

in the only other known locality where this subrang is found,

namely in the neighborhood of Sitka, Alaska, the field relations

are described! as being essentially similar to those above in-

dicated for Fisherman’s Island. In both cases the dike rock is

involved with sediments in a way that seems deceptively like

bedding, and in both there is a crushing of the quartz on a

microscopic scale. The essential differences between the two are

the much higher lime content of the Maine rock and the dynamic

metamorphism of the whole Maine region at a time subsequent

to the intrusion of the dike. ‘The analysis of the Sitka rock is

here reproduced for comparison.

TABLE W,

Analyses, Molecular Proportions and Norms of Sitkose.

Molecular

.Composition. Baa aeenione, Norm,

IL JL Te It il, iO.

SiO , 67.04 65.94 Tite) 1.099 Qu 28.68 30.1

Al,O, Tie) BWA .II2 .134 Or 6.12 10.0

Fe,O,; .78 49 .005 .003 Ab 23.06 23.6

FeO 2575 52k ORE .O71 An 15.85 14.2

MgO Bug 2 2.33 .088 .058 C 2.0

CaO 7.60 2.87 58 AO .O51 Di 16.96

Na,O 2.70 2.80 .044 .045 Hy 3.96 13.6

K,0 1.00 1.63 .OII .o18 Mag. 1.66 ay)

H,O+ 16 2.59 Iim 3.19 #5

H,O- .09 2 Ap Be

CO, none 59

TiO, 1.68 .80 .O2T .O1O

IP (0) 5 .12 sak .OOL .002

Total 99.84 99.41

1 Becker, Annual Rept. U. S. G. S., XVIII, Pt. III, p. 43.

A CONTRIBUTION TO THE GEOLOGY OF SOUTHERN MAINE 535

I. Analysis, molecular proportions and norm of sitkose from Fisher-

man’s Island, Me. :

Il. Analysis, molecular proportions and norm of sitkose from Alaska,

described by Becker; analysis, by Hillebrand. Analysis and norm

published in Washington’s tables, Proj. Paper 14, U. S. G. S.

p- 219. (.61% of rare.oxides omitted.)

The Maine rock is perfectly fresh as regards weathering; the

Alaska one contains notable amounts of water and of carbon

dioxide and is described as containing secondary chlorite, calcite

and muscovite. The comparison between them cannot there-

fore be pushed too far. It is well known that in the weathering

process the lime is the first constituent to be attacked and that

of all the others alumina is the most constant actually, but

apparently grows greater because of the percentage decrease in

the others. These two analyses would be much closer if a

recasting were made because of weathering.

Norm and Mode.—In the less crushed varieties of the Maine

rock the mode differs from the norm mainly in the entire absence

of anorthite and the presence of various calciferous alferric

minerals. Titanite is moderately abundant, thus using up the

ilmenite molecule in combination with CaO. There is a very

little biotite, which calls for a slight re-arrangement of the potash

molecules.

Metamorphism.—As a rttle the rock has been greatly sheared.

The shearing took place in some instances along the strike of

the dike, in some directly across it, and in some obliquely. The

result of the shearing is seen in granulation of the quartz, un-

dulatory extinction of quartz and feldspars, bending of the

feldspar lamelle, cracking of the feldspars and the pres-

ence of the metamorphic minerals microcline, actinolite and

zoisite.

Grano-tonalose. II. 4. 3. 4. (Quartz-mica Diorite). Occur-

rence.—The rock which falls into this subrang makes up the

greater part of the island of Southport, where it is found in

irregular masses of bathylithic or laccolithic character. The

same type of rock occurs to some extent in the form of dikes on

the mainland.

Megascopic Character.—It is a fairly coarse-grained light gray

rock of granitic texture occasionally gneissoid. In the field it

536 OGILVIE

can readily be distinguished from all other granitic types of the

region in that its color tones are all of black and white order.

The other granites are pinkish, greenish or brownish in

tone.

TABLE VI.

Analysis and Norm of Tonalose jrom Southport.

Composition. peepee Norm.

SiO , 63.44% I.057 Qu 17.58

Al,0O; 18.84 .184 Or Ir.68

Fe,O0,; .16 .OOL Ab 36.15

FeO 4.05 .056 An 19.18

MgoO 1.99 .049 Cor BOs

CaO 4.23 O75

Na.,O 4135 .069 Hyp 9.78

1K AO) 2.07 .021 ag 28

H,O0+ 33 Ilm 2.74

H,O — .06 Ap .607

CO, none

AO) I.41 .018

P.O; Ree .002

Total IOI.25

Microscopic Character.—This rock type is too common to

make extended comment desirable. It contains orthoclase,

plagioclase, biotite and quartz, in order of abundance, with a

little accessory magnetite and apatite and a moderate amount

of titanite.

Metamorphism.—There is evidence of strain, though not of

as intense degree as in the case of the Damariscove lassenose.

A little undulatory extinction, a few individuals of microcline

and considerable cracking of the feldspar are the evidences of it.

There is alittle kaolin developed along the cracks in the feldspar,

and some chlorite borders the biotite.

The Germanares (II. 5). (Augengneiss; Monzonite; Gabbro;

Anorthosite.) In the Journal of Geology for April and May, 1906,

is a paper by Edson S. Bastin on prowersose from Knox County,

Maine. The rock I am about to describe appears to be another

occurrence of the same type. The points of similarity will be

evident. on comparison with Mr. Bastin’s description. The

Boothbay rock is variable in structure, mineralogy and chemical

> iife

A CONTRIBUTION TO THE GEOLOGY OF SOUTHERN MAINE 537

composition. Of the various types selected by us for analysis

and for microscopic study no one is identical with his, yet our

types from the same rock mass differ from another in as essential

respects as do most of them from his rock. The Boothbay rock

is invariably porphyritic, the phenocysts being feldspathic, the

ground-mass micaceous. On analysis, the ground-mass only !

corresponds to Mr. Bastin’s analysis and falls into the subrang

prowersose. The whole rock of each of our types is more salic,

and the various types respectively fall into the subrangs mon-

zonose, umptekose and the unnamed subrang (II. 5. 3. 2.) of

which the only analysis given in Washington’s tables is that of the

augite-minette from the Plauensche Grund of Dresden. Since

the Maine rock is of notable extent, and the analysis accurate

and from fresh material, it appears justifiable that a name from

this locality be given to this subrang of the new system, and

the name /incolnose is here proposed for it from Lincoln County,

Maine.

The Boothbay rock (including uwmptekose, monzonose and

lincolnose) is found in two parallel bands about two miles apart.

The eastern band outcrops on Squirrel Island (see map, Fig. 2)

and again on Spruce Point. In both localities it has been much

cut up by later intrusives. Its strike varies from due N.-S. to

N. 15° E. and it may be found at intervals throughout the

length of the quadrangle. It forms Mt. Pisgah and there has a

width of about a quarter of a mile. This band was traced in the

direction of its strike for twelve miles, the width being very

variable. It is often concealed by vegetation and sometimes

appears to pinch out altogether. The indications point towards

a string of lens-shaped masses barely connected with each other

and arranged in a uniform direction. The western band is

shorter and wider being apparently three miles in length and one

in maximum width. Its widest part is found on the south shore

of Campbell pond; from there it extends southward rapidly

narrowing to the coast. Mr. Bastin’s exposures are about forty

miles distant in a N. 20° E. direction.

Wherever exposed on the Boothbay quadrangle both bands

show a marked difference between core and edges. The core

1 See Analysis II, Table VII.

O38 OGILVIE

consists of a very friable, easily weathered, dark rock, which

usually forms a depression. It consists of blue ‘‘augen”’ an inch

or less in length in a ground-mass of brown mica and feldspar.

The augen are without orientation, and the mica plates also have

no uniform arrangement. In the border zones the rock is schis-

tose. The biotite and the augen are arranged with the long axes

in the same direction. The latter often being completely crushed

and represented by white bands between the mica plates. This

border rock resists weathering much better than the rock of the

core, hence it usually forms ridges. It is not among the

hardest rocks of the region, but it is sufficiently resistant to form

hills of moderate altitude. Fresh specimens of the border rock

can readily be found, while the core disintegrates so readily that

it might easily be overlooked altogether, and fresh specimens

are difficult to obtain.

Microscopically the augen are found to be similar to the graphic

granite which forms one of the youngest intrusions of the region.

They consist of albite, microcline, microperthite and orthoclase,

in order of abundance, with sometimes a little quartz. A few

scales of mica are to be seen scattered through the augen,

especially in the sheared varieties. Zonal structure is common

in the feldspars. The augen are essentially similar in all var-

ieties of the rock, differing only in degree of metamorphism. In

some instances they are cracked, the cracks being filled with

either quartz or muscovite, the former containing dark in-

clusions. Other occurrences are granulated on a microscopic

scale, and still others are so completely crushed that they are

drawn out into bands and are white megascopically.

The feldspars contain large numbers of inclusions. Quartz,

titanite, perofskite, magnetite and rutile could be identified,

the needles of the last-named being usually arranged in two

intersecting directions. In the following analysis, care was

taken to exclude as far as possible the scales of biotite which

are occasionally within the augen. The mica of the ground-

mass adheres most persistently to the augen, and particular care

was taken to break it away. Considering these precautions,

the amounts of iron, magnesia and titanium are very large; they

are undoubtedly to be accounted for in the inclusions, as is some

——_

A CONTRIBUTION TO THE GEOLOGY OF SOUTHERN MAINE 539

of the quartz. The amount is so large that the analysis can be

classified as a whole rock, falling into the subrang I. 5. 1. 3,

phlegrose. Since the inclusions in these feldspars are of pre-

cisely the same type as those in other rock types of the region,

the conclusion seems justified that the inclusions described else-

where are of the same type.

The high alkalies and low lime are noteworthy and correspond

with the absence of lime feldspar. This again is a general

characteristic of the igneous rocks of the whole region, lime

whether great or small in amount being invariably in a ferro-

magnesian mineral and nearly or quite lacking in the feldspar.

aie: WILL.

Analyses and Molecular Proportions of Monzonite from Spruce

Point, Me.

I ite

Si0 » 65.69% 1.095 55-957 933

Al,O, 18.54 .18t I2.2 21

Bes O> -66 .004 25 002

FeO 50 .007 5.61 078

MgO 12 .003 9.17 r.48

CaO -99 .O17 4.63 082

Na,O Bests .090 T.QI O31

K,0 7-30 .078 6.28 067

H,O+ .09 i8

H ,O- .OI O5

TiO, JR5 .007 Bou 040

CO; none none

P,O; 2s .002 .83 .006

Total 100.26 100.29

I. “Augen” from monzonite of Spruce Point, Me. Position in the

quantitative system, I. 5.1.3. Phlegrose.

II. Schistose ground-mass of monzonite from Spruce Point. Me. Position

in the quantitative system III.5.2.2. Prowersose.

Table VII. gives the analysis of the augen and also of the

ground-mass. The distribution of ingredients is evident with-

out especial comment. The potash is noteworthy, being high

in both parts and is of course in orthoclase in I and in biotite

in II. A more detailed description of the whole rock will be

given under monzonose.

540 OGILVIE

Lincolnose. II. 5. 3. 2. As already mentioned this new name

is proposed for the soft rock which forms the core of both in-

trusions. Megascopically it is seen to contain large blue augen

set in a ground-mass which is dense and dark except for mica

scales.

Microscopic Character.—The augen are found to be in all

respects similar to those already described, and are of the least

crushed variety. In the ground-mass are found biotite,

pyroxene, hornblende, titanite and magnetite, with a very little

microcline, and more plagioclase, which is partly labradorite

and partly albite, and a little microperthite.

There are three types of pyroxene. One of these is an ordinary

colorless or greenish augite, remarkable only for its inclusions.

The inclusions are opaque black grains or rods, probably of

titaniferous magnetite, and are so abundant as to make the

augite appear opaque. Prismatic faces are occasionally present

in this augite, but terminal faces are lacking. About the edges

there is frequently an intergrowth of biotite along the cleavage

cracks, and biotite and brown hornblende together frequently

form rosettes which seem derived from the augite by dynamic

metamorphism.

The second type of pyroxene is faintly pleochroic from pink to

violet and has an extinction angle (measured from C in the plane

oro) which varies from o° to 13°. In addition to the ordinary

pyroxene cleavage, a parting parallel to 100 can be plainly

seen, and a less distinct parting parallel to o10. These properties

seem most nearly to correspond to diallage. This mineral

contains great quantities of brownish red inclusions, apparently

both rutile and titaniferous magnetite being present. Crystal

boundaries are lacking in the diallage. It is usually surrounded

by biotite and brown hornblende.

The third type of pyroxene is apparently secondary, the

result of dynamic metamorphism of either of the two preceding

types, and is usually associated with the rims of biotite

and hornblende. It occurs in irregular grains, without in-

clusions, is frequently twinned, and is occasionally altered to

uralite.

The hornblende is reddish brown and occurs in two ways.

A CONTRIBUTION TO THE GEOLOGY OF SOUTHERN MAINE 541

As already implied, one of these occurrences is evidently sec-

ondary aiter the pyroxene, it and the biotite being together

arranged in rosettes or rims around the augites. The other type

of hornblende is also brown, but it forms large individuals and is

apparently original. Itisrare. Considerable apatite is present

in long prisms containing transparent inclusions arranged paral-

lel to the axis.

The biotite is evidently poor in iron, ranging in pleochroism

from yellow to reddish brown. As an original mineral it is found

in scales, which are frequently bleached at the edges. The

secondary biotite consists of small individuals associated with

the alteration of the pyroxene.

Chemical Composition.—Analysis I, Table VIII, is of the typical

lincolnose from the core of the western intrusion.

Meta-monzonose. II. 5. 2. 3. Occurrence.—Bordering the

lincolnose on both sides is the schistose portion already men-

tioned, of which the analyses in Table VII give separately the

composition of augen and ground-mass. This differs from the

lincolnose not only in having a schistose structure and in being

less easily weathered, but also chemically and mineralogically.

The augen are similar to those of the lincolnose but are more

frequently crushed, especially near the edges of the rock mass.

The ground-mass is quite different. It contains mainly biotite

with little green hornblende and very little augite, which is sur-

rounded by large rims of secondary brown hornblende. Biotite,

microcline, microperthite, albite and a little quartz with titanite

and magnetite make up the rest of the rock. There is great

strain in the feldspar. The biotite is bleached along its edges,

Analysis II in Table VIII is compounded of the two analyses in

Table VII in the proportion of two parts of the augen to three of

ground-mass, which is the ratio in which they were observed in

the slides.

Meta-umptekose. II. 5. 1. 4. In the northern part of the

Boothbay quadrangle the rock re-appears about two miles east

of South Newcastle. In this locality is found the third type.

Here the augen are without orientation and there is little or

no schistosity, in which it resembles the type first described

(lincolnose). The rock is of moderate hardness and not readily

542 OGILVIE

weathered, in which it resembles the second type (monzonose).

It differs from both in that the ground-mass is lighter colored,

and the general tone of the rock is greenish gray rather than

black.

Mucroscopic Character.—The lighter color is found to be due

to the presence of a larger proportion of orthoclase, albite and

quartz, with less mica, and the green tone to the presence of

green hornblende.

Hornblende is the prevailing femic mineral and is of two

varieties, a deep reddish, basaltic variety and a colorless or green-

ish one. The latter is frequently twinned. Biotite is present,

frequently intergrown with the colorless hornblende, in which

relationship the biotite appears to be the older. Titanite and

apatite are abundant. The titanite is remarkable for having

double refraction and slight pleochroism from colorless to red-

dish. It has deep irregular cracks and polysynthetic twinning.

It encloses apatite, and is frequently surrounded by rims of

magnetite with the colorless hornblende. Pyroxene is entirely

lacking. The analysis of umptekose is given in Column III of

Table VEL: |

MABLE VAIL.

Analyses and Molecular Proportions of Monzonites.

Tf If Teale

se 55-17% -919 59-64% .994 58.74% .979

Al,O; 18.01 .176 14.76 .145 14.61 .143

Fe,0; .08 .OOL AG .003 48 .003

FeO 5-41 .075 Basi .050 3.70 .O51

MgO 5.29 Bia BAGS .138 5-47 137

CaO 5-64 .IIQ 3.47 .057 3.34 .060

Na.,O 2.12 .034 RiDy .059 5-70 .092

K,O 5-48 .059 6.69 5O\7aE 3.79 .040

H,O+ -29 oil 27

H ,0O- OL 03 7

WiO) 5 BBR .029 2,11 .026 1.87 .024

CO, none none none

12 O5 .25 .60 I.00

Total 100.86 99.92 99.14

A CONTRIBUTION TO THE GEOLOGY OF SOUTHERN MAINE 543

TasBLe VIII—Continued.

Analyses and Molecular Proportions of Monzonites

Norms.

it iO, Ee

Or 32.80 Or 30.47 Or 22.24

Ab 17.81 Ab 27 Ab 48.40

An 22.24 An 5.84 An 2.00

C oRit

Di 7.06 Di 5-93

Hy EGG 5 Hy 13.47 Hy I5.80

Ol 2.34 Il 2.85 ag 3.54

Il 4.31 Mg .46 Mg 7O

Ap 1.96 Ap mie Ap DBR

I. Monzonite from Campbell Pond, Maine. Position in the quantitative

system II. 5.3.4. Lincolnose.

II. Schist. Analyses I and II of Table VII combined in the proportions

of 2:3. Position in the quantitative system II. 5.2.3. Monzonose.

III. Monzonite from South Newcastle, Maine. Position in the quantitive

system II. 5.1.4. Umptekose.

This group of rocks presents similarities to the shonkinites,

yogoites and monzonites of the Bearpaw and Little Belt

Mountains, and with the prowersose of Two Buttes, Col. It also

has affinities with the ciminites and vulsinites of Italy. It has

no close allies near at hand, except the prowersose described by

Bastin, which is probably part of the same rock-body.

The similarity with the distant rocks is chemical only. The

other types are unmetamorphic and in some cases surface

voleanics. The Maine rocks are evidently of deep-seated origin,

and highly metamorphic, the resulting mineralogy and structure

departing widely from those of the allied types. The mode

departs widely from the norm for the same reason, namely that

the minerals actually present are in large part the result of

dynamic processes, and are in general those of higher specific

gravity than the normative ones.

THE SALFEMANES.

Meta-auvergnose. III. 5. 4. 3. Hornblende Schist. Occur-

rence. —Hornblende schists are common on the coast of Maine and

common also on the Boothbay quadrangle. They are involved

544 OGILVIE

with acid igneous rocks and with mica schists in a very complex

way. Asarule the trend of the rock is the same as the strike of

the schistosity, but there are occasional exceptions. The way

in which it is caught in with other rocks is shown on the small

map of Cabbage Island. It was not put on the large map,

because the patches of it are so numerous and so small. There

are, however, several large and persistent streaks of the rock.

One of these is on Southport near Cape Newagen, where a band

of it is cut by a large diabase dike. Another very persistent

streak extended from near the head of Linekin’s Bay northward

for about five miles. It was from this band that the chemical

analysis was made.

Megascopic Character.—The rock is somewhat variable in color,

ranging from black to dark gray. In the black types horn-

blende is the only mineral distinguishable; in the gray, feldspar

and hornblende. The gray portions are very distinctly banded,

the bands consisting of alternating streaks of light and dark

minerals. The black and the gray portions both show fissility,

caused by a parallel orientation of the hornblende.

Chemical Character.—It is evident that the chemical association

is with the diabases, though the lime is higher than is usual;

the potash lower; and the sum of the alkalies is low as compared

with lime.

TABLE IX.

Analysis and Norm of Meta-auvergnose from Bayville, Maine.

Composition. ie ae Norm.

Al,O; 15-46 -152 Or 2.22 |

Fe,0, 2.58 .o16 Ab 23.06

FeO 7.98 anc An 28.91

MgO 6.46 -161 Diop 22.34

CaO I1.83 .211 Hyp iG ik

Na,O 2.95 .044 Mag 3.7

K,0 44 .004 Tim 6.84

H,O+ .09 Ap 67

H,O- 07

CO, none

TiO » onze -045

IP Oe -30 .002

Total , 100.68

A CONTRIBUTION TO THE GEOLOGY OF SOUTHERN MAINE 545

Norm and Mode.—The correspondence between norm and

mode is not close. The lime is not in anorthite, but in ferro-

magnesian minerals, mainly hornblende. The alumina is not

all in feldspar, but also in hornblende giving an alferric mode.

Diopside, hypersthene and ilmenite are lacking. The titanium

is in titanite. The normative amounts of quartz, orthoclase,

albite and magnetite are present.

Microscopic Character.—Green hornblende is found to be the

prevailing mineral. It is arranged in parallel leaves, giving the

schistose structure. The schistosity is not perfect, but is in-

terrupted by many crumpled areas and by occasional patches

where the minerals are without orientation. The texture

simulates the granitic. Titanite is abundant. Plagioclase

(albite and oligoclase) is moderately abundant, with a little

orthoclase and less quartz. There is found to be no great

mineralogical difference between the gray and the black types.

The gray have been more intensely crushed and the light bands

are due to granulated quartz and feldspars. These are present in

the black variety also but are less crushed and so do not appear

white in the hand specimen. There is a slight kaolinization of

the feldspar. The orthoclase has inclusions of the reddish

black dust mentioned before. Small amounts of apatite and

magnetite are present.

Comparison with Monhegan Rocks.—The close analogy of this

rock with those from Monhegan Island described by Lord!

which fall into the same subrang is so striking that his analyses

are reproduced for comparison together with ours. Since some

of our later dikes also fall into this subrang, the discussion will

be taken up after they have been described. The comparative

table of analyses will be found on page 554.

The most conspicuous difference between the Monhegan rocks

and the schist of the mainland is that the former contains

olivine in both norm and mode, while the hornblende schist

does not. Moreover there is a slight excess of silica in the

schist, while two of the Monhegan rocks lack silica to the

extent of having nepheline in the norm.

1 Am. Geol., XXVI, pp. 340 and 346.

546 OGILVIE

THE PERFEMANES.

Dunose. V. 1. 1. 1. (Dunite). Occurrence.—This rock was

found in a single exposure, close to the cross roads where the

road from Bayville to Pleasant Cove intersects that from East

Boothbay to Boothbay Harbor. The exposure was not large:

the rock disappeared on the one hand under a vegetable garden,

on the other it was cut off by the highway. The occurrence was

apparently a dike.

Petrological Character.—In the hand specimen the rock was

dense, black with green talcose spots, and fine textured. It

proved on microscopic examination to be somewhat altered, but —

its origin could so clearly be seen that it is placed in the new

system of classification.

Microscopically it was found to be mainly olivine. This is

evidently of a very magnesic variety, magnetite and chromite

enough being visible to use up all the iron shown in the analysis.

There is present a small amount of an alteration product which

has the strong double refraction, high interference colors, and

low index of refraction characteristic of a carbonate. From the

analysis it is evident that it must be magnesite, no lime being

present. A little muscovite and a little chlorite are present:

The green spots which were in evidence megascopically are

found to consist of fibrous anthophyllite with a few small areas

of opaline quartz. A few rosettes of serpentine are also to

be seen.

These alteration products occupy relatively small areas and

invariably occur either along the cracks of the olivine or else they

retain the form of the olivine. It is evident that the original

rock was pure olivine of the variety forsterite, with small

amounts of magnetite and chromite. Fully three fourths of

the areas of the slides are now occupied by these original minerals,

and since the alteration products retain the olivine form, the

inference is safe that no lime can have been lost in the alteration

process. There is a little mica which may possibly be ongiaal

No feldspar or pyroxene is or has been there.

A CONTRIBUTION TO THE GEOLOGY OF SOUTHERN MAINE 547

AMMsAD) DS,

Analysis of Dunose from near Bayville, Maine.

Composition, Reecoees Norm.

SiO, Ages Ye 1023) Or 2.22

Al,O; 2.18 .022 Ab 4.19

Fe,O; 2.04) .023 Cor I.02

FeO 3.40 .048 Hyp Teo Gil

MgO 41.08 1.027 Ol 72.32

CaO none Mg .02

Na,O 54 .008 Cmr 32

H 20 ae 8 84

H,O- 09

CO, DOR

TiO , .12 .002

P,O 5 .08

Cr O)¢ .16 .OO1

Total 100.04

THE DIABASE DIKES.

Diabase dikes are well known on the coast of Maine. To the

list of localities already reported should be added at least six

dikes from the Boothbay quadrangle. The fiord character of

the coast makes it impossible to determine whether one dike or

several are present when the trend is such that they cross the

bays, but wherever the alignment coincided we assumed one

dike whatever the variation in width. The topography how-

ever is very suggestive of faulting and it is recognized that the

alignment may be accidental in some cases. For this reason

a series of microscopic slides was made and studied, of every

exposure. The distribution of the dikes is shown on the map.

The dikes described by Dr. Bascom from! the eastern part

of the quadrangle are inserted on the map (Fig. 2.).

It will be observed that there are four dikes having a direction

ot N. 85° BE. These dikes are all large, varying in width from

thirty to one hundred and fifty feet. The southernmost one

outcrops on the coast of Southport Island near Cape Newagen ;

1** Dikes from the Vicinity of John’s Bay, Maine,’’ Am. Geol., XXIII,

1899, Pp. 275.

548 OGILVIE

the second is Dr. Bascom’s, which has two outcrops on Ruther-

ford Island, and one on the east side of Linekin’s Neck; the third

is the longest of them and outcrops on Cabbage Island, on the

east and west coasts of Spruce Point, in the woods about a

quarter of a mile inland on Southport, twice respectively on the

east and west sides of the promontory of West Southport and

in Georgetown north of Five Islands; the northernmost dike

crosses Linekin Bay, being exposed on both coasts and on

Cabbage Island. These four dikes are closely related in their

petrographical characters, being porphyritic olivine diabases,

and in their chemical characters, falling into Class III of the

new system.

Another large dike is found on the mainland running parallel

to the Sheepscot River with a strike of N. 10° E. This differs

chemically and mineralogically from the others, being an acid,

very feldspathic diabase without olivine and non-porphyritic,

and falling into Class II of the new system.

The remaining dikes are small, varying from a few inches to a

few feetin width. They are entirely variable in composition, and

variable also in direction.

These three series were never found together so the age rela-

tions are unknown, but it is believed that there are two, possibly

three, types distinct in age, and that this classification holds for

other parts of the Maine coast.

Placerose. II. 4. 3. 5. Diabase. Occurrence.—The rock which

falls into this subrang is the big dike with N. 1o° E. trend,

already mentioned (see Plate XX XI, Fig. 2). It hasa maximum

width of about thirty feet, with a length of more than four miles,

during the greater part of which it is a conspicuous topographic

feature. In two localities it disappears for a short distance,

and in one place seems to be represented by three small dikes.

It grows narrower towards the south; at its northern end it

disappears suddenly. Its location can be seen on the map,

where it will be found running parallel to the trend of the

shore and a short distance inland.

Megascopic Character.—In the hand specimen the rock is a

dense black or gray black, fine-grained trap. A few needle-like

black crystals can be distinguished. In view of the apparent

A CONTRIBUTION TO THE GEOLOGY OF SOUTHERN MAINE 549

basicity, the analysis was a surprise, and so was the position of

the rock in the quantitative system. It falls into the same

rang as a rock from Southport which in the field was considered

a granite. Microscopic examination leaves no doubt that the

analysis is correct, the black color being deceptive.

Microscopic Characters.—Thin sections show the rock to have

a normal diabasic texture; to be of coarse grain, and to lack

phenocrysts. The edges are finer than the center. The prin-

cipal constituent is plagioclase, appearing as a network of lath-

shaped crystals. The extinction angles of these were measured

and they were found to be of two kinds: one corresponding to

albite of the composition abs an;, the other oligoclase, ab3 an;.

A microperthitic intergrowth of albite and orthoclase is of oc-

casional occurrence, and one interesting type of intergrowth

was seen, where laths of albite alternated with strips of micro-

perthite. A fine dust of kaolin is to be seen in some of the

feldspars. A few broad orthoclases are present. Anhedra of

magnetite are common, occupying the interstices between the

feldspars. The principal ferro-magnesian constituent is common

augite which is entirely xenomorphic, consisting of long strips

or of irregular areas between the feldspar laths. The augite is

entirely fresh and without inclusions.

TABLE XI.

Analysis and Norm of Placerose from Dike near Sheepscot River.

Composition. pone aes. : Norm.

SiO, Psou727, 945 Qu 10.56

Al,O,; 15.06 .148 Or 3.89

Fe,0; 73 .OTO ! Ab 30.82

FeO 6.33 .088 An 18.07

MgO 2.58 ‘064 Diop A 9.98

CaO 6.61 .118 Hyp 5-88

Na.O 4.73 .076 Mag 2.32

K,O .69 .007 Ilm 755

H,O+ Bae Ap .98

H,O- 15

CO, none

TiO 4.04 .049

IP Oe .40 .003

MnO 325; .004

Total

99.91

550 OGILVIE

Slides of the three smaller dikes into which the large one

appears to ramify in the middle of its extent show a similar

diabasic structure, but a much finer grain and a porphyritic

tendency. They show a felty appearance with fine feldspar

needles in a mass of magnetite, with very tiny augite anhedra, and

porphyritic plagioclase. The phenocrysts are of essentially the

same size as the average crystals of the center of the large

dike; the fineness of the ground-mass is the essential difference

between the two.

In Washington’s tables there are ten rocks within this subrang,

none of which comes from eastern America. Several are dikes

from California, but the one which is the closest analogue in

analysis and in norm is a porphyritic lava from the St. Augustine

volcano, Alaska. !

TABLE XII. ;

Analysis of Dike from Eastern Shore of Linekin Bay.

Composition. pee Norm.

S10 , 3.01% 883 Ou 4.20

AN OQ). 15.54 a2 Or 3.34

FeO 6.09 .096 An 29.75

MgO 7.70 .192

CaO 10.60 .189 Diop 18.40

Na,O Bay .039 Hyp 18.92

KO) .62 .006 | Ilm 3.04

lel (Q)=5 78 Mag 2°55

H,O- -47

CO, none

TiO, 1.70 .020

12 {Qs trace

trace i

Total 100.68

Auvergnose. III. 5. 4. 3. Diabase. Occurrence.—This rock

is found in the form of a dike on the eastern side of Linekin’s

Bay. The dike is about ten feet wide near the shore; it may be

followed for some rods inland, until it disappears under vegeta-

tion. The most vigorous search did not bring it to light farther

east. Westward it re-appears on Cabbage Island, where it has

1 See Becker, Annual Rept. U. S.G. S., XVIII, Pt. ITD, po 52:

A CONTRIBUTION TO THE GEOLOGY OF SOUTHERN MAINE 551

a width of thirty-five feet, and again on the western shore, where

itis still wider. On this latter exposure are glacial strie point-

ing N. 10° W. The slightly inclined columnar structure is

evident here as elsewhere among the dikes.

The subrang is a very common one, the most notable thing

about it being that within it are to be found four of the rock

types described by Mr. Lord from Monhegan Island. Of these,

two, malchite and beerbachite, are dikes; two, gabbro and gabbro

diorite, are part of the older plutonic mass. The resemblance

to the Linekin diabase is chemical only, the mineralogy being

quite different.

Microscopic Character.—The Linekin dike has a diabasic

texture, in which it is like the Sheepscot River dike just de-

scribed, but the resemblance is only of a very general nature.

The Linekin dike is porphyritic throughout, its principal

phenocryst being a broad plagioclase of the variety labradorite;

other phenocrysts are augite and olivine. The augite is usually

surrounded by secondary hornblende. The ground-mass con-

sists of a network of lath-shaped plagioclases, in the interstices

of which are magnetite and augite. This dike is in all respects

similar in petrographic character to the one described by Dr.

Bascom, hence mineralogical details need not be repeated.

Identical with these is the long dike extending from Cabbage

Island to Five Islands. All are porphyritic olivine diabases,

with slight variations in coarseness of grain according to distance

from the edges.

The southernmost of these east and west dikes, which out-

crops on the coast near Cape Newagen, shows considerable

metamorphism. The dike is the largest, measuring (by pacing)

one hundred and twenty feet in width. The original rock was

evidently identical with the others, but in places it has been so

crushed as to be practically a hornblende schist. Of the six

slides examined from different parts of this exposure all degrees

were to be observed between a slightly altered diabase with a

little green hornblende in addition to the minerals enumerated

~ above, to a true schist with hornblende and biotite as the only

ferro-magnesian minerals, and a schistose arrangement of these

leaves. The commonest type is a partly altered one containing

552 OGILVIE

green hornblende without orientation, with the diabasic texture

in part interfered with by the green hornblende which cuts the

feldspar boundaries. '

As indicated on the map, there is another outcrop of this dike

to the west. This is a small area in the woods, no other rock

being visible and a few feet only of the diabase exposed. ‘Thin

sections show this to be identical with the shore exposure, but

of coarser grain. It is evident that a large proportion of the

width of the dike is covered by vegetation, since its grain is too

coarse to be produced in the width exposed.

An estimation of the contents of these dikes leaves no reason-

able room for doubt that they would all fall into the subrang

auvergnose. The Cape Newagen dike forms a connecting link

between these dikes and the older complex. It is practically

intermediate between the diabases and the hornblende schist of

this same subrang.

The smaller dikes, although diabases, present notable differ-

ences, from all of the above and from each other. On Capitol

Island are two, of which one has a nearly east and west, the other

a nearly north and south trend. The first mentioned has a

strike of N. 80° E. and is exposed on and near the western shore.

A gorge on the mainland of Southport indicates that the dike

continues there, but no material could: be found in the latter

locality. Microscopically it is found to be a porphyritic diabase,

with phenocrysts of plagioclase with less augite and olivine.

In the ground-mass are plagioclase and augite. Its affinity is

with the east and west large dikes (auvergnose), but there is a

larger proportion of augite in the ground-mass and the diabasic

texture is not perfect. The plagioclase phenocysts are older

than the femic ones and sometimes are entirely surrounded

by them. In such occurrences the edges of the plagioclase are

corroded and the femic silicate enters it irregularly, notably along

the twinning planes. ‘Titanite and grains of magnetite are

present in notable amount. Much of the olivine is altered to’

brownish green serpentine and a carbonate.

The north and south dike of Capitol Island is exposed in a

bay on the southern shore, and after extending about onehundred

feet inland the strike turns to N. 20° E. Microscopically it is

A CONTRIBUTION TO THE GEOLOGY OF SOUTHERN MAINE 553

much finer grained than the other dike, and is a peculiar rock

with no ferro-magnesian minerals in evidence. Phenocrysts

and ground-mass are both of plagioclase while a dendritic form

of magnetite makes up a large proportion of the rock penetrating

both phenocrysts and ground-mass. The feldspar phenocrysts

show a kind of twinning unusual in this mineral, the laths cross-

ing each other in a manner resembling the twinning of staurolite.

Other phenocrysts are H-shaped, the two vertical arms having

a similar orientation, the cross-piece being placed at right

angles to the others. A few faint outlines suggest augite, but

magnetite now makes up their bulk with a dust of a brownish

substance which under a high power seems to be a laminated

serpentine. It has a cleavage and is probably antigorite. It

does not seem to occupy space formerly held by another mineral,

but to be redeposited.

On the western shore of Ocean Point is another small dike.

The dike itself is only about ten inches wide, but a chasm four

or five feet wide has been eroded along it (see Plate XXXII,

Fig. 2). The gully on this dike is about two hundred feet long

and has a strike of about N. 65° E. The dike rock is a dia-

base, slightly vesicular on one surface. Microscopically the rock

is found to be porphyritic, but the phenocrysts are completely

altered. There seem to be three types of alteration product,

one of which is kaolin and muscovite and is probably de-

rived from feldspar; another is a green serpentine, psobably

from augite; and the third a gray serpentine with calcite

and quartz, probably from olivine. In the ground-mass is

much pyrite and a network of plagioclase with needles of a

hornblende which is pleochroic in brown and pink, and a little

actinolite. The texture is not typically diabasic, some feld-

spar occupying the interstices.

Some rods farther north is another dike identical with the last.

It is only three inches wide but forms a chasm.

STRIKING PETROGRAPHICAL FEATURES ILLUSTRATED ABOVE.

The magmatic relationship of the trap dikes to the older

metamorphic complex is admirably illustrated on the Boothbay

quadrangle. The similarities will be apparent after an inspection

554 OGILVIE

of the following table to which are added all rocks from the same |

subrang that have previously been analyzed from the immediate

vicinity.

TABLE XIII.

Analyses of Auvergnose from the Coast of Maine.

ie Ta | LED gat eal V. VI.

SiOz 49.00% | 53.01% | 46.29% | 45.66% | 44.70% | 47.20%

Al,0O; 15.46 HARA | LAO 16.26 D5 18.64

Fe,O, 2.58 TAO vem en 2.07 4.13 1.96

FeO 7.98 6300) Suh lo87, 0. jeaOanm 8.21 6.82

MgO 6.46 TiS a Wy eae 10.21 FOR 8.28

CaO TOR 10.60 T2204 a ell 2mops 14.10 11.52

Na,O 2.75 2.37 Bron al corner 2.18 2.91

K,0 44 62 EiGuw aly eo .30 28

H,O+ .09 .73 | sega

H,O — .07 See | |

COZ none none | |

Ign Ri | .92 eae I.44

TiO , Bu 7D I.70 Let 4, Nt 3g 1.84 .84

Or 30 itacel a) eaedh | n.d n.d. n.d

Total 100.08 TOOLOS.S hI VOOLGr. alsa Or2 99.99 99.89

Norms of Auvergnose.

Ou Wes eee OT it ehle 20 woe arenes ae Wir

Or .66 4.20 |

Ab 2.22 3.34 Rei 7, i597) ite'7/

An 23.006 20.44 18.3 II.0 | reR6 Dito s

ve - 28°08 8) | 20n75 36.4 Ages | eLo 36.7

1 aE aee7

Hy 22.77 18.40 19.5 19.3 | 218 16.6

Ol 11.50 18.92 2.4 Te |

Mt 15.8 tW2 9.5 I5.9

Il See 2.55 3-7 4.4 | 5.8 3-0

Ap | 6.99 3.04 | 2.2 2.6 | ot ge oS

.67 |

I. Hornblende schist from Bayville. (See p. 543).

II. Diabase dike from east side Linekin’s Bay. (See p. 550).

III. Beerbachite. Lord, A. G., XXVI, p. 346. Monhegan Island. (Dike.)

IV. Malchite. Lord, A. G., XXVI, p. 346. Monhegan, Island. (Dike.)

V. Hornblende-gabbro. Lord, A. G., XXVI, p. 340. Monhegan

Island.

VI. Gabbro-diorite. Lord, A. G., XXVI, p. 340. Monhegan Island.

The general similarity among all six of these types is evident.

A CONTRIBUTION TO THE GEOLOGY OF SOUTHERN MAINE 555 -

: All of the chemical ratios are essentially the same, as is of course

_ indicated by the fact that they fall into the same subrang.

The similarity is such as to indicate chemical relationship or

magmatic unity between the plutonic metamorphic rocks of the

older series and the younger diabases. This chemical and

“normative” likeness is the more striking in that it is not

accompanied by a mineralogical or model similarity. Any re-

calculation of the analyses of the older rocks in terms of the

minerals that are actually there brings about an appearance

of greater basicity than the normative relationship warrants.

In the hornblende schist the amount of hornblende is so great

as to give the rock every appearance of belonging among the

basic gabbros. When interpreted in terms of standard minerals

it becomes evident that the amount of hornblende has increased

at the expense of anorthite molecules and that the rock is

practically identical with the diabase.

In Table XIV the analysis of all the Boothbay types analyzed

by us are repeated for comparison. It is evident that there

is a regular progression in chemical characters from I to IX,

and then a great difference when X is reached. It remains for

future investigation to show whether types intermediate between

IX and X are in existence, or whether X is really not a part of

this co-magmatic region. The distribution of peridotite and

allied dikes along the eastern parts of the United States is

suggestive of other than purely local relationships for this rock.

Leaving this dike aside we may thus sum up the chemical char-

acters of the region: the range of silica is moderate and its

amount intermediate, 49.00 to 67.59% being its extent. Alumina

is moderate in amount and does not show any definite serial

relation with other oxides. The ratios between lime, potash

and soda are variable, but in general as the basic end of the

series is approached, soda becomes in excess of potash, and lime

in excess of the sum of the alkalies. Iron and magnesia, as

well as lime, increase as the silica decreases; titanium is high

throughout. In the majority iron exceeds magnesia, but

~ magnesia increases relatively to iron as silica decreases.

556 OGILVIE

TABLE XIV.

Analyses of Boothbay Rocks.

1 The TEE SO We VI. | VIL.| Vill ieee X.

SiO, | 67.59] 67.04] 63.44] 56.72] 58.74] 59.64] 55.17| 49.00! 53.01) 37.41

Al,0;] 17-41] 11.40] 18.84] 15.06] 14.61] 14.76] 18.0%] 15.46] 15.54| 2.18

1B (0) g Bras .78 SHOP seas .48 41 .08| 2:58) 2.85) aamor

FeO 2.98| 3-75) 4.05} 6.33| 3-70] 3-57] 5-41| 7.98]. 6.09] 3.46

CaO 3.05| 7.00] 4.23] 6.61] 3.34) 3.07] 5:64) 11.82) | smonccrmmncries

Na,O 4.89| 2:70] 4.35] 4.73) 5.70 | 3:27] | 2502) 2.7 ene ae

K,0 Anko} 26S) BOF .69/ 3-79} 6.69] 5.48 -44 (OD ili

CO, none] none] none} none] none} none} none] none} none 2.03

H,0+ 18 16 “33 si By .I4 .20 .09 Seale chtov!

H ,0- .04 .09 .06 ats ony; .03 Or .07 47 | OG

TiO, .83] 1.68] =.41| 4.04) 4.87|| 2.10/| 2:33)|) 3272) eae oe

O; .19 at) 32 PALG| aROO .60 25 .30| trace .08

MnO a Gla) otalg Gla ial, le .35| nm. d.| n.d.| n.d.) nodo|Singcdy neler

Total| 101.30] 99.84|101.25| 99.91] 99.14] 99.92 100.86 100.68 |100.68 I00.04

. Grano-lassenose, I. 4. 2. 4. VI. Meta-monzonose, II. 5. 2. 3.

. Meta-grano-sitkose, II. 3. 3. 4. Wil: Lincolnoses isaac :

III. Grano-tonalose, II. 4. 3. 4. VIII. Meta-auvergnose, III. 5. 4. 3.

IV. Placerose, II. 4. 3. 5. IX. Auversnose, iil ae

V. Um~ptekose, II. 5. 1. 4. XG Dirnoses Vacant

METAMORPHISM.

Since unaltered dikes and metamorphic masses are clearly

derived from the same magma, it becomes possible to estimate

“the kind and amount of alteration that has taken place in the

metamorphic types. A comparison of the mode with the norm

among all of the preceding metamorphic types brings out the fact

that the difference between mode and norm is of a constant

character, and that it is closely similar to the difference between

the auvergnose dike and the meta-auvergnose. The presence

of titanite seems to be an invariable character of the unaltered

mode.

The following are the essential chemical differences between

mode and norm in the metamorphic rocks:

A CONTRIBUTION TO THE GEOLOGY OF SOUTHERN MAINE 557

1. The presence of alferric minerals, thus affecting the

distribution of alumina.

2. The alferric mineral may be biotite, in which case there

will be less than normative orthoclase.

3. The alferric mineral may be hornblende or augite of a

lime-bearing variety, in which case there will be less than

normative anorthite.

4. The quartz content will depend upon whether 2 or 3

takes place, or if both upon the amount of biotite formed.

The silica in hornblende and augite is in approximately the

same ratios as in anorthite; biotite does not require as much

silica as orthoclase, hence more than normative free quartz

will be present in the biotite rocks.

5. Zoisite may be present, affecting the distribution of

lime and alumina. :

6. Actinolite may be present, calling for a re-distribution

of lime and iron and magnesia from diopside.

7. Normative hypersthene disappears under these re-

arrangements.

Soda invariably remains unchanged, in albite. Quartz rarely

departs far from the estimated excess of silica.

In addition to these chemical characteristics, there are certain

mechanical alterations, such as undulatory extinction, microcline

twinning, and granulation.

A consideration of the minerals present and of the chemical

possibilities brings out the fact that the mineralogy is character-

istic of a zone of considerable depth. The minerals are those

_ of high specific gravity and are almost without exception those ~

that might be formed in igneous rocks under deep-seated condi-

tions. The garnet-staurolite-tourmaline group of minerals, of

still higher specific gravity and indicative of more intense or

longer continued metamorphism! are entirely absent.

Reference should be made to the recent book of Grubenmann,

Die Kristallinen Schiefer. This book aims to classify the

metamorphic rocks on a basis primarily of chemical com-

position, and secondarily of the place where the metamorphism

1 See Van Hise, Monograph XLVII, U.S. Geol. Survey, p. 183, et seq.

958 OGILVIE

occurred. The chemical system used is the artificial one of

Osann. From the metamorphic standpoint three divisions are

made according to the depth at which the alteration took place,

certain minerals being taken as indications of each zone. In its

main lines Grubenmann’s system is built upon precisely the

foundation which is needed for a natural classification of the

metamorphic rocks, but in its details it seems to be open to two

objections. One of these is the artificial character of the chem-

ical basis; the other, the practical difficulty of recognizing the

rock types formed in the respective zones, since the several types

of mineral sometimes occur in the same rock. This is especially

the case with the middle and lower zones and it appears to be

practically an impossibility to know from the minerals only to

which of them a given rock type can be referred. The Maine

rocks do not fit into either of the zones as defined by Gruben-

mann, though their resemblances are more nearly with the

lowermost. The prefix ‘“‘kata’’ is attached to this by him,

which seems unfortunate as that has already been used by Van

Hise in the word “‘katamorphism”’ as a designation of the highest

zone.

It yet remains for future workers to determine whether it is

possible to build up a system that shall accurately measure

pressure, heat and stress by means of the minerals formed. In

the present state of knowledge it appears better to attempt no

such subdivision, but to designate by the prefix ““meta” any

kind of metamorphism exclusive of weathering, and to apply

this prefix to the subrang name of the quantitative system.

The conception of metamorphism here entertained is that of

alteration without addition or subtraction of material. Ob-

viously rocks injected, cemented, weathered or otherwise chemi-

cally changed would not be available for classification in this

manner. In the region here discussed there is no reason for

suspecting any changes in chemical composition, and it is believed

that the quantitative system furnishes the most logical method

of regarding them.

PLATE SOOGs. me

Fic. 1.—‘“Graben”’ on Negro Island, Me. . ° .

Fic. 2.—Ridge formed through weathering of diabase

from the coast. Near Sheepscot River, Me.

we 2 4) i : /

ue wie sh i

aes dies ds ‘ SEC Ap,

a 4 s ; an a

| = eo

NEY ACAD: SCI, VOL. XVI. PLATE XX XI.

PLATE XXXII.

Fic. 1.—North Dike of (aber Island, Me. shomee: incl:

umnar structure 5 5 2 a: ;

‘(Cen ee ‘Me. 5 z A 5 5

AVIAN, XOOrCI

mNALS N. Y. ACAD. SCI.. VOL. XVII.

BU BLICATIONS-

La a, |

The publications of the Academy consist of two series, viz. :

@ The #ianals (cetavo ie) established in 1823, contain

ae of meetings, exhibitions, etc.

Publication of the Transactions of the Academy was discon-

: ( ‘tinued with the issue of Volume XVI, 1898, and merged in the

Annals. | A volume of the Annals will in general coincide with the

calendar year and will be distributed in parts. The price of the

current issues is one dollar per part or three dollars per volume.

Authors’ reprints are issued as soon as the separate papers are

__ printed, the dates appearing above the title of each paper.

_ (2) The Memoirs (quarto series), established in 1895, are

issued at irregular intervals. It is intended that each volume shall

a be devoted to monographs relating to some particular department

of science. Volume I is devoted to Astronomical Memoirs, Volume

II to Zodlogical Memoirs, etc. The price is one dollar per part

as issued.

_ All publications will be sent free to Fellows and Active Members.

_ The Annals will be sent to Honorary and Corresponding Members

_ desiring them. :

| Subscriptions and inquiries concerning current and back numbers

of any of the publications o the Academy should be addressed to

a j THE LIBRARIAN

New York Academy of Sciences

American Museum of Natural History.

New York City.

Rone Wines ATSIC EE SOLU hina ts a

in the Ae Measures of f Southwestern Penny

f Ry i i

Ay Ogilvie, I. HL e Contribution

Vata Southern ITED TTBS MEGA

et iy

aaa \ i .

f , : Hy ; f\ ant €

CADEMY OF SCIENCES

4 Ve i j

Editor:

CHARLES LANE POOR ;

| vo

PUCa He Cave NVC USN Ah " New York

SUS aH Published by the Academy

Treasurer-—EMERSON Me Men 40 Wall Stree

Librarian—Ratpu W. Tower, ‘American Museum. \ .

Editor—Cuar Les LANE Poor, 4 East 48th Street.

SECTION OF BIOLOGY

Chairman—Henry E. Crampton, Barnard College. _

Secretary—R. W. Miner, American Museum.

SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY HY

EN, Ww. GraBau, Columbia University

Ga A, JuLien, Columbia University.

; Chairman—CHARLES C. TROWBRIDGE, Columbia University.

Secretary—WILLIAM CAMPBELL, Columbia ee

Chairman—ROBERT MacDoueatt, New York Universi.

Secretary—R. S. WoopwortH, Columbia University.

SESSIONS OF 1907

The Academy will meet on Monday evenings at 8

from October to May, in the American Museum of Natur

77th Street and Central Park, West.

ENE NPM DSc |

)RK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

‘

3 i

. ‘ . (

‘

‘ e ie

. P : re

‘ nye .

: a ‘6

y im |

}

[Annats N. Y. Acap. Scr., Vol. XVII, No. 6, Part ITI,

Pp. 563-657 (December, 1907)]

RECORD OF MEETINGS

OF THE

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES.

January, 1905, to December, 1905.

Hermon C. Bumpus, Recording Secretary.

BUSINESS MEETING.

JANUARY 9, 1905.

The Academy met at 8.15 p.m. at the American Museum

of Natural History, President Kemp presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting were read and approved.

The following candidates for election as Active Members,

recommended by the Council, were duly elected:

J. H. Wilson 3120 Broadway

George H. Sherwood American Museum Nat. History

Prof. Chas. Baskerville College of the City of New York

Robert T. Hill 25 Broad Street

Maurice Fishberg, M.D. 79 West 115th Street

W. T. Roberts 108 West 84th Street

Roy W. Miner 435 West 123d Street

It was voted that Chapter. V, Section 1 of the By-Laws be

amended by omitting the following words:

“Every active member shall pay an initiation fee of five

dollars within three months of his election or such election

shall be void.”

It was voted that the following recommendation of the Coun-

cil be adopted:

“Active workers in science may at the discretion of the

Council be elected to Associate Membership in the Academy

in the manner prescribed by the By-Laws, with annual dues

of $3.00 for a term of two years, and they may be re-elected.

4 563

564 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE

Associate Members shall receive the publications of the Academy ~

and may offer their papers for publication in the Annals and

Memoirs, but because of constitutional provisions they shall

not have the power to vote and shall not be eligible to election —

as Fellows. At any time subsequent to their election Associate

Members may assume the full privileges of Active Members —

by the payment of the dues required by Chapter V, Section 1

of the By-Laws. Persons now Active Members may not be

elected Associate Members.”

The following resolution, having been presented by vote of

the Council, was then adopted:

Resolved, That the Council of the New York Academy of

Sciences place on record its warm interest in the efforts which

are being made by the Peary Arctic Club under Mr. Morris

K. Jesup as president to outfit another expedition to the polar

regions under the direction of Commander Peary.

In the opinion of the Council, such an expedition may become

one of great importance, and, in addition to the chief geographical

objects of the expedition, valuable observations and discov-

eries may be made in the sciences of geology, terrestrial physics,

geography, zoology, anthropology and botany.

Resolved further, That the Academy codperate so far as pos- |

sible with the Peary Arctic Club in raising funds not only in sup-

port of the chief object of the expedition, but, if the necessary

additional funds can be secured, in support of a small scientific

staff to accompany Commander Peary and make permanent ob-

servations and collections in the chief bases of the expedition

en route.

The Academy then adjourned.

Hermon C. Bumpus,

Recording Secretary.

SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY.

JANUARY 9, 1905.

Section met at 8.40 P.M., Vice-President E. O. Hovey presiding.

Twenty-eight persons were present.

The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and

approved.

The following program was then offered:

_ ’

a ee. ee a ee ee

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 565

George F. Kunz, THE JAGERSFONTEIN DIAMOND, THE LARGEST

EVER FOUND: THE History OF ITS CuT-

TING AND ULTIMATE DISPOSITION.

John J. Stevenson, THE CoALs OF SPITZBERGEN.

James F. Kemp@ New Sources or SuppLy oF IRON ORE.

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

Dr. Kunz said that the Excelsior-Tiffany diamond, the largest

diamond ever found up to the present time, weighed 970

carats, and was a gem of most marvellous purity. This dia-

mond was most expertly cleaved into pieces, and from it

were cut ten gems weighing from 13 to 68 carats each, a total

of 340 carats, and these were imported into the United States.

Dr. Kunz also stated that carbon silicide had been detected

in the meteorite from the Cafion Diablo by Dr. Henri Moissan

of Paris, together with transparent diamond and black diamond.

As carbon silicide has been made artificially with the electric

furnace by Messrs. Cowles, Acheson, and Moissan heretofore,

and was first determined in nature by Professor Moissan, if

agreeable to Professor Moissan he would suggest the name

Motssamte for this compound.

The paper was illustrated by models and photographs. It

was discussed by Professors Kemp, Stevenson, the chairman,

and others. Brief replies were made by Dr. Kunz.

Professor Stevenson said that the coals of Spitzbergen, accord-

ing to Nathorst, are in great part of Jurassic age. The mining

operations are confined to Advent Bay, a branch of the Icefiord

of West Spitzbergen, where coal has been opened on both

sides of the bay. The deposit has been followed northwardly

for about ten miles, and for an equal distance westwardly.

The chief enterprise is on the easterly side of the bay, where

the bed is somewhat less than five feet thick. The coal from

the upper part is splint-like, while that from the lower part

is brilliant and somewhat prismatic. The divisions show a

notable difference in the percentage of volatile, the upper

containing about ten per cent. more than the lower. The

coal shows no tendency to coke, and that from the lower portion

is attacked energetically by caustic potash.

566 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE

The coal was compared with that from other localities in

which the benches show notable difference in volatile. The

results of tests with caustic potash made upon a number of —

coals appeared to show that non-coking coals are attacked

promptly, while coals yielding a firm coke Be not affected

even after prolonged boiling. The speaker promised to give

at a future meeting the results of an extended series of tests.

The paper was discussed by Professor Kemp and others.

The last speaker was Professor Kemp, who discussed new

sources of the supply of iron ores. Emphasis was first placed

upon the enormous demands made by the iron industry of

to-day upon the mines of the United States, Great Britain,

and Germany. The conviction was held by many that within

fifty years the local American sources of rich ores, of whose

existence we now know, would be exhausted and the iron

masters would be compelled to seek new deposits. The follow-

ing possible new districts were passed in review: the Labrador

prospects discovered by Mr. A. P. Low of the Canadian Geologi-

cal Survey, which might also ship to Europe; Adirondack

areas of reported magnetic attraction and possible lean ores;

the Temagami district and the Michipicoten range, Ontario;

the southern continuation of the Marquette range beneath the

drift; the southern half of the Mesabi probable syncline beneath

the swamps northwest of Duluth, as suggested by C. P. Ber-

key; the Baraboo range; the deposits in Iron County, Utah, and

in the Wasatch Mountains; the magnetites of southern Califor-

nia and the prospects in Washington and along the coast. The

speaker emphasized the important reserves in the titaniferous

magnetites and their great quantity.

Passing to Europe the new developments in Sweden at

Gellivara and Kirunavaara were reviewed and the possibilities

at Routivaara; also the Dunderland valley in Norway and the

similar deposits farther north. Their relations to the smelting

centres in Great Britain and Germany were explained and

their comparative amount with the “minette” ores of France,

Luxemburg, and Germany brought out. Other deposits in

Spain, Algiers, Venezuela, India, Australia, and Shan-si in

China were mentioned.

i a a

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 567

The necessary connection between the coal fields and any

great development of the iron and steel industry was emphasized

and the future of the three great producers of to-day forecast

as involved in the permanency of the coals. The reserves of

coal are greater in Germany and America than in Great Britain.

The province of Shan-si, China, having rich stores of both

coal and iron, seems to be the one possible new lecation of the

future great iron industry.

Professor Kemp’s paper was discussed by Messrs. McMillin

and Kunz, the chair, and others. Replies were made by

Professor Kemp.

A. W. GRABAU,

Secretary.

SECTION OF BIOLOGY.

JANUARY 16, 1905.

Section met at 8.15 pP.M., Vice-President W. M. Wheeler

presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read

and approved.

The following program was then offered:

Esther F. Byrnes, TRANSITIONAL STAGES AND VARIATIONS IN

CERTAIN SPECIES OF CYCLOPS.

W. M. Wheeler, ANTs THAT RatsE MUSHROOMS.

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

Dr. Byrnes described the transitional stages and variations

in some species of Cyclops. The species C. segnatus occurs

sexually mature in morphologically incomplete stages. It

is then characterized by eleven antennal segments instead

of the adult number, seventeen, and is comparatively small

in size and pale in color. Large numbers of adults of the type

C. viridis show striking variations in the armature of the swim-

ming feet. Similar antenne and fifth feet are correlated in

one type of individual with the swimming feet of C. parcus,

in another form with C. viridis (var. americanus), and in another

with C. brevispinosus. Occasionally serial and lateral varia-

568 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE

tions combine the swimming feet of C. parcus and C. brevi-

spinosus in the same individual. These facts, together with

the frequent replacement of sete by spines, the constant asso-

ciation of the forms, and their occasional sequence in small

aquaria, indicate a very close relationship among the species

observed and suggest that they are transitional forms in the

development*of a single species.

Dr. Wheeler described the structure and ecology of many

“ants that raise mushrooms,” giving special attention to the

species of Texas and Mexico, where his own studies of these -

ants were made. Numerous lantern slides illustrated this

lecture, and at its close many slides from photographs of ants

kept in captivity by Miss Adele M. Fielde were exhibited.

M. A, BIGELow,

Secretary.

SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS, AND CHEMISTRY.

JANUARY 23, 1905.

Section met at 8.15 P.M. at Fayerweather Hall, Columbia

University, Vice-President E. R. von Nardroff presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and

approved.

The following program was then offered:

A. P. Wills, Tue MAGNETIC SUSCEPTIBILITY OF WATER.

H. C. Parker, EXPERIMENTS RELATING TO THE CONDUCTIVITY

oF PowpDErRs AT High TEMPERATURES.

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

In connection with Dr. Wills’s paper, experiments were

made with the large electro magnet of Columbia University

to determine the magnetic susceptibility of water. With the

aid of this magnet, which is one of the largest in existence, Dr.

Wills found the coefficient of susceptibility of water to be

—o.72 X 10-®, and also to be independent of the field strength

over a range from 4,000 to 16,000 C.G.S. units.

Dr. Parker said that when a conducting powder like graphite

is mixed with a non-conducting refractory powder, the resistance

;

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 569

increases quite rapidly at first, as the proportion of graphite

is decreased, then more slowly, and after a time reaches a critical

point where there is no conduction or the graphite is destroyed

by arcing.

When the percentage of the conducting powder is low, a

mechanical separation or ‘“‘striation’’ takes place on packing

in the refractory tubes. Besides this an electrolytic separation

usually takes place after a time and the conductivity: of the

mixture is destroyed by arcing.

A very great variety of substances and mixtures were experi-

mented with in the search for a permanent compound of high

resistance. C. C. TROWBRIDGE,

Secretary.

SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY.

JANUARY 30; 1905.

The Section met at 4.15 P.M. at Columbia University, and at

8.15 P.M. at the American Museum of Natural History, Vice-

President F. E. Woodbridge presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read

and approved.

The following program was then offered:

At the afternoon session:

R. §. Woodworth and

F. G. Bruner, CoLoR PREFERENCES.

_M. Tsukahara, THE RELATION OF INTENSITY OF SENSA-

TION TO ATTENTION.

Dickinson S. Miller, IDEAS AND TEMPERAMENTS.

At the evening session:

Robert MacDougall, Orcanic LEVELS IN THE EVOLUTION OF

THE NERVOUS SYSTEM.

Robert MacDougall, Note on NuMBER Hasir.

W. P. Montague, RELATIONAL THEORIES OF CONSCIOUSNESS,

Charles H. Judd, RADICAL EMPIRICISM AND WUNDT’s PHI-

LOSOPHY.

570 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE

The Section met in conjunction with the New York Section

of the American Psychological Association.

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

Drs. Woodworth and Bruner said that tests of different

races, made at the St. Louis Exposition, showed that red was

the color most often preferred, both by men and by women,

and by all the races tested. The predominance of red choices

was very great. Now previous authors have found, in the

white race, that red was a woman’s choice, but blue that of

most men. ‘This difference of result, as between the present

and previous authors, is probably due to the different material

used for presenting the colors—colored papers having previ-

ously been employed, whereas in the present tests use was made

of colored worsteds, such as are used in the Holmgren test for

color blindness. Special tests showed that the same individual

is very likely to express a different preference, according as

the colors are presented in paper, worsted, or glass. Many

persons were also found to dislike strongly the colors of the

rose, the violet, and the sunset, when presented in paper or

worsted. The inference is that the ‘‘color-tone” is by no means

a compelling factor in determining likes and dislikes of colored

objects.

Dr. Tsukahara said that in an experimental study of the

effects of distraction on the apparent intensity of a stimulus,

a new method of distraction was employed. Two sorts of

stimulus—the sound of a falling ball and the impact on the

skin of a falling hammer—were employed, and sometimes

presented simultaneously, so that the attention had to be

divided between them. For instance, first a sound was given;

next, simultaneously, a sound and an impact; and last an

impact alone. The subject was required to compare the inten-

sities of the two sounds and also of the two impacts. The

result was that, contrary to the conclusion of Miunsterberg,

distraction decreased the apparent intensity of the stimuli; but

this result is so far merely provisional.

Dr. Miller stated that in the psychology of intellectual bias

one may study the individual or type in its relation to a variety

ee eae ee ee ee

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES wel

of ideas, or the idea in relation to a variety of individuals or

types. Attempting the latter with the so-called “ideas of

_ the French Revolution,” liberty, fraternity, equality, reason, the

natural goodness of man, and the rights of impulse, spontane-

ously advocated in literature, we find that different phases of

these ideas must first be distinguished. As regards the ideas in

these phases, the sympathy or antipathy of authors is found to

depend in a determinate manner on the temperamental type.

Dr. MacDougall, in his paper discussing the organic levels

in the evolution of the nervous system, said that the relation

of organization to discriminative reaction may be stated in

terms of four types, the non-nervous, the ringed nervous, the

segmented, and the cephalic. The types were described.

In his second paper, Dr. MacDougall said that by number

habit is meant the distribution of frequency in the recurrence

of each of the digits when the choice is determined by mental

constitution rather than objective evidence. Previous reports

have given two types, a curve (Minot’s) in which the changes

from figuré to figure are slight, presenting a high plateau in

the middle of the series with a depression toward either end;

and a curve (Dresslar’s and Sanford’s) in which maxima system-

atically appear in the odd numbers and minima in the even.

From an apparently similar series of guesses in the present case

a curve was obtained presenting three different levels. Zero

and five formed maxima in relation to which all the other

digits fell in a low plateau, and of the rest the even numbers

formed maxima and the odd minima throughout.

Dr. Montague stated that the new movement in favor of a

relational theory of consciousness is to be welcomed in the

interest of a scientific psychology. It is, however, seriously

hampered by a failure on the part of most of its advocates to

realize the incompatibility of any form of idealism with the

view that consciousness is a relation between its objects, and

not something in which they adhere. Things must be before

they can be related; hence if consciousness is a relation no

object can depend for existence upon the fact that it is per-

ceived. In short the realistic theory of the world is a necessary

implication of the relational theory of consciousness; while,

572 ; RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE

conversely, if we follow common-sense in admitting the effective

no temptation to treat consciousness as anything other than

special relation between an organism and its environment.

Realism and the relational view of consciousness are strictly

correlative. They are different aspects of the same truth, and

cannot be defended or understood apart from one another.

Dr. Judd. stated that Wundt’s critical realism is closely

related in its fundamental positions to James’s recent philo-

sophical discussions. Reality and immediate experience are

made synonymous by Wundt. The concept of consciousness

is not like the concept matter of the physical sciences, but

includes only the immediate processes of experience in their

totality. On the basis of these closely related fundamentals

Wundt develops the details of his system in such a way as to

emphasize the distinctions between physical and psychical

phenomena, while James strives to minimize these distinctions.

R. S. WoopwortTH,

* Secretary.

BUSINESS MEETING.

FEBRUARY 6, 1905.

The Academy met at 8.15 p.m., President Kemp presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting were read and approved.

No business was reported from the Council and the Academy

adjourned. Hermon C. Bumpus,

Recording Secretary.

SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY.

FEBRUARY 6, 1905.

Section met at 9.20 P.m., President Kemp presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and

approved. .

The following program was then offered:

George F. Kunz, (a) Moissanite, A CARBON SILICIDE FROM

THE CANON DiasLo METEORITE (by title)-

“NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 573

George F. Kunz, (b) ON ZiRKON FROM NEAR LawTON, OXKLA-

HOMA (by title).

title).

V. F. Marsters, THE SERPENTINES AND ASSOCIATED ASBES-

TOS OF BELVIDERE MOUNTAIN, VERMONT.

Charles P. Berkey, INTERPRETATION OF CERTAIN INTERGLACIAL

CLAYS AND THEIR BEARINGS UPON MEas-

UREMENT OF GEOLOGIC TIME.

A. W. Grabau, EVOLUTION OF SOME DEVONIC SPIRIFERS.

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

Dr. Marsters stated that Belvidere Mountain lies approxi-

mately along the line between the counties of Orleans, Lamoille,

and Franklin. It is a sharp-crested ridge with a maximum

elevation of some 2100 feet above Eden Corners at its southern

termination. Three topographic elements are prominent—a

sharp-crested ridge forming the upper goo feet of the mountain,

a cresentric plateau with a flat top 1200 feet above the valley

floor and rimming the end of the mountain, and lastly a steep

lower slope composing the foot of the plateau and extending to

the valley bottom.

The upper part with steep slopes is composed of amphibolite.

In addition to the hornblende, which makes up seventy-five

per cent. of the rock, there is also present an inconsiderable

amount of epidote and a non-pleochroic colorless mineral

regarded as zoisite, together with magnetite and pyrite. Towards

the base, garnet becomes a prominent constituent, sufficient

to make a well-defined garnet zone. In nearly all cases observed

the garnet is largely altered to penninite, a variety of chlorite.

Along the garnet zone the hornblende has also undergone

marked alteration, in part to serpentine. The nose-like pro-

jection forming the plateau is composed of serpentine. In

this rock occur the so-called asbestos, deposits recently pros-

pected and worked for this product. In thin section the

serpentine appears to be made up largely of a felty and fibrous

mass, apparent only under cross nicols. It is typical fibrous

574 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE

serpentine. In thin sections from the upper part of the pla- —

teau, and in close proximity to the overlying amphibolite, there —

appear shredded masses presenting the original structure of

hornblende as seen in the amphibolite, but mineralogically

altered to a fibrous mass with the optical characteristics of

anthophyllite. It is not improbable, moreover, that a portion

of the hornblende has altered to tremolite. These fibrous

constituents form the so-called “‘slip-fibre.”’

The serpentine belt has also been subjected to peculiar fault-

ing and crushing. The cracks thus produced, even on a micro-

scopic scale, have been filled with these fibrous constituents —

and then the whole mass submitted to further slipping. This

has caused the slickensiding phenomena on the fracture planes

and a consequent stretching of the fibrous content; hence the

term “‘slip-fibre’’. ‘“‘Cross-fibre’’ or true thrysotile is to be

found in this area. It is best developed along lines of maxi-

mum fracture and minimum lateral thrust. There appear to

be two bands of maximum fracture, one stretching along the

upper portion of the plateau and not far from the garnet

zone, the second along the foot of the plateau and best shown

on the property of Judge Tucker.

Dr. Berkey said that laminated clays of Glacial and Post-

glacial age are abundant in many districts of the Northern

States and Canada. They are especially abundant about the

head of Lake Superior, where the origin of the deposits is

intimately related to the closing fluctuations and final with-

drawal of the Wisconsin ice-sheet.

One of these deposits at Grantsburg, Wis., exhibits a remarkable

uniformity of structure and is so clearly bounded by other accu-

mulations of known significance that its history is readily inter-

preted. From a detailed analysis of its laminated structure it is

argued that this deposit was about 1700 years in accumulating.

A like interpretation of similar isolated deposits following

the retreating ice-sheet would give data for time estimates

from an entirely new standpoint. In some areas laminated

clays occupy interglacial positions, and it may be possible to

apply the same method to them.

The last paper of the evening was by Professor Grabau, on

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Siy7iis

_ the evolution of some Devonic spirifiers. Spirifier mucronatus

(Conrad) is a Linnean species comprising a large number of

mutations. A remarkable fact is that all mutations pass

through a mucronate type such as is characteristic of the typical

mutation after which the species is named. (The term muta-

tion is here used’in the sense in which it was originally proposed

by Waagen, and not in that in which it was subsequently used

by De Vries; i.e., for the result and not for the process.) A

still earlier stage in development (nepionic) shows the non-

mucronate features of the ancestral species similar to S. duo-

denarius of the Onondaga. The mucronate feature is carried

to excess in a number of mutations of the Lower Hamilton

group. It is especially persistent in the Michigan region. This

type of outline is accompanied by a rib in the median sinus and

a depression in the fold. In Ontario the primitive mucronate

type gives rise upward to a number of mutations which are

especially characterized by progressive increase in height with-

out corresponding lengthening of the hinge. The median

plication and depression quickly disappear.

Acceleration and retardation in development are the chief

principles which explain the development of the great number .

of mutations. For the principle of retardation the term brady-

genesis (from fpadus, slow,) was proposed, corresponding to the

term tachygenesis proposed by Hyatt for acceleration.

In the New York province the primitive mucronate type

gives rise to high and short-hinged mutations, but these retain

the median rib and depression. In form these are tachygenetic;

in respect to the surface features, bradygenetic. In the are-

naceous beds of the later Hamilton in eastern New York, a

mutation with many ribs and moderate mucronations exists,

This is in many respects a bradygenetic type.

Side by side with extremely accelerated or tachygenetic types

in all horizons (i.e., very short-hinged, non-mucronate, high and

thick mutations) occur slightly retarded or bradygenetic types,

which retain in the adult the mucronate character which is

typical of the young of all the mutations.

A. W. GRABAU,

Secretary.

“

576 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE

SECTION OF BIOLOGY.

FEBRUARY 13, 1905.

Section met at 8.15 p.m., Professor Wheeler presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting were read and approved.

It was voted to postpone the program of the evening until

the March meeting, to enable the members of the Section to

attend a lecture by Professor Henry F. Osborn, on the “‘Evo-

lution of the Horse,’’ in the auditorium of the museum.

M. A. BicELow,

Secretary.

SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY.

FEBRUARY 27, 1905.

Section met at 8.20 p.m., General Wilson presiding. ;

The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read |

and approved. : |

The following program was then offered:

Maurice Fishberg, ANTHROPOMETRY OF THE JEWS OF NEW

MORI

R. S. Woodworth and ANTHROPOMETRIC WORK AT THE ST.e

Frank G. Bruner, Louis EXPosiITION.

The Section met in conjunction with the American Ethno-

logical Society.

——— ae eee

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

Dr. Fishberg, in an interesting paper, stated that whether —

the Jews have maintained their racial purity to the present

day is a question that can be examined by comparing the

physical type of Jew from different countries. Extensive

measurements of Jewish immigrants in New York from various i

countries of Eastern Europe show that the Jewish type in those —

countries is not Semitic, but varies in the different countries, —

always approximating, in stature and cephalic index, to the ~

native or Christian population of the respective countries. |

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 577

Drs. Woodworth and Bruner said, As many as possible of

the racial groups represented at the Exposition were measured

The best material was found among the Philippine Islanders,

of whom about 700 were measured. The Christianized tribes,

such as the Tagalog, Pampango, Ilocano, Bicol, Visaya, were

found very uniform in physical type. Measurements showed

no clear evidence of differentiation among them. The average

height of the several tribes differed but little from 161 cm.,

the cephalic index differs little from 83, etc. The Moros of

Mindanao also are practically identical in physical type with

the Christian tribes. The pagan Igorots and Bagobos seem

to differ considerably from this type, especially in height, which

is about 155 cm.; while the Negritos were clearly marked off

from all the rest by their kinky hair, small stature (144 cm.),

broad nose, and small head in proportion to stature.

F R. S. WoopwortnH,

Secretary.

BUSINESS MEETING.

MarcH 6, 1905.

The Academy met at 8.15 p.m. at the American Museum of

Natural History, President Kemp presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting were read and approved.

The following names were then presented for election as

Active Members, having been recommended by the Council:

William A. Anthony Cooper Union

Charles M. Bergstresser 60 West 47th Street

R. A. Canfield Providence, R. I.

Banyer Clarkson 26 West soth Street

Mrs. Farquhar Ferguson 20 West 38th Street

_ Mrs. Theodore Kane Gibbs Newport, R. I.

James B. Hammond 205 West 57th Street

motu Bb. Heinze - 220 Madison Avenue

George D. Hilyard 144 East 49th Street

Mrs. L. S. Hinchman 3635 Chestnut Street, Philadel-

phia, Pa.

Patrick Kiernan 14 East 83d St.

578 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE

Bradley Martin (Life) 4 Chesterfield Gardens, Mayfair, 7

London |

Henry V. A. Parsell 770 West End Avenue

Mrs. Edwin Parsons 326 West goth Street

Miss Frances Pell 206 Madison Avenue

William. H. Perkins (Life) Park Avenue Hotel ;

Washington, D.C.

Samuel Robert 906 Park Avenue |

George J. Seabury, 59 Maiden Lane |

Paul M. Warburg, 3 East 82d Street

Horace White, 18 West 69th Street

AssociaTE AcTIVE MEMBER

James, F. Wilton 257 West 12th Street

It was voted that the Secretary cast a unanimous ballot for .

the above candidates.

There being no further business, the meeting adjourned.

Hermon C. Bumpus,

Recording Secretary.

SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY.

MArcH 6, 1905.

Section met at 8.45 P.M., Professor Stevenson presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and

approved.

The following program was then offered:

E. P. Adams, ON THE ABSENCE OF HELIUM FROM CARNOTITE

(by title).

F. Wilton James, NoTES ON THE MINNEWASKA REGION OF

ULsTER County, N. Y.

A. A. Julien, DETERMINATION OF BRUCITE AS A ROCK-

CONSTITUENT.

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

Dr. Adams’s paper was read by title.

The following brief account of his experiments was handed

later to the Secretary:

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 579

“The experiments of Sir William Ramsay and Seddy on

the formation of helium from the radium emanation account

very readily for the well-known fact that the minerals which

contain helium in appreciable quantity contain as well one or

more of the radioactive elements. It might therefore be ex-

pected that all radioactive minerals should contain helium.

“I have recently been testing various specimens of carnotite

to determine whether or not helium is present in them. Car-

' notite promises to become an important source of ‘radium;

certain specimens have been found which have a radioactivity

1.6 times that of the metallic uranium, although it appears to

be difficult to obtain large quantities of mineral of this high

activity. On heating 7 vacuo several grams of this carnotite,

considerable quantities of carbon dioxide and water were

driven off, and when these were absorbed by caustic potash

and phosphorus pentoxide, respectively, only the nitrogen

spectrum could be observed in a vacuum tube connected to

the pump. No trace of helium could be detected, although

no difficulty was found in obtaining the helium spectrum when

only a tenth as much pitchblende, monazite sand, or thorianite!

was used.

“The quantity of gas which was obtained from this amount

of carnotite was so small that it was thought worth while to

work with a larger quantity of the mineral. For this purpose

300 grams of carnotite, of activity 0.8 times metallic uranium,

was heated at a red heat zm vacuo for three hours, and after

absorbing the carbon dioxide by caustic potash, about Io c.c.

of a gas remained. On sparking this, after adding oxygen,

in order to absorb the nitrogen present, a rapid decrease

in volume took place, and when finally the excess of oxygen

was absorbed by means of phosphorus, only about o.1 c.c. of a

gas remained. This, when introduced into a spectrum tube,

showed the characteristic red spectrum of argon. It was

observed that the greater part of the gas, aside from the carbon

dioxide, was given off on the first gentle heating; and it is

1 The recently discovered mineral from Ceylon, containing about 75%

of thorium, was kindly supplied by Dr. George F. Kunz for this purpose.

580 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE

therefore probable that the argon was associated with the air

held in the powdered mineral which was completely driven off

only upon heating it.

“Tt therefore appears that if helium is contained in carnotite

at all, it exists in far smaller amount than would be expected

from the quantity of radium present. But it is probable that

this absence of helium may be explained by the physical proper-

ties of the mineral. Carnotite is a very fine powder which is

usually found disseminated through sandstone. Now even

the most compact specimens of this, sandstone containing

carnotite are quite permeable to gases. This was shown by

closing one end of a glass tube with a piece of the mineral about

2 cm. in thickness, and filling it with illuminating gas over

water. In a few minutes the water rose a distance of 6—7 cm.

in the tube. If we then assume helium to be formed in this

mineral by the disintegration of the radium it appears reason-

able to suppose that it rapidly diffuses away. The minerals

that contain helium are known to be massive, impervious

substances, which are therefore able to retain the helium formed

in them.

‘““This explanation of the absence of helium from carnotite

appears to be supported by the views of Travers! on the state

in which helium exists in minerals. According to him the

helium is present in the minerals in a state of super-saturated

solid solution; the minerals being impermeable to the gas at

ordinary temperatures, the velocity with which equilibrium

is established between the helium in solution and the helium

in the gaseous phase is very small, but increases rapidly with

rise of temperature. In the case of carnotite, however, the

mineral is permeable to the gas at ordinary temperatures, and

therefore we could not expect to find any appreciable amount

of helium in this mineral.”’

Mr. James stated that the stripping of the grit from the

crest of the second anticline of the Shawangunk Mountain

(Darton, Rep. 47, N.Y. State Mus.) appears to be due to a

slight cross fold by anticlinal fracture and erosion, as the rocks

at the southwest end of the eroded area show an upward pitch.

1 Nature, Jan. 12, 1905.

ee ee ee ee ae

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 581

Through this depression the Peterskill probably flowed, while

its own valley and Coxing Clove were dammed by the front

of the ice sheet, and cut then the Paltz Gap in the crest of the

first anticline, 200 feet deep, through which the road to New

Paltz now runs.

_ The basin of Lake Minnewaska is vertically walled except

at the southwest end. The cliffs are highest under Cliff House,

where they stand 160 feet above the surface of the lake and

65 feet below it. The grit is probably about 230 feet thick

here. The walls are pierced by four crevasses, now filled with

drift,—the remains of two fissures crossing each other at the

deepest point in the lake, which is there 74 feet deep. There

is no drift in the lake basin, not even under the: south-facing

cliffs, although the fissure running S. 25° W. is filled, and the

transverse breach is blocked to 150 feet above the lake. The

glaciation is here S. ro° W. The cause of the absence of drift

is not clear; elsewhere the cliffs are heavily skirted.

. Lake Awosting lies along a vertical fault plane, drift-filled

at both ends. The fault has not been studied. The north

wall of the Palmaghat is a vertical fault of 200 feet throw.

Both these faults seem to be derived from the overthrown

anticline of the Coxingkill escarpment. Mr. Barton is in

error in declaring the absence of extended faults.

Dr. Julien, after a brief review of the life of Dr. Archibald

Bruce of New York City, the discoverer of brucite, discussed

the fact of the wide distribution of the mineral, both in lime-

stone and serpentinoids, either in its unchanged condition, or

in the form of its derivatives, especially magnesite and hydro-

magnesite, aS maintained by Volger in 1855.

The following are its most marked characteristics for recogni-

tion as a rock-constituent: .

t. In addition to the known basal cleavage, two other

systems may be distinguished on plates or folia: that of the

hexagonal prism, often becoming rhombohedral, intersecting

at 60° or 120°; and that of the hexagonal pyramid, intersecting

at 90°.

2. Nemalitic structure or fibration, commonly occurring

in brucite, within serpentinoids subjected to dynamic stresses.

la las BO eed A ll iy

582 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE

The major axis of elasticity always lies parallel to the direction —

of the fibres.

3. Refractive Index, 1.57, sufficient, where the associated —

minerals are pure, to distinguish it by the Becke method from

serpentine on the one hand, and from amphiboles, dolomite,

etc., on the other.

4. Birefringence (7y—a@ = 0.020), presenting interference

colors of the upper First Order up to sky blue of the lower

Second Order, in plates or sections of the usual thinness.

5. Characteristic strain phenomena; particularly by dis-

turbance of the interference figure, examined by convergent

light in basal cleavage plates of folia; also by a variable, small

extinction angle in sections parallel to the vertical axis.

6. Optically positive character of the uniaxial figure, in

distribution from talc, serpentine, etc.

7. Occasional twinning, observed in crystals enclosed in

limestone.

8. Certain chemical tests, in confirmation of the optical

diagnosis.

The meeting then adjourned.

A. W. GRABAU,

Secretary.

SECTION OF BIOLOGY.

MARCH 13, 1905.

Section met at 8.15 p.m., Vice-President Wheeler presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and

approved.

The following program was then offered:

L. I. Dublin, THE History oF THE GERM CELLS IN Pedicelli-

na americana.

F. A. Lucas, WHALES AND WHALING ON THE Coast oF NEw-

FOUNDLAND (illustrated with lantern slides).

F. S. Lee, TEMPERATURE AND MUSCLE. FaTIGUE (illustrated

with lantern slides).

ee ee ee ee

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 583

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

- Mr. Dublin described the history of the germ-cells in Pedi-

cellina americana, giving special attention to the chromatic

changes. The somatic number of chromosomes is twenty-

two. These bodies behave, throughout, very much as~has

been described by many workers on other forms; but in addition

there has been observed a peculiar process in connection with

the reduction of the chromosomes. These are V-shaped in

the somatic cells and in the several generations of oogonia

and spermatogonia with the exception of what appears to be

the last. In this the number is still twenty-two, but they

are bar-shaped. These divide and, either before or at the telo-

phase, apparently unite end to end in pairs to form eleven

new V’s each bivalent as compared with the earlier structures.

A longitudinal splitting of these loops, coincident with the

extensive growth of the individuals, produces in the first matura-

tion division eleven ring- or bar-shaped chromosomes, each

of which is structurally a tetrad. The first division 1s thus

reducing; the second equational. The change in chromosome

form in the last oogonial and spermatogonial generations is

then clearly a striking adaptation to the subsequent synapsis

or reduction, making the latter easily possible.

Mr. Lucas gave an account of whales and whaling on the

coast of Newfoundland, illustrating his remarks with stereop-

ticon views of the whales and stages of their capture. Three

species of whales were described: the finback, the humpback,

and the sulphur-bottom, the first two being found on the south

and east coast, the last one on the south coast only. The

speaker then described the past and present methods of capture

and utilization, saying that whales are now worked up so rapidly

that within forty-eight hours after one is brought to the whaling

station it is reduced to oil, fertilizer, and bone. The lecture

closed with an interesting account of the method employed in

making the mould of the large model of a whale shown by the

National Museum in the exhibit at St. Louis. This was pos-

sibly the largest mould ever made, and the cast was the first

accurate representation of a fully grown whale.

584 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE

Professor Lee discussed temperature and muscle fatigue. He

and others have previously pointed out that the contraction

process of the muscles of cold-blooded animals in the course

of fatigue becomes greatly slowed, while those of warm-blooded

animals show no such phenomenon. Lohmann has recently

claimed that a cold-blooded muscle on being heated to a mam-

malian temperature shows a course of fatigue similar to that of

mammalian muscle; and, on the other hand, that a warm-

blooded muscle on being cooled fatigues like the muscles of

cold-blooded animals at a similar temperature. From these

supposed effects he infers that in the matter of fatigue there is

no real physiological difference between the two groups of

muscle. Professor Lee has not been able to confirm Lohmann’s

conclusions. Every variety of muscle which has been tested,

whether of cold-blooded or warm-blooded animals, shows its

characteristic method of fatigue, whatever the temperature

may be. The original conclusion regarding the difference

between the two groups of muscles seems, therefore, to be

justified. M. A. BIGELow,

Secretary.

SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS, AND CHEMISTRY.

MARCH 20, 1905.

Section met at 8.15 Pp. M., Vice-President von Nardroff pre-

siding.

The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read

and approved.

The following program was then offered:

S. A. Mitchell, THE SIXTH SATELLITE OF JUPITER.

E. R. von Nardroff, A Pocket Form oF THE PiEzIC BAROMETER.

George F. Kunz, EXHIBITION OF THE U.S. GEOLOGICAL SUR-

vEY RapiumM EXHIBIT, WHICH WAS SHOWN

AT THE St. Louis EXPOSITION.

L. G. Cole, RECTILINEAR RONTGEN Rays.

ee Ee Se ee ee

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 585

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

Dr. Mitchell gave an interesting account of the recent dis-

covery of a sixth and also a seventh satellite of Jupiter by

Professor C. D. Perrine at the Lick Observatory, and described

the details of the photographic method by which these satel-

lites were discovered last December and January.

Dr. Mitchell also spoke of the discoveries of satellites of the

other planets, including the ninth satellite of Saturn, which was

found by Professor W. H. Pickering in August, 1899.

Dr. von Nardroff defined the Piezic barometer as an instru-

ment to measure the atmospheric pressure by measuring the

elasticity of a portion of air. In the small pocket form

of the instrument exhibited, a piece of heavy barometer

tubing, of 3 mm. bore and about 12 cm. long, was provided

at its lower end with a pear-shaped bulb, having an inter-

nal volume equivalent to about 7o cm. length of the tube.

At its upper end the tube was provided with a second small

bulb containing about 1 c.c. of mercury. Entering into the

tube from above was a short tube having at its lower

end a capillary opening. Through this tube the mercury was

introduced.

In using the instrument all the mercury is brought into the

upper bulb by inverting. The instrument is then turned into

the erect postion, when the mercury enters the main tube a few

centimeters, the exact distance depending upon the atmospheric

pressure. The less the pressure, and hence the less the elasticity

of the air, the more the mercury will enter. The mercury

stands in the upper portion of the tube and partly in the upper

bulb, without any tendency to run down the sides of the tube.

A scale on the main tube drawn by comparison with a standard

barometer indicates the pressure.

To understand the theory of the instrument assume the

lower bulb replaced by a continuation of the barometer tubing

of equal volume. Let 5 stand for the standard barometer

height, m for the length of the thread of mercury entering the

tube, and a for the length of the column of compressed air.

Then from Boyle’s law (pu = p’v’) we have

586 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE

b(iat+tm) =(b4+m)a,

b =a,

and hence

Ab = Aa.’

That is, the divisions of the scale on the Piezic barometer are

of the same size as those on the ordinary barometer. How-

ever, in practice the upper bulb always contains some mercury

after the air is entrapped. The general effect of this is to make

AG << IND:

Dr. Kunz described the object of and the success of the radium

exhibit, stating that many of the most eminent investigators, in-

cluding Sir William Crookes and Professor Rutherford, had sent

their original material. The collection was shown in an upper

hall of the museum. There was also exhibited the Kunz 1081-

pound mass of Cafion Diablo meteoric iron, the largest mass

known of this meteoric iron. Dr. Kunz stated that Professor

Henri Moissan of Paris had discovered, in dissolving 183 pounds

of this material (Cafion Diablo meteorite), not only crystalline

diamonds, but the crystalline substance carbon silicide, never

before discovered as a natural product, but extensively manu-

factured and used in the arts under the name of carborundum.

In view of the many eminent discoveries of Professor Moissan

in the field of chemistry and electro-metallurgy, as well as in

the study of meteorites and of diamond formation, Dr. Kunz

suggested that this mineral be named mozssanite in his honor.

Dr. Cole in his paper said that the immediate discharge

from an X-ray tube consists of two distinct classes of so-called

rays—direct and indirect. The direct rays have their inception

at the focal point of the anode and radiate in direct lines and

are not reflected or deflected and do not set up secondary rays,

but are absorbed by the tissue of the body in proportion to the

amounts of solid contained therein.

The indirect rays radiate from the walls of the tube and are

projected at various angles, causing secondary rays in objects

with which they come in contact, especially the soft tissue,

and give great penetration. The effect attained depends on the

amount of current, frequency of interruption, and molecular

action of glass.

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 587

Dr. Cole then described the life history of a tube, stating

_ that definite changes occur in a tube when used, including a

crisis, and explained the difference between the action of new

and seasoned tubes and the difficulty of exciting very old tubes.

He also gave his opinion of the cause of the purple color

of the glass of a tube and suggested that there is a molecular

rearrangement of glass similar to that occurring in steel when

magnetized. In a new tube the direct rays amount to 30 to

40 per cent., while in some seasoned tubes as much as 75 to

go per cent. Furthermore the indirect rays project them-

selves behind the bones, causing a lack of definition of bones

and obliteration of detail of soft parts, while direct rays give

detail in soft parts, showing even the blood in the veins.

C. C. TROWBRIDGE,

Secretary.

SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY.

. MARCH 27, 1905.

Section met in two sessions, at 2.30 and 8.15 pP.M., at the

Psychological Laboratory of Yale University, New Haven,

Conn., in conjunction with the New York Section of the Ameri-

can Psychological Association, Vice-President F. J. E. Wood-

bridge presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read

and approved.

The following program was then offered:

At the afternoon session:

Raymond Dodge, CENTRAL ANZSTHESIA DURING Eye Move-

MENT.

Charles H. Judd, Movements oF CONVERGENCE.

E. H. Cameron, VARIATIONS IN SuNG TONES.

F. Lyman Wells, PERCEPTION oF LINGUISTIC SOUNDS.

Naomi Norsworthy, MentaL GRowTH IN DEFICIENT CHILDREN.

At the evening session:

Frank G. Bruner, RactaL DiFFERENCES IN THE UPPER LIMIT

oF AUDIBILITY.

G. Cutler Fracker, TRANSFERENCE OF PRACTICE.

588

J. McKeen Cattell, Practice anD TRAINING.

STUDIES IN READING ALOUD.

L. A. Weigle,

W. L. Sheldon,

W. P. Montague,

CHANCE.

No abstracts of these papers have been received.

RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE

Types oF Monism.

R. S. WoopwortTH,

Secretary.

BUSINESS MEETING.

APRIL 3, 1905.

The Academy met at 8.15 P.M., at the American Museum

of Natural History, President Kemp presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting were read and approved.

The following names were then presented for election as

Active Members, having been recommended by the Council:

Francis J. Arend

8S. T. Armstrong, M.D.

a be Awery, alae

H. R. Bishop

Zenas Crane (Life)

H. L. Dougherty

George E. Dunscombe (Life)

Rev. M. E. Dwight

Ad. Engler

Charles S. Fairchild

Ernest F. Greeff

William Guggenheim

E. H, Harriman

Dr. Louis Haupt

Selmar Hess

George B. Hopkins (Life)

Thomas H. Hubbard (Life)

Archer M. Huntington (Life)

Walter R. T. Jones

John B. Lawrence

Marshall C. Lefferts

32 West 73d Street

141 Broadway

4 East 38th St.

36 East 62d Street

Dalton, Mass.

Engineers’ Club, N.Y. City

392 Canal Street

31 Mt. Morris Park West

437 West 23d Street

10 West 8th Street

37 West 88th Street

833 Fifth Avenue

1 East 55th Street

232 Hast 19th Street

956 Madison Avenue

25 West 48th St.

16 West 53d Street

‘““Pleasance,’’ Baychester, N.Y.

City

51 Wall Street

126 East 30th Street

34 East 65th Street

Alfred LeRoy,

_ James Loeb (Life)

- Walter Littgen

_ Robert F. Mager

William Church Osborn

Henry Parish

_ H. F. Poggenburg

Henry W. Poor

M. Taylor Pyne (Life)

Samuel Riker

Miss Jane E. Schmelzel

Mrs. Cynthia A. Wood

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 589

117 Wall Street

Shrewsbury, N.J.

Linden, N. J.

423 West 147th Street

71 Broadway

52 Wall Street

111 East 69th Street

1 Lexington Ave.

Princeton, N.J.

27 East 69th Street

16 West 56th Street

117 West 58th Street

It was voted that the Assistant Secretary cast a unanimous

ballot for the above candidates.

There being no further business the meeting adjourned.

Hermon C. Bumpus,

Recording Secretary.

SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY.

APRIL a L005.

Section met at 8.30 p.m., Professor Stevenson presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and

approved.

The following program was then offered:

James F. Kemp, PuHysioGRAPHY OF THE ADIRONDACKS (with

lantern illustrations and map).

Charles P. Berkey, PatZzocGRAPHY oF NorTH AMERICA DURING

Mip-Orpovicic Time (illustrated by maps,

diagrams and lantern views).

George F. Kunz, Exuisition oF PHotocGRapHus oF MOoIssAN-

ITE CRYSTALS SENT BY PRoFESSOR MolIs-

SAN.

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

Professor Kemp discussed the physiography of the Adiron-

dacks as follows:

590 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE

The Adirondacks cover some 10,000 square miles, and, ex-

cept for the White Mountains of New Hampshire and the Blue

Ridge of North Carolina, are the loftiest summits east of the

Black Hills of South Dakota. They are metamorphosed —

of Paleozoics, beginning with the Potsdam and ending with

the Utica, except for the Glacial drift. The eastern portion is

mountainous, the western a high plateau which slopes to Lake

Ontario. Three peaks exceed 5000 feet. The general profile

of the mountains is serrate, but there is great variety of shape. -

There are two contrasted types of valleys. One, doubtless

an instance of great geological antiquity, presents gentle slopes

and great maturity of form. Its members run east and west, and

north and south, and are occupied in some cases by the larger

lakes.

The second type is more recent, and is due to faulting. The

valleys have on one or both sides precipitous escarpments.

The cliffs run northeast and southwest or northwest and south-

east. A third series of breaks running nearly due north is

also at times in evidence. The faults are most often the result

of differential movements causing even a marked sheeting of

the rocks. The faults run out into the Paleozoic areas, and

are shown with diagrammatic distinctness, where they have

been especially described by H. P. Cushing.

The problem of the drainage is of especial interest. All

the waters go ultimately either to the Hudson or the St. Law-

rence. The courses of the large streams follow sometimes

the older type of valleys, sometimes the later. Barriers of

drift have often driven them from their old lines across low,

preglacial divides into new ones. The courses of the Hudson

and Sacondaga are particularly striking illustrations, each

exhibiting one or more marked bends to the eastward.

The courses of the two were described and discussed in some

detail. :

The different types of lakes were also described, including

the ponded river valleys from barriers of drift; the fault_valleys;

and the relations to the older type of depression.

The nature of the ice invasion and its modifying effects were

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 591

passed in review, chiefly along the work of I. H. Ogilvie. With

q a brief statement of the postglacial lake-fillings, etc., which

have been especially set forth by C. H. Smyth, Jr., the paper

closed.

A brief discussion followed.

Dr. Berkey said that both Cambric and Ordovicic strata

contain prominent sandstone formations alternating with

dolomites wherever exposed in Michigan, Minnesota, Wis-

consin, Iowa, Illinois, Missouri, Arkansas, and Indian Territory.

The northern margin, however, is prevailingly more arenaceous

than the southern, where shales replace many sand beds. At

still greater distance, in Ohio, Kentucky, and Tennessee, these

are in turn represented by limestones largely.

The uppermost one of the series is the St. Peter. This sand-

stone, as well as each of the more important ones below, is

believed to represent an extensive retreat and readvance of

the sea. Few marks of the erosion interval are preserved.

Only here and there has the mantle of sand permitted much

attack upon the underlying dolomite, and the reworking of

the sands themselves has obliterated most internal evidence

of such history.

Much of the sand, furthermore, is wind-blown. The rework-

ing by the sea and the wind is believed to be the chief cause

of the extreme purity of the St. Peter.

The St. Peter stage of the Ordovicic, therefore, represents a

retreat of the Mississippian Sea from the vicinity of Lake Supe-

tior to probably as far as Ohio, southern Illinois, and Arkansas,

followed by a readvance to nearly its original position. The

northern part of the St. Peter contains within itself therefore

a sedimentary break. In part it is both older and younger

than the same formation in its southern extension, while, on

account of the reworking accompanying the sea advance,

there is greater conformity with overlying than with underlying

beds.

Dr. Berkey’s paper was followed by a brief discussion, after

which the Section adjourned.

A. W.-GRABAU,

Secretary.

592 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE

SECTION OF BIOLOGY.

APRIL I0, 1905.

Section met at 8.15 p.m., Vice-President Wheeler presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and

approved.

The following program was then offered:

H. F. Osborn, THE IDEAs AND TERMS OF MODERN PHILOSOPHICAL

ANATOMY.

O. P. Hay, THe TuRTLES oF THE BRIDGER BASIN.

SUMMARY OF PAPERS. ~

The abstract of Professor Osborn’s paper will be published

under its own title in Science.

Dr. Hay gave a brief description of the extent of the Bridger

beds and of the nature of the materials composing them.

He expressed the conviction that these deposits had not been

made in a lake, but. over the flood-grounds of rivers. The

region was probably covered with forests, and teemed with

animal life. In the streams were numerous turtles. Many

species of these have been described by Dr. Leidy and Professor

Cope. In the speaker’s hands are materials for the description

of about a dozen more species. The American Museum party

of 1903 collected many specimens of the genus and these have ~

furnished good skulls, neck, shoulder, and pelvic girdles, and

the limbs. These materials confirm the validity of Lydekker’s

group called Amphichelydia, and show that from it sprang

the modern superfamilies Cryptodira and Pleurodira.

M. A. BIGELow,

Secretary.

SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS, AND CHEMISTRY.

. APRIL 17, 1905.

Section met at 8.15 P.M., Vice-President von Nardrofi pre-

siding.

The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read

and approved.

The following program was then offered:

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 593

‘'S. A. Mitchell, PURPOSES AND PLANS OF THE SOLAR ECLIPSE

| EXPEDITIONS OF AUGUST, 1905.

C. C. Trowbridge, VARIATIONS IN THE DURATION OF THE AFTER-

GLOW, PRODUCED By CHANGES OF POTEN-

TIAL, AND FREQUENCY OF OSCILLATION OF

THE DISCHARGE.

No abstracts of these papers have been received. _

CHARLES C. TROWBRIDGE,

Secretary.

SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY.

APRIL 26, 1905:

Section met at 8.15 p.m., Vice-President Woodbridge presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read

and approved.

The following program was then offered:

Berthold Laufer, THE RELATION oF CHINA TO THE PHILIPPINE

IsLANDs.

William Jones, THE RELIGIOUS CONCEPTION OF THE MANITOU

OF THE CENTRAL ALGONKINS.

George H. Pepper, SympBoric DESIGNS ON THE INDIAN TEXTILES

OF THE SOUTHWEST.

Harlan I. Smith, Stone ScuLPTURES AND IMPLEMENTS FROM

THE LOWER COLUMBIA VALLEY.

The Section met in conjunction with the American Ethno-

logical Society.

No abstracts of these papers have been received.

R. S. WoopwortH,

7 Secretary.

BUSINESS MEETING.

May 1, 1905.

The Academy met at 8.15 P.m., at the American Museum of

Natural History, President Kemp presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting were read and approved.

594 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE

The following names were then presented for election as

Active Members, having been approved by the Council:

Edwin H. Brown Wantagh, L.I.

H. A. DuPont Winterthur, Delaware

Dr. Samuel M. Evans 115 East 39th Street

Robert Hoe, Jr. 2t Mt. Morris Park

Francis T. Maxwell Rockville, Conn.

Herman A. Metz 253 Clinton Avenue, Brooklyn

Lewis R. Morris 155 West 58th Street

Associate AcTIVE MEMBERS

Thomas C. Brown Columbia University

Clarence E. Gordon Columbia University

It was voted that the Assistant Secretary cast a unanimous

ballot for the above candidates.

The Academy then adjourned.

Hermon C. Bumpus,

Recording Secretary.

SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY.

* May 1, 1905.

Section met at 8.30 p.m., Vice-President Hovey presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read

and approved.

The following program was then offered:

J. Howard Wilson, THz PLeIsTocENE Beps oF SANKATY HEAD,

NANTUCKET.

C. E. Gordon, EARLY STAGES OF SOME PaLozoic CORALS.

Thomas C. Brown, A NEw TERTIARY FAUNA FROM THE ATLAN-

TIc CoAsT PROVINCE. i

C. A. Hartnagel, STRUCTURAL RELATIONS AND ORIGIN OF THE

LIMONITE BEDs AT CoRNWALL, N.Y.

A. W. Grabau, | TYPES OF SEDIMENTARY OVERLAP.

SUMMARY OF PAPERS. ;

Mr. Wilson, in his paper, said that when Sankaty Head,

Nantucket, was first visited by early explorers the section at

that locality was kept freshly exposed by the cutting back

of the bluff by the sea, but for quite a period of years this has

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 595

' been prevented by the northward extension of the Siasconset

apron beach, so that the face of the bluff is now covered with

talus and overgrown with beach grass.

The locality was visited during the summer of 1904, and

considerable work done in exposing the section and making a

collection of the fossils. .

This work resulted in the collection of eighty-one species,

twenty-one of which had never been reported from this point,

including Pandora crassidens Conrad, not previously found in

any horizon above the Miocene, and Serrepes laperousii Des-

hayes and Macoma incongrua von Martens, belonging to the

Arctic fauna of the Pacific coast and not heretofore reported

east of Point Barrow.

A number of facts differing somewhat from those reported

by former observers were noticed, and have resulted in a some-

what different interpretation for the phenomena presented by

these deposits.

The deposits are not of glacial origin, for—s. Numerous

delicate and unworn shells occur. 2. Bivalves such as Solen,

_ Venus, and Mya occur in the position in which they lived, with

both valves together, and in the case of Venus with the ligament

in place. 3. The faunas are not mixed as would be the case if

of glacial origin, the lower beds containing shoal water species

of a southern range, and the upper, deeper water species of a

northern and even Arctic type.

The lower beds were deposited in a shallow inlet or lagoon,

as shown by such species as Mya, Ostrea, and Venus and

especially by numerous mud crabs and the presence of our

edible crab, Callinectes sapidus, while the upper beds were

deposited during a subsidence of the area contemporaneous

with the advance of the Wisconsin ice sheet, as shown by the

deeper water and more northern species.

After the destruction and washing into the lagoon of the

protecting barrier beach, as shown by the overlying rounded

and pure white sands, the ice reached and passed this point,

eventually burying the beds under fifty feet or more of drift.

Later, a re-elevation took place, bringing the land to about its

present position.

596 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE

Mr. Gordon stated that J. E. Duerden, in the Johns Hopkins

University Circular for 1902, has endeavored to show by studies

based on Lophophyllum prolijferum that the Rugosa exhibit

a hexameral plan of growth of the primary septa, in so far as

L. prolijerum may be taken as representative. Certain studies

on Sireptelasma profundum show a primary tetrameral plan. —

The fact that S. profundum is a middle Ordovicic type indicates

that this is the primitive condition. Moreover, a careful exam- —

ination of Duerden’s figures shows that they lend themselves —

to an entirely different interpretation from that which Duerden

gives. This interpretation is that two of the so-called primary

septa are secondary septa precociously developed; that their

sequence and ultimate position are the same as those for the

secondary septa which appear in the corresponding positions

in the corresponding quadrants of a Zaphrentoid coral; that

the fossula and cardinal septum are on the concave side of the

corallum; and that if Duerden’s figures be inverted they reveal.

a perfect similarity to a Zaphrentoid coral, as far as the order

of appearance and the arrangement of the septa are concerned.

The fact that L. prolijerum is a Carbonic type indicates that

it is a modified type of the Zaphrentoid coral, the first secondary

septa appearing in nepionic stages and thus simulating the

character of primary septa.

Mr. Brown stated that a few years ago, while studying the

Cretacic deposits of Long Island, Block Island, and Martha’s

Vineyard. Dr. Hollick of the New York Botanical Garden made

a collection of fossil molluscs and plants from Chappaquid-

dick Island. The fossil molluscs were deposited in the Colum-

bia University collection without being fully and carefully

studied.

These fossils occur in the island in ferruginous concretions.

They seem to have been deposited somewhere to the north of

where they are now found, then moved as glacial drift, re-

assorted and deposited in their present position. From their

lithological similarity to concretions containing undoubted

Cretacic fossils found elsewhere on Martha’s Vineyard, Dr.

Hollick thought that these concretions and their contained fos-

sils must be of Cretacic age.

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 597

Professor Shaler in his geological studies of Martha’s Vineyard

noted the occurrence of these concretions and their similarities

to the Cretacic drift, but being unable to find any distinctive

organic remains hesitated to set them down as Cretacic.

Dr. Hollick submitted these fossil molluscs to Professor

R. P. Whitfield of the American Museum of Natural History

for a hasty examination. Professor Whitfield, after placing

several of the fossils generically, stated that from their evidence

he should think the rocks could hardly prove to be Cretacic.

A careful study of the fossils has shown that this material

is not Cretacic but Eocene in age. This fauna from Chappa-

quiddick represents a new and distinct Eocene province, differ-

ing from all the other Eocene provinces of the Atlantic coast,

but no more widely different from these than they are from

one another. Although in this fauna there are several species

somewhat resembling those of the provinces to the south, on the

whole it would seem to be more closely allied to the Eocene of

England. The genera most abundantly represented in these

Chappaquiddick deposits, e.g., Modiola, Glycymeris, are also

among the most abundant in the English deposits. These

‘same genera, although represented in the Atlantic and Gulf

provinces, are there more sparsely distributed and occur with

other more abundantly represented genera that appear to be

altogether wanting in the Chappaquiddick deposits.

A comparison of this Chappaquiddick fauna with other

Eocene faunas indicates that it is of lower Eocene age, the

species most closely resembling those found in this fauna being

found in the lower beds of the Atlantic and Gulf provinces,

the Tejon of California and the lower beds of England. These

deposits may possibly be of the same age as the Shark River

beds of New Jersey, but being deposited in a region separated

from this have no forms in common with it. But such corre-

lation could be only conjecture. As the correlation of the

well-known Eocene deposits is even yet very uncertain it is

unnecessary and impossible to place these beds any more defi-

nitely than simply to say that they are Lower Eocene.

Mr. Hartnagel’s paper stated that the limonite at the Town-

send iron mine near Cornwall in Orange county, New York, is

598 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE

are in contact with the Longwood and shales. The source of

the iron is evidently from the red shales, but whether the con- —

tact was due to overlap or faulting has not been previously

explained. Two thirds of a mile north of the mine the Decker

Ferry, Cobleskill, Rondout, Manlius and Coeymans formations,

having a total thickness of ninety-five feet, are found between

the New Scotland and Longwood beds. In the region of the —

mine the strata are nearly vertical, and in faulting a wedge-

shaped block has been forced up, bringing the red shales in

contact with the New Scotland beds. A cap of limestone has

until recent geologic times protected from erosion the mass of

soft Longwood shales, which now form a steep hill that is rapidly

being worn away.

In discussing types of sedimentary overlap, Dr. Grabau

said that with a normal sea-shore a rising sea-level will pro-

duce the phenomenon of progressive overlap, a falling sea-level

that of regressive overlap. If the sea transgresses slowly, and

the rate of supply of detritus is uniform, a basal rudyte or arenyte

is formed which rises in the column as the sea advances, and

whose depositional off-shore equivalents are successive beds:

of lutytes or organic deposits (biogenics). Types of such

basal beds which pass diagonally across the time scale are

seen in the basal Cambric arenytes of eastern North America,

which as the Vermont Quartzyte are Lower Cambric, and as

the Potsdam are Upper Cambric. Again in the basal Cretacic

arenyte of southwestern United States, this is shown, they

being basal Trinity in Texas; Washita in Kansas, and Dakota

or later on the Front Range. Examples of this type of pro-

gressive overlap are numerous and familiar. On an ancient

pemeplain surface the transgressing sea may spread a basal

black shale, as in the case of the Eureka (Noel) Black shale,

which is basal Choteau in southern Missouri and basal Burlington

in northern Arkansas. Regressive movements of the shore

succeeded by transgressive movements give us arenytes which

are enclosed in off-shore sediments and which within them-

selves comprise an hiatus the magnitude of which diminishes

progressively away from the shore. An example of this has

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 599

recently been discussed by Berkey,! who finds that the St.

Peter Sandstone in Minnesota marks the interval from lower

Beekmantown to upper Stones River, which interval is repre-

_ sented by several thousand feet of calcareous sediments in other

regions distant from the shore of that time.

In marine transgressive overlaps; later members overlap

earlier ones toward the source of supply, i.e., towards the old-

land. In non-marine progressive overlaps, later members

overlap the earlier ones away from the source of supply. Thus

in a growing alluvial cone, the later formed beds will extend

farther out on to the plain away from the mountain. If several

successive fans of this type are formed one above the other,

owing to successive elevations of the source of supply, only the

latest beds of each delta will be found on the outer edge of this

compound delta, the hiatus between the beds being further

emphasized by the erosion which the last bed of the first delta

underwent during the time that the early beds of the sccond

delta were deposited nearer the source of supply, i.e., before the

last bed of the second delta covered up the remnant of the last

bed of the first delta and thus protected it from further erosion.

A good example of this type of overlap appears to be presented

by the Pocono, Mauch Chunk, and Pottsville beds of the Appa-

lachian region. These formations are, with exception of the

negligible Greenbrier member, of non-marine origin, repre-

senting the wash from the growing Appalachians. In western

Pennsylvania only the latest beds of each (barring portions

removed by erosion between the deposition of the successive

fans) are found resting one upon the other, the interval between

the beds becoming less and less toward the anthracite regions.

A. W. GRABAU,

Secretary.

SECTION OF BIOLOGY.

May 8, 1905.

Section met at 8.15 p.m., Vice-President Wheeler presiding.

1 See ante, p. 591, April meeting.

600 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE

The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and

approved.

The following program was then offered:

E. B. Wilson, OBSERVATIONS ON THE CHROMOSOMES IN

HEMIPTERA.

H. E. Crampton, CoRRELATION AND SELECTION.

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

Professor Wilson’s paper presented the results of an examina-

tion of the mode of distribution of the chromosomes to the

spermatozoa in Lygeus turcicus, Cenus delius, Podisus spinosus

and two species of Euchistus. In none of these forms is an

accessory chromosome (in the ordinary sense) present, all of the

spermatozoa receiving the same number of chromosomes, which

is one half the spermatogonial number (the latter number is

in Podisus sixteen, in the other forms fourteen). In all these

forms, however, an asymmetry of distribution occurs such that

two classes of spermatozoa are formed in equal numbers, both

receiving a ring of six chromosomes (in Podisus seven) that

are duplicated in all the spermatozoa, and in addition a central

one which in one half the spermatozoa is much smaller than

in the other half. These corresponding but unequal chromo-

somes (which evidently correspond to some of the forms described

by Montgomery as “‘chromatin nucleoli” and agree in mode of

distribution with that which this author has described in the

case of Euchtstus tristigmus) may be called the ‘“‘idiochromo-

somes.”’ They always remain separate in the first division,

which accordingly shows one more than one half the sper-

matogonial number of chromosomes, but at the close of this

division conjugate to form an asymmetrical dyad, the number

of separate chromatin-elements being thus reduced from eight

to seven (in Podisus from nine to eight). A reduction of the

number to seven in the first division, such as has been described

by Montgomery as an occasional or usual process in Euchistus

and Cenus, was never observed. In the second division the

asymmetrical idiochromosome-dyad separates into its unequal

constituents, while the other dyads divide symmetrically.

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 601

One half the spermatozoa, therefore, receive the large idio-

chromosome and one half the small, the other chromosomes

being exactly duplicated in both.

Correlated with this asymmetry of distribution is the fact

that the spermatogonial chromosome-groups do not show two

equal microchromosomes (as is the case in such forms as Anasa,

Alydus or Protenor, where an accessory chromosome is present) ;

but only one, which is obviously the small idiochromosome,

the large one not being certainly distinguishable at this period

from the other spermatagonial chromosomes. The final synap-

sis of the idiochromosomes is deferred to the prophases of the

second division, somewhat as that of the two equal micro-

chromosomes is deferred until the prophase of the first divi-

sion in Anasa, Alydus and some other forms. A remarkable

result of the difference in this regard between the forms that

possess and those that lack a true accessory chromosome is that

in the former case (Anasa, Alydus, etc.) the first division of

the small central chromosome is a reduction-division and the

second an equation-division; while in the latter case (Lygeus,

Cenus, etc.) the reverse order manifestly occurs. The relation

of these observations to earlier ones by Paulmier, Montgomery,

and others was pointed out, with a discussion of their bearing

on the Mendelian phenomena of heredity and the problem of

sex-determination.

Professor Crampton presented briefly some of the conclusions

drawn from the results of his work upon variation, correlation,

and selection among saturnid lepidoptera. The earliest studies

showed that eliminated individuals, when compared with

similar members of the same group that survive, prove to be

more variable and of somewhat different types, although this

relation between variability and selection is not a constant

one. The characters utilized for these preliminary studies,

namely, certain pupal dimensions and proportions, were of such

a nature that they could not serve the pupa directly in any

functional manner; wherefore it was concluded that their con-

dition of correlation formed the actual basis for the selective

process, formative correlation being also distinguished from

functional correlation. That the general condition of corre-

602 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE

lation among the structural characters of pupe formed, indeed,

the basis for selection was further indicated by the results of —

a statistical study of the correlations between various charac-

teristics of pupal groups from several different animal series; —

although an advantage did not always appear in favor of the ~

surviving group. On the basis of the foregoing, a general

theoretical conception was developed, according to which the

whole series of internal elements and the whole series of external

influences were regarded as involved in the determination of the

general condition of correlation or co-ordination that formed the

basis for selection, as adaptive or the reverse.

M. A. BicELow,

Secretary.

SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS, AND CHEMISTRY.

May 15, 1905.

Section met at 8.15 p.m., Vice-President von Nardroff presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and

approved.

The following program was then offered:

I. L. Tufts, RELATION BETWEEN IONIZATION AND COMBUSTION

IN FLAMES.

L. L. Hendren, RATE oF RECOMBINATION OF GASEOUS IONS AT

Low PRESSURES.

No abstracts of the above papers have been received.

CHARLES C. TROWBRIDGE,

Secretary.

BUSINESS MEETING.

OCTOBER 9, 1905. .

The Academy met at 8.15 P.M., at the American Museum of

Natural History, President Kemp presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting were read and approved.

The following names were then presented for election as

Active Members, having been recommended by the Council:

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 603

Elizabeth Billings 279 Madison Avenue

_ May Cline Harmony, N.J.

Guy W. Culgin 133 West 129th Street

-C. Temple Emmet Stony Brook, L.I.

Alfred Taggart Millroy 53 Guilford Street, London,

. W.C.

Henry Clay Pierce Waldorf-Astoria

A. M. Fernandez Ybarra, 314 Second Avenue

AssociaTE AcTIVE MEMBERS

Roland M. Harper College Point, N.Y.

A. E. Stevenson 568 West End Avenue

It was voted that the Assistant Secretary cast a unanimous

ballot for the above candidates.

There being no further business, the meeting adjourned.

HERMON C. Bumpus,

Recording Secretary.

SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY.

OCTOBER 9, 1905.

Section met at 8.15 p.m., Vice-President Hovey presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and

approved.

A public lecture was then delivered by Professor Robert T.

Hill, on “THE RepusBLic oF Mexico; its PHYSICAL AND Eco-

NOmIc ASPECTS.”’

The meeting was held in the large lecture hall of the Ameri-

can Museum of Natural History. Three hundred and seventy-

one members and visitors were present. The lecture was fully

illustrated with stereopticon views.

No abstract of this lecture has been received.

A. W. GRABAU,

Secretary.

SECTION OF BIOLOGY.

OcTOBER 16, 1905.

Section met at 8.15 P.M. at the American Museum of Natural

History, Vice-President Wheeler presiding.

604 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE

The minutes of the preceding meeting of the Section were

read and approved.

The evening was devoted to reports of summer work carried

on by members of the Section.

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

Professor H. F. Osborn went to British Columbia to study

the habits of mountain goats; he found large numbers of the

animals and had many opportunities of studying and photo-

graphing them at close range. Dr. Hay studied certain fossil

turtles in the American Museum of Natural History. Dr.

E. F. Byrnes continued her study of variations in the crus-

tacean Cyclops. She also gave some attention to regeneration

in sense organs in Nerezs. Dr. H. R. Linville worked at San

Diego, Calif., studying the mechanics of circulation in Nerevs.

Professor F. B. Sumner directed the summer session at the

United States Fisheries Laboratory at Woods Holl. He also

completed his studies of the effect of density and salinity of

water on fishes. Professor Wheeler continued his studies of

ants and made out many interesting points on the formation of

ant colonies by solitary queens.

M. A. BicELow,

Secretary.

SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS, AND CHEMISTRY.

OCTOBER 23, 1905.

section met at 8.15, at the American Museum of Natural

History, Vice-President von Nardroff presiding.

The minutes of the previous meeting of the Section were

read and approved.

The evening was devoted to reports on summer work by

members.

The meeting then adjourned.

C. C. TROWBRIDGE,

Secretary,

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 605

SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY.

OCTOBER 30, 1905.

Section met at 8.15 P.M., at the American Museum of Natural

History, Vice-President Woodbridge presiding.

The minutes of the preceding meeting of the Section were

_ read and approved.

The following program was then offered:

Edgar L. Hewett, THe Lire AND CULTURE OF THE TEWA

INDIANS IN PRE-SPANISH TIMES.

The Section met in conjunction with the American Ethno-

- logical Society.

No abstract of the above paper has been received.

R. S$. WoopwortH,

Secretary.

BUSINESS MEETING.

NOVEMBER 6, 1905.

The Academy met at 8.15 pP.m., at the American Museum

of Natural History, President Kemp presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting were read and approved.

The following name was then presented for election as Active

Member, having been recommended by the Council:

Reno B. Welbourn Union City, Ind.

AssocriaTE AcTIVE MEMBERS

Edward K. Judd 505 Pearl Street

Matthew van Siclen Columbia University

By vote of the Academy, the candidates were unanimously

elected.

Vice-President Hovey made the announcement of the recent

death of Baron Ferdinand von Richthoven, Professor of Geo-

graphy in the Imperial University of Berlin.

The meeting then adjourned.

Hermon C. Bumpus,

Recording Secretary.

606 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE

SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY.

NOVEMBER 6, 1905.

Section met at 8.30 P.m., Vice-President Hovey presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and

approved.

The following sectional officers were nominated for the year

1906:

Vice-President and Chairman of Section, E. O. Hovey.

Secretary of Section, A. W. Grabau.

The following program was then offered:

J. F. Kemp, RECENT INTERESTING DISCOVERY OF HUMAN

IMPLEMENTS IN AN ABANDONED RIVER CHAN-

NEL IN SOUTHERN OREGON.

J. J. Stevenson, A Bit oF QUATERNARY GEOLOGY.

A. A. Julien, NoTEs oN THE GLACIATION OF MANHATTAN

ISLAND. ,

The papers were briefly discussed.

Dr. George F. Kunz announced the finding of pyrope and

serpentine in the tunnel under New York Harbor. These

indicated the presence of a peridotite dyke.

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

During July and August, 1905, Professor Kemp was in the

field in southern Oregon under the direction of Dr. David T.

Day, chief of the Division of Mineral Statistics of the U. S.

Geological Survey. The work assigned was the collection of

black sands and crude gravels from the placer mines of this

section for the experimental concentrating plant of the Survey

at the Portland exposition. While visiting Waldo, Oregon,

the following occurrence of human implements in the gravels

of the Deep Gravel Mining Co. was met, and, with the permis-

sion of the Director of the Survey, is herewith communicated.

Waldo is situated on the stage line from Grant’s Pass on the

Southern Pacific R. R., 100 miles south of west from Crescent

City on the coast in California, and is forty miles from Grant’s

Pass. It is in Josephine County, a few miles north of the Cali-

fornia line.

}

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 607

Waldo was the scene of the earliest discovery in Oregon of

stream placers in the country back from the ocean. Sailors

penetrated to it in 1853 and found rich pay-streaks in the bed

of a small stream which heads up in the ancient gravels of what

must once have been a large river. The discovery received

the name of the Sailor Diggings, and the name Waldo came

later. The ancient gravels are now on top of a ridge and have

remained in relief while the former banks have been removed

by erosion. The course of the river was to the north, since

its bed-rock declines in this direction. The bed-rock as exposed

in the placer mines is chiefly serpentine, but in one place the

tim-rock is fossiliferous sandstone, which has been studied and

-determined by J. S. Diller. The boulders are chiefly eruptive

rocks of various sorts and are much softened as a rule by decom-

position. The exact relations of the old drainage would require

more investigation for their elucidation than the writer could

give in the brief. time at command, and it can only be stated

that they cover a rather wide area east and west, having been

mined at intervals for half a mile or more across the main

course, but whether this is from forking of the old main channel

or not was not determined. Some shallower gravels are prob-

ably due to the washing down of the old high-channel deposit

over the slopes and on to the flats on either side of its crest.

Pestles appear to occur in the gravels as a not specially

exceptional phenomenon. The operators of the mines speak

of their occasional discovery as a matter which does not excite

surprise. The following instance, however, of two mortars

and of one or two pestles attracted the attention of Mr. W. J.

Wimer, the manager and part owner of the Deep Gravel property,

and, although the objects were brought to light in the hydrau-

licking during the night shift, he carefully recorded the details

early the next morning. I particularly inquired about the pos-

sibility of the bank’s caving in so as to make implements from

the surface appear as if buried in the deeper gravels, but this

possibility seems to be guarded against both by the auriferous

cement in the larger mortar and by its actual detection in the

bank by the pipe man. The mortar was thought by him to

be a boulder and he shut off the stream and extracted it with

608 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE

a pick. The mortars and pestles are now in the possession of

Col. T. Waln-Morgan Draper, a well-known mining engineer, at

whose summer home, a few miles from Waldo, the implements

now are. .

The following extract from a letter of Mr.Wimer written at

my request gives the facts.

“The mortar is about 12 inches high by g inches across,

and it is made of the hardest granite. ‘Two of our night men

piped it out in 1902, when it was firmly embedded in a blue

cement gravel (the pay channel), fifty-eight feet from the

surface. They had to resort to picks to get it out and the

bed or hole out of which they pulled it remained, showing its

perfect mould. I went to the mine in the morning and the.

two men formally presented it to me. It was still packed

tightly to its very rim with blue cement gravel. With a sharp

pick I carefully picked the gravel loose so that I could clean

it. I was some time doing so. I then washed the detritus

and got eight pretty large colors of gold.

“H. M. Pfefferly and D. W. Yarbrough were the finders.

The place was in the S.W. 1/4 of N.W. 1/4; Sec. 21; T. 408.:

R. 8. W., W.M., Josephine County, Oregon, on the property of the

Deep Gravel Mining Co. The other mortar is what Colonel

Draper terms a quartz mortar, having a saucer-like cavity

on its top. The gold from the ground where it was piped out

was pronounced by the Selby Smelting Company in San Fran-

cisco to be ‘quartz gold,’ their receipt to us being so marked.

This mortar was probably about ten feet under the surface.

It was 300 yards from the other one and on Sec. 20, being there-

fore the S.E. 1/4 of N.E. It was found in 1901. The pestles

were discovered with it; they were in the pay dirt.”

Those occurrences add one more instance to the list of stone

implements which have been found in the auriferous gravels

of the Pacific coast. The writer fully realizes the criticism

which has been brought to bear upon them and the skepticism

with which their authenticity is regarded by many. The Waldo

case may be stated upon the testimony of Mr. Wimer and Mr.

Pfefferly, and may add its contribution to the general mass of

evidence regardng the antiquity of man in the Far West.

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 609

Professor Stevenson described a small area in northwestern

Vermont. His conclusions were that, after withdrawal of the

ice, clay was deposited along the streams to an altitude of

about 750 feet above tide; that upon this sand, gravel, and

boulders accumulated to a thickness of about 450 feet. He

traced the steps in re-erosion of the channel ways as shown by

the successive terraces. The area in question is the north-

ward extension of Professor C. H. Hitchcock’s third basin of

Winoiski River as defined in the Geology of Vermont.

In the third paper of the evening Dr. Julien said the evidences

of plucking action of the continental glacier upon the crystalline

schists of the island consist partly of jagged broken surfaces

beneath the till, with angular transported blocks in the moraine

to the southwest; and partly of rounded but roughened hum-

mocks, pitted apparently by a modification of semilunar cavi-

ties, such as have been discovered in perfect condition on scored

surfaces of our limestone.

Channels and pipe-like troughs were also described and attrib-

uted to the action of subglacial running waters, probably once

connected with waterfalls through crevasses in the great glacier.

The allied feature of pot-holes, found just beyond the limits

of the island, was then discussed, and another hypothesis

advanced to account for their formation.

A sudden southward change in the direction of the glacial

furrows over the island, their asymmetric form, and distinct

southward curvature were described as evidences of a decided

slope of the general surface toward the south-southwest, at

the time of its subsidence during the glacial movement. A

topographical modification was also referred to, through the

undercutting of joint planes facing the northeast.

Dr. Kunz stated that during the spring of 1905 there had

been shown to him some precious garnet, pyrope, in rounded

irregular transparent grains, measuring from two to five milli-

meters in diameter. That these had been found in the tunnel

extension of the New York subway, about 1200 feet south of

Pier No. 1, North River, under New York Harbor, at a depth

of 110 feet below the bed of the bay. That upon visiting the

locality he found that the entire walls of the tunnel had been

610 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE

covered with the iron arches, and it was impossible to see the

rocks themselves, but that upon the dump heap he found a

number of masses of serpentine weighing from two to one

hundred pounds each. The serpentine was a rich yellow,

a trifle darker than that found at Montville, N.J. Cleavages —

of feldspar nearly a foot long, black tourmaline, almandite,

garnet in grains and in crystals were noted, but no peridotite

itself was seen. This was probably due to the fact that nearly

all the material taken from the tunnel was removed by

barges to the deep ocean and dumped. Dr. Kunz stated that it

was most unfortunate that what was undoubtedly the evidence

of a peridotite dike upon New York island should have been

lost. A mass of stilbite gneissoid wall, measuring six feet by

ten and nearly covered by rich stilbite, was noted. Mr. C. Woth-

erspoon, the engineer in charge of the night work, was most

courteous in giving information and in collecting specimens.

A. W. GRABAU,

Secretary.

SECTION OF BIOLOGY.

NOVEMBER 13, 1905.

Section met at 8.15 p.m., Vice-President Wheeler presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were omitted

on account of the absence of the Secretary.

The following program was then offered:

H. F. Osborn THE RECLASSIFICATION OF THE MAMMALIA.

Katherine Foote,

THE PROPHASES OF THE First MATURATION

SPINDLE OF ALLOLOBOPHORA.

H. E. Crampton, Brirr REPORT OF STATISTICS RELATING TO

SEX-INHERITANCE IN Morus.

B. E. Dahlgren, DEMONSTRATION OF NEW INVERTEBRATE

MoDELs IN THE AMERICAN MUSEUM.

The nomination of officers for the ensuing year was then

announced as the business part of the program. In the absence

of the Secretary, R. W. Miner was appointed Secretary pro

tem. Professor H. E. Crampton was nominated to the Council |

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 61L

as Vice-President and Chairman of the Section. M. A. Bige-

low was re-elected Secretary of the Section. The meeting then

adjourned.

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

Professor Osborn said in his paper that it is surprising

to find how little attention is given in modern works to the au-

thorship of the larger taxonomic divisions of the Mammalia,

and what mistaken ideas are current as to past leadership in

classification.

In the present study of this subject historically Mr. W. K.

Gregory has been devoting several weeks to reviewing and

abstracting the literature, making a number of valuable sug-

gestions, and Mr. T. S. Palmer of the Biological Survey of

the U.S. Agricultural Department, has rendered invaluable

aid and criticism from his stores of knowledge.

As an expression of our knowledge of the phylogeny or rela-

tionships and descent of the mammals, classification shifts

and changes with research and discovery. Looking back we

find that those authors, such as De Blainville, exerted the

most permanent influence who had the keenest appreciation

of genetic affinities, while others, like Gray, who have lacked

all sense of such affinities, have made no impression. Finally,

in schemes of classification we express clumsily in words our

knowledge and more or less our theories also of the affinities,

the divergences or continuous branchings and sub-branchings

which have resulted in the great diversity of extinct and mod-

ern forms.

Discovery of these branchings from time to time necessitates

an increase in the number of subdivisions. For example,

in order to express the facts known at the present time it appears

to be necessary:

(1) To introduce the new branch tnjra-class ;

(2) To employ more frequently the branch super-order ;

(3) To revive for descriptive purposes at least the branch

cohort of Storr.

Thus in place of the three branches employed by Linnzus,

612 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE

namely, class, order, genus, we require eleven kinds of branches,

namely:

Super-orders. The forty known orders

of mammals shown in the following table,

namely, twenty-one living and nineteen

Class extinct, cannto as yet be united uniformly

Shipeclace into super-orders, yet the tendency of

discovery will be constantly in this direc-

tion. Thus Roth’s union of the South

American hoofed forms into Notungulata

(1.e., Southern Ungulates) is a happy step

Infra-class

Cohort

Super-order

Order forward; the Hyracoidea of Africa may ~

Sub-order possibly be added to this branch. Simi-

Super-family larly the tendency of discovery (Andrews)

Parsee is to revive De Blainville’s idea and unite

Saeche the Proboscidea and Sirenia into a new

Sb aay super-order, to which possibly the Pyro-

_ Genus

theria of South America may some day

be added. Our super-order column, how-

ever, requires much additional study and

discovery.

Orders. Among the forms in our order column which are

still most uncertain are the above-mentioned Pyrotheria, the

Barypoda (an order proposed for the reception of Asimottherium

and related forms of Eocene Africa), the Mesodonta (primitive

North American monkeys which will possibly be included

with the South American forms), the Tubulidentata (South ~

American aardvarks, latterly removed from the Edentata

and showing some affinities in the brain to the Ungulata, Elliot),

the Pholidota (Pangolins, also recently removed from the Eden-—

tata although the brain presents a feeble claim to this relavion-

ship—Elliot), the Proglires (an order of doubtful value and

position), the Protodonta and Allotheria, also of doubtful

relationship. A striking recent triumph of paleontology

is the removal of the Zeuglodontia (ancient Eocene whale-

like forms) to the vicinity of the Creodonta; it had long been

suspected that the Cetacea should be nearer the Carnivora

than other orders. Beddard suggests Edentate affinities.

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 613

Cohorts. The branches in the cohort column represent the

modified revival of a very ancient usage. The groupings are,

however, very general and uncertain, especially as regards

the branch Ungulata, because we still need to ascertain whether

the hoofed animals sprang from a common “Protungulata”’

stock, as has been supposed, or whether they were more or

less independently derived from the Unguiculata—if the latter

supposition is the correct one, the term Ungulata (Storr) becomes

purely descriptive.

Injra-class. The chief object of the new Infra-class division

is to express the fact that the Marsupials and Placentals, while

widely separate, are also much more closely related to each

other than either are to the Monotremes.

CLASS SUB-CLASS INFRA-CLASS COHORT SUPER-ORDER ORDER

Mammalia I. Protothe- I. Ornithodel- Monotremata.... 1

ria phia. 1Protodonta...... 2

1Allotheria.......

II. Eutheria 1. Didelphia or Polyprotodonta.. 4

Marsupialia Diprotodontia... 5

1Triconodonta.... 6

2. Monodelphia 1. Unguicu- | Pantotheria..... 7

or Placenta- lata Pristini Insectivora...... UORS

lia Dermoptera..... 9

Cheiroptera...... 10

{1Creodonta....... II

“ Ferae ! 1Zeuglodontia.... 12

(Carnivora) \ Fissipedia....... 13

[ Fomine seu aens I4

« : WW Proelires termes

Glires NeRodentiane ane 16

ee ne ae 17

“ \ 1Tzeniodonta...... 18

Edentata | Xenarthra...... 19

Pholidota....... 20

oe Tubulidentata... 21

1Mesodonta...... 22

2. Primates? Primates 1 IPTOSiNAi1 een yeree 23

Simizessiewere ed

Perissodactyla.. 25

3. Ungulata Diplarthra? 1 1Ancylopoda..... 26

Artiodactyla.... 27

1Condylarthra.... 28

1Amblypoda..... 29

1Barypoda....... 30

Proboscidea..... 31

Sireniayy: seeeceee 2

Pyrotheria 33

laGiXc@Sa no ncode 34

(Typotheria...... 35

Notungulata ! Toxodontia..... 36

Roth Astropatheroidea 37

Litopterna...... 38

4. Cete Denticetex.--14 <1 39

WiyStiCete asia 40

1Extinct orders.

Miss Foote and Mr. Strobell showed lantern slides of fourteen

photo-micrographs illustrating a few stages in the prophases

614 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE

and metaphase of the first maturation spindle of the egg of .

Allolobophora fetida.

These slides demonstrated the following phenomena:

1. In this form the chromosomes lose their individuality

completely during the growth period, the chromatine being

distributed throughout the germinal vesicle. It then segre-

gates into a chromatic reticulum and later forms a spireme

which divides transversely into eleven bivalent chromosomes.

The spireme shows a longitudinal split. which persists until

the metaphase and produces the typical tetrad.

2. The form of the chromosomes is not constant. The eleven

bivalent chromosomes of the prophases and metaphase may

be in the form of rings, crosses, figures eight, or rods, these

forms being inconstant and variable.

3. The size relations are not constant. There is a marked

difference in size, but it is not possible to accurately identify

any one or more chromosomes on account of a definite indi-

vidual or relative size.

4. The number of odécyte chromosomes is a constant feat-

ure. Eleven bivalent chromosomes can be accurately and con-

stantly demonstrated.

No other abstracts have been received.

Roy W. MINER,

Secretary pro tem.

SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY.

NOVEMBER 20, 1905.

Section met at 8.15 P.M., at the American Museum of Natural

History, Mr. C. C. Trowbridge presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting were read and approved.

The following program was then offered:

Charles C. Trowbridge, METEOR TRAINS.

After the reading of the paper there was an informal discussion,

followed by the presentation of the following business:

The question of holding bi-monthly instead of monthly meet-

ings was discussed, and it was voted that the matter be referred

to the Council with recommendation that the change be made.

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 615

It was voted that steps be taken by the Secretary to arrange

_ for holding one or more meetings during the year in conjunction

with the Physics Club of New York City.

_ A letter from Vice-President von Nardroff was read regretting

his inability to attend the meetings of the Section during the

coming year.

C. C. Trowbridge was elected Chairman of the Section for

the ensuing year.

It was voted to postpone the election of the Secretary until

a later meeting.

The Section then adjourned.

Roy W. Miner,

Secretary pro tem.

SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY.

NOVEMBER 27, 1905.

Section met at 4.15 P.M., at Columbia University, and

8.30 P.M., at the American Museum of Natural History, Vice-

President Woodbridge presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read

and approved.

The following program was then offered:

Afternoon Session:

W. S. Monroe, SMELL DISCRIMINATION OF STUDENTS.

F. Lyman Wells, LincuistTic STANDARDS.

F. M. Hamilton, A Stupy or THE READING PAUSE,

’ R. S. Woodworth, Vision AND LOCALIZATION DURING RAPID

Eve Movements.

Evening Session:

J. McKeen Cattell, MEASUREMENT OF SCIENTIFIC MERIT.

Brother Chrysostom, TEMPERAMENT AS AFFECTING PHILOSOPHIC

THOUGHT.

W. P. Montague, ARE MENTAL PROCESSES IN SPACE?

C. M. Bakewell, CoNCERNING EMPIRICISM.

Election of sectional officers for 1906:

Chairman, Robert MacDougall.

Secretary, R. S. Woodworth.

Adjourned at 10 P.M.

616 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

Professor Monroe described an experiment in which students

were provided with sets of small vials filled one third full of

common odors—chiefly essential oils. Each set contained

twenty odors. Nostrils were alternately used; five seconds

were given for the stimulation, and one minute was allowed

for recording the result and resting the nostrils. After every

seven tests, the windows were opened and the room aired.

In all, 255 students were tested. The average number of

_ odors correctly named was 6.72. Four students named twelve

correctly; two students, eleven; and five students, ten. Two

of the students were able to identify but one odor each; fifteen

students, but two odors each; and seventeen students, but three

odors each.

Wintergreen was correctly identified by 77 per cent. of the

students; camphor, 75 per cent.; peppermint, 75 per cent.;

vanilla, 74 per cent.; cloves, 65 per cent.; cinnamon, 56 sper

cent.; spearmint, 38 per cent.; turpentine, 36 per cent.; tar, 36

per cent.; lemon; 20 per cent.) nutmes, 27) persccmium anise, 26

per cent.; pennyroyal, 21 per cent.; sassafras, 15 per cent.; bay

rum, 9 per cent.; hemlock, 4 per cent.; bergamot, 3 per cent.;

assafoetida, 2 per cent.; wormwood, 1 per cent.; and lavender,

half of one per cent. A census of odor names showed that

the students believed themselves familiar with certain odors,

such as lavender, which they were unable to recognize.

Dr. Wells’s paper stated that a historical standard is nec-

essary for the regulation of linguistic usage, but the present

literary interpretation of it is open to many objections, being

reactionary in character and inconsistent in its admissions

and exclusions. Models of linguistic excellence, as deter-

minative of that body of elements to be considered good use,

are to be sought among works whose criteria of value are more

objective in character than is the case at present, as their value

can be more rapidly and more accurately determined, and

they are in closer touch with the actual needs of the language.

The introspection of the author of the average ‘‘Principles

of Rhetoric” should not be accepted as final in determining

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 617

the interrelationship of these elements of good use. It is

possible to determine linguistic values of all sorts by statistical

methods, which give not only the most valid determination

possible, but also the measure of this validity. Determina-

tions of so apparently subjective a character as linguistic force

can be made with a validity that approximates practical cer-

tainty. These experimental determinations do not coincide

with any of the definitions of force which the introspective

grammarians have laid down.

Dr. Hamilton reported that previous investigators of the

problem of reading have agreed upon the short exposure method

as best for psychological analysis. Introspection is facilitated -

most when the exposure is less than the shortest reading pause,

z. @., When all eye movements are excluded. The apparatus

most generally used is the tachistoscope of the fall screen va-

riety. The word has been uniformly treated as the unit of

perception in reading, the effort being to determine the factors

or ‘‘cues”’ of word recognition—their character and order of

occurrence.

Previous tachistoscopic studies have confined themselves

chiefly to the reading of isolated words; the present study

has attempted to adapt the method to reading in context.

A second adaptation is its use in analyzing processes at the

threshold of word recognition by reducing the exposure time

to a period approximating the time differences of the percep-

tibility of their attributes, the presupposition being that various

attributes of objects lie at varying distances from the threshold.

And still a third untried possibility of this method consists

in reports upon the marginal field of perceptual regard in addi-

tion to the reports upon the field of distinct vision.

The experiments have already proceeded far enough to

give assurance that the completion of the study will shed addi-

tional light upon the questions of literal reading, reading cues,

value of context, etc.

An attempt was made by Professor Woodworth to throw

some additional light on the question, first raised by Cattell,’

as to what is seen during movements or jumps of the eye from

1 Psychological Review, 1900, VII., pp. 325-343, 507-508.

618 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE

one fixation point to another. Two opposing views are those.

of Holt,! who holds to a complete anesthesia or inhibition of

the visual centre during the movement, and of Dodge,? who

believes that vision there is possible but under ordinary con-

ditions not actualized, because the faint blur produced by

moving the eye across a variegated field is so brief and mean-

ingless as to be ignored, just as entoptic phenomena are ignored.

Proceeding on the supposition that if the latter view were

correct it should be possible by attention and practice to become

conscious of the stimuli that affect the eye during movement.

the author has convinced himself of the following facts:

1. During head movements, an object held in the mouth

may remain in clear vision.

2. During convergence, the two monocular fields may be

seen to move across each other.

3. During eye-jumps proper, after-images may remain in

consciousness if the lids.are closed (Exner), or if the background

is dark or plain; it is also possible, in short jumps, or at the

beginning and end of longer ones, to see entoptic spots move

across the background. .

4. External objects moving in the same direction as the

eye are distinctly seen when their angular velocity with respect

to the eye coincides with that of the eye at any part of its jump

(Cattell, Dodge). With reference to Holt’s objection that

what is seen may be the positive after-image, appearing after

the eye has come to rest, it should be noted that the objects

so brought to clear vision are correctly localized in space,

instead of being projected against the background at the new

point of fixation, as would be the case with after-images. Thus

not only vision, but correct localization of objects seen, is pos-

sible during eye-jumps.

5. Stationary objects over which the eye passes can also

be seen after practice. Fusion, flicker, and especially apparent

motion of the objects, corresponding to the actual motion of

1 Psychological Review, Monograph Supplements, 1903, 1V., pp. 3-453

Psychological Bulletin, 1905, II.

2Ibid., 1900, VII., pp. 454-465; Psychological Bulletin 1905, II., pp.

193-199.

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 619

_ their images across the retina, can all be seen. A peculiarity

which calls for further discussion is that the apparent extent

of the object’s motion is much less than the actual motion of

the eye as measured against the background.

The author’s conclusion is that vision with the moving eye is

essentially the same as that with the fixed eye when the external

field moves.

Professor Cattell explained how he had selected a group

of one thousand scientific men for the study of individual

differences and the conditions on which success in scientific

work depends. In each of the twelve principal sciences the

students who had done original work were arranged in the

order of merit of their work by ten competent judges. Thus

was obtained the order of merit and also the proper error of

each position, it being based on ten independent observations.

This probable error is inversely as the differences in scientific

method, it being small where the differences are marked and

becoming larger as the differences are less. It is thus possible

to construct a curve representing the distribution of scientific

merit in these thousand scientific men, and this curve agrees

rather closely with the positive half of the curve of error. The

first hundred men differ among themselves about as much as

the next two hundred or the last seven hundred.

Data were also given in regard to the distribution of the

thousand leading scientific men of the country. The birth-

rate of these scientific men was 27 per million of the popula-

tion, it being so in cities and 24 in the country. It was 109

in Massachusetts, 47 in New York, 23 in Pennsylvania, 12

in Missouri, and 1 in Mississippi andin Louisiana. Their present

distribution is somewhat similar. Thus 134 scientific men were

born in Massachusetts and 144 reside there; 183 were born

in New York and 192 reside there. The central States, with

the exception of Illinois, tend to lose their scientific men.

Thus 75 were born in Ohio, and 34 now reside there. The

distribution of these scientific men among different institutions

is as follows: Harvard, 66; Columbia, 60; Chicago, 39; Cornell,

33; U. S. Geological Survey, 32; U. S. Department of Agri-

culture, 32; Johns Hopkins, 30; California, 27; Yale, 26; Smith-

620 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE

sonian Institution, 22; Michigan, 20; Massachusetts Institute |

of Technology, 19; Wisconsin, 18; Pennsylvania, 17; Stanford,

16; Princeton, 14; Minnesota and Ohio State, ro each.

In his paper, Brother Chrysostom stated that it is impossible

either to understand the great philosophers or to appreciate

their influence if we limit ourselves to a purely scientific stand-

point. Temperament enters so largely as a factor, both im

determining the principles on which they lay special stress

and in gaining disciples for their respective schools, that we

are forced to consider them also from a literary view-point

if we would do them justice. The ingredients that form tem-

perament may be arranged under the following heads: (1)

Heredity, which is especially helpful in tracing tendencies

favoring the pursuit of the concrete; (2) environment, which

is closely interwoven with heredity and may be called a condi-

tion of its development as a factor in mental life; (3) race and

nationality—no Frenchman will treat a subject in the same

manner as a German; (4) the attraction exercised by the first

philosopher who interests a thinker; (5) the time or epoch

in which the philosopher lived, for history is governed to a

great extent by the law of reaction and adjustment, which

results in the formation of cycles of thought; (6) the person-

ality of the founder. This leads him to lay emphasis upon cer-

tain phases of truth to the neglect of others. To estimate his

influence we must attend to the elements of truth contained in

his system of thought.

Dr. Montague protested first against the current paradoxical

view of mental processes as real occurrences that occur nowhere.

They should be located in space for the following reasons:

(1) They are naturally felt to be within the body; (2) they

form no exception to the generally accepted rule that an invis-

ible event, such as an electric current, is to be located in the

visible object that directly conditions it; (3) their phenomenal

existence in space (like their existence in time) is not in conflict

with the transcendental view that space and time are appear-

ances; (4) that they are neither punctiform nor figured is no

argument against their location in space, for many things—

notably, sounds and odors—are definitely located in space

without being regarded as either punctiform or figured; (s)

the objection that there is no room in space for anything but

matter and motion, and that thoughts and feelings if they

were really in the brain would have to be regarded as visible

substances between or alongside of the brain molecules, is

invalid; for it disregards the fact that sensations are intensive

and not extensive, and that they must, therefore, occupy space

in the same way as other intensities, such as stresses, velocities,

and accelerations, which exist in space along with their matter

and not alongside of it.

The last part of the paper explained and defended the hypoth-

esis that mental states are the modes of potential energy (ex-

pressible in terms of the higher derivatives of space with regard

to time) into which the kinetic energy of the nerve currents

must be transformed in order to be redirected. The theory,

if true, would justify the belief in interaction without violating

the parellelists’ contention that the spatial can only be causally

related to what is in space. ;

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 621

R. S. WoopwortTH,

Secretary.

BUSINESS MEETING.

DECEMBER 4, I905.

The Academy met at 8.15 p.m., at the American Museum

of Natural History, President Kemp presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting were read and approved.

The Secretary reported from the Council as follows:

At the meeting of the Council held Nov. 27, at 4 P.M., the

following officers were nominated for the year 1906, according

to the By-Laws:

President, N. L. Britton.

Vice-Presidents, Edmund Otis Hovey, H. E. Crampton, C. C.

Trowbridge, Robert MacDougall.

Corresponding Secretary, Richard E. Dodge.

Recording Secretary, William M. Wheeler.

622 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE

Treasurer, Emerson McMillin.

Librarian, Ralph W. Tower.

Editor, Charles Lane Poor.

Councilors, John H. Finley, Hermon C. Bumpus.

Finance Committee, John H. Hinton, C. A. Post, Henry F.

Osborn.

It was voted that the Annual Meeting should consist of a

formal meeting for the presentation of the reports of officers

and the election of officers for the ensuing year, to be followed

by a subscription dinner, at which the address of the Presi-

dent would be delivered. Due notice will be given members of

the time and place of this meeting.

It was voted that the report of the Council be approved.

The death of John H. Hinton was then announced by D. S.

Martin.

It was voted that a committee be appointed by the Chairman

to draw up resolutions, with regard to the matter.

The President appointed Professor Martin and Professor

Stevenson to serve on this committee.

Mr. George F. Kunz then announced the death of Dr. Augus-

tus Choate Hamlin, geologist, of Bangor, Me., and moved that

a committee be appointed to draw up appropriate resolutions.

It was so voted.

The President appointed Dr. Kunz as a committee of one to

draw up the resolutions.

The following candidates were then presented for election to

Active and Associate Active membership, having been recom-

mended by the Council:

M. Baxter, Jr. 32 West 6oth Street

Martin Beckhard 102 West 87th Street

T. W. Blake 1945 Park Avenue.

Frank Briesen 87 Nassau Street

André Champollion 150 West 47th Street

William L. Condit 624 Bloomfield Street, Hoboken, N.J.

Warren Delano, Jr. 1 Broadway

Louis J. de Milhau 48 Mt. Auburn Street, Cambridge,

Mass.

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 623

James A. Garland

L. V. Holzmaister

John E. MacDonald

Alfred E. Marling

George B. Morewood

R. J. Nunn

mE. Oettmger

Henry Phipps

Carl Pickhardt

William Procter

F. James Reilly

James H. Rogers

Charles M. Schott, Jr.

W. Wheeler Smith

Samuel B. Snook

Isidor Straus

J. E. Hulshizer

Henry E. Taylor

Jeremiah R. van Brunt

Robert A. van Wyck

Wendell T. Bush

Lincoln Cromwell

J. M. Conn

John S. Durand

Walter Irving

Adrian §. Lambert

J. M. O’Brien

Juliette A. Owen

William H. Vredenburgh

Box 500, Bristol, R.I.

150 West 72d Street

216 West 72d Street

47 West 47th Street

156 West 76th Street

5 York Street, E., Savannah, Ga.

416 Central Park West

6 East 87th Street -

1042 Madison Avenue

rz East 52d Street

13 West 77th Street

60 Wall Street

25 Broad Street

17 East 77th Street

182 Hart Street, Brooklyn

2745 Broadway

16 Gifford Avenue, Jersey City

306 West 8cth Street

1841 84th Street, Brooklyn

149 Broadway

167 Joralemon Street, Brooklyn,

N.Y.

3 East 84th Street, N.Y. City

544 West 114th Street

126 West 79th Street

121 East 37th Street

29 West 36th Street

252 West 72d Street

306 North Ninth Street, St. Louis,

Mo.

868 West End Avenue, N.Y. City.

AssociATE ACTIVE MEMBER

G. W. Hunter

2238 Andrews Avenue, Univer-

sity Heights

624 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE

The candidates were unanimously elected by vote of the

Academy.

The meeting then adjourned.

Hermon C. Bumpus,

Recording Secretary.

SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY.

DECEMBER 4, eae

Section met at 8.30 p.m., Vice-President Hovey presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read

and approved.

The following program was then offered:

J. Howard Wilson, THE GiaciaL GEoLocY oF NANTUCKET AND

CapE Cop.

Thomas T. Read, Gotp MINING IN THE SOUTHERN APPALA-

‘CHIANS.

George F. Kunz, Description oF THE Mopoc, Scott County,

Kansas, METEORITE.

SUMMARY OF PAPERS.

Dr. Wilson commenced his paper with a description of the

region by means of a map showing the great morainal features

of the late Wisconsin ice-sheet. It was shown that the glacial

phenomena and accumulations were due to two very distinct

lobes having a direction of motion approximately at right

angles to each other. The eastern lobe was termed the Nan-

tucket lobe and the other the Long Island lobe from the- more

prominent region of its moraines.

It was shown also that each lobe had two prominent associ-

ated stages, one the time of maximum advance, and the other a

period of halting in the final retreat.

The glacial features of Nantucket and as far west as the

central portion of Martha’s Vineyard were formed during the

first or Nantucket stage of that lobe, while the morainal accumu-

lations of the western portion of Martha’s Vineyard, Block

Island, and the outer moraine of Long Island were formed

i creas

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 625

during the corresponding stage of the Long Island lobe or in

what was termed the Martha’s Vineyard-Block Island stage.

; The retreat of the Nantucket lobe to Cape Cod, where it

_ halted for a time, formed the Cape Cod stage of this lobe, while

a retreat of the front of the western lobe to a poison on the

Elizabeth Island, Southern Rhode Island, Fisher’s and Plum

Islands, and the northern part of Long Island resulted in what

was termed the Elizabeth Island-Fisher’s Island stage. It

is well known that the ice of the Long Island lobe had a general

southeasterly motion, but it was shown that the Nantucket lobe

came from the northeast, probably from a region as distant as

Newfoundland, and no doubt extended seaward at least 150

miles. Between the two lobes was formed the interlobate

moraine extending from Wood’s Holl on Cape Cod to and be-

yond Manomet Hill in the neighborhood of Plymouth.

It was shown that the Nantucket lobe had what might be

called a third stage, when it began to melt back from the Cape

Cod moraine in the vicinity of West Barnstable, its front still

holding on to the east and west. Fresh water was thus held

up by the moraina! ridge in a re-entrant angle of the retreating

ice, bringing into existence Cape Cod Lake. It was during

the existence of this lake that the sand plains of Eastern Well-

fleet. Highlands, and Truro were formed.

It was further shown that Cape Cod Lake had three distinct

stages, the Wellfleet. Highlands, and Truro stages, marked by

three different levels of its waters and the formation of a par-

ticular series of plains.

Numerous maps and views of the prominent glacial features

tyhroughout the region were shown.

Mr. Read first pointed out that the Southern Appalachian

region was one of the earliest to which the search for gold was

directed after the discovery of the New World.

After tracing the early development up to the present, the

geological structure of the region and the methods of occurrence

of the ore were described. The paper then touched on the

present state of the industry and the methods of working, and

concluded with a forecast of the probable future worth of the

deposits.

626 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE

Dr. Kunz described the Modoc, Scott County, Kansas, meteor-

ite, that detonated over Modoc at 9.30 P.m., Sept. 2, 1905.

First a loud sharp report was heard; then followed a rumbling ~

for thirty seconds, when a shower of over a dozen stones fell

stone is an almost white, pulverulent mass, with minute specks ;

of native iron or troilite, with an occasional white, glassy. |

cleavable feldspar inclusion.

A. W. GRABAU,

Secretary.

SECTION OF BIOLOGY.

DECEMBER II, 1905.

Section met at 8.15 P.M., at the American Museum of Natural

History, Vice-President Wheeler presiding.

The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and

approved.

The following program was then offered:

Adele M. Fielde, THE PRoGREssivE Opor or ANTS AND ITS

INFLUENCE IN THEIR COMMUNAL LIFE.

A. F. Bandelier, Anima Lire In PERU AND BOLIVIA.

May Cline, PRINCIPLES OF BirpD FLIGHT.

F. M. Chapman, CERTAIN INSTINCTS IN BIRDs.

No abstracts received.

M. A. BicELow,

Secretary.

ANNUAL MEETING.

DECEMBER 18, 1905.

The Academy met for the Annual Meeting on Monday,

Dec. 18, 1905, at 7.30 P.M.,.at the Hotel Endicott; Presi-

dent Kemp in the chair. A formal session for the transaction

of regular business was held, followed by a dinner, at which

sixty-one were present, including forty-six members and their

friends.

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES O27

The accompanying reports of the Corresponding Secretary,

Recording Secretary, Librarian, and Editor were read and

placed on file. The Treasurer not being able to present his

report, on account of absence from town, it was voted that it

be referred to the Finance Committee for audit, when presented.

The following members were elected Fellows by the Academy:

Professor Charles Baskerville Dr. Maurice Fishberg

Mr. C. William Beebe Mr. Gifford Pinchot

Dr. John H. Finley Mr. George H. Sherwood

The Academy then proceeded to elect officers for the year

1906. Professors Crampton and Trowbridge were appointed tel-

lers, ballots prepared by the Council according to the By-Laws

were distributed, and the votes were counted. The following

officers were declared elected:

President, Nathaniel L. Britton.

Vice-Presidents, E. O. Hovey (Section of Geology and Miner-

alogy), H. E. Crampton (Section of Biology), C. C. Trowbridge

(Section of Astronomy, Physics, and Chemistry), Robert Mac-

Dougall (Section of Anthropology and Psychology).

Corresponding Secretary, Richard E. Dodge.

Recording Secretary, William M. Wheeler.

Treasurer, Emerson McMillin.

Librarian, Ralph W. Tower.

Editor, Charles Lane Poor.

Councilors (to serve three years), Hermon C. Bumpus, John H.

Finley.

Finance Committee, John H. Caswell, C.'A. Post, Henry F.

Osborn.

The President of the Academy, Professor James F. Kemp,

then delivered his address upon ‘‘The Problem of the Metal-

liferous Veins,” after which a vote of thanks was tendered to

him.

The Academy then adjourned.

Hermon C. Bumpus,

Recording Secretary.

628 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE

REPORT OF THE CORRESPONDING SECRETARY.

During the year, the Assistant Secretary, Mr. Miner, has

sent the customary biennial circulars to the Honorary and

Corresponding members and has already received replies from

more than three fourths of his inquiries.

According to our corrected lists, there are now fifty Honorary

Members and one hundred and seventy-one Corresponding

Members.

During the last year two Corresponding Members, Professor

Alpheus 8. Packard and Professor Albert.A. Wright, have died.

Ricuarp E. Dopce,

Corresponding Secretary.

REPORT OF THE RECORDING SECRETARY.

During the year 1905 the Academy held eight business

meetings, and twenty-eight sectional meetings, at which eighty-

four stated papers and lectures were presented, on the following

subjects:

Astronomy 3 papers. Physiography i papers

Physics Gagne ; lecture.

Chemistry 3 i Anthropology and

Paleontology 5 y Archeology 6 PADerS pee

Biology DAN a 8 lecture.

Geology II cy Psychology 24 papers.

Mineralogy Bemis Philosophy Sn

Physiology I my

At the present time the membership of the Academy includes

424 Active Members, nineteen of whom are Associate Active

Members, and 121 Fellows. The election of six Fellows is

pending. There have been five deaths during the year, seven

resignations, and one member has been dropped for non-payment

of dues. The new members elected during the year number

159. A year ago only five new members were elected. During

the past year there has been a net gain of 146 against a loss

of nine in 1904. This remarkable showing, which amounts

to an increase of 50 per cent., is due to the activity of the Mem-

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 629

bership Committee, of which Professor Stevenson is chairman,

and is the result of the determination of the Council to devote

especial attention to the matter of membership, as stated in

the Recording Secretary’s Report of a year ago. While striving

to increase the membership the Academy has had in view the

securing of men interested in science, even though not active

scientific contributors, and by the establishment of a new

grade of membership, viz. that of Associate Active Member-

ship, many young men have been brought in.

Efforts have also been made to invite to the sectional meetings

persons who are not members of the Academy but who are

interested in the various branches of science to which these

sections are devoted.

The routine work of the Academy has now been concentrated

in one office at the American Museum of Natural History,

where an Academy Room has been provided so as to be adapted

to our special needs.

It is with sorrow that the Academy has to record the loss by

death of the five following members:

Dr. John H. Hinton, Fellow and Patron of the Academy

(40 years).

Dr. L. H. Laudy, Fellow (24 years).

The Hon. Edward Cooper (38 years).

Mr. John Murray Mitchell (19 years).

Mr. Wheeler H. Peckham (7 years).

Respectfully submitted,

Hermon C. Bumpus,

Recording Secretary.

630 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE

REPORT OF THE TREASURER.

New York, Dec. 18, 1905.

To the New York Academy of Sciences.

Gentlemen:—As required by the By-Laws, I herewith sub- —

mit a statement of my receipts and disbursements since my last

annual report, and a balance sheet from my ledger, as of this

date.

Respectfully yours,

C2 Bi Gor

Treasurer.

RECEIPTS.

Balance on hand, as per annual report Dec. 20,

TQO4 wees cette eee teeta teen eee $2,266.24

One year’s interest at 4% on Lampe Mortgage

(St. Ann’ SvAwve®)) TOn hr 2sOOOnr einer eee 540.00

One year’s interest at 5% on Brennan Mortgage

(CQBAG We Siela, Sib) WOK WE ROO. aa oackasccsoe 260.00

Ieite Nemibershipeheesmmer re acerrieiie reir rier I,200.00

Mmibiation Nee Gy iamesas chart mete lain ache cles 5.00

Active Membership Dues, E Oi at nara tobe, Meera $20.00

TOON ioe te. ona eee 60.00

ue i fo WEL OMAN pact Se aEN aw oeaele 150.00

as i Sit EQ OB yes suet che tices eS iaectee ars 2,615.00

ss a Milt EEO O Oi uns eset one NN ana 40.00

<= 2,885.00

Associate Membership Dues, 1905............ 45.00

Imterest en) Deposit im banana san ere ee 61 72

Surplus from Annual Dinner, 1904........... 4.00

Sales) ote REpmMts eter rw awit re sieyemaaeee 104 09

$7,372.05

DISBURSEMENTS

Pra liea tions: sever: tes east pearance eialiuedetereu tae $1,892.45

Expenses Recording Secretary and Assistant

Secretary. not ayer eae opera vetedees aneceuate mueace 370.58

YAO WHE LUC Bastia) ps Sarai SOc In gaat uslnatrexers tol vate 90.00

Shinai JNSsie. SISCinsuahay,, im MaMa 5 6 oca bad 6 733.206

Expenses Of MUTCASUTEE i war ePNemcmerstare, ysis 25.00

Pies Callow rch alert nice a nak renee aE 95-95

ns ““ Corresponding Secretary......... 2.10

General Expenses, including expenses of Spe-

cial Committee on Membership.......... 185.30

Expenses, Geological Sectionmerre evi. ie rp. 35

Section of Astronomy and Physics.. dus $3,411.44

Balanceronvinan de rheiirrsieteraiverstiete irre $3,959.61

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 631

BALANCE SHEET.

Dr.

LED WOSTHAOSTAS ig PEs Goh he eR $17,200.00

22S Cin ISN eek Ue Oe a 3,959.61

$21,159.61

Cr.

PEPAMS cine 1 Dero ee rt $12,431.68

LPs SI G@inloa) 1B Gho\el ae ete ee 3,000.00

AVES {S190i8 TSEC | ep ete Cee ee 1,897.25

itacomevor Audubon Pund.............0.005. 250.99

ineomeror Publication Fund.............2.<+ BBR 95)

iiecomeor Permanent Fund.........6........ 1,586.31

WeetlesteMMEMCOMICS 8 ello. ok a ee ee els hele e us 1,665.61

PRGUMAMBP TINCT S65 esas we hk doe eee ees 4.00

$21,159.61

REPORT OF THE LIBRARIAN.

The Library has received during the past year, by gift

and exchange, 299 Volumes, 233 Pamphlets and 1613 Numbers,

which have been duly acknowledged, accessioned, and placed

on the shelves for reference.

The Library is open to the public on each week-day from

9.30 A.M. to 5 P.M. The books have been frequently consulted

and it is desired that their use shall be continued.

R. W. Tower,

Librarian.

REPORT OF THE EDITOR.

New York, Dec. 18, 1905.

During the year 1905 the Academy printed and issued the

following publications:

ANNALS—Vol. XVI, Part 1, containing four papers as follows:

Louis I. Dublin, ‘History of Germ Cells in Pedicellina ameri-

cana Leidy;” D. S. Martin, ‘“H. Carrington Bolton;” J. J.

Stevenson, ‘‘The Jurassic Coals of Spitzbergen;” J. Howard

Wilson, ‘‘Recent Journeys among Localities Famous for

Prehistoric Man.”’ This part was issued in March and con-

sisted of ninety-seven pages, three plates and two text figures.

Vol. XVI, Part 2, which contained papers by Waldemar

632 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE

Jochelson, entitled, ‘‘Grammar of the Yukaghir Language;”

by Maurice Fishberg, “‘Materials for the Physical Anthropology

of the Eastern European Jews;”’ and the records of the meetings

of the Academy for the year 1904. This part was issued in

August and contained 290 pages, one plate, and thirteen text

figures.

Total number of pages of the Annals issued during the year

was thus 387.

Memoirs.—Vol. II, Part 4, consisting of an elaborate research

paper by W. E. Kellicott entitled, ‘“‘The Development of the

Vascular and Respiratory Systems of Ceratodus.” This con-

sisted of 114 pages, five plates, two of which were printed in

colors, and 106 text figures. A portion of the expense of print-

ing this Memoir was borne by the Audubon Fund.

AnnaLts.—Vol. XVI, Part 3, is now in press and should be

issued soon after the beginning of the year.

CHARLES LANE Poor,

Editor.

THE ANNUAL ADDRESS OF THE PRESIDENT.

THe PROBLEM OF THE METALLIFEROUS VEINS.

By James Furman Kemp.

The rush of the gold-seekers to California in 1849 and the

quickly following one to Australia in 1851 were notable migra-

tions in search of the yellow metal, but they were not the first

in the history of our race. There is, indeed, no reason to sup-

pose that,in the past, mining excitements were limited even

to the historical period; on the contrary the legends of the

golden fleece and of the golden apples of the Hesperides prob-

ably describe in poetic garb two of the early expeditions, and

long before either, we can well imagine primitive man hurrying

to new diggings in order to enlarge his scanty stock of metals.

Among the influences which have led to the exploration and

settlement of new lands, the desire to find and acquire gold and

silver has been one of the most important, and as a means of

introducing thousands of vigorous settlers, of their own volition,

into uninhabited or uncivilized regions there is no agent which

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 633

compares with it. In this connection it may be also remarked

that there is no more interesting chapter in the history of civil-

ization than that which concerns itself with the use of the met-

als and with the development of methods for their extraction

from their ores. Primitive man was naturally limited to those

which he found in the native state. T hey are but few, viz.,

gold in wide but sparse distribution in gravels; copper in occa-

sional masses along the outcrops of veins, in which far the

greater part of the metal is combined with oxygen or sulphur;

copper again, in porous rocks, as in the altogether exceptional

case of the Lake Superior mines; iron in an occasional meteorite;

which, if its fall had been observed, was considered to be the

image of a god, descended from the skies;! silver in occasional

nuggets with the more common ones of gold; and possibly a

rare bit of platinum. Besides these no other metal can have

been known, because all the rest and all of those mentioned,

when locked up in their ores, give in the physical properties

of the latter but the slightest suggestion of their presence.

Chance discoveries must have first revealed the possibilities

of producing iron from its ore—really a very simple process

when small quantities are involved; of making bronze from

the ores of copper and tin; of making brass with the ores of

copper and zinc; of reducing copper and lead from their natural

compounds; and of freeing silver from its chief associate, lead.

All of these processes were extensively practised under the

Chinese, Phenicians, Greeks, Romans and other ancient peoples.

As the need of weapons in war, the advantages of metallic

currency, and the want of household utensils became felt, and

as the minerals which yield the metals became recognized as

such, the art of mining grew to be something more than the

digging and washing of gravels; and in the long course of time

developed into its present stage as one of the most difficult

branches of engineering. Chemistry raised metallurgical pro-

cesses from the art of obtaining some of a metal from its ore,

to the art of obtaining almost all of it and of accounting for what

escaped. It is, in fact, in this scientific accounting for every-

1As in the case of Diana of the Ephesians and the deity of the

Carthaginians.

634 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE

thing that modern processes chiefly differ from those of the

ancients.

Of all the metals the most important which minister to the

needs of daily life are the following, ranged as nearly as possible

_ in the order of their usefulness: Iron, copper, lead, zinc, silver,

gold, tin, aluminum, nickel, platinum, manganese, chromium,

quicksilver, antimony, arsenic, and cobalt. The others are of

very minor importance, although often indispensable for cer-

tain restricted uses.

The manner of occurrence of these metals in the earth, and

their amount in ores which admit of practicable working, are

fundamental facts in all our industrial development, and some

accurate knowledge of them ought to be a part of the intellectual

equipment of every well-educated man. The matter may well

appeal to Americans, since the United States have developed

within a few years into the foremost producer of iron, copper

lead, coal, and until recent years in gold and silver; but with

regard to gold, they have of late alternated in the leadership

with the Transvaal and Australia, and in silver are now second

to Mexico.

Despite the enormous product of food-stuffs, American mining

developments are of the same order of magnitude; and the

mineral resources of the country have proved to be one of the

richest possessions of its people.

We may best gain a proper conception of the problem of the

metalliferous veins if we state at the outset the gross composi-

tion of the outer portion of the globe, so far as geologists have

been able to express it by grouping analyses of rocks. We

may then note among the elements mentioned such of the metals

as have just been cited and may remark the rarity of the others;

we may next set forth the necessary percentages of each metal

which make a deposit an ore, that is, make it rich enough for

profitable working. By comparison we can grasp in a general

way the amount of concentration which must be accomplished

by the geological agents in order to collect from a naturally

lean distribution in rocks enough of a given metal to produce

a deposit of ore; and can then naturally pass to a brief discus-

sion and description of those agents and their operations.

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES . 635

If the general composition of the crust of the earth is cal-

_ culated as closely as possible on the basis of known chemical

analyses, the following table results, which has been compiled

_ by Dr. F. W. Clarke, of Washington, chief chemist of the U. S.

Geological Survey.!

SERVES 4d 616.4.6.5 6 Cian a ea 47.13

SWNCOMle ooo RES ABAD ORE eae ae ea 27.89

A i GHSRUEARONESY 6 ihe GREE eee ee ean ee She

IEG, « oe 2 0 Gate CI Le ete oa 4.71

SAIICTUNTE 2/56 ba: BAS. Benoa en a Bo Fe

Mere SHUM Ne ele na shea wei s aoe hess 2.64

2 DUSTY 34 edie sia Samet nee ee 2 5

‘SOGUIGHAM. 6, 5 6/2) ee SNe ECT FERS een 2.68

TALI 5 Goa phy ee a oe a aN 5 8A

TEL SACIAOINOIRS & 6) cb cleat ch ata cae er de 3 9

SETIDOIM ow ded oid wren Ot ECE BAe ee nee a NE en 522

I HIOS/BIROWT CIS: Sake Senne ene nn rea .09

Mi EERBEAO SS oer age Cane ee RA ae ae a .07

1S CULDIGHUSE. <3 one) area one ae ee .06

JES sTIYOOM. 2 3 Godlee atc eae ie cee a eae .04

\SIOSPOATEUNTT > ch Sere ea a A te oO sO

INNCIREI oo cb AWS gS EL ee a en sor

SET ODI REIT YG ae glean ae rected re Pa eanene ieee ol

J AKElGHKBETA, 5A 1 olde a lt ae arta eee ee a Ee ROW

Witlogincmemyee ey marc ht Gh Ras Gea t w ar .or

PINSOVENES & 2.094 za ROR Ceege NS nOe et eee eo a or

“TSOUBBULS. 6 9 SP ey Cane ee 100.00

Elements less than .or per cent. are not considered abundant

enough to affect the total, and equally exact data regarding

them are not accessible. Among those given only the following

appear which are metals of importance as such in everyday

life: aluminum 8.13, iron 4.71, manganese .o7, chromium .or,

and nickel .o1. They rank respectively, in the table, third,

fourth, thirteenth, sixteenth and seventeenth. Of the five,

iron is the only one of marked prominence. No one of the

remaining four is comparable in usefulness with at least five

other metals which are not mentioned, viz., copper, lead, zinc,

silver, and gold.

An endeavor has been made by at least one investigator,

Professor J. H. L. Vogt, of Christiania, to establish some quan-

titative expression for these other metals. His estimates

are as follows:

1 Bulletin 148, p. 13.

2 Zeitschrift fur prak. Geologie, 1898, 324.

636 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE

Copper, percentage beyond the fourth or fifth place of decimals, |

that is in the hundred thousandths or millionths of one per cent.

Lead and zinc, percentages in the fifth place of decimals, or

in the hundred thousandths of one per cent.

Silver, percentage two decimal places beyond copper—or in the

ten millionths to the hundred millionths of one per cent., or the

ten thousandth to the hundred thousandth of an ounce to the ton.

Gold, percentage one tenth as much as silver.

Tin, percentage in the fourth or fifth decimal place, that is,

in the ten thousandths or hundred thousandths of one per cent.

These figures, inconceivably small as they are, convey some

idea of the rarity of these metals as constituents on the average

of the outer six or eight miles of the earth’s crust. But they

are locally more abundant in particular masses of eruptive

rocks which are associated with ore deposits.

In the following tabulation I have endeavored to bring

together a number of determinations which have been made

in connection with investigations of American mining districts.

In a general way they give a fair idea of the metallic contents

of certain eruptive rocks from which were taken samples as

little as possible open to the suspicion that they had been

enriched by the same processes which had produced the neigh-

boring ore-bodies.

Copper, .009 Missouri. 1

Lead, .OOII Colorado.2

Lead, .008 Eureka, Nev.

Lead, 004 Missouri.!

Zinc, .0048 Leadville, Colo.4

Zine, .009 Missouri.!

Silver, .00007 Leadville, Colo.s

Silver, 00016 Eureka, Nev.3

Silver, 00016 Rosita, Colo.¢

Gold, .00002 Eureka, Nev.3

Gold, .00004 Owyhee County, Id.7

1 Average of eight eruptives from Missouri, Anal. by J. D. Robertson.

Report on Lead and Zinc, Mo. Geol. Surv., II., 479.

2 Average of six different rocks, embracing eighteen assays; S. F.

Emmons, Monograph XII., U. S. Geol. Surv., 591. .

3 One rock, a quartz porphyry, not certain the rock was not enriched.

J. D. Curtis, U. S. Geol. Surv., Mono. VII., 136.

4 Same reference as under 6. The zinc was determined in but two

samples.

5 Same reference as under 6, but p. 594.

6S. F. Emmons, XVII. Ann. Rep. U.S. Geol. Survey, Part II., p. 472.

7 A. Simundi in Tenth Census, XIJII., 54.

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 637

In order to come-within the possible limits of profitable

and successful treatment the ores of the more important metals

should have at least the following percentages, but that we may

_ grasp the relations correctly, it must be appreciated that local

conditions affect the limits. Thus in a remote situation and

with high charges for transportation an ore may be outside

profitable treatment although it may contain several times

the percentages of those more favorably situated. Iron ores

in particular which are distant from centres of population

are valueless unless cheap transportation on a very large scale

can be developed, while gold in an almost inacessible region,

like the Klondike, may yield a rich reward, even when in quan-

tities which, if expressed in percentages, are almost inappreciable.

The nature of the ore is also a factor of prime importance.

Some compounds yield the metals readily and cheaply, while

others, which in the case of the precious metals are often called

base ores, require complicated and it may be expensive metal-

lurgical treatment. The association of metals is likewise of

the highest importance. Copper or lead, for example, greatly

facilitate the extraction of gold and silver, whereas zinc in

large quantities is a hindrance. Conditions also change. An

ore which may have been valueless in early days may prove

a rich source of profit in later years and under improved condi-

tions. For instance, from 1870 for over twenty-five years

Bingham Canyon in Utah yielded lead-silver ores and minor

deposits of gold. It was known that in some mines low-grade

and base ores of copper and gold existed, but the fact was

carefully concealed and in at least one instance the shaft

into them was filled up, lest a general knowledge of the fact

should unfavorably affect the value of the property. To-day,

however, these ores are eagerly sought and their extraction

and treatment in thousands of tons daily are paying good

returns on very large capitalization. Another factor is the

expense of extraction. If simple and inexpensive methods

are possible, the area of profitable treatment is greatly widened.

Thus gold may need little else than a stream of water or even

a blast of air, whereas iron and copper require huge furnaces

and vast supplies of coke and fluxes.

638 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE

Iron ores are of little value in any part of the world un-

less they contain a minimum of 35 per cent. iron when

they enter the furnace, but if they are distributed in amounts

of from ro to 20 per cent., in extensive masses of loose or easily —

crushed rock in such condition that they can be cheaply con-

centrated up to rich percentages, they may be profitably treated

and a product with 50 per cent. iron or higher be sent to the

furnaces. Nevertheless, speaking for the civilized world at

large, it holds true that as an iron ore enters the furnace it

cannot have less than 35 per cent., and in America with our

_tich and pure deposits on Lake Superior two thirds of our sup-

ply ranges from 60 to 65 per cent.

As regards copper, a minimum working percentage, amid

favorable conditions and with enormous quantities, is usually

about three per cent., but in the altogether exceptional deposits

of the native metal in the Lake Superior region, copper-rock

as low as three fourths of one per cent. has been profitably

treated. This or any similar result could only be accomplished

with exceptionally efficient management and with a copper

rock such as is practically only known on Lake Superior. With

the usual type of ore, not enriched by gold or silver, two per

cent. is the extreme, and in remote localities from 5 to Io per

cent. may sometimes be too poor.

In southeast Missouri, lead ores are profitably mined which

have from 5 to 10 per cent., lead, but they are concentrated to

65 or 70 per cent. before going to the furnace.

Zinc ores at the furnace ought not to yield less than 25 or

30 per cent., and when concentrated or selected they range up

to 60 per cent.

The precious metals are expressed in troy ounces to the ton

avoirdupois. A troy ounce in a ton is one three-hundredth

of one per cent., and the amount is, therefore, very small when

stated in percentages. If it be appreciated that in round

numbers silver is now worth fifty to sixty cents an ounce, and

gold, twenty dollars, some grasp may be had of values. Silver

rarely occurs by itself. On the contrary it is obtained in asso-

ciation with lead and copper and the ores are, as a rule, treated

primarily for these base metals and then from the latter the

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 639

precious metals are later separated. In the base ores there ought

to be enough silver to yield a minimum of five dollars or ten

ounces in the resulting ton of copper in order to afford enough

to pay for separation. Now in a five per cent. ore of copper

we have a concentration of twenty tons of ore to yield one ton

of pig, or more correctly stated, so as to allow for losses, twenty-

one tons to one. We must, therefore, have at least ten ounces

of silver in the twenty-one tons, which implies a minimum

of about one half ounce per ton. Smelters will only pay a miner

for the silver if he has over one half ounce per ton in a copper

ore. Ina pig of lead, usually called base bullion, it is necessary

for profitable extraction to have fifteen ounces of silver. For

smelting a lead ore we must possess at least ten per cent. lead

and may have seventy. It is, therefore, obvious that from

two to twenty ounces silver must be present in the ton of lead

ore. The common ranges are ten to fifty ounces or one thirtieth

to one sixth of one per cent.

Gold is so cheaply extracted that it may be profitably obtained

under favorable circumstances down to one tenth of an ounce in

the ton, but the run of ores is from a fourth ounce, or five dollars,

to an ounce, or twenty dollars. Ores of course sometimes reach a

number of ounces. In copper or lead ores even a twentieth of

an ounce may be an object, and in favorably situated gravels to

which the hydraulic method may be applied, even as little as seven

to ten cents in the cubic yard may be recovered, or some such value

as a two-hundredth to a three-hundredth of an ounce per ton.

The tin ores as smelted contain about 70 per cent., but

they are all concentrated either by washing gravels in which

the percentage is one or less, or else by mining, crushing, and

dressing ore in which it ranges from 1.5 to 3 per cent. The

tin-bearing gravels represent a concentration from much leaner

dissemination in the parent veins and granite. Aluminum ores

yield as sold about 30 per cent. of the metal. This is an

enrichment as compared with the rocks, though not so striking

a one as in the case of other metals. But the great change

necessary in aluminum is in the method of combination. It is

so tightly locked up in silicates in the rocks as to preclude direct

extraction by any known method.

alge!

640 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE

Nickel needs to be present in amounts of several per cent.,

say two to five, and occurs either alone or with copper. Cobalt

is always with it in small amounts. Platinum occurs in exceed-

ingly small percentages. It is almost all obtained from gravels —

in Russia, and the gravels yielded in 1899 according to C. W. —

Purington about forty cents to the yard, platinum being quoted ~

in that year at $15 to $18 per ounce. There was, therefore,

in the gravels about one fortieth ounce in the yard, or one

sixtieth in a ton, or about 5.5 hundred thousandths of a per cent,

Platinum in some rocks has been found in amounts of one

twentieth to one half ounce, or from 16 hundred.thousandths to

16 ten thousandths of one per cent., but they are rare and

peculiar types.

In order to be salable manganese ores of themselves must yield

about 50 per cent., but if iron is also present they may be as

low as 4o. Chromium has but one ore, and it must contain

about 40 per cent. Of antimony, arsenic, and cobalt it is

hardly possible to speak, since, except perhaps in the case of

the first, they are unimportant by-products in the metallurgy

of other ores.

In summary it may be stated that in the ores the metals

must be present in the following amounts:

Percentage in Ores. Ounces to Ton. Percentage in Earth’s Crust.

Tron, 35-65 A sop

Copper, 2-10 .0000X

Lead, 7-50 .0000X

Zinc, 25—60 .0000X

Silver, 1/12-1/150 2-25 .000000.X,

Gold, 1/300-1/6j000 1/20—-1 .0000000X

Tin, 1-3 .000X—.0000.X

Aluminum, 30 8.13

Nickel, 2-5 Ott

Manganese, 50 .07

Chromium, 40 OM

We now have before us some fundamental conceptions from

which as a point of departure we may set out upon the real

discussion of the subject. We understand the gross composition

of the outer earth; we have some idea of the quantitative distri-

bution of the metals in the rocks, especially in the richer in-

stances; finally we have seen the extent to which they must

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 641

_ be concentrated in order that they may be objects of mining.

_ The next step is to establish first the agent or solvent which

ean effect the collection of the sparsely distributed metals,

and second the places where the precipitation of them takes

place. We may then inquire more particularly into the source

of the agent and the methods of its operation. In order to

do this in the time at command I must remorselessly focus

attention on the larger and essential features, resolutely avoiding

every side issue or minor point, however inviting.

The one solvent which is sufficiently abundant is water,

and practically all observers are agreed that for the vast majority

of ore deposits it has been the vehicle of concentration. Of

course it need not operate alone. On the contrary easily

dissolved and ever-present materials, like alkalies, may and

undoubtedly do increase its efficiency. It does not operate

necessarily as cold water. On the contrary, we all know that the

earth grows hotter as we go down, so that descending waters,

could not go far without feeling this influence. Volcanoes,

too, indicate to us that there are localities where heat is developed

in enormous amounts and not far below the surface. There

is, therefore, no lack of heat, and we need only be familiar with

the Western country to know that there is no lack of hot springs

when we take a comprehensive view. As solvents, hot waters

are sO incomparably superior to cold waters that they appeal

to us strongly. We may, therefore, take it as well established

that water is the vehicle. The chemical compounds which

constitute the ores naturally differ widely in solubility, and no

sweeping statements can be made regarding them. Iron,

for example, yields very soluble salts and is widely, one might

almost say universally, distributed in ordinary waters. Its

ores are compounds of the metal with oxygen and in this respect

it differs from nearly all others, which are mostly combined

with sulphur. Although almost all of them have oxidized

compounds, the latter are on the whole very subordinate con-

tributors to our furnaces. ;

Iron is everywhere present in the rocks, and when exposed

to the natural reagents it is one of their most vulnerable elements.

It, therefore, presents few difficulties in the way of solution

642 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE

and concentration by waters which circulate on or near the

surface and which perform their reactions under our eyes. .

The compounds of copper, lead, zinc, silver, nickel, cobalt, —

quicksilver, antimony, and arsenic with sulphur present more ~

difficult problems and ones into whose chemistry it is impossible

to enter here in any thorough way; but in general it may be

said that the solutions were probably hot, that they were in

some cases alkaline, in others acid, and that the pressure under

which they took up the metals in the depths has been an impor-

tant factor in the process. The loss of heat and pressure as

they rose toward the surface no doubt aided in an important

way in the result.

The first condition for the production of an ore-deposit

is a waterway. It may be a small crack, or a large fracture,

or a porous stratum, but in some such formit must exist. Natur-

ally porous rock affords the simplest case, and provides an easily

understood place of precipitation. For example, in the decade

of the seventies rather large mines at Silver Reef in southern

Utah were based upon an open-textured sandstone into which,

and along certain lines, silver-bearing solutions had entered.

Wherever they met a fossil leaf or an old stick of wood which

had been buried in the rock the dissolved silver was precipitated

as sulphide or chloride. Sometimes for no apparent reason

the solutions impregnated the rock with ore, but the ore seems

to follow along certain lines of fracturing. Again at Silver

Cliff, near Rosita in central Colorado, the silver solutions had

evidently at one time soaked through a bed of porous volcanic

ash, and had impregnated it with ore, which while it lasted

was quarried out like so much rock. In the copper district

of Keweenaw Point on Lake Superior, the copper-bearing solu-

tions have penetrated in some places an old gravel bed and

impregnated it with copper; in other places they have passed

along certain courses in vesicular lava flows, and have yielded

up to the cavities scales and shoots of native copper.

It has happened at times that the ore-bearing solutions,

rising through some crevice, have met a stratum charged with

lime, and having spread sideways have apparently been robbed

of their, metals: because the lime precipitated the valuable

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 643

minerals. In the Black Hills of South Dakota there are sand-

stones with beds of calcareous mud rocks in them. Solutions

bringing gold have come up through insignificant-looking

crevices called “‘verticals’” and have impregnated these mud

rocks with long shoots of valuable gold ores. In prospecting in

a promising locality the miner, knowing the systematic arrange-

ment of the verticals, and having found the lime-shales, drifts

along in them, following a crevice in the hope of breaking into

ore. The very extended and productive shoots of lead-silver

ores at Leadville, Colo., which have been vigorously and con-

tinuously mined since 1877, are found in limestone and usually

just underneath sheets of a relatively impervious eruptive rock.

They run for long distances and suggest uprising solutions

which followed along beneath the eruptive, perhaps checked

by it, so that they have replaced the limestone with ore. The

limestone must have been a vigorous precipitant of the metallic

minerals.

The fracture itself up through which the waters rise may be

of considerable size and thus furnish a resting-place for the ore

and gangue, as the associated barren mineral is called. A

deposit then results which affords a typical fissure vein. The

commonest filling is quartz, but at times a large variety of

minerals may be present and sometimes in beautifully sym-

metrical arrangement. In the latter case the uprising waters

have first coated each wall with a layer. They have then

changed in composition and have deposited a later and different

one, and so on until the crack has become filled. Often cavities

are left at the centre or sides and are lined with beautiful and

shining crystals, which flash and sparkle in the rays of a lamp,

like so many gems. There are quartz veins in California which

are mined for gold and which seem to have filled clean-cut

crevices, wall to wall, for several feet across. More often there

is evidence of decided chemical action upon the walls, which

may be impregnated with the ore and gangue for some distance

away from the fissure. As the source of supply is left, however,

the impregnation becomes less and less rich, and finally fades

out into barren wall-rock. The enrichment of the walls varies

also from point to point, since where the rock is tight the solu-

644 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE

tions can not spread laterally, but where it is open the impregna-

tion may be extensive. The miner has, therefore, to allow

for swells and pinches in his ore.

Of even greater significance than the lateral enrichment is

the peculiar arrangement of the valuable ore in a vein that

may itself be continuous for long distances although in most

places too barren for mining. Cases are, indeed, known in which

profitable vein matter has been taken out continuously for

perhaps a mile along the strike, but they are relatively rare.

The usual experience reveals the ore running diagonally down

in the vein filling, and more often than not following the polished

grooves in the walls which are called slickensides, and which indi-

cate the direction taken by one wall when it moved on the other

during the formation of the fracture. The rich places may

terminate in depth as well, and again may be repeated, but

they must be anticipated, and for them allowance must be made

in any mining operation.

Ores, therefore, gather along subterranean water-ways.

They may fill clean-cut fissures, wall to wall; they may impreg-

nate porous wall-rocks on either side; they may even entirely re-

place soluble rocks like limestones.

We may now raise the question as to the source of the water

which accomplishes these results and the further question as to

the cause of its circulations.

The nature of the underground waters which are instrumental

in filling the veins presents one of the most interesting, if not

the most interesting, phase of the problem and one upon which

attention has been especially concentrated in later years. The

crucial point of the discussion relates to the relative importance

of the two kinds of ground-waters, the magmatic, or those from

the molten igneous rocks, and the meteoric, or those derived

from the rains. The magmatic waters are not phenomena of

the daily life and observation of the great majority of civilized

peoples, and for this reason they have not received the attention

that otherwise would have fallen to their share. Relatively

few geologists have the opportunity to view volcanoes in active

eruption, and have but disproportionate conceptions of the

clouds and clouds of watery vapor which they emit. The

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 645

enormous volume has, however, been brought home to us in

recent years, with great force, by the outbreak of Mont Pelé, and

we of this academy, thanks to the efforts of our fellow-member,

Dr. E. O. Hovey of the American Museum of Natural History,

have had them placed very vividly before us. It is on the whole

not surprising that to the meteoric waters most observers in

the past have turned for the chief, if not the only, agent. I

will, therefore, first present, as fully as the time admits and as

fairly as I may, this older view which still has perhaps the

larger number of adherents.

Except in the arid districts rain falls more or less copiously

upon the surface of the earth. The largest portion of it runs

off in the rivers; the smallest portion evaporates while on the

surface, and the intermediate part sinks into the ground, urged

on by gravity, and joins the ground-waters. Where crevices

of considerable cross-section exist, they conduct the water

below in relatively large quantity. Shattered or porous rock

will do the same, and we know that open-textured sandstones

dipping down from their outcrops and flattening in depth lead

water to artesian reservoirs in vast quantity. As passages and

crevices grow smaller, the friction on the walls increases and

the water moves with greater and greater difficulty. When

the passage grows very small, movement practically ceases.

The flow of water through pipes is a very old matter of investi-

gation, and all engineers who deal with problems of water

supply for cities or with the circulation of water for any of its

countless applications in daily life must be familiar with its

laws. Friction is such an important factor that only by the

larger natural crevices can the meteoric waters move downward

in any important quantity or very appreciable velocity. They

do sink, of course, and come to comparative rest at greater or

less distance from the surface and yield the supplies of under-

ground water upon which we draw.

The section of the rocks which stands between the surface

and the ground-water is the arena of active change and is that

part of the earth’s crust in which the meteoric waters exercise

their greatest effect. Rocks within this zone are in constant

process of decay and disintegration. Oxidation, involving

646 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE

the production of sulphuric acid from the natural metallic

sulphides, is actively in progress. Carbonic acid enters also

with the meteoric waters. The rocks are open in texture

and favorably situated for maximum change. From this zone

we can well imagine that all the finely divided metallic par-

ticles which are widely and sparsely distributed in the rocks

go into solution and tend to migrate downward into the quiet

and relatively motionless ground-water. If the acid solutions

escape the precipitating action of some alkaline reagent such

as limestone they may even reach the ground-waters, and

their dissolved burdens may be contributed to this reservoir,

but the greater portion seems to be deposited at the level

of the ground-water itself or at moderate distances below it.

Impressed by these phenomena, which present a true cause of

solution, and influenced by their familiar and everyday char-

acter, we may build up on the basis of them a general concep-

tion of the source of the metallic minerals dissolved in those

aqueous solutions which are recognized by all to be the agents

for the filling of the veins.

Let us now focus attention on the ground-water. This

saturates the rocks, fills the crevices, and forces the miner who

sinks his shaft to pump, much against his natural inclination.

The vast majority of mines are of no great depth, and the

natural conclusion of our earlier observers, based on this expe-

rience, has been that the ground-waters extend downward,

saturating the strata of the earth to the limit of possible cavi-

ties, distances which vary from 1,000 to more than 30,000

feet. To this must be added another familiar phenomenon.

The interior temperature of the earth increases at a fairly

definite ratio of about one degree Fahrenheit for each 60-100

feet of descent. In round numbers, if we start with a place

of the climatic conditions of New York—that is, with a mean

annual temperature of about 51°, we should on descending

10,000 feet below the surface find a temperature of about 212°,

and if we go still deeper it would be still greater. Of course,

under the burden of the overlying column of water, the actual

boiling points for the several depths would be greater, and

it is a question whether the increase of temperature would

aha

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 647

Overcome the increase of pressure and the consequent rise

of the boiling point, so as to convert this water into steam,

cause great increase in its elasticity, decrease in its specific

gravity, and thereby promote circulations. At all events,

the rise in temperature would cause expansion of the liquid,

would disturb equilibrium, and to this degree would promote

circulations.

There is one other possible motive power. The meteoric

waters enter the rocky strata of the globe at elevated points,

sink downward, meet the ground-water at altitudes above the

neighboring valleys, and establish thereby what we call head.

In consequence they often yield springs. If we imagine the

head to be effective to considerable depths we have again the

deep-seated waters under pressure, which after their long and

devious journey through the rocks may cause them to rise

elsewhere as springs. The head may in small degree be aided

by the expansion of the uprising heated column whose specific

gravity is thereby lowered as compared with the descending

colder column.

May we now draw all these facts and supposed or assumed

phenomena into one whole?

The descending meteoric waters become charged with dis-

solved earthy and metallic minerals in their downward, their

deep-seated lateral, and perhaps also at the beginning of their

heated uprising journey. They are urged on by the head of

the longer and colder descending column and by the interior

heat. They gather together from many smaller channels.

into larger issuing trunk channels. They rise from regions

of heat and pressure which favor solution, into colder regions

of precipitation and crystallization. They deposit in these

upper zones their burden of dissolved metallic and earthy miner-

als and yield thus the veins from which the miner draws his ore.

This conception is based on phenomena of which the greater

part are the results of everyday experience. It is attractive,

reasonable, and is on the whole the one which has been most

trusted in the past. Doubtless it has the widest circle of adher-

ents to-day. It is, however, open to certain grave objections

which are gaining slow but certain support. ;

648 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE

The conception of the extent of the ground-water in depth,

for example, is flatly opposed to our experience in those hith- —

erto few but yearly increasing deep mines which go below

1,500 Or 2,000 feet. Wherever deep shafts are located in regions

other than those of expiring but not dead volcanic action, they

have passed through the ground-water, and if this is carefully

impounded in the upper levels of the mines, and not allowed to

follow the workings downward, it is found that there is not

only less and less water but that the deep levels are often dry

and dusty. Along this line of investigation, Mr. John W. Finch,

recently the State Geologist of Colorado, has reached the con-

clusion after wide experience with deep mines that the ground-

waters are limited, in the usual experience, to about 1,000 feet.

from the surface and that only the upper layer of this is in

motion and available for springs.

Artesian wells do extend in many cases to depths much

greater than this and bring supplies of water to the surface,

but their very existence implies waters impounded and in a

state of rest.

To this objection that the ground-waters are shallow it has

been replied that when the veins were being formed the rocks

were open-textured and admitted of circulation, but subsequently

the cavities and waterways became plugged by the deposition

of minerals by a process technically called cementation and,

the supply being cut off, they now appear dry. There must,

however, in order to make the “‘head”’ effective have once

been a continuous column of water which introduced the mate-

rials for cementation. It is at least difficult to understand

how a process which could only progress by the introduction

of material in very dilute solution should by the agency of

crystallization drive out the only means of its production.

Some residue of water must necessarily remain locked up in

the partially cemented rock. This residue we, of course, do

not find where rocks are dry and drifts are dusty. In many

cases also, where deep cross-cuts have penetrated the fresh

wall-rock of mines, cementation if present has been so slight as

to escape detection.

If we once admit that this conclusion is well based, it removes

Pe Ae ae ee ee

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 649

the very foundation from beneath the conception of the meteoric

waters and tumbles the whole structure in a heap of ruins.

While I would not wish to positively make so sweeping a

statement as this about a question involving so many uncer-

tainties, there is nevertheless a growing conviction among a

not inconsiderable group of geologists that the rocky crust of

the earth is much tighter and less open to the passage of descend-

ing waters than has been generally believed; and that the

phenomena of springs, which have so much influenced conclu-

sions in the past, affect only a comparatively shallow, overlying

section. Such phenomena of cementation as we see are probably

in large part due to the action of water stored up by the sedi-

ments when originally deposited and carried down by them

with burial. Under pressure a relatively small amount of water

may be an important vehicle for recrystallization.

It has been assumed in the above presentation of the case

of the meteoric waters that they are able to leach out of the

deep-seated wall-rocks the finely disseminated particles of

the metallic minerals, but the conviction has been growing in

my own mind that we have been inclined to overrate the prob-

ability of this action in our discussions. In the first place

our knowledge of the presence of the metals in the rocks them-

selves is based upon the assay of samples almost always gathered

from exposures in mining districts. The rock has been sought

in as fresh and unaltered a condition as possible, and endeavors

have been made to guard against the possible introduction of

the metallic contents by those same waters which have filled

the neighboring veins. But if we admit or assume that the

assay values are original in the rock, and, in case the, latter is

igneous, if we believe that the metallic minerals have crystal-

lized out with the other bases from the molten magma, we are

yet confronted with the fact that their very presence and detec-

tion in the rock shows that they have escaped leaching even

though they occur in a district where underground circulations

have been especially active. From the results which we have

in hand it is quite as justifiable to argue that the metals in

the rocks are proof against the leaching action of underground

circulations as that they fall victims to it. These considera-

650 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE

tions tend to restrict the activities of the meteoric waters to

the vadose region as Posepny calls it, i.e., that belt of the rocks

which stands between the permanent water-level and the sur-

face. Within it is an active area of solution, as we have all

recognized for many years, but, as previously stated, experience

shows that the metals which go into solution in it strongly tend

to precipitate at or not far below the water-level itself.

It is of interest, however, to seek some quantitative expression

of the problem, and the assays given above furnish the necessary —

data.

I have taken the values of the several metals which have been

found by the assays of what were in most cases believed to be

normal wall-rocks, selecting those of igneous nature because

experience shows them to be the richest. The percentages

have been turned into pounds of the metal per ton of rock;

this latter value has then been recast into pounds of the most

probable natural compound or mineral.in each case. I have

next calculated the volume of a cube corresponding to the last

weight, and by extracting its cube root have found the length

of the edge of such cube. If now we assume a rock of a specific

gravity of 2.70, which is a fair average value, and allow it 11

to 12 cubic feet to the ton, or say 20,000 cubic imehesiecme

edge of the cube-ton will be 27.14 inches. The ratio of the

edge of the cube of metallic mineral to the edge of the cube-ton

of enclosing rock will give us an idea of the chance that a crack

large enough to form a solution-water-way will have of inter-

secting that amount of contained metallic mineral. Of course

in endeavoring to establish this quantitative conception I realize

that the metallic mineral is not in one cube, and that through

a cube-ton of rock more than one crack passes; but I assume

that the fineness of division of the metallic mineral practically

keeps pace with the lessening width and close spacing of the

crevices. It is also realized that the shape of the minerals is

not cubical. I am convinced from microscopic study of rocks

and the small size of the metallic particles that their subdivision

certainly keeps pace with any conceivable solution-cracks, and

that no great error is involved in the first assumption made.

The sides of a cube represent three planes which intersect at

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 651

right angles and which are mathematically equivalent to any

series of planes intersecting at oblique angles. Hence if we

consider as cubes the subdivisions formed in our rock mass

by any series of intersecting cracks, there are three sets of

planes, any one of which might intersect the cube of ore. We

must, therefore, multiply the ratio of probability that any single

set will intersect it by three in order to have the correct expres-

sion. The chance that a crack, of the width of the cubic edge

of the enclosed mineral, will strike that cube is given by the

ratios in the last column, which ratios I assume hold good with

increasing fineness of subdivision both of metallic minerals and

of cracks.

a . a Ey . .

2 3 A 'g

E ae aie |

g d ee Bm Ha

ss & 8 ° b og 3

ra a 5 0 9

He) u & iS S} oF =

+ a Ss) 6) 5 ae S

n o Cal

s) e alee 5 2 2

5 5 3 ake a 3 3

Au Ay Ay a a 64 m4

Copper. | .o09 .18 minal = ead) eS 1/18 1/6

Galena.

Lead. .OOLI O22 .025 .092 oA | Oe) |) 0/AO

.008 .16 . 186 .700 . 89 0/2 a r/To

.004 .08 .002 -340 oI 1/39 1/13

Zincblende.

Zinc. .0048 .096 .128 .go 97 1/35 1/12

.009 .180 2 OM ne OO ey 1/21 1/7

Argentite.

Silver. | .00007 | .0014 | .co16~=—_.006 18 | 1/148 | 1/49

OOO 50) 50032) ||) 0027 .O14 24 m/e || Sh//eNs)

(0)

Gold. .00002 | .0004 | .0004 .00005 O35 | a/eng | R/itoA

.00004 | .0008 | .0008 .00130 sHeQ) | m/adioy 1 17/38

From the table it is evident that the chances vary from a

maximum in the case of copper of one in six through various

intermediate values to a minimum for gold of one in over one

hundred. This is equivalent to saying that, with cracks whose

total width bears the same relation to the width of the rock

mass as is borne by the diameter of the particle of ore, the

chance of crossing a particle varies from one in six to one in

one hundred. Or we may say that with cracks of this spacing

652 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE

from one sixth to one hundredth of the contained metallic —

mineral might be leached out.! When, therefore, as is often

the case in monographs upon the geology of a mining district,

inferences are drawn as to the possibility of deriving the ore

of a vein by the leaching of wall-rocks whose metallic contents

have been proved by assay, the total available contents ought

to be divided by a number from six to one hundred if the above

reasoning is correct. This diminution will tend to modify in

an important manner our belief in the probability of such

processes as have been hitherto advocated. We may justly

raise the following questions: How closely set, as a matter

of fact, are the cracks which are large enough to furnish solution

water-ways in the above rocks, and can we reach any definite

conception regarding their distribution? Some quantitative

idea of the relations may be obtained from the tests of the

recorded absorptive capacity of the igneous rocks which are

employed as building stone. G. P. Merrill in his valuable work

on Stones for Building and Decoration, pp. 459, has given

these values for thirty-three granites and four diabases and

gabbros. They vary for the granites from a maximum of

one twentieth to a minimum of one seven hundred and fourth.

I have averaged them all and have obtained one two hundred

and thirty-seventh asthe result. That is, if we take a cubic inch

of granite and thoroughly dry it, it will absorb water up to

one two hundred and thirty-seventh of its weight. The volume

of this water indicates the open spaces or voids in the stone.

The average of the specific gravities of the thirty-three granites

is 2.647. If, by the aid of this value, we turn our weight of water

into volume we find that its volume is one ninetieth that of

the rock. For the four diabases and gabbros, similarly treated,

the ratio of absorption is one three hundred and tenth; the

specific gravity is 2.776 and the ratio of volume one one hundred

and tenth. We can express all this more intelligibly by saying

—

1 With regard to the flow of waters through crevices and the relation

of the flow to varying diameters or widths, a very lucid statement will

be found in President C. R. Van Hise’s valuable paper in the Transactions

of the American Institute of Mining Engineers, XXX, 41, and in his

monograph on Metamorphism.

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 653

that, if we assume a cube of granite and if we combine all its

cavities into one crack passing through it, parallel to one of

its sides, the width of the crack will be to the edge of the cube

as 1 to go. In the diabases and gabbros, similarly treated,

the ratio will be 1 to rr0. These values are very nearly the

same as the average of the ratios of the edges of the cubes of

rock and ore given in the table on p. 226, it being xz to 104.

We may conclude, therefore, that in so far as we can check

the previous conclusion by experimental data it is not far from

the truth.

It may be stated that the porphyritic igneous rocks which have

furnished nearly all the samples for the above analyses are as

a tule extremely dense, and that their absorptive capacity

is more nearly that of the compact granites than the open-

textured ones. It is highly improbable that underground water

circulates through these rocks to any appreciable degree except

along cracks which have been produced in the mechanical way

either by contraction in cooling and crystallizing, or by faulting

and earth movements. The cracks from faulting afte very

limited in extent and in the greater number of our mining

districts they affect but narrow belts, small fractions of the

total. Of the cracks from cooling and crystallizing those of

us who have seen rock faces in cross-cuts and drifts under-

ground, where excavations have been driven away from the

veins proper, can form some idea, if we eliminate the shattering

due to blasting. My own impression is that in rocks a thousand

feet or so below the surface such cracks are rather widely spaced,

and that, when checked in a general way by the ratios just

given, these rocks are decidedly unfavorable materials from

which the slowly moving meteoric ground-waters (if such exist)

may extract such limited and finely distributed contents of the

metals.

I have also endeavored to check the conclusions by the

recorded experience in cyaniding gold ores in which fine crushing

is so important, and I can not resist the conviction that we

have been inclined to believe the leaching of compact and

subterranean masses of rock a much easier and more probable

process than the attainable data warrant.

654 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE

As soon, however, as we deal with the open-textured frag- —

mental sediments and volcanic tuffs and breccias the permea- —

bility is so enhanced as to make their leaching a comparatively

simple matter. Yet, so far as the available data go, they are

poor in the metals or else are open to the suspicion of secondary

impregnation. They certainly have been seldom, if ever,

selected by students of mining regions as the probable source

of the metals in the veins.

Should the above objections to the efficiency of the meteoric

waters seem to be well established, or at least to have weight,

it follows that the arena where they are most, if not chiefly,

effective is the vadose region, between the surface and the level

of the ground-water. Undoubtedly from this section they take -

the metals into solution and carry them down. But itis equally

true that they lose a large part of this burden, especially in the

case of copper, lead, and zinc, at or near the level of the ground-

water and are particularly efficient in the secondary enrichment

of already formed but comparatively lean ore-bodies.

Let us now turn to the magmatic waters. That the floods of

lava which reach the surface are heavily charged with them,

there is no doubt. So heavily charged are they that Professor

Edouard Suess, of Vienna, and our fellow-member Professor

Robert T. Hill, of New York, have seen reason for the conclu-

sion that even the oceanic waters have in the earlier stages of

the earth’s history been derived from volcanoes rather than,

in accordance with the old belief, volcanoes derive their steam

from downward percolating sea-water. From vents like Mont

Pelée, which in periods of explosive outbreaks yield no molten

lava, the vapors rise in such volume that cubic miles become

our standards of measurement.

There is no reason to believe that many of the igneous rocks

which do not reach the surface are any less rich, and when they

rise so near to the upper world that their emissions may attain

the surface, we must assign to the resulting waters a very

important part in the underground economy.

This general question has attracted more attention in Europe’

in recent years as regards hot springs than in America. So

many health resorts and watering places are located upon them

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 655

that they are very important foundations of local institutions

and profitable enterprises. Professor Suess, whom I have

earlier cited, delivered an address a few years ago at an anni-

versary celebration in Carlsbad, Bohemia, in which he stated

that Rosiwal, who had studied the Carlsbad district, could not

detect any agreement between the run of the rainfall and the

outflow of the springs, and that both the unvarying composition

and amount through wet seasons and dry were opposed to

a meteoric source. Water, therefore, from subterranean igneous

rocks, well known to exist in the locality, was believed to be

the source of the springs. The same general line of investigation

has led Dr. Rudolf Delkeskamp, of Giessen, and other observers

to similar conclusions for additional springs, so that magmatic

waters have assumed a prominence in this respect which leaves

little doubt as to their actual development and importance.

All familiar with Western and Southwestern mining regions

know, as a matter of experience, that the metalliferous veins are

almost always associated with intrusive rocks, and that in very

many cases the period of ore formation can be shown to have

followed hard upon the entrance of the eruptive. The conclu-

sion has, therefore, been natural and inevitable that the mag-

_ matic waters have been, if not the sole vehicle of introduction,

yet the preponderating one.

With regard to their emission from the cooling and crystal-

lizing mass of molten material we are not, perhaps, entirely clear

or well established in our thought. So long as the mass is at

high temperatures the water is potentially present as dissociated

hydrogen and oxygen. We are not well informed as to just

what is the chemical behavior of these gases with regard to the

elements of the metallic minerals. Hydrochloric acid gas is

certainly a widely distributed associate. If, as seems probable,

these gases can serve, alone or with other elements, as vehicles

for the removal of the constituents of the ores and the gangue,

the possibilities of ubiquitous egress are best while the igneous

rock is entirely or largely molten. In part even the pheno-

mena of crystallization of the rock-forming minerals themselves

may be occasioned by the loss of the dissolved gases. Through

molten and still fluid rock the gases might bubble outward if

656 RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE

the pressure were insufficient to restrain them and would, were

their chemical powers sufficient, have opportunity to take up

even sparsely distributed metals.

On the other hand if their emission, as seems more provable, —

is in largest part a function of the stage of solidification and

takes place gradually while the mass is congealing, or soon ~

whose ratio to the entire mass would be similar to those given

above. They might have, and probably do have, an enhanced

ability to dissolve out in a searching and thorough manner the

finely distributed metallic particles as compared with relatively

cold meteoric waters which might later permeate the rock; but

as regards the problem of leaching, the general relations of

crevices to mass are much the same for both, and it holds also

true that the discovery of the metals by assay of igneous rocks

proves that all the original contents have not been taken, by

either process.

We may, however, consider an igneous mass of rock as the

source of the water even if not of the ores’and gangue, and

then we have a well-established reservoir for this solvent in a

highly heated condition and at the necessary depths within the

earth. Both from its parent mass and from the overlying rocks

traversed by it, it may take the metals and gangue.

In the upward and especially in the closing journey, meteoric

waters may mingle with the magmatic, and as temperatures

and pressures fall, the precipitation of dissolved burdens takes

place and our ore-bodies are believed to result. Gradually the

source of water and its store of energy become exhausted;

circulations die out and the period of vein-formation, com-

paratively brief, geologically speaking, closes. Secondary en-

richment through the agency of the meteoric waters alone

remains to influence the character of the deposit of ore. In

brief, and so far as the process of formation of our veins in the

Western mining districts is concerned, this is the conception

which has been gaining adherents year by year and which, on

the whole, most fully accords with our observed geologic rela-

tions. It accords with them, I may add, in several other im-

portant particulars upon which I have not time to dwell.

— ee

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 657

In closing I may state that, speculative and uncertain as our

solution of the problem of the metalliferous veins may seem, it

yet is involved in a most important way with the practical

opening of the veins and with our anticipations for the future

production of the metals. Every intelligent manager, superin-

tendent or engineer must plan the development work of his mine

with some conception of the way in which his ore-body originated,

and even if he alternates, or lets his mind play lightly from

waters meteoric to waters magmatic, over this problem he must

ponder. On its scientific side and to an active and reflective

mind it is no drawback that the problem is yet in some respects

elusive and that its solution is not yet a matter of mathematical

demonstration. In science the solved problems lose their inter-

est; it is the undecided ones that attract and call for all the

resources which the investigator can bring to bear upon them.

Among those problems which are of great practical importance,

which enter in a far-reaching way into our national life and

which irresistibly rivet the attention of the observer, there is none

with which the problem of the metalliferous veins suffers by

comparison.

SPECIAL INDEXES TO Part I, ArtTicLeE I.

Per POGEROGRAPHICAL SKETCH OF THE

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF THE COASTAL

PLAIN OF GEORGIA.

PLANT NAMES.

This index is intended to be complete as far as families, species, and

varieties are concerned, but generic names are not indexed separately,

except in cases where a statement is made which refers to several or all

of the species of a genus and no particular species is mentioned, and

in the case of generic synonyms in the catalogue of species.

The names of families are printed in small capitals, and those of genera

and species in ordinary lower-case, except where the generic name or

all the specific names cited under it are synonyms, in which case italics

are used. All specific names of synonyms are printed in italics (whether

the generic name is or not), and those of accepted species in Roman.

The names of genera and species not members of this flora (mentioned

on page 330 and elsewhere) are enclosed in parentheses, and common

names in quotations. No typographical distinction is made here between

native and introduced species, but all but one or two of the latter may

be recognized by the fact that they are first referred to on page 114 or

II5.

Figures in heavy type after the name of a family refer to the pages

in the catalogue of species where its representatives in the region are

listed, and after that of a species, to the page where its bibliography and

distribution are given. Figures in parentheses refer to pages where the

species in question is inadvertently mentioned under a different name,

usually on account of recent changes in nomenclature.

This index contains about 1550 subject entries and 4000 page-references.

Of about 875 valid species (including weeds) listed, 82 are mentioned

only once, and their status in the region may be regarded as doubtful;

318 are mentioned only twice, and more information about most of

these is needed; 474 are mentioned more than twice; 283 more than 3

times; 156 more than 4 times; 91 more than 5 times; 61 more than 6

times, and so on, ending with two mentioned 22 times, one 23, and one

24 times, the last four being trees. The average species is mentioned

34 times.

R. M. H.

ACANTHACES, 160 Achillea millefolium, 114, 135

Acanthospermum australe, 114, | Actinospermum, 340

T16, 41, 392 angustifolium, 84, 98, 137

Acer, 330 Adelia acuminata, 72, 180, 332

rubrum, 63, 67, 69, 71, 74,110, | (Adiantum), 329 _

206, 249, 314, 329, 331 Adopogon Carolinianus, 133

ACERACE, 206 4éschynomene Virginica, 221

659

660

ALSCULACE, 206

Aisculus Pavia, 103, 206, 332

Afzelia cassioides, 42, 51, 57, 162

pectinata, 48, 84, 162

Agave Virginica, 258

Agrimonia sp., 230

AIZOACEZ, 242

Aldenella, 340

tenuifolia, 86, 98, 235

“ Alder,’ 250

Aletris aurea, 56, 259

(farinosa?), 47, 250

lutea, 51, 58, 250

lutea X obovata (259)

obovata, 51, 250

ALG, 322

ALISMACE2, 303-304

Allium Cuthbertii, 42, 262

striatum, 262

Alnus rugosa, 63, 94, 104, 113, 250,

333

Alternanthera achyrantha, 243

repens, 115, 243

AMARANTHACES, 243

AMARYLLIDACEA, 25'7—-258

Ambrosia artemisizfolia, 114, 152

AMBROSIACEA, 116, 152

Amelanchier Canadensis, 98, 100,

103, 230, 332

SP-, 230) 332

Amianthium angustifolium,. 263

letmanthoides, 262

Amorpha fruticosa, 70,

332

herbacea, 45, 222, 332

Ampelopsis arborea, 72, 205, 333

Amsonia ciliata, 48, I75

ciliata filafolaa, 175

tigida, 76, 80, 123, 175

(tabernemontana), 123

tenuifolia, 48, 84, 1'75

ANACARDIACEA, 210-211

Anantherix, 339

connivens, 57, 173

pumila, 175

Anastrophus compressus, 115, 290

paspaloides, 72, 299

Anchistea Virginica, 57, 64, 76, 82,

91, 96, 311

Andropogon, 327, 328

corymbosus, 58, 301

furcatus, 47, 300

Mohrii, 58, 301

nutans, 300

Nuttallit, 302

scoparius, 301

secundum, 300

Hn 22k

— -

SPECIAL INDEX.

tener, 42, 160, 301, 306

Tracyi (?), 57, 301

Virginicus, 301

Angelica dentata, 46, 53, 85, 180

ANONACE, 239-240

Antheenantia rufa, 56, 299

villosa, 46, 86, 298

Anthemis cotula, 114, 135

Anthoceros Carolinianus, 318

Apios tuberosa, 64, 92, 218, 333

APOCYNACEZ, 175

(Apteria), 256

AQUIFOLIACE2, 207-209

ARACES, 271

Aralia spinosa, 103, III, IQI, 332

ARALIACE, IOI

Archilejeunea clypeata, 68, 318

Arenaria brevifolia, 42, 43, 122, 241,

a307

Caroliniana, 84, 98, 240

(lanuginosa), 330

SQUuarrosa, 240

Ariseema triphyllum 111, 271

Aristida Combsi, 295

condensata, 85, 295

Mohrii (?), (86), 205

palustris, 76, 79, 205

Spiciformis, 51, 90, 95, 204

stricta, 45, (48), 49, 84, 205,

329

virgata, (85), 205

Aristolochia serpentaria, 104, 245

ARISTOLOCHIACE, 245

Arnica acaulis, 135

Aronia arbutifolia, 55, 63, 65, 67,

Q1, 230) 332

Arundinaria tecta, 58, 289

Sp., 72, 110, 289

(Asarum), 329

ASCLEPIADACE2, 173-175

Asclepias, 327, 328

amplexicaulis, 174

cinerea, 46, 51, 173

humistrata, 46, 82, 84, 87, 174,

396

lanceolata, 58, 64, 67, 174

Michauxii, 52, 173

perennis, 72, 173

tuberosa, 46, 86, 174

variegata, 104, 174

verticillata, 82, 86, 173

Ascyrum pumilum, 42, 46, 52, 204

stans, 55, 204, 332

“Ash,” 180

Prickly, 191

Asimina angustifolia, 45, 83, 240,

333

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA.

Asimina—Continued

Parvinora, O8, OO; 1O3, IIT,

239) 321, 333

Speciosa, 45, 51, 84, 230) 333

Asplenium Filix-foemina, 104, 311

platyneuron, 104, 311

Aster, 147, 330

adnatus, 46, 52, 144, (147)

Collinst1, 144

eryngiifolius, 59, 144, (147)

squarrosus, 42, 46, 51, 74, 144,

(147)

Astreus hygrometricus, 86, 320

Astragalus glaber, 222

villosus, 223

Azalea candida, 42-44, 187, 332

nudiflora, 51, 104, 186, 332

viscosa, 55, 186, 332,

Baccharis halimifolia, 72, 73, 110,

T43) 332

Baldwinia, 61, 339

atropurpurea, 56, 138, 329, 338

uniflora, 46, 52, 57, 138, 329

“*Bamboo Vine,”’ 260

Baptisia, 49, 222

alba, 47, 226

lanceolata, 45, 52, 86, 225, 329

leucantha, 72, 226

perfoliata, 46, 48, 82, 84, 87,

2259 329

Bartonia lanceolata, 53, 57, 1'76

tenella brachiata, 176

Batodendron arboreum, 82, 83, 98—

TOO, 103, 105, 182, 332

Batrachospermum vagum kerato-

phytum, 92, 322

Batschia Carolinensis, 86, 1'70

““Bay,” 239; Red, 201; Sweet, 198;

White, 239

“Bayberry,” 252

Bazzania trilobata, 94, 319

“‘Bear-grass,” 261

“‘Beggar-lice,”” 220

Benzoin melissefolium, 95, 197, 332

(odoriferum), 330

BERBERIDACEA, 236

Berchemia scandens, 67, 70, 206,

333

Berlandiera pumila, 46, 85, 141

tomentosa, I41

““Bermuda Grass,” 292

Betula nigra, 69, 72, 251, 331

BETULACE, 250-251

Bidens bipinnata, 114, 138

Bignonia capreolata, 157

661

eiucigera, 67, 200, Tog; X57,

333

BIGNONIACEA, 157-158

ep bineh. aan

“Bitter Weed,” 136

“Blackberry,” 231

“Black Gum,” 193

“Black Haw,” 154

“ Black-Jack” (oak), 248

“Black Pine,” 306

‘““Black-Root,” 142

“Bloodroot,” 236

(Boehmeria), 329

(cylindrica), 330

Boerhavia erecta, 115, 242

Boletus Ananas, 321

Boltonia diffusa, 112, 145

BOMIESEE, Se

“Bonnets,” 237

BoRRAGINACE, I70

Botrychium obliquum, 111, 312

‘““Bottom White Pine,” 307

Brachelyma robustum, 70, 73, 315

Brachiaria digitarioides, 298

Bradburya Virginiana, 218, 333

Brasenia purpurea, 81, 238, 285

Breweria aquatica, 79, 80, 172, 292,

333

humistrata, 46, 84, 172, 333

“Brier-berry,” 231

BROMELIACEA, 265

‘“‘Broom-sedge,’”’ 301

Brunnichia cirrhosa, 16, 72, 245,

333

‘“‘Bryophytes, ” 126, 128, 313(—320),

323

Buchnera elongata, 47, 160

“Buckeye,” 206

‘“Bullace,” 205

Bumelia lanuginosa, 84, 100, 181,

(lycioides), 330

lyctoides reclinata, 181

reclinata, 84, 181, 332

Burmannia (biflora), 256

capitata, 56, 256

BURMANNIACEA, 256

‘*Button Bush, Button Willow,’’ 156

“Buttons, ” 267

Cacalia ovata, 134

CACTACES, 198

C4SALPINIACEZ, (226-227), 324,

335

Callicarpa Americana, 99, 103, III,

169, 332

662

Callirhoé Papaver, 204

Calophanes humistrata, 72, 160

oblongifolia, 46, 85, 160

(Calycothrix), 211

CAMPANULACEA, 153

Campulosus aromaticus, 52, 56, 292

““Cane,’”’ Maiden, 298

CAPPARIDACE, 235

CAPRIFOLIACEA, 153-154

Capriola Dactylon, 115, 292

‘“‘Cardinal Flower,”’ 152

Carduace@é, 133

Carduus Le Contei, 58, 134

revolutus, 134

spinosissimus, 134

Carex, 71, 74, 280, 327, 328, 334,

alata, 82, 273

bullata, 70, 72, 275

castanea, 275

Chapmani, 273

debilis, 70, 72, 273

Elliottii, 91, 94, 275

folliculata, 70,.2'75

australis, 275

fulva, 275

glaucescens, 64, 72,

_ 274

intumescens, 72, 275

macrokolea, 274

reniformis, 70, 72, 2'73

squarrosa, 73, 274

striata, 274

tenax, 86, 273

triceps, 70, 73, 273

turgescens, 57, 64, 275

venusta, 82, 2'73

Walteriana, 274

sp., 76, 82, 274

Carphephorus (corymbosus), 147

Pseudo-Liatris, 58, 14'7

tomentosus, 52, 147

Carpinus Caroliniana, 71, 251, 332

““Carrot,” 188

CARYOPHYLLACES, 89, 240-241

Cassia (Marilandica), 330

occidentalis, 115, 226

Tora, 115, 226

Cassine Caroliniana, 208

Castalia odorata, 82, 237, 238

Castanea alnifolia, 45, 51, 248, 250,

76, 80,

SSohiale

alnifolia pubescens, 250

nana, 250

pumila, 98, 100,

333

(Catalpa), 330

103, 250,

SPECIAL INDEX.

Ceanothus Americanus, 45, 84, 103,

206, 332

microphyllus, 45, 83, 206, 332

“Cedar, ” 308

CELASTRACEZ, 207

(Celtis), 329

Cenchrus tribuloides, 115, 295

Centella repanda, 56, 64, 76, 91, 96,

IQI

Cephalanthus occidentalis, 69, 72,

9, 81, 156, 332

Cephaloxys flabellata, 265

Cephalozia Virginiana, 68, 320

Ceranthera, 340

Ceratiola ericoides, 27, 98, 211, 332,

400

Ceratoschenus longirostris, 282

Cercis Canadensis, 103, 110, 226,

257, 331, 336

Chenolobus, ee

undulatus, 142

Chamelirium luteum, 48, 263

Chamerops acaulis, 272

Chaptalia integrifolia, 133

tomentosa, (52), 56, 133

CHENOPODIACEA, 244

Chenopodium ambrosioides,

244

anthelminticum (?), 244

“Cherry,” Wild, 228

Chimaphila maculata, 112, 187

‘“‘Chinquapin,” 250

Chionanthus Virginica,

179, 332

Chlenobolus, 142

Cholisma ferruginea, 51, 83, 90, 99,

184, 248, 332

ferruginea fruticosa, 184, 332

ligustrina, 67, 184, 332

sp., 55, 184

Chondrocarpus, 191

Chondrophora nudata, 51, 55, 79,

146, 329

virgata, 42, 43, 146

Chrosperma muscetoxicum, 48, 263

Chrysobalanus oblongifolius, 45, 83,

228, 332, 380

Chrysoma pauciflocculosa, 82, 84,

86, 87, 146, 332

Chrysopogon secundus, 300

Chrysopsis gossypina, 85, 87, 146

graminifolia, 46, 52, 84, 147

CICHORIACEZ, 133) 324, 335

(Cicuta), 329

(Curtissii), 330

Cissus stans, 205

CISTACEZ, 200-201 .

its.

TOBs LOR

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA.

Clematis crispa, 65, 70, 240, 334

reticulata, 100, 240, 333

Cleome cuneifolia, 235

Clethra alnifolia, 55, 63, 67, 91, 188,

332

CLETHRACE, 188, 324

Cliftonia ligustrina, 209

monophylla, 55, 63, 67, 90, 91,

93,905) 122, 200, 210, 320,

332, 382

Clinopodium Carolinianum, 100,

TOF, UAB, UO, Bee

coccineum, 83, 86, 98, 168, 332

Georgianum, (100, 103, 123),

iy 167, (332)

Clitoria Mariana, 47, 85, 88, 218

“Clover,” Japan, 219; White, 224

“Cocklebur,” 152

“Coffee Weed,” 226

Coltricia parvula, 48, 321

COMMELINACE2, 2606-267

CoMPOSIT&, 39, 48, 49, 54, 61, 68,

78, 80, 81, 88, 89, 105, 112, 116,

133-151, 324-326, 334, 335

CONIFER, 68, 304-308

Conoclinium coelestinum, 72, 149

Conopholis Americana, 104, 158

Conradia, 162, 340

CONVOLVULACEA, 172

Coreopsis angustifolia, 56, (57),

delphinifolia, 47, 86, 138

lanceolata, 47, 86, 139

nudata, 64, 76, 77, 79, 138

Wrayt (?), 138

_SPp., 57, 138

Coriolus pargamenus, 321

versicolor, (94), 321

CoRNACE2, I9I—-193

Cornus, 329

florida, 99, 103, IOI, 331

Coronopus didymus, 115, 236

““Cow-itch,” 157

“Crab Grass,” 299

Cracca hispidula, 52, 223

Virginiana, 42, 45, 52, 84, 223,

329

“Crap Grass, ” 290

Crategus, 330

eestivalis, 70, 229, 332

apiifolia, 70, 72, 229, 332

arborescens, 229

glandulosa (?), 229

lucida, 2209

Michauxii (?), 83, 220, 331

uniflora, 45, 84, 230, 332

viridis, 72, 220, 331

663

“Crop Grass,” 299

“‘Cross-vine,”” 157

Crotalaria Purshii, 46, 52, 225

rotundifolia, 47, 85, 224

Croton argyranthemus, 47, 84, 214

glandulosus, 115, 214

Crotonopsis linearis, 42, 43, 214

(spinosa?), 214

CRUCIFERA, 235-236

Crypheadelphus robustus, 315

CUPULIFERZ, 49, 89, 105, 247-250,

324-326

Cuscuta compacta, 64, 67, 92, 111,

172, 333) 334

indecora, 58, 59, 172, 333, 334

CUSCUTACE, 172

Cuthbertia graminea, 84, 98, 267

Cynoctonum Mitreola, 111, 178, 190

sessilifolium, 59, 179

CYPERACES, 60, 61, 66, 68, 71, 74,

tay BO, Sie, SOy (OF), TOS, (WAa)),

2'73-280, 324-326, 334-336

Cyperus, 327, 328

compressus, 115, 288

cylindricus (?), 100, 287

echinatus, 98, 100, 287

(filiculmis), 47, 287

Haspan, 58, 64, 92, 287

Martindalei, (47), 86, 287

ovularis, 47, 287

pseudovegetus, 288

retrofractus, 82, 85, 287, 336

squarrosus, 115, 28 :

(strigosus), 331

“Cypress,” 75, 79, 307, 308, 378

Cyrilla racemiflora, 63, 67, 69, 95,

200, 329, 332, 37°

CYRILLACEZ, 97, 200

Danthonia sericea, 42, 292

(Darwinia), 211

Dasystoma pectinata, 48, 84, 162

Datura stramonium, 115, 171

tatula, 115, I71

Daucus pusillus, 115, 188

(Decodon), 330

Decumaria barbara, I10, III, 232,

‘‘Deer-tongue,”’ 148

Dendropogon usneoides, 15, 36, 67,

O25 G25 WB, 82, SS SG) uOO,

104-106, 265, 334, 370

Desmodium lineatum, 220

rotundtjolium, 220

‘‘Devil’s shoestring,” 223

“*‘Devil-wood,”’ 179

664

“Dewberry,” 231

Dicerandra, 340

linearifolia, 85, 100, 123, 167

odoratissima, 84, 89, 100, 167,

P 338, 394 |

Dichondra Carolinensis, 1'72

Dichromena, 336

colorata, 112, 282

latifolia, 57, 60, 76, 79, 282

Dicranum Bonjeani, 86, 317

Diodia teres, 42, 114, 116, I55

(Virginiana i) ais

sp., 80, 155

Dioscorea villosa, 104, III, 257 334

DIOSCOREACE, 257

Diospyros Virginiana, ANS AGI). (siete

182, 331, 332

Diplopappus obovatus, 143

(Dirca palustris), 330

Deellingeria reticulata, 52, 56, 90,

143

““Dog-fennel,” 135, 149

“Dogwood,” 191

Dolicholus simplicifolius, 45, 84,

219

“ Dollar-leaf Oak,” 248

“Dollar Weed,” 21

Drosera brevifolia (?), 235

capillaris (?), 55, 235

filiformis (?), 57, 234

DROSERACEZ, 234-235

Dryopteris Floridana, 111, 310

(patens), 331

Dulichium arundinaceum, 67, 68,

82, 94-96, 288

Dupatya flavidula, 268

EBENACES, 182

Echinochloa colona, 115, 298

Echinodorus radicans, 70, 72, 304

“Eider,” 154

Eleocharis 327, 328

Baldwinii, 53, 284

bicolor, 58, 285

equisetoides, 285

interstincta, 82, 285, 286

melanocarpa, 58, 96, 284

(microcarpa), 123

(mutata), 331

ochreata, 285

prolifera, 76, 80, 284

Robbinsii, 96, 285

Torreyana, 123

tuberculosa, 57, 284

Elephantopus (Carolinianus), 330

(elatus) 330,

SPECIAL INDEX.

nudatus, 111, I51

Eleusina Indica, 115, 292

Elfvingia fasciata, 100, 321

Elionurus, 339

tripsacoides, III, 112, 302

Elliottia, 339, 345

racemosa, 45, 84, ae 2255 3325

Lane 345,346 396, 398

Elyanunis, Ei

EMPETRACEA, 211.

Epidendrum conopseum, 94, 100,

253) 334

(Epiphegus), 330

Eragrostis, 116

amabilis, 115, 290

Browne, 291

ciliaris, 115, 290

tefracta, 115, 291

simplex, 115, 116, 291.

Erechthites hieracifolia, 114, 135

Erianthus brevibarbis, 91, 303

saccharoides, 303

strictus, 112, 303

ERICACE2, 68, 70, 80,

324-326

Erigeron ramosus, I14, 144

vernus, 53, 56, 64, 74, 76, 144

ERIOCAULACES, 267-268

Heecaules compressum, 76, 80, 82,

207

decangulare, 55, 60, 64, 68,

80, 267, 329, 364, 406

fiavidulum, 268

lineare, 55, 64, 267, 329, 338,

_ 346, 404, 408

Eriogonum tomentosum, 45, 84,

86, 244, 329 ;

Eryngium aquaticum, 189, 190

integrifolium (?), 190

Ludovicianum, 345

Ludovicianum, 56,

(345)

synchetum, 47, 51, 58, 190

virgatum, 56, 190

Virginianum, III, 112, 190

yuccifolium, 42, 59, 189

Erythrina herbacea, 100, 219

Euonymus Americanus, 100,

207) 332

Eupatorium, 327, 328

album, 46, 85, 150

compositifolium, 48, 149

lechezfolium, 150

“Mohrii (?), 53, 80, 150

perfoliatum, 64, 111, I50

rotundifolium, 51, 56, 150

184-187,

123, IQ0,

103,

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA.

Eupatorium—Continued.

semiserratum, 149

serotinum, 72, 149

tortifolium, 47, 150

verbenefolium, 52, 57, 150

Euphorbia, 88

cordifolia, 86, 100, 213

corollata, 46, 85, 104, 211

angustifolia, 124

(Curtisii), 124

eriogonoides, 52, 124, 212, 223

Floridana, 86, 211

gracilis, 46, 84, 212

rotundifolia, 212

(Ipecacuanhe), 212

maculata, 115, 116, 212

_ EUPHORBIACEZ, 61, 69, 88, 211—

214) 324-327

(Eustachys Floridana), 331

Euthamia Caroliniana, 80, 145

(Fagus), 330; (Americana), 106

“Ferns,” 50, (310-312)

Festuca octoflora, 115, 289

tenella, 289

Fimbristylis autumnalis, 57, 68, 283

laxa, 115, 283

puberula, 47, 51, 57, 283

Fontinalis flaccida, 70, 315

Fraxinus Caroliniana, 67, 69, 71,

180, 332, 379, 374

“French Mulberry,” 169

Froelichia (campestris), 243

Floridana, 85, 100, 227, 243

Frullania Caroliniana, 94, 318

Kunzei, 42, 94, 318

Fuirena breviseta, 58, 80, 286

hispida, (56, 286), 346

squarrosa hispida, 56,

(346) ;

Funaria hygrometrica, 316

“Pungi,” 50, 61, 89, 313, 320-321

286,

Gaillardia lanceolata, 47, 86, 136,

137, 146

Galactia erecta, 46, 219

mollis, 47, 218, 333

regularis, 85, 100, 218, 333, 334

Galium hispidulum, 82, 85, 100, 155

pilosum, 48, 155

uniflorum, 104, 155

“‘Gallberry,” 209

Gaura Michauxii, 46, 85, 194

Gaylussacia dumosa, 42, 45, 51, 55,

74, 83, 183, 332

frondosa, 51, 55,90, 91, 183, 332

665

nana, 183

tomentosa, 183

Gelsemium sempervirens, 42, 98-

100, 178, 333

GENTIANACE, 88, 176-178

Gerardia, 39, 61, 327, 328

aphylla, 53, 57, 161

divaricata (?), 123

filicaulis, 161

filifolia, 46, 84, 160

linifolia, 58, 64, 80, 161

paupercula, 57, 161

purpurea, 58, 161

setacea, 46, 160

Skinneriana, 52, 58, 161

Gibbesia, 340

Rugelii, 242

Gleditschia aquatica, (69), 226, 331

Glyceria, 191

Gnaphalium obtusifolium, 114, 142

purpureum, 114, 142

“‘Golden-rod,” 145

“Gooseberry,” 183

‘““Gopher-berry,”’ 182

‘“‘Gopher Weed,” 225

Gordonia Lasianthus, 25, 63, 91,

93, 201, 319, 331, 384

GRAMINEZ, (49), 61, 70, 80, 81,

88, 89, (93), 105, 116, 289-303,

324-326, 334-336

“Grape,” Wild, 205

‘* Grass,’’ Bear, 261; Bermuda, 292;

Crab, Crap or Crop, 299; Pep-

per, 236; Water, 283; Wire, 48,

T18, 295

““Grasses,’’ 49, 93, 123, 336. (See

also Graminee.

Gratiola pilosa, 164

quadridentata, 164

ramosa, 64, 76, 79, 82, 164

spherocarpa, 164

subulata, 163

““Graybeard,” 179

Grimmia leucophea, 42, 316

“Ground Oak,” 228

> Gum. Black ros

Tupelo, 192

Gyrotheca tinctoria, 258

Sweet, 231;

Habenaria, 93

blephariglottis, 52, 59, 91, 255

X ciliaris, 92, (255)

ciliaris, 57, 91, 255

cristata, 59, 68, 91, 255

integra, 58, 255

nivea, 52, 58, 256, 408

666

H4MODORACEA, 258-250.

Halimium Carolinianum, 200

rosmarintjolinm, 200

HALORAGIDACEA, 103

HAMAMELIDACE, 231-232

Hamamelis Virginiana, 98, 99, 101,

I03, 10, 232, 333

“Hanging Moss,” 265

Harpalejeunea ovata, 94, 318

‘““Haw,’” 229; Black, 154

Hedera arborea, 205

Hedwigia albicans viridis, 42, 314

Helenium autumnale, r10-112, 136

nudiflorum, 136

tenutfolium, 114, 116, 136, 141,

392

Helianthemum Carolinianum, 47,

200

rosmarinifolium, 115, 200

Helianthus angustifolius, 57, 139

australis, 139

Radula, 45; 51, 86, 139) 329

undulatus, 58, 139

HEPATIC, (313), 318-320, 323

Wllepatics,. a3)

Herpestis amplexicaulis, 164

(Hexalectris), 330

Hibiscus aculeatus, 204

“Hickory,” 252

Hicoria (alba ?), 253

aquatica, 71, 252, 331

(glabra ?), 253

_ SP) 99, 253 a

Hieracium (Gronovii?), 133

sp., 46, 133

Sp., 47, 133

“ High-ground Willow Oak,” 249

“Hog Plum,” 228

“ Holly,” 207

(Homalocenchrus), 329

“Honeysuckle,” 153, 186

Hordeum nodosum, 115, 289

“Hornbeam,”’ 246

Houstonia longifolia, 42, 104, 156

rotundifolia, 46, 85, 157

““Huckleberry,’’ 183

(Hydrangea), 329

(Hydrocotyle), 329

Hydrocotyle rentformis, 191%

(Hydrolea), 329

Hymenocallis sp., 67, 25'7, 406

Sp., 73, 258 é

Hymenopappus Carolinensis, 137,

146

HYPERICACEZ, 202-204

Hypericum, 61, 327, 328

acutifolium, 76, 203

SPECIAL INDEX.

aspalathoides, 203

fasciculatum, 5/55 63,mG9,0 an ;

SI, 95, 203, 329, 332

galioides pallidum, 70, 203, 332

gymnocarpum, 80, 203

maculatum, 202

_ (mutilum), 330

myrtifolium, 51, 55, 75, 79;

90, 95, 202, 332

opacum, 51, 55, 91, 203, 332

(pilosum), 147

Hypoxis filéjolsa, 258

juncea, 258

Ilex, 327, 328

ambigua, 98, 100, 208, 332

Caroliniana, 208

coriacea, 91, 93, 94, 208, 332

decidua, 72, 208, 247, 332

glabra, 42, 45, 51, 53, 55, 59-

60, 63, 65, 90-92, 95, 96,

200, 329, 332

lucida, 208

myrtifolia, 63,

329, 332

opaca, 67, 97, 99, 103, 207, 331

vomitoria, 100, 207, 332

ILLECEBRACE, 89, 242-243

Ilysanthes gratioloides, 115, 163

refracta, 42, 43, 64, 163

“Indian Turnip,’”’ 271

Indigofera Caroliniana, 84, 100, 223

Inonotus amplectens, 321, 346

Jonactis linaritfolius, 143, 147

[RIDACEA, 256-257

Iris versicolor, 59, 64, 67, 81, 111,

I12, 256

‘“‘Tronwood,” 251

Isnardia palustris, 79, 196

IsoETACEA, 308

Isoétes flaccida, 64, 308

Isopappus divaricatus,

189

Isopterygium micans, 94, 314

Itea Virginica, 55, 67, 68, 93, 94,

TIT, 2325 3235304

Iva microcephala, 114, 152

75> 79, 207,

146,

IIA,

‘‘Japan Clover,” 219

Jatropha stimulosa, 46, 85, 98, 213

‘““Jessamine,’”’ Yellow, 178

‘‘Jimson Weed,” 171

JUGLANDACEZ, 252-253

JUNCACES, 264-265

Juncus, 61, 327, 328

acuminatus, 264

aristulatus pinetorum, 265

biflorus, 52, 56, 80, 90, 265

bufonius, 115, 265

dichotomus, 265

diffusissimus, 264

(effusus), 330

Elliottii, 64, 264

marginatus biflorus, 265

(megacephalus), 330

polycephalus, 58, 64, 76, 264

Pondit, 264

repens, 80, 265

scirpoides, 59

compositus, 90, 95, 264,

; 338

trigonocarpus, 56, 91, 264

Juniperus Virginiana, 69, 308, 332

(Jussiza), 329

Kalmia hirsuta, 51, 55, 89, 95,

186, 332

(latifolia), 330

Kantia Trichomanis, 319

“Kentucky Magnolia,” 156

Kneiffia arenicola, 194

linearis, 46, 194

longipedicellata, 194

subglobosa, 194

Koellia hyssopifolia, 59, 64, 80,

167, 292

nuda, 52, 58, 167

Krameria secundiflora, 84, 227, 333

KRAMERIACE, 227

Krigia Virginica, 42, 133

Kuhnistera pinnata, 48, 84, 221,

329, 336 |

Kyllinga pumila, 286

LABIATA, 68, 166-169, 324, 325

Lachnocaulon anceps, 51, 57, 80,

90, 268

Laciniaria, 327, 328

elegans, 85, 147

gracilis, 52, 148

graminifolia, 47, 148

spicata, 56, 80, 148, 364

squarrosa, 48, 147

tenuifolia, 46, 84, 148

Larnandra, 253

LAURACEAE, 97, 197-198

Lechea patula (?), 201

tenuifolia (?), 85, 201

Torreyi (?), 90, 200

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA.

667

LEGUMINOS, 49, 61, 69, 80-81,

88, 105, 2147-226, 324-327,

i 38A53300 1

Lejeunea Americana, 94, 319

Lemna sp., 271

LEMNACEA, 271

LENTIBULARIACES, 158-159

Lentinus sp., 321

Lepidium Virginicum, 115, 236

Leptilon Canadense, 114, 143

Leptogyne, 142

Leptopoda brachypoda, 136

decurrens, 136

Helenium, 56, 76, 79, 136

Leskea denticulata, 68, 315

Lespedeza hirta, 85, 219

repens, 86, 219, 333

striata, 115, 116, 219

Leucobryum glaucum, 42, 316

Leucodon julaceus minor, 314

Leucothoé axillaris, 67, 68, 91, 93,

94, 185, 332

(Catesbei), 186

elongata, 90, 95, 185, 332

platyphylla, 186

racemosa, 63, 67, 68, 185, 332

Liatris squamosa, 147

y Richens ier 2\7 S53

LILIACE2, 261-262

Lilium Catesbei, 59, 61, 261

spectabtile, 261

“ Lily.) spider, 2577 Water, 237

Limnanthemum aquaticum, $2, 176

trachyspermum, 176

Limodorum graminifolium, 58, 254

tuberosum, 57, 254

unifolium (?), 254

LINACEA, 217

Linaria Canadensis, 115, 165, 244

Floridana, 98, 165

Linum Floridanum, 52, 59, 61, 217

Lipocarpha maculata, 115, 288

Liquidambar Styraciflua, 42, 55,59,

OY Gity WB5 HOB, UOGs Wu, Nuies

231, 329, 331, 333, 360

Liriodendron Tulipifera, 63, 91,

103, IIo, 238, 329; 331

Lithospermum Gmelint, 170

hirtum, 170

““Live Oak,” 20, 247

Lobelia Boykinii, 76, 123, 153

cardinalis, 72, 152

flaccidifolia, 67, 70, 152

glandulosa, 56, 152

Nuttallii, 52, 153

LoBELIACE®, 152-153

‘Loblolly,’ 238

668

LOGANIACEA, 178-179

‘““Long-leaf Pine,’ 48, 120, 304

Lonicera sempervirens, 103,

153, 333

Lophiola, 339

aurea, 56, 96, 259

LORANTHACEA, 245

Lorinseria areolata, 64, 67, 94, 311

““Love V,ine,”’ 172

Ludwigia, 61, 327, 328

alternifolia, 73, 194

capttata, 195

glandulosa, 72, 196

hirtella, 53, 56, 194

linearis, 58, 195

linifolia, 76, 79, 195

microcarpa, III, 112, 196

pilosa, 58, 64, 67, 74, 76, 77,

79, 92, 195, 329

spherocarpa, 82, 195

suffruticosa, 96, 195

virgata, 52, 195

Lupinus diffusus, 84, 224

gracilis (?), 224

perennis, 82, 84, 224

villosus, 47, 53, 224, 402

Lycogala epidendrum, 65, 68, 322

LYCOPODIACEZ, 309-310

Lycopodium, 36

alopecuroides, 56, 91, 96, 300

Carolinianum, 56, 300

(Chapmani), 331

pinnatum, 56, 310, 334

prostratum, (56), 310, (334)

Lycopus pubens, 58, 76, 80, 166

tubellus, 72, 166

Lygodesmia, 340

aphylla, 47, 133

(Lythrum), 329

105,

Macranthera, 340

fuchsioides, 64, 92, 162

‘“‘Magnolia,’”’ 238, 316

Kentucky, 156

Magnolia glauca, 36, 55, 59, 63, 65,

67, 68, 81, Qi—-94, 2395 253,

318, 320, 321, 327, 331, 333,

382, 384

grandiflora, 16, 19, 69, 97, 99,

103, 106, I10, I11, 238, 253,

397, 321, 331, 382, 390

(pyramidata), 330

MAGNOLIACE, 238-239

““Maiden Cane,” 298

‘“Maiden’s Blushes,” 156

Malapoenna geniculata, 75, 79, 95,

198, 332

SPECIAL INDEX.

MALVACES, 204

Manfreda Virginica, 42, 43, 48, 258

Manisuris Chapmani, 79, 303

cylindrica, 47, 303

rugosa, 57, 64, 112, 302

“‘Maple,”’ 206

Marchantia polymorpha, 115, 320

Marginaria polypodioides, (42, 72,

100), 312, (334)

Marshallia graminifolia, 56, 92, 137,

329, 406

ramosa, 42-44, 124, 137, 338,

345

Mastigolejeunea auriculata, 68, 318

Mayaca Aubleti, 57, 91, 2'70, 334

fluviatilis, 115, 271

Michaux, 270

““May Apple,’’ 236

““May Haw,”’ 229

““Maypop,”’ 199

(Medeola), 330

Meibomia arenicola, 46, 86, 220, 333

Michauxii, 104, 220, 333

nudiflora, 104, 220

tenuifolia, 47, 85, 220

MELANTHACE®, 262-264

Melanthium Virginicum, 58, 262

MELASTOMACES, 196-197

Melica mutica, 104, 290

MENYANTHACEA, 176

Mesadenia Elliottii, 111, 134

lanceolata virescens, 56, I35y

329, 338, 364

Mesopherum radiatum, 56, 61, 64,

80, 92, 111, 166

rugosum, 166

Mikania scandens, 70, 72, 149, 333

‘*Mill-wheel,” 159

MIMOSACE, 227, 324, 335

‘*Mistletoe,” 245

Mitchella repens, 36, 100, 104, 111,

_ 156, 333

Mitreola petiolata, 178

Mohrodendron dipterum, 99, 181,

331

Mollugo verticillata, 115, 242

(Monarda), 329

Monniera (acuminata), 330

Caroliniana, 80, 164

MorRAcE&, 246

Morongia (angustata?), 227

uncinata, 46, 85, 227, 333

Morus rubra, 103, 110, 246, 331

“Moss,” Hanging, 265

‘“Mosses,”’ 88, 313(—318)

Muhlenbergia expansa, 47, 52, 53,

203

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA.

Muhlenbergia—Continued

trichopodes, 293

Sp., 57, 203

““Mulberry,” 246

French, 169

““Mullein,’”’ 166

““Muscadine,” 205

Musct, 313-318, 323 .

Mussenda bracieolata, 156

Myrica Carolinensis, 55, 60, 90-92,

2525 333

cerifera, 15, 103, 105, 106, 110,

Uti, Dy Bae

pumila, 45, 51, 84, 252, 333

MyRICACEA, 252

Myriophyllum heterophyllum, 81,

193

(Myrtacez), 211

“Myrtle,” 252

MYXOMYCETES, 322

(Nama), 329

(Negundo), 330

“Nettle,” 213

Nolina Georgiana, 42, 86, 261

Nothoscordum bivalve, 262

NYCTAGINACE, 242

Nymphea fluviatilis, 68, 70, 72,

237) 338

orbiculata, 115, 237, 271, 330

NYMPHA4ACEZ, 75, 237-238

Nyssa aquatica, 192

biflora, 63, 66, 69, 75, 77; 79)

pen oS 193, 246, 327, 3315

Ogeche, 63, 66, 69, 81, 82, 110,

192, 200, 329, 332, 400

(sylvatica), 193

uniflora, 69, 71, 192, 331

“Oak,” Black-Jack, 248; Dollar-

leaf, 248; Ground, 228; High-

ground Willow, 249; Live,

20, 247; Poison, 210; Post,

247; Red or Spanish, 248;

Turkey, 248, 249; Water,

249; White, 247; Willow, 249

“Oak Runner,’’ 248

“Oaks,” 16, 50, 247-249, 362

**Oats,’”’ Wild, 300

Oceanoros leimanthoides, 91, 262

Odontoschisma prostratum, 65, 68,

94, 320

Cnothera laciniata, 115, (194)

sinuata, 194

669

““Ogeechee Lime,” 192

Oldenlandia uniflora, 15'7

OLEACE, 1'79-180

ONAGRACE®, 194-196, 324, 325

Onoclea sensibilis, 72, 310

Onosmodium Virginianum, 48, 86,

I70

OPHIOGLOSSACE, 312

Oplismenus setarius, 208

Opuntia vulgaris, 36, 84, 98, 100,

198

ORCHIDACEA, 93,

324-326

OROBANCHACEA, 158

Orontium aquaticum, 67, 70, 271

Osmanthus Americanus, 93, 97, 99,

179, 183, 332, 384

Osmunda cinnamomea, 58, 64, 67,

Qik, wim, Se)

regalas, 110, III, 312

spectabilis, (110, 111), 312

OSMUNDACES, 312

Ostrya Virginiana, 99, 103, 251, 332

OXALIDACEA, 217

Oxalis recurva, 217

(Oxydendrum), 330

Oxypolis filiformis, 55, 59, 188, 329

rigidior, 64, 188

ternata, 57, 188

Oxytria crocea, 58, 65, 124, 261

105, 253-256,

Pallavicinia Lyellii, 65, 68, 94, 320

PALMS, 272

/ Palmetto,” 272

“Cleans,” BH

Panicum, 327, 328

anceps strictum, 297

angustifolium, 47, 296

Ashei, 100, 296

barbulatum, 104, 206

cognatum, I15, 297

Combsii, 58, 80, 207

Currani, 111, 296

debtile, 297

digitarioides, (59, 298)

erectifolium, 123

(gibbum), 331

(gymnocarpon), 331

hemitomon, 59, 297, 298

hians, (59, 80, 298)

longiligulatum, 296

lucidum, 64, 296

melicarium, 59, 80, 298

Nutialianum, 298

scabriusculum, 64, 296

stenodes, 76, 80, 96, 207

670

Panicum—Continued

(strictum), 297

Tennesseense, rrr, 296

verrucosum, 58, 91, 207

virgatum, 207

PAPAVERACE, 236

Paronychia herniarioides, 84, 98,

243, 388

Tiparia, 98, 100, 243, 334

Parthenocissus quinquefolia,

103, III, 205) 333

‘* Partridge-berry,’’ 156

Paspalum Curtisianum, 57, 299

precox, 58, 290

Passiflora incarnata, 115, 199

lutea, 72, 199

PASSIFLORACEA, 199

‘Pawpaw,’ 239

‘‘Pear,’’ Prickly, 198

Peltandra sagittifolia, 94, 271

(Penthorum), 330

Pentstemon dissectus, 42-44, 122,

165, 338

hirsutus, 48, 86, 104, 165

multiflorus, 86, 165

pallidus, 165

“‘Pepper-grass,’’ 236

Pericaulon perfoliatum, 225

Perilla frutescens, 115, 166

Persea pubescens, 63, 91, 93-95,

., 98) 99, 198, 331, 332, 384

“Persimmon,” 182

Renuvianh 56

Petalostemon albidus, 47, 85, 221

corymbosus, 221

Phaseoluspolystachyus, 104,217,333

(Phegopteris), 329

(hexagonoptera), 331

Phlox amoena, 47, I'71

Hentzit, 171

Lighthipei, 171

subulata, 46, 85, 171

Waltert, 171

Phoradendron, 340

flavescens, 63, 67, 68, 79, 245,

gsiey SL!

(Phryma), 330

Physcomitrium turbinatum, 316

Physostegia denticulata, 58, 64, 168

Phyteumopsis, 137

Pieris Mariana, 45, 51, 55, 84, 90,

95, 184, 332

Mitida, WG wos OZ 75s ow, OL

04, 95, 98, 100, 111, 185,

329; 332,

phillyreifolia, 55, 59, 75, 77;

185, 333

99;

SPECIAL INDEX.

Pinckneya pubens, 63, 65, 91, 156,

192, 209, 329, 332 .

‘“‘Pine,’”’ Black, 306, Bottom White,

307, Long-leaf, 48, 120, 304,

Short-leaf, 306, Slash, 120,

305, spruce or White, 307

304-307, 342, 364. (See also j

Pinus.

Pinguicula elatior, 56, 159

lutea, 53, 57, 159

pumila, 53, 58, 150

‘“‘Pink-root,”’ 178

Pinus, 75, 395, 3270e2o

australis, 304

Bahamensts (?), 305

Caribea (?), 305

echinata, 103, 306 j

Elliottii, 51, 54, 55, 63, 67, 75,

74,79; Si; O 5s) Lk dpe osmeue On

305, 308, 327, 331, 362-368,

386, 392

glabra, 15, 69, 72, 99, 103, 106,

307, 331

heterophylla, 305

mitis, 306

paupera, 307

palustris, 16, 19, 20, 42, 455

48; 51, 82, S807 aor

120, 304, 305, 327, 331, 360,

362, 368, 370, 376, 380, 388,

410

rigida serotina, 306

serotina, 51, 55, 63, 67, 89, 91,

93, 112, 300, 320, 331, 382

Teda, 42, 67, 60, J2.00%..0or

99, 103, 306, 329, 331, 400

Te@da serotina, 306

‘*Pipsissewa,”’ 187

Piriqueta Caroliniana, 53, 201

“Pitcher Plants;{7232

> Pitchers, 238

Plagiochila Ludoviciana, 94, 320

undata, 94, 320

Planera aquatica, 16, 69, 71, 246,

Dianciemmene” 157

Plantago aristata, 114, 157

(sparsiflora), 330

(Platanus), 330

Plectrurus, 254

Pluchea bifrons, 76, 77, 79,

143

imbricata, 64, 67, 76, 142

petiolata, 142

“Plum,” Hog, 228; Wild, 228

Poa ambigua, 291

80,

Bee tem peltatum, 104, 105,

239) 245

Podostigma pedicellata, 53, 174

pubescens, 174

Pogonia divaricata, 57, 254

ophioglossoides, 56, 91, 254

“* Poison Oak,’’ 210, 211

“Poison Sumac,’”’ 210

Polanisia tenutfolia, (86, 98), 235

POLEMONIACE, I71

Polycodium cesium, 45, 83, 98, 100,

183, 332

revolutum, 183, 332

Polygala, 54, 327, 328

Chapmani (?), 42, 53, 80, 216

cruciata, 57, 215

cymosa, 59, 64, 76, 215, 329

grandiflora, 47, 217

Harperi, 52, 216, 338, 346

incarnata, 46, 52, 216

lutea, 52, 57, 90, 91, 215

nana, 46, 52, 90, 215

polygama, 47, 216

Tamosa, 52, 50, 80, 215

setacea, 52, 216

POLYGALACEA, 88, 89, 215-217

POLYGONACEA, 89, 244-245

Polygonella Croomii, 83, 86, 98, 244,

333) 338 j

gracilis, 85, 87, 245

sp., 86, 245

(Polygonum), 329

(Polymnia Uvedalia), 330

POLYPODIACEA, 105, 310-312

Polypodium incanum, 312, (334)

polypodioides, 42, 72, 100,

- (312, 334)

Polyporus versicolor, 94, (321)

Polypremun procumbens, 115, 179

Polystichum acrostichoides, 104,

247, 310

“‘Pond Cypress,” 75, (79, 308)

Pontederia cordata, 67, 76, 77, 81,

266, 329

PONDERIACEZ, 266

“Poplar,” 238

(Populus), 329

Porella pinnata, 68, 73, 319

Portulaca pilosa, 115, 241

PORTULACACE, 241

“Post Oak,” 247

(Potamogeton), 75, 329

“Prickly Ash,’’fr9z

“Prickly Pear,” 198

(Prinos lucidus), 208

Proserpinaca palustris, 64, 76, 193

pectinata, 64, 76, 80, 193

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA.

671

sp. (intermediate), 57, 64, 193

Prunus angustifolia, 115, 228

Caroliniana, 99, 228

Chicasa, 228

serotina, 99, 228

umbellata, 228, 331!

Psoralea canescens, 46, 49, 85, 222,

402

gracilis, 47, 52, 222

Lupinellus, 46, 84, 222

Pteridium aquilinum pseudocau-

datum, 42, 45, 52, 85, 90, 91,

104, III, 312, 320, 362

‘* Pteridophytes,”’ 88, 308-312, 323

Pterocaulon pycnostachyum, 142

undulatum, 46, 51, 90, 142

Ptychomitrium incurvum, 42, 316

PYROLACEZ, 187, 324

““Queen’s Delight,” 213

Quercus, 88, 327, 328

alba, 72, 103, 247, 331, 382

aquatica, 249

. brevifolia, 16, 45, 83, 249, 320,

331, 362

Catesbzei, 16, 27, 45, 83, 86, 87,

97, 248, 249, 327, 331, 380,

388

cinerea, 249

digitata, 16, 45, 248

geminata, 42, 83, 98, 99, 247,

331, 332

laurifolia, 15, 97, 99, 100, 249,

331, 390

lyrata, 69, 71, 208, 24'7, 331

Margaretta, 16, 45, 83, 247,

329, 331

Marylandica, 16, (27), 45, 248,

331

Michauxil, 69, 71, 103, 247, 331

(minima), 330

minor, 103, 247

nigra (i.e., Marylandica), 27

nigra, 67, 69, III, 240, 331

Phellos, 72, 240, 331

pumila, 45, 51, 248, 333

(Virginiana), (20), 248, 330

“Rabbit Tobacco,”’ 142

Radula sp., 94, 319

‘‘Ragweed,” 152

Raimannia laciniata, (115), 194

RANUNCULACEZ, 240

(Ranunculus), 329

“Rattan Vine,”’ 206

672

“Red Bay,” 201

“Redbud,”’ 206, 226

“Red Oak,” 248

“Red-shank,’’ 206

“*Reed,”’ 289

RHAMNACEZ, 206

(Rhapidophyllum Hystrix), 330

Rhexia, 39, 61, 327, 328

Alifanus, 51, 56, 80, 196

ciliosa, 52, 57, 91, 197

filiformis, 52, 58, 90, 96, 197

(Floridana), 330

glabella, 196

lutea, 56, 80, 197

Mariana, 107

stricta, 57, 76, 196, 197

(Virginica?), 196

Rhizogonium spiniforme, 94, 315

Rhus aromatica, 104, 210, 332

copallina, 45, 99, 103, III, 210,

332

radicans, 63, 72, I12, 211, 333

toxicodendron, 84, 100, 210,

332

Vernix, 63, 91, 210, 332

Rhynchospora, 61, 78, 289, 327,

328, 330

alba macra, 57, 281

axillaris, 56, 64, 76, 79, 280

Baldwinii, 56, 279

brachycheta, 279

(caduca), 330

Chapmani, 58, 281

ciliaris, 51, 56, 90, 96, 280

ciliata, 280

compressa, 59, 277

corniculata, 68, 76, 282

cymosa, 42, 278

distans, 96, 279

dodecandra, 98, 100, 278, 388

fascicularis, 76, 2'79

jascicularts trichoides, 279

filifolia, 76, 280

glomerata paniculata, 64, 67,

280

gracilenta, 57, 280

Grayil, 46, 84, 278

inexpansa, 58, 65, 277

leptorhyncha (?), 76, 280

(miliacea), 330

mixta, 2'77

oligantha, 56, 281

perplexa, 80, 278

plumosa, 42, 47, 281

pusilla, 281

rariflora, 57, 278

semiplumosa, 56, 281

SPECIAL INDEX.

solitaria, 56, 279, 338

Torreyana, 52, 58, 278

Rhynchostegium serrulatum, 314

Richardia scabra, 114, I55

(Rosa), 329

ROSACEA, 228-231

“‘Rosemary,’’ 97, 211

Rotibellia ciliata, 302

corrugata, 302

TULOSA, 303

RUBIACEA, 155-157

Rubus cuneifolius, 231

nigrobaccus, 111, 231, 332

trivialis, 45, 231, 333

Rudbeckia foliosa, 111, 112, 140

hirta, 46, 140

Mohri, 57, 64, 76, 79, 140

nitida, 52, 58, 140

Ruellia humistrata, 47, 86, 166

Rumex hastatulus, 115, 244

Rynchospora, 277. (See Rhyncho-

spora.)

Sabal Adansonit, 272

glabra, 16; 263) 70,172 eee

minor, 272

(Palmetto), 20

pumila, 272

Sabbatia, 39, 61, 327, 328

campanulata, 57, 80, 177

corymbosa, 178

decandra, 76, 177

Blhottii, 52, 90, 177

foliosa, 63, 67, I77

gentianoides, 122, 176, 338,

343.

gracilts, 177

Harperi, 77, 346

lanceolata, 56, 1'78

macrophylla, 56, 178

paniculata, 47, 177

Sagina decumbens, 115, 241

Sagittaria graminea (?), 304

(latifolia), 331

Mohrii, 57, 64, 303

SALICACE, 251

Salix nigra, 69, 71, 251, 332, 376

Salvia azurea, 47, 85, 168

lyrata, 46, 52, 104, 168

Sambucus Canadensis, 114, 154

‘“‘Sand-spur,”’ 227

Sanguinaria Canadensis, 104, 236,

245

rotundtfolia (?), 236

Sanicula Marilandica, 104, 191

SAPOTACE, I81

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA.

Sarothra gentianoides, 42, 86, 202

Sarracenia, 93

calceolata, 122, 233, 343

flava, 55, 60, 64, 91, 233) 329;

364, 366, 404

flava X minor, 58, 234, 406,

408

minor, 51, 55, 64, 80, 91, 232,

233, 329

minor X psittacina, 59, 234

psittacina, 55, 233

pulchella, 233

purpurea, 91, 234, 382

rubra, 58, 91, (233

variolaris, 232

SARRACENIACES, 232-234

““Sarsaparilla,’’ 260

(Sassafras), 330

SAURURACE, 253

Saururus cernuus, 72, 76, 77, 253

“Saw Palmetto,’ 272

SAXIFRAGACEA, 232

Scapania nemorosa, 42, 68, 319

Schizophyllum commune, 94, 321

Schlotheimia Sullivantii, 68, 100,

III, 316

Scirpus, 289, 330

; (Americanus), 331

cylindricus, 82, 286

Eriophorum, 286, (289)

(fontinalis), 331

(validus), 331

Scleria, 327, 328

Baldwinti, 76, 277

glabra, 47, 53, 85, 2'76

gracilis, 58, 76, 79, 277

hartella (?), 58, 276

Michauxii, (58), 2'76

pauciflora, 2'76

reticularis pubescens, 276

trichopoda, 56, 65, 276

triglomerata, 100, 104, 277

verticillata, 58, 2'76

Scierolepis uniflora, 76, 80, 82, I51

Scoparia dulcis, 114, 163

SCROPHULARIACEZ, 68, 160-166,

324-326

Scutellaria integrifolia, 169

lateriflora, 73, 169

Mellichampii, 104, 106, 169

multiglandulosa, 46, 168

pilosa, 169

Sebastiana ligustrina, 16, 70, 72,

99, 214, 332

“Sedge,’’ Broom, 301

Sscdeces wigs.) t22,.0330., (see also

Cyperacee. )

673

Selaginella, 36

acanthonota, 42, 85, 300, 380,

414

apus, III, 309

arenicola, 42, 309

SELAGINELLACE, 309

Sematophyllum adnatum, 313

Senecio tomentosus, 42, 43, 134

Serenoa serrulata, 36, 45, 51, 67,

7°, 79, 83, 90, 95, 99, 248,

272

Sericocarpus bifoliatus, 47, 84,

87, 144

tortifolius, 144

Seymeria tenutfolia, 162

‘“‘Short-leaf Pine,” 306

Sida rhombifolia, 115, 204

Sieglingia ambigua, 291

silphium angustum, 141

Asteriscus angustatum. 47, 141

compositum, 141

lanceolatum (?), 141

Siphonychia, 340

Americana, 85, 242, 334

pauciflora, 85, 100, 242, 338,

ensac

Sisyrinchium, 294

Atlanticum, 57, 61, 257

Floridanum (?), 257

fuscatum (?), 257

“Slash Pine,” 120, 305

SMILACACEZ, 260

Smilax auriculata, 260, 333

Beyrichi1, 260

laurifolia,63, 67, 91-94, 260, 333

pumila, 15, 36, 46, 85, 98, 100,

104, 106, 111, 260

Walteri, 70, 260, 333

SOLANACE, 116, 170-171

Solanum, 116 :

Carolinense, 115, 171

nigrum, 115, 170

rostratum, 115, I71I

Solidago, 330

Boottii, 86, 100, 145

brachyphylla, 145

odora, 46, 84, 145, 147

tenuifolia, 145

Sophronanthe, 340

hispida, 52, 90, 96, 163

pilosa, 57, 164

Sorghastrum (Linneanum), 300

nutans, 47, 300

secundum, 47, 85, 300

Sorghum avenaceum, 300

(nutans), 300

secundum, 300

674

‘Spanish Needles,’”’ 138

‘‘Spanish Oak,” 248

Sparganium androcladum, 68, 304

‘“‘Sparkleberry,’’ 182

Specularia perfoliata, 114, 153

Spermacoce hyssoptfolia, 155

Spermolepis divaricatus, 115, 189

Sphagnum, 61, 315

acutifolium, 318

cuspidatum, 94, 317

angustilimbatum, 96, 317

cymbifolium, 94, 317

Fitzgeraldi immersum, 96, 317

Garberi, 96, 317

Harperi, 96, 317, 346

macrophyllum, 65, 68, 76, 82,

317

tenerum, 92, 317

‘“‘Spider Lily,” 257

Spigelia Marilandica, 104, 178

Spiranthes Beckii, 346

Spirogyra sp., 322

Sporobolus Curtissii, 52, 258, 293

ejuncidus, 293

Floridanus, 42, 53, 64, 80, 292

gracilis, 46, 52, 85, 203

quncues, 293

teretifolius, 56, 293, 338

“Spruce Pine,”’ 307

Stanleya gracilis, 235

Steinchisma hians, 298

Stemonitis sp., 322

Stenophyllus ciliatifolius, 47, 84,

283

Floridanus, 115, 116, 283

Warei, 84, 282

Stillingia aquatica, 75, 77, 213, 332

sylvatica, 45, 84, 213, 329

Stipa avenacea, 104, 294

Stipulicida setacea, 84, 87, 98, 241

Stokesia levis, 59, I51

Stylandra pumila, 175

Stylosanthes biflora, 46, 84, 220

STYRACACE, 180

Styrax pulverulenta, 55, 180, 332

grandifolia, 180, 332 *

““Sumac,’” 210

(Svida), 329

“Sweet Bay,” 198

“Sweet Gum,” 231

SYMPLOCACEZ, 181

Symplocos tinctoria, 42, 99, 100,

181, 332

Syngonanthus flavidulus, 51, 55, 90,

95, 268, 329

Syntherisma sanguinalis, 115, 116,

200) 08

SPECIAL INDEX.

Talinum teretifolium, 42, 43, 241 :

Taxodium distichum, 16,67, 69, 71,

_ 307, 331, 376, 412

imbricarium, 55, 63, 67, 75-70,

81, TLL, £85) 308,032 pecs

332, 368-374, (378), 412,

Ar4

sp. (intermediate), 67, 69, 307—

308, 400

“Tea Weed,” 204

Tecoma radicans, 42, 72, 157, 333

Tephrosia, 223

Tetragonotheca helianthoides, 140

Tetraplodon australis, 315

(Teucrium Nashii), 330

Thalictrum macrostylum, 104, 240

‘“Thallophytes,”’ 126, 128, 320-323

Thaspium trifoliatum aureum, 189

THEACE®, 201

Thelia asprella, 42, 100, 314

I ihistle uaz '

Thuidium sp., 94, 314

Thyrsanthema semtflosculare, 52,

(56), 133

Thysanella, 340

fimbriata, 85, 245

(Tilia), 329

Tillandsia usneoides, 266

Tipularia, 339

discolor, 100, 254

Tium apilosum, 47, 85, 222

intonsum, 4:7, 223

“Tobacco,” Rabbit, 142

Tofieldia racemosa, 55, 80, 263,

406

Trachelospermum difforme, 70, 72,

175) 333 a oe

Tracyanthus angustifolius, 57, 91,

263

Tradescantia reflexa, 86, 266

rosea, 267

Tragia linearifolia, 46, 214

urens linearis (?), 214

Triadenum petiolatum, 72, 202

Virginicum, 202 |

Trichelostylis autumnalis, 283

Trichostema lineare, 42, 47, 85,

169

Tricuspis, 291

ambigua, 291

cornuta, 291

Tridens ambiguus, 59, 79, 201

Trifolium repens, 115, 224

Trilisa odoratissima, 47, 51, 90, 95,

148

paniculata, 52, 56, 147, 148

(Trillium), 329

ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION OF GEORGIA.

Triodia ambigua, 291

Elliotiw, 291

Triplasis, 339

Americana, 85, 291

cornuta, 201 f

(Tubiflora Carolinensis), 147, 330

) Lulip Pree,’ 238

“Tupelo Gum,” 192

“Turkey Oak,” 248, 249

TURNERACES, 201

(Typha), 329, (latifolia), 331

TYPHACEZ, 304

ce Tyty,’ ? 2 (oY)

ULMACE, 246

Ulmus alata, 246

sp., 72, 246

UMBELLIFERZ, 188-191, 324, 325

Uniola latifolia, 104, 290

laxa, 68, 290

Uralepis, 291

cornuta, 291

Utricularia, 75

cornuta, 57, 158

inflata, 81, 159

juncea, 56, 158

macrorhyncha, 57, 1590

subulata, 42, 57, 91, 158

(Uvularia), 329 ¢

(Floridana), 15

(perfoliata), 330

VACCINIACEZ, 182-184, 324

Vaccinium Myrsinites (?), 182

nitidum, 45, 51, 90, 182, 332

sp., 98, 182

Verbascum Blattaria, 115, 166

Thapsus, 115, 166

Verbena bracteosa, 115, 1'70

carnea, 46, 85, 169

Carolina, Carolinensis,

liniana, 170

VERBENACE®, 169-170

Verbesina (aristata), 330

Virginica, 104, 139

Vernonia, 39

angustifolia, 45, 53, 85, I51

(Noveboracensis ?), 151

oligophylla, 53, 151

sp., I51

Veronica peregrina, 114, 163

Viburnum nitidum, 63, 93, 154, 332

nudum, 63, 67, 91, 93, 154, 230,

329, 332

obovatum, 69, 72, 153) 332

Caro-

675

rufidulum (?), 154

rufotomentosum, 100, 103, 154,

332

(semitomentosum), 330

Viola, 330°

denticulosa, 200, 338

lanceolata, 200

pedata, 199

primulefolia, 111, 199

villosa, 199

sp., 68, 199

VIOLACE2, 199-200

PAVAOIeiS. a EEOO

‘Virginia Creeper,’’ 205

VITACEA, 205

Vitis zstivalis, 103, 205, 333

bipinnata, 205

rotundifolia, 93, 98, 99, 103,-

III, 205, 333, 384

Sp., 205

Warea, 340

cuneifolia, 85, 235

“Water Elm,” 246

“Water Grass,” 283

“Water Lily,” 237

““Water Oak,” 249

‘“White Clover,”’ 224

““White-heads,” 267

‘“White Oak,” 247

SaNMinitep PD intet ano. 7

““Wild Cherry,” 228

“Wild Grape,” 205

“Wild Oats,’’ 300

“Wild Plum,” 228

Willoughbeya, Willoughbya, 149

“Willow,’’ 251

“Willow Oak,” 249

Wiullughbea, 149

Willugbeya, 148

(Willughbeja), 148

Windsoria, 291, ambigua, 291

“Wire-grass,”’ 48, 118, 295

Wistaria frutescens, 63, 70, 223, 333

““Witch Hazel,” 232

“Woodbine,” 153

Woodwardia angustifolia, 311

Virginica, 311

Xanthium strumarium, 114, 152

Xolisma, 184. (See Cholisma.)

XYRIDACEA, 97, 268-270

Gan, Gi, O75 Bey S28

ambigua, 65, 270

Baldwiniana, 56, 96, 123, 268

Se Gained

brevifolia, 52, 90, 96, 2'70

brevijolia, 269

bulbosa minor, 270

Elliottii, 90, 95, 269 :

fimbriata, 57, 76, 82, 90, 91, 95,

260

flexuosa, 52, 59, 260

neglecta, 58, 96, 270 .

platylepis, 58, 91, 2'70

Smalliana, 76, 269

toria, 269

sp., 76, 96, 269

SPECIAL INDEX.

sp., Gal 80 |

Sp., 67; oe 270° ;

arrow,”

“* Yellow Tessas!

Yucca filamentosa, ge

Zizia arenicola, 189, 3: ae

Bebbii, 104, 189

Zornia bracteata, 85, 221,

Zygadenus angustijolius, 26

glaberrimus, 90, 92, 26250

lewmanthoides, 263

NAMES OF PERSONS, ETC.

This index is intended to include references to all names of persons

(and a few scientific organizations or bureaus) mentioned in the work,

except where they are merely cited as authors of genera, species, and

synonyms.

Abbot, John, 25, 122, 155, 228,

399; 343

Adams, Chas. C., 348

Ames, Oakes, 346

Andrews, Miss E. F., 130

Arnold Arboretum, 129

Baker, E. G., 346

Baldwin, Wm., 122, 146

Balfour, I. B., 356

Barnhart, J. H., 259

Bartram, John, 121, 235(?)

Bartram, Wm., 121, 122, 348

Beadle, C. D., 345, 346

Beal, W. J., 348

Beck von Mannagetta, 348

Berlin Botanical Garden, 129

Beyrich, Carl (or Karl), 122

Bicknell, E. P., 257

Billings, F. H., 266

Blankinship, J. W., 36, 349

Botanical Gardens, Berlin, Edin-

burgh, Kew, Missouri, New

York, Paris, Vienna, 129

Boynton, C. L., 124, 209, 345, 346

Boynton, F. E., 345

Bray, Wm. L., 13, 305, 349

Brendel, F., 349

British Museum, 129

Britton, E.G. (Mrs. N. L.), 313

Britton, N. L., 8, 132, 144, 147, 162,

Britton, W. H., 32, 143,173, 202,

224, 230, 301, 349

Brotherus, V. F., 315

Brown, Addison, 132

Burns, Frank, 21

Bush, B. F., 346

Canby, W. M., 123

Candolle, see De Candolle

Catesby, Mark, 17, 121, 349

Chapman, A. W., 150, 212, 260, 300

Clarke, H. L., 349

677

Clements, F. E., 34, 61, 340, 355,

nS OOF am

Clifford, Julia B., 254

Clute, W. N., 346

ees we oe 20

Ollie, J], Wig TOS, S49, Bho,

Coulter, S. M., 350 SHO

Coville, F. V., 8, 346, 350

Cowles, H.C., 63, 106, 348-351, 354—

Croom; He 29122) .204,) ante one

239, 249, 350

Curtis's Bot. Mag., 26, 211, 253

Curtiss, A. H., 123, 212, 216, 261

Cuthbert, A., 89, 150, 180, 213, 222,

22. BAG, BR, DUR. Be, AC),

295, 298, 300

Dall, W. H., 9, 18, 21, 344

Darlington, Wm., 122

Davis, W. M., 9, 350, 351

De Candolle, A., 351

Dei CandolleyAS Ps 235)

Deri eels

De Soto, H., rar

De Vries, H., 212

Dodge, R. E., 9

ID aS, Jia Blog BAC

Drayton, John, 17, 351

Drude, Oscar, 351

Earle, F. S., 9, 266

Edinburgh Royal Bot. Gard., 129

Elliott, Stephen, 17, 26, 122, 167,

245, 271, 275, 300, 340, 343

IDI, Go Won B07)

Engler, A., 126, 2509, 351

Iwas, Jal AN, &

Fendler, A., 351

Fernald, M. L., 149, 286

Field Columbian Museum, 129

Fippin, E. O., 346

Fisher, W. R., 356

678

Flagg, Wilson, 8

Flahault, C., 351

Foerste, Aug. F., 17, 344

Gannett, H., 345

Ganong, W. F., 349, 351

Gaskill, A., 351

Gattinger, A., 8, 43, 198, 200, 206,

254-257, 200, 352

Georgia, Dept. of Agriculture, 344,

84534 7

Georgia, Geological Survey, 9, 17,

21, 345

Graebner, P., 357

Gray, Asa, 5, 123, 154, 225, 3390,

Aen BED.

Gray Herbarium, 129

Greene, E. L., 184, 236

Griffen, A. M., 347

Grisebach, A. H. R., 352

Groom, Percy, 356

Haddon, A. C., 352

Harris, G. D., 18, 344

Harris} J), C2 cox

Harshberger, J. W., 10, 352, 353

Harvard University, 129

Haynes, Caroline C., 313

Hazen, T. E., 322

leleillgse, BL A 28S, BOR

Henderson, J. T., 344, 345

Herty, CH, 118

Hildebrand, F., 353

Euleard’ ENE ise toes 220.

282, 344, 353

Iebills e Ish Bev, Bie

ipehicocica Anos zZioge sin

Infotel, J, 5 Ase

ola, heo., 132) 202) 230, 205,

267, 288, 290

Hooker, W. J., 185, 351

Hopkins, M. H., 190

Howe, M. A., 322

Humboldt, A. von, 5, 156

Jackson, James, 122, 343

Jackson, Joseph, 353

Jiames ibe 355)

Janes) 7B. 344, 3245

Kearney; ie whe cos iSO. na arm ao),

WA LAS. LSS LSS mL ion LoOn

Sit, UGS, USH, UO, LOB, WO,

SPECIAL INDEX.

204, 207-200, 231, 23a .eaaF

246, 240, 250, 252, 260, 261,

293, 294, (311), 313, 354

Kerner von Marilaun, 354

Kew Botanic Garden, 129

Knoblauch, E., 357

Knowlton, F. H., 354

Kraemer, H., 354

Le Conte, J. E., 258

Lindley’s Bot. Reg., 185

Linneus, C., 5, 338-340, 342

Little, George, 344

Livingston, B. E., 354

Lioyd,. F. E., 20, £46, sneer

Loesener, Th., 208

Loughridge, R. H., 21, 344

Macbride, T. H., 9

MacDougal, D. T., 354

Macfarlane, J. M., 234

MacMillan, C., 127, 349, 355

Maxon, W. R., 9, 123

McCallie, S. W., 17, 21, 345

McCarthy, G., 355

McGee, W J, 355

Meehan, T., 148, 151, 219, 241, 271

Merriam, C. Hart, 355

Merrill, E. D., 293, 208

Mettauer, H. A., 116

Michaux, A., 121, 122, 234, 339, 340

Michaux, F. A., x7, 25.9nem

Mill, H. R., 9

Missouri Botanical Garden, 129

Mohr, C., 9, 14, 15, 2020, aeuiaeee

127, (130; E23. LeAnn use oer

£64, 172, LOZ 20 54a seeeisie

260, 266, 278, 284, 303, 305, 319,

320, 355

‘Morong, T., 255, 260

Muhlenberg, H., 275

Murrill, W. A.) 304) eames

Nash, G. V., 48, 260, 355

Neisler, H. M., 243

Nesbitt, R. T., 345

New York Botanical Garden, 129

Northrop, A. R. (Mrso Joi) prem

143, 149, 16%, 277, 2545 025eR

260 ;

Nuttall, Thomas, 122, 141, 235, 343

Oemler, A. G., 122

NAMES OF PERSONS, ETC.

Oglethorpe, James, 121

Oliver, F. W., 354

Olsson-Seffer, P., 34, 355

Paris Botanical Garden, 129

Pinchot, G., 355

Pollard, C. L., 123, 261, 346, 356

Porcher, F. P., 8

Pound, Roscoe, 351, 356

Prantl, K., 126, 259

Pumpelly, R., 17, 345

Ravenel, H. W., 225

Raymond, R. W., 8

Reed, H. S., 356

Rennert, Rosina J., 188

Robertson, C., 356

Robinson, B. L., 131, 208, 356

ose wi Ne, 123, 258, 345, 347

Russell, C., 356

Ruth, A., 268

sargent, C.S., 132, 154, 187, 250,

y 346

Schimper, A. F. W., 356

Shaler, N.S., 17, 356

Shaw, G. R., 305

Shimek, B., 356

Sita, O, 43, 123, 126, 130,

132, 153, (187), 197, 217, 233,

243, 247, 249, 250, 263, 266,

296, 340, 345, 346

Smith, E. A., 8, 14, 26, 357

Smith, J. E., 122, 343

Spalding, V. M., 357

679

Taylor, E. B. (Mrs. A. P.), 174, 180,

310

Tidestrom, Ivar, 312

Torrey, John, 339

Tracy, S. M., 20, 123, 313, 354

Tully, Wm., 171

University of Nebraska, 129

Upham, W., 355, 356

U.S. Census, Tenth, 21, 344

U.S. Dept. of Agriculture, 123, 346

Bureau (or Division) of Fores-

WAY UB HAG BOO, BBity BOR

Bureau of Soils, 83, 346, 347

Weather Bureau, 29, 346

U.S. Geological Survey, 21, 344-

346

U.S. National Herbarium, 123, 129

Vaughan, T. W., 17, 19

Vienna Botanical Garden, 129

Vries, see De Vries

Walter, Thomas, 340

Warming, Eug., 357

Warnstorf, C., 346

Watson, Sereno, 127

Watson, T. L., 9

- White, C. A., 357

White, George, 122, 344

Wiegand, K. M., 265

Wood, Alphonso, 212

Woodworth, J. B., 357

Wright, R. F., 345, 347

Zon, Raphael, 357

< Tae

LIST OF IMPORTANT CORRECTIONS

Part I, Article No. 1

PAGE

1, line 2, for September read November.

Biri PES) a ke) tead iz).

46, “ 38, insert the figure 2 before Asclepias humistrata.

62, last footnote, insert footnote index (2) and change 21 to 25.

68, line 5, for Fimbrystylis read Fimbristylis.

82, “ 32, for (21) read (26).

84, “ 23, “ cilliatifolius read ciliatifolius.

84, “ 32, “ Carolainina read Caroliniana.

OS a 3S, 20 mead a7.

to4, ‘“ 23, “ Uniolia read Uniola.

116, “ 2, “ spermm read spermum.

Tags 8 Bey oe iaseyal, ut

52, o.- 15) 1 Grace ceaduGray.

192, 12, after OGEECHEE Lime, insert (Pl. X XI, fig. 1).

227, ‘“ 12, for MIMOSAEZ tead MIMOSACEZ.

227, ‘* 23, ‘“ KRAMERIAEZ read KRAMERIACEA.

234, 22, insert at end of line:—236. 1906.

** 3, for Charleston read Charlton.

271, 5, after THomaAs insert County.

271, lines 6 and 7, for Nympha eorbiculata read Nymphea orbiculata.

2472, punctuation marks at ends of lines 1 and 3 are interchanged.

287, line 9, insert C. before Martindalei.

2903, ‘ 21, for eyunicdus read ejuncidus.

299, ‘° 29, “‘ peecox read precox.

318, line 5, insert 2:280. 1803. after FI.

328, in explanation of table, for 18 read 19.

333, in table at top of page, second bracket has slipped down one sp

346, line 5, for 111:27 read 11:127.

354, 910,902 read is:

355, last line, for 83 read 1-83.

680

ace.

SPECIAL INDEX to Part II, ArTicLE 3

THE ORDERS OF TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES

Acanthadei, 445

Acanthopteroidei, 444, 452, 4

Acanthopterygii, 452, 501

Acentrophorus, 464

Acipenseroidei, 444, 448, 462

Actinistia, 448, 459

Actinopteri, 444, 448, 460

4itheospondyli, 448, 465

Albulide, 449, 469

Alepocephalide, 471

Amblyopside, 488

Amioidei, 466

Amphipnoide, 482

Anacanthini, 452, 498

Anguillavus, 481

Apodes, 450, 478

Archencheli, 481

Arthrodira, 447

Arthrognathi, 447

Aspidorhynchi, 448, 465

Asterospondyli, 446

Atherinide, 497

Aulopoidea, 487

Batidoselachii, 446

Belonide, 492

Belonorhynchide, 463

Berycide, 501

Blennoidea, 455

Callionymoidea, 455

Carencheli, 481

Carps, 474, 477

Catfishes, 474, 475

Catopteride, 463

Catostomide, 478

Caudal Fin, Evolution of, 507, 508

Centrolophide, 502-504

Cestraciontide, 446

Characins, 473

Cheirolepis, 463

Chimeeroidei, 447

Chirocentridz, 470

Chirothricide, 488

Chondrostei, 448, 462

Cladistia, 448, 459

681

Cladoselachii, 445

Classification, natural, 440, 441

Clupeide, 471

Cobitide, 478

Cobitopside, agr

Cods, 498

Coelacanthide, 448, 457, 459

Cohorts, 443, 444, 448, 4409

Colocephali, 481

Crossognathide, 498

Crossopterygii, 444, 448, 456

Cyclospondyli, 446

Cyprinide, 478

Cyprinodontide, 488

Dalliidz, 451, 490

Diplomysteide, 476

Diplospondyli, 445

Dipneusti, 447

Dorypterus, 463

Echeneis, aat

Eel-like orders, 450, 478

Eel-like vertebrates, 506, 507

Eels, 478

Elasmobranchii, 445

Elopide, 449, 468

Enchelycephali, 481

Enchodontide, 488

Esocide, 488, 489

Eventognathi, 438, 474, 477

Evolution of:

chondrostean ganoids, 463

crossopterygil, 457

eel-like vertebrates, 506

ganoids and teleosts, 460-461

hippocampsu, 495

“holostean” ganoids, 463

mesichthyous orders, 487-496

physostomous into physoclist-

ous fishes, 484, 492 (see also

swimbladder under struc-

tures)

spiny-rayed orders, 496-506

teleosts from ‘‘holostean”’

ganoids, 466

682 SPECIAL

Evolution of structures:

ims, jl, FES, AGO, AS, ARS,

460, 461, 464, 466, 471, 472,

484, 486, 496

pectoral and pelvic girdles,

Die F3Ex, AGT, Oy. nA oS wai

484-486, 496

scales) pln xx SO Mas eloo:

463, 465, 466, 472, 496

skull and jaws, pl. xxx, 457,

460, 462, 464, 468, 472, 496

swimbladder, pl. xxx, 457, 467,

468, 484

vertebral column, pl. xxx, 457,

460, 461, 464, 466, 496

Exoccetide, 492

Fierasferide, 483

Flying fishes, 491

Gadide, 498

Galaxiidz, 489

Ganoidei, 444, 448, 462

Gasterosteus, 495

Ginglymodi, 448, 466

Gonorhynchide, 471

Gymnarchide, 470

Gymnonoti, 474

Halecomorphi, 448, 466

Halosaurus, 483

Haplistia, 448, 4509

Haplomi, 451, 484, 487

Hemibranchii, 493

Heterocerci, 448, 462

Heterognathi, 449, 473

Heteromi, 482-484

Holocephali, 447

Holoptychide, 448, 459

““Holostean” Ganoids, 461, 464

Hyodontide, 449, 470

Hypostomides, 505

Ichthyology, in America, 438; in

England, 438, 439, 440

Ichthyotomi, 445

Icosteidz, 503, 504

Infraclass, 443, 444

Iniomi, 451, 484, 485, 487

Isospondyli, 444, 449, 467

Lamnoidea, 446

Lamprididz, 500

Lepidosteoidei, 444, 448, 464

Leptolepidide, 449, 466

Lophobranchii, 493

Lyomeri, 482

INDEX.

Macruride, 499

Malacopteroidei, 444, 449, 467

Mastacambelide, 505 :

Masticura, 446 |

Mesichthyes, 444, 451, 484 |

Mesoganoidei, 448, 465

Morays, 479

Mormyridz, 449, 470

Mugilide, 497

Nematognathi, 438, 475

Nomeide, 502-504

Nomeiformes, 502

Notacanthus, 483

Notopteridez, 449, 470

Oligopleuride, 449, 466

Opahs, 500

Opisthomi, 505

““Order,’’ content of term, 442

Ostariophysi, 440, 444, 449, 467,

473

Osteoglosside, 449, 469

Osteolepide, 448, 456, 458, 459

Paleoniscide, 462, 463

Pegaside, 505

Percesoces, 485, 494, 497

Percomorphi, 502

Percopside, 451, 485 (sand-rollers),

490

Pholidophoride, 448, 465, 466

Phractolemus, 470.

Phylogeny and classification, 441

Phylogeny of the Actinopterous

Fishes, pl. xxix

Physoclistous fishes, 484, 492

Physostomous fishes, 467, 484, 492

Plagiostomi, 445

Plectospondyli, 477, 478

Pleuracanthides, 445

Pleuropterygii, 445

Peeciliide, 488

Polynemide, 498

Polyodontide, 448, 462

Polypteride, 448, 457-459

Prosarthri, 446

Protospondyli, 448, 465

Pycnodonti, 448, 465

Remoras, sucking disc of, 441

Rhine, 446

Rhinobati, 446

Rhizodontide, 448, 459

Salmonide, 471

Salmoperce, 451, 485, 490, 491

Stomiatide, 471

THE ORDERS OF TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES.

Scombresocide, 493 Synentognathi, 451, 491

Scopeloids, 487 Syngnathide, 493

Scylliorhinoidea, 446

Selenichthyes, 455, 500

Soft-rayed fishes, 467

Sphyrenide, 497

Spiny-finned fishes, 496, 501

Stephanoberycide, 490

Tarrasiide, 448, 459

Tectospondyli, 446

Teleostei, 444, 440, 466

Teleostomi, 444, 447

Thoracostraci, 444, 452, 493

Stromateide, 502, 504 Torpedines, 446

Sturgeons, 463

Superorder, 443, 444 Umbride, 488

Svmbranchii, 482 Urenchelys, 479

683

General Index to Volume XVII

Names of Authors and other Persons in Heavy-Face Type.

Titles of

Papers in SMALL CAPS

ABSENCE OF HELIUM FROM CARNO-

TITE, ON THE, E. P. Adams

(Abstract), 578

Acanthias, 421

Acanthodide, 422, 425, 430, 432

Actinolite schist, 533

Active Members, Election of, 563,

577, 588, 594, 603, 605, 623,

624

Adams, E. P., ON THE ABSENCE

oF HELIUM FROM CARNOTITE

(Abstract), 578

Adams, M. W., Analysis by, 517

ADIRONDACKS, PHYSIOGRAPHY OF

THE, James F. Kemp (Ab-

stract), 589

AFTERGLOW, VARIATIONS IN THE

DURATION OF THE, PRODUCED

BY CHANGES OF POTENTIAL

AND FREQUENCY OF OSCILLA-

TION OF THE DISCHARGE, C. C.

Trowbridge (Title), 593

ALLOLOBOPHORA, THE PROPHASES

OF THE First MATURATION

SPINDLE GF, Katherine Foote

(Abstract), 610, 613

Alnoite dike, 511

ANZASTHESIA, CENTRAL,

Eve Movement,

Dodge (Title), 587

Analyses of Maine rocks, 526, 531,

534, 539, 542, 544, 547: 549,

559 554, 556

Analysis of peridotite, Penn., 517

ANATOMY, THE IDEAS AND TERMS

or MopERN PHILOSOPHICAL,

H. F. Osborn (Title), 592

ANIMAL LIFEIN PERU AND BOLivia,

A. F. Bandelier, 627

Annual Address of. the President,

633

hae Meeting, 627

Anorthosite, 527, 531

Anthony, Wm. A., Active Member,

SAH

DuRING

Raymond

Anthropology and Psychology, Sec-

tion of, Meetings, 569, 576,

587, 593, 605, 615

ANTHROPOLOGY OF THE JEWS OF

New York, Maurice Fishberg,

(Abstract), 576

ANTHROPOMETRIC WORK AT THE

St. Louis Exposition, R. S.

Woodworth and F. G. Bruner

(Abstract), 576, 577

ANTs, THE PROGRESSIVE ODOR OF,

AND ITS INFLUENCE IN THEIR

ComMUNAL Lire, Adele M.

Fielde (Title), 627

ANTS THAT RatsE MusHROOMS, W.

M. Wheeler (Abstract), 567

ARE MENTAL PROCESSES IN SPACE?

W. P. Montague (Abstract),

615, 620

Arend, Francis J., Active Member,

Armstrong, S. T., M.D., Active

Member, 588

ASBESTOS OF BELVIDERE Moun-

TAIN, VERMONT, SERPENTINES

AND ASSOCIATED, V. F. Mar-

sters (Abstract), 573

Associate Members, Dues and priv-

ileges of, 564

Associate Membership, Constitu-

tional amendment providing

for, 563

Astronomy, Physics, and Chemistry,

Section of, Meetings, 568, 584,

Oz OO2F 604, 614

ATLANTIC Coast Province, A NEw

TERTIARY FAUNA FROM THE,

Thomas C. Brown (Abstract),

594, 596

AUDIBILITY, RaciAL DIFFERENCES

IN THE UPPER LimiT oF (Ti-

tle), F. G. Bruner, 587

Augen-gneiss, 536

Aurora, N. Y., boulders, 512

Auvergnose, 543) 550

685

686

Avery, S. P., Jr., Active Member,

588

Bakewell, C. M., ConcerRNING Em-

PIRICISM (Title), 615

Bandelier, A. F., ANtmAL LIFE IN

Perv AND Botivia (Title), 627

Barnett, V. H., cited, 511, 512

Baskerville, Charles, Active Mem-

ber, 563; Fellow, 628

Baxter, M., Jr., Active Member, 623

Beckhard, Martin, Active Member,

623

Beebe, C. William, Fellow, 628

Beerbachite, 554

BELVIDERE MOUNTAIN, VERMONT,

THE SERPENTINES AND ASSO-

CIATED ASBESTOS oF, V. F.

Marsters (Abstract), 573

Bergstresser, Charles M., Active

Member, 577

Berkey, Charles P., INTERPRETATION

oF CERTAIN INTERGLACIAL

CLAYS AND THEIR BEARINGS

UPON MEASUREMENT OF GEOLO-

Gic Time (Abstract), 573, 574

PaL#oGrRApHy oF NortH AMER-

1cA DuriInGc Mrp-Orpovicic

Time (Abstract), 589, 591

Billings, Elizabeth, Active Member,

603

Biology, Section of, Meetings, 567,

376, 583, 592, 599, 003, 610,

Birp FLicut, PRINCIPLES or, May

Cline (Title), 627

Birps, CERTAIN INSTINCTS IN, F.

M. Chapman.(Title), 627

Bishop, H. R., Active Member, 588

BiT OF QUATERNARY GEOLOGY, A,

J. J. Stevenson (Abstract), 606,

Blake, T. W., Active Member, 623

Bouivia, ANIMAL Lire In, A. F

Bandelier (Title), 627

Boothbay, 519

Branner, J. C., cited, 513

BripGErR Basin, THE TURTLES OF

THE, O. P. Hay (Abstract), 592

BriEF REPORT OF STATISTICS RE-

LATING TO SEX-INHERITANCE

IN Motus, H. E. Crampton

(Title), 610

Brieson, Frank, Active Member, 623

Britton, N. L., President, 628

Brown, E. H., Active Member, 594

GENERAL INDEX.

Brown, Thomas C., A New TErR-

TIARY FAUNA FROM THE AT-

LANTIC COAST PROVINCE (Ab-

stract), 594, 596

BrucITE, DETERMINATION OF, AS

A RocK-CoNSTITUENT, A. A.

Julien (Abstract), 578, 581

Bruner, F. G., and Woodworth, R.

S., CoLOR PREFERENCES (Ab-

stract), 569, 570

ANTHROPOMETRIC WORK AT THE

St. Louis Exposition (Ab-

stract), 576, 577

Bruner, Frank G., RaciaL DIFFER-

ENCES IN THE UPPER LIMIT OF

AuDIBILITY (Title), 587

Bumpus, Hermon C., Councilor, 628

Bush, Wendell E., Active Member,

624

Business Meeting of the Academy,

577, 599, 593, 602, 605, 622

Byrnes, Esther F., TRANSITIONAL

STAGES AND VARIATIONS IN

CERTAIN SPECIES OF CYCLOPS

(Abstract), 567

Cameron, E. H., VARIATIONS IN

Sunc Tones (Title), 587

Canandaigua, N. Y., boulder, 512

Canfield, R. A., Active Member, 577

CaNon DrtasBLo METEORITE, Mots-

SANITE, A CARBON SILICIDE

FROM THE, George F. Kunz

(Abstract), 572, 586

Cape Cop, THE GLACIAL GEOLOGY

or NANTUCKET AND, J. Howard

Wilson (Abstract), 625

CARNOTITE, ON THE ABSENCE OF

HeLium From, E. P. Adams

(Abstract), 578

Cattell, J. McKeen, MEASUREMENT

oF ScIENTIFIC Merit (Ab-

stract), 615, 619

PRACTICE AND TRAINING (Title),

. 88

Cand: ANSTHESIA DURING EYE

MovemMENT, Raymond Dodge

(Title), 537

Centrophorus, 421

CERTAIN INSTINCTS IN Birps, F. M.

Chapman (Title), 627

Cestracion (Heterodontus japoni-

cus), 416, 418, 419, 421, 422,

423, 424, 426, 428, 431

Champollion, André, Active Mem-

ber, 623

Cuance, W.L. Sheldon (Title), 588

GENERAL INDEX.

Chapman, F.M., CerTAIN INSTINCTS

IN Birps (Title), 627

CuHtIna, RELATION OF, TO THE

PHILIPPINE ISLANDS, Berthold

Laufer (Title), 5093

Chlamydoselachus anguineus, 416,

420, 424

CHROMOSOMES IN HEMIPTERA, OB-

SERVATIONS ON THE, E. B.

Wilson (Abstract), 600

Chrysostom, Brother, TEmMPERA-

MENT AS AFFECTING PHILOSO-

PHICAL THOUGHT (Abstract),

615, 620

Cladoselache, 424, 432

Clarkson, Banyer, Active Member,

SUa

Cline, May, Active Member, 603

PRINCIPLES OF BirD FLIGHT

(Title), 627

COALS OF SPITZBERGEN, THE, John

J. Stevenson (Abstract), 565

Coelacanthus, 425

Cole, L. G., RECTILINEAR RONTGEN

Rays (Abstract), 584, 586

CoLor PREFERENCES, Woodworth,

R. S., and Bruner, F. G. (Ab-

stract), 569, 570

COMBUSTION IN FLAMES, RELATION

BETWEEN IONIZATION AND,

L. L. Hendren (Title), 602

CONCERNING Empiricism, C. M.

Bakewell (Title), 615

Condit, William L., Active Member,

623

Conn, J. M., Active Member, 624

CONSCIOUSNESS, RELATIONAL THE-

ORIES oF, W. P. Montague

(Abstract), 569, 571

CONTRIBUTION TO THE GEOLOGY OF

SouTHERN Maine, A, I. H.

Ogilvie, 519

CONVERGENCE, MOVEMENTS OF,

Charles H. Judd (Title), 587

Corats, EARLY STAGES OF SOME

Patz#zozoic, C. E. Gordon

(Abstract), 594, 596

CORNWALL INE Ye. | STRUCTURAL

RELATIONS AND ORIGIN OF THE

Limonite Beps at, C. A.

Hartnagel (Abstract), 594, 507

CORRELATION AND SELECTION, H.

E. Crampton (Abstract), 600,

601

Corresponding Secretary,

of the, 629

Crampton, H. E., BR1EF REPORT OF

Report

687

STATISTICS RELATING TO SEx-

INHERITANCE IN Morus (Title),

610

CORRELATION AND SELECTION

(Abstract), 600, 601

Vice-President, 628

Crane, Zenas, Life Member, 588

Crittenden Co., Ky., dike, 513

Cromwell, Lincoln, Active Member,

624

Culgin, Guy W., Active Member,

603

Cyclops, 567

C. brevispinosus, 568

C. parcus, 567, 568

C. signatus, 567

C. viridus, 567

C. viridus (var. americanus), 567

CycLops, TRANSITIONAL STAGES

AND VARIATIONS IN CERTAIN

SPECIES OF, Esther F. Byrnes

(Abstract), 567

Dahlgren, B. E., DEMONSTRATION

or New INVERTEBRATE Mop-

ELS IN THE AMERICAN MusEUM

(Title), 610

Darton, N. H., cited, 510

DEFICIENT CHILDREN, MENTAL

GrowTH IN, Naomi Norsworthy

Giitle) sas,

Delano, Warren, Jr., Active Mem-

ber, 623

de Milhau, Louis J., Active Member,

624

DEMONSTRATION OF New INVERTE-

BRATE MODELS IN THE AMERI-

can Museum, B. E. Dahlgren

(Title), 610

DESCRIPTION OF THE Mopoc, Scorr

County, Kansas, METEORITE,

George F. Kunz (Abstract),

625, 627

DETERMINATION OF BRUCITE AS A

RocK-CONSTITUENT, A.

Julien (Abstract), 578, 581

Diaibaseyas2io. 527605474 Oso,

554

DiaMonD, THE JAGERSFONTEIN,

George F. Kunz (Abstract), 565

Dikes (Maine), 520, 527, 547, 553,

Diller, J. Shy GUC, Gra, S02

Diorite, 527, 533

Diplacanthide, 422, 425, 430, 432

Dipnoi, 424

688

Dodge, Raymond, CENTRAL AN&S-

THESIA Durinc Eye Move-

MENT (Title), 587

Dodge, R. E., Corresponding Secre-

tary, 628

Dosalane, 533

Dougherty, H. L., Active Member,

Dublin, L. I., THe History oF THE

GERM CELLS IN Pedicellina

americana (Abstract), 582, 583

Dunite, 546

Dunose, 546

Dunscombe, George E., Life Mem-

ber, 588

DuPont, H. A., Active Member, 594

Durand, John S., Active Member,

624

Dwight, Rev. M. E., Active Member,

588

East Canada Creek, N. Y., dikes,

5Ir

Edenborn, Penn., dike near, 514

Editor, Report of the, 632

Elliott Co., Ky., dike, 512

Emerson, B. K., cited, 512

Emmet, C. Temple, Active Member,

603

EMPIRICISM, CONCERNING, C. M.

Bakewell (Title), 615

Engler, A., Active Member, 588

Evans, Dr. Samuel M., Active Mem-

ber, 594

EvoLuTION OF SOME DEVONIC

SPIRIFERS, A. W. Grabau (Ab-

stract), 573, 575

Exhibition of Photographs of Mois-

sanite Crystals Sent by Pro-

fessor Moissan, George F. Kunz,

Anion of the U. S. Geological

Survey Radium Exhibit, which

was shown at the St. Louis

Exposition, George F. Kunz,

584, 586

EXPERIMENTS RELATING TO THE

CONDUCTIVITY OF POWDERS

AT HicH TEMPERATURES, H.

C. Parker (Abstract), 568

Eve Movement, CEntTRAL AN@&S-

THESIA Durinc, Raymond

Dodge (Title), 587

Eye Movements, VISION AND Lo-

CALIZATION DurING RaApPIp,

R. S. Woodworth (Title), 615,

617

GENERAL INDEX.

Fairchild, Charles S., Active Mem-

ber, 588

Fayette Co., Penn., dike, 515

Ferguson, Mrs. Farquhar, Active

Member, 577

Fielde, Adele M., THE PROGRESSIVE

Opor oF ANTS AND 1Ts IN-

FLUENCE IN THEIR COMMUNAL

Lire (Title), 627

Finley, John H., Councilor, 628;

Fellow, 628

Fishberg, Maurice, Active Member,

563;

ANTHROPOLOGY OF THE JEWS OF

New York (Abstract), 576

Fellow, 628

FLAMES, RELATION BETWEEN [oNn-

IZATION AND COMBUSTION IN,

I. L. Tuffs (Title), 602

Foote, Miss Katherine, THE Pro-

PHASES OF THE First MATURA-

TION SPINDLE OF ALLOLO-

BOPHORA (Abstract), 610, 613

Fracker, G. Cutler, TRANSFERENCE

oF PRactTIceE (Title), 587

Gabbro, 527, 536

Gabbro-diorite, 554

Gambusia, 430

Ganoids, 425

Garland, James A., Active Member,

624

Gaseous Ions at Low PRESSURES,

RATE OF RECOMBINATION OF,

L. L. Hendren (Title), 602

Gates, Penn., dike near,. 514

Geology and Mineralogy, Section of,

Meetings, 564, 572, 578, 580,

594, 603, 606, 625

GEORGIA, A PHYTOGEOGRAPHICAL

SKETCH OF THE ALTAMAHA

Grit REGION OF THE COAST-

AL Puain oF, Roland M.

Harper, 1

Germanares, 536

Gibbs, Mrs. Theo. Kane, Active

Member, 577

GLACIAL GEOLOGY OF NANTUCKET

AND CAPE Cop, THE, J. Howard

Wilson (Abstract). 625

Glaciation (Maine), 524

GLACIATION OF MANHATTAN Is-

LAND, Notes ON THE, A. A.

Julien (Abstract), 606, 609

GOLD MINING IN THE SOUTHERN AP-

PALACHIANS, Thomas T. Read

(Abstract), 625, 626

GENERAL INDEX.

Grabau, A. W., EVOLUTION oF SoME

DEVONIC SPIRIFERS (Ab-

stract), 573, 575

TYPES OF SEDIMENTARY OVERLAP

(Abstract), 594, 508

Granite, 531

Granite-gneiss, 527

Greeff, Ernest F., Active Member,

588

Gregory, W.K., THE ORDERS OF

TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES, 437

Index, 681

Grubenmann,U., cited, 557

Guggenheim, Wm., Active Member,

5388

Gyracanthus, 432

Hamilton, F. M., A StupDy oF THE

READING Pause (Abstract),

615, 617

Hammond, James B., Active Mem-

ber, 577

Haplacanthus, 432

Harper, Roland M., Associate Ac-

tive Member, 603

A PHYTOGEOGRAPHICAL

SKETCH OF THE ALTAMAHA

Grit REGION OF THE COASTAL

PLAIN OF GEORGIA, 1

Corrections, 680

Index to Plant Names, 659

Index to Persons, etc., 677

Harriman, E. H., Active Member,

588

Hartnagel, C. A., STRUCTURAL

RELATIONS AND ORIGIN OF THE

LIMONITE BEDS AT CORNWALL,

N. Y. (Abstract), 594, 597

Haupt, Dr. Louis, Active Member,

588

Hay, O. P., THE TURTLES OF THE

BRIDGER Basin (Abstract), 592

Heinze, Arthur B., Active Member,

Sai

HeLiIum, ON THE ABSENCE OF,

FROM CARNOTITE, E. P. Adams

(Abstract), 578

HEMIPTERA, OBSERVATIONS ON THE

CHROMOSOMES IN, E. B. Wilson

(Abstract), 600

Hendren, L. L., Rate or RECOM-

BINATION OF GASEOUS IONS

AT Low PRESSURES (Title), 602

Heptanchus, 421, 425

Hess, Selmar, Active Member, 588

Heteracanthus, 432

689

Heterodontus japonicus (see Ces-

tracion)

Hewett, Edgar L., THz Lire anp

CULTURE OF THE TEWA IN-

DIANS IN PRE-SPANISH TIMES

(Title), 605

Hill, Robert T., Active Member,

563

THE REPUBLIC oF Mexico; Its

PHYSICAL AND Economic As-

PECTS (Title), 603

Hilyard, George B., Active Member,

Hinchman, Mrs. C. S., Active Mem-

ber, 577

Hinton, John H., death of, 623

History oF THE GERM CELLS IN

Pedicellina Americana, THE,

L. I. Dublin (Abstract), 582,

583

Hoe, Robert, Jr., Active Member,

594.

Holzmaister, L. V., Active Member,

624

Hopkins, George B., Life Member,

Hornblende-gabbro, 554

Hornblende schist, 527. 543, 554

Hovey, Edmund Otis, Vice-Presi-

dent, 628

Hubbard, Thomas H., Life Member,

588

Hulshizer, J. E.,§Active Member,

624

HumaN IMPLEMENTS, RECENT Dis-

COVERY OF, IN AN ABANDONED

RIVER CHANNEL IN SOUTHERN

OrEGoN, J. F. Kemp (Ab-

stract), 606

Hunter, G. W., Associate Active

Member, 624

Huntington, Archer M., Life Mem-

ber, 588

IpaHo, ON MONAZITE SAND FROM,

George F. Kunz (Title), 573

IpEAS AND TEMPERAMENTS, Dick-

inson S. Miller (Abstract), 560,

(e)

eee TERMS OF MODERN PHIL-

OSOPHICAL ANATOMY, THE,

Henry F. Osborn (Title), 592

Index, special, to plant names, 659

special, to mames of persons,

etc., in Part I, 677

to article on Teleostomous

Fishes, 681

690

INDIAN TEXTILES OF THE SOUTH-

WEST, SYMBOLIC DESIGNS OF

THE, George H. Pepper (Title),

593

Initiation fee, Change of By-Laws

eliminating, 563

INTERGLACIAL CLAYS AND THEIR

BEARINGS UPON MEASURE-

MENTS OF GEOLOGIC TIME, IN-

TERPRETATION OF CERTAIN,

Charles P. Berkey (Abstract),

573, 574

INTERPRETATION OF CERTAIN IN-

TERGLACIAL CLAYS AND THEIR

BEARINGS UPON MEASURE-

MENT OF GEOLOGIC TIME,

Charles P. Berkey (Abstract),

573, 574 i ?

Invertebrate Models in the Ameri-

can Museum, Demonstration

of new, B. E. Dahlgren, 610

IONIZATION AND COMBUSTION IN

FLAMES, RELATION BETWEEN,

I. L. Tufts (Title), 602

Tron Ore, New Sources oF

SUPPLY OF, James F. Kemp

(Abstract), 565, 566

Irving, Walter, Active Member, 624

Ithaca, N. Y., dikes, 511

JAGERSFONTEIN DIAMOND, THE,

George F. Kunz (Abstract),

565

James, F. Wilton, Associate Active

Member, 578

NoTEs ON THE MINNEWASKA RE-

GION OF ULSTER County, N. Y.

(Abstract), 578, 580

Jews or New York, ANTHROPOL-

OGY OF THE, Maurice Fishberg

(Abstract), 576

Jones, Walter R. T., Active Mem-

ber, 588

Jones, William, THE ReE.Licious

CONCEPTION OF THE MANITOU

OF THE CENTRAL ALGONKINS,

(Abstract), 593

Judd, Charles H., Movements oF

CONVERGENCE (Abstract), 587

RADICAL EMPIRICISM AND

Wunpt’s PuHiLosopHy (Ab-

stract), 569, 572

Judd, Edward K., Associate Active

Member, 605

Julien, A. A., DETERMINATION OF

Brucite As A RocK-ConstTIiT-

UENT (Abstract), 578, 581

GENERAL INDEX.

NOTES ON THE GLACIATION OF

ManuaTTan' Istanp (Ab-

stract), 606, 609

Jupiter, The Sixth Satellite of,

584, 585

Kelyphite, in peridotite, 517

Kemp, James F., cited, 510, 512,

513

New Sources oF SUPPLY OF

Iron Ore (Abstract), 565, 566

PHYSIOGRAPHY OF THE ADIRON-

DACKS (Abstract), 589

PROBLEM OF THE METALLIFEROUS

VEINS, THE (Presidential Ad-

dress), 633

Kemp, J. F., and Ross, J. G., A

PERIDOTITE DIKE IN THE COAL

MEASURES OF SOUTHWESTERN

PENNSYLVANIA, 509-518

RECENT INTERESTING Dis-

COVERY OF Human IMPLE-

MENTS IN AN ABANDONED

RIVER CHANNEL IN SOUTHERN

OREGON, 606

Kiernan, Patrick, Active Member,

Sil

Kraus, E. H., cited, 510

Kunz, George F., DESCRIPTION OF

THE Mopoc, Scotr County,

Kansas, METEORITE (Ab-

stract), 625, 627

Exhibition of the U. S. Geo-

logical Survey Radium Exhibit

which was shown at the St.

Louis Exposition, 584, 586

Exhibition of Photographs of

Moissanite Crystals Sent by

Professor Moissan, 589

THE JAGERSFONTEIN DIAMOND,

° THELARGESTEVER FOUND: THE

History or Its CuTtTine AND

ULTIMATE DISPOSITION, 565

Moissanite, A CARBON SILICIDE

FROM THE CANON DIABLO

METEORITE (Title), 572

On MONAZITE SAND FROM IDAHO

(Title), 573

On ZIRCON FROM NEAR LAWTON,

OKLAHOMA (Title), 573

Lambert, Adrian S., Active Member,

624

Lassenose, 531

Laufer, Berthold, THE RELATION OF

CHINA TO THE PHILIPPINE

IsLanps (Title), 593

GENERAL INDEX.

Lawrence, John B., Active Member,

LAWTON, OKLAHOMA, ON ZIRCON

FROM NEAR, George F. Kunz

(Title), 573

Lee, F. S., TEMPERATURE AND

Muscie Faticue (Abstract),

582, 584

Lefferts, Marshall C., Active Mem-

ber, 588

Lepidosiren, 430

LeRoy, Alfred, Active Member, 589

Librarian, Report of the, 632

LIFE AND CULTURE OF THE TEWA

INDIANS IN PRE-SPANISH TIMES

THE, Edgar L. Hewett (Title),

605

Limsps, VERTEBRATE, ORIGIN OF,

Raymond C. Osburn, 415-436

LimMonitEe Beps AT CoRNWALL, N.

Y., STRUCTURAL RELATIONS

AND ORIGIN OF THE, C. A.

Hartnagel (Abstract), 594, 597

Lincolnose, 540

LINGUISTIC STANDARDS, F. Lyman

Wells (Abstract), 615, 616

Loeb, James, Life Member, 589

LowER COLUMBIA VALLEY, STONE

SCULPTURES AND IMPLEMENTS

FROM THE, Harlan I. Smith

(Title), 593

Lucas, F. A.. WHALES AND WHALING

ON THE COAST OF NEWFOUND-

LAND (Abstract), 582, 583

Ludlowville, N. Y., dikes, 511

Littgen, Walter, Active Member,

589

Mac Donald, John E., Active Mem-

ber, 624

Mac Dougall, Robert, ORGANIC

LEVELS IN THE EVOLUTION OF

THE Nervous System (Ab-

stract), 569, 571

Note on NumpBer Hasit (Ab-

stract), 569, 571

Vice-President, 628

Maine, A CONTRIBUTION TO THE

GEOLOGY or SouTHERN, I. H.

Ogilvie, 519

Malchite, 554

MamMatia, THE RECLASSIFICATION

or THE, H. F. Osborn (Ab-

stract), 610, 611

MANHATTAN IsLAND, NOTES ON THE

GuaciATION or, A. A. Julien

(Abstract), 606, 609

691

Manheim Bridge, N. Y., dikes, 511

MANITOU OF THE CENTRAL ALGON-

KINS, THE RELIGIOUS CONCEP-

TION OF THE, William Jones

(Title), 593

Marling, Alfred E., Active Member,

624

Marsters, V. F., THE SERPENTINES

AND ASSOCIATED ASBESTOS OF

BELVIDERE MouNTAIN, VER-

MONT (Abstract), 573

Martin, Bradley, Life Member, 578

Masontown quadrangle, Penn., 514

Matson, G. C., cited, 511, 512

Mexwell Francis T., Active Mem-

er,

McMillin, Emerson, Treasurer, 628

MEASUREMENT OF SCIENTIFIC

Merit, J. McKeen Cattell (Ab-

stract), 615, 619

Melitite in peridotite, 518

MENTAL PROCESSES IN SPACE, ARE?

W.P. Montague(Title), 615, 620

METALLIFEROUS VEINS, THE PROB-

LEM OF THE, James Furman

Kemp, 633

METEOR TRAINS, Charles C. Trow-

bridge (Title), 614

METEORITE, DESCRIPTION OF THE

Mopoc, Scott County, Kan-

sas, George F.Kunz (Abstract),

625, 627

Metz, H. A., Active Member, 594

Mexico, THe ReEpusLic or: Its

PHYSICAL AND Economic As-

PECTS, Robert T. Hill (Title),

603

Middle Run, Penn., dike, 514

Mip-Orpovicic Time, PaLzo-

GRAPHY OF NortTH AMERICA

Durine, Charles P. Berkey

(Abstract), 589, 591

Miller, Dickinson $S., IDEAS AND

TEMPERAMENTS (Abstract),

_ 569, 570 ;

Millroy, Alfred Taggart, Active

Member, 603

Miner, Roy W., Active Member, 563

MINNEWASKA REGION OF ULSTER

County, N. Y., NoTEes on

THE, F. Wilton James (Ab-

stract), 578, 580

Mitchell, S. A.. THE SIxTH SATEL-

LITE OF JUPITER, 584, 585

PURPOSES AND PLANS OF THE

SoLtar EcLips—E EXPEDITIONS

or AUGUST, 1905, 593

692

Mopoc, Scotr County, Kansas,

METEORITE, DESCRIPTION OF

THE, George F. Kunz (Ab-

stract), 625, 627

Moissanite, A CARBON SILICIDE

FROM THE CANON DIABLO

METEORITE, George F. Kunz

(Title), 572

Moissanite Crystals, Exhibition of

Photographs of, Sent by Pro-

fessor Moissan, George F. Kunz,

589

MoONAZITE SAND FROM IDAHO, ON,

George F. Kunz (Title), 573

Monism, Types or, W. P. Mon-

tague (Title), 588

Monroe, W. S., SMELL DiscRIMI-

NATION OF STUDENTS (Ab-

stract), 615, 616

Montague, P., ARE MENTAL

PROCESSES IN SPACE? (Ab-

stract), 615, 620

RELATIONAL THEORIES OF CON-

SCIOUSNESS (Abstract), 569,

571

Types or Monism (Title), 588

Monzonite, 536

Monzonose, 540

Morewood, George B., Active Mem-

ber, 624

Morris, Lewis R., Active Member,

594

Motus, BriEF REPORT OF STA-

TISTICS RELATING TO SEX-

INHERITANCE IN, H. E. Cramp-

ton (Title), 610

MovEMENTS OF CONVERGENCE,

Charles H. Judd (Title), 587

MuscLte FATIGUE, TEMPERATURE

AND, F. S. Lee (Abstract), 582,

584

Mustelus, 416, 421, 424

NANTUCKET AND CAPE Cop, THE

GLACIAL GEOLOGY OF, é

Howard Wilson (Abstract), 625

NERVOUS SYSTEM, ORGANIC LEVELS

IN THE EVOLUTION OF THE,

Robert Mac Dougall (Abstract),

569, 571

NEWFOUNDLAND, WHALES AND

WHALING ON THE COAST OF,

Frederic A. Lucas (Abstract),

582, 583

New SourRcES OF SUPPLY OF IRON

OrE, James F. Kemp (Ab-

stract), 565, 566

GENERAL INDEX.

New TERTIARY FAUNA FROM THE

ATLANTIC Coast PROVINCE,

A, Thomas C. Brown (Ab-

stract), 594, 596

Norsworthy, Naomi, MENTAL

GROWTH IN DEFICIENT CHIL-

DREN (Title), 587

NortH AMERICA, PALZOGRAPHY

oF, Durinc M1p-Orpovicic

Time, Charles P. Berkey (Ab-

stract), 589, 591

Note on NuMBER Hasit, Robert

Mac Dougall (Abstract), 560,

571

NoTES ON THE GLACIATION OF

MANHATTAN IsLAND, A. A.

Julien (Abstract), 606, 609

NOTES ON THE MINNEWASKA RE-

GION OF ULSTER County, N. Y.,

F. Wilton James (Abstract),

578, 580

Notidanide, 420, 424

NuMBER Hapit, Note on, Robert

Mac Dougall (Abstract), 560,

571

Nunn, R. J., Election as Active

Member, 624

O’Brien, J. M., Election as Active

Member, 624

OBSERVATIONS ON THE CHROMO-

SOMES IN HEmIPTERA, E. B.

Wilson (Abstract), 600

Cttinger, J. P. J.» Election as

Active Member, 624

Ogilvie, I. H., A CONTRIBUTION TO

THE GEOLOGY OF SOUTHERN

MAINE, 519

ORDERS OF TELEOSTOMOUS FISHES,

THE, W.K. Gregory, 437

ORGANIC LEVELS IN THE EVOLU-

TION OF THE NERVOUS SYSTEM,

Robert MacDougall (Abstract),

569, 571

Organization, Charter, and List of

Members, i—xxxvi

ORIGIN OF VERTEBRATE LimBs, THE

Raymond C. Osburn, 415-436

Osann, A., cited, 558

Osborn, Henry Fo Member of Fin-

ance Committee, 623. 628

IDEAS AND TERMS oF MopDERN

PHILOSOPHICAL ANATOMY, THE

(Title), 592

RECLASSIFICATION OF THE MAM-

MALIA, THE (Abstract), 610,

611

Png

GENERAL INDEX.

Osborn, Wm. Church, Active Mem-

ber, 589

Osburn, Raymond C., THE ORIGIN

OF VERTEBRATE LimBs, RE-

CENT EVIDENCE UPON THIS

PROBLEM FROM STUDIES ON

PRIMITIVE SHARKS, 415-436

Owen, Juliette A., Life Member,

624

PALZOGRAPHY OF NorRTH AMERICA

DURING Mrp-Orpovicic TIME,

Charles P. Berkey (Abstract),

589, 591

PaL#ozoic CoRALS, EARLY STAGES

oF Some, C. E. Gordon (Ab-

stract), 594, 596

Parish, Henry, Active Member, 589

Parker, H. C., EXPERIMENTS RE-

LATING TO THE CONDUCTIVITY

oF Powers sat HicH TeEm-

PERATURES (Abstract), 568

Parsell, Henry V. A., Active Mem-

ber, 578

Parsons, Mrs. Edwin, Active Mem-

ber, 578

Peary Arctic Club, Resolutions re-

garding, 564

Pedicellina Americana, THE HIs-

TORY OF THE GERM CELLS

IN, L. I. Dublin (Abstract),

82, 583

Pell, Miss Frances, Active Member,

578

Pennsylvania, peridotite dike in,

509

Pepper, George H., SymBoric De-

SIGNS OF THE INDIAN TEXTILES

OF THE SOUTHWEST (Title),

593

PERCEPTION OF LINGUISTIC SOUNDS,

F. Lyman Wells (Title), 587

Perfemane, 546

Peridotite (Maine), 527

PERIDOTITE DIKE IN THE COAL

MEASURES OF SOUTHWESTERN

PENNSYLVANIA, A, J. F. Kemp

and J. G. Ross, 509-518

Perkins, William H., Life Member,

578

Perofskite in peridotite, 517

Persalane, 531

Peru AND Bo.LiyiA, ANIMAL LIFE

IN, A: F. Bandelier (Title), 627

Petrology (Maine), 526

PHILOSOPHICAL THOUGHT, TEM-

PERAMENT AS AFFECTING,

693

Brother Chrysostom (Abstract),

615, 620

Phipps, Henry, Active Member, 624

Physiography (Maine), 522

PHYSIOGRAPHY OF THE ADIRON-

DACKS, James F. Kemp (Ab-

stract), 589

PHYTOGEOGRAPHICAL SKETCH OF

THE ALTAMAHA GRIT REGION

OF THE COASTAL PLAIN OF

Grorcia, A, Roland M.

Earper, 1

Pickhardt, Carl, Active Member,

624

Pierce, Henry Clay, Active Mem-

ber, 603

Pigrzic BAROMETER, A POCKET

ForRM OF THE, Ernest R. von

Nardroff (Abstract), 584, 585

Pike Co., Ark., dike in, 513

Pinchot, Gifford, Active Member,

578

Fellow, 628

Pittsburg coal, cut by dike, 516

Placerose, 545

Pleuracanthus, 425

Pleuropterygidae, 420, 422, 425,

430

Boece ForM OF THE PiEzic Ba-

ROMETER, A, E. R. von Nard-

roff (Abstract), 584, 585

Poggenburg, H. F., Active Member,

5°9

Poor, Charles Lane, Editor, 623,

628

Poor, Henry W., Active Member,

Pose IC: C., Member of Finance

Committee, 623, 628

PowpbErRs, EXPERIMENTS RELATING

TO THE CONDUCTIVITY OF, AT

HicH TEMPERATURES, H. C.

Parker (Abstract), 568

PRACTICE AND TRAINING, J.

Keen Cattell (Title), 588

PRACTICE, TRANSFERENCE OF, G.

Cutler Fracker (Title), 587

President, Annual Address of the,

633

PRINCIPLES OF Birp Fiicut, May

Cline (Title), 627

Pristiurus, 422

PROBLEM OF THE METALLIFEROUS

VEINS, THE, James Furman

Kemp (Annual address of the

president), 633

Mc-

694

Procter, William, Active Member,

624

PROGRESSIVE OpoR oF ANTS AND

ITs INFLUENCE IN THEIR Com-

MUNAL Lire, THe, Adele M.

Fielde (Title), 627

PROPHASES OF THE First MatTurRsA-

TION SPINDLE OF ALLOLO-

BOPHORA, Miss Katherine Foote

(Abstract), 610, 613

Psephurus gladius, 425

PURPOSES AND PLANS OF THE SOLAR

EcLipse EXPEDITIONS oF AU-

GUST, 1905, S. A. Mitchell

(Title), 593

Pyne, M. Taylor, Life Member, 589

QUATERNARY GeEoLoGy, A Bit of,

J. J. Stevenson (Abstract), 606,

609

RactAL DIFFERENCES IN THE UPPER

Limit oF AUDIBILITY, Frank

G. Bruner (Title), 587

RADICAL EMPIRICISM AND WUNDT’S

Puitosopuy, Charles H. Judd

(Abstract), 560, 572

Radium Exhibit, Exhibition of the

United States Geological Sur-

vey, George Frederic Kunz,

584, 586

Raja, 425

RATE OF RECOMBINATION OF GASE-

ous lons at Low PRESSURES,

L. L. Hendren (Title), 602

Read, Thomas T., Gotp MINING IN

THE SOUTHERN APPALACHIANS

(Abstract), 625, 626

READING ALOouD, STUDiEs IN, L. A.

Weigle (Title), 588

RECENT INTERESTING DISCOVERY

or HumMAN IMPLEMENTS IN AN

ABANDONED RiveR CHANNEL

IN SOUTHERN OREGON, James

F. Kemp (Abstract), 606

RECLASSIFICATION OF THE Mawm-

MALIA, THE, Henry F. Osborn

(Abstract), 610, 611

Recording Secretary, Report of the,

629

RECTILINEAR RONTGEN Rays, L.

G. Cole (Abstract), 584, 586

Reilly, F. James, Active Member,

624

RELATION BETWEEN JONIZATION

AND COMBUSTION IN FLAMES,

I. L. Tufts (Title), 602

GENERAL INDEX.

RELATION OF CHINA TO THE PHILIP-

PINE ISLANDS, THE, Berthold

Laufer (Title), 593

RELATION OF INTENSITY OF SEN-

SATION TO ATTENTION, M.

Tsukahara (Abstract), 560,

57°

RELATIONAL THEORIES OF CoN-

SCIOUSNESS, W. P. Montague

(Abstract), 569, 571

RELIGIOUS CONCEPTION OF THE

MANITOU OF THE CENTRAL

ALGONKINS, THE, William

Jones (Title), 593

Report of the Corresponding Secre-

tary, 629

Editor, 632

Librarian, 632

Recording Secretary, 629

Treasurer, 631

REPUBLIC OF Mexico; Its PuHysi-

CAL AND Economic ASPECTS,

THE, Robert T. Hill (Title), 603

Riker, Samuel, Active Member,

589

Robert, Samuel, Active Member,

578

Roberts, W. T., Active Member,

563

Rogers, James H., Active Member,

624

RONTGEN Rays, RECTILINEAR, L.

G. Cole (Abstract), 584, 586

Ross, J. G., J. F. Kemp and, A

PERIDOTITE DIKE IN THE COAL

MEASURES OF SOUTHWESTERN

PENNSYLVANIA, 509-518

St. Louis EXPOSITION, ANTHROPO-

METRIC WORK AT THE, R. §&.

Woodworth and F. G. Bruner

(Abstract), 576, 577

St. Louis Exposition, Exhibition of

the U. 5. Geological Survey

Radium Exhibit which was

showniat the, George F. Kunz,

584, 586

Salfemane, 543

Schist, 526

Schmelzel, Miss Jane E., Active

Member, 589

Schneider, P. F., cited, 510, 511

Schott, Charles M., Active Member,

624

Screntiric Merit, MEASUREMENT

or, J. McKeen Cattell (Ab-

stract), 615, 619

GENERAL INDEX.

Scyllium, 422

Seabury, George J., Active Member,

578

SEDIMENTARY OVERLAP, TYPES OF,

A. W. Grabau (Abstract), 594,

598

SELECTION, CORRELATION AND, H.

E. Crampton (Abstract), 600,

601

SENSATION, RELATION OF INTEN-

SITY OF, TO ATTENTION, M.

Tsukahara (Abstract), 569, 570

Serpentine, Syracuse, N. Y., 509

SERPENTINES AND ASSOCIATED As-

BESTOS OF BELVIDERE Moun-

TAIN, VERMONT, THE, V. F.

Marsters (Abstract), 573

SEX-INHERITANCE IN Motus, BRIEF

REPORT OF STATISTICS RELAT-

ING TO, H. E. Crampton (Title),

610

Sheldon, W. L., Cuance (Title), 588

Sherwood, George H., Active Mem-

ber, 563; Fellow, 628

Sitkose, 533

SIXTH SATELLITE OF JUPITER, THE,

S. A. Mitchell (Abstract), 584,

585

SMELL DISCRIMINATION OF STU-

DENTS, W. S. Monroe (Ab-

stract), 615, 616

Smith, Harlan I., StonE ScuLp-

TURES AND IMPLEMENTS FROM

THE LOWER COLUMBIA VALLEY

(Title), 593

Smith, W. Wheeler, Active Mem-

ber, 624

smyth, C. H., Jr., cited, 509, 511

Snook, Samuel B., Active Member,

624

SOLAR EcLipsE EXPEDITIONS OF

AUGUST, 1905, PURPOSES AND

PLANS OF THE, S. A. Mitchell,

593

SRUNGE, PERCEPTION OF LINGUIS-

Tic, F. Lyman Wells (Title),

587

SOUTHERN APPALACHIANS, GOLD

MINING IN THE, Thomas T.

Read (Abstract), 625, 626

Spinax, 416, 418, 410, 420, 421, 422,

424, 428

SPIRIFERS, EVOLUTION OF SOME

Devonic, A. W. Grabau (Ab-

stract), 573, 575

SPITZBERGEN, THE COALS oF, John

J. Stevenson (Abstract), 565

695

STANDARDS, Lineutstic, F. Lyman

Wells (Abstract), 615, 616

Stevenson, A. E., Associate Active

Member, 603

Stevenson, J. J.. A Bir or Qua-

TERNARY GEOLOGY (Abstract),

606, 609

THE COALS OF SPITZBERGEN

(Abstract), 565

STONE SCULPTURES AND IMPLE-

MENTS FROM THE LOWER Co-

LUMBIA VALLEY, Harlan I.

Smith (Title), 593

Straus, Isador, Active Member, 624

Striz, 524

STRUCTURAL RELATIONS AND ORI-

GIN OF THE LIMONITE BEDS AT

CoRNWALL, N. Y., C. A. Hart-

nagel (Abstract), 594, 597

STUDENTS, SMELL DiscRIMINATION

or, W. S. Monroe (Abstract),

615, 616

STUDIES IN READING ALOUD, L. A.

Weigle (Title) 588

STUDY OF THE READING PAUSE, A,

F. M. Hamilton (Abstract),

615, 617

SYMBOLIC DESIGNS OF THE INDIAN

TEXTILES OF THE SOUTHWEST,

George H. Pepper (Title), 593

Syracuse, N. Y., Serpentine of, 509

Taylor, Henry E., Active Member,

624

TELEOSTOMOUS FisHES, THE OR-

DERS OF, W.K.Gregory, 437

TEMPERAMENT AS AFFECTING PHIL-

OSOPHICAL THOUGHT, Brother

Chrysostom (Abstract), 615,

620

TEMPERAMENTS, IDEAS AND, Dick-

inson S. Miller (Abstract), 569,

(e)

Teneo cueen AND MuscLtEe Fa-

TIGUE, F. S. Lee (Abstract),

582, 584

Tewa INDIANS IN PRE-SPANISH

Times, THE LIFE AND CULTURE

OF THE, Edgar L. Hewett (Title),

605

Time, INTERPRETATION OF CERTAIN

INTERGLACIAL CLAYS AND

THEIR BEARINGS UPON MEAS-

UREMENTS OF GEOLOGIC,

Charles P. Berkey (Abstract),

573) 574

Tonalose, 535

696

TONES, VARIATIONS IN SUNG, E. H.

Cameron (Title), 587

Torpedo, 416

Tower, Ralph W., Librarian, 628

Nomination as Librarian, 623

TRAINING, PRACTICE AND, J. Mc-

Keen Cattell (Title), 588

TRANSFERENCE OF PRACTICE, G.

Cutler Fracker (Title), 587

TRANSITIONAL STAGES AND VARI-

ATIONS IN CERTAIN SPECIES OF

CycLtops, Esther F. Byrnes

(Abstract), 567

Treasurer, Report of the, 631

Trowbridge, Charles C., ‘Vice-Pres-

ident, 628

METEOR TRAINS (Title), 614

Nomination as Vice-President,

622

VARIATIONS IN THE DURATION OF

THE AFTERGLOW, PRODUCED

BY CHANGES OF PoTENTIAL AND

FREQUENCY OF OSCILLATION

OF THE DiscHARGE (Title), 593

Tsukahara, M., THE RELATION OF

INTENSITY OF SENSATION TO

ATTENTION (Abstract), 560,

57°

Tufts, I. L., RELATION BETWEEN

IONIZATION AND COMBUSTION

IN FLameEs (Title), 602

TURTLES OF THE BRIDGER BASIN,

THE, O. P. Hay (Abstract), 592

Types or Monism, W. P. Montague

(Title), 588

TYPES OF SEDIMENTARY OVERLAP,

A. W. Grabau (Abstract), 594,

598

Umptekose, 541

van Brunt, Jeremiah R., Active

Member, 624

van Hise, C. R., cited, 558

van Siclen, Matthew, Associate

Active Member, 605

Vanuxem, L., cited, 509, 511

van Wyck, Robert A.,,

Member, 624

VARIATIONS IN SUNG TONES, E. H.

Cameron (Title), 587

VARIATIONS IN THE DURATION OF

THE AFTERGLOW, PRODUCED

BY CHANGES OF POTENTIAL AND

FREQUENCY OF OSCILLATION

OF THE DiscHarGE, C. C.

Trowbridge (Title), 593

Active

GENERAL INDEX.

VERMONT, THE SERPENTINES AND ~

BELVIDERE MounNrTAIN, V. F.

Marsters (Abstract), 573 7

VISION AND LOCALIZATION DURING

Rapip Eyre Movements, R.

S. Woodworth (Abstract), 615,

617

von Nardroff, E. R., A Pocket Form

OF THE PiEzIC BAROMETER

(Abstract), 584, 585

Vredenburgh, William H., Active

Member, 624

Warburg, Paul M., Active Member,

WaTER, THE MAGNETIC SUSCEP-

TIBILITY OF, A. P. Wills (Ab-

stract), 568 !

Weigle, L. A.. STUDIES IN READING ~

ALoup (Title), 588 ;

Welbourn, Reno B., Active Mem-

ber, 605

Wells, F. Lyman, LiIncuistTic

STANDARDS (Abstract), 615,

616

PERCEPTION OF

LINGUISTIC

Sounps (Title),587

WHALES AND WHALING ON THE

Coast oF NEWFOUNDLAND, F.

A. Lucas (Abstract), 582, 583

Wheeler, W. M., ANTS THAT RAISE

MusHrooms (Abstract), 567,

568

Recording Secretary, 628

White, Horace, Active Member,

578

Williams, G. A., cited, 509

Wills, A. P., THE Macnetic SuscEP-

TIBILITY OF WATER Gxeetnce |

568

Wilson, E. B., OBSERVATIONS ON |

THE CHROMOSOMES IN HpMIP-

THERA (Abstract), 606

Wilson, J. H., Active Member, 563

Tur PLEISTOCENE BEDS OF SAN-

KATY Heap, NANTUCKET (Ab-

stract), 594

THE GLACIAL GEOLOGY oF Nan-

TUCKET AND CaPE Cop (Ab-

stract), 625

Wood, Mrs. Cynthia A.,

Memiber, 589

Woodworth, R. S., and Bruner, F.

G., Cotor PREFERENCES (Ab-

stract), 569, 570

Active

GENERAL INDEX. 697

ANTHROPOMETRIC WORK AT THE

St. Louis Exposition (Ab-

stract), 576, 577

Woodworth, R. S., Vision anp Lo-

CALIZATION DURING RAPID EYE

Movements (Abstract), 615,

617

Wunpt’s PHILOSOPHY, RADICAL

EMPIRICISM AND, Charles H.

Judd (Abstract), 569, 572

de Ybarra, A. M. Fernandez, Ac-

tive Member, 603

ZIRCON FROM NEAR LAWTON, OKLA-

HOMA, ON, George F. Kunz

(Title), 573

PUBLICATIONS

OF THE

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

[Lyceum of Natural History 1818-1876]

The publications of the Academy consist of two series, viz:—

(1) The Annals (octavo series), established in 1823, contain

the scientific contributions and reports of researches, together with

A volume of the Annals will in general coincide with the

calendar year and will be distributed in parts. The price of cur-

rent issues is one dollar per part or three dollars per volume.

Author’s reprints are issued as soon as the separate papers are

printed, the dates appearing above the title of each paper.

. (2) The Memoirs (quarto series), established in 1895, are

issued at irregular intervals. It is intended that each volume shall

be devoted to monographs relating to some particular department

of science. Volume I is devoted to Astronomical Memoirs, Volume

II, to Zodlogical Memoirs, etc. The price is one dollar per part,

as issued.

All publications will be sent free to Fellows and Active Mem-

bers. The Annals will be sent to Honorary and Corresponding

Members desiring them.

Publication of the Transactions of the Academy was discon-

tinued with the issue of Volume XVI, 1898, and merged in the

Annals.

Subscriptions and inquiries concerning current and back num-

bers of any of the publications of the Academy should be addressed to

THE LIBRARIAN

New York Academy of Sciences

American Museum of Natural History

New York